7UM62 Iec

Preface
Table of Contents
Introduction 1
SIPROTEC
Functions 2
Installation and Commissioning 3
Multifunction Generator,
Motor and Transformer
Technical Data 4
Protection Relay Appendix A
7UM62 Index
V4.1
Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Liability Statement Copyright
We have checked the text of this manual against the Copyright © Siemens AG 2002. All rights reserved.
hardware and software described. Exclusions and de- Dissemination or reproduction of this document, or evalu-
viations cannot be ruled out; we accept no liability for ation and communication of its contents, is not authorized
lack of total agreement. except where expressly permitted. Violations are liable for
The information in this manual is checked periodically, damages. All rights reserved, particularly for the purposes
and necessary corrections will be included in future of patent application or trademark registration.
editions. We appreciate any suggested improvements.
Registered trademarks
We reserve the right to make technical improvements SIPROTEC, SIMATIC®, SIMATIC NET ®, SINAUT ®, SI-
without notice. CAM®, and DIGSI® are registered trademarks of Siemens
AG. Other designations in this manual may be trademarks
Release V4.10.01
that if used by third parties for their own purposes may vi-
olate the rights of the owner.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Manual No. C53000-G1176-C149-3

Preface
Purpose of This This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and placing into service
Manual of the device. In particular, one will find:
• Information regarding customizing of the device and descriptions of device
functions and settings → Chapter 2;
• Instructions for mounting and commissioning → Chapter 3;
• Instructions for mounting and commissioning → Chapter 4;
• As well as a compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in the
Appendix A.
For general information on the operation and configuration of SIPROTEC® 4 devices,
please refer to theSIPROTEC® 4 System Manual (Order No.: E50417–H1176–C151).
Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, personnel concerned with

adjustment, checking, and service of selective protective equipment, automatic and
control facilities, and personnel of electrical facilities and power plants.
Applicability of This manual is valid for: SIPROTEC® 4 7UM62 Multifunction Generator, Motor and
This Manual Transformer Protections; firmware version 4.1.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical
equipment for use within certain voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 73/23/EEC).
This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with
Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 50081
and EN 50082 for EMC directive, and with the standard EN 60255–6 for the low-
voltage directive.
The product conforms with the international standard of the series IEC 60255 and the
German standard DIN 57435 /Part 303 (corresponds to VDE 0435/Part 303).
This product is UL–certified with the data as stated in Section 4.1:
IND. CONT. EQ. IND. CONT. EQ.

TYPE 1 TYPE 1
69CA
7UM62 Manual i
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Preface
Additional Support For questions regarding SIPROTEC® 4 devices, please contact your Siemens
representative.
Training Courses Individual course offerings may be found in our Training Catalog, or questions can be
directed to our training center. Please contact your Siemens representative.
Instructions and The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
Warnings
DANGER
means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will
occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
WARNING
occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
Caution
occur if safety precautions are disregarded. This manual describes the functions,
operation, installation, and placing into service of the device.
Instruction
is an important piece of information regarding the product or the part of the manual
that deserves special attention.
WARNING
During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high
voltage. Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from
improper behavior.
Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this
equipment. These personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service
procedures described in this manual, as well as with safety regulations.
Prerequisites to proper and safe operation of this product are proper transport, proper
storage, setup, installation, operation, and maintenance of the product, as well as
careful operation and servicing of the device within the scope of the warnings and
instructions of this manual.
In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage
equipment (e.g. ANSI, IEC, EN, or other national or international regulations) must be
observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment
damage.
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
Prerequisites to proper and safe operation of this product are proper transport, proper
storage, setup, installation, operation, and maintenance of the product, as well as
careful operation and servicing of the device within the scope of the warnings and
instructions of this manual.
G Training and instruction (or other qualification) for switching, grounding, and
designating devices and systems.
G Training and instruction (or other qualification) for switching, grounding, and
designating devices and systems.
G First aid training.
ii 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Preface
Typographic and The following text formats are used to identify concepts giving device information
Graphical described by the text flow:
Conventions
Parameter names, or identifiers for configuration or function parameters that appear
in the device display or on the screen of a PC (with DIGSI® 4) are shown in mono-
script (same point size) bold text. This also applies to header bars for selection menus.
Parameter conditions, or possible settings of parameters that appear in the
device display or on the screen of a PC (with DIGSI® 4), are additionally shown in italic
style. This also applies to header bars for selection menus.
“Annunciations”, or identifiers for information produced by the device or required
by other devices or from the switch-gear is shown in mono-script (same point size) and
placed into quotation marks.
For diagrams in which the identifier type results from the representation itself, text
conventions may differ from the above-mentioned.
The following symbols are used in diagrams:
GND Fault device-internal (logical) input signal
GND Fault device-internal (logical) input signal
IL1 internal input signal of an analog quantity

F#
>Release
external binary input signal with function number F# (binary input,
respective annunciation to the device)
F#
external binary input signal with function number F# (binary input,
Dev. Trip
from device)
Parameter address
Parameter name
1234 FUNCTION example of a parameter switch FUNCTION with address 1234 and
On
possible conditions On and Off
Off
Parameter Conditions
Input signal of an analog quantity
≥1 OR OR gate
& AND gate
Signal inversion
7UM62 Manual iii

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Preface
=1
Exclusive–OR gate: output is active, if only one
of the inputs is active
=
Coincidence gate: output is active, if both inputs
are active simultaneously
Input signals of dynamic quantity
Formation of one output signal from a number

of analog inputs
1706 I2>>
Limit stage with parameter address and

I2> designator
1706 T I2>>
T 0 Timer (pick up delayed) with parameter address

and designator
0 T
Timer (dropout delayed)
Dynamic triggered pulse timer (monoflop)

T
S Q Static memory (RS–flipflop) with setting input (S),

R Q
resetting input (R), output (Q) and inverted
output (Q)
iv 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table of Contents
1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Overall Operation ................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Applications ............................................................................................................................ 5
1.3 Features ................................................................................................................................. 7
2 Functions............................................................................................................................................ 13
2.1 Introduction, Reference Power System ................................................................................ 16
2.2 Functional Scope.................................................................................................................. 18

2.2.1 Description ........................................................................................................................... 18
2.2.2 Setting Hints ......................................................................................................................... 18
2.2.2.1 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 23
2.3 Power System Data 1........................................................................................................... 27

2.3.1 Functional Description .......................................................................................................... 27
2.3.2 Setting Hints ......................................................................................................................... 27
2.3.2.1 Settings 1 ............................................................................................................................. 33
2.3.2.2 List of Information ................................................................................................................ 34
2.4 Setting Groups ..................................................................................................................... 35

2.4.2 Setting Hints ......................................................................................................................... 35
2.4.2.1 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 35
2.4.2.2 Information .......................................................................................................................... 35
2.5 Power System Data 2........................................................................................................... 36

2.5.2 Setting Hints ......................................................................................................................... 36
2.5.2.1 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 36
2.5.2.2 Information ........................................................................................................................... 36
2.6 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51)

with Undervoltage Seal-In38
2.6.2 Setting Hints ......................................................................................................................... 39
2.6.2.1 Settings for the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Stage I>)......................................... 40
2.6.2.2 Information from Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Stage I>)....................................... 41
2.7 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67)

with Direction Detection........................................................................................................ 42
7UM62 Manual v
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table of Contents
2.7.2 Setting Hints ......................................................................................................................... 44

2.7.2.1 Settings for the I>> Stage of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection ............................... 47
2.7.2.2 Information for the I>> stage of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection .......................... 47
2.8 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) ................................................................ 48

2.8.2 Setting Hints ......................................................................................................................... 52
2.8.2.1 Settings of the Inverse O/C Time Protection ........................................................................ 53
2.8.2.2 Information for the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection ..................................................... 54
2.9 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) ............................................................................... 55

2.9.2 Setting Hints ......................................................................................................................... 59
2.9.2.1 Thermal Overload Protection Settings.................................................................................. 63
2.9.2.2 Information List for the Thermal Overload Protection ........................................................... 64
2.10 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46)............................................. 65

2.10.2 Setting Hints ......................................................................................................................... 67
2.10.2.1 Settings of the Unbalanced Load Protection ........................................................................ 69
2.10.2.2 Information for the Unbalanced Load Protection .................................................................. 70
2.11 Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) ............................................................................ 71

2.11.2 Setting Hints ......................................................................................................................... 72
2.11.2.1 Settings of the Startup Overcurrent Protection ..................................................................... 74
2.11.2.2 Information for the Startup Overcurrent Protection............................................................... 74
2.12 Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T)......................................................................... 75

2.12.1.1 Protected Object Generator or Motor: Particularities............................................................ 77
2.12.1.2 Protected Object Transformer: Particularities....................................................................... 78
2.12.1.3 Evaluation of Measured Quantities....................................................................................... 81
2.12.2 Setting Hints ......................................................................................................................... 89
2.12.2.1 Differential Protection for Generators and Motors ................................................................ 89
2.12.2.2 Differential Protection for Transformers................................................................................ 91
2.12.2.3 Settings of the Differential Protection ................................................................................... 95
2.12.2.4 Information for the Differential Protection ............................................................................. 96
2.13 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN, TN)........................................................ 98

2.13.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 103
2.13.2.1 Settings of the Earth Current Differential Protection........................................................... 105
2.13.2.2 Information for the Earth Current Differential Protection..................................................... 105
2.14 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40)......................................................... 106

2.14.1 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 106
2.14.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 109
2.14.2.1 Settings of the Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection ................................................. 113
2.14.2.2 Information for the Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection .......................................... 114
2.15 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R)............................................................................... 115

2.15.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 116
vi 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table of Contents
2.15.2.1 Settings of the Reverse Power Protection.......................................................................... 117

2.15.2.2 Information for the Reverse Power Protection.................................................................... 118
2.16 Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F).................................................................. 119

2.16.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 120
2.16.2.1 Settings of the Forward Active Power Supervision............................................................. 120
2.16.2.2 Information for the Forward Power Supervision ................................................................. 121
2.17 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21)........................................................................................ 122

2.17.1.1 Pickup................................................................................................................................. 122
2.17.1.2 Determination of the Short–Circuit Impedance................................................................... 123
2.17.1.3 Tripping Characteristic........................................................................................................ 125
2.17.1.4 Tripping Logic ..................................................................................................................... 126
2.17.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 128
2.17.3 Power Swing Blocking ........................................................................................................ 131
2.17.3.1 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 132
2.17.3.2 Settings of the Impedance Protection................................................................................. 135
2.17.3.3 Information from the Impedance Protection ....................................................................... 135
2.18 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) ....................................................................................... 137

2.18.1.1 Measuring Principle ............................................................................................................ 137
2.18.1.2 Out-of-Step Logic ............................................................................................................... 139
2.18.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 142
2.18.2.1 Settings of the Out-of-Step Protection................................................................................ 146
2.18.2.2 Information for the Out-of-Step Protection.......................................................................... 147
2.19 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) .................................................................................... 148

2.19.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 149
2.19.2.1 Settings of the Undervoltage Protection ............................................................................. 150
2.19.2.2 Information for the Undervoltage Protection....................................................................... 150
2.20 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) ...................................................................................... 151

2.20.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 151
2.20.2.1 Settings of the Overvoltage Protection ............................................................................... 152
2.20.2.2 Information for the Overvoltage Protection......................................................................... 152
2.21 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81)......................................................................................... 154

2.21.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 155
2.21.2.1 Settings for the Frequency Protection ................................................................................ 157
2.21.2.2 Information for Frequency Protection ................................................................................. 157
2.22 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) ............................................................... 159

2.22.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 161
2.22.2.1 Settings of the Overexcitation Protection ........................................................................... 163
2.22.2.2 Information from the Overexcitation Protection .................................................................. 163
2.23 Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) .............................................................. 164
7UM62 Manual vii

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table of Contents

2.23.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 165
2.23.2.1 Settings of the Inverse Undervoltage Protection ................................................................ 166
2.23.2.2 Information for the Inverse Undervoltage Protection .......................................................... 166
2.24 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) ................................................... 167

2.24.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 168
2.24.2.1 Settings of the Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection....................................................... 170
2.24.2.2 Information for the Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection................................................. 171
2.25 Jump of Voltage Vector ...................................................................................................... 172

2.25.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 174
2.25.2.1 Settings of the Vector Jump Detection ............................................................................... 175
2.25.2.2 Information for the Vector Jump Detection ......................................................................... 176
2.26 90–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) .............................................. 177
2.26.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 181
2.26.2.1 Settings of the 90% Stator Earth Fault Protection .............................................................. 183
2.26.2.2 Information for the 90% Stator Earth Fault Protection ........................................................ 184
2.27 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R)........................................................... 185

2.27.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 187
2.27.2.1 Settings of the Sensitive Earth Fault Protection ................................................................. 188
2.27.2.2 Information for the Sensitive Earth Current Detection ....................................................... 188
2.28 100–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics

(ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) ................................................................................................. 189
2.28.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 191
2.28.2.1 Settings of the 100–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics ........................ 192
2.28.2.2 Information for the 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics .................... 193
2.29 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G - 100%)..... 194
2.29.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 197
2.29.2.1 Settings of the 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection ........................................................... 199
2.29.2.2 Information for the 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection..................................................... 200
2.30 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) ................................................................... 201

2.30.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 203
2.30.2.1 Settings of the Rotor Earth Fault Protection ....................................................................... 204
2.30.2.2 Information for the Rotor Earth Fault Protection ................................................................. 205
2.31 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square

Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R - 1 to 3 Hz) .................................................................. 206
2.31.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 211
2.31.2.1 Settings of the Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection........................................................ 212
viii 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table of Contents
2.31.2.2 Information for the Sensitive Earth Fault Protection ........................................................... 212
2.32 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) ....................................................................... 213

2.32.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 215
2.32.2.1 Settings of the Motor Starting Time Supervision ................................................................ 216
2.32.2.2 Information for the Motor Starting Time Supervision .......................................................... 216
2.33 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor)..................................................................... 217

2.33.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 220
2.33.2.1 Settings of the Restart Inhibit for Motors ............................................................................ 223
2.33.2.2 Information for the Motor Restart Inhibit ............................................................................. 224
2.34 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) ............................................................................ 225

2.34.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 227
2.34.2.1 Settings for Breaker Failure Protection............................................................................... 228
2.34.2.2 Information for the Breaker Failure Protection.................................................................... 229
2.35 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27).............................................................................. 230

2.35.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 231
2.35.2.1 Settings of the Inadvertent Energizing Protection .............................................................. 232
2.35.2.2 Information for the Inadvertent Energizing Function........................................................... 232
2.36 DC Voltage/DC Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC) ............................................... 234

2.36.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 236
2.36.2.1 Settings of the DC Voltage Protection ................................................................................ 238
2.36.2.2 Information from the DC Voltage Protection....................................................................... 238
2.37 Analog Outputs................................................................................................................... 239

2.37.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 239
2.37.3 Settings of the Analog Outputs........................................................................................... 240
2.38 Measured Value Monitoring Functions ............................................................................... 241

2.38.1.1 Hardware Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 241
2.38.1.2 Software Monitoring............................................................................................................ 243
2.38.1.3 Monitoring of External Current Transformer Circuits .......................................................... 243
2.38.1.4 Fuse Failure Monitoring...................................................................................................... 245
2.38.1.5 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions.......................................................... 247
2.38.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 249
2.38.2.1 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 250
2.38.2.2 Information of the Monitoring Functions ............................................................................. 251
2.38.2.3 Sum Events of the Monitoring Functions............................................................................ 252
2.39 Trip Circuit Supervision ...................................................................................................... 254

2.39.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 258
2.39.2.1 Settings for the Trip Circuit Supervision ............................................................................. 260
7UM62 Manual ix
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table of Contents
2.39.2.2 Information.......................................................................................................................... 260
2.40 Threshold Supervision ........................................................................................................ 261

2.40.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 263
2.40.2.1 Settings of the Threshold Supervision ................................................................................ 264
2.40.2.2 Information for the Threshold Supervision.......................................................................... 266
2.41 External Trip Coupling ........................................................................................................ 267

2.41.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 267
2.41.2.1 Settings............................................................................................................................... 268
2.41.2.2 Information for the Function Control ................................................................................... 268
2.42 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes ........................................................................... 270

2.42.2 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 271
2.42.2.1 Settings of the Temperature Detection Function ................................................................ 273
2.42.2.2 Information for the Temperature Detection Function ......................................................... 277
2.43 Inversion of Phase Sequence (Phase Sequence Reversal)............................................... 279

2.43.2 Setting Hint ......................................................................................................................... 280
2.44 Protection Function Logic ................................................................................................... 281

2.44.1.1 Processing Tripping Logic .................................................................................................. 281
2.44.2 Processing Tripping Logic .................................................................................................. 282
2.44.2.1 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 282
2.44.2.2 Settings for the Tripping Logic ............................................................................................ 283
2.44.3 Fault Display on the LEDs/LCD .......................................................................................... 283
2.44.3.1 Principle of Function ........................................................................................................... 283
2.44.3.2 Settings............................................................................................................................... 283
2.44.4 Statistical Counters............................................................................................................. 284
2.44.4.1 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 284
2.44.4.2 Setting/Resetting ................................................................................................................ 284
2.44.4.3 Information for the Statistical Counter ............................................................................... 285
2.45 Auxiliary Functions.............................................................................................................. 286

2.45.1 Processing of Messages..................................................................................................... 286
2.45.1.1 Operational Annunciations.................................................................................................. 287
2.45.1.2 Fault Annunciations ............................................................................................................ 287
2.45.1.3 General Interrogation.......................................................................................................... 288
2.45.1.4 Spontaneous Annunciations ............................................................................................... 288
2.45.1.5 Statistical Counters............................................................................................................. 288
2.45.2 Measurements .................................................................................................................... 289
2.45.3 Oscillographic Fault Recording (Waveform Capture) ......................................................... 292
2.45.4 Date and Time Stamping .................................................................................................... 293
2.45.5 Commissioning Aids ........................................................................................................... 294
2.45.5.1 Influencing Information on the System Interface During Test Operation ............................ 294
2.45.5.2 Testing the System Interface .............................................................................................. 294
2.45.5.3 Testing the States of the Binary Inputs/Outputs ................................................................. 295
2.45.5.4 Creating a Test Oscillographic Recording .......................................................................... 295
x 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table of Contents
2.45.6 Setting Hints ....................................................................................................................... 295

2.45.6.1 Settings for Oscillographic Fault Recording ....................................................................... 296
2.45.6.2 Information for the Oscillographic Fault Recording ............................................................ 296
2.45.6.3 Information for Minimum and Maximum Values ................................................................. 297
2.46 Breaker Control .................................................................................................................. 298

2.46.1 Types of Commands .......................................................................................................... 299
2.46.2 Steps in the Command Sequence...................................................................................... 299
2.46.3 Interlocking ......................................................................................................................... 300
2.46.3.1 Interlocked / Non-Interlocked Switching ............................................................................. 301
2.46.4 Recording and Acknowledgement of Commands .............................................................. 308
3 Installation and Commissioning .................................................................................................... 309
3.1 Installation and Connections .............................................................................................. 310

3.1.1 Installation .......................................................................................................................... 310
3.1.2 Connections ....................................................................................................................... 314
3.1.3 Hardware Modifications ...................................................................................................... 316
3.1.3.1 General............................................................................................................................... 316
3.1.3.2 Disassembling the Device .................................................................................................. 318
3.1.3.3 Switching Elements on Printed Circuit Boards ................................................................... 321
3.1.3.4 Interface Modules ............................................................................................................... 332
3.1.3.5 To Reassemble the Device: ............................................................................................... 335
3.2 Checking Connections and System (Plant) Integration ...................................................... 336

3.2.1 Checking the Data Connections of Serial Interfaces .......................................................... 336
3.2.2 Checking the Device Connections...................................................................................... 338
3.2.3 Checking the Integration in the Plant.................................................................................. 343
3.2.3.1 General Hints ..................................................................................................................... 343
3.3 Commissioning ................................................................................................................... 346

3.3.1 Test Mode and Blocking Data Transmission ...................................................................... 347
3.3.2 Testing the System Interface.............................................................................................. 347
3.3.3 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................ 349
3.3.4 Testing the Breaker Failure Scheme .................................................................................. 351
3.3.5 Checking the Analog Outputs............................................................................................. 352
3.3.6 Testing User-Defined Functions (CFC) .............................................................................. 352
3.3.7 Checking the Rotor Earth Fault Protection at Stand-Still.................................................... 352
3.3.7.1 Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, fn) .................................................................................... 352
3.3.7.2 Rotor Earth Fault Protection (1 to 3 Hz) ............................................................................. 354
3.3.8 Checking the 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection ............................................................ 356
3.3.9 Checking the DC Voltage/DC Current Circuit..................................................................... 358
3.3.10 Trip/Close Tests for Primary Equipment............................................................................. 359
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator ............................................................. 360

3.4.1 General Hints ..................................................................................................................... 360
3.4.2 Checking the Current Circuits............................................................................................. 364
3.4.3 Checking the Differential Protection ................................................................................... 366
3.4.4 Checking the Earth Current Differential Protection............................................................. 368
3.4.5 Checking the Voltage Circuits ............................................................................................ 373
7UM62 Manual xi
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table of Contents
3.4.6 Checking the Stator Earth Fault Protection ........................................................................ 374

3.4.6.1 Unit Connection .................................................................................................................. 375
3.4.6.2 Busbar Connection ............................................................................................................. 378
3.4.7 Testing the 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection ............................................................... 382
3.4.8 Checking the Sensitive Earth Fault Protection when Used
for Rotor Earth Fault Protection .......................................................................................... 384
3.4.9 Checking the Rotor Earth Fault Protection During Operation............................................. 384
3.4.9.1 Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, fn) .................................................................................... 384
3.4.9.2 Rotor Earth Fault Protection (1 to 3 Hz) ............................................................................. 385
3.4.10 Tests with the Generator Connected to the Network.......................................................... 386
3.4.10.1 Checking the Correct Connection Polarity.......................................................................... 386
3.4.10.2 Measurement of Motoring Power (Reverse Power) and Angle Error Correction................ 386
3.4.10.3 Calibrating the Reverse Power Protection.......................................................................... 387
3.4.10.4 Checking the Underexcitation Protection............................................................................ 388
3.4.10.5 Checking the Directional Function of the Overcurrent Time Protection.............................. 389
3.4.11 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings................................................................................. 389
3.5 Final Preparation of the Device .......................................................................................... 391
4 Technical Data.................................................................................................................................. 393
4.1 General Device Data .......................................................................................................... 395

4.1.1 Analog Inputs...................................................................................................................... 395
4.1.2 Power Supply...................................................................................................................... 396
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs .................................................................................................. 396
4.1.4 Communications Interfaces ................................................................................................ 397
4.1.5 Electrical Tests ................................................................................................................... 401
4.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests..................................................................................................... 403
4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests .......................................................................................................... 403
4.1.8 Service Conditions.............................................................................................................. 404
4.1.9 Certifications ....................................................................................................................... 404
4.1.10 Construction........................................................................................................................ 405
4.2 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50, 67) .......................................................... 406
4.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51, 67)........................................................... 407
4.4 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) ............................................................................. 412
4.5 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46)........................................... 414
4.6 Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) .......................................................................... 416
4.7 Differential Protection for Generators and Motors (ANSI 87G/87M)................................... 417
4.8 Differential Protection for Transformers (ANSI 87T)........................................................... 419
4.9 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN/TN)....................................................... 422
4.10 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40)......................................................... 423
4.11 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R)............................................................................... 424
4.12 Forward Power Supervision (ANSI 32F)............................................................................. 425
xii 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table of Contents
4.13 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21)........................................................................................ 426
4.14 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) ....................................................................................... 427
4.15 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) .................................................................................... 428
4.16 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) ...................................................................................... 430
4.17 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81)......................................................................................... 431
4.18 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) .............................................................. 432
4.19 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection (ANSI 81R) ........................................................... 434
4.20 Jump of Voltage Vector ...................................................................................................... 435
4.21 90–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) .............................................. 436
4.22 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) .......................................................... 437

(ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) ................................................................................................. 438
4.24 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G, –100 %)... 439
4.25 Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, fn, ANSI 64R) .................................................................. 440
4.26 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz (ANSI 64R) ..................................... 441
4.27 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) ....................................................................... 442
4.28 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) ...................................................................... 443
4.29 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) ............................................................................ 444
4.30 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50/27)............................................................................... 445
4.31 DC Voltage/DC Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC) ................................................. 446
4.32 Thermoboxes for Temperature Detection........................................................................... 447
4.33 Additional Functions ........................................................................................................... 448
4.34 Operating Ranges of the Protection Functions ................................................................ 455
4.35 Dimensions......................................................................................................................... 457
A Appendix .......................................................................................................................................... 461
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories .............................................................................. 462

A.1.1 Accessories ........................................................................................................................ 464
A.1.1.1 Schematic Diagram of the Accessories.............................................................................. 467
1.1.1.2 Dimensional Drawing of the Accessories ........................................................................... 471
A.2 General Diagrams (IEC) ..................................................................................................... 482

A.2.1 Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation .................................................. 482
A.2.2 Housing for Panel Surface Mounting.................................................................................. 484
A.3 General Diagrams (ANSI)................................................................................................... 486
7UM62 Manual xiii

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table of Contents
A.4 Connection Examples......................................................................................................... 488

A.4.1 Connection Examples for RTD-Box.................................................................................... 498
A.5 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with Primary Load Resistor ...................................... 499
A.5.1 Protection Settings.............................................................................................................. 500
A.5.2 Commissioning ................................................................................................................... 500
A.6 Definition of the Active Power Measurement...................................................................... 502
A.7 Current Transformer Requirements.................................................................................... 504
A.8 Overview of the Masking Features of the User Defined Information .................................. 506
A.8.1 Source: BI, F, C; Destination: BO, LED, C ......................................................................... 506
A.8.2 Destination: Indication Buffer, System Interface................................................................. 510
A.9 Default Settings .................................................................................................................. 511

A.9.1 Binary Inputs....................................................................................................................... 511
A.9.2 Binary Outputs (output relays) ............................................................................................ 511
A.9.3 LED Indicators .................................................................................................................... 514
A.9.4 Function Keys ..................................................................................................................... 514
A.9.5 Establishing a Default Display ............................................................................................ 515
A.9.6 Spontaneous Display Messages ........................................................................................ 515
A.9.7 Pre–Defined CFC Charts.................................................................................................... 516
A.10 Interoperability List.............................................................................................................. 517
A.11 Functions Overview ............................................................................................................ 519
A.12 Settings............................................................................................................................... 522
A.13 List of Information ............................................................................................................... 548
A.14 List of Measured Values ..................................................................................................... 578
A.15 Protocol-Dependent Functions ........................................................................................... 584
Index.................................................................................................................................................. 585
xiv 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Introduction 1
The SIPROTEC® 4 7UM62 devices are introduced in this section. An overview of the
devices is presented in their application, characteristics, and scope of functions.
1.1 Overall Operation 2

1.2 Applications 5
1.3 Features 7
7UM62 Manual 1
C53000-G1176-C149-3
1 Introduction
1.1 Overall Operation
The SIPROTEC® 4 7UM62 is a numerical, multi-functional, protective and control

device equipped with a powerful microprocessor. All tasks, such as the acquisition of
the measured quantities, issuing of commands to circuit breakers and other primary
power system equipment, are processed in a completely digital way. Figure 1-1
illustrates the basic structure of the 7UM62.
Analog Inputs The measuring inputs (MI) section consists of current and voltage transformers. They
convert the signals from the primary transformers to levels appropriate for the internal
processing of the 7UM62.
Eight current inputs are available in the MI section. Three inputs are used on each side
of the protected object for measuring of the phase currents. 2 current inputs are
MI IA AD µC AV
IL1, S1
∩ Error
IL2, S1
Run
IL3, S1
Status
IEE1
IL1, S2 Output
Relays, User-
IL2, S2 Programmable
IL3, S2
LEDs
IEE2 on the Front
Panel, User-
UL1 Programmable
µC
UL2
UL3 Display on
the Front Panel
UN
3 Measuring Front
Transducers To
Operator Interface
PC
# (PC Port)
System To
7 8 9 Serial Interface SCADA
Operator
Control Panel 4 5 6
1 2 3 Rear PC/
ESC ENTER . 0 +/- Service Interface Modem
up to 15 Binary Inputs, Analog Analog

Programmable Outputs pro-
cessing
Uaux. ~ Power Supply
Figure 1-1 Hardware Structure of the Numerical Device 7UM62 (Maximum Configuration)
2 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
1.1 Overall Operation
equipped with sensitive input transformers (IEE) and can measure secondary currents
in the mA range.
A voltage measuring input is provided for each phase-earth voltage (connection to
phase-to-phase voltages and voltage transformers in V connection is possible as
well). A further voltage input (UN) may optionally be used to measure either the
displacement voltage or any other voltage UX (for injected voltage of rotor protection).
The analog-to-digital (AD) stage consists of memory components, a multiplexer, and
an multichannel analog-to-digital converter. The A/D converter processes the analog
signals from the IA stage. The digital signals from the converter are input to the
microcomputer system where they are processed as numerical values in the residing
algorithms.
Microcomputer The actual protection and control functions of the 7UM62 are processed in the
System microcomputer system (µC). Specifically, the µC performs:
− Filtering and preparation of the measured quantities
− Permanent supervision of the measured quantities
− Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual protection functions
− Evaluation of limit values and sequences in time
− Control of signals for the logic functions
− Decision for trip commands
− Signalling of protection behaviour via LED, LCD, relay or serial interface
− Recording of messages and data for events, alarms, faults, and control actions, and
provision of their data for analysis
− Management of the operating system and the associated functions such as data
recording, real-time clock, communications, interfaces, etc.
Adaptation of The frequency of the measured quantities is continuously measured and used for
Sampling determination of the actual sampling frequency. This ensures that the protection
Frequency functions are always processed with algorithms matched to the actual frequency.
Thus, a wide frequency range from 11 Hz to 69 Hz is specified with small frequency
influence.
The sampling frequency adaptation can, however, operate only when at least one a.c.
measured quantity is present at one of the analog inputs, with an amplitude of at least
5 % of rated value (“operational condition 1”).
If no suitable a.c. measured values are present, or if the frequency is below 11 Hz or
above 70 Hz, the relay operates in mode “operational condition 0” (refer to Section
4.34).
Binary Inputs and The µC obtains external information through the binary inputs such as blocking
Outputs commands for protective functions or position indications of circuit breakers. The µC
issues commands to external equipment via the output contacts. These output
commands are generally used to operate circuit breakers or other switching devices.
They can also be connected to other protective devices, annunciators, or external
carrier equipment for use in Pilot-Relaying schemes.
Front Elements Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display screen (LCD) on the front panel provide
information such as messages related to events and functional status of the 7UM62.
7UM62 Manual 3
C53000-G1176-C149-3
1 Introduction
Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD facilitate local
interaction with the 7UM62. All information of the device can be accessed using the
integrated control and numeric keys. The information includes protective and control
settings, operating and fault messages, and metering values (see also SIPROTEC®
4–System Manual). The settings can be modified; the procedures are discussed in
Chapter 2.
Serial Interfaces A serial operator interface (PC port) on the front panel is provided for local
communications with the 7UM62 through a personal computer. Convenient operation
of all functions of the device is possible using the SIPROTEC® 4 operating program
DIGSI® 4.
A separate serial service interface is provided for remote communications via a
modem, or local communications via a substation master computer that is
permanently connected to the 7UM62. DIGSI® 4 is required.
All 7UM62 data can be transferred to a central master or main control system through
the serial system (SCADA) interface. Various protocols and physical arrangements
are available for this interface to suit the particular application.
A fourth interface is provided for time synchronization of the internal clock by
external sources.
Further communications protocols can be realized via additional interface modules.
Analog Outputs/ Depending on the ordering variant and configuration, Port B and D can be equipped
Temperature Input with analog output modules for the output of selected measured values (0 to 20 mA).
If these ports are equipped with input modules (RS485 or optical) instead, tempera-
tures can be fed in from an external temperature detection unit.
Power Supply The 7UM62 can be supplied with any of the common power supply voltages from 24
VDC to 250 VDC. The device can also be supplied with 115 VAC. Momentary dips of
the supply voltage up to 50 ms are bridged by a capacitor (see Technical Data, Sub-
section 4.1.2). Voltage dips can occur, for example, if the voltage supply system
(substation battery) becomes short-circuited or experiences a severe variation in load.
4 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
1.2 Applications
1.2 Applications
SIPROTEC® 7UM62 is a numerical machine protection unit from the “7UM6

Numerical Protection series”. It provides all functions that are necessary for the
protection of generators, motors and transformers. As the scope of functions of the
7UM62 can be customized, it is suited for small, medium-sized and large generators.
It provides the scope of protection functions for the two typical basic applications:
• Bus-bar connection
• Unit connection
7UM62
Busbar connection
7UM62
Unit connection
Figure 1-2 Typical Basic Connections
The integrated differential protection function can be used for longitudinal or

transverse generator differential protection, for protection of the unit transformer or for
overall differential protection.
The scalable software allows to use the device for a wide range of applications, as
function packages can be chosen individually for the application in hand. For instance,
one 7UM62 is sufficient to provide for reliable all-round protection of generators with
a small to medium output (about 5 MW).
Additionally, the device forms the basis for the protection of larger generators. By
adding a 7UM61 (further device of the 7UM6 protection series), all protection
requirements encountered for the smallest to the largest machines can be met. This
permits to implement a consistent concept for backup protection.
Further applications are
• Transformer protection, as the 7UM62 has in addition to differential and overcurrent
protection a large variety of protection functions that allow, for instance, monitoring
of the voltage and frequency load.
• Protection of large synchronous and asynchronous motors.
7UM62 Manual 5
C53000-G1176-C149-3
1 Introduction
Messages and A series of operating messages provides information about conditions in the power
Measured Values; system and the 7UM62 itself. Measurement quantities and values that are calculated
Storage of Data for can be displayed locally and communicated via the serial interfaces.
Fault Recordings
Messages of the 7UM62 can be indicated by a number of programmable LEDs on the
front panel, externally processed through programmable output contacts, and
communicated via the serial interfaces (see “Communication” below). With the help of
the CFC graphic tool (Continous Function Chart), user-defined annunciations and
logical combinations of internal or external signals can also be generated.
During a network fault (fault in the power system), important events and state changes
are stored in a fault annunciation buffer. The instantaneous measured values during
the fault are also stored in the device and are subsequently available for fault analysis.
Communication Serial interfaces are available for communications with external operating, control,
and storage systems.
Operator Interface A serial operator interface on the front panel is provided for local communications with
on Front Panel the through a personal computer. All of the operating and evaluation processes can
be done via this operator interface using the DIGSI® 4 software. These processes
include selecting and modifying the settings, allocation of the binary inputs and
outputs, configuration of the user-definable logic functions, reading the event and fault
data, retrieving the measured values, obtaining the oscillographic fault records,
reading the states of the 7UM62 and the measurement quantities, and issuing control
commands.
Interfaces on Back Further interfaces are located on the back of the 7UM62 — dependent on the version
of the device. Comprehensive communications are possible between these interfaces
and other digital equipment used for operating, control, and data storage.
The service interface can be operated through data lines. Also, a modem can be
connected to this port. Servicing of the substation or plant is possible from a remote
computer with DIGSI® 4.
The system interface is for central communications between the 7UM62 and a control
station. The service interface can be operated through data lines or optical fibres.
Several standard protocols are available:
− IEC 60870–5–103
Integration of the devices into the automation systems SINAUT® LSA and SICAM®
also take place with this profile.
− Profibus DP
This protocol of automation technology allows to transmit annunciations and
measured values.
− Modbus ASCII/RTU
measured values.
− DNP 3.0
measured values.
− It is also possible to provide an analog output (2 x 20 mA) for the output of measured
values.
6 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
1.3 Features
1.3 Features
General Features • Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system.

• Complete digital processing of measured values and control, from the sampling of
the analog input quantities to the initiation of outputs for, as an example, tripping
circuit breakers or other switch-gear devices.
• Complete galvanic and reliable separation between the internal processing circuits
of the 7UM62 and the external measurement, control, and DC supply circuits
because of the design of the analog input transformers, binary inputs and outputs,
and the DC converters.
• Simple device operation using the integrated operator panel or by means of a
connected personal computer running DIGSI® 4.
• Continuous calculation and display of measured quantities.
• Constant monitoring of the measurement quantities, as well as continuous self-
diagnostics covering the hardware and software.
• Storage of operational data, fault data, and oscillographic fault records with
information to be used for analysis and troubleshooting.
• Communication with central control and data storage equipment via serial
interfaces through the choice of data cable, modem, or optical fibers, as an option.
• Battery-buffered real time clock that can be synchronized with an IRIG-B (or
DCF77) signal, binary input signal, or system interface command.
• Recording of circuit breaker statistics including the number of trip signals sent and
the accumulated, interrupted currents of each pole of the circuit breaker.
• Tracking of operating hours (time when load is supplied) of the equipment being
protected.
• Commissioning aids such as connection check, status information of binary inputs
and relay outputs, and start of a fault record.
Definite-Time- • Two instantaneous (Definite-Time) overcurrent elements for phase protection;

Overcurrent
• Undervoltage seal-in for synchronous machines, the excitation voltage of which is
Protection
derived from the machine terminals;
(I>) with
Undervoltage Seal- • Optionally additional directional determination with the I>>–stage;
In
• Blocking capability for reverse-interlocking bus-bar protection.
Inverse-Time- • Common ANSI and IEC time overcurrent curves are available;
Overcurrent
• Optionally voltage controlled or voltage restraint alteration of pick-up value during
Protection
undervoltage;
• Undervoltage influence can be blocked by fuse failure monitor or via binary input,
e.g. by a voltage transformer m.c.b.
Thermal Overload • Temperature rise of the protected equipment is calculated using a thermal
Protection homogeneous model that takes into account energy entering the equipment and
energy losses. Thermal overload protection has full memory capability;
• Adjustable warning levels based on temperature rise and current magnitude;
• input of cooling medium or ambient temperature possible.
7UM62 Manual 7
C53000-G1176-C149-3
1 Introduction
Unbalanced Load • Evaluation of negative sequence component of the three phase currents;
Protection
• Alarm stage when a set unbalanced load is exceeded;
• Thermal replica for rotor temperature rise with adjustable negative sequence factor
K and adjustable time for cool down;
• High-speed trip stage for large unbalanced loads (can be used for short-circuit
protection).
Startup • I> stage for lower speed ranges (e.g. startup of generators with frequency starting
Overcurrent converter).
Protection
Differential Used for generator, motor or transformer differential protection

Protection
• Tripping characteristic with current restraint;
• High degree of sensitivity;
• Insensitivity to DC components and current transformer saturation;
• High degree of stability even with different degrees of CT saturation;
• Restraint feature against high inrush currents with 2nd harmonics;
• Restraint feature against transient and steady-state fault currents with 3rd or 5th
harmonics;
• High-speed tripping in case of high-current faults;
• Integrated matching of transformer vector group;
• Integrated matching of transformation ratio with consideration of different c.t. rated
currents.
Earth Current • Tripping characteristic with restraining current;

Differential
• Variable selection of measured quantities for all normal plant conditions;
Protection
• High sensitivity;
• Additional stabilisation measures against overfunction at external faults.
Underexcitation • Conductance measurement from positive sequence components;

Protection
• Multi-step characteristic for steady-state and dynamic stability limits;
• Detection of the excitation voltage.
Reverse Power • Calculation of power from positive sequence components;

Protection
• Highly sensitive active power measurement (detection of small motoring powers
even with small power factor cos ϕ, angle error correction);
• Insensitive to power swings;
• Independent long-time stage and short-time stage with stop valve tripped.
Forward Power • Calculation of power from positive sequence components;

Supervision
• Supervision of over-power (P>) and/or under-power (P<) with individually
adjustable power limits;
• Optionally high-speed or high-accuracy power measurement.
8 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
1.3 Features
Impedance • Phase selective overcurrent fault detection with undervoltage seal-in (for
Protection synchronous machines which take their excitation voltage from the terminal
voltage);
• 2 impedance zones, 1 overreach zone for zone extension (controlled via binary
input), 4 time stages;
• Polygonal tripping characteristics;
• Additional power swing blocking.
Out-of-Step • Based on the well-proven impedance measurement method;

Protection
• Measurement release by the positive sequence current, and measurement blocking
by the negative sequence current;
• Evaluation of the rate of change of the complex impedance vector;
• Optimum matching to the system conditions by selectable slope of the
characteristic;
• Reliable distinction between the power swing centre being in the system or in the
generator unit area.
Undervoltage • Two undervoltage elements, measuring positive sequence voltage.

Protection
• Additional stage with settable, voltage-dependent time characteristic.
Overvoltage • Two-stage overvoltage measurement, evaluation of the highest of the three

Protection voltages;
• Optionally with phase-to-phase voltages or with phase-to-earth voltages.
Frequency • Four elements that are independently adjustable for function - underfrequency or
Protection overfrequency, pickup, and time delay;
• Insensitive to harmonics and abrupt phase angle changes;
• Adjustable undervoltage blocking.
Overexcitation • Calculation of the ratio U/f;

Protection
• Adjustable warning and tripping stage;
• Standard characteristic or either optional characteristic selectable for calculation of
the thermal stress.
Rate-of-Frequency- • Monitors whether the frequency exceeds (df/dt>) and/or falls below (df/dt<) a set
Change Protection limit value, with 4 individually settable limit values or delay times;
• Variable measuring windows;
• Coupling to frequency protection pickup;
• Settable undervoltage threshold.
Jump of Voltage • Sensitive phase jump detection to be used for network disconnection.
Vector
90–%–Stator Earth • For machines in unit connection and for machines directly connected to busbars;
Fault Protection
7UM62 Manual 9
C53000-G1176-C149-3
1 Introduction
• Measurement of displacement voltage at the machine via the neutral transformers

or earthing transformer or by calculation from phase-to-earth voltages;
• Highly sensitive earth current detection, optional with or without directional
determination with zero sequence components (I0, U0);
• With adjustable slope of directional characteristic;
• Discrimination of the earth-faulted phase.
Sensitive Earth • Two sensitive earth fault instantaneous overcurrent elements: IEE>> and IEE>;
Current Protection
• Pickup currents are adjustable and can be set very sensitive (as low as 2 mA);
• Can be used for stator earth fault or rotor earth fault detection;
• Measured circuit monitoring when used for rotor earth fault protection.
100–%–Stator Earth • Detection of the 3rd harmonic of the voltage at the starpoint or open delta winding
Fault Protection of an earthing transformer;
with 3rd Harmonics
• In addition to the 90-%-stator earth fault protection there is a protection of the entire
stator winding (protective range 100 %).
100–%–Stator Earth • Evaluation of the 20 Hz measurement (7XT33 and 7XT34);

Fault Protection
• Warning and trip stage R< and R<<;
with 20 Hz Voltage
Injection • Trip stage with earth current;.
• High sensitivity also at large stator earth capacitances.
Rotor Earth Fault • 100 % protection for the entire excitation circuit;
Protection
• Symmetrical capacitive coupling of a system-frequency AC voltage into the
excitation circuit;
• with consideration of operational earth impedances and brush resistances;
• Calculation of the fault resistance from the total impedance;
• Alarm stage and tripping stage directly adjustable in Ohms (rotor-earth resistance);
• Measurement circuit supervision with alarm output.
Sensitive Rotor • Evaluation of the 1 to 3 Hz square-wave voltage injected into the rotor circuit
Earth Fault (7XT71);
Protection with
• Warning and trip stage R< and R<<;
1 to 3 Hz Square
Wave Voltage • High sensitivity (max. 80 KΩ);
Injection
• Integrated test function.
Motor Starting Time • Current dependent tripping based on an evaluation of the motor starting current;
Supervision
• Blocked rotor protection.
Restart Inhibit for • Rotor temperature is calculated based on the stator currents;
Motors
• Start-up is permitted only if the rotor has sufficient thermal reserves for a complete
start-up;
• Calculation of waiting time (till automatic reclosure is available);
10 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
1.3 Features
• Different prolongation of cool-down time constants for rest/operation period is taken

into consideration;
• Disabling of the start inhibit is possible if an emergency start-up is required.
Breaker Failure • Breaker failure condition determined by current flow after a trip signal has been
Protection issued, or the breaker position indication (binary input) can be evaluated;
• Breaker failure protection initiated by the tripping of any integrated protective
element that trips the circuit breaker (internal start);
• Initiation possible through a binary input from an external protective device
(external start).
Inadvertent • The inadvertent accidental energizing protection serves to limit damages by

Energization accidental connection of the standing generator by a fast actuation of the generator
breaker;
• Evaluation of negative sequence component of the three phase currents;
• Released by operational condition check, undervoltage supervision, and fuse
failure monitor.
DC Voltage/DC • DC voltage detection via integrated isolating amplifier (measuring transducer);

Current Protection
• Suited for measurement of small DC currents;
• Can be set for overvoltage (overcurrent) or undervoltage (undercurrent);
• Optional average value or true r.m.s. value formation; the latter is suited to AC
voltage measurement.
Analog Outputs • Output of up to four analog operational measured values (depending on the variant
ordered).
Threshold • 6 freely assignable indications for threshold supervision;

Supervision
• Realization of fast supervision tasks with CFC.
Temperature • Detection of any ambient or coolant temperature using external thermoboxes and
Detection Using external temperature detectors (RTDs).
Thermoboxes
Phase Rotation • Selectable L1, L2, L3 or L1, L3, L2 with a setting (static) or binary input (dynamic).
Changing
User-Defined • Internal and external signals can be logically combined to establish user-defined
Functions logic functions;
• All common logic functions are available for programming (AND, OR, NOT,
Exclusive OR, etc.);
• Time delays and limit value inquiries are available;
• Processing of measured values, including zero suppression, adding a knee
characteristic for a transducer input, and live-zero monitoring.
7UM62 Manual 11
C53000-G1176-C149-3
1 Introduction
Breaker Control • Circuit breakers can be opened and closed via the programmable function keys on
the front panel, through the SCADA, or through the front operator interface using a
personal computer with DIGSI® 4);
• Circuit breakers are monitored via the breaker auxiliary contacts;
• Plausibility monitoring of the circuit breaker position and check of interlocking
conditions.
Measuring • If the 3 measuring transducers provided in the unit are not needed by the protection
Transducers functions, they can be used to connect any type of analog signals (± 10 V, ± 20 mA);
• Threshold processing and logical linking of measurement signals possible.
Monitoring • Availability of the 7UM62 is greatly increased because of self-monitoring of the

Functions internal measurement circuits, power supply, hardware, and software;
• Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits are monitored
using summation and symmetry check techniques;
• Trip circuit monitoring;
• Phase Rotation.
n
12 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions 2
This chapter describes the numerous functions available on the SIPROTEC® 7UM62
relay. The setting options for each function are explained, including instructions to
determine setting values and formulae where required.
2.1 Introduction, Reference Power System 16

2.2 Functional Scope 18
2.3 Power System Data 1 27
2.4 Setting Groups 35
2.5 Power System Data 2 36
2.6 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51) with Undervoltage
Seal-In 38
2.7 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67) with Direction
Detection 42
2.8 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) 48
2.9 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) 55
2.10 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) 65
2.11 Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) 71
2.12 Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T) 75
2.13 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN, TN) 98
2.14 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) 106
2.15 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R) 115
2.16 Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F) 119
2.17 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) 122
2.18 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) 137
2.19 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) 148
2.20 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) 151
2.21 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) 154
2.22 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) 159
2.23 Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) 164
2.24 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) 167
2.25 Jump of Voltage Vector 172
7UM62 Manual 13
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.26 90–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) 177
2.27 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) 185
2.28 100–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN
3rd Harm.) 189
2.29 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G
- 100%) 194
2.30 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) 201
2.31 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage
Injection (ANSI 64R - 1 to 3 Hz) 206
2.32 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) 213
2.33 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) 217
2.34 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) 225
2.35 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27) 230
2.36 DC Voltage/DC Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC) 234
2.37 Analog Outputs 239
2.38 Measured Value Monitoring Functions 241
2.39 Trip Circuit Supervision 254
2.40 Threshold Supervision 261
2.41 External Trip Coupling 267
2.42 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes 270
2.43 Inversion of Phase Sequence (Phase Sequence Reversal) 279
2.44 Protection Function Logic 281
2.45 Auxiliary Functions 286
2.46 Breaker Control 298
14 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Regionalization The SIPROTEC® 7UM62 protective relays are offered in regional versions. The user
should purchase only the functional scope that is needed. The prepared functions are
adapted to the technical requirements of the regions.
Table 2-1 Regionalization
Function Region DE Region Worldwide Region US

Germany Worldwide USA
Language German English American English
Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz/ 60 Hz 60 Hz
Default setting 50 Hz
Characteristic curves for

inverse-time overcurrent X X –
elements: Default setting
IEC curves IEC characteristic
curves
ANSI curves – X X
X Selectable option
– Function not available for this region
7UM62 Manual 15
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.1 Introduction, Reference Power System
The following chapters explain the individual protective and additional functions and
provide information about on the setting values.
Generator The calculation examples are based on two reference power systems with the two
typical basic connections, i.e. the busbar connection and the unit connection (see
Figure 2-1). All default settings of the relay are adapted accordingly. The allocation of
measured quantities to side 1 and 2 respectively is shown in Figure 2-1.
Side 2 Side 1
5.27 MVA
6.3 kV 6.3 kV 100 V 100 V
500 A/1 A 60/1 A
√3 √3 3
G
3∼
Earthing
trans-
former
RL
IL, S2 IEE UL UE IL, S1

7UM62
a) Busbar connection
Side 2 Side 1
5.27 MVA 5.3 MVA
6.3 kV 20 kV/6.3 kV 20 kV
6.3 kV
/ 500 V 500 A/1 A 6.3 kV 100 V
√3 √3 √3
G
3∼
UE IL, S2 IEE1 UL IL, S1

7UM62
b) Unit connection
Figure 2-1 Reference Systems
16 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Introduction, Reference Power System
Technical Data of Generator: SN, G = 5.27 MVA

the Reference UN, G = 6.3 kV
Power Systems
IN, G = 483 A
cos ϕ = 0.8
Current transformer: IN,prim = 500 A; IN, sec= 1 A
Toroidal current transformer IN,prim = 60 A; IN, sec = 1 A
Voltage transformer: UN, prim = (6.3/√3) kV UN, sec = (100/√3) V

Uen/3= (100/3) V
Transformer Transformer: SN, T = 5.3 MVA

Uprim = 20 kV
Usec = 6.3 kV
usc =7%
6.3 kV 500 V
Neutral transformer
√3
Resistor divider: 5:1
Motor Motor: UN, M = 6600 V

IN, M = 126 A
ISTART = 624 A (Startup current)
Imax = 135 A (Admissible continuous stator current)
TSTART = 8,5 s (Duration of startup with ISTART)
Current transformer: IN,prim = 200 A; IN, sec= 1 A
Further technical data is provided within the framework of the functional setting
specifications of the individual protective functions.
The calculated setting values are secondary setting values related to the device and
can be modified immediately by way of local operation.
The use of the DIGSI® 4 operating program is recommended for complete
reparameterization. In this way, the user has the possibility to specify primary values
in addition to secondary settings. Within the framework of the 7UM62 the specification
of primary values is performed as a setting related to the nominal quantities of the
object to be protected (IN, G; UN, G; SN, G). This procedure has the advantage that
system-independent, typical settings of the protective functions can be pre-specified.
The data of the individual power system are updated in the power system data (see
sections 2.3 and 2.5) and the conversion to secondary values is executed via a mouse
click. All necessary conversion formula of the individual functions are stored in the
operating program.
7UM62 Manual 17
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.2 Functional Scope
2.2.1 Description
General The 7UM62 has numerous protective and additional functions. The hardware and
firmware provided is designed for this scope of functions. Nevertheless a few
restrictions apply to the use of the earth fault current and earth fault voltage inputs UE
and IEE respectively. It is not possible to feed different measured quantities to one and
the same input, i.e. to use the input, for example, for both rotor and stator earth fault
protection. Table 2-2 gives an overview of the protective functions and the inputs they
use.
The command functions can be matched to the plant conditions. In addition, individual
functions can be activated or deactivated during the configuration procedure, so that
functions that are not needed can be disabled.
The available protective and additional functions can be configured as Enabled or
Disabled. For individual functions, the choice between several alternatives may be
presented, as described below.
Functions that are configured as Disabled are not processed by the 7UM62: There
are no messages, and corresponding settings (functions, limit values) are not
displayed during detailed settings.
Note:
The functions and default settings depend of the variant ordered (for details refer to
Table 2-1 and Appendix A.1). Also, not all combinations of protective functions are
possible because of certain restrictions imposed by the hardware (see Table 2-2,
“Allocation of Device Inputs to Protection Functions”).
Determination of Configuration settings may be entered using a PC and the software program DIGSI® 4
Functional Scope and transferred via the operator interface on the device front, or via the rear serial
service interface. Operation is described in the SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual.
Entry of password No. 7 (for setting modification) is required to modify configuration
settings. Without the password, the settings may be read, but cannot be modified and
transmitted to the device.
The functional scope with the available options is set in the Device Configuration
dialog box to match plant requirements.
2.2.2 Setting Hints
Special Cases Most settings are self-explanatory. The special cases are described below.
If the setting group change-over function is to be used, the setting in address 0103
Grp Chge OPTION must be set to enabled. In this case, it is possible to apply two
groups of settings for the function parameters (refer also to Section 2.4) so that a
convenient and fast switch-over between these setting groups is possible. The setting
Disabled implies that only one function parameter setting group can be applied and
used.
18 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functional Scope
Parameter 0104 FAULT VALUE is used to specify whether the oscillographic fault
recording should record Instantaneous values or RMS values. If RMS values
are recorded, the available recording time increases by the factor 16.
For some protective functions you can also choose the measuring inputs of the relay
to which they will be allocated (side 1 or side 2); for other functions the allocation is
fixed (see Table 2-2).
For example, address 0112 O/C PROT. I> allows such a choice for the I> stage of
the overcurrent protection (= Side 1, Side 2 or Disabled).
For the high-current stage I>> of the overcurrent protection, address 0113 O/C
PROT. I>> allows non-directional operation for side 1/side 2 or directional operation
for side 1/side2. By setting Disabled, this overcurrent stage can be excluded
altogether. For the inverse time overcurrent protection set in address 0114 O/C
PROT. Ip, different sets of inverse characteristics are available, depending on the
version ordered; they are either according to IEC or according to ANSI. This function,
too, can be allocated to either side 1 or side 2 (= with IEC-characteristic on
side 1, with ANSI-characteristic on side 1, with IEC-
characteristic on side 2, with ANSI-characteristic on side 2).
Inverse time overcurrent protection can be excluded altogether by setting Disabled.
Table 2-2 shows the allocation of device inputs to the protection functions. The
interdependencies shown here must be kept in mind when configuring the plant. This
concerns the UE input, the two sensitive current inputs IEE1 and IEE2 as well as the
3 measuring transducer inputs (TD). Where the UE input is used e.g. by the stator
earth fault protection functions, it is no longer available for rotor earth fault protection
(R, fn) (see also Table 2-3). The same restrictions are true for measuring transducer
inputs, which can only be used by one protection function at a time. Where the TDs
are not used by any protection function, they are available for general processing by
the measured value blocks in CFC.
Table 2-2 Allocation of Device Inputs to Protection Functions
Side 1 Side 2
Protection Function ANSI UL1; UL2; IL1S1; IL2S1; IEE1 UE IL1S2; IL2S2; IEE2 TD
UL3 IL3S1 IL3S2
Definite-time I>; I>> /non- Fixed Selectable - - Selectable - -
directional ANSI 50
Definite-Time I>>/directional Fixed Selectable - - Selectable - -
Inverse-Time Overcurrent ANSI 51, Fixed Selectable - - Selectable - -
Protection 67
Thermal Overload Protection ANSI 49 - - - - Fixed - TD2
Negative Sequence Protection ANSI 46 - - - - Fixed - -
Startup Overcurrent Protection ANSI 51 - - - - Fixed - -
Differential Protection ANSI 87 - Fixed - - Fixed - -
Earth Fault Differential ANSI U0 calcu- Selectable - - Selectable Fixed -
Protection 87GN/TN lated
Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) ANSI 40 Fixed - - - Fixed - TD3
Protection
Reverse Power Protection ANSI 32R Fixed - - - Fixed - -
Forward Active Power ANSI 32F Fixed - - - Fixed - -
Supervision
7UM62 Manual 19
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Table 2-2 Allocation of Device Inputs to Protection Functions
Side 1 Side 2
Protection Function ANSI UL1; UL2; IL1S1; IL2S1; IEE1 UE IL1S2; IL2S2; IEE2 TD
UL3 IL3S1 IL3S2
Impedance Protection ANSI 21 Fixed - - - Fixed - -
Out-of-Step Protection ANSI 78 Fixed - - - Fixed - -
Undervoltage Protection ANSI 27 Fixed - - - - - -
Overvoltage Protection ANSI 59 Fixed - - - - - -
Frequency Protection ANSI 81 Fixed - - Fixed - -
Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) ANSI 24 Fixed - - - - - -
Protection
Inverse-Time Undervoltage ANSI 27 Fixed - - - - - -
Protection
Rate-of-Frequency-Change ANSI 81R Fixed - - - - - -
Protection
Jump of Voltage Vector Fixed - - - - - -
90–%–Stator Earth Fault ANSI 59N, U0 - - - - Fixed -
Protection 64G, 67G calculated
if REFP is
used
Sensitive Earth Fault Protection ANSI - - Sele - - Select. -
51GN, 64R ct.
100–%–Stator Earth Fault Prot. ANSI 27/ Fixed - - Fixed Fixed - -
with 3rd Harmonics 59TN
100–%–Stator Earth Fault Prot. 64G - - Fixed Fixed - - -
with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (100 %)
Rotor Earth Fault Protection ANSI 64R - - Fixed Fixed - - -
REFP
Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Pro- ANSI 64R - - - - - - TD1
tection with 1 to 3 Hz Square TD2
Wave Voltage Injection
Motor Starting Time Supervision ANSI 48 - - - - Fixed - -
Restart Inhibit for Motors ANSI 66, - - - - Fixed - -
49Rotor
Breaker Failure Protection ANSI 50BF - Selectable - - Selectable - -

Inadvertent Energization ANSI 50/27 Fixed - - - Fixed - -
DC Voltage/DC Current ANSI 59N - - - - - - TD1
Protection DC/51N
DC
Fuse Failure Monitor Fixed - - - Fixed - -
Trip Circuit Monitoring ANSI 74TC - - - - - - -
Threshold Supervision Fixed - - - Fixed - -
External Trip Commands - - - - - - -
20 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functional Scope
For the differential protection, address 0120 DIFF. PROT. allows to specify the type
of protected object (Generator/Motor or 3-phase Transformer); the function
can be excluded altogether by setting Disabled.
Side 2 Side 1
G
3∼
Address 0120 DIFF. PROT. =

7UM62 Generator/Motor
Figure 2-2 Use as Generator Differential Protection
Side 2 Side 1
G
3∼
Address 0120 DIFF. PROT. =

7UM62 3-phase Transformer
Figure 2-3 Use as Block Differential Protection (Overall Protection)
For the following application, the settings of the generator data under Power System
Data 1 must be same as for the transformer data of side 2:
Side 2 Side 1
G
3∼
Address 0120 DIFF. PROT.

7UM62 = 3-phase Transformer
Figure 2-4 Use as Transformer Differential Protection
7UM62 Manual 21
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
For the following application, the differential protection of device A must be set to
Generator/Motor, and that of device B to 3-phase Transformer. Also, the
settings of the generator data under Power System Data 1 must be same as for the
transformer data of side:
(A) Side 2 (A) Side 1

(B) Side 2 (B) Side 1
G
3∼
A 7UM62 B 7UM62
Address 0120 DIFF. PROT. Address 0120 DIFF. PROT.

= Generator/Motor = 3-phase Transformer
Figure 2-5 Use as Redundant Overall Protection
For earth fault protection, address 0150 S/E/F PROT. presents the options non-
dir. only U0, non-dir. U0&I0 and Directional, unless the whole function is
Disabled. The first option evaluates only the displacement voltage (to be used with
unit connection). The second option evaluates in addition to the displacement voltage
the magnitude of the earth fault current (or the difference between the starpoint current
and the total current of a toroidal CT, as is the case in busbar systems with low-ohmic
switchable starpoint resistors). The third option considers as a third criterion the
direction of the earth fault current in the case of machines in busbar connection where
the magnitudes of displacement voltage and earth fault current alone are not sufficient
to distinguish between system earth faults and machine earth faults.
Address 0151 O/C PROT. Iee> is used to specify which input will be used for earth
fault current measurement (IEE1 or IEE2).
Address 0170 BREAKER FAILURE specifies whether the circuit breaker failure
protection will apply for side 1 or side 2.
If the 7UM62 is equipped with analog outputs and you want to use them, the
addresses 0173, 0174, 0175 and 0176 allow to allocate the available measured
values to the analog outputs. All parameters of the analog outputs are accessed under
the block address 0173.
For trip circuit monitoring, address 0182 Trip Cir. Sup. is used to specify whether
two binary inputs (with 2 Binary Inputs) or only one binary input (with 1
Binary Input) should be utilized, or whether the function should be Disabled.
22 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functional Scope
2.2.2.1 Settings
Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments

103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option
Enabled
104 FAULT VALUE Disabled Instantaneous Fault values

Instantaneous values values
RMS values
105 DIFF. PROT. Disabled Enabled Differential Protection

Enabled
106 PROT. OBJECT Generator/Motor Generator/Motor Protection Object

3 phase Transformer
112 O/C PROT. I> Disabled Side 2 Overcurrent Protection I>

Side 1
Side 2
113 O/C PROT. I>> Disabled Non-Directional on Overcurrent Protection I>>

Non-Directional on side 1 side 2
Non-Directional on side 2
Directional on side 1
114 O/C PROT. Ip Disabled Disabled Inverse O/C Time Protection

with IEC-characteristic on
side 1
with ANSI-characteristic on
side 1
side 2
side 2
116 Therm.Overload Disabled Enabled Thermal Overload Protection

Enabled
117 UNBALANCE LOAD Disabled Enabled Unbalance Load (Negative

Enabled Sequence)
118 O/C STARTUP Disabled Enabled Startup O/C protection

Enabled
120 DIFF. PROT. Disabled Generator/Motor Differential Protection

Generator/Motor
3 phase Transformer
121 REF PROT. Disabled Disabled Restricted earth fault protection

Generator/Motor with IEE2
Generator/Motor with 3I0 of
Side 2
with Side 1 of Transformer
130 UNDEREXCIT. Disabled Enabled Underexcitation Protection

Enabled
131 REVERSE POWER Disabled Enabled Reverse Power Protection
Enabled
132 FORWARD Disabled Enabled Forward Power Supervision

POWER Enabled
7UM62 Manual 23
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

133 IMPEDANCE Disabled Enabled Impedance Protection
PROT. Enabled
135 OUT-OF-STEP Disabled Enabled Out-of-Step Protection

Enabled
140 UNDERVOLTAGE Disabled Enabled Undervoltage Protection

Enabled
141 OVERVOLTAGE Disabled Enabled Overvoltage Protection

Enabled
142 FREQUENCY Prot. Disabled Enabled Over / Underfrequency Protec-

Enabled tion
143 OVEREXC. PROT. Disabled Enabled Overexcitation Protection (U/f)

Enabled
144 INV.UNDERVOLT. Disabled Enabled Inverse Undervoltage Protec-

Enabled tion Up<
145 df/dt Protect. Disabled with 2 df/dt stages Rate-of-frequency-change pro-

with 2 df/dt stages tection
with 4 df/dt stages
146 VECTOR JUMP Disabled Enabled Jump of Voltage Vector

Enabled
150 S/E/F PROT. Disabled non-directional Stator Earth Fault Protection

non-directional only U0 with U0 & I0
non-directional with U0 & I0
directional
151 O/C PROT. Iee> Disabled with Iee2 Sensitive Earth Current Protec-
with Iee1 tion
with Iee2
152 SEF 3rd HARM. Disabled Enabled Stator Earth Fault Prot. 3rd Har-
Enabled monic
153 100% SEF-PROT. Disabled Enabled 100% Stator-Earth-Fault Protec-

Enabled tion
160 ROTOR E/F Disabled Enabled Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R,
Enabled fn)
161 REF 1-3Hz Disabled Enabled Rotor Earth Fault Protection (1-
Enabled 3Hz)
165 STARTUP MOTOR Disabled Enabled Motor Starting Time Supervision

Enabled
166 RESTART INHIBIT Disabled Enabled Restart Inhibit for Motors

Enabled
170 BREAKER Disabled Side 2 Breaker Failure Protection

FAILURE Side 1
Side 2
171 INADVERT. EN. Disabled Enabled Inadvertent Energisation

Enabled
172 DC PROTECTION Disabled Enabled DC Voltage/Current Protection

Enabled
24 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functional Scope

173 ANALOGOUTPUT Disabled Disabled Analog Output B1 (Port B)
B1 Positive Sequence Current
I1 [%]
Negative Sequence Current
I2 [%]
Positive Sequence Voltage
U1 [%]
Active Power |P| [%]
Reactive Power |Q| [%]
Frequency f [%]
|Power Factor| [%]
p.u. Temperature of Rotor
[%]
p.u. Temperature of Stator
[%]

I1 [%]
I2 [%]
U1 [%]
Frequency f [%]
|Power Factor| [%]
[%]
[%]
175 ANALOGOUTPUT Disabled Disabled Analog Output D1 (Port D)

D1 Positive Sequence Current
I1 [%]
I2 [%]
U1 [%]
Frequency f [%]
|Power Factor| [%]
[%]
[%]
7UM62 Manual 25
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

I1 [%]
I2 [%]
U1 [%]
Frequency f [%]
|Power Factor| [%]
[%]
[%]
180 FUSE FAIL MON. Disabled Enabled Fuse Failure Monitor

Enabled
181 M.V. SUPERV Disabled Enabled Measured Values Supervision

Enabled
182 Trip Cir. Sup. Disabled Disabled Trip Circuit Supervision

with 2 Binary Inputs
with 1 Binary Input
185 THRESHOLD Disabled Enabled Threshold Supervision

Enabled
186 EXT. TRIP 1 Disabled Enabled External Trip Function 1

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled
190 RTD-BOX INPUT Disabled Disabled External Temperature Input

Port C
Port D
Port E
191 RTD CONNECTION 6 RTD simplex operation 6 RTD simplex Ext. Temperature Input Connec-
6 RTD half duplex operation operation tion Type
12 RTD half duplex opera-
tion
26 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Power System Data 1
2.3 Power System Data 1
2.3.1 Functional Description
General The device requires certain basic data regarding the protected equipment, so that the
device will be compatible with its desired application. These may be, for instance,
rated power system and transformer data, measured quantity polarities and their
physical connections, breaker properties etc. There are also certain parameters that
are common to all functions, i.e. not associated with a specific protection, control or
monitoring functions. The following section discusses these Power System Data 1.
2.3.2 Setting Hints
The Power System Data 1 can be changed from the operator or service interface with
a personal computer using DIGSI® 4.
In DIGSI® 4, double-click Settings to display the data available.
Connection of the At address 0201 STRPNT->OBJ S1 you specify the polarity of the CTs of plant side
Current 1, i.e. the location of the CT starpoint with reference to the protected object. At address
Transformer Sets 0210 STRPNT->OBJ S2 the polarity of the CTs of side 2 is specified. This setting
determines the measuring direction of the 7UM62 (STRPNT->OBJ S2 = Yes =
Forwards = line direction). Figure 2-6 shows the definition even in cases where there
are no starpoint CTs.
Side 2 Side 1 Side 2 Side 1
G G
a) STRPNT→OBJ S1 = YES b) STRPNT→OBJ S1 = NO
STRPNT→OBJ S2 = YES STRPNT→OBJ S2 = NO
Figure 2-6 Location of Starpoints for CTs of S1 and S2

- Addresses 0201 and 0210 -
If the device is to be used for transverse differential protection of generators or motors,

a particularity must be observed in the connection of the current transformers. In this
case, all currents flow in healthy operation into the protected object, as opposed to all
other applications. Therefore, a “wrong” polarity must be set for one set of CTs. The
“sides” here are equivalent to the machine winding sections.
7UM62 Manual 27
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Figure 2-7 shows an example. Although the starpoints of both CT sets are turned to-
wards the protected object, “side 2” is set to the opposite: 210 STRPNT->OBJ S2 =
NO.
“Side 1“ “Side 2“
L1
L2
L3
0201 STRPNT–>OBJ S1 0210 STRPNT–>OBJ S2

= YES = NO
Figure 2-7 Current Transformer Starpoints in Transverse Differential Protection - Example
Nominal Values of At addresses 0221 IN-PRI I-SIDE1 and 0222 IN-SEC I-SIDE1 information is
CTs and VTs entered regarding the primary nominal voltage and secondary nominal currents of the
CTs of side 1. It is important to ensure that the rated secondary current of the current
transformer matches the rated current of the device, otherwise the device will
incorrectly calculate primary amperes.
W0 Correction A correction of the angle faults of the current transformers and voltage transformers is
Angle particularly important with regard to the reverse power protection, as in this case, a
very low active power is calculated from a very high apparent power (for small cos ϕ
(PF)).
At address 0204 CT ANGLE W0 a constant correction angle can be entered for the
CTs of side 2.
The angle fault difference ∆ϕ between the current transformers and voltage
transformers is particularly important in this context. As a correction, the sum of the
mean angle errors of the current transformers and voltage transformers is set. The
corrective value can be determined within the framework of machine commissioning
(see Section 3.4.10.2).
Iee Transformation For the conversion of the ground currents Iee in primary quantities, the device requires
Ratios the primary/secondary transformation ratio of the earth CTs. The transformation ratio
for input 1 is set at the address 0205 FACTOR IEE1, the ratio for input 2 at 0213
FACTOR IEE2.
Nominal Values of At addresses 0211 IN-PRI I-SIDE2 and 0212 IN-SEC I-SIDE2 information is
the Transformers entered regarding the primary nominal voltage and secondary nominal currents of the
on Side 2 CTs of side 2. It is important to ensure that the rated secondary current of the current
transformer matches the rated current of the device, otherwise the device will
incorrectly calculate primary amperes.
28 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Power System Data 1
Nominal Values of At addresses 0221 Unom PRIMARY and 0222 Unom SECONDARY, information is
Voltage entered regarding the primary nominal voltage and secondary nominal voltages
Transformers (phase-to-phase) of the connected voltage transformers.
Voltage Connection At address 0223 UE CONNECTION the user specifies to the device which type of volt-
UE age is connected to the UE input. The device derives from this information the way of
processing the input signal. The UE input is used for either the various stator earth fault
protection functions or for rotor earth fault protection using rated frequency voltage in-
jection (see Section 2.30). Table 2-3 shows the interdependencies for each protection
function.
Table 2-3 Setting Options for the UE Input and their Impact on the Protection Functions
Setting of 90-%-Stator Earth Stator Earth Fault 100-%-Stator Earth Rotor Earth Fault
UE CONNECTION Fault Protection Protection with Fault Protection Protection (R, fn)
3rd Harmonics (20 Hz)
(Addr. 0223) (Section 2.26) (Section 2.28) (Section 2.29) (Section 2.30)
not connected Processing of U0 Determination of 3rd har- – –
measured value monics from calculated
(precisely: √3 U0) U0 voltage
(Only U0 3rd harm >
stage usable).
UE connected to Processing of U0 – Processing of UE input –
loading resistor measured value
(precisely: √3 U0)
UE connected to any Processing of UE in- – – –
transformer put (e.g. earth fault
protection on trans-
former side)
UE connected to Processing of UE in- Processing of UE input Processing of UE input –
broken delta winding put
UE connected to Processing of U0 – – Processing of UE
rotor measured value input
(precisely: √3 U0)
UE connected to Processing of UE in- Processing of UE input Processing of UE input –
neutral transformer put
Transformation For the conversion of the displacement voltage UE in primary quantities, the device
Ratio UE requires the primary/secondary transformation ratio of the transformer delivering the
UE voltage. With the exception of the rotor earth fault protection, the 0224 FACTOR
UE has an impact on those protection functions which process the UE input directly, as
shown in Table 2-3. For this ratio 0224 FACTOR UE the following general formula
applies:
U VT, prim
0224 FACTOR UE = -----------------------
U E, sec
In this context, UVT, prim is the primary voltage and UE, sec is the secondary
displacement voltage applied to the device. If a voltage divider is used, its divider ratio
also influences this factor. The following equation results for the example in Figure 2-
1b with the power system data selected there and an 1:5 voltage divider ratio:
6.3 kV ⁄ ( 3 )
0224 FACTOR UE = --------------------------------- = 36.4
500 V ⁄ 5
7UM62 Manual 29
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Uph/Uen Adaption The address 0225A serves to communicate the adaptation factor between the phase
Factor voltage and the displacement voltage to the device. This information is relevant for
measured-quantity monitoring.
If the voltage transformer set has broken delta windings and if these windings are
connected to the device (VN input), this must be specified accordingly in address 0223
(see below at side title ”Voltage Connection UE”). As the transformation ratio of the
voltage transformers is usually:
⁄ --------------
- ⁄ --------------
U Nprim U Nsec UNsec
----------------- -
3 3 3
the factor Uph/Uen (secondary voltage, address 0225A Uph / Udelta) in relation to
3/√3 = √3 = 1.73 must be used if the Uen voltage is connected. For other
transformation ratios, i.e. the formation of the displacement voltage via an
interconnected transformer set, the factor must be corrected accordingly.
Protected Object: If you have specified a transformer as the protected object during configuration of the
Transformer differential protection, the parameter 0241 UN-PRI SIDE 1 appears in the Power
System Data 1. It specifies the nominal primary voltage of side 1 of the protected
object (transformer).
At address 0242 STARPNT SIDE 1 you specify the whether the starpoint of side 1
is (Solid Earthed or Isolated). This setting has an influence on the measured
value monitoring (summation current monitoring); in transformer differential
protection, it is also important for the vector group correction and the treatment of the
zero sequence current.
The setting Isolated can be chosen if the starpoint has no earthing. If the
transformer starpoint is connected to a Petersen coil or a surge voltage arrester,
choose the setting Solid Earthed. The same applies to low-ohmic or solid starpoint
earthing.
The parameters 0243 UN-PRI SIDE 2 and 0244 STARPNT SIDE 2 determine
respectively the rated primary voltage and the starpoint of side 2 of the transformer.
Parameter 0246 VECTOR GRP S2 is used to specify the vector group numeral
referred to side 1 of the transformer. It is not necessary to specify whether the
connection is delta, wye or zigzag.
At address 0249 SN TRANSFORMER the rated apparent power of the transformer is
input. The nominal currents for side 1 and 2 are calculated on this basis as follows:
S N, Transf S N, Transf
I N, S1 = ---------------------------- IN, S2 = ----------------------------
U N, S1 ⋅ 3 U N, S2 ⋅ 3
These nominal currents are only considered for differential protection and can differ
from the generator ratings.
For the overcurrent protection functions (Sections 2.6, 2.7, and 2.8) and for the break-
er failure protection, sides 1 and 2 can be allocated freely. With the differential protec-
tion set to 0120 3 phase transf., the following normalizing factors apply for the
primary side protection settings in DIGSI.
Side 1: Side 2:
S N, Transf S N, Generator
I N, S1 = ---------------------------- I N, S2 = --------------------------------------------
U N, S1 ⋅ 3 U N, Generator ⋅ 3
30 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Power System Data 1
Setting parameters:
SN,Transf 0249 SN TRANSFORMER
UN, S1 0241 UN-PRI SIDE 1
SN, Generator 0252 SN GEN/MOTOR
UN, Generator 0251 UN GEN/MOTOR
These normalizing factors apply for transformer protection and overall protection (see
Figures 2-3 and 2-4).
Protected Object: Regardless of the configuration and intended use of the differential protection, the
Generator/Motor generator/motor ratings must be specified. Parameter 0251 UN GEN/MOTOR
specifies the primary rated voltage of the protected generator or motor. At parameter
0252 SN GEN/MOTOR the rated apparent power is entered. From these values the
nominal generator/motor current for plant side 2 is calculated:
S N, Generator
I N, Generator = --------------------------------------------
U N, Generator ⋅ 3
Setting parameters:
SN, Generator 0252 SN GEN/MOTOR
UN, Generator 0251 UN GEN/MOTOR
The above formula is also used by the DIGSI communication software to determine
the normalizing factors for the primary side protection settings of the overcurrent pro-
tection functions (Sections 2.6, 2.7, and 2.8) and of the breaker failure protection,
where the sides (side 1 and side 2) can be freely allocated. Normalization is active if
the differential protection in the scope of functions is set to 0120 Disabled or Gen-
erator/Motor. It applies for both side 1 and side 2.
Rated Frequency The rated system frequency is set at address 0270 Rated Frequency. The setting
is dependent on the model number of the relay purchased, and must be in accordance
with the nominal frequency of the power system.
Phase Rotation Address 0271 PHASE SEQ. is used to establish phase rotation reversal. The default
(Phase Sequence) phase sequence is (L1 L2 L3 for clockwise rotation) can be changed if your power
system permanently has an anti-clockwise phase sequence (L1 L3 L2). A
temporary reversal of rotation is also possible using binary inputs (see Section 2.43).
L1 L1
L3 L2 L2 L3
Clockwise rotation L1, L2, L3 Anti-clockwise rotation L1, L3, L2
Figure 2-8 Phase Sequences
Operating Mode The 0272 SCHEME setting is used for specifying if the generator to be protected is
operated in the Unit transformer connected or in the Direct connected to
busbar mode. This specification is important for the stator earth fault connection and
for the inverse O/C time protection with undervoltage consideration, as different
voltages are used here, depending on the corresponding operating mode (see
”Undervoltage Consideration” in Section 2.8.1).
7UM62 Manual 31
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
ATEX100 Parameter 0274A ATEX100 allows compliance with PTB requirements (special
requirements for Germany) for thermal replicas. If this parameter is set to YES, all
thermal replicas of the 7UM62 are stored in case of a power supply failure. As soon
as the supply voltage returns, the thermal replicas continue operating with the stored
values. If the parameter is set to NO, the calculated overtemperature values of all
thermal replicas are reset to zero in case of a power supply failure.
Trip Command Address 0280 is used to set the minimum time the tripping contacts will remain closed
Duration (TMin TRIP CMD). This setting applies to all protective functions that initiate tripping.
Current Flow Address 0281 BkrClosed I MIN corresponds to the threshold value of the
Monitoring integrated current flow monitoring feature. This setting is used for the elapsed-time
meter and the overload protection. If the set threshold current is exceeded, the circuit
breaker is considered closed and the power system is considered to be in operation.
In the case of overload protection, this criterion serves for distinguishing between the
standstill and the motion of the machine to be protected.
Measuring Measuring transducer 1 is provided for DC voltage/DC current protection or the rotor
Transducer 1 earth fault protection with 1 to 3 Hz (UControl). Depending on the intended application,
select at address 0295 TRANSDUCER 1 either 10 V, 4–20 mA or 20 mA. In the first
case, the measuring range is between –10 V and +10 V. The 4–20 mA interface is
designed for operation with sign, i.e. a current of 12 mA corresponds to an input value
of 0 (see Figure 2-9). With currents in excess of < 2 mA, the device signals a wire
break. The alarm drops out at currents below > 3 mA. If the alternative 20 mA is
selected, the measuring range is between –20 mA and + 20 mA.
Wire
break
–8 0 +8 Represented input value
I/mA
0 2 4 12 20 Measured quantity
Figure 2-9 Relationship between Measured Quantity and Represented Input Value at
Measuring Transducer TD 1 with Setting 4–20 mA
Measuring Measuring transducer 2 is provided for overload protection. In combination with an

Transducer 2 (external) temperature sensor and measuring transducer, it allows input of an ambient
or coolant temperature. It is matched to the upstream measuring transducer by
selecting at the address 0296 TRANSDUCER 2 one of the standard alternatives 10 V,
4–20 mA or 20 mA.
Measuring Measuring transducer 3 is provided for underexcitation protection or the rotor earth
Transducer 3 fault protection with 1 to 3 Hz (UControl) and is therefore designed for voltage input (10
V). The excitation voltage is fed to the measuring transducer via a voltage divider.
Where the excitation DC voltage may contain a large amount of superimposed
harmonics (e.g. owing to thyristor control), the integrated digital filter should be used;
it is selected at the address 0297 TRANSDUCER 3 by setting with filter.
32 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Power System Data 1
2.3.2.1 Settings 1

270 Rated Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency
60 Hz
271 PHASE SEQ. L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 Phase Sequence

L1 L3 L2
272 SCHEME Direct connected to busbar Direct connected Scheme Configuration

Unit transformer connected to busbar
274A ATEX100 YES NO Storage of th. Replicas w/o

NO Power Supply
275 FACTOR R SEF 1.0..200.0 37.0 Ratio Prim./Sec. R SEF
276 TEMP. UNIT Degree Celsius Degree Celsius Unit of temparature measure-
Degree Fahrenheit ment
251 UN GEN/MOTOR 0.40..800.00 kV 6.30 kV Rated Primary Voltage Genera-

tor/Motor
252 SN GEN/MOTOR 0.20..5000.00 MVA 5.27 MVA Rated Apparent Power of the
Generator
242 STARPNT SIDE 1 Isolated Isolated Starpoint of Side 1 is

Solid Earthed
244 STARPNT SIDE 2 Isolated Isolated Starpoint of side 2 is

Solid Earthed
241 UN-PRI SIDE 1 0.40..800.00 kV 20.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage Side 1
243 UN-PRI SIDE 2 0.40..800.00 kV 6.30 kV Rated Primary Voltage side 2
246 VECTOR GRP S2 0..11 0 Vector Group Numeral of Side 2
249 SN TRANSFOR- 0.20..5000.00 MVA 5.30 MVA Rated Apparent Power of the
MER Transformer
201 STRPNT->OBJ S1 YES YES CT-Strpnt. Side1 in Direct. of

NO Object
202 IN-PRI I-SIDE1 1..100000 A 500 A CT Rated Primary Current Side

1
203 IN-SEC I-SIDE1 1A 1A CT Rated Secondary Current

5A Side 1
204 CT ANGLE W0 -5.00..5.00 ° 0.00 ° Correction Angle CT W0
205 FACTOR IEE1 1.0..100000.0 60.0 CT Ratio Prim./Sec. IEE1
210 STRPNT->OBJ S2 YES YES CT-Strpnt. Side2 in Direct. of

NO Object
211 IN-PRI I-SIDE2 1..100000 A 500 A CT Rated Primary Current Side

2
212 IN-SEC I-SIDE2 1A 1A CT Rated Secondary Current

5A Side 2
213 FACTOR IEE2 1.0..100000.0 60.0 CT Ratio Prim./Sec. IEE2
214 GRD TERM. IEE2 Terminal Q7 Terminal Q7 Grounded Terminal CT IEE2

Terminal Q8
7UM62 Manual 33
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

221 Unom PRIMARY 0.10..400.00 kV 6.30 kV Rated Primary Voltage
222 Unom SECON- 100..125 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (Ph-

DARY Ph)
223 UE CONNECTION UE connected to neutral UE connected to UE Connection

transformer neutral transformer
UE connected to broken
delta winding
not connected
UE connected to any VT
UE connected to Rotor
UE connected to Loading
Resistor
224 FACTOR UE 1.0..2500.0 36.4 VT Ratio Prim./Sec. Ue
225A Uph / Udelta 1.00..3.00 1.73 Matching Ratio Ph.-VT to Bro-

ken-Delta-VT
280 TMin TRIP CMD 0.01..32.00 sec 0.15 sec Minimum TRIP Command Dura-
tion
281 BkrClosed I MIN 0.04..1.00 A 0.04 A Closed Breaker Min. Current

Threshold
295 TRANSDUCER 1 10 V 10 V Transducer 1

4-20mA
20mA
296 TRANSDUCER 2 10 V 10 V Transducer 2

4-20mA
20mA
297 TRANSDUCER 3 with filter with filter Transducer 3

without filter
2.3.2.2 List of Information
F.No. Alarm Comments

05145 >Reverse Rot. >Reverse Phase Rotation
05147 Rotation L1L2L3 Phase Rotation L1L2L3
05148 Rotation L1L3L2 Phase Rotation L1L3L2
00361 >FAIL:Feeder VT >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped)
05002 Operat. Cond. Suitable measured quantities present
34 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Setting Groups
2.4 Setting Groups
Purpose of Setting Two independent groups of parameters can be set for the device functions. The user
Groups can switch back and forward between setting groups locally, via binary inputs (if so
configured), via the operator or service interface using a personal computer, or via the
system interface.
A setting group includes the setting values for all functions that have been selected as
Enabled during configuration (see Section 2.2). In the 7UM62 relay, two independent
setting groups (A and B) are available. While setting values may vary among the two
setting groups, the selected functions of each setting group remain the same.
Where different settings are required for operational reasons, e.g. in pumped storage
power stations with a machine operating alternately as a generator and a motor, these
settings are made in the setting groups and stored in the device. Every time the
operating mode changes, the applicable setting group is activated, usually by a binary
input.
If multiple setting groups are not required, Group A is the default selection, and the
following paragraph is not applicable.
2.4.2 Setting Hints
If multiple setting groups are desired, Grp Chge OPTION = Enabled must have been
set (address 0103). When setting the function parameters, you configure first setting
group A, then setting group B. To find out how to proceed for this, how to copy and to
reset settings groups, and how to switch between setting groups during operation,
please refer to the DIGSI® 4System Manual, Order No. E50417–H1176–C151.
Section 3.1.2 describes how to switch between setting groups from outside the device,
using binary inputs.
2.4.2.1 Settings

302 CHANGE Group A Group A Change to Another Setting
Group B Group
Binary Input
Protocol
2.4.2.2 Information

00007 >Set Group Bit0 >Setting Group Select Bit 0
Group A Group A
Group B Group B
7UM62 Manual 35
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.5 Power System Data 2
General protective data (P.SYSTEM DATA2) includes settings associated with all
functions rather than a specific protective or monitoring function. In contrast to the
P.SYSTEM DATA1 as discussed in Sub-section 2.3, these settings can be changed
over with the setting groups.
Setting Groups In the 7UM62 relay, two independent setting groups (A and B) are possible. While
setting values may vary among the two setting groups, the selected functions of each
setting group remain the same.
2.5.2 Setting Hints
To enter these group-specific general protection data (Power System Data 2), select
in the menu SETTINGS the item P-Group A and there the item P.Systemdata2.
The second setting group is accessed in P–Group B.
Active Power Address 1108 ACTIVE POWER is used to specify the active power direction in the
Direction normal mode (Generator = output or Motor = input) or to adapt it to the power
system conditions without any recabling on the device.
2.5.2.1 Settings

1108 ACTIVE POWER Generator Generator Measurement of Active Power
Motor for
2.5.2.2 Information

00576 IL1 S1: Primary fault current IL1 Side1
05012 UL1E: Voltage UL1E at trip
05015 P: Active power at trip
05016 Q: Reactive power at trip
36 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Power System Data 2

05017 f: Frequency at trip
7UM62 Manual 37
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.6 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51)

with Undervoltage Seal-In
General The overcurrent protection is used as backup protection for the short-circuit protection
of the protected object. It also provides backup protection for downstream network
faults which are not promptly disconnected and thus may endanger the protected
object.
The 7UM62 relay allows to choose between the input transformers of side 1 and side
2 for allocation of the overcurrent protection function. This choice is made during
configuration (see Section 2.2).
Initially, the currents are numerically filtered so that only the fundamental-frequency
currents are used for the measurement. This makes the measurement insensitive to
transient conditions at the inception of a short-circuit and to asymmetrical short-circuit
currents (d.c. component).
In generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals, the
short-circuit current subsides quickly in the event of close-up faults (i.e. in the
generator or unit transformer range) due to the absence of excitation voltage the
current decreases within a few seconds to a value below the pick-up value of the
overcurrent time protection. To avoid that the relay drops out again, the I> stage
monitors the positive-sequence component of the voltages and uses it as an additional
criterion for detecting a short-circuit. The undervoltage influencing can be switched off
and made ineffective by means of a binary input.
I> stage Each phase current is compared individually with the I> common setting value.
Currents above these value are recorded and signalled individually. As soon as the
corresponding T I> time delay has elapsed, a trip signal is transmitted to the matrix.
In the delivery status of the device, the drop-out value is set to ± 95 % below the pick-
up value. For special applications, it is also possible to specify a higher value.
Undervoltage Seal- The I> stage has an undervoltage stage that can be disabled. This stage maintains
In the pick-up signal for a settable seal-in time if the value falls below a settable threshold
of the positive-sequence component of the voltages after an overcurrent pickup - even
if the current falls again below the overcurrent pick-up value. This will ensure that the
50-1 timer is sealed in, and will time-out to trip the associated circuit-breakers. If the
voltage recovers before the seal-in time has elapsed or if the undervoltage seal-in is
blocked via a binary input, e.g. when the voltage transformer miniature circuit breaker
(m.c.b.) trips or if the machine is tripped, the function will drop out immediately.
The seal-in logic operates separately for each phase. The first pickup of a phase
overcurrent starts the timer T-SEAL-IN.
38 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51) with Undervoltage Seal-In
Figure 2-10 shows the logic diagram of the overcurrent time protection I> with
undervoltage seal-in.
FNo. 01722 FNo. 01966
>BLOCK I> I> BLOCKED
FNo. 01970
U< seal in
Tripping
FNo. 01811
matrix
*) & II> Fault L1
Pickup IL1>
OR
1203 T I>
*)
OR & OR
Pickup IL2> FNo. 01815
FNo. 01812 I> TRIP TMin
*)
OR & I> Fault L2 TRIP CMD
I> Fault L3
OR
1204 U< SEAL-IN

*) seal-in logic operates
separately for each phase
Pickup U1< &
S Q
Fuse Failure & ≥1 R
1205 T-SEAL-IN
FNo. 01950
>Useal-in BLK
Figure 2-10 Logic Diagram of the Overcurrent Stage I> with Undervoltage Seal-In
2.6.2 Setting Hints
General The overcurrent protection feature is only effective and accessible if address 0112 O/
C PROT. I> = Side 1 or Side 2 was specified. Select Disabled if the function is
not needed.
Overcurrent Address 1201 O/C I> is used to switch the definite time-overcurrent stage I> ON or
Stage I> OFF, or to block only the trip command (Block Relay. The setting of the I> stage is
mainly determined by the maximum operating current. Pickup due to overload should
never occur since the protection may trip if short command times are set. For this
reason, a setting equal to 20 % to 30 % over the expected peak load is recommended
for generators, and a setting equal to 40 % over the expected peak load is
recommended for transformers and motors.
The trip time delay (parameter 1203 T I>) must be coordinated with the time grading
of the network in order to ensure that the protective equipment closest to the
corresponding fault location trips first (selectivity).
The settable time is only an additional time delay and does not include the operating
time (measuring time, drop-out time). The delay can be set to infinity ∞. If set to infinity,
the stage will not trip after pickup. However, the pickup is signalled. If the I> stage is
not required at all, 1201 O/C I> = OFF is set. For this setting, there is neither a pickup
signal generated nor a trip.
7UM62 Manual 39
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Undervoltage The 1205 U< undervoltage stage (positive-sequence voltage) is set to a value below
Seal–In the lowest phase-to-phase voltage permissible during operation, e.g. 80 V.
The seal-in time 1206 T-SEAL-IN limits the pickup seal-in introduced by the
overcurrent/undervoltage. It must be set to a value higher than the T I> time delay.
The dropout ratio r = IPU/IDO of the overcurrent pickup I> is specified at the address
1207A I> DOUT RATIO. The recommended value is r = 0.95. For special
applications, e.g. overload warning, it can be set to a higher value (0.98).
Example:
Pickup value 1.4 ⋅ IN Gen.
Tripping time delay 3s
Undervoltage seal-in 0.8 ⋅ UN Gen.
Seal-in time of U< 4s
Drop-out ratio 0.95
Nominal current IN, Gen 483 A Nominal voltage UN, Gen 6.3 kV
Nominal current IN, CT, prim500 A Nominal voltage UN, VT, prim 6.3 kV
Nominal current IN, sec 1A Nominal voltage UN, sec 100 V
The following secondary setting values result from this specification:
1.4 ⋅ I N, Gen 1.4 ⋅ 483 A

I> = ----------------------------- ⋅ I N, sec = ---------------------------- ⋅ 1 A = 1.35 A
I N, CT, prim 500 A
0.8 ⋅ U N, Gen 0.8 ⋅ 6,3 kV

U< = -------------------------------- ⋅ c = ----------------------------- ⋅ 100 V = 80 V
U N, VT, prim 6.3 kV
2.6.2.1 Settings for the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Stage I>)
The following list indicates the setting ranges and the default settings of a IN = 1 A
secondary nominal current. For a secondary nominal current of IN = 5 A, these values
must be multiplied by 5.

1201 O/C I> OFF OFF Overcurrent Time Protection I>
ON
Block relay for trip com-
mands
1202 I> 0.05..20.00 A 1.35 A I> Pickup
1203 T I> 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec T I> Time Delay
1204 U< SEAL-IN ON OFF State of Undervoltage Seal-in

OFF
1205 U< 10.0..125.0 V 80.0 V Undervoltage Seal-in Pickup
1206 T-SEAL-IN 0.10..60.00 sec 4.00 sec Duration of Undervoltage Seal-in
1207A I> DOUT RATIO 0.90..0.99 0.95 I> Drop Out Ratio
40 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51) with Undervoltage Seal-In
2.6.2.2 Information from Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Stage I>)

01722 >BLOCK I> >BLOCK I>
01950 >Useal-in BLK >O/C prot. : BLOCK undervoltage seal-in
01965 I> OFF O/C prot. stage I> is switched OFF
01966 I> BLOCKED O/C prot. stage I> is BLOCKED
01967 I> ACTIVE O/C prot. stage I> is ACTIVE
01811 I> Fault L1 O/C fault detection stage I> phase L1
01970 U< seal in O/C prot. undervoltage seal-in
01815 I> TRIP O/C I> TRIP
7UM62 Manual 41
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.7 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67)

with Direction Detection
The overcurrent protection is used as backup protection for the short-circuit protection
of the protected object. It also provides backup protection for downstream network
faults which are not promptly disconnected and thus may endanger the protected
object.
2 for allocation of the overcurrent protection function. This choice is made during
configuration (see Section 2.2).
In order to ensure that pick-up always occurs even with internal faults, the protection
- for generators - is usually connected to the current transformer set in the neutral
leads of the machine (side 2). If this is not the case for an individual power system, the
I>> stage can be combined with a short-circuit direction determination and switch off
a generator short circuit by way of an undelayed tripping; the selectivity is not affected
by this.
Initially, the currents are numerically filtered so that only the fundamental-frequency
currents are used for the measurement. This makes the measurement insensitive to
transient conditions at the inception of a short-circuit and to asymmetrical short-circuit
currents (d.c. component).
I>> Stage Each phase-to-phase current of side 1 or 2 (depending on the configuration) is

compared individually with the I>> common setting value. Currents above these
value are recorded and signalled individually. A trip signal is transmitted to the matrix
as soon as the corresponding T I>> time delays have elapsed. The drop-out value is
± 95 % below the pick-up value.
Direction Detection If this protection function has been assigned to the input transformers of side 1, the
I>> stage is equipped with a (disconnectable) direction element permitting a tripping
only for faults in backward (i.e. machine) direction.
For this reason, this stage can be used especially in applications where no current
transformers exist in the generator starpoint and undelayed tripping is nevertheless
required in case of generator faults (see figure 2-11).
reverse
Figure 2-11 Selectivity via Short-Circuit Direction Detection
The direction is detected phase-selectively by means of a cross-polarized voltage.

The phase-to-phase voltage located vertical to the vector of the fault current is
42 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67) with Direction Detection
typically used as the cross-polarized voltage (Figure 2-12). This is considered during
the calculation of the directional vector in the clockwise rotating phase sequence by
way of a rotation by +90° and in the anti-clockwise and in the anti-clockwise rotating
phase by way of a rotation by –90°. For phase-to-phase faults, the position of the
direction straight line may change in relation to the collapse of the short-circuit voltage.
U L1 U L1
U L1-L2
U L3-L1
U L3 U L2 U L2
U L3
U L2-L3 U L2-L3
Local phase sequences Remote phase sequences
Short circuit in phase L2–L3; cross-polarized voltage UL3 - L1
Figure 2-12 Cross-Polarized Voltages for Direction Determination
The phase carrying the highest current is selected for the direction decision. In case
of equal current levels, the phase with the smaller number is chosen (IL1 before IL2
before IL3). Table 2-4 shows the assignment of voltage and current values for the
determination of the fault direction for various types of short-circuit faults.
Table 2-4 Voltage and Current Values for the Determination of Fault Direction
Pickup Selected Current Associated Voltage
L1 IL1 UL2 – UL3
L2 IL2 UL3 – UL1
L3 IL3 UL1 – UL2
L1, L2 with IL1>IL2 IL1 UL2 – UL3
L1, L2 with IL1=IL2 IL1 UL2 – UL3
L1, L2 with IL1<IL2 IL2 UL3 – UL1
L1, L2, L3 with IL1>(IL2, IL3) IL1 UL2 – UL3
L1, L2, L3 with IL2>(IL1, IL3) IL1 UL2 – UL3
If the phase-to-phase voltage used for the direction decision is below the minimum
value of approx. 7 V, the voltage is taken from a voltage memory. This voltage also
allows an unambiguous direction determination if the short-circuit voltage has
collapsed (short circuit close to generator terminals). After the expiration of the storage
7UM62 Manual 43
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
period (2 cycles), the detected direction is stored, as long as no sufficient measuring

voltage is available. If a short circuit already exists at generator startup (or, in case of
motors or transformers, during connection), so that no voltage is present in the
memory and no direction can be determined, a trip is issued.
The direction detection can be blocked via a binary input.
Figure 2-13 indicates the I>> stage logic diagram with the direction element.
FNo. 01801
I>> Fault L1
FNo. 01802
I>> Fault L2
FNo. 01803
I>> Fault L3
FNo. 01808
Pickup IL1>> Tripping
& I>> picked up matrix
1303 T I>>
Pickup IL2>>
& OR &
FNo. 01809
Pickup IL3>> I>> TRIP
& TMin
TRIP CMD
FNo. 01721 FNo. 01956

>BLOCK I>> I>> BLOCKED
OR
UL & undeterminable
Direction FNo. 01806

&
forward
detection non direct. & I>> forward
”1”
Ix
& reverse FNo. 01807
& I>> backward
1304 Phase Direction
FNo. 01720
>BLOCK dir..
Figure 2-13 Logic Diagram of I>> Stage with Direction Element
2.7.2 Setting Hints
General The high-current stage I>> of the overcurrent protection is only effective and
accessible if it has been assigned within the framework of configuration at
address0113 O/C PROT. I>> to either side 1 or side e, i.e. if either = Non-dir.
Side 1 side 2, Dir. Side 1 or Dir. side 2 was set. Disabled is selected
if the function is not needed.
If you use the direction element, make sure that the CT and VT set are consistent.
44 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
I>>Time- Address 1301 O/C I>> is used to switch the definite time I>> stage for phase
Overcurrent Stage currents ON or OFF, or to block only the trip command (Block Relay). The high-
current stage I>> (parameter 1302 and its associated delay time T I>>, 1303) is
used for current grading with large impedances existing for example with
transformers, motors or generators. The definite time-overcurrent stage must be
specified in a way ensuring that it picks up for short circuits up to this impedance.
Current Example: Unit connection

Transformer in the
Rated apparent power - generator SN, Gen = 5.27 MVA
Starpoint
(without direction Rated voltage - generator UN, Gen = 6.3 kV
detection) Direct-axis transient reactance x’d = 29 %
Transient synchronous generated voltage U’P =1.2 ⋅ UN, Gen
(Salient-pole generator)
Rated apparent power - transformer SN, T = 5.3 MVA
Rated voltage, on the generator side UN, VT prim = 6.3 kV
Short-circuit voltage usc = 7 %
Current transformer IN, CT, prim =500 A
IN, sec =1 A
a) Short-circuit calculation
Three-pole short circuit
U’ P ⁄ ( 3 ) 1.2 ⋅ 6.3 kV ⁄ ( 3 )
I SC 3pol ≈ ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ≈ ---------------------------------------------- ≈ 1789 A
x’ d
2
U N, Gen u sc U N, VT prim
2 2.18 Ω + 0.26 Ω
- ⋅ ------------------
---------------- - + 0.5 ⋅ ---------------- - ⋅ ------------------------------
100 % S N, Gen 100 % S N, Gen
b) Setting value:
The setting value is achieved by means of a conversion on the secondary side. In
order to exclude an unwanted operation caused by overvoltages or transient
phenomena, an additional safety factor of about 1.2 to 1.3 is recommended.
I SC 3pol 1789 A
I>> = 1.2 ⋅ -------------------------- ⋅ I N, sec = 1.2 ⋅ ------------------- ⋅ 1 A = 4.3 A
I N, CT, prim 500 A
A value of T I>> = 0.1 s is recommended as tripping time delay, in order to enable

preferred tripping of the differential protection.
Current If at address 0113 O/C PROT. I>> was configured as directional, the addresses
Transformers at the 1304 Phase Direction and 1305 LINE ANGLE are accessible. The inclination
Output Side of the direction straight line (see figure 2-14) representing the separating line between
(with direction the tripping and the blocking zone can be adapted to the network conditions by way of
detection) the LINE ANGLE parameter. To do this, the line angle of the network is set. The
direction straight line is perpendicular to the set direction angle. Together with the
parameter 1304 Phase Direction = Forward oder Reverse, this parameter
covers the entire impedance level. This is the reverse direction, provided that the
protective relay has been connected correctly according to one of the diagrams in
Appendix A.4. A small zone is located between the forward and the reverse zone. Due
to phase displacement angles of the transformers, a safe direction decision is not
possible in this small zone. Consequently, there is no tripping in the selected preferred
direction in this zone.
7UM62 Manual 45
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
ZLine
FO
(l RW
in AR UL1
e) D
ϕL = LINE ANGLE
IL1
(G RE
en VE
er RS
at E
or
)
Direction straight line
Figure 2-14 Definition of the Parameters 1304 Phase Direction and 1305 LINE
ANGLE
The setting value of the direction straight line results from the short-circuit angle of the
feeding network. As a rule, it will be > 60°. The current pick-up value results from the
short-circuit current calculation. Acceptable pick-up values are situated at about (1.5
to 2) ⋅ IN, G. A tripping time delay of (TI>> ≈ 0.05 s to 0.1 s). is required to ensure that
the effect of the transient phenomena is eliminated.
Application For motors that have no separate current transformers in the starpoint, Figure 2-15
Example: Motor shows how to use the I>> stage as ”differential protection”. The configuration of the
Protection protection function depends on the transformers. Since this application is most likely
to be used for replacements in an existing system, the settings of that system should
be the basis for this.
Motor
IL, S1 IL, S2
I>> Stage Stage I>, Ip>
7UM62
Figure 2-15 I>> Stage Used as “Differential Protection”
46 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
2.7.2.1 Settings for the I>> Stage of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
must be multiplied by 5. Consider the current transformer ratios when setting the
device with primary values.

1301 O/C I>> OFF OFF Overcurrent Time Protection I>>
ON
mands
1302 I>> 0.05..20.00 A 4.30 A I>> Pickup
1303 T I>> 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec T I>> Time Delay
1304 Phase Direction Forward Reverse Phase Direction

Reverse
1305 LINE ANGLE -90..90 ° 60 ° Line Angle
2.7.2.2 Information for the I>> stage of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection

01721 >BLOCK I>> >BLOCK I>>
01720 >BLOCK dir. >BLOCK direction I>> stage
01955 I>> OFF O/C prot. stage I>> is switched OFF
01956 I>> BLOCKED O/C prot. stage I>> is BLOCKED
01957 I>> ACTIVE O/C prot. stage I>> is ACTIVE
01806 I>> forward O/C I>> direction forward
01807 I>> backward O/C I>> direction backward
01801 I>> Fault L1 O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L1
01808 I>> picked up O/C prot. I>> picked up
01809 I>> TRIP O/C I>> TRIP
7UM62 Manual 47
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.8 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V)
General The overcurrent time protection represents the short-circuit protection for small or low-
voltage machines. For larger machines it is used as back-up protection for the
machine short-circuit protection (differential protection and/or impedance protection).
It provides back-up protection for network faults which are not promptly disconnected
and thus may endanger the machine.
2 for allocation of the inverse-time overcurrent protection function. This choice is made
during configuration (see Section 2.2).
In generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals, the
short-circuit current subsides quickly in the event of close-up faults (i.e. in the
generator or unit transformer range) due to the absence of excitation voltage the
current decreases within a few seconds to a value below the pick-up value of the
overcurrent time protection. In order to avoid a drop out of the pickup, the positive-
sequence component is monitored additionally. This component can influence the
overcurrent detection according to two different methods. The influence of the
undervoltage can be switched off.
The protective function operates, depending on the ordering variant, with an inverse
current-tripping characteristic according to the IEC or ANSI standards. The
characteristic curves and the corresponding formulas are represented in Technical
Data (Figures 4-1 to 4-3 in Section 4.3). If one of the inverse characteristics (IEC or
ANSI) are configured, the definite-time stages I>> and I> can be additionally effective
(see Section 2.6 and 2.7).
Pickup / Each phase current is compared individually with the common Ip setting value. If a
Trip current exceeds 1.1 times the set value, the stage picks up and is signalled on a per
phase basis. The r.m.s. values of the fundamental component are used for the pickup.
During the pickup of an Ip stage, the tripping time is calculated from the flowing fault
current by means of an integrated measuring procedure, depending on the selected
tripping characteristic. A trip command is transmitted after this time expires.
Dropout The dropout of a picked up stage is performed as soon as the value falls below
approximately 95 % of the pickup value (i.e. 0.95 ⋅1.1 = 1.045 ⋅ setting value). The
timer will start again for all new pickups.
Undervoltage The inverse O/C time protection is equipped with a undervoltage detection that can be
Consideration disabled. This function can influence the overcurrent detection in two different ways:
• Voltage controlled:
If the value falls below a settable voltage threshold, an overcurrent stage with a
lower pick-up value is enabled.
• Voltage restraint:
The pickup threshold of the overcurrent stage depends on the voltage level. A lower
voltage reduces the current pick-up value (see Figure 2-16). A linear, directly
proportional dependency is realized in the zone between U/UNom = 1.00 and 0.25.
Consequently, the following rule applies:
48 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V)
Factor
U
1.0 I ( U ) pickup = I p ⋅ 1.00 for 1.00 ≤ ------------- ≤ ∞
U nom
0.75
U U
I ( U ) pickup = I p ⋅ -------------- for 0.25 ≤ ------------- ≤ 1.00
0.5 U nom U nom
0.25
U
I ( U ) pickup = I p ⋅ 0.25 for 0.00 ≤ ------------- ≤ 0.25
U nom
0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0
U⁄U
nom
where Unom – Generator nominal voltage = parameter 0251 UN GEN/MOTOR

I(U)pickup – Voltage-influenced pickup value
Ip – Pick-up value of inverse characteristic parameter = parameter 1402 Ip
Figure 2-16 Pick-up Value Voltage Restraint
The Ip reference value is decreased proportional to the voltage decrease.

Consequently, for a constant current I the I/Ip ratio is increased and the trip time is
reduced. Compared with the standard characteristics represented in Section 4.3, the
tripping characteristic shifts to the left side in relation to the decreasing voltage.
The changeover to the lower pick-up value or the reduction of the pickup threshold are
performed on a per phase basis. The assignments of voltages to the current-carrying
phases are represented in Table 2-5. As the protection used in the generator range is
incorporated in the network grading plan, the phase shift of the voltages by the unit
transformer must also be considered. This facts requires principle distinction between
a unit connection and a busbar connection, which must be communicated to the
device by means of the parameter 0213 SCHEME. As phase-to-phase voltages are
referred to in any case, faulty measurements in case of earth faults are avoided.
Table 2-5 Control Voltages in Relation to the Fault Currents
Current Voltage
Busbar connection Unit connection
IL1 UL1 – UL2 ((UL1 – UL2) – (UL3 – UL1)) / √3
IL2 UL2 – UL3 ((UL2 – UL3) – (UL1 – UL2)) / √3
IL3 UL3 – UL1 ((UL3 – UL1) – (UL2 – UL3)) / √3
In order to avoid an unwanted operation for a voltage transformer fault, a blocking

function miniature circuit breaker as well as via the device-internal measuring voltages
failure detection (”Fuse–Failure–Monitor”, also refer to section 2.38.1.4).
Figure 2-17 illustrates the logic diagram of the inverse O/C time protection without
undervoltage influencing, whereas the Figures 2-18 and 2-19 illustrate the logic
diagrams with undervoltage influencing.
7UM62 Manual 49
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
FNo. 01899
OR O/C Ip pick.up
FNo. 01896
O/C Ip Fault L1
1403 T Ip
Pickup IL1
&
FNo. 01897 FNo. 01900 Tripping

O/C Ip Fault L2 O/C Ip TRIP matrix
1403 T Ip
(Pickup)
& OR
TMin
FNo. 01898 TRIP CMD
O/C Ip Fault L3
1403 T Ip
(Pickup)
&
FNo. 01883 FNo. 01892

>BLOCK O/C Ip O/C Ip BLOCKED
Figure 2-17 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Controlled Inverse O/C Time Protection without
Undervoltage Influencing
50 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
FNo. 01899
OR O/C Ip pick.up
FNo. 01896
O/C Ip Fault L1
1402 Ip
1403 T Ip
&
IL1
FNo. 01897
FNo. 01900 Tripping
1402 Ip O/C Ip Fault L2 O/C Ip TRIP matrix
1403 T Ip
IL2
&
OR
FNo. 01898 TMin

O/C Ip Fault L3 TRIP CMD
1402 Ip
1403 T Ip
IL3
&
UL1
Loop
UL2
release
UL3
Fuse Failure
OR
FNr. 000361
>FAIL:Feeder VT
FNo. 01883 FNo. 01892

Figure 2-18 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Controlled Inverse O/C Time Protection
The changeover to the lower current pick-up value in case of decreasing voltage (loop
release) is performed on a phase by phase basis according to table 2-5.
7UM62 Manual 51
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
FNo. 01899
OR O/C Ip pick.up
FNo. 01896
1402 Ip
O/C Ip Fault L1
1403 T Ip
IL1 &
FNo. 01897
FNo. 01900 Tripping
1402 Ip O/C Ip Fault L2 O/C Ip TRIP matrix
1403 T Ip
IL2 & OR
FNo. 01898 TMin

O/C Ip Fault L3 TRIP CMD
1402 Ip
1403 T Ip
IL3 &
Control
UL1 voltages in Ux1
UL2 relation to Ux2
the fault
UL3 Ux3
current
Fuse Failure Ux=Un

OR
FNr. 000361
>FAIL:Feeder VT
FNo. 01883 FNo. 01892

Figure 2-19 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Restraint Inverse O/C Time Protection
The reduction of the current pick-up threshold in case of a decreasing voltage (control
voltage assignment) is performed phase by phase according to Table 2-5.
2.8.2 Setting Hints
General The inverse O/C time protection is only effective and accessible if this function was
allocated to the input CTs of either side 1 or side 2 during configuration (see Section
2.2), i.e. if address 0114 O/C PROT. Ip = with IEC-characteristic on side
1, with ANSI-characteristic on side 1, with IEC-characteristic on
side 2 or with ANSI-characteristic on side 2 was set. Disabled is
selected if the function is not needed.
Ip overcurrent Address 1401 O/C Ip is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only the
stage trip command (Block Relay). It must be noted that, for the inverse O/C time
protection, a safety factor of about 1.1 has been included between the pick-up value
and the setting value. This means that a pickup will only occur if a current of about 1.1
52 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
times of the setting value is present. The function will reset as soon as the value falls
below 95 % of the pick-up value.
The current is set at address1402 Ip. The maximum operating current is of primary
importance for the setting. A pickup caused by an overload must be excluded, as the
device operates in this mode as short-circuit protection with correspondingly short
relay times and not as overload protection.
The corresponding time multiplier for configuration of IEC characteristics (address
0114 O/C PROT. Ip = IEC Side n) is accessible at address 1403 T Ip. At
address 1405 IEC CURVE, 3 IEC characteristics can be set.
The time multiplier for configuring ANSI characteristics (address 0114 O/C PROT.
Ip= ANSI Side n) can be found at address 1404 TIME DIAL: TD; parameter 1406
ANSI CURVE offers a choice between 5 ANSI characteristics.
The time multipliers must be coordinated with the network grading plan.
The time multipliers can also be set to ∞. If set to infinity, the stage will not trip after
pickup. However, the pickup is signalled. If the Ip stage is not required at all, set at the
address 0114 O/C PROT. Ip = Disabled, or switch the function out by setting 1401
O/C Ip = OFF during configuration (see Section 2.2).
The address 1408 serves to predefine the U< pick-up value for the undervoltage trip
of the Ip pickup value for voltage-controlled inverse O/C time protection/AMZ
(parameter 1407 VOLT. INFLUENCE = Voltage controlled). The parameter is
set to a value situated just below the lowest phase-to-phase voltage permissible
during operation, e.g. from 75 to 80 V. In this context, the same rules apply as for the
undervoltage seal-in of the definite O/C time protection (see also subsection 2.6.2).
If at address 1407 VOLT. INFLUENCE = Without or Voltage restraint is set,
the parameter 1408 has no function.
2.8.2.1 Settings of the Inverse O/C Time Protection

1401 O/C Ip OFF OFF Inverse O/C Time Protection Ip
ON
mands
1402 Ip 0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A Ip Pickup
1403 T Ip 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T Ip Time Dial
1404 TIME DIAL: TD 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 TIME DIAL: TD
1405 IEC CURVE Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve

Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
7UM62 Manual 53
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

1406 ANSI CURVE Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Definite Inverse
1407 VOLT. INFLUENCE without without Voltage Influence

Voltage controlled
Voltage restraint
1408 U< 10.0..125.0 V 75.0 V U< Threshold for Release Ip
2.8.2.2 Information for the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection

01883 >BLOCK O/C Ip >BLOCK inverse O/C time protection
01891 O/C Ip OFF O/C protection Ip is switched OFF
01892 O/C Ip BLOCKED O/C protection Ip is BLOCKED
01893 O/C Ip ACTIVE O/C protection Ip is ACTIVE
01896 O/C Ip Fault L1 O/C fault detection Ip phase L1
01899 O/C Ip pick.up O/C Ip picked up
01900 O/C Ip TRIP O/C Ip TRIP
54 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49)
2.9 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49)
General The thermal overload protection feature of the 7UM61 is designed to prevent
overloads from damaging the protected equipment.
The device is capable of projecting excessive operating temperatures for the
protected equipment in accordance with a thermal model, based on the following
differential equation:
dΘ 1 1 2 1
-------- + --- ⋅ Θ = --- ⋅ I + --- ⋅ Θ K
dt τ τ τ
where Θ – Actual operating temperature expressed in per cent of the

operating temperature corresponding to the maximum
permissible operating current k · IN
ΘK – Coolant temperature or ambient temperature as a difference to
the 40 °C reference temperature
τ – Thermal time constant for the heating of the equipment being
protected
I – Operating current expressed in per cent of the maximum
permissible operating current Imax = k · IN
The thermal overload protection feature models a heat image of the equipment being
protected. Both the previous history of an overload and the heat loss to the
environment are taken into account.
The solution of this equation is in steady-state operation an e-function whose
asymptote represents the final temperature ΘEnd. The thermal overload protection
calculates the operating temperature of the protected equipment in per cent of the
maximum allowable operating temperature. When the calculated operating
temperature reaches a settable percentage of the maximum allowable operating
temperature, a warning message is issued to allow time for the load reduction
measures to take place. If the second temperature threshold, i.e. end temperature =
trip temperature, is reached, the protected equipment is disconnected from the
network. It is also possible, however, to set the overload protection to Alarm only.
If this option is set, the device only outputs an alarm, even if the end temperature is
reached.
The temperature rise is calculated from the highest of the three phase currents. Since
the calculation is based on the r.m.s. values of the currents, it also considers
harmonics which contribute to a temperature rise of the stator winding.
The maximum thermally permissible continuous current Imax is described as a multiple
of the rated current I N of the protected object:
Imax = k · IN
In addition to the k factor (parameter K-FACTOR), the TIME CONSTANT τ and the
alarm temperature Q ALARM (in percent of the trip temperature ΘTRIP) must be
specified.
The thermal overload protection also features a current warning element I ALARM in
addition to the temperature warning stage. The current warning element may report
an overload current prematurely (before Imax is exceeded), even if the calculated
operating temperature has not yet attained the warning or tripping levels.
7UM62 Manual 55
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Coolant The thermal model of the 7UM62 considers an external temperature value. Depending
Temperature/ on the application, this temperature can be the coolant or ambient temperature or, in
Ambient the case of gas turbines, the entry temperature of the cold gas. The temperature to be
Temperature considered can be fed in by one of the following:
− Measuring transducer (TD 2)
− Profibus DP interface/Modbus
− Temperature detection unit (Thermobox, RTD 1)
An external temperature sensor measures e.g. the coolant temperature and converts
it into a current or voltage that is proportional to the temperature. This output quantity
can be fed into the 7UM62 via the integrated measuring transducer TD 2. If a signal
level between 4 mA and 20 mA is used, the measuring circuit for temperature input
can additionally be monitored for interruptions. If the measured currents of the external
amplifier drops to less than 2 mA, the relay outputs an alarm, and switches at the same
time to the internal coolant temperature of 40 °C (which is the temperature assumed
if there is no coolant temperature detection).
The ambient or coolant temperature can also be detected by an external temperature
sensor, digitized and fed to the 7UM62 via the Profibus DP interface/ Modbus.
If a temperature supervision feature is implemented by means of the thermobox (see
section 2.42) the RTD1 input can be used for temperature inclusion considered by the
thermal replica.
Where the coolant temperature detection exists, the maximum permissible current
Imax is influenced by the temperature difference of the coolant. If the ambient or
coolant temperature is low, the machine can support a higher current than it does
when the temperature is high.
Current Limiting In order to avoid that the thermal overload protection reaches extremely short trip
times on occurrence of high short-circuit currents (and on selection of a small time
constant) and thus perhaps affects the time grading of the short-circuit protection, it is
possible to determine a current limiting of the overload protection. Currents exceeding
the value specified at parameter 1615A I MAX THERM. are limited to this value. For
this reason, they do not further reduce trip time in the thermal image.
Standstill Time The above differential equation assumes a constant cooling that is expressed by the
Constant time constant τ = Rth · Cth (thermal resistance and thermal capacitance). In a self-
ventilated machine, however, the thermal time constant at standstill can differ
considerably from the constant of a steadily running machine, since with the machine
running the ventilation provides for cooling whereas at standstill only the natural
convection occurs.
Therefore, two time constants must be considered in such cases for setting.
In this context, a machine standstill represents the moment when the current falls
below the threshold value BkrClosed I MIN (see side title”Current Flow Monitoring”
in Section 2.3).
Blocking The thermal overload protection feature may be reset via a binary input (”>RM
th.rep. O/L”). The current-induced overtemperature value is reset to zero. The
same is achieved by entering a blocking (”>BLK ThOverload”); in that case the
overload protection is blocked completely, including the current warning stage.
When machines must be started for emergency reasons, operating temperatures
above the maximum permissible operating temperatures can be allowed by blocking
56 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
the tripping signal via a binary input (”>Emer.Start O/L”). Since the calculated
operating temperature may be higher than the maximum allowable operating
temperature after drop out of the binary input has taken place, the thermal overload
protection function features a programmable run-on time interval run-on time interval
(T EMERGENCY) which is started when the binary input drops out. Tripping will be
defeated until this time interval elapses. The binary input used for emergency starting
affects only the tripping signal. There is no effect on the fault event protocol, nor does
the thermal memory reset.
Behaviour in the For the overload protection, together with all other thermal protection functions of the
Case of a Power 7UM62, you can set in the Power System Data 1 (parameter 0274A ATEX100, see
Supply Failure Section 2.3) whether the calculated overtemperature will be buffered in case of a
power supply failure, or reset to zero. This second option is the default setting.
Figure 2-20 shows the logic diagram for thermal overload protection.
7UM62 Manual 57
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
CB closed
0281 BkrClosed I MIN
I>
1615A I MAX THERM.
1612A Kt-FACTOR
IL3 Θ
IL2
IL1
I kτ x τ
1610A I ALARM 1602 K-FACTOR
1603 TIME CONSTANT FNo. 01515

OR & O/L I Alarm
1604 Q ALARM
FNo. 01516
dΘ 1 1 2 1
-------- + --- ⋅ Θ = --- ⋅ I + --- ⋅ Θ O/L Q Alarm
dt τ τ τ K Θmax
L1 Θ=0
FNo. 01521
ThOverload TRIP
100 % (fixed)
1607 TEMP. INPUT Tripping
RTD 1
&
matrix
Disabled
Profibus DP
(ΘK = 40 °C) TMin
4-20 mA TRIP CMD
FNo. 01508
& >Fail.Temp.inp FNo. 01517
& O/L Th. pick.up
FNo. 01503 FNo. 01512

>BLK ThOverload Th.Overload BLK
FNo. 01506
>RM th.rep. O/L OR
FNo. 01519
RM th.rep. O/L
FNo. 01513
OR OR Overload ACT
1601 Ther. OVER LOAD
FNo. 01511
OFF Th.Overload OFF
ON
”1” Block relay
Alarm Only
1616A T EMERGENCY
FNo. 01507
>Emer.Start O/L
Figure 2-20 Logic diagram of the Overload protection
58 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
2.9.2 Setting Hints
General Thermal overload protection is only effective and accessible if address 0116
Therm.Overload was set to Enabled. Set Disabled if the function is not required.
Transformers and generators are prone to damage by overloads which last for an
extended period of time. For this reason, short circuit protection elements such as the
overcurrent protection should not be used to protect against overload. The short time
delays associated with short circuit protection do not allow sufficient time for the
orderly curtailment of load by operating personnel. In addition, short circuit protection
set to trip for overload will not allow short-duration, non-damaging overloads – a
practice which is often required in real operating situations.
The 7UM62 protective relay features an thermal overload protective function with a
thermal tripping characteristic curve which may be adapted to the overload tolerance
of the equipment being protected.
At the address 1601 Ther. OVER LOAD you can set the thermal overload protection
OFF or ON, you can block the trip command (Block relay for trip commands);
or set the protection function to Alarm Only. In that last case no fault record is
created n case of an overload. If the overload protection is switched ON, tripping is also
possible.
K–Factor The overload protection is set in per unit quantities. The nominal current IN, machine of
the object to be protected (generator, motor, transformer) is typically used as base
current. The thermally permissible continuous current Imax prim can be used to
calculate a factor kprim:
I max prim
k prim = --------------------------
I N, Machine
The thermally permissible continuous current for the equipment being protected is
indicated in the manufacturer’s specifications. If no specifications are available, a
value of 1.1 times the nominal current rating is assumed.
The K-FACTOR to be set at the 7UM62 (address 1602) refers to the secondary
nominal current (= device current). The following applies for the conversion:
I max prim I N Machine
Setting value K-FACTOR = ------------------------ ⋅ ------------------------
I N Machine I NCT prim
where Imax prim Maximum permissible continuous motor current in primary

amperes
IN Machine Nominal machine current
IN CT prim Current transformer nominal primary current
Example: Generator and current transformer with the following data:

Permissible continuous current: Imax prim= 1.15 · IN, Machine
Generator nominal current IN Machine= 483 A
Current transformer 500 A/1 A
483 A
Settingxvalue K–FACTOR = 1, 15 ⋅ --------------- ≈ 1.11
500 A
7UM62 Manual 59
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Time Constant τ The thermal overload protection element tracks excessive temperature progression,
employing a thermal differential equation that uses an exponential function. The TIME
CONSTANT τ (address 1603) is used in the calculation to determine the operating
temperature.
If the overload characteristic of the generator to be protected is pre-determined, the
user must select the protection trip characteristic in a way that it covers the overload
characteristic to a large extent, at least with small overloads.
This is also the case if the permissible power-up time corresponding to a certain
overload value is indicated.
Warning By setting the thermal warning level Q ALARM (address 1604), a warning message
Temperature can be issued prior to tripping, thus allowing time for load curtailment procedures to
Levels be implemented. This warning level simultaneously represents the dropout level for
the tripping signal. In other words, the tripping signal is interrupted only when the
calculated operating temperature falls below the warning level, thus allowing the
protected equipment to be placed back into service.
The thermal warning level is given in % of the tripping temperature level (maximum
allowable operating temperature).
Note: With the typical value of K-FACTOR = 1.1, the following final tripping
overtemperature value results in case of the application of the nominal machine
current and adapted primary transformer current:
1
Θ ⁄ Θ Trip = ------------ = 83 %
2
1, 1
of the tripping temperature. Consequently, the warning stage should be set between
the final overtemperature with the nominal current (in this case 83 %) and the tripping
overtemperature (100 %).
In the present example, the thermal memory reaches the following value if the nominal
current is applied:
1
Θ ⁄ Θ Trip = --------------- = 76 %
2
1, 15
A current warning level (parameter 1610A I ALARM) is also available. The level is
set in secondary amperes, and should be set equal to, or slightly less than, the
permissible continuous current K-FACTOR · IN sec. The current warning level may be
used in lieu of the thermal warning level by setting the thermal warning level 100 %,
which makes it practically ineffective.
Extension of Time The time constant programmed at address 1603 is valid for a running machine. On
Constants at slowing down or standstill, the machine may cool down much slower. This behaviour
Machine Standstill can be modeled by means of a prolongation of the time constant by the Kt-FACTOR
(address 1612A) on machine standstill. In this context, a machine standstill represents
the moment when the current falls below the threshold value BkrClosed I MIN (see
side title ”Current Flow Monitoring” in Section 2.3).
If no distinguishing of the time constants is necessary, the Kt-FACTOR is left at 1
(default setting).
Current Limiting The parameter 1615A I MAX THERM. specifies up to which current value the trip
times are calculated according to the pre-defined thermal formula. In the trip
characteristics of Figure 4-4 in Section 4.4, this limit value determines the transition to
the horizontal part of the characteristics, in which there is no further trip time reduction
60 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
despite increasing current values. The limit value must be specified at a value
ensuring that, even for the highest possible short-circuit current, the trip times of the
overload protection exceed the trip times of the short-circuit protective relays
(differential protection, impedance protection, time overcurrent protection). As a rule,
this parameter can be set to three times the nominal generator current.
Emergency The run-on time to be entered at address 1616A T EMERGENCY must be sufficient to
Starting ensure that after an emergency startup and dropout of binary input >Emer.Start O/
L” the trip command is blocked until the thermal replica is again below the dropout
threshold.
Ambient or Coolant The indications specified up to now are sufficient for the modeling of the
Temperature overtemperature. In addition to this, the machine protection can also process the
ambient or coolant temperature. This temperature value can be fed to the relay via
measuring transducer TD2 as a temperature-proportional DC current from a
measuring transducer with a live zero signal between 4 and 20 mA, or communicated
to the relay as digitalized measuring via the Fieldbus. Address 1607 TEMP. INPUT
serves to select the temperature input procedure. If there is no coolant temperature
detection, the address1607 is set to Disabled. The assignment between the input
signal and the temperature can be set at address 1608 (in °C) or 1609 (in °F) TEMP.
SCAL.. The value set there is equivalent to 100 % of the Profibus DP/Modbus value,
or full-scale deflection (20 mA) of the measuring transducer. In the default setting,
100 % (Profibus DP/Modbus) or 20 mA (measuring transducer TD2) correspond to
100 °C.
Is under address 1607 TEMP. INPUT the setting temperature of RTD 1 selected, the
temperature scaling of addresses 1608, 1609 is ineffective. Neither of the
parameters is considered in the calculation.
If the ambient temperature detection is used, the user must be aware that the K-
FACTOR to be set refers to an ambient temperature of 40 °C, i.e. it corresponds to the
maximum permissible current at a temperature of 40 °C.
All calculations are performed with standardized quantities. The ambient temperature
must also be standardized. The temperature with the nominal machine current is used
as standardization quantity. If the nominal machine current deviates from the nominal
primary CT current, the temperature must be adapted according to the following
formula. At address 1605 or 1606 TEMP. RISE I the temperature adapted to the
nominal transformer current is set. This setting value is used as standardization
quantity of the ambient temperature input.
I Nprim 2
Θ Nsec = Θ NMach ⋅ æ ------------------ö
è I NMachø
where ΘNsec – Machine temperature with nominal secondary current = setting at

the 7UM62 (address 1605 or 1606)
ΘNMach – Machine temperature with nominal machine current
INprim – Nominal primary current of the current transformers
INMach – Nominal machine current
If the temperature input is not used, the address 1607 TEMP. INPUT must be set to
Disabled. In this case, the settings of the addresses1605 or 1606 and 1608 or
1609 are not considered.
7UM62 Manual 61
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
If the temperature input is used, the trip times change if the coolant temperature
deviates from the internal reference temperature of 40 °C. The following formula can
be used to calculate the trip time:
I ö 2 Θ K – 40 °C æ I pre ö 2
æ ------------ + ---------------------------- – ------------
è k ⋅ I Nø 2 è k ⋅ I Nø
k ⋅ ΘN
t = τ ⋅ ln -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
I ö 2 Θ K – 40 °C
æ ------------ + ---------------------------- – 1
è k ⋅ I Nø 2
k ⋅ ΘN
whereτ – TIME CONSTANT (address 1603)

k – K-FACTOR (address 1602)
IN – Nominal device current
I – Actually flowing secondary current
Ipre – Previous load current
ΘN – Temperature with nominal current IN (address 1605 TEMP. RISE I)
ΘK – Coolant temperature input(scaling with address 1608
or 1609)
Example:
Machine: INMach = 483 A
ImaxMach = 1.15 IN at ΘK = 40 °C
ΘNMach = 93° C Temperature at INMach
τ = 600 s (thermal machine time constant)
Current transformer: 500 A / 1 A
483 A (to be set at address 1602)
K-FACTOR = 1, 15 ⋅ --------------- ≈ 1, 11
500 A
2 (to be set at address 1605

Θ Nsec = 93° C ⋅ æ ----------ö ≈ 100° C
500
è 483ø or 1606 TEMP. RISE I)
62 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
The following trip times result for different ambient temperatures ΘK with a supposed
load current of I = 1.5 ⋅ IN, device and a preload Ipre = 0
2 40 °C – 40 °C
æ --------ö + ------------------------------------ – 0ö÷
æ 1.5
ç è 1.1ø 2
1.1 ⋅ 100 °C
with ΘK = 40 °C: t = çç 600 s ⋅ ln ---------------------------------------------------------------------÷÷ ≈ 463 s
2 40 °C – 40 °C
ç æ 1.5
--------ö + ------------------------------------ – 1÷
è è 1.1 ø 2 ø
1.1 ⋅ 100 °C
2 80 °C – 40 °C
æ æ 1.5
--------ö + ----------------------------------- - – 0ö÷
ç è 1.1ø 2
1.1 ⋅ 100 °C
with ΘK = 80 °C: t = ç 600 s ⋅ ln ---------------------------------------------------------------------÷ ≈ 366 s
ç 2 ÷
ç æ 1.5
--------ö + ------------------------------------ – 1÷
80 °C – 40 °C
è è 1.1ø 2 ø
1.1 ⋅ 100 °C
2
æ æ 1.5
--------ö + ---------------------------------
0 °C – 40 °C
- – 0ö÷
ç è 1.1ø 2
1.1 ⋅ 100 °C
with ΘK = 0 °C: t = ç 600 s ⋅ ln -------------------------------------------------------------------÷ ≈ 637 s
ç 2 ÷
ç æ 1.5
--------ö + ---------------------------------- – 1÷
0 °C – 40 °C
è è 1.1ø 2 ø
1.1 ⋅ 100 °C
2.9.2.1 Thermal Overload Protection Settings
The following list indicates the setting ranges and the default settings of an IN = 1 A

1601 Ther. OVER LOAD OFF OFF Thermal Overload Protection
ON
mands
Alarm Only
1602 K-FACTOR 0.10..4.00 1.11 K-Factor
1603 TIME CONSTANT 30..32000 sec 600 sec Thermal Time Constant
1604 Θ ALARM 70..100 % 90 % Thermal Alarm Stage
1610A I ALARM 0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A Current Overload Alarm Setpoint
1612A Kτ-FACTOR 1.0..10.0 1.0 Kt-Factor when Motor Stops
1615A I MAX THERM. 0.50..8.00 A 3.30 A Maximum Current for Thermal

Replica
1616A T EMERGENCY 10..15000 sec 100 sec Emergency Time
1605 TEMP. RISE I 40..200 °C 100 °C Temperature Rise at Rated Sec.

Curr.
1606 TEMP. RISE I 104..392 °F 212 °F Temperature Rise at Rated Sec.

Curr.
7UM62 Manual 63
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

1607 TEMP. INPUT Disabled Disabled Temperature Input
4-20 mA
Fieldbus
Temp. of RTD 1
1608 TEMP. SCAL. 40..300 °C 100 °C Temperature for Scaling
1609 TEMP. SCAL. 104..572 °F 212 °F Temperature for Scaling
2.9.2.2 Information List for the Thermal Overload Protection

01503 >BLK ThOverload >BLOCK thermal overload protection
01506 >RM th.rep. O/L >Reset memory for thermal replica O/L
01507 >Emer.Start O/L >Emergency start O/L
01508 >Fail.Temp.inp >Failure temperature input
01511 Th.Overload OFF Thermal Overload Protection OFF
01512 Th.Overload BLK Thermal Overload Protection BLOCKED
01513 Overload ACT Overload Protection ACTIVE
01514 Fail.Temp.inp Failure temperature input
01519 RM th.rep. O/L Reset memory for thermal replica O/L
01515 O/L I Alarm Overload Current Alarm (I alarm)
01516 O/L Θ Alarm Thermal Overload Alarm
01517 O/L Th. pick.up Thermal Overload picked up
01521 ThOverload TRIP Thermal Overload TRIP
64 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46)
2.10 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46)
General Unbalanced load protection detects unbalanced loads. The negative sequence
currents associated with unbalanced loads create reverse fields in three-phase
induction machines, which act on the rotor at double frequency. Eddy currents are
induced at the rotor surface, and local overheating of the rotor end zones and the slot
wedges begins to take place. Another effect of unbalanced loads is an overheating of
the damper winding. In addition, it may be used to detect interruptions, faults, and
polarity problems with current transformers. It is particularly useful in detecting phase-
to-ground, phase-to-phase, and double phase-to-ground faults with magnitudes lower
than the maximum load current.
Unbalanced Load The unbalanced load protection feature of the 7UM62 relay uses filtering to calculate
Determination the symmetrical components from the phase currents. It evaluates the negative-phase
sequence system, the negative phase-sequence current I2. If the negative phase-
sequence current exceeds a set threshold value, the trip timer starts. A trip command
is transmitted as soon as this trip time has expired.
Warning stage If the value of the continuously permissible, negative phase-sequence current I2> is
exceeded, a warning message ”I2> Warn” is transmitted after a selectable time T
WARN (see Figure 2-21).
Thermal The machine manufacturers indicate the permissible unbalanced load by means of the
Characteristic following formula:
K where tperm =maximum permissible application time of the

t zul = ------------- negative-sequence current I2
I2 2
æ -----ö
è I Nø K =Asymmetry factor (machine constant)
I2/IN =Unbal. load (ratio neg. phase-sequ. I2 nom. cur. IN)
The asymmetry factor depends on the machine and represents the time in seconds
during which the generator can be loaded with a 100 % unbalanced load. This factor
is typically in a range between 5 s and 30 s.
The heating up of the object to be protected is calculated in the relay as soon as the
I2> permissible unbalanced load is exceeded. The current-time-area is calculated
constantly to ensure a correct consideration of the changing load. The thermal
characteristic is tripped as soon as the current-time-area ((I2/IN)2 ⋅ t) has reached the
K asymmetry factor.
Limitation The model of the heating of the object to be protected is limited to a 200 % trip
temperature overrange.
Cool Down A settable cool-down time starts as soon as the value falls below the constantly
permissible unbalanced load I2>. The parameter T COOL DOWN is defined as the time
required by the thermal image to cool down from 100 % to 0 %. The cool-down time
depends on the construction type of the generator, and especially on the damper
winding. Preloading is taken into consideration when unbalanced loading occurs
during the cool-down period. The protective relay will thus trip in a shorter time.
7UM62 Manual 65
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Definite-Time High negative phase-sequence currents can only be caused by a two-pole power
Trip Stage system short circuit which must be covered in accordance with the network grading
plan. For this reason, the thermal characteristic is cut by a selectable, definite-time,
negative phase-sequence current stage (address 1706 I2>> and 1707 T I2>>)
(see Figure 2-21).
Please also observe the instructions regarding the phase rotation (phase sequence)
provided in Sections 2.3 and 2.43.
Unbalanced load stage I2adm.
T WARN
Thermal
trip stage
Unbalanced load
Tripping zone I2>>
T I2>>
I2 adm I2>> I2
Figure 2-21 Tripping Zone of the Unbalanced Load Protection
FNo.05161
IL1 1704 FACTOR K
I2 Q TRIP
I2 2
1
I2
IL2 ICO
å --- ⋅ ∆t &
IL3
0
In
Reset
FNo. 05146
I2=0 FNr.05158
>RM th.rep. I2 Tripping
OR RM th.rep. I2 matrix
FNr.05165
I2> picked up
1702 I2>
1703 T WARN
FNr.05156
& I2> Warn
TMin
TRIP CMD
1705 I2>> FNr.05160
1707 T I2>>
I2>> TRIP
&
FNr.05159
I2>> picked up
FNo. 05143 FNr.05152
>BLOCK I2 I2 BLOCKED
Figure 2-22 Logic Diagram of the Unbalanced Load Protection
66 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Logic Figure 2-22 shows the logic diagram of the unbalanced load protection. The protection
may be blocked via a binary input (”>BLOCK I2”). Pickups and time stages are reset
and the metered values in the thermal model are cleared. The binary input ”>RM
th.rep. I2” only serves to clear metered values of the thermal characteristic.
2.10.2 Setting Hints
General The unbalance load protection is only effective and accessible if it was selected at
address0117 UNBALANCE LOAD = Enabled within the framework of project
configuration. Set Disabled if the function is not required.
The function can be switched ON or OFF at address 1701 UNBALANCE LOAD. As an
alternative, the user can only block the trip signal (Block Relay).
The maximum permissible, constant negative phase-sequence current is required by
the thermal model. For machines of up to 100 MVA with non-salient pole rotors, this
current typically amounts to a value in a range from 6 % to 8 %. With salient-pole
rotors, it is at least 12 % of the nominal machine current. For larger machines and in
cases of doubt, please observe the instructions of the machine manufacturer.
It is important to ensure that the values given by the manufacturer represent the
primary values of the machine. For example, if the long-time allowable thermal inverse
current —with respect to the nominal machine current — is given, this value must
be used to calculate the settings for the unbalanced load time-overcurrent element.
For the settings on the protective relay, this information is converted to the secondary
inverse current. For this situation
I 2max prim I N Machine
Pickup Setting I2> = æ ------------------------ö ⋅ ------------------------
è I N Machineø I N CT prim
where I2 max prim Permissible long-term thermal inverse current of the

machine
IN Machine Nominal machine current
IN CT prim Nominal primary CT current
Pickup Threshold / The value for I2> is set at address 1702. It is at the same time the pickup value for a
Warning Stage current warning stage the delay time for which T WARN is set at address 1703.
Example:
Machine: IN Machine = 483 A

I2 perm prim / IN Machine = 11 % continuous (salient-pole
machine, see Figure 2-23)
Current IN CT prim = 500 A

transformer:
Setting value I2 perm. = 11 % · (483 A/500 A) = 10.6 %
Negative Sequence If the machine manufacturer has indicated the loadability duration due to an
Factor K unbalanced load by means of the constant K = (I2/IN)2 ⋅ t, it is set immediately at the
address 1704 FACTOR K. The constant K is proportional to the permissible energy
loss.
7UM62 Manual 67
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Conversion to The factor K can be derived from the unbalanced load characteristic according to
Secondary Values Figure 2-23 by reading the time corresponding to the FACTOR K at the point I2/IN = 1.
Example:
tperm = 20 s for I2/IN = 1
The constant Kprimary = 20 s determined in this way is valid for the machine side
(primary side).
The factor Kprimary can be converted to the secondary side by means of the following
formula:
I N Machine 2
K sec = K primary ⋅ æ ------------------------ö
è I N CT prim ø
The calculated asymmetry factor Ksec is set as FACTOR K at address 1704.
Example: IN Machine = 483 A

IN CT prim = 500 A
Factor Kprimary = 20 s
Setting value at address1704:

2
FACTOR K = 20 s ⋅ æè ---------------öø
483 A
= 18,7 s
500 A
max. perm. I2/IN in permanent operation

I2/IN max. perm. I2/IN in case of a system fault
1.0
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.11
0.1
0.06 t/s
10 20 30 40 50 100 500 1000
Figure 2-23 Example of an Unbalanced Load Characteristic Specified by the Machine

Manufacturer
68 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Time for Cool Down The parameter 1705 T COOL DOWN is defined as the time required by the thermal
image to cool down from 100 % to 0 %. If the machine manufacturer does not provide
this information, the setting value can be calculated by assuming an equal value for
the cool-down time and the heating time of the object to be protected. The formula
below shows the relation between the K asymmetry factor and the cool-down time:
K
t Cooldown = ---------------------------------
2
( I 2 perm ⁄ I N )
Example:
The following cool-down time results for a K = 20 s and a permissible constant
unbalanced load I2/IN = 11 %.
20 s
t Cooldown = -------------------- ≈ 1650 s
2
( 0, 11 )
This value T COOL DOWN is set at address 1705.
Definite-Time Asymmetrical system faults also cause high negative phase-sequence currents. A
Tripping definite-time negative phase-sequence current–stage 1706 I2>> can detect
Characteristic asymmetrical power system short circuits. A setting to about 60 % to 65 % ensures
that a trip is always performed according to the thermal characteristic in case of a
phase failure (unbalanced load always less than 100/√3 %, i.e. I2 < 58 %). On the
other hand, a two-pole short circuit can be supposed for an unbalanced load of more
than 60 % to 65 %. The delay time T I2>> (address 1707) must be coordinated with
the system grading of phase-to-phase short circuits.
Contrary to the time-overcurrent protection, the I2>> stage is able to detect fault
currents under nominal current. The following conditions are valid:
− A phase-to-phase fault (I) results in the following negative sequence current
1
I 2 = ------- ⋅ I = 0.58 ⋅ I
3
− A phase-to-ground fault I) corresponds to the following negative sequence current

1
I 2 = --- ⋅ I = 0.33 ⋅ I
3
With an isolated starpoint, the I current value is particularly low and can be
neglected. With a low-resistance grounding, however, it is determined by the
ground resistance.
2.10.2.1 Settings of the Unbalanced Load Protection

1701 UNBALANCE LOAD OFF OFF Unbalance Load Protection
ON
mands
1702 I2> 3.0..30.0 % 10.6 % Continously Permissible Cur-

rent I2
7UM62 Manual 69
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

1703 T WARN 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 20.00 sec Warning Stage Time Delay
1704 FACTOR K 2.0..100.0 sec; ∞ 18.7 sec Negativ Sequence Factor K
1705 T COOL DOWN 0..50000 sec 1650 sec Time for Cooling Down
1706 I2>> 10..100 % 60 % I2>> Pickup
1707 T I2>> 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec T I2>> Time Delay
2.10.2.2 Information for the Unbalanced Load Protection

05143 >BLOCK I2 >BLOCK I2 (Unbalance Load)
05146 >RM th.rep. I2 >Reset memory for thermal replica I2
05151 I2 OFF I2 switched OFF
05152 I2 BLOCKED I2 is BLOCKED
05153 I2 ACTIVE I2 is ACTIVE
05158 RM th.rep. I2 Reset memory of thermal replica I2
05156 I2> Warn Unbalanced load: Current warning stage
05165 I2> picked up I2> picked up
05159 I2>> picked up I2>> picked up
05160 I2>> TRIP Unbalanced load: TRIP of current stage
05161 I2 Θ TRIP Unbalanced load: TRIP of thermal stage
70 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51)
2.11 Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51)
General Gas turbines can be started by means of a frequency starting converter. A switched-
mode converter feeds a current into the generator and creates a rotating field whose
frequency gradually increases. This causes the rotor to turn and thus to drive the tur-
bine. At approx. 70 % of the rated speed, the turbine is ignited and further accelerated
until it attains rated speed. The startup converter is switched off.
Figure 2-24 shows the characteristic quantities to be considered during startup.
Please note that all quantities are normalized to the rated values.
U f 1.0 0.05
-P
UN fN SN
n Startup converter
nN switched off
0.8 0.04
I
n
IN nN
U f
U UN fN
UN 0.6 0.03
-P
SN
0.4 0.02
I
IN
0.2 0.01
U
UN
60 120 180
t (s)
Figure 2-24 Characteristic Quantities to be Considered during Startup of a Gas Turbine

(SN = 150 MVA; UN = 10.5 kV; PStartup converter = 2.9 MW)
Assuming that a short-circuit can occur in the generator during startup, a short-circuit
protection is necessary over the entire frequency range.
The 7UM62 offers for this a highly useful feature, namely its automatic adaption of the
sampling frequency to the current generator frequency, which ensures the same sen-
sitivity over the entire frequency range. This adaption starts at the transition from
10 Hz to 11 Hz. As a result, all short-circuit protection functions, such as overcurrent
protection (Sections 2.6 to 2.8), impedance protection (Section 2.17) and differential
protection (Section 2.12) are active with the same sensitivity as with nominal frequen-
cy.
The startup overcurrent protection is a short-circuit protection function that works be-
low 10 Hz. Its operating range is designed for 2 Hz to approx. 10 Hz (change to oper-
ational condition 1). At higher frequencies, the above short-circuit protection functions
are active.
7UM62 Manual 71
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The function is also active above 70 Hz because at that frequency the protection is
again in operational condition 0.
Measuring At frequencies below 10 Hz, the protection works in operating condition 0, with the
Principle sampling frequency automatically set to nominal conditions (fS = 800 Hz for 50 Hz net-
works and 960 Hz for 60 Hz networks). From the sampled phase currents, a special
algorithm determines the peak values. These are converted into values proportional
to the r.m.s. values, and compared with the set threshold value.
Figure 2-25 shows the logic diagram.
Operating state 1=1 5575

O/C Start L1 PU
1802 STARTUP I>
1803 STARTUP T I>
IST-L1 & 5578
O/C Start TRIP
IST-L2 & OR Tripping

matrix
5576
O/C Start L2 PU Tmin TRIP
5577 CMD
IST-L3 & O/C Start L3 PU
5571 5573
>BLOCK O/C St O/C Start BLK
Figure 2-25 Logic Diagram of the Startup Overcurrent Protection
General The startup overcurrent protection is only effective and accessible if it has been set to
Enabled at address 118 during configuration of the protection functions.
Address 1801 O/C STARTUP is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block
only the trip command (Block relay).
Pickup Value Figure 2-24 shows that the currents during startup amount to approx. 20 % of the nom-
inal currents. This allows to set the protection routinely to less than nominal current.
As can be seen in Figure 2-25, the function is blocked when the operating condition
changes from 0 to 1. Additionally, blocking by binary input should be provided for.
Figure 2-26 shows an example of the estimated short-circuit currents at different fre-
quencies. As the short-circuit currents can amount to a multiple of the nominal current,
the pickup value could also be set to more than the nominal current, i.e. around the
usual values between 1.2 and 1.4 I/ING.
72 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51)
I/InG
3
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2
f/fn
Figure 2-26 Short-Circuit Currents in the Generator during the Startup (Generator: 300 MVA,
15.75 kV, 50 Hz)
Delay Times Since the generator circuit breaker is open during startup, there is no need to coordi-
nate the delay time with the network. Wherever possible, no delay time should be ef-
fective at all since the operating time of the protection function is extended proportion-
ally to the lower frequency (see Chapter 4, Technical Data).
Where a sensitive setting is selected, a delay time may be useful to avoid overfunc-
tioning. This delay time should be based on the lowest detectable frequency of 2 Hz,
and set to 0.5 s.
Short-Circuit Figure 2-27 shows the interaction between the short-circuit protection functions, such
Coordination as:
− Startup overcurrent function
− Differential protection
− I>> stage as back-up stage for 10 Hz and higher
The pickup thresholds in this figure are for orientation only.
The differential protection Idiff and the overcurrent protection I>> are effective from ap-
prox. 10 - 11 Hz.
The startup overcurrent protection I-ANF provides additional protection in the lower
frequency range.
The result is a short-circuit protection concept in which the functions complement one
another.
7UM62 Manual 73
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.5
2
I/InG
1.5
0.5
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2
f/fn
Idiff I>> O/C START
Figure 2-27 Operating Range and Possible Pickup Threshold of Short-Circuit

Protection Functions
2.11.2.1 Settings of the Startup Overcurrent Protection

1801 O/C STARTUP OFF OFF Startup O/C protection
ON
mands
1802 STARTUP I> 0.10..20.00 A 1.30 A I> Pickup
1803 STARTUP T I> 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T I> Time Delay
2.11.2.2 Information for the Startup Overcurrent Protection

05571 >BLOCK O/C St >BLOCK startup O/C protection
05572 O/C Start OFF Startup O/C protection is switched OFF
05573 O/C Start BLK Startup O/C protection is BLOCKED
05574 O/C Start ACT Startup O/C protection is ACTIVE
05575 O/C Start L1 PU Startup O/C phase L1 picked up
05578 O/C Start TRIP Startup O/C protection TRIP
74 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T)
2.12 Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T)
General The numerical current differential protection of the 7UM62 is a fast and selective short-
circuit protection for generators, motors and transformers. The individual application
can be configured, which ensures optimum matching to the protected object.
The protected zone is selectively limited by the CTs at its ends.
The processing of the measured values depends on the way the differential protection
is used. This section discusses first the differential protection function in general,
regardless of the type of protected object, for a single-phase system. It then deals with
the particularities of individual objects that can be protected.
Basic Principle Differential protection systems operate according to the principle of current
comparison (Kirchhoff’s current law). They utilize the fact that in a healthy protected
object the current leaving the object is the same as that which entered it (current Ip,
dotted in Figure 2-28).
Any measured current difference is a certain indication of a fault somewhere within the
protected zone. The secondary windings of current transformers CT1 and CT2, which
have the same transformation ratio, may be so connected that a closed circuit is
formed. If now a measuring element M is connected at the electrical balance point, it
reveals the current difference. Under healthy conditions (e.g. on-load operation) no
current flows in the measuring element. In the event of a fault in the protected object,
the summation current Ip1+Ip2flows on the primary side. The currents on the
secondary side, I1 and I2 flow through the measuring element M. as a summation
current I1+I2 (see Figure 2-28).
Ip Ip1 Ip2 Ip
Protected
CT1 object CT2
I I
Ip1+Ip2
I1 I2
I1+I2
Figure 2-28 Basic Principle of Differential Protection (Single-Phase Representation)

(Ipx = primary current, Ix = secondary current)
Current When an external fault causes a heavy current to flow through the protected zone,
Stabilization differences in the magnetic characteristics of the current transformers CT1 and CT2
under conditions of saturation may cause a significant current to flow through the
element M. If the magnitude of this current lies above the response threshold, the
element would issue a trip signal. To prevent the protection from such erroneous
operation, a stabilizing current is brought in.
7UM62 Manual 75
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The stabilizing quantity is derived from the arithmetical sum of the absolute values of
|I1| + |I2|. The following definitions apply:
The differential current
Idiff = |I1 + I2|
and the stabilization or restraining current
Istab = |I1| + |I2|
Idiff is derived from the fundamental frequency current and produces the tripping effect
quantity, Istab counteracts this effect.
To clarify the situation, three important operating conditions with ideal and matched
measurement qualities should be examined:
Ip1 Ip2
Protected object
CT1 CT2
I1 I2
I1 + I2
Figure 2-29 Definitions of Currents
1. Through flowing current through a healthy transformer or external fault:

I2 reverses its direction, i.e. thus changes its sign, i.e. I2 = –I1;
and consequently |I2| = |I1|
Idiff = |I1 + I2| = |I1 – I1| = 0

Istab= |I1|+ |I2| = |I1| + |I1| = 2 ⋅ |I1|
No tripping effect (Idiff); stabilization (Istab) corresponds to twice the through

flowing current.
2. Internal short-circuit, e.g. fed with equal currents each side:
In this case I2 = I1; and consequently |I2| = |I1|
Idiff = |I1+ I2| = |I1 + I1| = 2 ⋅ |I1|

Istab =|I1|+ |I2| = |I1| + |I1| = 2 ⋅ |I1|
Tripping effect (Idiff) and stabilizing (Istab) quantities are equal and correspond to
the total fault.
3. Internal short-circuit, fed from one side only:
In this case I2 = 0
Idiff = |I1 + I2| = |I1 – 0| = |I1|

Istab =|I1|+ |I2| = |I1| + 0 = |I1|
Tripping effect (Idiff) and stabilizing (Istab) quantities are equal and correspond to
the fault current fed from one side.
76 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
This result shows that for internal fault and under ideal conditions Idiff = Istab.
Consequently, the characteristic of internal faults is a straight line with a upward slope
of 45° (dot-and-dash line in Figure 2-30).
The currents Idiff and Istab are compared by the differential protection with the
operating characteristic according to Figure 2-30. If the quantities result into a locus in
the tripping area, a trip signal is given.
I diff
--------- 10 Fault characteristic
IN
9
2031 8
I DIFF >>
7
6
Trip area
5
4
3
Block area
2
1
2021
I DIFF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
I stab
-----------
-
IN
Figure 2-30 Operation Characteristics of the Differential Protection with Fault Characteristic
Matching the The rated CT currents are matched to the rated current of the protected object,
Values of Measured regardless of what that object is. As a result, all currents are referred to the protected
Quantities object. To match the currents, the characteristic values of the protected object
(apparent power, rated voltage) and the rated primary currents of the CTs are entered
in the protective device for each side of the protected object.
2.12.1.1 Protected Object Generator or Motor: Particularities
Definition and The differential protection function of the 7UM62 can be used as longitudinal or as
Matching of transverse differential protection. The operation modes differ from each other only by
Measured the definition of the measured current and the limits of the protected zone.
Quantities
Since the current direction is normally defined as positive in the direction of the
protected object, the definitions as illustrated in Figure 2-31 result. The protected zone
is limited by the CTs in the neutral point of generator and the CTs at the terminal side.
The differential protection feature of the 7UM62 refers all currents to the rated current
of the protected object. The characteristic values of the protected object (apparent
power, rated voltage) and the primary rated currents of the CTs are entered in the
protective device for each side of the protected object. The measured quantity
matching is thus limited to the factors for the absolute current values.
7UM62 Manual 77
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Due to their predominantly inductive component, faults in the proximity of the

generator have relatively high short-circuit time constants that cause a magnetization
of the current transformers. The CTs should be designed accordingly (see Appendix
A.7).
Figure 2-31 Definition of Current Direction for Longitudinal Differential Protection
For use as a transverse differential protection, there is a particularity. Figure 2-32

shows the definition of the measuring currents for this application.
In the transverse differential protection, the phases connected in parallel constitute the
limit between the protected zone and the network. A differential current appears in this
type of circuit always if there is a current difference within the phases, and only in that
case, so that a fault current in that phase can be assumed.
Since in this case, unlike the other applications, all currents flow into the protected ob-
ject in healthy operation, a “wrong” polarity is set for one set of CTs, as described in
Section 2.3.2 under “Connection of the Current Transformer Sets“.
L1
L2
L3
Figure 2-32 Definition of Current Direction for Transverse Differential Protection
The CTs also determine the limits of sensitivity in the case of motors. In asynchronous
motors, the startup operation may be modeled in different ways by the CTs, so that
major differential currents occur (see also side title ”Increase of Pickup Value on
Startup”).
2.12.1.2 Protected Object Transformer: Particularities
Transformers are subject to a number of influences that induce differential currents

even during normal operation:
78 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Mismatching of Differences in the matching of CTs to the transformer rated current are not
CTs uncommon. These differences result in an error that leads to a differential current.
Voltage Control by Voltage control tap changers (usually in-phase regulators) change the transformation
Tap Changers ratio and the rated current of the transformer. They cause mismatching of the CTs and
thus a differential current.
Inrush Current Transformers may absorb on power-up considerable magnetizing currents (inrush
currents) that enter the protected zone but do not leave it. They act therefore like fault
currents entering on one side.
The inrush current can amount to a multiple of the rated current and is characterized
by a considerable 2nd harmonic content (double rated frequency) which is practically
absent in the case of a short-circuit.
Overexcitation Where a transformer is operated with an excessive voltage, the non-linear

(Overflux) magnetizing curve leads to increased magnetizing currents, which cause an additional
differential current.
Vector Group Depending on their application, transformers have different vector groups, which
cause a shift of the phase angles between the primary and the secondary side.
Without adequate correction, this phase shift would cause a differential current.
The following paragraphs describe the main functional blocks of the differential
protection that allow to control the above influences.
Matching the The digitized currents are matched the transformer rated current. The characteristic
Values of Measured values of the transformer, i.e. rated apparent power, rated voltages and primary rated
Quantities CT currents, are entered in the protective device, and a correction factor kCT is
calculated according to the following formula:
I p, CT I p, CT ⋅ 3 ⋅ U N
k CT = --------------- = --------------------------------------
I N,Obj. SN
where
Ip, CT - Primary rated CT current
IN,Obj. - Primary rated current of protected object
SN - Rated apparent power of protected object
UN - Rated voltage
kCT - Correction factor
This correction is performed for each side of the protected object.
Once the vector group has been entered, the protective device is capable of
performing the current comparison according to fixed formulae.
Vector Group Unit transformers often have a wye-delta connection, with the delta connection being
Matching on the generator side. To allow a maximum of versatility in the use of the 7UM62, all
imaginable vector group combinations have been provided for in the software. The
following paragraph explains the basic principle of numerical vector group correction
in an exemplary way for a Y(N)d5 transformer.
7UM62 Manual 79
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The higher voltage side has a wye connection and the lower voltage side a delta
connection. The phase rotation is n ⋅ 30° (i.e. 5 ⋅ 30° = 150°). Side 1 (higher voltage
side) is the reference system. The vector group correction feature transforms the
currents flowing from side 2 to side 1.
Isolated Starpoint Figure 2-33 shows the vector group, the vector diagram for symmetrically flowing
currents and the transformation rules for a system with an isolated starpoint.
Side 1 Side 2
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
IL1
IL3
IL2 √3 ⋅ IA
IA
IL1
IL3 IL2
IA 1 0 0 I L1 IA –1 0 1 I L1
1
I B = 1 ⋅ 0 1 0 ⋅ I L2 I B = ------- ⋅ 1 – 1 0 ⋅ I L2
3
IC 0 0 1 I L3 IC 0 1 –1 I L3
Figure 2-33 Vector Group Matching for a Y(N) d5 Transformer (Isolated Starpoint)
Deducting on side 2 the currents IL3 – IL1 results in the current IA, which has the same
direction as IA on side 1. Multiplying it with 1/√3 matches the absolute values. The
matrix describes the conversion for all three phases.
Earthed Figure 2-34 shows an example of a YNd5 vector group with earthed starpoint on the
Transformer Y-side.
Starpoint
The zero sequence currents are eliminated in this case. In Figure 2-34 on the right
side, the zero sequence currents are automatically eliminated by the current
difference formation, just as in the transformer there can be no zero sequence
currents outside the delta winding. On the left-hand side, the elimination of the zero
sequence current results from the matrix equation, e.g.
1/ · (2 I – 1 I – 1 I ) = 1/ · (3 I – I – I – I ) = 1/ · (3 I – 3 I ) = (I – I ).
3 L1 L2 L3 3 L1 L1 L2 L3 3 L1 0 L1 0
Because of the zero sequence current elimination, fault currents which flow through
the CTs during earth faults in the network if there is an earthing point in the protected
zone (transformer starpoint or starpoint earthing transformer) are neutralized without
any special measures from outside.
80 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Side 1 Side 2
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
IL1
IL3
IL2 √3 ⋅ IA
IA
IL1
IL3 IL2
IA 2 – 1 –1 I L1 IA –1 0 1 I L1
1 1
IB = --- ⋅ – 1 2 – 1 ⋅ I L2 I B = ------- ⋅ 1 – 1 0 ⋅ I L2
3 3
IC –1 –1 2 I L3 IC 0 1 –1 I L3
Figure 2-34 Vector Group Matching for Y(N) d5 (with Earthed Starpoint)
In Figure 2-35 on the left-hand side, a zero sequence current will occur in case of e.g.
an external fault; on the right-hand side, it will not. If the currents were compared
without first eliminating the zero sequence current, the result would be wrong
(differential current despite external fault). Therefore, the zero sequence current must
be eliminated on side 1. The zero sequence current is deducted from the phase
currents. The rule for calculation is shown in the left-hand matrix in Figure 2-34.
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
Figure 2-35 Example of an Earth Fault Outside the Transformer with Distribution of Currents
2.12.1.3 Evaluation of Measured Quantities
The 7UM62 performs the above calculations (matching of absolute values, vector
group matching in the case of transformers) at every sampling and derives from them
the instantaneous values of differential and stabilizing current. From the differential
current, the fundamental component is determined by means of a Fourier filter, which
provides for effective damping of any interference and aperiodic DC components.
7UM62 Manual 81
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The stabilizing quantity is calculated from the arithmetic average of a rectified quantity,
so that the filter effect is less for it. As a result, the stabilization component in
interference components, especially aperiodic DC components, will be higher than
their differential current.
Tripping This result shows that for an internal fault Idiff = Istab. Thus the characteristic of internal
Characteristic faults in the tripping diagram (see Figure 2-36) is a straight line with a slope of 45°.
Figure 2-36 shows the complete operation characteristic of the 7UM62. Branch a
represents the sensitivity threshold of the differential protection (setting
I-DIFF>) and considers constant error currents such as magnetizing currents.
Branch b considers current-proportional errors which may result from transformation
errors of the main CTs or the input CTs of the relay, or which may be caused by
mismatching or by the influence of tap changers in transformers with voltage control.
In the range of high currents which may give rise to current transformer saturation,
branch c provides for additional stabilization.
In the presence of differential currents above branch d a trip command is issued
regardless of the stabilizing current and the harmonic stabilization. This is the
operating range of the ”High-Speed Trip Stage IDiff >>”.
I diff
IN
9
d
d
2031 8
I DIFF>>
7
6
Trip area Block area
5
c 2043 SLOPE 2
4
3
2041 SLOPE 1
2
b Add-on stabilization
1
2021 a Saturation
I DIFF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
2044
2042 BASE POINT 2 I stab
BASE POINT 1 -----------
-
IN
Figure 2-36 Operating Characteristic of the Differential Protection
The area of add-on stabilization is determined by the saturation indicator (see side
title ”Add-on Stabilization During Current Transformer Saturation”.
The currents Idiff and Istab are compared by the differential protection with the
operating characteristic according to Figure 2-36. If the quantities result into a locus in
the tripping area, a trip signal is given.
82 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
High-Speed Trip The high-speed trip stage IDiff >> clears high-current internal faults instantaneously.
Stage IDiff >> As soon as the differential current rises above the threshold IDiff >> (branch d), a trip
signal is issued regardless of the magnitude of the stabilizing current.
This stage can operate even when, for example, a considerable second harmonic is
present in the differential current, which is caused by current transformer saturation by
a DC component in the short-circuit current, and which could be interpreted by the
inrush stabilization function as an inrush current.
This high-current stage evaluates the fundamental component of the differential
current as well as the instantaneous values. Instantaneous value processing ensures
fast tripping even in case the fundamental component of the current is strongly
reduced by current transformer saturation.
High-current faults in the protected transformer may be cleared instantaneously
without regard of the magnitude of the stabilizing currents when the amplitude of the
differential currents can exclude that it is an external fault. This is always the case
when the short-circuit current is higher than 1/usc ⋅ IN Transf.
Add-on During an external fault which produces a high through flowing short-circuit current
Stabilization During causing current transformer saturation, a considerable differential current can be
Current simulated, especially when the degree of saturation is different at the two measuring
Transformer points. If the quantities Idiff/Istab result in an operating point which lies in the trip area
Saturation of the operating characteristic (Figure 2-37), a trip signal would be the consequence if
no special measures were taken.
I diff
IN
9
8
7 D
6
5 C
4
3
2
Add-on stabilization
1
B Saturation
A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
2044
2042 BASE POINT 2 I stab
BASE POINT 1 -----------
-
IN
Figure 2-37 Operation Characteristics of the Differential Protection with Fault Characteristic
The 7UM62 provides a saturation indicator which detects such phenomena and
initiates add-on stabilization measures. The saturation indicator evaluates the
dynamic behaviour of the differential and stabilizing current.
The dotted line in Figure 2-37 shows the instantaneous development of currents in
case of a external fault with transformer saturation on one side.
7UM62 Manual 83
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Immediately after the fault (A), the short-circuit currents rise strongly, causing a
equally high stabilizing current (2xthrough-flowing current). Saturation occurring on
one side (B) now causes a differential current and reduces the stabilizing current, so
that the operating point Idiff/Istab may move into the tripping area (C).
In contrast, the operating point moves immediately along the fault characteristic (D)
when an internal fault occurs since the stabilization current will barely be higher than
the differential current. Therefore, an internal fault is assumed as soon as the ratio Idiff/
Istab has exceeded an internal threshold for a fixed minimum time.
Current transformer saturation in case of an external fault is thus characterized by a
high stabilizing current flowing at the beginning, i.e. by the operating point (diagram
see Figure 2-37) moving into an area that is typical for a high-current external fault
(”add-on stabilization). The add-on stabilization area is limited by the parameter I-
ADD ON STAB. and the first straight line of the characteristic (with BASE POINT 1
and SLOPE 1) (see Figure 2-38). The saturation indicator makes its decision within
the first quarter of a period after fault inception. When an external fault is detected, the
differential protection is blocked for a selectable time. The blocking is cancelled as
soon as the operating point Idiff/Istab moves steadily (i.e. over 2 periods) within the
tripping area. This allows to detect evolving faults in the protected area reliably even
during an external fault with current transformer saturation.
I diff
---------------
INObj 10
Fault characteristic
2031 8 d
I DIFF>>
7
6
Trip area
5 2043 Block area
SLOPE 2
4 c
2041
SLOPE 1
3
2
1 b
2021 a
I–DIFF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
2044 I
BASE POINT 2 stab
---------------
2042 2056 I
NObj
BASE POINT 1 EXF–STAB
Figure 2-38 Add-on Stabilization During Current Transformer Saturation
Harmonic In transformers in particular, high short-time magnetizing currents may be present

Stabilization during power-up (inrush currents). These currents enter the protected zone but do not
leave it again, so that they act like fault currents entering from one side (Figure 2-39).
84 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Unwanted differential currents may also be cause by parallel connection of

transformers or by transformer overexcitation due to excessive voltage.
The inrush current can amount to a multiple of the rated current and is characterized
by a considerable 2nd harmonic content (double rated frequency) which is practically
absent in the case of a short-circuit. If the second harmonic content exceeds a select-
able threshold, tripping is blocked.
Figure 2-39 Inrush Current – Example

Recording of the Three Higher-Voltage Currents
Besides the second harmonic, another harmonic can be selected in the 7UM62 to
cause blocking. A choice can be made between the third and fifth harmonic as
harmonic stabilization.
Steady-state overexcitation of the transformer is characterized by odd harmonic
content. The third or fifth harmonic is suitable to provide stabilization. But, as the third
harmonic is often eliminated in power transformers (e.g. by the delta winding), the use
of the fifth is more common.
Converter transformers also produce odd harmonic content which is practically absent
in the case of internal short-circuits.
The differential currents are analyzed with regard to their harmonics content.
Numerical filters are used to perform a Fourier analysis of the differential current. As
soon as the harmonics content exceeds the set thresholds, a stabilization of the
respective phase evaluation is started. The filter algorithms are optimized with regard
to their transient behaviour such that additional measures for stabilization during
dynamic conditions are not necessary.
The harmonic stabilization is maintained for two periods after decrease of the
differential current. This prevents an unwanted under-stabilization when external
faults are cleared and the higher-order harmonics disappear.
Since the inrush stabilization operates individually per phase, the protection is fully
operative even when the transformer is switched onto a single-phase fault, while
inrush currents may possibly be present in one of the healthy phases.
In ”modern type” transformers in particular, the 2nd harmonics content may not
exceed the threshold value in all three phases on switch-on. To avoid spurious
tripping, the so-called “crossblock” function must be activated. As soon as an inrush
current is detected in one phase, the other phases of the differential protection stage
IDIFF> are blocked.
The cross-block function can be limited to a selectable duration. After this cross-block
time has elapsed, no more cross-block is possible for as long as a running fault
7UM62 Manual 85
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
condition lasts, i.e. cross-blocking is possible only once after a fault has occurred, and
only for the set cross-block time.
The further harmonic stabilizations operate individually per phase. However, it is also
possible – as it is for the inrush stabilization – to set the protection such that not only
the phase with harmonics content in excess to the permissible value is stabilized but
also the other phases of the differential stage I-DIFF> are blocked. The cross-block
feature with 3rd or 5th harmonics works in the same way as with 2nd harmonics.
Increase of Pickup An increase of the pickup value on startup provides additional security against
Value on Startup overfunctioning when a non-energized protection object is switched in. As soon as the
stabilizing current of one phase has dropped below a settable value I-REST.
STARTUP, the increase of the pickup value is activated for the I-DIFF> stage. As the
stabilizing current is twice the through-flowing current in normal operation, its dropping
below that threshold is a criterion for detecting that the protected object is not
energized. The pickup value I–DIFF is now increased by a settable factor (see Figure
2-40); the other branches of the Idiff> stage are shifted proportionally.
This is done by dividing the DIFF current of the respective phase by the factor START-
FACTOR before the characteristic monitoring. The differential current for fault
recording, tripping current etc. is not affected by this.
The return of the stabilizing current indicates the startup. After a settable time T
START MAX the increase of the characteristic is cancelled.
I diff
---------
IN
5 Trip area
Startup characteristic
4 Increase of pickup value
3
Steady-state
2 Characteristic
1 Block area
2021 I stab
I DIFF> ------------
IN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 2-40 Increase of Pickup Value for Stage IDIFF> on Startup
Pickup, Dropout The differential protection does not normally use a ”pickup”, since the detection of a
fault is identical with the tripping condition. Like all SIPROTEC® devices, however, the
differential protection feature of the 7UM62 has a pickup that is the starting point for a
number of ulterior activities. The pickup marks the inception of a fault. This is
necessary e.g. for creating fault events and fault records. The pickup also controls
internal functions for both internal and external faults (such as necessary actions of
the saturation indicator).
A pickup is detected as soon as the fundamental wave of the differential current has
attained 85 % of the setting value I-DIFF> or more than 85 % of the stabilizing cur-
rent are in the add-on stabilization area (see Figure 2-41). A pickup signal is also is-
sued when the high-speed trip stage for high-current faults picks up.
86 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
I
diff -
---------------
I
NObj
Pickup Steady-state
characteristic
I–DIFF>
0.85 · I–DIFF> Beginning of
add-on stabilization
0.85 EXF–STAB I
stab
----------------
INObj
Figure 2-41 Pickup of the Differential Protection
If stabilization by higher-order harmonics is activated, the system first performs a

harmonics analysis (for about 1 period) to check the stabilization conditions, if
required. If it is not, the trip command is issued as soon as the tripping conditions are
fulfilled (hatched area in Figure 2-36).
For special cases, the trip command can be delayed.
Figure 2-42 shows a simplified diagram of the tripping logic.
Reset is initiated when, during 2 periods, pick-up is no longer recognized in the
differential values, i.e. the differential current has fallen below <70 % of the set value,
and the other pickup conditions are no longer fulfilled either.
If a trip command has not been initiated, the fault is considered to be over.
If a trip command had been initiated, it is maintained for the minimum command
duration set in the general device data for all protection functions (see also Section
2.3).
7UM62 Manual 87
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
FNo 05631
Diff picked up
FNo
Characteristic & Diff> L1
Diff> L2
2026A T I-DIFF> Diff> L3
1
Inrush )
T
stabilization
(2nd harm.)*) FNo 05691
OR Diff> TRIP
Diff 2.Harm L1
Diff 2.Harm L2
Diff 2.Harm L3
FNo
OR Diff TRIP
FNo
1
) FNo
1)
OR Diff TRIP
Harmonic OR
stabilization FNo
(3rd or 5th)*) OR Diff TRIP
Diff n.Harm L1
Diff n.Harm L2
Diff n.Harm L3
Tripping
matrix
FNr
1)
Add-on
TMin
stabilization
TRIP CMD
(ext. fault)
Diff Bl. exF.L1
Diff Bl. exF.L2
Diff Bl. exF.L3
FNo
OR Diff TRIP
FNo
FNo
& Diff>> L1
I DIFF>>- 2036A T I-DIFF>> Diff>> L2
Stage Diff>> L3
T
FNo 05692
OR Diff>>
L1
L2 Meas. release
L3 Meas. release
Meas. release
FNo 05603 FNo 05616

>Diff BLOCK Diff BLOCKED
FNo 05617
Diff ACTIVE
2001 DIFF. PROT. &

ON OR
Block relay
“1” FNo 05615
OFF
Diff OFF
1)
not with generators or motors
Figure 2-42 Logic Diagram of the Tripping Logic in Differential Protection
88 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
General The differential protection is only effective and accessible if the type of protected
object for this function was set within the framework of the protective function
configuration (Section 2.2, address 0120, DIFF. PROT. = Generator/Motor or
Three-phase trans.). Only the relevant parameters for that object are offered, all
others are hidden. Disabled is set if the function is not required. At the address
2001 DIFF. PROT. the user can switch the function ON or OFF, or only block the trip
command (Block Relay).
Note:
When the device is delivered, the differential protection function is switched OFF. This
is because this protection function must not be used before at least the vector groups
and matching values have been correctly set. Without these settings the device may
show unpredictable behaviour (e.g. tripping)!
The primary rated current Ip, CT of the used CTs should normally be higher than the
rated current IN, Object of the object to be protected. However, at least the following
condition should be observed with regard to the upper limit of the linear zone of the
7UM62, which is 20 ⋅ ΙN:
Ip, CT > 0.75 ⋅ I N, Object
2.12.2.1 Differential Protection for Generators and Motors
Precondition A precondition for the functioning of the generator or motor differential protection is
that during configuration at the address 0120 DIFF. PROT. = Generator/Motor
has been set.
One important setting is the location of the CT starpoints on both sides of the protected
object (addresses 0201 STRPNT->OBJ S1 for side 1 and 0210 STRPNT->OBJ S2
for side 2, see Section 2.3).
Also, the nominal values (SN GEN/MOTOR, UN GEN/MOTOR) of the machine to be
protected, and the primary and secondary nominal currents of the main CTs on both
sides must be entered. The settings are referred to these values. They are also used
e.g. for determining the primary measured values.
Information as to the treatment of the starpoint on both sides is required for the
measured value monitoring; it has already been entered during configuration at the
addresses 0241 STARPNT SIDE 1 and 0244 STARPNT SIDE 2 (see Section 2.3.2).
Increase of Pickup For additional security against overfunctioning when a non-energized protection
Value on Startup object is switched in, an increase of the pickup value on startup can be set at address
2005 INC.CHAR.START. On delivery of the device, this function is switched OFF.
The associated parameters can be found at addresses 2051A, 2052A and 2053.
Address 2051A I-REST. STARTUP is used to set the pickup value for startup
detection. The function is disabled by setting I/InO = 0. The START-FACTOR specifies
the increase factor of the pickup values on startup. For generator and motor
protection, a setting of 2052A START-FACTOR = 2.0 is recommended.
7UM62 Manual 89
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Tripping The parameters for the tripping characteristic are set at the addresses 2021 through
Characteristic 2044A. The meaning of the parameters is shown in Figure 2-43. The numerical values
at the branches are the parameter addresses.
Address 2021 I-DIFF> is the pickup value for the differential current. The pickup value
is referred to the nominal current of the generator or motor. For generators and
motors, a setting between 0.1 and 0.2 is recommended.
In addition to the pickup threshold I-DIFF>, a second pickup threshold is considered.
When this threshold (2031 I-DIFF>>) is exceeded, a trip signal is issued regardless
of the magnitude of the stabilizing current (non-stabilized high-speed tripping). This
stage must be set higher than I-DIFF>. Recommendation: Set a value above the
steady-state value of the transient short-circuit current, i.e.:.
1
I-DIFF>> > ------ ⋅ I N, Generator
x' d
With values for xd’ between 0.15 and 0.35, the resulting setting values for IDIFF>> are
approx. (3 to 7) ⋅ IN, Generator.
The tripping characteristic has two more branches (Figure 2-43). Address 2041A
SLOPE 1 determines the slope of the first branch, whose starting point is specified in
the parameter 2042A BASE POINT 1. This branch considers current-proportional
error currents. These are mainly transformation errors of the main CTs and of the input
CTs. If the CTs are identical, the default setting of 0.25 can be reduced to 0.15.
The second branch produces a higher stabilization in the range of high currents which
may lead to current transformer saturation. Its base point is set at address 2044A
BASE POINT 2. The slope is set at address 2043A SLOPE 2. The stability of the
relay during current transformer saturation can be influenced by this parameter. A
higher slope results in a higher stability. The default setting of 0.5 has proven to be a
good value.
I diff
--------------- 10
INObj
9
2031 8 d
I–DIFF>>
7
6
5 2043
SLOPE 2
4 c
2041
SLOPE 1
3
2
1 b
2021 a
I–DIFF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
2044 I
BASE POINT 2 stab
---------------
2042 2056 I
NObj
Figure 2-43 Parameters Determining the Shape of the Tripping Characteristic
90 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Add-on Where very high currents flow through the protected object during external short-
Stabilization During circuits, an add-on stabilization takes effect that is set at address 2056A I-ADD ON
Current Trans- STAB. (stabilization in case of saturation). Please note that the stabilizing current is
former Saturation the arithmetical sum of the currents entering and leaving the protected zone, i.e. that
it is twice the actually flowing current. The default setting of 4.00 I/InO should be
kept. The maximum duration of the add-on stabilization is set at address 2057A T
ADD ON-STAB. in multiples of one period. This time is the maximum duration of the
blocking after leaving the add-on stabilization area in case of high-current external
faults. The setting depends, for instance, on the disconnecting time of the upstream
protection. The default setting 15 *1P is a good value.
Time Delays In special cases it may be advantageous to delay the trip signal of the differential
protection with an additional time stage. The timer is started 2026A T I-DIFF> is
started when an internal fault in the generator or the motor has been detected. 2036A
T I-DIFF> is the time delay of trip stage I DIFF>>. A separate time stage is
provided for each differential protection level and each phase. The dropout delay is
linked to the minimum trip command duration that is valid for all protection functions.
All setting times are additional time delays which do not include the operating times
(measuring time, drop-out time) of the protective function.
2.12.2.2 Differential Protection for Transformers
Precondition A precondition for the operation of the transformer differential protection is that during
configuration address 0120 DIFF. PROT. was set to = Three-phase transf..
To ensure the correct polarity for the formation of the differential current, the polarity
of the sets of CTs must be specified. This has been done during the configuration,
when entering the location of the starpoints of the sets of CTs on both sides of the
transformer at addresses 0201 STRPNT->OBJ S1 for side 1 and 0210 STRPNT-
>OBJ S2 for side 2, see Section 2.3).
Also, the nominal data (SN TRANSF, UN WIND S1, UN WIND S2) of both sides of the
transformer, as well as the primary and secondary rated currents of the main CTs on
both sides were requested. The settings are referred to these values. They are also
used e.g. for determining the primary measured values.
Information as to the treatment of the starpoint on both sides is required for the
elimination of the zero sequence current and for the measured value monitoring
(summation current monitoring); it has already been entered during configuration at
the 0241 STARPNT SIDE 1 and 0244 STARPNT SIDE 2 (see Section 2.3.2).
Matching of When used as transformer protection, the 7UM62 automatically computes from the
Absolute Values rated data of the protected transformer the current-matching formulae which are
and Vector Group required to match the vector group and the different rated winding currents. The
Matching currents are converted such that the sensitivity of the protection always refers to the
power rating of the transformer. Therefore, no circuitry is required for matching of the
vector group and no manual calculations for converting of rated currents are normally
necessary.
The unit requires the following data for each winding
− MVA rating (apparent power) SN in MVA (see above),
− Rated voltage UN in kV (see above)
− Vector group numeral
7UM62 Manual 91
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
− Rated current of the current transformer set in A (see above).

Winding 1 is defined as the reference winding and therefore needs no numeral; the
other windings are referred to winding 1.
The reference winding is normally that of the higher voltage. If not the higher voltage
side is used as reference winding, it must be considered that the vector group
changes: e.g. a Dy5 transformer is regarded from the Y side as Yd7.
If a transformer winding is regulated, then the actual rated voltage of the winding is not
used as UN, but rather the voltage which corresponds to the average current of the
regulated range.
U max ⋅ U min 2
Voltage to be set U N = 2 ⋅ --------------------------------- = ----------------------------------
U max + U min 1 1
------------- + --------------
U min U max
If the setting of the protection should be performed with secondary values only (e.g.
because external matching transformers are present), the factory-set parameters for
transformer data can remain unchanged. The presets for transformer data apply for a
ratio of 1: 1 without phase displacement
Zero Sequence The treatment of the winding starpoint is of no concern if the zero sequence currents
Current are eliminated from the phase currents. Because of the zero sequence current
Treatment elimination, fault currents which flow through the CTs during earth faults in the network
if there is an earthing point in the protected zone (transformer starpoint or starpoint
earthing transformer) are neutralized without any special measures from outside. The
elimination of the zero sequence currents is selected by setting STARPNT SIDE* =
earthed (see Figure 2-34).
In networks with isolated or arc compensated starpoint, the elimination of the zero
sequence current may be set ineffective provided that the starpoint of the protected
transformer winding has no connection to earth, not even via a Petersen coil or a surge
arrester. In this case, each double earth fault with one base point in the protected zone
will be cleared by the relay, regardless of any double earth fault priority (see side title
”Isolated Starpoint” and Figure 2-33).
Increase of Pickup For additional security against overfunctioning when a non-energized protection
Value on Startup object is switched in, an increase of the pickup value on startup can be set at address
2005 INC.CHAR.START. As this option is mainly provided for generator and motor
protection, the default setting is OFF if a 2-winding transformer has been selected as
protected object.
The associated parameters can be found at addresses 2051A, 2052A and 2053.
Address 2051A I-REST. STARTUP is used to set the pickup value for detecting a
startup. The function is disabled by setting I/InO = 0. The START-FACTOR specifies the
increase factor of the pickup values on startup. For transformer protection, a setting of
2052A START-FACTOR = 1.0 is recommended. For switching of external loads such
as motors or transformers, it should be increased to 2.0. Due to the high time
constants, branch b of the characteristic may well be exceeded for a short time.
Harmonic Restraint The inrush restraint of the device can be activated and deactivated at address 2006
INRUSH 2.HARM.. It is based on an evaluation of the 2nd harmonics present in the
inrush current. When the device is delivered from the factory, a ratio I2fN/IfN of 15 % is
set and can normally be maintained. However, the component required for restraint
can be parameterized. To provide for more restraint in exceptional cases, where
switch-on conditions are particularly unfavourable, a smaller value can be set at
address 2061 2. HARMONIC.
92 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Cross-Blocking The inrush restraint can be extended by the so-called ”cross-block” function. This
means that not only the phase with inrush current exhibiting harmonics content in
excess of the permissible value is stabilized but also the other phases of the
differential stage IDIFF> are blocked. The duration for which the cross-block function
is operative after the differential current threshold has been exceeded is set at address
2062A CROSSB. 2. HARM. Setting is in multiples of one cycle. Setting to 0 means
that the protection can initiate a tripping when the transformer is switched onto a
single-phase fault, even if an inrush current is flowing in another phase. When set to
∞, the cross-block function is always effective. The duration of the blocking is specified
during commissioning. The default setting of 3 cycles has proven to be a good value.
Besides the second harmonic, the 7UM62 can provide restraint with a further
harmonic. Address 2007 RESTR. n.HARM. is used to disable this harmonics
restraint, or to select the harmonic for it. The 3rd or the 5th harmonic are available.
Steady-state overexcitation of the transformer is characterized by odd harmonics
content. The third or fifth harmonic is suitable to provide stabilization. As the third
harmonic is often eliminated in transformers (e.g. in a delta winding), the fifth harmonic
is more commonly used.
Converter transformers also produce a content of odd harmonics which is practically
absent in the case of internal short-circuits.
The harmonic content which blocks the differential protection is set at address 2071
n. HARMONIC. For example, if the 5th harmonic stabilization is used to avoid trip
during overexcitation, 30 % (default setting) are convenient.
Nth harmonic restraint operates individually per phase. However, it is also possible –
as it is for the inrush restraint – to set the protection such that not only the phase with
harmonics content in excess of the permissible value is stabilized but also the other
phases of the differential stage > are blocked (”cross-block” function). The duration for
which the cross-block function is operative after the differential current threshold has
been exceeded is set at address 2072A CROSSB. n.HARM. Setting is in multiples of
one cycle. Setting to 0 (default setting) means that the protection can initiate a tripping
when the transformer is switched onto a single-phase fault, even if a high harmonics
content is present in another phase. When set to ∞, the cross-block function is always
effective.
If the differential current exceeds a multiple of the rated transformer current stated at
address 2073A IDIFFmax n.HM, no nth harmonic restraint takes place.
Tripping The parameters of the tripping characteristic are set at addresses 2021 to 2044A.
Characteristic Figure 2-44 illustrates the meaning of the different parameters. The numerical values
at the branches are the parameter addresses.
Address 2021 I-DIFF> is the pickup value for the differential current. This is the total
fault current, regardless of the way it is divided between the windings of the protected
transformer. The pickup value is referred to the rated current corresponding to the
rated apparent power. For transformers, the setting should be between 0.2 and 0.4.
It should be checked during commissioning that the selected pickup value is at least
twice the maximum differential current present in steady-state operation.
In addition to the pickup threshold I-DIFF>, the differential current is subjected to a
second pickup threshold. If this threshold (2031 I-DIFF>>) is exceeded, tripping is
initiated regardless of the magnitude of the restraint current (unstabilized high-speed
trip stage). This stage must be set higher than the I-DIFF> stage. As a guide: above
1/usc of the transformer.
The tripping characteristic forms two more branches (Figure 2-44). Address 2041A
SLOPE 1 determines the slope of the first branch, whose starting point is specified in
7UM62 Manual 93
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
the parameter 2042A BASE POINT 1. This branch considers current-proportional

error currents. These are mainly transformation errors of the main CTs and,
especially, the differential currents which may occur in the final tap changer positions
due to the transformer regulation range. This branch of the characteristic limits the
stabilization area. The preset slope of 0.25 should be sufficient for regulating ranges
up to 20 %. If the transformer has a larger regulated range, the slope must be
increased accordingly.
I
--------------- 10
diff
I
NObj
9
2031 8 d
I–DIFF>>
7
6
Trip area
5 2043 Block area
SLOPE 2
4 c
2041
SLOPE 1
3
2
1 b
2021 a
I–DIFF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
2044 Istab
BASE POINT 2 ---------------
2042 2056 I
NObj
Figure 2-44 Parameters Determining the Shape of the Tripping Characteristic
The second branch produces a higher stabilization in the range of high currents which
may lead to current transformer saturation. Its base point is set at address 2044A
BASE POINT 2 and is referred to the rated power transformer current. The slope is
set at address 2043A SLOPE 2. The stability of the relay during current transformer
saturation can be influenced by this parameter. A higher slope results in a higher
stability.
Add-on Where very high currents flow through the protected object during external short-
Stabilization During circuits, an add-on stabilization takes effect that is set at address 2057A I-ADD ON
Current STAB. (stabilization in case of saturation). Please note that the stabilizing current is
Transformer the arithmetical sum of the currents entering and leaving the protected zone, i.e. that
Saturation it is twice the actually flowing current. The default setting of 4.00 I/InO should be
kept. The maximum duration of the add-on stabilization is set at address 2056 T ADD
ON-STAB. in multiples of one cycle. This time is the maximum duration of the blocking
after leaving the add-on stabilization area in case of high-current external faults. The
setting depends, for instance, on the disconnecting time of the upstream protection.
The default setting 15 *1P is a good value.
Time Delays In special cases it may be advantageous to delay the trip signal of the differential
protection with an additional time stage. The time delay 2026 T I-DIFF> is started
when an internal fault in the generator or the motor has been detected. 2036 T I-
DIFF>> is the time delay for the trip stage I DIFF>>. A separate time stage is provided
94 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
for each differential protection level and each phase. The dropout delay is linked to the
minimum trip command duration that is valid for all protection functions.
2.12.2.3 Settings of the Differential Protection

2001 DIFF. PROT. OFF OFF Differential Protection
ON
mands
2005 INC.CHAR.START OFF OFF Increase of Trip Char. During

ON Start
2006 INRUSH 2.HARM. OFF ON Inrush with 2. Harmonic Res-

ON traint
2007 RESTR. n.HARM. OFF OFF n-th Harmonic Restraint

3. Harmonic
5. Harmonic
2021 I-DIFF> 0.05..2.00 I/InO 0.20 I/InO Pickup Value of Differential Curr.
2026A T I-DIFF> 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T I-DIFF> Time Delay
2031 I-DIFF>> 0.5..12.0 I/InO; ∞ 7.5 I/InO Pickup Value of High Set Trip
2036A T I-DIFF>> 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T I-DIFF>> Time Delay
2041A SLOPE 1 0.10..0.50 0.25 Slope 1 of Tripping Characteri-

stic
2042A BASE POINT 1 0.00..2.00 I/InO 0.00 I/InO Base Point for Slope 1 of Cha-
rac.
2043A SLOPE 2 0.25..0.95 0.50 Slope 2 of Tripping Characteri-
stic
2044A BASE POINT 2 0.00..10.00 I/InO 2.50 I/InO Base Point for Slope 2 of Cha-
rac.
2051A I-REST. STARTUP 0.00..2.00 I/InO 0.10 I/InO I-RESTRAINT for Start Detec-
tion
2052A START-FACTOR 1.0..2.0 1.0 Factor for Increasing of Char. at

Start
2053 T START MAX 0.0..180.0 sec 5.0 sec Maximum Permissible Starting
Time
2056A I-ADD ON STAB. 2.00..15.00 I/InO 4.00 I/InO Pickup for Add-on Stabilization
2057A T ADD ON-STAB. 2..250 Cycle; ∞ 15 Cycle Duration of Add-on Stabilization
2061 2. HARMONIC 10..80 % 15 % 2nd Harmonic Content in I-DIFF
2062A CROSSB. 2. HARM 2..1000 Cycle; 0; ∞ 3 Cycle Time for Cross-blocking 2nd
Harm.
2071 n. HARMONIC 10..80 % 30 % n-th Harmonic Content in I-DIFF
2072A CROSSB. n.HARM 2..1000 Cycle; 0; ∞ 0 Cycle Time for Cross-blocking n-th
Harm.
7UM62 Manual 95
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

2073A IDIFFmax n.HM 0.5..12.0 I/InO 1.5 I/InO Limit IDIFFmax of n-th
Harm.Restraint
2.12.2.4 Information for the Differential Protection

05603 >Diff BLOCK >BLOCK differential protection
05615 Diff OFF Differential protection is switched OFF
05616 Diff BLOCKED Differential protection is BLOCKED
05617 Diff ACTIVE Differential protection is ACTIVE
05631 Diff picked up Differential protection picked up
05644 Diff 2.Harm L1 Diff: Blocked by 2.Harmon. L1
05647 Diff n.Harm L1 Diff: Blocked by n.Harmon. L1
05651 Diff Bl. exF.L1 Diff. prot.: Blocked by ext. fault L1
05652 Diff Bl. exF.L2 Diff. prot.: Blocked by ext. fault L2
05653 Diff Bl. exF.L3 Diff. prot.: Blocked by ext. fault.L3
05657 DiffCrosBlk2HM Diff: Crossblock by 2.Harmonic
05658 DiffCrosBlknHM Diff: Crossblock by n.Harmonic
05666 Diff in.char.L1 Diff: Increase of char. phase L1

05670 Diff I-Release Diff: Curr-Release for Trip
05671 Diff TRIP Differential protection TRIP
05672 Diff TRIP L1 Differential protection: TRIP L1
05681 Diff> L1 Diff. prot.: IDIFF> L1 (without Tdelay)
05684 Diff>> L1 Diff. prot: IDIFF>> L1 (without Tdelay)
05691 Diff> TRIP Differential prot.: TRIP by IDIFF>
96 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3

05692 Diff>> TRIP Differential prot.: TRIP by IDIFF>>
05620 Diff Adap.fact. Diff: adverse Adaption factor CT
05713 Diff CT-S1: Diff. prot: Adaptation factor CT side 1
05714 Diff CT-S2: Diff. prot: Adaptation factor CT side 2
05701 Diff L1: Diff. current in phase L1 at trip
05704 Res L1: Restr. current in phase L1 at trip
7UM62 Manual 97
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.13 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN, TN)
General The earth current differential protection detects earth faults in generators and trans-
formers with a low-ohmic or solid starpoint earthing. It is selective, and more sensitive
than the classical differential protection (see Section 2.12).
A typical application of this protection function are configurations where multiple gen-
erators are connected to one busbar and one generator has a low-ohmic earthing. An-
other application would be transformer windings in wye connection.
For applications such as auto-transformers, starpoint earthing transformers and shunt
reactors, Siemens recommends to use the 7UT612 protective relay instead.
For high-ohmic earthing of generators, the earth fault protection function (Section
2.26) is used.
Figure 2-45 shows two typical implementations. In connection scheme 1, the zero se-
quence current is calculated from the measured phase currents, whereas the starpoint
current is measured directly. This application is the version for transformers and for
the generator with direct (low-ohmic) earthing.
In connection scheme 2, both zero sequence currents are calculated from the mea-
sured phase currents. The protected object is located between the current transform-
ers. This measuring method should be used for generators in busbar connection,
where multiple generators feed the busbar and any one of the generators is earthed.
Connection scheme 1 Connection scheme 2
Protected Protected
object object
Figure 2-45 Connection Schemes of the Earth Current Differential Protection
Measuring As can be seen in Figure 2-45, there are 2 possible implementations of the earth fault
Principle differential protection which differ only in their method of determining the zero se-
quence current. This is shown in Figure 2-46, along with the definition of the current
direction. The general definition is: Reference arrows run in positive direction to the
protected object.
98 7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN, TN)
Protected object:
iL1S1 Generator iL1S2
iL2S1 iL2S2 iEE2
iL3S1 iL3S2
3I 01 3I 02
1
Figure 2-46 Connection Scheme and Definition of Current Vectors
In both measuring principles, there is a vector addition of the phase currents on the
line side (always side 1 in the 7UM62), which yields the zero sequence current. The
rule of calculation for side 1 is:
3I01 = IL1S1 + IL2S1 + IL3S1
For the second zero sequence current, two methods of determination are possible:
Method 1 is to measure it directly as the starpoint current at input IEE2 (ISt = IEE2).
Method 2 is to calculate the zero sequence current from the CTs on the starpoint side
(always side 2 in the 7UM62). The pertinent formulae are:
3I02 = ISt = IEE2
or
3I02 = IL1S2 + IL2S2 + IL3S2
When an earth fault occurs in the protected zone (Figure 2-46 fault location 1), there
is always a starpoint current ISt or zero sequence current flowing through the CTs of
side 2 (3I02). Depending on the network earthing conditions, there may also be an
earthing current (3I01) flowing through the CTs of side 1 to the fault location (dashed
arrow). Due to the definition of the current direction, however, the zero sequence cur-
rent 3I01 is more or less in phase with the starpoint current.
When an earth fault occurs outside the protected zone (Figure 2-47 fault location 2),
there is also a starpoint current ISt or zero sequence current flowing through the CTs
of side 2 (3I02), as well as a zero sequence current flowing through the CTs of side 1
(3I01). The zero sequence current must be the same at all three possible measure-
ment locations. As the current flowing into the protected object is defined as positive,
the zero sequence current flowing on side 1 (3I01) is in phase opposition to the star-
point current ISt or to the calculated zero phase current of side 2 (3I02).
Protected object:
iL1S1 Generator iL1S2
iL2S1 iL2S2 iEE2
iL3S1 iL3S2
3I 01 3I 02
2
Figure 2-47 Example of an External Fault
7UM62 Manual 99
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
When an external non-earthed fault causes a heavy current to flow through the pro-
tected zone, differences in the magnetic characteristics of the phase current trans-
formers under conditions of saturation may cause a significant summation current
which may simulate an earth current flowing into the protected zone. Measures must
be taken to prevent this current from causing a trip. The same may happen if, for ex-
ample, significant loads with a high inductive component (and thus high time con-
stants), such as motors or transformers, are switched on.
The earth current differential protection provides a number of restraint features which
differ significantly from conventional restraint methods (see margin heading „Restrain-
ing Measures“).
Evaluation of The earth current differential protection compares the fundamental wave of the zero
Measured currents on both sides (3I01 and 3I02) and calculates from them the differential and the
Quantities restraint current.
I0-Diff = | 3I01 + 3I02 |
I0-Res = | 3I01 | + | 3I02 |
Depending on the application, the current 3I02 may be the calculated zero sequence
current of side 2 or the directly measured starpoint current ISt.
Under no-fault conditions, and with ideal CTs, the zero sequence currents would be
zero, and consequently the differential and the restraint current would be zero as well.
To eliminate the influence of CT errors, the restraint is determined by the characteristic
(see Figure 2-48).
In case of an external earth fault, the differential current is zero or small, and the re-
straint current is twice the fault current. The measured quantities are inside the re-
straint zone. An internal earth fault, on the other hand, causes a fairly equal differential
and restraint current, which are both in the trip zone (along the dashed line).
The pickup threshold is set with the I-REF> stage.
I0Diff
with [I/InO]
Tripping zone
Restraint zone
Zone not considered
I-EDP>
1 I 0Res
with [I/InO]
Figure 2-48 Tripping and Restraint Characteristic
100 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
In applications with direct measurement of the starpoint current (e.g. earth current dif-
ferential protection for transformers), the starpoint current is queried to the evaluation
of the characteristics. This provides additional restraint against CT problems such as
wrong zero sequence current modeling of the phase current transformers on side 1.
The starpoint current must also have exceeded the pickup current I-REF> (see the
logic diagram in Figure 2-50).
In order to compensate differences in the primary CT current ratings, the currents are
matched to the current ratings of the protected object.
Restraining The purpose of the earth current differential protection is the detection of low-current
Measures faults. This implies a sensitive setting. A significant source of errors of the protection
function are differences in the transient magnetic characteristics of the phase CTs.
Factors to be considered here are different DC transformation characteristics and the
behaviour under conditions of saturation.
Spurious tripping of the protection in the presence of external earth faults must be
avoided.
One elementary rule for this is the use of phase current transformers that are balanced
to one another, so that their CT error (resulting zero sequence current) under steady-
state conditions is minimized.
Further restraining measures include:
• Additional evaluation of the starpoint current (see above)
Only in the presence of an earth fault can a current flow through the starpoint CTs.
This helps to avoid under no-fault conditions spurious tripping due to transformation
errors of the phase current transformers. This measure is also effective for faults
without earth involvement. A prerequisite for using this measure is the presence of
a starpoint CT in the application. It cannot be used for most generators in busbar
connection.
• Evaluation of the zero sequence current direction
This monitoring functions aims at preventing spurious tripping in the presence of ex-
ternal earth faults. It does so by evaluation of the zero sequence current direction.
Under ideal conditions, the currents are defined to be in phase in the presence of
an internal earth fault, and in phase opposition in the presence of an external earth
fault. The threshold angle is 90°. Figure 2-49 shows that monitoring is divided into
2 zones. Where fault conditions are unambiguous, tripping is immediately released
(zone I) or blocked (zone III). In zone II, an additional measurement is performed
before a decision is taken. Where the zero phase currents are too small (zone IV),
the direction criterion is ineffective, and 0° is assumed.
90 °
115 ° 65 °
II
III I
180 °
IV | ∆ϕ | = 0 °
Figure 2-49 Operating Ranges of the Direction Criterion
7UM62 Manual 101

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
• Phase current monitoring

To preclude spurious tripping due to CT saturation in the presence of external
faults, the protection function is blocked as soon as a maximum phase current is
reached. To do so, the phase currents of side 1 are monitored. As soon as one
phase current exceeds the threshold, the blocking takes effect.
This blocking is no drawback, since high-current faults are sufficiently controlled by
other protection functions such as differential protection, impedance protection and
overcurrent protection.
• Zero voltage monitoring
Where the phase current transformers model zero sequence currents on the sec-
ondary side after loads have been switched in, and where there is no direct evalu-
ation of the starpoint current, zero voltage monitoring should be used. It also pro-
vides additional restraint in the presence of external faults without earth involve-
ment.
The zero voltage is calculated from the phase-to-earth voltages. On detection of a
zero voltage, a release signal is output.
Logic The logic interconnection of all signals and the most important settings, as well as the
indications output, are shown in Figure 2-50. The function can be blocked with the in-
put “>BLOCK REF”. This input also allows to block other features using the CFC, for
instance if the measured zero voltage is to be injected via the UE input. This is neces-
sary if the voltage inputs are connected to a voltage transformer in V connection (open
delta connection).
Figure 2-50 shows the blocking of the phase currents and their release on the basis
of the calculated zero voltage. This is followed by the monitoring of the operating char-
acteristic with possibly an additional query of the starpoint current, and the angle re-
lease. When all conditions are met, the earth current differential protection picks up.
The subsequent timer T I-REF> is usually set to zero.
102 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
5812
REF BLOCKED
5803
>BLOCK REF
2102 REF I> BLOCK

5817 5821
1) REF picked up REF TRIP
IL1Sm
5840
2112 T I-REF>
REF I> blocked Tripping
1) matrix
IL2Sm OR &
&
1) Tmin TRIP
IL3Sm CMD
2103 REF U0>RELEASE 5841

REF U0> releas.
1.0...100.0 V
U0
OR
0.0 V
"1"
2110 I-REF>
2113 SLOPE
2114 BASE POINT
1) Use in generators: ILxSm always side 1

I0DIFF Pickup decision, Use in transformers: ILxSm depending on side allocation
I0RES DIFF/RESTR characteristic
I02 with I02 threshold criterion Angle difference
evaluation
| ∆ϕ |
Figure 2-50 Logic Diagram of the Earth Current Differential Protection
General A precondition for the operation of the earth current differential protection is that during
the configuration of the scope of functions (Section 2.2) the correct selection for the
application in hand has been made at address “0121 REF PROT.”. If the protected
object is a generator, the user can select either direct measurement of the starpoint
current via IEE2 (Gen. with IEE2), or current calculation (Gen. w. 3I0-S2). For
transformers, the method used is always direct measurement of the zero sequence
current, but the user can choose the allocation of sides (Transformer S1 or
Transformer S2).
A number of parameter settings must be made in Power System Data 1. They are re-
quired for normalization and for the definition of the current direction (see also Sec-
tions 2.3 and 2.12). If the IEE2 input is used, the protection device must be told the
neutral transformer transformation ratio (prim./sec.) and the terminal of the earthing-
side CT to which the IEE2 input is connected (see comments in Section 2.3).
Note:
When using the IEE2 input, it must be kept in mind that this is a sensitive current input.
The current amplitude is limited to approx. √2 1.6 A.
The neutral transformer should have a rated secondary current of 1 A. Where a 5 A
transformer is used, a commensurately higher transformation ratio must be chosen
(preferably factor 5).
7UM62 Manual 103

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Address 2101 REF PROT. is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only
the trip command (Block relay).
Note:
When the device is delivered, the earth current differential protection is set to OFF.
This is because this protection must not be used before at least the allocation and po-
larity of the CTs have been correctly set. Without these settings, the device may show
unpredictable behaviour (including spurious tripping)!
Pickup Values The sensitivity of the protection is determined by the setting of I-REF> (address
2110). This is the earth fault current flowing in from the starpoint of the protected ob-
ject (transformer, generator), and in some cases also from the network. This value
should be chosen on the basis of the most unfavourable case, i.e. fault currents enter-
ing from one side only. The current set refers to the nominal current of the protected
object or the protected side. The limit of sensitivity will in most cases be defined by the
CTs. A setting between 0.1 and 0.15 I/InO is a good value.
For the operating characteristic, the default settings can be used. If necessary, these
settings can be changed with the DIGSI communication software. The advanced pa-
rameters define the slope (2113A SLOPE) and the base point (2114A BASE POINT)
of the characteristic.
To stabilize the protection function, address 2102 can be set to blocking by the phase
current (REF I> BLOCK). As a rule of thumb, the pickup value should never be more
than twice the nominal current. With low-ohmic starpoint earthing, the formula is: nom-
inal current + earth current resulting from the starpoint resistance.
The zero voltage release depends on the operating range of the protection function.
95 % of a generator stator winding is a good value. Therefore, the secondary-side val-
ue has been set to 5.0 V (2103 REF U0>RELEASE). Where the zero voltage release
is not used, it must be set to 0.0 V.
Note:
For the protection function, the zero voltage calculated from the phase-to-earth volt-
ages has been multiplied with √3, which corresponds to the voltage present in a bro-
ken delta winding.
No settings need to be made for the angle release and the additional evaluation of the
directly measured starpoint current (where used).
For special applications, it may be advantageous to delay the trip command of the pro-
tection. This can be done by setting an additional delay time (address 2112 T I-
REF>). This delay time is normally set to 0. A minimum trip command duration has
been set for all protection functions in common (see Section 2.3.2 under “Trip Com-
mand Duration”).
104 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
2.13.2.1 Settings of the Earth Current Differential Protection

2101 REF PROT. OFF OFF Restricted Earth Fault Protection
ON
mands
2102 REF I> BLOCK 1.0..2.5 I/InO 1.5 I/InO REF Pickup of Phase Current
Blocking
2103 REF U0>RELEASE 1.0..100.0 V; 0 5.0 V REF Pickup of U0> Release
2110 I-REF> 0.05..2.00 I/InO 0.10 I/InO I-REF> Pickup
2112 T I-REF> 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T I-REF> Time Delay
2113A SLOPE 0.00..0.95 0.25 Slope of Charac. I-REF> = f(I0-

Rest)
2114A BASE POINT 0.00..2.00 I/InO 0.00 I/InO Base Point for Slope of Charac-
teristic
2.13.2.2 Information for the Earth Current Differential Protection

05803 >BLOCK REF >BLOCK restricted earth fault prot.
05811 REF OFF Restricted earth fault is switched OFF
05812 REF BLOCKED Restricted earth fault is BLOCKED
05813 REF ACTIVE Restricted earth fault is ACTIVE
05840 REF I> blocked REF is blocked by phase current
05841 REF U0> releas. REF Release by U0>
05817 REF picked up REF protection picked up
05821 REF TRIP REF protection TRIP
05836 REF Adap.fact. REF: adverse Adaption factor CT
05847 I0-Diff: I0-Diff at REF-Trip
05848 I0-Res: I0-Restraint at REF-Trip
7UM62 Manual 105

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.14 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40)
General The underexcitation or loss of field protection protects a synchronous generator/motor

from asynchronous operation in the event of a malfunction in the excitation system
and from local overheating of the rotor. Furthermore, it ensures that the network sta-
bility is not endangered due to the underexcitation of large synchronous generators.
Underexcitation In order to detect underexcitation, the unit processes all three terminal phase currents
Determination and all three terminal voltages to form the stator circuit criterion. It also processes the
excitation voltage and/or the signal from an external excitation voltage monitor to form
the rotor circuit criterion.
For the stator circuit criterion, the reciprocal of the impedance (equal the admittance)
is calculated from the positive sequence system of the currents and voltages. In the
admittance plane, the stability limit of the machine is independent of the voltage: thus,
the protection characteristic can be optimally matched to the stability characteristic of
the machine. By evaluating the positive sequence system, underexcitation conditions
are reliably detected even during asymmetrical faults within or outside of the machine.
Characteristics Figure 2-51 shows the loading diagram of the synchronous generator in the admit-
tance plane (P/U2; Q/–U2) with the steady-state stability limit which intersects the re-
active axis in close proximity to 1/Xd (reciprocal value of the synchronous direct reac-
tance).
Iw P
------- = ------- = G
U U
2
I EN
--------
UN
IN
-------
-
ϕN UN
ϑN
underexcited 1 overexcited –I b –Q
--------- ------- = -------- = –B
Xd U 2
U
UN Rated voltage Iw Active current

IN Nominal Current Ib Reactive current
IEN Rated excitation current G Conductance
ϑN Rated pole angle (rotor angle) B Susceptance
ϕN Rated load angle P Active power
Xd Synchronous reactance Q Reactive power
U Terminal voltage
Figure 2-51 Admittance Diagram of Turbo Generators
106 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40)
Note:
The generator diagram can be visualized in more than one way. Figure 2-51 shows a
form that is quite common at Siemens Power Generation, with a rotation of 90° and
mirroring at the active power axis.
The 7UM62 underexcitation protection provides three independent characteristics

which can be freely combined. As illustrated in Figure 2-52, it is, for example, possible
to model the static machine stability characteristic by means of two partial
characteristics with the same time delays (T CHAR. 1 = T CHAR. 2). The partial
characteristics are distinguished by the corresponding distance from the zero point (1/
xd CHAR. 1) and (1/xd CHAR. 2) the corresponding inclination angle α1 and α2.
If the resulting characteristic (1/xd CHAR.1)/α1; (1/xd CHAR.2)/α2 is exceed (in
Figure 2-52 to the left side), a delayed warning (e.g. by 10 s) or a trip signal are
transmitted. The delay is necessary to ensure that the voltage regulator is given
enough time to increase the excitation voltage.
G [p.u.]
Charact. 2
Characteristic 1
Charact. 3 E/U
I/U
α1
δ α2
α3
B [p.u.]
1/xd
CHAR.1
1/xd
CHAR.2
1/xd
CHAR.3
where
P ⁄ SN
G [p.u.] = ------------------------ Conductance per unit
2
( U ⁄ UN )
–Q ⁄ S N
B [p.u.] = ------------------------ Susceptance per unit
2
( U ⁄ UN )
Figure 2-52 Stator Criterion: Pick–Up Characteristic in Admittance Diagram
A further characteristic (1/xd CHAR.3 /α3 can be matched to the dynamic stability
characteristic of the synchronous machine. Since stable operation is impossible if this
characteristic is exceeded, immediate tripping is required in this case (T CHAR 3 time
stage).
7UM62 Manual 107

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Excitation Voltage In case of a faulty voltage regulator or a failure of the excitation voltage, it is possible
Request to switch up with a short delay (time stage T SHRT Uex<, e.g. 1.5 s). To do so, the
device must either be informed via a binary input of the excitation voltage failure, or
the excitation voltage must be fed in via measuring transducer TD3 and a voltage
divider, provided that at address 3012 EXCIT. VOLT. the excitation voltage request
via measuring transducer has been switched ON.
As soon as the excitation voltage drops below a settable minimum 3013 Uexcit. <,
short-time tripping is initiated.
Instead of the excitation voltage detection, or even in addition to it, the signal of an
external excitation voltage monitoring feature can be fed in via a binary input. Here
again, high-speed tripping is initiated as soon as a failure of the excitation voltage is
signalled.
Low-Pass Filter As the excitation DC voltage may contain a large amount of superimposed harmonics
(e.g. owing to thyristor control), an analog low pass is provided on the C-I/O-6 board
in addition to the integrated digital filter. This low pass damps especially multiples of
the sampling frequency, which cannot be suppressed sufficiently by the digital filter.
The jumper settings for activating this filter are described in Section 3.1.3. When the
7UM62 is delivered from the factory, the filter is on. The jumper setting must match the
setting of the parameter 0297 TRANSDUCER 3 (see Power System Data, Section
2.3.2). If they do not match, an alarm is output, the device is reported faulty and not
operative.
Undervoltage The admittance calculation requires a minimum measurement voltage. During a

Blocking severe collapse (short-circuit) or failure of the stator voltages, the protection is
therefore blocked by an integrated a.c. voltage monitor whose pickup threshold 3014A
Umin is set on delivery to 25 V.
Figure 2-53 illustrates the logic diagram of the underexcitation protection.
108 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3002 1/xd CHAR. 1

3003 ANGLE 1
3004 T CHAR. 1 FNo. 05344
Exc<1 TRIP
&
FNo. 05329
>Char. 1 BLK.
3005 1/xd CHAR. 2

Tripping
3006 ANGLE 2
3007 T CHAR. 2 FNo. 05345 matrix
Exc<2 TRIP
&
FNo. 05330
>Char. 2 BLK.
3008 1/xd CHAR. 3

3009 ANGLE 3
3010 T CHAR 3 FNo. 05343
Exc<3 TRIP
&
FNo. 05327
>Char. 3 BLK. FNo. 05337
OR Exc< picked up TMin
TRIP CMD
3011 T SHRT Uex<
&
FNo.05336
3013 Uexcit. < FNo. 05346
>Uexc fail. Exc<U<TRIP
OR
FNo. 05328
>Uexc fail.
3014A Umin
OR
FNo. 05323 FNo. 05334
>Exc. BLOCK Exc. U< blk
FNo. 05332
Excit.BLOCKED
Figure 2-53 Logic diagram of the Underexcitation Protection
General The underexcitation protection is only effective and accessible if this function was set
within the framework of the protective function configuration (section 2.2, address
0130, UNDEREXCIT. = Enabled). Set Disabled if the function is not required. At
the address 3001 UNDEREXCIT. the user can switch the function ON or OFF, or only
block the trip command (Block Relay).
The correct power system data is required according to section 2.3. This is a
prerequisite for the setting of the underexcitation protection.
7UM62 Manual 109

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The trip characteristics of the underexcitation protection in the admittance value

diagram are composed of straight lines which are respectively defined by their
conductance section 1/xd (=coordinate distance) and their inclination angle α. The
straight lines (1/xd CHAR.1)/α1 (characteristic 1) and (1/xd CHAR.2)/α2
(characteristic 2) form the static underexcitation limit (see figure 2-54). (1/xd CHAR.1)
corresponds to the reciprocal value of the related synchronous direct reactance.
1 1 UN
----- = ------ ⋅ ----------------
-
xd Xd 3 ⋅ I
N
If the voltage regulator of the synchronous machine has underexcitation limiting, the
static characteristics are set in such a way that the underexcitation limiting of the
voltage regulator will intervene before characteristic 1 is reached (see figure 2-56).
G [p.u.]
3 2 1
α1
α3 α2
B [p.u.]
1/xd CH.1
λ2 CH.2
1/xd
λλ2 3CH.3
1/xd
Figure 2-54 Underexcitation Protection Characteristics in the Admittance Plane
Characteristic- If the generator power diagram (Figure 2-55) in its preferred representation (abscissa
Curve Values = positive reactive power; ordinate = positive active power) is transformed to the
admittance plane (division by U2), the tripping characteristic can be matched
immediately to the stability characteristic of the machine. If the axis sizes are divided
by the nominal apparent power, the generator diagram is indicated per unit (this
diagram corresponds to a per unit representation of the admittance diagram).
110 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
P/SN U = UN = 6300 V
I = IN
1,4
SN = 5270 kVA
fN = 50.0 Hz
1,2 nN = 1500 RPM
Limit of the stator cos ϕ = 0.800
1,0 winding heating xd = 2.470
xq = 1.400
0,8 Measuring point
0,6
0,4
Phase Limit of the stator
angle winding heating
”Response
circle”
0,2
0
Q/SN
–0,8 –0,6 –0,4 –0,2 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8
underexcited overexcited
Figure 2-55 Power Diagram of a Salient-Pole Generator, Indicated per Unit
The primary setting values can be read out directly from the diagram. The related
values must be converted for the protection setting. The same conversion formula can
be used if the protection setting is calculated with the predefined synchronous direct
reactance.
1 1 I Nmach U N VT prim
------------- = ----------------- ⋅ ------------------
- ⋅ --------------------------
x dsec x dmach U Nmach I N CT prim
with xdsec Secondary per unit synchronous direct reactance,

xd mach Per unit synchronous direct reactance of machine,
IN mach Rated machine current
UN mach Rated machine voltage
UN VT prim Primary rated voltage of the voltage transformers
IN CT prim Primary rated current of the current transformers
Instead of 1/xd mach the approximate value IK0/IN can be used (with IK0 = short-circuit
current at no-load excitation).
Setting example:
Machine: UN mach = 6.3 kV
IN mach = SN/√3 UN = 5270 kVA/√3 ⋅ 6.3 kV = 483 A
xd mach = 2.47 (= machine manufacturer’s indication
in Fig. 2-55)
Current transformers: IN CT prim = 500 A
7UM62 Manual 111

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Voltage transformer: UN VT prim = 6.3 kV

1 1 483 A 6300 V
------------- = ----------- ⋅ ------------------- ⋅ ------------------- = 0.39
x dsec 2.47 6300 V 500 A
Multiplied by a safety factor of about 1.05, the setting value 1/xd CHAR. 1 at address
3002 results.
For α1, the angle of the underexcitation limiting of the voltage regulator is selected or
the inclination angle of the machine stability characteristic is used. The setting value
ANGLE 1 is typically situated between 60 ° and 80 °.
In most cases, the machine manufacturer prescribes a minimum excitation value for
small active powers. For this purpose, characteristic 1 is cut from characteristic 2 in
case of a low active-power load. Consequently, 1/xd CHAR. 2 is set to about 0.9 ⋅
(1/xd CHAR. 1), the ANGLE 2 to 90 °. The kinked tripping limit according to figure
2-54 (CHAR. 1, CHAR. 2) results in this way, if the corresponding time delays T
CHAR. 1 and T CHAR. 2 of both characteristics are set equally.
Characteristic 3 serves to adapt the protection to the dynamic machine stability limits.
If there are no precise indications, the user must select a value 1/xd CHAR. 3
situated approximately between the synchronous direct reactance xd and the transient
reactance xd'. However, it should be greater than 1.
A value between 80 ° and 110 ° is usually selected for the corresponding ANGLE 3,
which ensures that only a dynamic instability can lead to a pickup with characteristic
3. The associated time delay is set at address 3010 T CHAR 3 to the value suggested
in Table 2-6.
Underexcitation limitation
(controller)
G [p.u.]
Simulated
characteristic
IE
-------
-
consists of UN
characteristic 1
and char. 2 IN
-------
-
UN
ϕΝ
θΝ
B [p.u.]
1 1-
1.05 ⋅ ------- ------
xd xd
Figure 2-56 Admittance Diagram of a Turbo Generator
Time Delays If the static limit curve consisting of the characteristics 1 and 2 is exceeded, the voltage
regulator must first have the opportunity of enhancing the excitation. For this reason,
a warning message due to this criterion is ”long-time” delayed (at least 10 s for 3004
T CHAR. 1 and 3007 T CHAR. 2).
If the excitation voltage is missing or too low, the stator criterion picks up as well,
provided that the excitation voltage request feature has been switched ON at address
3012 EXCIT. VOLT., and the voltage has dropped below the threshold Uexcit. <
set at address 3013, or the absence of the excitation voltage has been signalled to
the device by a binary input. In all these cases tripping is possible with a short delay.
112 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
This feature is set at address 3011 T SHRT Uex<. The following messages and trip
commands are typically assigned:
Table 2-6 Setting the Underexcitation Protection
Characteristic 1 and 2 static not delayed Annunciation:

stability Err < PU
Characteristic 1 and 2 static long-time delayed Trip
stability T CHAR. 1 = T CHAR. 2 Exc<1 TRIP / Exc<2 TRIP
≈ 10 s
Characteristic 1 and 2 short–time delayed Trip
excitation voltage failure T SHRT Uex< ≈ 1.5 s Exc< Uexc < TRIP
Characteristic 3 short–time delayed Trip
dynamic stability T CHAR 3 ≈ 0.5 s Exc<3 TRIP
Note: If very short time delays are selected, dynamic balancing procedures may cause
unwanted operations. For this reason, it is recommended to set time values of 0.05 s
or higher.
Excitation Voltage The excitation voltage monitoring feature is set to approx. 50 % of the no-load excita-
Request tion voltage. If the generator is used for phase-shifting, an even lower threshold must
be chosen, depending on the application in had. It should also be noted that normally
a voltage divider is connected between the device and the excitation voltage.
U Exc 0
SettingxU Exc < ≈ 0.50 ⋅ ---------------- [ V ]
kU
where UExc No-load excitation voltage,

kVD Transformation ratio of voltage divider
Example:
UExc N = 110 V
UExc 0 = 40 V
kVD = 10: 1
40 V
Setting U Exc < ≈ 0.50 ⋅ ------------ = 2.0 V (address 3013)
10
2.14.2.1 Settings of the Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection

3001 UNDEREXCIT. OFF OFF Underexcitation Protection
ON
mands
3011 T SHRT Uex< 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T-Short Time Delay (Char. &
Uexc<)
7UM62 Manual 113

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

3012 EXCIT. VOLT. ON OFF State of Excitation Volt. Supervi-
OFF sion
3013 Uexcit. < 0.50..8.00 V 2.00 V Excitation Voltage Superv. Pik-

kup
3014A Umin 10.0..125.0 V 25.0 V Undervoltage blocking Pickup
3002 1/xd CHAR. 1 0.25..3.00 0.41 Conductance Intersect Charac-

teristic 1
3003 ANGLE 1 50..120 ° 80 ° Inclination Angle of Characteri-

stic 1
3004 T CHAR. 1 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec Characteristic 1 Time Delay

teristic 2

stic 2
3007 T CHAR. 2 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec Characteristic 2 Time Delay

teristic 3

stic 3
3010 T CHAR 3 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec Characteristic 3 Time Delay
2.14.2.2 Information for the Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection

05323 >Exc. BLOCK >BLOCK underexcitation protection
05329 >Char. 1 BLK. >BLOCK underexc. prot. char. 1
05328 >Uexc fail. >Exc. voltage failure recognized
05331 Excit. OFF Underexc. prot. is switched OFF
05332 Excit.BLOCKED Underexc. prot. is BLOCKED
05333 Excit.ACTIVE Underexc. prot. is ACTIVE
05334 Exc. U< blk Underexc. prot. blocked by U<
05336 Uexc failure Exc. voltage failure recognized
05337 Exc< picked up Underexc. prot. picked up
05344 Exc<1 TRIP Underexc. prot. char. 1 TRIP
05346 Exc<U<TRIP Underexc. prot. char.+Uexc< TRIP
114 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R)
2.15 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R)
General Reverse power protection is used to protect a turbo-generator unit in case of failure of
energy to the prime mover. In this case the synchronous generator runs as a motor
and drives the turbine, taking the required motoring energy from the network. This
condition leads to overheating of the turbine blades and must be interrupted within a
short time by tripping the network circuit-breaker. For the generator, there is the
additional risk that in case of a malfunctioning residual steam pass (defective stop
valves) after the switching off of the circuit breakers, the turbine-generator-unit is
speeded up, thus reaching an overspeed. For this reason, the system isolation should
only be performed after the detection of active power input into the machine.
Reverse Power The reverse power protection of the7UM62 precisely calculates the active power from
Determination the symmetrical components of the fundamental waves of the voltages and currents
by averaging the values of the last 16 cycles. The evaluation of only the positive
phase-sequence systems makes the reverse power determination independent of
current and voltage asymmetries and corresponds to the actual load of the drive end.
The calculated active power value corresponds to the overall active power. By taking
the error angles of the instrument transformers into account, the active power
component is calculated even with very high apparent powers and low power factor
(cos ϕ). The correction is performed by a W0 constant correction angle (see section
2.3), determined during the commissioning of the protective relay in the system. The
correction angle is set at Power System Data 1 (see Section 2.3).
Pickup Seal-In Time To ensure that frequently occurring short pickups can cause tripping, it is possible to
perform a selectable prolongation of these pickup pulses at parameter 3105A T-
HOLD. Each positive edge of the pickup pulses triggers this time stage again. For a
sufficient number of pulses, the pickup signals adds up and become longer than the
time delay.
Trip Signal For bridging a perhaps short power input during synchronization or during power
swings caused by system faults, the trip command is delayed by a selectable time T-
SV-OPEN. In case of a closed emergency tripping valve, a short delay is, however,
sufficient. By means of entering the emergency tripping valve position via a binary
input, the short time delay T-SV-CLOSED becomes effective under an emergency
tripping condition. The time T-SV-OPEN is still effective as back-up stage.
It is also possible to block tripping via an external signal.
Figure 2-57 illustrates the logic diagram of the reverse power protection.
7UM62 Manual 115

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
FNo. 05096
Pr picked up
3102 P> REVERSE 3105A T-HOLD 3103 T-SV-OPEN
&
FNo. 05097
Pr TRIP Tripping
matrix
3104 T-SV-CLOSED
&
FNo. 05098
Pr+SV TRIP TMin
FNo.05083 FNo. 05092 TRIP CMD
>Pr BLOCK Pr BLOCKED
FNo.05086
>SV tripped
Figure 2-57 Logic Diagram of the Reverse Power Protection
General The reverse power protection is only effective and accessible if this function was set
within the framework of the protective function configuration (section 2.2, address
0131, REVERSE POWER = Enabled. Set Disabled if the function is not required.
The address 3101 REVERSE POWER, serves to switch the function ON- or OFF or to
block only the trip command (Block Relay).
In case of a reverse power, the turbine set must be disconnected from the system as
the turbine operation is not permissible without a certain minimum steam throughput
(cooling) or, in case of a gas turbine set, the motor load would be too heavy for the
network.
Pick-Up Values The level of the active power input is determined by the friction losses to be overcome
and are situated in the following range, depending on the individual system:
• Steam turbines: PReverse/SN ≈ 1 % to 3 %
• Gas turbines: PReverse/SN ≈ 1 % to 3 %
• Diesel drives: PReverse/SN > 5 %
The setting can be acquired through a primary test. The reverse power should be
measured with the relay (Section 3.4.10.2). The user should select a setting of 0.5
times the value of the measured motoring energy. This value can be found at the per
cent operational measured values. The feature to correct angle faults of the current
and voltage transformers should be used especially for very large machines with a
particularly low motoring energy (see sections 2.3 and 3.4.10.2).
The pickup value 3102 P> REVERSE is to be set in percent of the secondary rated
apparent power.
116 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R)
SNsec = √3 ⋅ UNsec ⋅ INsec. If the primary motoring energy is known, it must be converted
to secondary quantities using the following formula:
P sec P mach U N mach I N mach

Setting = --------------- = -------------------- ⋅ --------------------- ⋅ ------------------
S Nsec S N mach U N prim I N prim
with Psec Secondary active power according to setting value

SNsec Secondary rated power = √3 ⋅ UNsec ⋅ INsec
Pmach Active power of machine according to setting value
SN mach Rated apparent power of machine
UN mach Rated voltage of machine
IN mach Rated current of the machine
UN prim Primary rated voltage of voltage transformers
IN prim Primary rated current of current transformers
Pickup Seal-In Time The 3105A T-HOLD pickup seal-in time serves to extend pulsed pickups to the
parameterized minimum duration.
Time Delays If reverse power without emergency tripping is used, a corresponding time delay must
be considered to bridge short reverse power states after synchronization or power
swings subsequent to system faults (e.g. 3-pole short circuit). Usually, a time delay
3103 T-SV-OPEN = approx. 10 s is set.
Under emergency tripping conditions, the reverse power protection performs a short-
time delayed trip subsequent to the emergency tripping via an oil-pressure switch or a
position switch at the emergency trip valve. Before tripping, it must be ensured that the
reverse power is only caused by the missing drive power at the turbine side. A time
delay is necessary to bridge the active power swing in case of sudden valve closing,
until a stationary active-power value is set. A 3104 T-SV-CLOSED time delay of about
1 to 3 s is sufficient for this purpose, whereas a time delay of about 0.5 s is
recommended for gas turbine sets. The set times are additional time delays not
including the operating times (measuring time, drop-out time) of the protective
function.
2.15.2.1 Settings of the Reverse Power Protection

3101 REVERSE POWER OFF OFF Reverse Power Protection
ON
mands
3102 P> REVERSE -30.00..-0.50 % -1.93 % P> Reverse Pickup
3103 T-SV-OPEN 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec Time Delay Long (without Stop
Valve)
3104 T-SV-CLOSED 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Time Delay Short (with Stop
Valve)
3105A T-HOLD 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec Pickup Holding Time
7UM62 Manual 117

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.15.2.2 Information for the Reverse Power Protection

05083 >Pr BLOCK >BLOCK reverse power protection
05086 >SV tripped >Stop valve tripped
05091 Pr OFF Reverse power prot. is switched OFF
05092 Pr BLOCKED Reverse power protection is BLOCKED
05093 Pr ACTIVE Reverse power protection is ACTIVE
05096 Pr picked up Reverse power: picked up
05097 Pr TRIP Reverse power: TRIP
05098 Pr+SV TRIP Reverse power: TRIP with stop valve
118 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F)
2.16 Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F)
General The machine protection 7UM62 includes an active power supervision which monitors
whether the active power falls below one set threshold, and whether a separate
second set threshold is exceeded. Each of these functions can initiate different control
functions.
When, for example, with generators operating in parallel, the active power output of
one machine becomes so small that other generators could take over this power, then
it is often appropriate to shut down the lightly loaded machine. The criterion in this
case is that the “forward” power supplied into the network falls below a certain value.
In some applications it can be desirable to output a control signal if the active power
output rises above a certain value.
For example, an industrial network which has certain measures of its own generation
is coupled via a coupling circuit breaker with a HV utility network and should be
decoupled when a fault in the utility network is not cleared within a critical time. As a
criterion for decoupling, underfrequency, undervoltage, overcurrent, power direction,
or combinations of these can be used. As a result, the 7UM62 can also be used for
network decoupling.
Active Power For power measurement, two measurement methods are available. Depending on the
Measuring application either high-speed measurement or high-accuracy measurement (average
about 16 cycles) may be selected. High-speed measurement is suitable e.g. for
network decoupling.
The device calculates the active power from the positive sequence systems of the
generator currents and voltages. This value is compared with the set values. Each
stage can be blocked individually, as can be the complete forward active power
supervision, via binary inputs.
Figure 2-58 shows the logic diagram of the forward active power supervision.
FNo. 05126
Pf< picked up
3202 Pf<
3204 T-Pf<
& Tripping
FNo. 05128 matrix
FNo. 05116 Pf< TRIP
>Pf< BLOCK FNo. 05127
Pf> picked up
3203 Pf>
3205 T-Pf>
& TMin
FNo. 05129 TRIP CMD
FNo. 05117
Pf> TRIP
>Pf> BLOCK
FNo. 05113 FNo. 05122
>Pf BLOCK Pf BLOCKED
Figure 2-58 Logic Diagram of the Forward Active Power Supervision
7UM62 Manual 119

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
General The forward active power protection is only effective and accessible if this function
was set within the framework of the protective function configuration (section 2.2,
address 0132, FORWARD POWER = Enabled. Set Disabled if the function is not
required. The address 3201 FORWARD POWER, serves to switch the function ON or OFF
or to block only the trip command (Block Relay).
Pick-up Values The setting of the forward power protection depends on the intended purpose. For this
Time Delays reason, general setting instructions are not possible. The pickup values are set in
percent of the secondary apparent power rating SNsec = √3 ⋅ UNsec ⋅ INsec.
Consequently, the machine power must be converted to secondary quantities:
P sec P mach U N mach I N mach
Setting = --------------- = -------------------- ⋅ --------------------- ⋅ ------------------
S Nsec S N mach U N prim I N prim
with Psec secondary active power according to setting value

SNsec Secondary rated power = √3 ⋅ UNsec ⋅ INsec
Pmach Active power of machine according to setting value
SN mach Rated apparent power of machine
UN mach Rated voltage of machine
IN mach Rated current of the machine
UN prim Primary rated voltage of voltage transformers
IN prim Primary rated current of current transformers
Address 3202 serves to set the threshold of the forward power to an underrange (Pf<)
and address 3203 (Pf>) serves to set it to overrange. Addresses 3204 T-Pf< and
3205 T-Pf> serve to set the associated time delays.
In address 3206A MEAS. METHOD the user can select whether a fast or a precise
measuring procedure must be used for the forward power calculation. In most cases,
the precise measuring procedure is preferred in the power station sector (as a rule),
whereas the fast procedure is applied for use as network decoupling.
The set times are additional time delays not including the operating times (measuring
time, drop-out time) of the protective function.
2.16.2.1 Settings of the Forward Active Power Supervision

3201 FORWARD OFF OFF Forward Power Supervision
POWER ON
mands
3202 Pf< 0.5..120.0 % 9.7 % P-forw.< Supervision Pickup
3204 T-Pf< 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec T-P-forw.< Time Delay
3203 Pf> 1.0..120.0 % 96.6 % P-forw.> Supervision Pickup
3205 T-Pf> 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec T-P-forw.> Time Delay
3206A MEAS. METHOD Method accurate Method accurate Method of Operation

Method fast
120 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F)
2.16.2.2 Information for the Forward Power Supervision

05113 >Pf BLOCK >BLOCK forward power supervision
05116 >Pf< BLOCK >BLOCK forw. power superv. Pf< stage
05117 >Pf> BLOCK >BLOCK forw. power superv. Pf> stage
05121 Pf OFF Forward power supervis. is switched OFF
05122 Pf BLOCKED Forward power supervision is BLOCKED
05123 Pf ACTIVE Forward power supervision is ACTIVE
05126 Pf< picked up Forward power: Pf< stage picked up
05127 Pf> picked up Forward power: Pf> stage picked up
05128 Pf< TRIP Forward power: Pf< stage TRIP
05129 Pf> TRIP Forward power: Pf> stage TRIP
7UM62 Manual 121

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.17 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21)
General The machine impedance protection is used as a selective time graded protection to
provide shortest possible tripping times for short-circuits in the synchronous machine,
on the terminal leads as well as in the lower voltage winding of the unit transformer. It
thus provides a fast back-up protection to the generator and transformer differential
relays.
The impedance protection feature of the 7UM62 always operates with the currents of
side 2 (IL1, 2 ,3; S2).
2.17.1.1 Pickup
General Fault detection is required to detect a faulty condition in the power system and to
initiate all the necessary procedures for selective clearance of the fault:
− Start the time delays for the final stage t3,
− Determination of the faulty phase
− Release of impedance calculation,
− Release of tripping command,
− Indication/output of the faulty conductor(s).
Overcurrent fault detection is used for the machine impedance protection, which can
be supplemented by an undervoltage seal-in circuit. Following numeric filtering, the
currents in each phase are monitored in comparison with a set threshold value. A pick-
up signal is generated for that (those) phase(s) in which the set threshold has been
exceeded. These pickup signals are considered for choosing the measured values.
The overcurrent fault detector is reset when 95% of the pick-up value is fallen below
unless it is maintained by the undervoltage seal-in feature.
Undervoltage Seal- In case of excitation systems deriving their power from the machine terminals or from
In the network, the excitation voltage can rapidly decay to almost zero. This results in
decreasing short-circuit current, in spite of the short-circuit, and consequently drop-off
of the overcurrent fault detectors. In such cases the impedance protection pick-up is
maintained for a sufficiently long period by means of an undervoltage controlled seal-
in circuit using the positive sequence voltage. Fault detection will drop off only when
the voltage has reappeared to a magnitude of 105% of the predetermined value, or
when the holding time has expired.
The seal-in logic operates separate for each phase. The first pickup of a phase
overcurrent starts the timer T-SEAL-IN.
Figure 2-59 shows the logic diagram of the fault detection module of the impedance
protection.
122 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Impedance Protection (ANSI 21)
2.17.1.2 Determination of the Short–Circuit Impedance
For calculation of the fault impedance, the currents and voltages of the faulty loop are
decisive. The phase selective fault detector determines the faulted loop and releases
the corresponding measurement values for impedance calculation (see Table 2-7).
Loop Selection − The corresponding phase-earth loop is used for a 1-pole pickup.
− With a 2-pole pickup, the phase-phase loop with the corresponding phase-to-phase
voltage is used for impedance calculation.
− With a 3-pole pickup, the phase-phase loop with the highest current value is used
and with equal current amplitudes, the procedure described in the lowest line of
Table 2-7 is applied.
Table 2-7 Measuring Loop Selection
Pickup Measuring Loop

1-pole L1 Phase-earth L1–E
L2 L2–E
L3 L3–E
2-pole L1...L2 Phase-phase, L1– L2
L2, L3 Calculation of UI I and II I L2– L3
L3, L1 L3– L1
3-pole, with L1.2*L2,L3 Phase-earth, selection of L2–E
different amplitudes L2,2*L3,L1 loop with the highest current L3–E
L3,2*L1,L2 UI (Imax) and II (Imax) L1–E
3-pole, with L1, L2, L3 Phase-earth, any, maximum IIL1=IL2=IL3 => IL1
same amplitude current amount) IL1=IL2 > IL3 => IL1
IL2=IL3 > IL1 => IL2
IL3=IL1 > IL2 => IL1
This loop selection type ensures that the fault impedance of system faults is measured
correctly via the unit transformer. A measuring error occurs with a 1-pole system short-
circuit, as the zero phase-sequence system is not transmitted via the machine
transformer (switching group e.g. Yd5). Table 2-8 describes the fault modeling and the
measuring errors.
7UM62 Manual 123

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Table 2-8 Fault Modeling and Measuring Errors on the Generator Side in Case of System
Faults
Z
System Fault Fault Model on the Loop selection Measuring Errors
Generator Side
3–pole short 3–pole short circuit Phase-earth Always correct
circuit measuring
2–pole short 3–pole short circuit Phase-earth loop Always correct
circuit with highest current measuring
1–pole short 2–pole short circuit Phase-phase loop Impedance measured
circuit too high by the zero
impedance
124 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
FNo. 03967
Imp. Fault L1
OR Imp. Fault L2
*)
&
FNo. 03969
Imp. Fault L3

OR
*) & OR Imp. picked up
Pickup IL3>
OR
*) &
FNo. 03953 FNo. 03962

>Imp. BLOCK Imp. BLOCKED
FNo. 03970
Imp. I> & U<
OR
*) seal-in logic operates
3303 U< SEAL-IN
separately for each phase
Pickup U1< &
S Q
Fuse Failure & ≥1 R
3305 T-SEAL-IN
FNo. 03958
>Useal-in BLK
Figure 2-59 Logic Diagram of the Pickup Stage of the Impedance Protection
2.17.1.3 Tripping Characteristic
The tripping zones of the machine impedance protection relay have a polygonally
shaped trip characteristic (see also Figure 2-60). It is a symmetrical characteristic,
even though a fault in reverse direction (negative R and X values) is impossible
provided the usual connection to the current transformers at the star-point side of the
generator is used. The polygon is identified by one parameter: impedance Z.
As long as a fault detector has picked up, the impedance calculation is effected
continuously. This is carried out by complex division of the voltage and current phases
derived from the loop selection. When the calculated fault impedance lies within the
set trip characteristic, the protection issues a trip command which may be delayed
according to the time setting.
7UM62 Manual 125

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The protected zones can be chosen such that the first stage (ZONE Z1, T-Z1) covers
faults in the generator and the lower voltage side of the unit transformer, whereas the
second stage (ZONE Z2, ZONE2 T2) measures into the network. It should be noted
that faults in the system cause impedance measurement errors due to the connection
group (star-delta) of the unit transformer (see subsection 2.17.1.2). An unwanted
operation of the stage can be excluded as the fault impedances of power system faults
are modeled too high.
Faults outside this range are switched off by the T END final time stage.
Depending on the switching status of the system, it may be useful to extend the ZONE
Z1, T-Z1. If, for example, the high-voltage side circuit breaker is open, the pickup can
only be caused by a fault in the power unit. If a consideration of the circuit breaker
auxiliary contact is possible, a so-called ZONE Z1B overreach zone can be switched
effective (see Figure 2-62).
X
X2=Z2
X1b=Z1b
X1=Z1
R1b=Z1b
R1=Z1 R2=Z2
R
Figure 2-60 Tripping Characteristics of the Impedance Protection
2.17.1.4 Tripping Logic
The T END time delay is started subsequent to the protection pickup. The fault loop is
determined now. The loop impedance components are compared with the limit values
of the zones previously set. The tripping is executed if the impedance is within its zone
during the expiration of the corresponding time stage. For the first Z1 zone and also
for the Z1B overreach zone, the time delays will in most cases be zero or at least very
short, i.e. the tripping is executed as soon as it is certain that the fault is within this
zone.
The Z1B overreach stage can be switched effective from outside, via a binary input.
For the Z2 zone which may reach into the network, a time delay is selected
overreaching the first stage of the power system protection.
126 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A drop-out can only be caused by a drop-out of the overcurrent pickup and not by
leaving the tripping polygon.
Figure 2-61 illustrates the logic diagram of the impedance protection.
FNo. 03966 3312 T END

Imp. picked up
3310 ZONE Z2 3311 ZONE2 T2
& S Q
R
3306 ZONE Z1 3307 T-Z1
& S Q
R
Z 3308 ZONE Z1B 3309 T-Z1B
U I & S Q
UL1,UL2,UL3 R
IL1,IL2,IL3 Loop
selection
FNo. 3967
Imp. Fault L1 FNo. 3977
U1
FNo. 3968 Imp.Z1<TRIP
IL1,IL2,IL3
Imp. Fault L2
FNo. 3969 FNo. 3979
Imp. Fault L3 Imp.Z2<TRIP Tripping
Pickup FNo. 3970 matrix
Imp I> & U< PU FNo. 3978
Imp.Z1B<TRIP
FNo. 3958 FNo. 3980

>Useal-in BLK Imp.T3>TRIP
3315 BLOCKING OF TMin

TRIP CMD
Z1
„1“
Z1 and Z2
IL1, IL2, IL3 FNo. 3976 &
I2 Power Swing
Power
Z1 swing
logic
see Section 2.17.3
FNo. 0361
>FAIL:Feeder V
OR
see Figure 2-120 in
Section 2.38.1.4
FFM
FNo. 3956
>Extens. Z1B
FNo. 3953 FNo. 3962

>Imp. BLOCK Imp. BLOCKED
Figure 2-61 Logic Diagram of the Impedance Protection
7UM62 Manual 127

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
General The machine impedance detection is only effective and accessible if it was previously
set within the framework of project configuration (Section 2.2) at address 0133,
IMPEDANCE PROT. = Enabled. Set Disabled if the function is not required.
Address 3301 IMPEDANCE PROT. is used to switch the function ON and OFF, or to
Pickup The maximum load current during operation is the most important criterion to be
considered when setting the overcurrent pickup. A pickup by an overload must be
excluded in any case! For this reason, the 3302 IMP I> pick-up value must be set
above the maximum (over) load current to be expected. Recommended setting: 1.2 to
1.5 times the nominal machine current. The pickup logic corresponds to the logic of
the UMZ I> definite time-overcurrent protection.
If the pickup is derived from the generator terminals and if, for this reason, the short
circuit can fall below the pickup value (address 3302) due to the collapsing voltage,
the undervoltage seal-in feature is used, i.e. the address 3303 U< SEAL-IN is
switched ON.
The undervoltage seal-in feature U< (address 3304) is set to a value below the lowest
phase-to-phase voltage occurring during operation, e.g. to U< = 75 % to 80 % of the
nominal voltage. The seal-in time (address 3305 T-SEAL-IN) must exceed the
maximum fault clearance time in a back-up case (recommended setting: address
3312 T END + 1 s).
Impedance Stages As illustrated in figure 2-60, the protection has the following characteristics which may
be set independently:
− 1st zone (Z1 instantaneous zone) with the setting parameters
ZONE Z1 Reactance = reach,
T-Z1 = 0 or short delay, if required.
− Z1B overreach zone, externally controlled via binary input, with the setting
parameters
ZONE Z1B Reactance = reach,
T-Z1B T1B = 0 or short delay, if required.
− 2nd zone (Z2 zone) with the setting parameters
ZONE Z2 Reactance = reach,
ZONE2 T2 The user must select a value for T2 which is situated above the
grading time of the network protection.
− Non-directional final stage with the setting parameter
T END The user must select a value for T END which ensures that the 2nd
or 3rd stage of the series-connected power system distance
protection is overreached.
As the user can proceed on the assumption that the impedance protection measuring
influences the unit transformer, it must be ensured that the parameterization selection
sufficiently considers the transformer control range.
Therefore, ZONE Z1 is normally set to a reach of approx. 70 % of the protected zone
(i.e. about 70 % of the transformer reactance), with no or only a small delay (i.e. T-Z1
= 0.00 s to 0.50 s). In this case, the protective relay will switch off faults on this distance
128 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
with its operating time or with a slight time delay (undelayed tripping). A 0.1 s time
delay is preferred.
For ZONE Z2 the reach could be set to about 100 % of the transformer reactance, or
in addition to a network impedance. The corresponding ZONE2 T2 time stage is to be
selected in a way that it overreaches the network protective relays of the following
lines. The T END time is the last back-up time.
The following formula is generally valid for the primary impedance (with limiting to the
unit transformer):
2
k R u sc U N
Z prim = ---------- ⋅ ---------- ⋅ --------
100 100 S N
with kR Zone reach of zone Z1 in [%]

usc Relative transformer short-circuit voltage [%]
SN Rated transformer power [MVA]
UN Machine-side rated transformer voltage [kV]
The values determined such must be converted for the secondary side of current and
voltage transformers. In general:
CT transformation ratio
Z secondary = ------------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ Z primary
VT transformation ratio
The nominal current of the protective relay (= secondary nominal current of the current
transformer) is automatically considered by the relay. You have already
communicated the transformation ratios of the current and voltage transformers to the
relay by entering the nominal transformer quantities (see Section 2.3).
Example:
Transformer data:
usc = 7 %
SN = 5.3 MVA
UN = 6.3 kV
Transformation ratios:
Current transformer transformation ratio = 500 A/1 A
6.3 kV 100 V
VT transformation ratio = ----------------- ⁄ ---------------
3 3
This results to a 70 % reach for zone 1:
2
70 7 6.3
Z1 prim = ---------- ⋅ ---------- ⋅ ----------- = 0.3669 Ω
100 100 5.3
7UM62 Manual 129

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Consequently, the secondary side setting value of zone 1 at address 3306 ZONE Z1
is:
500 A ⁄ 1 A
Z1 secondary = ------------------------------------ ⋅ 0.3669 Ω = 2.91 Ω
6.3 kV ⁄ 100 V
Note: The following ratio would result from the connection of a 5 A device to a 5 A
transformer:
500 A ⁄ 5 A
Z1 secondary = ------------------------------------ ⋅ 0.3669 Ω = 0.58 Ω
6.3 kV ⁄ 100 V
The following primary reactance results for a 100 % reach for zone 2:
2
100 7 6.3
Z2 prim = ---------- ⋅ ---------- ⋅ ----------- = 0.5242 Ω
100 100 5.3
The following secondary side setting value of zone 2 results at address 3310 ZONE
Z2:
500 A ⁄ 1 A
Z2 secondary = ------------------------------------ ⋅ 0.5242 Ω = 4.16 Ω
6.3 kV ⁄ 100 V
t
T3
T2
T1
Z
Z1 Z2 Z1B
X1=0.70*X1Transf (X1, (X2, (X1B,
R1) R2 ) R1B)
X1=X1Transf
Internal consumption
BI
Z<
Figure 2-62 Time Grading for Machine Impedance Protection – Example
Z1B Overreach The Z1B overreach zone (address 3308 ZONE Z1B) is an externally controlled stage
Zone which does not influence the Z1 normal stage. Consequently, there is no changeover,
but the overreach zone is switched effective or ineffective, depending on the position
of the high-voltage side circuit breaker.
130 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
The Z1B zone is usually switched effective with an open high-voltage circuit breaker.
In this case, every impedance protection pickup can only be due to a fault in the
protection zone of the block, as the power system is disconnected from the block.
Consequently, the undelayed tripping zone can be extended to 100 % to 120 % of the
protection zone without any loss of selectivity.
The Z1B zone is activated via a binary input controlled by the circuit breaker auxiliary
contact (see figure 2-62). The overreach zone is assigned to an individual 3309 T-
Z1B time delay.
Final Stage In case of short circuits outside the Z1 and Z2 zones, the relay functions as a time-
delayed overcurrent protection. Its nondirectional final time T END is selected in a way
that its time value overreaches the second or third stage of the series-connected
network distance protection.
2.17.3 Power Swing Blocking
General Dynamic occurrences such as sudden load changes, short-circuits, automatic reclo-
sures or switching operations within the power system may cause power swings.
Therefore, the impedance protection is complemented by a power swing blocking
function to avoid spurious tripping.
Power swings are three-phase symmetrical occurrences. The first prerequisite is
therefore the symmetry of the phase currents, which is verified by evaluation of the
negative sequence current. This means that asymmetrical (all single-phase and two-
phase) short-circuits cannot cause the power swing blocking to pick up. Even if a pow-
er swing has been detected, the asymmetrical short-circuits following it quickly deac-
tivate the power swing blocking and make a trip by the impedance protection possible.
Since a power swing happens much more slowly than a short-circuit, the rate of
change of the impedance is a reliable criterion for its identification. Because of its sym-
metrical nature, the positive sequence impedance obtained from the positive se-
quence components of the currents and voltages is evaluated.
Logic Figure 2-63 shows the logic diagram of the power swing blocking. In the upper section,
the current symmetry monitoring can be seen. A release signal is given if there is a
three-pole pickup with no negative sequence system current. For detection of power
swings, a power swing polygon (P/SPOL) is used which is greater than the trip polygon
(TPOL). The distance between the two polygons can be set (common setting for R and
X direction). The user can choose for each setting parameter whether the trip polygon
refers only to characteristic Z1 or to characteristics Z1 & Z2. In the latter case, the trip
polygon is the maximum impedance value.
Measuring The criterion for power swing blocking is composed of the power swing polygon, its
Principle distance to the trip polygon, the trip polygon itself and the rate of change of the imped-
ance. The protection compares the first impedance value after entering the power
swing polygon (at a moment Tent) with the last impedance value outside the polygon
(at a moment Tent-∆t). The time ∆t is determined by the measuring interval, which is
one cycle. If the rate of change of the impedance vector thus determined is less than
a set value ∆Z/∆t, a power swing is detected. The impedance stage is not blocked,
however, until the impedance vector enters the trip polygon TPOL.
If the first impedance value is both inside the P/SPOL and the TPOL, the protection
detects immediately a short-circuit, because there must be at least one impedance
value between the P/SPOL and the TPOL. The distance between the power swing
7UM62 Manual 131

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
polygon P/SPOL and the trip polygon TPOL, and the rate of change ∆Z/∆t are
matched to one another in such a way that power swings are reliably detected and the
desired impedance zone (Z1 or Z1 & Z2) of the impedance protection is blocked. The
blocking remains effective until the measured impedance vector has left again the trip
polygon / power swing polygon, the impedance changes faster than the change rate,
or asymmetrical power conditions rule out the possibility of a power swing. The power
swing blocking time is also limited by a parameter setting
(T-ACTION P/S).
Blocking of the Power swing blocking is mostly used for impedance stage Z1, because the delay time
Impedance Stages T1 for this stage is set low. Accordingly, a high delay time T2 must be set for zone Z2.
In the overreach zone Z1B no power swings can occur by definition, since the network
breaker is open and there is thus no second machine for power swings. Likewise, the
power swing blocking does not block the non-directional overcurrent stage (T3).
3966
Imp. picked up
3-pole pickup
OFF
Release of Power
ON swing blocking
&
"1"
3313 POWER SWING
I2<0,1I/In, Gen
IL1 see Figure 2-61
IL2
IL3 I2 Blocking
3976
Power Swing
3315 dZ/dt "Power swing
3314 P/SPOL-TPOL 3317 T-ACTION P/S
presumed"
P/SPOL Tent S Q
& &
Z(Tent) &
Within <
P/S polygon R
Z(Tent-∆t)
P/SPOL Rate of ∆Z / ∆t
change > OR
Outside
P/S polygon Z(Tent) First value within P/S polygon
(at Tent)
Z(Tent-∆t) Last value outside P/S polygon
P/SPOL TPOL P/SPOL Power swing polygon
TPOL Trip polygon
Within ∆Z / ∆t Rate of change of the impedance
Trip polygon vector
Figure 2-63 Logic Diagram for the Power Swing Blocking of the Impedance Protection
2.17.3.1 Setting Hints
The power swing blocking is only effective if address 3313 POWER SWING has been
set to ON.
A sensible compromise has to be found for the distance between the power swing
polygon and the trip polygon (parameter: P/SPOL-TPOL (address 3314) and for the
rate of change (parameter: dZ/dt (address 3315)). It must be kept in mind that the
rate of change is not constant and decreases with increasing proximity to the origin of
the coordinate system.The rate of change is also determined by power system condi-
tions, such as the impedance between the systems involved in the power swing, and
by the power swing frequency (see also Section 2.18 Out-of-Step Protection).
132 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
The following relation allows to estimate the rate of change:

dZ ( t ) dR ( t ) Xπf p Xπf p Ω
-------------- ≈ -------------- = ----------------------------
- = ----------------------
- in ----
dt dt 2
2sin ( πf p t ) 2 δ s
2sin æ ---ö
è 2ø
Meaning:
X Reactance between the sources of the power swing
fp Power swing frequency
δ Power swing angle
Figure 2-64 shows an example of how the rate of change evolves as a function of the
power swing angle. The rate of change is smallest at an angle of 180°, but increases
proportionally with the angle considered.
Ω/s
300
dZ(δ)
250
200
150
100
50
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400

δ Degrees
Figure 2-64 Evolution of the Rate of Change (fp = 1 Hz; X = 10 Ω)
For this reason, the setting value dZ/dt must also be coordinated with the impedance
jump occurring at the start of a short-circuit.
To do so, you determine the minimum operating impedance (ZL, min), form the differ-
ence to the setting of the impedance zone (e.g. Z1) and calculate the impedance gra-
dient, taking into account the one-cycle measuring interval.
Example:
Umin = 0.9 UN, Imax = 1.1 IN, uK = 10 %, ∆t = 20 ms
UN = 100 V, IN = 1 A
0, 7 ⋅ u K ⋅ U N
Z1 = --------------------------------------- = 4, 04 Ω
100 % ⋅ 3 ⋅ I N
7UM62 Manual 133

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
0, 9 ⋅ U N
Z L, min = ------------------------------- = 47, 24 Ω
3 ⋅ 1, 1 ⋅ I N
dZ
------- = ( Z L, min – Z1 )∆/t = 43, 20 Ω/20 ms = 2160 Ω/s
dt
If safety factor 4 is chosen, dZ/dt should never be set higher than 500 Ω/s
(or 100 Ω/s for 5 A transformers).
The default setting for dZ/dt is 300 Ω/s, which should be adequate for most applica-
tions. This is also the basis for the minimum distance P/SPOL - TPOL, assuming that
for detection of a power swing there must be one impedance value between P/SPOL
and TPOL.
P/SPOL – TPOL > dZ/dt ⋅ ∆t = 300 Ω/s ⋅ 0.02 s = 6 Ω (selected setting value: 8 Ω)
All other settable parameters are advanced parameters which need not normally be
modified.
Table 2-9 Parameters
Address Parameter Remark

3316A BLOCKING OF Default setting is Z1, as there is little or no delay for
this stage. The delay time of Z2 is determined by the
power system protection, and greater (see also the
hints below).
3317A T-ACTION P/S The default setting is 3 s. This time depends on the
minimum possible power swing frequency.
Whether a power swing can cause an overfunctioning of the impedance protection de-
pends mainly on the time the impedance vector remains inside the trip polygon. This
time can only be reliably determined by „transient“ calculations.
If the rate of change in the proximity of 180° is known, it can be the basis for a rough
estimation of the time.
T = 2 ⋅ Zcharacteristic /dZ/dt (180°)
The above data yield the following value:
Zcharacteristic= Z1 = 4 Ω
dZ/dt (180°) = 20 Ω/s (from Figure 2-64)
T = 2 ⋅ 4 Ω/20 Ω/s = 0.4 s
This means that for delay times of more than 0.4 s no power swing blocking is needed.
134 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
2.17.3.2 Settings of the Impedance Protection

3301 IMPEDANCE OFF OFF Impedance Protection
PROT. ON
mands
3302 IMP I> 0.10..20.00 A 1.35 A Fault Detection I> Pickup
3303 U< SEAL-IN ON OFF State of Undervoltage Seal-in

OFF
3304 U< 10.0..125.0 V 80.0 V Undervoltage Seal-in Pickup
3305 T-SEAL-IN 0.10..60.00 sec 4.00 sec Duration of Undervoltage Seal-in
3312 T END 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec T END: Final Time Delay
3306 ZONE Z1 0.05..130.00 Ohm 2.91 Ohm Impedance Zone Z1
3307 T-Z1 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec Impedance Zone Z1 Time Delay
3308 ZONE Z1B 0.05..65.00 Ohm 4.99 Ohm Impedance Zone Z1B
3309 T-Z1B 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec Impedance Zone Z1B Time
Delay
3310 ZONE Z2 0.05..65.00 Ohm 4.16 Ohm Impedanz Zone Z2
3311 ZONE2 T2 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Impedance Zone Z2 Time Delay
3313 POWER SWING ON OFF Power Swing Blocking

OFF
3314 P/SPOL-TPOL 0.10..30.00 Ohm 8.00 Ohm Distance betw. Power Swing -
Trip-Pol.
3315 dZ/dt 1.0..600.0 Ohm/s 300.0 Ohm/s Rate of Change of dZ/dt
3316A BLOCKING OF Zone Z1 Zone Z1 Power Swing Blocking locks out

Zone Z1 and Z2
3317A T-ACTION P/S 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec Power Swing Action Time
2.17.3.3 Information from the Impedance Protection

03953 >Imp. BLOCK >BLOCK impedance protection
03956 >Extens. Z1B >Zone 1B extension for impedance prot.
03958 >Useal-in BLK >Imp. prot. : BLOCK undervoltage seal-in
03961 Imp. OFF Impedance protection is switched OFF
03962 Imp. BLOCKED Impedance protection is BLOCKED
03963 Imp. ACTIVE Impedance protection is ACTIVE
03966 Imp. picked up Impedance protection picked up
03970 Imp. I> & U< Imp.: O/C with undervoltage seal in
7UM62 Manual 135

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

03967 Imp. Fault L1 Imp.: Fault detection , phase L1
03977 Imp.Z1< TRIP Imp.: Z1< TRIP
03978 Imp.Z1B< TRIP Imp.: Z1B< TRIP
03979 Imp. Z2< TRIP Imp.: Z2< TRIP
03980 Imp.T3> TRIP Imp.: T3> TRIP
03976 Power Swing Power swing detection
136 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78)
2.18 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78)
General In extensive high-voltage networks, short-circuits which are not disconnected quickly
enough, or disconnection of coupling links which may result in an increasing of the
coupling reactance, may lead to system swings. These consist of power swings which
endanger the stability of the power transmission. Stability problems result in particular
from active power swings which can lead to pole-slipping and thus to overloading of
the synchronous machines.
2.18.1.1 Measuring Principle
General The out-of-step protection detects these power swings by the well-proven impedance
measurement. The trajectory of the complex impedance vector is evaluated. The
impedance is calculated from the positive sequence components of the voltages and
currents. Trip decision is made dependent of the rate of change of the impedance
vector and on the location of the electrical centre of the power swing.
The out-of-step condition is illustrated at a simplified equivalent circuit. Figure 2-65
shows the generator voltage UG and the network equivalent voltage UN. The
generator, transformer, and network impedance is situated between these two
voltages. The total of these impedances should be the impedance Ztot.
ZG ZTr IN
∼ ∼
UG UN
Ztot = ZG + ZTr + ZN
m=0 m=1
UG U(m) UN
UG U(m) UN
Figure 2-65 Equivalent of Power Swing
The measurement location divides the total impedance into the impedances m ⋅ Ztot
and (1-m) ⋅ Ztot. The following applies for the impedance at m:
U(m)
Z(m) = -------------
I(m)
7UM62 Manual 137

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The current I is independent of the location of the measurement:
UG – U N
I(m) = I = ----------------------
Z tot
The voltage U at the location of measurement m is:
U(m) = U G – ( m ⋅ Z tot ⋅ I )
Thus results with:
j δG j δN
UG = U G ⋅ e UN = UN ⋅ e δ = δ G – δN
1
Z(m) = ------------------------------------- – m ⋅ Z tot
UN –j δ
1 – æ -------- ⋅ e ö
è UG ø
where δ is the displacement angle between the generator voltage and the network
equivalent voltage. Under normal conditions, this angle depends on the load situation
and is nearly constant. It fluctuates during power swings and can vary, in case of an
out-of-step condition, between 0° and 360°. Figure 2-66 shows the trajectory of the
impedance vector at the measurement location m according to the above formula. The
origin of the coordinate system corresponds to the measurement location (voltage
transformer set). When the ratio of the voltage magnitudes UN/UG is kept constant and
the load angle δ varies, then circles result as a locus diagram. The centre and the
radius of the circle are determined by the ratio UN/UG. The centre points are situated
on a line which is determined by Ztot. Minimum and maximum of the magnitude of the
measured impedance are at load angles δ = 0° and δ = 180°. If the measurement
location is the electrical centre, the measured voltage, and thus the measured
impedance, becomes zero when the load angle becomes δ = 180°.
Power Swing The measurement characteristic is a rectangle with adjustable widths and inclination
Polygon angle ϕP. This ensures optimum matching to the conditions in the power station.
138 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Im(Z)
Z(m)
δ=0° UN
--------- = 0.8
UN UG
--------- = 0.7
UG
(1–m)Ztot
δ=180°
(0.5–m)Ztot
ϕP Re(Z)
UN
- = 1.0
--------
δ=180° UG
–mZtot
UN
--------- = 1.3
UG
δ=0°
UN
--------- = 1.2
UG
Figure 2-66 Impedances at the Measurement Location m
2.18.1.2 Out-of-Step Logic
Figure 2-67 shows, more detailed, the power swing detection characteristic. The
inclination angle ϕP is assumed to be 90°. The setting parameters Za, Zb, Zc and (Zd–
Zc) determine the rectangle. It is symmetrical as to its vertical axis. The limit or Zb
reaches in reverse direction into the generator. The forward reaches are Zc) into the
unit transformer, and the second stage Zd) into the network system. Two
characteristics are available. The lower area, characteristic 1 (i.e. the non-hatched
area in Figure 2-67), covers the electrical centre being in the generator block until the
unit transformer, the hatched area, characteristic 2, discriminates the electrical centre
being in the network system. The point of crossing of the symmetry axis is decisive for
the assignment to the characteristic.
Power swings are three-phase symmetrical occurrences. The first prerequisite is
therefore the symmetry of the currents which is verified by evaluation of the negative
sequence current. A condition for power swing detection is that the positive sequence
component of the current exceeds an adjustable limit I1and the negative sequence
current remains below an adjustable value I2.
7UM62 Manual 139

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Im(Z)

Zd
Zd–Zc Characteristic 2 Z=R +jX
Zc
Characteristic 1
ϕP Za Re(Z)
Zb
Figure 2-67 Polygonal Out-of-Step Characteristic and Typical Power Swing Occurrences
An out-of-step condition requires, additionally, that the impedance vector enters a

power swing characteristic at one side and leaves it at the other side (loss of
synchronism, cases and in Figure 2-67). This is characterized in that the real
component of the impedance (or its component rectangular to the symmetrical axis ϕP
has changed its sign while passing through the characteristic.
It is also possible for the impedance vector to enter and leave the power swing polygon
at the same side. In this case, power swing tends to be stabilized (cases and in
Figure 2-67).
When an out-of-step condition is recognized, i.e. when the impedance vector has
passed through a power swing characteristic, an annunciation is issued which also
identifies the characteristic. Additionally, a counter n1 (for characteristic 1) or n2 (for
characteristic 2) is incremented.
Out-of-step protection pick-up is indicated when a counter is set to 1. Another out-of-
step indication is given, for an adjustable time period, each time a counter is
incremented. After an adjustable holding time pick-up resets unless a new power
swing condition has been recognized. The holding time is triggered each time a
counter is incremented.
Trip command is given when the number of out-of-step periods, i.e. one of the
counters, has reached a selectable number. The trip command is held for at least the
set time T-HOLDING. The minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD does not
start until the pickup has reset.
140 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Figure 2-68 shows the logic diagram of the out-of-step protection. The feature has two
stages and can be blocked by a binary input.
3512 T-SIGNAL
FNo. 05067
O/S char. 1
3511 T-HOLDING
FNo. 05069
UL1 Release O/S det. char.1
UL2
UL3 U
Reset
n=0 n ≥1
FNo. 05071
U1 1 O/S TRIP char.1
-------- = Z
I 1 Increment
1 n=n+1 n ≥ n1
&
Characteristic 1
3509 REP. CHAR. 1
IL1
Tripping
IL2 matrix
IL3 I1 3512 T-SIGNAL

I2 FNo. 05068
O/S char. 2
3511 T-HOLDING TMin

FNo. 0507 TRIP CMD
Release O/S det. char.2
Reset FNo. 05072

n=0 n ≥1
O/S TRIP char.2
Increment
n=n+1 n ≥ n2
&
Characteristic 2
3510 REP. CHAR. 2
I1 >
&
I2 <
FNo. 05053 FNo. 05062

>BLOCK O/S O/S BLOCKED
O/S – Out-of-step signal for the duration of T-SIGNAL

Ch. 1 – Characteristic 1
Ch. 2 – Characteristic 2
U1 – Complex positive sequence component of the voltages
I1 – Complex positive sequence component of the currents
I2 – Complex negative sequence component of the currents ^
Figure 2-68 Logic Diagram of the Out-of-Step Protection
7UM62 Manual 141

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
General The out-of-step protection is only effective and accessible if this function has been set
during the configuration of the protective functions (Section 2.2, address 0135, OUT-
OF-STEP = Enabled. Set Disabled if the function is not required. Address 3501
OUT-OF-STEP is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only the trip
Pickup The out-of-step protection operates only when the positive sequence component of
the currents has exceeded a minimum threshold 3502 I1> RELEASE (overvoltage
pickup). As out-of-step conditions are symmetrical occurrences, a maximum value of
negative sequence current 3503 I2< RELEASE must not be exceeded.
The determining factor for overcurrent setting I1> RELEASE is the maximum possible
operating current. Pickup under conditions of permissible overload should be ex-
cluded. The setting should therefore be set above the maximum anticipated (over-)
load current (at least 120 % IN. Depending on network conditions, smaller pickup
thresholds can be chosen, so that the measurement (see Figure 2-68) may be
released all the time. As out-of-step conditions are symmetrical occurrences, the
pickup threshold of the negative sequence component of the current I2< RELEASE
should be set to approx. 20 % IN.
Impedance The measured impedances during power swing conditions are decisive for the
Settings settings. For the direction to the machine (as viewed from the location of the voltage
transformers), the power swing reactance of the machine must be considered, which
is approximately the transient reactance Xd' of the machine. Consequently, you will
calculate the secondary transient reactance and set it for Zb ≈ Xd' (see Figure 2-69).
Im(Z)
Zd
Zd–Zc Characteristic 2
Locus diagram
of power swing
impedance
Zc
ü
Characteristic 1 ý ≈ (0.7 to 0.9) ZK Transf
ϕP Za þ
ü
Re(Z)
ý ≈ Xd’
Zb þ
Figure 2-69 Power Swing Polygon
142 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Xd' can be calculated from the per unit reactance xd' as follows:
U N, Gen ü ct
X d' = ----------------------------- ⋅ x d' ⋅ -------
3 ⋅ I N, Gen ü vt
where Xd' – Transient reactance of the machine

xd' – Transient per unit reactance
UN, Gen – Primary rated machine voltage
IN, Gen – Primary rated machine current
üct – Current transformer ratio
üvt – Voltage transformer ratio
Dependent on the type of generator and on the secondary current, a secondary
voltage UN = 100 V or 120 V leads to approximately the reactance ranges listed in
Table 2-10.
Table 2-10 Transient Machine Reactances (Referred to Secondary Side)
Generator Type Xd Xd Xd Xd Xd
UN = 100 V/ IN = 1 A UN = 120 V/ IN = 1 A UN = 100 V/ IN = 5 A UN = 120 V/ IN = 5 A
Non-salient 0.13..0.35 7.5 Ω...20.2 Ω 9.4 Ω..24.3 Ω 1.5 Ω...4.0 Ω 1.9 Ω...4.9 Ω
pole rotor
Salient-pole rotor 0.20..0.45 11.5 Ω...26.0 Ω 13.9 Ω...31.2 Ω 2.3 Ω...5.2 Ω 2.8 Ω...6.2 Ω
As it is presupposed that the generator is connected with the network via a unit
transformer, the setting in the network direction is chosen such that the reactance
reach of characteristic 1 is approximately 70 % to 90 % of the transformer impedance,
and the reach of characteristic 2 is into the network. Thus, Zc at address 3506 is set
to 70 % to 90 % of the transformer impedance XSC. For characteristic 2, the remaining
portion of the transformer impedance is set at 3507 Zd - Zc, if necessary
complemented by the impedance of the additional line section to be monitored.
Table 2-11 shows typical values of the impedances of unit transformers XSC for
secondary rated currents IN = 1 A and IN = 5 A, the relationship of the values is
according to the following equation:
2
U SC u SC ⋅ U N u SC ⋅ U N
X SC prim = ----------------- = ------------------------------- = --------------------------
3 ⋅ IN 100 ⋅ 3 ⋅ I N 100 ⋅ S N
ü ct
X SC = X SC prim ⋅ -------
ü vt
Table 2-11 Per Unit Impedance Voltages and Impedances of Transformers
Transformer Type uSC XSC XSC XSC XSC

UN = 100 V/ IN = 1 A UN = 120 V/ IN = 1 A UN = 100 V/ IN = 5 A UN = 120 V/ IN = 5 A
Unit transformer 8 %...13 % 4.6 Ω...7.5 Ω 5.5 Ω...9.0 Ω 0.9 Ω...1.5 Ω 1.1 Ω...1.8 Ω
General 3 %...16 % 1.7 Ω...9.2 Ω 2.1 Ω...11.1 Ω 0.3 Ω...1.8 Ω 0.4 Ω...2.2 Ω
7UM62 Manual 143

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The setting Za is decisive for the width of the power swing polygon. This setting value
3504 Za is determined by the total impedance Ztot and can be derived from the
equation in Figure 2-70. Ztot can be calculated from the sum of Zb and Zd; then the
power swing angle is valid between the machine e.m.f. and the network. Optionally,
Ztot can be calculated from Zb + Zc; in this case the power swing angle is valid between
the machine e.m.f. and the unit transformer. The default setting of address 3504 Za
corresponds to the latter case. Usually, a power swing angle δ = 120° is chosen, since
the generator voltage UG and the system voltage UN equal the voltage difference:
Im(Z)
Z tot ⁄ 2
Z a = ------------------------
tan ( δ ⁄ 2 )
ì Zd
with δ = 120°
ì Zc Z = R + jX
Z tot ⁄ 2
Z a = ---------------------------------
Za Re(Z) tan ( 120° ⁄ 2 )
Zb+Zdí
UN Z a ≈ 0.289 ⋅ Z tot
Zb+Zc í δ --------- = 1
UG
î î Zb
with Ztot= Zb + Zc Power swing angle between

generator and unit transformer
(as illustrated) or
with Ztot= Zb + Zc Power swing angle between
generator and network
Figure 2-70 Power Swing Polygon and Impedance Vectors with Power Swing Angle δ
Maximum Power The polygon width Za determines also the maximum detectable power swing
Swing Frequency frequency. The consideration that, at maximum power swing frequency, at least two
impedance measurements must have been carried out within the power swing
polygon, leads to the following approximative formula for the maximum detectable
power swing frequency fP:
4 1 Za
f P = --- ⋅ --- ⋅ --------- with T = a.c. period
π T Z tot
For a rated frequency of 50 Hz (i.e. T = 20 ms), for example, the above formula
delivers:
Z a ≈ 0.289 ⋅ Z tot
f P ≈ 18 Hz
as the maximum detectable power swing frequency.
144 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
The inclination angle ϕ of the power swing polygon can be set at address 3508 PHI
POLYGON and thus matched to the conditions.
Calculation Example:
Generator data:
xd' = 0.20
UN = 6.3 kV
IN = 483 A
Transformer data:
uSC = 7 %
SN = 5.3 MVA
UN = 6.3 kV
Transformation ratios:
Current transformers üct = 500 A/1 A
6300 V ⁄ ( 3 )
Voltage transformers ü vt = -----------------------------------
100 V ⁄ ( 3 )
Thus, the secondary transient reactance of the generator:

U N, Gen ü ct
X d' = ----------------------------- ⋅ x d' ⋅ -------
3 ⋅ I N, Gen ü vt
3
6.3 ⋅ 10 500 ⁄ 1
X d' = ---------------------- ⋅ 0.20 ⋅ ----------------------------------------- = 12 Ω
3 ⋅ 483 ( 6.3 ⋅ 10 ) ⁄ 100
3
Zb ≈ Xd' thus determines the setting of address 3505 Zb.

The secondary reactance of the unit transformer is derived from the primary reactance
by considering the transformer ratios:
2 3 2
u SC ⋅ U N ü ct 7 ( 6.3 ⋅ 10 ) 500 ⁄ 1
X SC = -------------------------- ⋅ ------- = ---------- ⋅ ------------------------------ ⋅ ----------------------------------------- = 4.2 Ω
100 ⋅ S N ü vt 100 5.3 ⋅ 10 6 ( 6.3 ⋅ 10 3 ) ⁄ 100
Assuming that the characteristic should cover 85 % of the transformer reactance, the
setting of Zc results in ≈ 0.85 ⋅ 4.2 Ω ≈ 3.6 Ω.
Assuming that the remaining transformer reactance (0.15 ⋅ 4.2 Ω) and the covered
system reactance should be 10 Ω, the setting of 3507 results in:
Zd - Zc = 6.4 Ω.
The width Za of the polygon is determined by the total impedance Ztot. In this
calculation example, the total impedance Ztot is that of characteristic 1, i.e. the sum of
generator reactance and one portion of the unit transformer reactance; that is the sum
of the setting values for Zb and Zc = 12 Ω + 3.6 Ω = 15.6 Ω):
Za ≈ 0.289 ⋅ 15.6 Ω ≈ 4.5 Ω.
7UM62 Manual 145

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Number of Power Address 3509 REP. CHAR. 1 determines the number of out-of-step periods for
Swings characteristic 1 which will lead to trip, i.e.the number of times this characteristic must
have been passed through. For characteristic 1, 1 or 2 passes are normally adequate
as out-of-step conditions with the electrical centre within the power station unit should
not be tolerated too long, and the power swing frequency tends to accelerate during
an out-of-step condition, so that the electrical and dynamic stress of the machine
increases. On the other hand, for out-of-step conditions with the electrical centre being
in the network system a higher number of slip periods can be tolerated, so that
address 3510 REP. CHAR. 2 can usually be set to 4.
Each time characteristic 1 or 2 is passed through, a holding time set at address 3511
T-HOLDING) is started. A detected out-of-step condition is maintained for that time so
that the counter is incremented with the next passing through. When no renewed
pickup occurs within this time, the counters n1 or n2 respectively are reset, i.e. the out-
of-step condition is “forgotten”. This time should be set higher that the longest
expected slip period (i.e. lowest slip frequency). Settings between 20 s and 30 s are
good values.
Each time one of the counters n1 or n2 is incremented, the holding time is restarted,
and an annunciation “Out-of-step characteristic 1" or “Out-of-step characteristic 2" is
issued. These annunciations disappear after the time which is set at address 3512 T-
SIGNAL. If this time is set higher that the time between two power swings, the
annunciation “Out-of-step characteristic 1(2)” begins with the first out-of-step
detection and ends after the last detected out-of-step detection, prolonged wit the set
time T-SIGNAL.
2.18.2.1 Settings of the Out-of-Step Protection
With a rated secondary current of IN = 5 A, the parameters with the addresses 3504
to 3507 must be divided by 5.

3501 OUT-OF-STEP OFF OFF Out-of-Step Protection
ON
mands
3502 I1> RELEASE 20.0..400.0 % 120.0 % Pickup Current for Measuring

Release I1>
3503 I2< RELEASE 5.0..100.0 % 20.0 % Pickup Current for Measuring

Release I2<
3504 Za 0.20..130.00 Ohm 4.50 Ohm Resistance Za of the Polygon

(width)
3505 Zb 0.10..130.00 Ohm 12.00 Ohm Reactance Zb of the Polygon

(reverse)
3506 Zc 0.10..130.00 Ohm 3.60 Ohm Reactance Zc of Polygon (for-

ward char.1)
3507 Zd - Zc 0.00..130.00 Ohm 6.40 Ohm Reactance Dif. Char.1 - Char.2

(forward)
3508 PHI POLYGON 60.0..90.0 ° 90.0 ° Angle of Inclination of the Poly-

gon
3509 REP. CHAR. 1 1..4 1 Number of Power Swing: Cha-

racteristic 1
146 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

3510 REP. CHAR. 2 1..8 4 Number of Power Swing: Cha-
racteristic 2
3511 T-HOLDING 0.20..60.00 sec 20.00 sec Holding Time of Fault Detection
3512 T-SIGNAL 0.02..0.15 sec 0.05 sec Min. Signal Time for Annun.
Char. 1/2
2.18.2.2 Information for the Out-of-Step Protection

05053 >BLOCK O/S >BLOCK out-of-step protection
05061 O/S OFF Out-of-step protection is switched OFF
05062 O/S BLOCKED Out-of-step protection is BLOCKED
05063 O/S ACTIVE Out-of-step protection is ACTIVE
05067 O/S char. 1 Out-of-step pulse of characteristic 1
05068 O/S char. 2 Out-of-step pulse of characteristic 2
05069 O/S det. char.1 Out-of-step characteristic 1 picked up
05070 O/S det. char.2 Out-of-step characteristic 2 picked up
05071 O/S TRIP char.1 Out-of-step TRIP characteristic 1
05072 O/S TRIP char.2 Out-of-step TRIP characteristic 2
7UM62 Manual 147

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.19 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27)
General Undervoltage protection detects and reports abnormally low voltage conditions, some
of which could be related to system stability problems (voltage collapse, etc.).
Two-pole short circuits or earth faults cause an asymmetrical voltage collapse.
Compared with three monophase measuring systems, the detection of the positive
phase-sequence system is not influenced by these procedures and is advantageous
especially with regard to the judgement of stability problems.
For this, the fundamental wave of the positive sequence system is paramount. The
phase voltages are filtered by the protection (Fourier analysis) and only the
fundamental waves are evaluated. Of these, the protection only detects the positive
sequence system.
Undervoltage protection consists of two definite time elements. A pickup is signalled
as soon as the value falls below the selectable voltage thresholds. A trip signal is
transmitted if a voltage pickup exists for a selectable time.
In order to ensure that the protection does not accidentally pick up due to a secondary
voltage failure, each stage can be blocked individually or both stages can be blocked
in common via binary input(s), e.g. by a voltage transformer miniature circuit breaker
(m.c.b.). In addition to this, the integrated Fuse–Failure–Monitor blocks both stages
(see section 2.38.1.4).
When the undervoltage protection has picked up while the relay changes to the
operational condition 0 - i.e. no suitable measured quantities are present or the
permissible frequency range has been left - pick-up will be sealed in. Thus, trip is
ensured even after the voltages have completely collapsed. This seal-in can be
cancelled only after the voltage has reverted to a value above the undervoltage drop-
off value or by activating the blocking input for undervoltage protection.
There is no pickup and trip if no pickup exists before the device is in operating status
0 (thus e.g. upon switchon of the device without present measuring quantities). An
immediate tripping may be caused on transition into operating status 1 (i.e. by
applying measuring quantities). For this reason, it is recommended to activate the
blocking input of the undervoltage protection via the circuit breaker auxiliary contact
and to block the protective function in this way, e.g. after a protection tripping.
Figure 2-71 shows the logic diagram of the undervoltage protection.
148 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27)
FNo. 06533
U< picked up
4002 U<
4003 T U<
& Tripping
FNo. 06539 matrix
FNo. 06506 U< TRIP
>BLOCK U< FNo. 06537
U<< picked up
4004 U<<
4005 T U<<
& TMin
FNo. 06540 TRIP CMD
FNo. 06508
U<< TRIP
>BLOCK U<<
FNo. 000361
>FAIL:Feeder VT
refer Fig. 2-120 in

Subsection 2.38.1.4
FFM OR
FNo. 06503 FNo. 06531

>BLOCK U/V Undervolt. BLK
Figure 2-71 Logic Diagram of the Undervoltage Protection
General The undervoltage protection is only effective and accessible if it has been set during
the configuration of the protection functions (Section 2.2) at address 0140,
UNDERVOLTAGE = Enabled. Set Disabled if the function is not required. Address
4001 UNDERVOLTAGE is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only the
trip command (Block Relay).
Setting Values It must be considered that the positive phase-sequence system of the voltages and
thus also the pickup thresholds are evaluated as phase-to-phase quantities
(terminal voltage ⋅ √3). The first undervoltage protection stage is typically set to about
75% of % the nominal machine voltage, i.e. address 4002 U< = 75 V. The user must
select a value for the 4003 T U< time setting that ensures that voltage dips affecting
the operating stability are disconnected. On the other hand, the time delay must be
long enough to avoid disconnection in case of permissible short-time voltage dips.
For the second stage, a lower pickup threshold 4004 U<< e.g. = 65 V should be
combined with a shorter trip time 4005 T U<< e.g. = 0.5 s to perform an approximate
adaptation to the stability behaviour of the consumers.
The drop-out ratio can be adapted in small steps to the operating conditions at address
4006A U< DOUT RATIO.
7UM62 Manual 149

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.19.2.1 Settings of the Undervoltage Protection

4001 UNDERVOLTAGE OFF OFF Undervoltage Protection
ON
mands
4002 U< 10.0..125.0 V 75.0 V U< Pickup
4003 T U< 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec T U< Time Delay
4004 U<< 10.0..125.0 V 65.0 V U<< Pickup
4005 T U<< 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T U<< Time Delay
4006A U< DOUT RATIO 1.01..1.20 1.05 U< Drop Out Ratio
2.19.2.2 Information for the Undervoltage Protection

06503 >BLOCK U/V >BLOCK undervoltage protection
06506 >BLOCK U< >BLOCK undervoltage protection U<
06508 >BLOCK U<< >BLOCK undervoltage protection U<<
06530 Undervolt. OFF Undervoltage protection switched OFF
06531 Undervolt. BLK Undervoltage protection is BLOCKED
06532 Undervolt. ACT Undervoltage protection is ACTIVE
06533 U< picked up Undervoltage U< picked up
06537 U<< picked up Undervoltage U<< picked up
06539 U< TRIP Undervoltage U< TRIP
06540 U<< TRIP Undervoltage U<< TRIP
150 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59)
2.20 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59)
General Overvoltage protection serves to protect the electrical machine, and the associated
electrical plant connected to it, from the effects of impermissible voltage increases.
Overvoltages can be caused by incorrect manual operation of the excitation system,
faulty operation of the automatic voltage regulator, (full) load shedding of a generator,
separation of the generator from the system or during island operation.
By means of the overvoltage protection feature, the user can select if he wants to
monitor the phase-to-phase voltages or the phase-earth-voltages. In case of a high
overvoltage, the switchoff is performed with a short-time delay, whereas in case of
lower overvoltages, the switchoff is performed with a longer time delay. In this way,
the voltage regulator can take the voltage back into the nominal range. The user can
specify the voltage limit values and the time delays individually for both stages.
Each stage can be blocked individually and/or both stages can be blocked in common
via binary input(s).
Figure 2-72 shows the logic diagram of the overvoltage protection.
FNo. 06571
U>> picked up FNo. 06573
U>> TRIP
4105 T U>>
Pickup U>>
&
FNo. 06517
Tripping
>BLOCK U>> FNo. 06568 matrix
U> picked up FNo. 06570
U> TRIP
4103 T U>
Pickup U>
&
FNo. 06516 TMin
TRIP CMD
>BLOCK U>
FNo. 06513 FNo. 06566

>BLOCK O/V Overvolt. BLK
Figure 2-72 Logic Diagram of the Overvoltage Protection
General The overvoltage protection is only effective and accessible if it has been set during the
configuration of the protective functions (Section 2.2) at address 0141,
OVERVOLTAGE = Enabled. Set Disabled if the function is not required. Address
4101 OVERVOLTAGE is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only the trip
7UM62 Manual 151

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Setting Values Address 4107A VALUES U> serves to specify the measured quantities used by the
protection feature. The default setting (normal case) is specified for phase-to-phase
voltages (= U-ph-ph). The phase-earth-voltages should be selected for low-voltage
machines with grounded neutral conductor (= U-ph-e). It should be noted that even
if phase-earth voltages are selected as measured quantities, the setting values of the
protection functions are referred to phase-to-phase voltages.
The setting of limit values and time delays of the overvoltage protection depends on
the speed with which the voltage regulator can regulate voltage variations. The
protection must not intervene into the regulation process of the fault-free functioning
voltage regulator. For this reason, the two-stage characteristic must always be above
the voltage time characteristic of the regulation procedure.
The long-time stage 4102 U> and 4103 T U> must intervene in case of steady-state
overvoltages. It is set to approximately 110 % to 115 % UN and, depending on the
regulator speed, to a range between 1.5 s and 5 s.
In case of a full-load rejection of the generator, the voltage increases first in relation to
the transient voltage. Only by this time, the voltage regulator reduces it again to its
nominal value. The U>>-stage is set as short-time stage in a way that the transient
procedure in case of a full-load rejection does not lead to a tripping. For example, for
4104 U>> about 130 % UN with a 4105 T U>> delay of zero to 0.5 s are typical
values.
The drop-out ratio at the address 4106A U> DOUT RATIO can be adapted in small
steps to the operating conditions and used for highly precise signalizations (e.g.
network infeed of wind power stations).
2.20.2.1 Settings of the Overvoltage Protection

4101 OVERVOLTAGE OFF OFF Overvoltage Protection
ON
mands
4102 U> 30.0..170.0 V 115.0 V U> Pickup
4103 T U> 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec T U> Time Delay
4104 U>> 30.0..170.0 V 130.0 V U>> Pickup
4105 T U>> 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T U>> Time Delay
4106A U> DOUT RATIO 0.90..0.99 0.95 U> Drop Out Ratio
4107A VALUES U> Voltage protection with U- Voltage protection Measurement Values for U>
Phase-Phase with U-Phase-
Voltage protection with U- Phase
Phase-earth
2.20.2.2 Information for the Overvoltage Protection

06513 >BLOCK O/V >BLOCK overvoltage protection
152 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59)

06516 >BLOCK U> >BLOCK overvoltage protection U>
06517 >BLOCK U>> >BLOCK overvoltage protection U>>
06565 Overvolt. OFF Overvoltage protection switched OFF
06566 Overvolt. BLK Overvoltage protection is BLOCKED
06567 Overvolt. ACT Overvoltage protection is ACTIVE
06568 U> picked up Overvoltage U> picked up
06571 U>> picked up Overvoltage U>> picked up
06570 U> TRIP Overvoltage U> TRIP
06573 U>> TRIP Overvoltage U>> TRIP
7UM62 Manual 153

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.21 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81)
General The frequency protection function detects abnormally high and low frequencies in the
system. If the frequency lies outside the allowable range, appropriate actions are
initiated, such as separating a generator from the system.
A decrease in system frequency occurs when the system experiences an increase in
the real power demand, or when a malfunction occurs with a generator governor or
automatic generation control (AGC) system. The frequency decrease protection is
also used for generators which (for a certain time) function on an island network. This
is due to the fact that the reverse power protection cannot operate in case of a drive
power failure. The generator can be disconnected from the power system by means
of the frequency decrease protection.
An increase in system frequency occurs when large blocks of load are removed from
the system, or again when a malfunction occurs with a generator governor or AGC
system. This means a risk of self-excitation for generators feeding long lines under no-
load conditions.
Through the use of filters and repeated measurements, the frequency evaluation is
free from harmonic influences and very accurate.
Underfrequency Frequency protection consists of four frequency elements (f1 to f4). Any given
and Overfrequency frequency element can be set to pickup for either overfrequency or underfrequency
Protection conditions. Each element can be independently set, and utilized to perform different
functions within the system. The parameterization determines the individual
application purpose of the corresponding stage. For the f4 frequency stage, the user
can specify independently of the parameterized limit value if this stage shall function
as decrease or increase stage. For this reason, it can also be used for special
applications, if, for example, the user desires a signalization in case of a frequency
overrange below the nominal frequency.
Operating Ranges The frequency can be determined as long as the positive sequence voltages are
present and of sufficient magnitude. If the measurement voltage drops below a
settable value Umin, then frequency protection is blocked, as precise frequency
values can no longer be calculated from the signal under these conditions.
With the overfrequency protection, there is a seal-in of the overfrequency pickup
during the transition to the 0 mode, if the last measured frequency amounted to >66
Hz. The switch-off command drops out by a function blocking or by the transition into
operational condition 1. The pickup drops out if the frequency measured last before
the transition into operational condition 0 is <66 Hz.
With the underfrequency protection, there is no precise frequency calculation during
the transition into the 0 mode due to a too low frequency. Consequently, the pickup or
tripping drop out.
Timers/Logic Each frequency element has an associated settable time delay. When a frequency
element picks up and the time delay elapses, a trip signal is generated. When a
frequency elements drops out, the control signal (tripping or alarm signal) is
immediately terminated, but not before the minimum command duration has elapsed.
Each of the four frequency elements can be blocked individually by binary inputs.
154 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Frequency Protection (ANSI 81)
Figure 2-73 shows the logic diagram for the frequency protection function.
f1 picked up
FNo. 05232...
>BLOCK f1
FNo. 05206...
4202 f1 PICKUP & 4204 T f1
f f1 TRIP
FNo. 05236...
4215 Umin
U123 U>Umin
Measurement/
Logic
FNo. 05214
4201 O/U FREQUENCY
OR Freq UnderV Blk
ON
”1” FNo. 05211
OFF
Freq. OFF
FNo. 05213
OR OR Freq. ACTIVE
FNo. 05203 FNo. 05212
>BLOCK Freq. Freq. BLOCKED
Figure 2-73 Logic Diagram of the Frequency Protection
General The frequency protection will only be effective and accessible if address 0142
FREQUENCY Prot. has been set to Enabled during the configuration of the
protective functions. Set Disabled if the function is not required. Address 4201
O/U FREQUENCY is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only the trip
Pick-Up Values The nominal system frequency is programmed in Power System Data 1, and the
pickup settings for each of the frequency elements f1 PICKUP to f4 PICKUP
determines whether the function will be used for overfrequency or underfrequency
protection. Set the pickup threshold lower than nominal frequency if the element is to
be used for underfrequency protection, and higher than nominal frequency if it is to be
used for overfrequency protection.
Note:
If the element is not required, the frequency setting should be set equal to the nominal
frequency, in which case the element becomes inactive.
For the f4 frequency stage, the previously explained circumstances are only relevant
if the 4214 THRESHOLD f4 parameter is set to Automatic (default setting). If
desired, this parameter can also be set to f> or f<, in which case the evaluation
direction (increase or decrease detection) can be specified independent of the
parameterized f4 PICKUP threshold.
7UM62 Manual 155

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
If underfrequency protection is used for load shedding purposes, then the frequency
settings relative to other feeder relays are generally based on the priority of the
customers served by the protective relay. Normally a graded load shedding is required
that takes into account the importance of the consumers or consumer groups.
Further application examples exist in the field of power stations. The frequency values
to be set mainly depend, also in these cases, on the specifications of the power
system/power station operator. In this context, the frequency decrease protection
ensures the power station’s own demand by disconnecting it from the power system
on time. The turbo regulator regulates the machine set to the nominal speed.
Consequently, the station’s own demands can be continuously supplied at nominal
frequency.
Under the assumption that the apparent power is reduced to the same degree,
turbine-driven generators can, as a rule, be continuously operated down to 95 % of
the nominal frequency. However, for inductive consumers, the frequency reduction
does not only mean an enhanced current input but also endangers stable operation.
For this reason, only a short-time frequency reduction down to about 48 Hz (for fN =
50 Hz) or 58 Hz (for fN = 60 Hz) is permissible.
A frequency increase can, for example, occur due to a load shedding or malfunction
of the speed regulation (e.g. in an island network). In this way, the frequency increase
protection can, for example, be used as overspeed protection.
Setting example:
Stage Cause Setting Values

for fN = 50 Hz for fN = 60 Hz Delays
f1 Disconnection from the 48.00 Hz 58.00 Hz 1.00 s
network
f2 Shutdown 47.00 Hz 57.00 Hz 6.00 s
f3 Alarm 49.50 Hz 59.50 Hz 20.00 s
f4 Alarm or tripping 52.00 Hz 62.00 Hz 10.00 s
Delays The time delays (definite time) T f1 to T f4 entered at addresses 4204, 4207, 4210
and 4213) allow the device to prioritize or sort corrective actions based on the degree
to which the actual system frequency departs (upward or downward) from the nominal
system frequency. The set times are additional time delays not including the operating
times (measuring time, drop-out time) of the protective function.
Minimum Voltage Address 4215 Umin is used to set the minimum voltage. If the positive sequence
voltage is less than this value, the frequency protection is blocked. The recommended
value is approx. 65 % UN. The minimum voltage limiting can be deactivated by means
of the”0” setting.
156 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Frequency Protection (ANSI 81)
2.21.2.1 Settings for the Frequency Protection

4201 O/U FREQUENCY OFF OFF Over / Under Frequency Protec-
ON tion
mands
4202 f1 PICKUP 40.00..65.00 Hz 48.00 Hz f1 Pickup
4204 T f1 0.00..600.00 sec 1.00 sec T f1 Time Delay
4214 THRESHOLD f4 Freq. prot. stage automatic Freq. prot. stage Handling of Threshold Stage f4
Freq. prot. stage overfre- automatic
qency
Freq. prot. stage underfre-
qency
4215 Umin 10.0..125.0 V; 0 65.0 V Minimum Required Voltage for

Operation
2.21.2.2 Information for Frequency Protection

05203 >BLOCK Freq. >BLOCK frequency protection
05206 >BLOCK f1 >BLOCK stage f1
05211 Freq. OFF Frequency protection is OFF
05212 Freq. BLOCKED Frequency protection is BLOCKED
05213 Freq. ACTIVE Frequency protection is ACTIVE
05214 Freq UnderV Blk Frequency protection undervoltage Blk
05232 f1 picked up f1 picked up
7UM62 Manual 157

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

05236 f1 TRIP f1 TRIP
158 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24)
2.22 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24)
General The overexcitation protection is used to detect impermissible overexcitation conditions

which can endanger generators and transformers. The overexcitation protection must
pick up when the induction admissible for the protected object (e.g. power station unit
transformer) is exceeded. The transformer is endangered, for example, if the power
station block is disconnected from the system from full-load, and if the voltage
regulator either does not operate or does not operate sufficiently fast to control the
associated voltage rise. Similarly, decrease in frequency (speed), e.g. in island
systems, can endanger the transformer because of increased induction.
An increase in induction above the rated values leads very quickly to saturation of the
iron core and to large eddy current losses.
Measuring The overexcitation protection feature servers to measure the voltage/frequency ratio
Procedure which is proportional to the B induction and puts it in relation to the BN nominal
induction. In this context, both voltage and frequency are related to nominal values of
the object to be protected (generator, transformer).
U
B ∼ ----
f
U
---------------------
B U N Mach U (simplified
-------------------- = --------------------- = ----
B N Mach f f notation)
-----
fN
The calculation is based on the maximum voltage of the three phase-to-phase

voltages. The frequency range from 10 Hz to 70 Hz can be monitored in this way.
Transformer A perhaps existing deviation between the primary nominal voltage of the voltage
Adaptation transformers and the object to be protected is compensated by means of the internal
correction factor (UN prim/UN mach). For this reason, pick-up values and characteristics
do not need to be converted to secondary values. As a prerequisite, however, the
system quantities ’primary nominal transformer voltage’ and ’nominal voltage of the
object to be protected’ must be entered correctly (see Sections 2.3 and 2.5).
Characteristics The overexcitation protection feature includes two staged characteristics and one
thermal characteristic for an approximate modeling of the heating which the
overexcitation may cause to the object to be protected. As soon as a first pickup
threshold (warning stage 4302 U/f >) has been exceeded, a 4303 T U/f > time
stage starts. A warning message is transmitted subsequent to the expiration of this
time stage. A counter switching is activated when the pickup threshold is exceeded.
This weighted counter is incremented according to the present U/f value.
Consequently, the trip time results from the parameterized characteristic. A trip signal
is transmitted as soon as the trip counter state has been reached.
The trip signal is canceled as soon as the value falls below the pickup threshold and
the counter is decremented according to a parameterizeable cool-down time
selection.
7UM62 Manual 159

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The thermal characteristic is prespecified by 8 value pairs concerning the U/f

overexcitation (related to nominal values) and the t trip time. In most cases, the
specified characteristic related to standard transformers provides for sufficient
protection. If this characteristic does not correspond to the actual thermal behavior of
the object to be protected, each desired characteristic can be implemented by entering
customer-specific trip times for the specified U/f overexcitation values. Intermediate
values are determined by a linear interpolation within the device.
The characteristic resulting from the device default settings is shown in Figure 4-13 in
the Technical Data, Section 4.18. Figure 2-74 illustrates the behaviour of the
protection on the assumption that within the framework of configuration the setting for
the pickup threshold (parameter 4302 U/f >) was chosen higher or lower than the
first setting value of the thermal characteristic.
Pickup threshold U/f > (parameter 4302) a) Pickup threshold U/f >
T
1. Setting value of is less than the
t 1.05 thermal characteristic 1st setting value of the
thermal characteristic
Tripping area
Thermal
trip stage
Overexcitation
trip stage U/f >>
T U/f >>
1.0 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 F#

U/f >>
(Setting of
stepped characteristic)
Pickup threshold U/f > (parameter 4302) b) Pickup threshold U/f >
t
1. Setting value of is greater than the
t 1.05 thermal characteristic 1st setting value of the
thermal characteristic
Tripping area
Thermal
trip stage
Overexcitation
trip stage U/f >>
T U/f >>
1.0 1.05 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 U/f

U/f >>
(Setting of
stepped characteristic)
Figure 2-74 Tripping Time Characteristic of the Overexcitation Protection
160 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Figure 2-75 illustrates the logic diagram of the overexcitation protection. The counter
can be reset to zero by means of a blocking input or a reset input.
FNo. 05370
U/f> picked up
4302 U/f >
4303 T U/f >
FNo. 05367
& U/f> warn
Tripping
matrix
U
U/f heating 1
U/f cool down t(U/f) &

f U/f 2
FNo. 05372
Reset U/f> th.TRIP
counter=0
OR
4304 U/f >> FNo. 05371
4305 T U/f >> TMin
U/f>> TRIP TRIP CMD
&
FNo. 05357 FNo. 05373

>RM th.rep. U/f U/f>> pick.up FNo. 05369
RM th.rep. U/f
FNo. 05353 FNo. 05362
>U/f BLOCK U/f> BLOCKED
Figure 2-75 Logic Diagram of the Overexcitation Protection
General The overexcitation protection is only effective and accessible if it has been set during
the configuration of the protective functions at 0143 OVEREXC. PROT. = Enabled.
Set Disabled if the function is not required. Address 4301 OVEREXC. PROT. is
used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only the trip command (Block
Relay).
The overexcitation feature serves to measure the voltage/frequency quotient
proportional to the B induction. The overexcitation protection must pick up when the
induction admissible for the protected object (e.g. power station unit transformer) is
exceeded. The transformer is endangered, if, for example, the power station block is
switched off at full-load operation and the voltage regulator does not respond at all or
does not respond fast enough to avoid the related voltage increase.
Similarly, a decrease in frequency (speed), e.g. in island systems, can endanger the
transformer because of increased induction.
In this way, the U/f protection monitors the correct function both of the voltage
regulators and of the speed regulation in all operating states.
Independent The limit-value setting at address 4302 U/f > is based on the induction limit value
Stages relation to the nominal induction (B/BN) specified by the manufacturer of the object to
be protected.
A pickup message is transmitted as soon as the induction limit value U/f set at address
4302 is exceeded. A warning message is transmitted subsequent to the
corresponding 4303 T U/f > time delay.
7UM62 Manual 161

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The 4304 U/f >>, 4305 T U/f >> trip stage characteristic serves to switch off
particularly strong overexcitations within a short time.
The time set for this purpose is an additional time delay which does not include the
operating time (measuring time, drop-out time).
Thermal A thermal characteristic is superimposed to the trip stage characteristic. For this
Characteristic purpose, the overtemperature created by the overexcitation is approximately
modeled. Not only the already mentioned pickup signalization is generated on
exceeding the protection U/f induction limit value set at address 4302 but a counter is
tripped additionally. Depending on the set characteristic, this counter provokes the
tripping after the specified time.
t [s]
U⁄f
-----------------
UN ⁄ fN
Figure 2-76 Tripping Time Characteristic of the Overexcitation Protection – Presettings
The characteristic of a Siemens standard transformer was selected as a presetting for

the parameters 4306 to 4313. If the manufacturer of the object to be protected did not
include any instructions on this subject, the preset standard characteristic should be
used. Otherwise, any trip characteristic can be specified by point-wise entering of
parameters by maximally 7 straight lengths. To do this, the trip times of the
overexcitation values U/f = 1.05; 1.10; 1.15; 1.20; 1.25; 1.30; 1.35 and 1.40 are read
out from the predefined characteristic and entered at the addresses 4306 t(U/
f=1.05) to 4313 t(U/f=1.40). The protective relay executes a linear interpolation
between the points.
Limitation The model of the heating of the object to be protected is limited to a 150 % trip
temperature overrange.
Time for Cool Down The tripping by the thermal image drops out by the time of the pickup threshold
dropout. However, the counter content is reset to zero with the cool-down time
parameterized at address 4314 T COOL DOWN. In this context, this parameter is
defined as the time required by the thermal image to cool down from 100 % to 0 %.
162 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Voltage A perhaps existing deviation between the primary nominal voltage of the voltage
Transformer transformers and the object to be protected is compensated by means of the internal
Adaptation correction factor (UN prim/UN mach). As a prerequisite, however, the incoming power
system parameters 0221 Unom PRIMARY and 0251 UN GEN/MOTOR must have
been entered correctly according to the Section 2.3.
2.22.2.1 Settings of the Overexcitation Protection

4301 OVEREXC. PROT. OFF OFF Overexcitation Protection (U/f)
ON
mands
4302 U/f > 1.00..1.20 1.10 U/f > Pickup
4303 T U/f > 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec T U/f > Time Delay
4304 U/f >> 1.00..1.40 1.40 U/f >> Pickup
4305 T U/f >> 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec T U/f >> Time Delay
4306 t(U/f=1.05) 0..20000 sec 20000 sec U/f = 1.05 Time Delay
4314 T COOL DOWN 0..20000 sec 3600 sec Time for Cooling Down
2.22.2.2 Information from the Overexcitation Protection

05353 >U/f BLOCK >BLOCK overexcitation protection
05357 >RM th.rep. U/f >Reset memory of thermal replica U/f
05361 U/f> OFF Overexcitation prot. is swiched OFF
05362 U/f> BLOCKED Overexcitation prot. is BLOCKED
05363 U/f> ACTIVE Overexcitation prot. is ACTIVE
05369 RM th.rep. U/f Reset memory of thermal replica U/f
05367 U/f> warn Overexc. prot.: U/f warning stage
05370 U/f> picked up Overexc. prot.: U/f> picked up
05373 U/f>> pick.up Overexc. prot.: U/f>> picked up
05371 U/f>> TRIP Overexc. prot.: TRIP of U/f>> stage
05372 U/f> th.TRIP Overexc. prot.: TRIP of th. stage
7UM62 Manual 163

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.23 Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27)
General The inverse-time undervoltage protection mainly protects consumers (induction

machines) from the consequences of dangerous voltage drops in island networks and
prevents impermissible operating conditions and possible loss of stability. It can also
be used as a criterion for load shedding in interconnected networks.
Two-pole short circuits or earth faults cause an asymmetrical voltage collapse.
Compared with three monophase measuring systems, the detection of the positive
phase-sequence system is not influenced by these procedures and is advantageous
especially with regard to the judgement of stability problems.
Measured Quantity For the above reasons, the positive sequence system is calculated from the
fundamental waves of the three phase-earth voltages, and fed to the protection. The
measured voltages are filtered by numerical filter algorithms; the fundamental wave is
paramount.
Where voltage transformers in broken delta (V) connection are available on the plant
side, the protection is applied to the phase-to-phase voltages; the internal starpoint is
left empty. By this a virtual starpoint is formed, so that the (virtual) phase-to-earth
voltages can still be detected (see connection example in Figure A-34 in the Appendix
A.4).
Tripping The protection can be matched exactly to the stability characteristic by means of a
Characteristic voltage-time integral-action characteristic. If a motor falls into the unstable area below
the curve, it will stall or run at substantially reduced speed, even if full voltage is
restored after a short time. Only squirrel-cage machines for which the torque
characteristic of the driven machine lies below the motor characteristic at all speeds
will regain their rated speed. All other machines will be thermally and perhaps
mechanically overstressed during an attempt to return to full speed after return of
voltage.
Undervoltage protection consists of an inverse time element. In order to avoid
malfunction of the protection in the event of secondary voltage failure, it can be
blocked via a binary input, e.g. by the auxiliary contact of a voltage transformer
miniature circuit breaker or from the position of the main circuit breaker when the
machine is at stand-still. In addition to this, the integrated fuse failure monitor (FFM)
blocks both stages (see Section 2.38.1.4).
If no measured values are available at the device (operation condition 0), no trip signal
is given if there was no pickup. This ensures that the undervoltage protection does not
pick up at once when it is switched on with no measured value available. Once the
protection has been activated, it can only be deactivated by triggering the blocking
input.
If a pickup signal is present when the device enters operating condition 0 (i.e. no
measured values, or frequency outside the permissible range), it is sealed in. The
delay time until tripping is calculated in the same way as for a drop to 0 V. The sealed-
in pickup or tripping signal is only reset if the voltage is restored, or if the blocking input
is triggered.
164 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27)
The pickup/dropout ratio is 101 % or 0.5 V absolute of the threshold set at address
4402 Up< PICKUP. The integral action of the tripping time determination is “frozen“
between the pickup and the dropout value.
Figure 2-77 shows the logic diagram of the inverse undervoltage protection.
FNo. 06525
Up< picked up
FNo. 06526
4403 T MUL Up< ch. pick.up Tripping
U 4404 T Up<
matrix
4402 Up< PICKUP
FNo. 06527
U1 T
& Up< TRIP
FNo. 06520 FNo. 06523

>BLOCK Up< TMin
Up< BLOCK
TRIP CMD
Fuse Failure Monitor
Figure 2-77 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection
General The inverse overvoltage protection is only effective and accessible if it has been set
during the configuration of the protective functions (Section 2.2, address 0144,
INV.UNDERVOLT. = Enabled). Set Disabled if the function is not required.
Address 4401 INV. UNDERVOLT. is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to
Setting Values It must be considered that the positive phase-sequence system of the voltages and
thus also the pickup thresholds are evaluated as phase-to-phase quantities
(terminal voltage ⋅ √3).
For the pickup values no hard and fast rules can be laid down. But since the protection
is used mainly to protect consumers (induction machines) from the consequences of
voltage drops, and to prevent loss of stability, the pickup value is normally set to
approx. 75 % of the nominal machine voltage, i.e. address 4402 Up< PICKUP is set
to 75 V. In exceptional cases, where the voltage drop during startup is too big, it may
be necessary to set lower values. The time multiplier 4403 T MUL must be selected
such that voltage drops that would lead to unstable operation are reliably
disconnected. On the other hand, the time delay must be big enough to avoid
disconnections in case of permissible short-time voltage dips.
If required, the tripping time can also be extended by an additional time stage 4404
T Up<.
7UM62 Manual 165

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.23.2.1 Settings of the Inverse Undervoltage Protection

4401 INV. UNDERVOLT. OFF OFF Inverse Undervoltage Protec-
ON tion Up<
mands
4402 Up< PICKUP 10.0..125.0 V 75.0 V Up< Pickup
4403 T MUL 0.10..5.00 sec; 0 1.00 sec Time Multiplier for Characteristic
4404 T Up< 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T Up< Time Delay
2.23.2.2 Information for the Inverse Undervoltage Protection

06520 >BLOCK Up< >BLOCK inverse undervoltage protection
06522 Up< OFF Inv. Undervoltage prot. is switched OFF
06523 Up< BLOCK Inv. Undervoltage protection is BLOCKED
06524 Up< ACTIVE Inv. Undervoltage protection is ACTIVE
06525 Up< picked up Inverse Undervoltage Up< picked up
06526 Up< ch. pick.up Inv. Undervoltage Up<-char. picked up
06527 Up< AUS Inverse Undervoltage Up< TRIP
166 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R)
2.24 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R)
General With the rate-of-frequency-change protection, frequency changes can be quickly de-
tected. This allows a prompt response to frequency dips or frequency rises. A trip com-
mand can be issued even before the pickup threshold of the frequency protection (see
Section 2.21) is reached.
Frequency changes occur, for instance, when there is an unbalance between the pro-
duced and the necessary active power. They call for control measures on one hand
and for switching actions on the other hand. These can be relief measures, such as
network decoupling, or disconnection of loads (load shedding). The sooner these
measures are taken after a malfunction appears, the more effective they are.
The two main applications for this protection function is thus network decoupling and
load shedding.
Measuring From the positive-sequence voltage, the frequency is determined once per cycle over
Principle a measuring window of 3 cycles, and a mean value of two successive frequency mea-
surements is formed. The frequency difference is then determined over a settable time
interval (default setting 5 cycles). The ratio between frequency difference and time dif-
ference is equivalent to the frequency change; it can be positive or negative. The mea-
surement is performed continuously (per cycle). Monitoring functions such as under-
voltage monitoring, checks for phase angle jumps etc. help to avoid overfunctioning.
Frequency The rate-of-frequency-change protection has four stages, from df1/dt to df4/dt. This al-
Increase/ Decrease lows to adapt the function variably to all power system conditions. The stages can be
set to detect either frequency decreases (-df/dt<) or frequency increases (+df/dt>).
The -df/dt stage is only active for frequencies below the rated frequency, or less if the
underfrequency release is activated. Likewise, the df/dt> stage is active for frequen-
cies above the rated frequency, or higher, if the overfrequency release is activated.
The parameter setting decides where a stage will be used.
To avoid a proliferation of setting parameters, the settable measuring window for the
frequency difference formation and the dropout difference are each valid for two stag-
es.
Operating Ranges The frequency can be determined as long as there is a sufficiently strong positive se-
quence system of voltages. If the measuring voltage drops below a settable value
Umin, the frequency protection is blocked because the signal allows under such con-
ditions no precise calculation of the frequency values.
Time Delays/Logic Tripping can be delayed by a set time delay associated with each frequency element.
This is recommended for monitoring of small gradients. A trip command is generated
as soon as a time delay has expired. After the pickup has reset, the trip command is
immediately reset as well, but the trip signal is maintained for at least the minimum
command duration.
Each of the four frequency change stages can be blocked individually by binary input.
The undervoltage blocking acts on all stages simultaneously.
Figure 2-78 shows the logic diagram.
7UM62 Manual 167

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
f4
f3
f2
f1 5516
df1/dt pickup
5517
df2/dt pickup
OFF
5518
ON df3/dt pickup
& OR 5519
"1"
df4/dt pickup
4505 df1/dt & f1
5232 5520
f1 picked up df1/dt TRIP
5521
df2/dt TRIP
-df/dt<
5522
+df/dt> df3/dt TRIP
"1" 5523
df4/dt TRIP
4502 df1/dt >/< 4504 T df1/dt
&
OR Tripping
4503 STAGE df1/dt & matrix
df/dt
df/dt≤
Tmin TRIP
f≤fn CMD
df/dt
df/dt≥
&
f≥fn
5504
>df1/dt block
5503 5512
>df/dt block df/dt BLOCKED
OR
4518 U MIN
U1 5514
U1≤ df/dt U< block
Figure 2-78 Logic Diagram of the Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection
General The rate-of-frequency-change protection is only effective and accessible if during the
configuration address 145 df/dt Protect. has been set accordingly. 2 or 4 stages
can be selected. The default setting is 2 df/dt stages.
Address 4501 df/dt Protect. allows to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block
Pickup Values The setting procedure is the same for all stages. In a first step, it must be determined
whether the stage is to monitor a frequency rise at f>fN or a frequency drop at f< fN.
For stage 1, for instance, this setting is made at address 4502 df1/dt >/<. The pick-
up value is set as an absolute value at address 4503 STAGE df1/dt. The setting of
address 4502 informs the protection function of the applicable sign.
The pickup value depends on the application and is determined by power system con-
ditions. In most cases, a network analysis will be necessary. A sudden disconnection
of loads leads to a surplus of active power. The frequency rises and causes a positive
frequency change. A failure of generators, on the other hand, leads to a deficit of ac-
tive power. The frequency drops and leads to a negative frequency change.
168 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
The following relations can be used as an example for estimation of the pickup value.
They apply for the change rate at the beginning of a frequency change (approx. 1 sec-
ond).
df f N ∆P
- ⋅ --------
----- = – ---------
dt 2 H SN
Meaning:
fN Rated frequency
∆P Active power change
∆P = PConsumption – PGeneration
SN Rated apparent machine power
H Inertia constant
Typical values for H are:
– for hydro-electric generators (salient-pole machines) H = 1.5 s to 6 s
– for turbine-driven generators (cylindrical-rotor machines) H = 2 s to 10 s
– for industrial turbine-generators H = 3 s to 4 s
Example:
fN = 50 Hz
H=3s
Case 1: ∆P/SN = 0.12
Case 2: ∆P/SN = 0.48
Case 1: df/dt = –1 Hz/s
Case 2: df/dt = –4 Hz/s
The default settings are based on the above example. The four stages have been set
symmetrically.
Delay Times The delay time should be set to zero wherever the protection function is supposed to
respond very quickly. This will be the case with high setting values. For the monitoring
of small changes (< 1Hz/s), on the other hand, a small delay time can be useful to
avoid overfunctioning. The delay time is set at address 4504 T df1/dt, and the time
set there is added to the protection operating time.
Release by the The parameter df1/dt & f1 (address 4505) is used to set the release of the stage
Frequency from a certain frequency threshold on. For this the pertinent frequency stage of the fre-
Protection quency protection (Section 2.21) is queried. In the setting example this is stage f1. To
exclude coupling of the two functions, the parameter can be set to OFF (default set-
ting).
Advanced The advanced parameters allow to set for two stages each (e.g. df1/dt and df2/dt) the
Parameters dropout difference and the measuring window. These parameters can only be set with
the DIGSI communication software.
Setting changes are necessary e.g. to obtain a great dropout difference. For the de-
tection of very small frequency changes (<0.5 Hz/s), the default setting of the measur-
ing window should be extended to improve the measuring accuracy.
7UM62 Manual 169

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Table 2-12
Setting Value df/dt HYSTERESIS dfx/dt M WINDOW

stage dfn/dt (Addr. 4519A, 4521A) (Addr. 4520A, 4522A)
0.1...0.5 Hz/s ≈ 0,05 25...10
0.5...1 Hz/s ≈ 0,1 10...5
1...5 Hz/s ≈ 0,2 10...5
5...20 Hz/s ≈ 0,5 5...1
Minimum Voltage Address 4518 U MIN is used to set the minimum voltage below which the frequency
change protection will be blocked. A value of approx. 65 % UN is recommended. The
minimum voltage threshold can be deactivated by setting this address to „0“.
2.24.2.1 Settings of the Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection

4501 df/dt Protect. OFF OFF Rate-of-frequency-change pro-
ON tection
mands
4518 U MIN 10.0..125.0 V; 0 65.0 V Minimum Operating Voltage

Umin
4519A df1/2 HYSTERES. 0.02..0.99 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s Reset Hysteresis for df1/dt &
df2/dt
4520A df1/2 M-WINDOW 1..25 Cycle 5 Cycle Measuring Window for df1/dt &
df2/dt
4521A df3/4 HYSTERES. 0.02..0.99 Hz/s 0.40 Hz/s Reset Hysteresis for df3/dt &
df4/dt
4522A df3/4 M-WINDOW 1..25 Cycle 5 Cycle Measuring Window for df3/dt &
df4/dt
4502 df1/dt >/< -df/dt< negative rate of freq. -df/dt< negative Mode of Threshold (df1/dt >/<)
change rate of freq.
+df/dt> positive rate of freq. change
change
4503 STAGE df1/dt 0.1..10.0 Hz/s; ∞ 1.0 Hz/s Pickup Value of df1/dt Stage
4504 T df1/dt 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Time Delay of df1/dt Stage
4505 df1/dt & f1 OFF OFF AND logic with pickup of stage f1
ON
change
170 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

ON
change
ON
change
ON
2.24.2.2 Information for the Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection

05503 >df/dt block >BLOCK Rate-of-frequency-change prot.
05504 >df1/dt block >BLOCK df1/dt stage
05511 df/dt OFF df/dt is switched OFF
05512 df/dt BLOCKED df/dt is BLOCKED
05513 df/dt ACTIVE df/dt is ACTIVE
05514 df/dt U< block df/dt is blocked by undervoltage
05516 df1/dt pickup Stage df1/dt picked up
05520 df1/dt TRIP Stage df1/dt TRIP

7UM62 Manual 171

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.25 Jump of Voltage Vector
General It is not uncommon that consumers with their own generating plant feed power directly
into a network. The incoming feeder is usually the ownership boundary between the
utility and these consumers/producers. A failure of the input line, e.g. because of a
three-pole automatic reclosure, can cause a deviation of the voltage or frequency at
the feeding generator which is a function of the overall output. When the incoming
feeder line is switched on again after the dead time, it may meet with asynchronous
conditions which cause damage to the generator or the gear train between generator
and drive.
One criterion for identifying an interruption of the incoming feeder is the monitoring of
the phase angle in the voltage. In case of a failure of the incoming feeder, the abrupt
current interruption causes a phase angle jump in the voltage. This jump is detected
by means of a delta process. As soon as a preset threshold is exceeded, an opening
command for the generator or bustie coupler circuit-breaker is issued.
This means that the vector jump function is mainly used for network decoupling.
Figure 2-79 shows the evolution of the frequency when a load is disconnected from a
generator. Opening of the generator circuit breaker causes a phase angle jump that
can be observed in the frequency measurement as a frequency jump. The generator
is accelerated in accordance with the power system conditions (see also Section 2.24
Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection).
Hz
7
f-fn
6
0
-1.00 -0.75 -0.50 -0.25 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00
t s
Figure 2-79 Evolution of the Frequency after Disconnection of a Load (Fault recording with 7UM6 - the figure shows the
deviation from the rated frequency)
172 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Jump of Voltage Vector
Measuring The vector of the positive sequence system voltage is calculated from the phase-to-
Principle earth voltages, and the phase angle change of the voltage vector is determined over
a delta interval of 2 cycles. The presence of a phase angle jump is an indicator for an
abrupt change of the current flow. The basic principle is shown in Figure 2-80. The di-
agram on the left shows a steady state, and the diagram on the right the vector change
following a load shedding. The vector jump is clearly visible.
∆U ∆U
I1 I2 I1'
Z Gen Z Gen
~ U Z Network Z NET Up ~ U Z Network Z NET
U U U'
∆U ∆U
Up Up
Network/Load Network/Load
Generator Generator ∆φ
φ
Figure 2-80 Voltage Vector Following a Load Shedding
The function features a number of additional measures to avoid spurious tripping,

such as:
− Correction of steady-state deviations from rated frequency
− Frequency operating range limited to fN ± 3 Hz
− Detection of internal sampling frequency changeover
− Minimum voltage for release
− Blocking on voltage connection or disconnection
Logic Figure 2-81 shows the logic diagram. The phase angle comparison determines the an-
gle difference, and compares it with the set value. If this value is exceeded, the vector
jump is stored in an RS flip-flop. Tripping can be delayed by the associated time delay.
The stored pickup can be reset via a binary input, or automatically by a timer (address
4604 T RESET).
7UM62 Manual 173

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The vector jump function becomes ineffective on leaving the permissible frequency
band. The same is true for the voltage, for which the limiting parameters are U MIN
and U MAX.
On violation of the frequency or voltage band, the logic generates a logical “1”, and the
reset input is continuously active. The result of the vector jump measurement is sup-
pressed. If, for instance, the voltage is connected, and the frequency band is correct,
the logical “1” changes to “0”. The timer T BLOCK with reset delay keeps the reset in-
put active for a certain time, and thus prevents a pickup caused by the vector jump
function.
If a short-circuit causes the voltage to drop abruptly to a low value, the reset input is
immediately activated to block the function. The vector jump function is thus prevented
from causing a trip.
5586 5587
VEC JUMP pickup VEC JUMP TRIP
4602 DELTA PHI
4603 T DELTA PHI Tripping
Angle comparison with matrix
∆φn three measuring points S
Q
n-2, n-1, n
Tmin TRIP
R CMD
5581
>VEC JUMP block 4604 T RESET
OR
5583
VEC JMP BLOCKED
frated 3 Hz
f<(frated-3 Hz)
f
+
frated 3 Hz 4607 T BLOCK
f>(frated+3 Hz) 5585

f 0 T
OR VEC JUMP Range
4605 U MIN
U1<U MIN
U1
4606 U MAX
U1>U MAX
U1
Figure 2-81 Logic Diagram of the Vector Jump Detection
General The vector jump function is only effective and accessible if address 0146 VECTOR
JUMP has been set to Enabled during configuration.
Address 4601 VECTOR JUMP is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block
174 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Jump of Voltage Vector
Pickup Values The value to be set for the vector jump (address 4602 DELTA PHI) depends on the
feeding and load conditions. Abrupt load changes in the active power cause a jump of
the voltage vector. The value to be set must be specifically determined for the power
system considered. This can be done on the basis of the equivalent circuit diagram in
Figure 2-80, or by means of a network calculation software.
If the setting is too sensitive, the protection function is likely to perform a network de-
coupling every time loads are connected or disconnected. Therefore, the default set-
ting is 10°.
The permissible voltage operating range can be set in the addresses 4605A for U MIN
and 4606A for U MAX. The limit values of the setting range are to some extent a matter
of the utility’s philosophy. The value for U MIN should be less than the permissible
level of short voltage dips for which network decoupling is required. The default setting
is 80 % of the rated voltage. U MAX should be the maximum permissible voltage. This
will be in most cases 130 % of the rated voltage.
Time Delays The time delay T DELTA PHI (address 4603) should be left at zero, except if you
wish to transmit the trip indication with a delay to a logic (CFC), or to leave enough
time for an external blocking to take effect.
After expiry of the timer T RESET (address 4604), the protection function is automat-
ically reset. The reset time depends on the decoupling philosophy. It must have ex-
pired before the circuit breaker is reclosed. Where the automatic reset function is not
used, the timer is set to ∞. The reset signal must come in that case from the binary
input (circuit breaker auxiliary contact).
The timer T BLOCK with reset delay (address 4607A) helps to avoid overfunctioning
when voltages are connected or disconnected. Normally, the default setting need not
be changed. If changes are necessary, they can be performed with the DIGSI commu-
nication software (advanced parameters). It must be kept in mind that T BLOCK should
always be set to more than the measuring window for vector jump measurement (2
cycles).
2.25.2.1 Settings of the Vector Jump Detection

4601 VECTOR JUMP OFF OFF Jump of Voltage Vector
ON
mands
4602 DELTA PHI 2..30 ° 10 ° Jump of Phasor DELTA PHI
4603 T DELTA PHI 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T DELTA PHI Time Delay
4604 T RESET 0.10..60.00 sec; ∞ 5.00 sec Reset Time after Trip
4605A U MIN 10.0..125.0 V 80.0 V Minimal Operation Voltage U

MIN
4606A U MAX 10.0..170.0 V 130.0 V Maximal Operation Voltage U

MAX
4607A T BLOCK 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec Time Delay of Blocking
7UM62 Manual 175

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.25.2.2 Information for the Vector Jump Detection

05581 >VEC JUMP block >BLOCK Vector Jump
05582 VEC JUMP OFF Vector Jump is switched OFF
05583 VEC JMP BLOCKED Vector Jump is BLOCKED
05584 VEC JUMP ACTIVE Vector Jump is ACTIVE
05585 VEC JUMP Range Vector Jump not in measurement range
05586 VEC JUMP pickup Vector Jump picked up
05587 VEC JUMP TRIP Vector Jump TRIP
176 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
90–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G)
2.26 90–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G)
General The stator earth fault protection detects earth faults in the stator windings of three-
phase machines. The machine can be operated in busbar connection (directly
connected to the network) or in unit connection (via unit transformer). The criterion for
the occurrence of an earth fault is mainly the occurrence of a neutral displacement
voltage. This principle results in a protected zone of 90 % to 95 % of the stator winding.
Displacement The displacement voltage UE can be measured either at the machine starpoint via
Voltage voltage transformers or neutral earthing transformers (Figure 2-82) or via the e-n
winding (broken delta winding) of a voltage transformer set or the measurement
winding of a line connected earthing transformer (Figure 2-83). Since the neutral
earthing transformer or the line connected earthing transformer usually supply a
displacement voltage of 500 V (with full displacement), a voltage divider 500 V/100 V
is to be connected in such cases.
If the displacement voltage can not be directly applied to the device, the device
calculates the displacement voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages.
Address 0223 UE CONNECTION serves for specifying the way the displacement
voltage is to be measured or calculated.
In all kinds of displacement voltage formation, the components of the third harmonic
in each phase are summed since they are in phase in the three-phase system. In order
to obtain reliable measured quantities, only the fundamental of the displacement
voltage is evaluated in the stator earth fault protection. Harmonics are filtered out by
numerical filter algorithms.
For machines in unit connection the evaluation of the displacement voltage is
sufficient. The achieved sensitivity of the protection is only limited by power frequency
interference voltages during an earth fault in the network. These interference voltages
are transferred to the machine side via the coupling capacitances of the unit
transformer. If necessary, a loading resistor can be provided to reduce these
interference voltages. The protection initiates disconnection of the machine when an
earth fault in the machine zone has been present for a set time.
7UM62 Manual 177

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
CK
CG CL CTr
RB
RT
UE
7UM62
RB – Loading resistor CG – Generator earth capacitance

RT – Voltage divider CL – Line earth capacitance
UE – Displacement voltage CTr – Unit transformer earth capacitance
CK – Coupling capacitance of unit transformer
Figure 2-82 Unit Connected Generator with Neutral Earthing Transformer
CK
CG CL CTr
RB – Loading resistor RB
RT – Voltage divider
RT
UE – Displacement voltage
CG – Generator earth capacitance UE
7UM62
CL – Line earth capacitance
CTr – Unit transformer earth capacitance
CK – Coupling capacitance of unit
Figure 2-83 Unit Connected Generator with Earthing Transformer
Earth Current For machines in busbar connection, it is not possible to differentiate between a
Direction Detection network earth fault or a machine earth fault by the displacement voltage alone. In this
case the earth fault current is used as a further criterion, and the displacement voltage
as a necessary release condition.
To achieve the necessary sensitivity, the earth fault current is measured using a
toroidal current transformer or a set of CTs in Holmgreen connection. During a
network earth fault, the machine supplies only a negligible earth fault current across
the measurement location, which must be situated between the machine and the
network. During a machine earth fault, the earth fault current of the network is
available. However, since the network conditions generally vary according to the
switching status of the network, a loading resistor, which supplies an increased earth
fault current on the occurrence of a displacement voltage, is used in order to obtain
definite measurement conditions independent of the switching status of the network.
The earth fault current produced by the loading resistor must always flow across the
measurement location.
178 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
RL
L3 L2 L1
IEE2 UE
7UM62
Figure 2-84 Earth Fault Direction Detection with Busbar Connection
Consequently, the loading resistor must be situated on the other side of the
measurement location (current transformer, toroidal current transformer) when viewed
from the machine. The earthing transformer is usually connected to the busbar. Apart
from the magnitude of the earth fault current, the direction of this current in relation to
the displacement voltage can be used for the safe recognition of a machine earth fault
in the case of bus-bar connection. The directional border between “machine direction”
and “network direction” can be altered in the 7UM62 (refer to Figure 2-85). The
protection feature detects a machine earth fault if all three of the following two criteria
met:
− Displacement voltage larger than set value U0>,
− Earth fault current across the measurement location larger than set value 3I0>,
− Earth fault current is flowing in the direction of the protected machine.
IE ohmic
IE ohmsch
E (= U0)
Uen
Generator
Richtung
direction
Generator
IE (= 3I0)
IE
Settable pickup
parametrierbare An
threshold 3I0>
sprechschwelle I3I0 >
ERD>
ϕE
öE
Settable directional
einstellbarer angle
Richtungswinkel
IE capacitive
IE kapazitiv IE IE
induktiv
inductive
Network
Richtung
direction
Netz
Figure 2-85 Characteristic of Directional Stator Earth Fault Protection for Busbar Connection
7UM62 Manual 179

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
On the occurrence of earth fault in the machine zone, the disconnection of the
machine is initiated after a set delay time.
When the earth current is not decisive to detect an earth fault, e.g. because the circuit
breaker is open, the earth current detection can be switched off by a control signal via
a binary input of the relay. During this time, the displacement voltage stage is fully
operative as the only earth fault protection (e.g. during run-up of the machine).
Figure 2-87 shows the logic diagram of the stator earth fault protection.
If the stator earth fault protection is used as directional busbar connection protection,
this feature is assigned to the sensitive current measuring input of the 7UM62 device.
The user must be aware that the sensitive earth fault detection can use the same
measuring input (if IEE2 has been configured) and thus the same measuring quantity.
For this reason, two additional, independent pickup thresholds Iee> and Iee>> could
be formed for this measuring quantity by means of the sensitive earth fault detection
(see section 2.27). If the user does not desire this, he should remove the sensitive
earth fault configuration at address 0151, or use it with IEE1.
If the rotor earth fault protection (see Section 2.30) is used, it occupies the additional
voltage input; the displacement voltage U0 for the stator earth fault protection is
therefore calculated from the phase-earth voltages in that case.
Earth Fault In the industrial sector, busbar systems are implemented with high- or low-resistance,
Detection switchable starpoint resistances. For earth-fault detection, the starpoint current and
(Earth Differential the total current are detected via toroidal current transformers and transmitted to the
Protection with protective relay as current difference. In this way, both the earth current portion
Tripping via derived from the starpoint resistance and the earth current portion derived from the
Displacement power system contribute to the total earth current. In order to exclude an unwanted
Voltage) operation due to transformer faults, the displacement voltage is used for tripping (see
figure 2-86). The protection feature detects a machine earth fault if the following two
criteria are fulfilled:
− Displacement voltage larger than set value U0>,
− Earth fault current difference ∆IE higher than setting value 3I0>,
∆IE
IEE UE
7UM62
&
Figure 2-86 Earth Current Differential Protection with Busbar Connection
Appendix A.4 (Figure A-27) illustrates a connection example with a low-resistance

starpoint (earth current limiting to about 100 A). In this example as well, 3I0> and U0>
are the tripping criteria.
180 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Determination of In addition to this, a supplementary function serves to determine the faulty phase. As
the Faulty Phase the phase-earth-voltage in the faulty phase is less than in the two remaining phases
and as the voltage even increases in the latter ones, the faulty phase can be
determined by determining the smallest phase-earth voltage in order to generate a
corresponding result as fault message.
FNo. 05193
S/E/F TRIP
5002 U0> FNo. 05187
FNo. 05186 U0> TRIP
& U0> picked up
FNo. 05188
5003 3I0> & 3I0> picked up
5005 T S/E/F
Tripping
& & matrix
OR &
5004 DIR. ANGLE
5005 T S/E/F
& OR &
FNo. 05173 FNo. 05182
>S/E/F BLOCK S/E/F BLOCKED
TMin
TRIP CMD
FNo. 05176
>S/E/F Iee off
OR
FNo. 05194
non-direct. only U0
directional & SEF Dir Forward
”1” non-dir. with U0 & I0
0150 S/E/F PROT.
Figure 2-87 Logic Diagram of the 90%–Stator Earth Fault Protection
General The 90% stator earth fault protection is only effective and accessible if it has been set
during the configuration of the protection functions at address 0150 S/E/F PROT. =
directional; non-dir. U0 or non-dir. U0&I0. If non–dir. U0 was
selected, the parameters concerning the earth current are ineffective. If one of the
options directional or non–dir. U0&I0 was selected, the parameters
concerning the earth current are accessible. For machines in busbar connection, one
of the latter options must set as a differentiation between the power system earth fault
and the machine earth fault is only possible by way of the earth current. If the 90%
stator earth fault protection is used as ”earth differential protection”, address 0150
S/E/F PROT. = non-dir. U0&I0 is selected. Set Disabled if the function is not
required. Address 5001 S/E/F PROT. is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to
Displacement The criterion for the inception of an earth fault in the stator circuit is the occurrence of
Voltage a neutral displacement voltage. Exceeding the setting value 5002 U0> therefore
represents the pickup for this protection.
The setting must be chosen such that the protection does not pick up during
operational asymmetries. This is particularly important for machines in busbar
connection since all voltage asymmetries of the network affect the voltage system of
the machine. The pickup value should be at least twice the value of the operational
asymmetry. A value of 5% to 10% of the full displacement value is normal.
7UM62 Manual 181

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
For machines in unit connection, the pickup value has to be chosen such that
displacements during network earth faults which are transferred via the coupling
capacitances of the unit transformer to the stator circuit, do not lead to pickup. The
damping effect of the loading resistor must also be considered in this case.
Instructions for the dimensioning of the earth current transformer and the loading
resistor are contained in the pamphlet “Planning Machine Protection Systems”, Order
No. E50400-U0089-U412-A1-7600. The setting value is twice the displacement value
which is coupled in at full network displacement. The setting value is finally determined
during commissioning with primary values according to section 3.4.6.1.
Delays The stator earth fault trip is delayed by the time set under address 5005 T S/E/F.
When setting the delay time, the overload capability of the loading equipment must be
considered. All set times are additional delay times and do not include operating times
(measurement times, reset times) of the protection function itself.
Earth Current Addresses 5003 and 5004 are only of importance for machines in busbar connection,
0150 S/E/F PROT. = directional or non–dir. U0&I0 has been set. The
following considerations are not applicable for machines in unit connection.
The pickup value 5003 3I0> is set such that for an earth fault in the protected zone,
the earth current safely exceeds the setting.
Since the residual earth current in a compensated network is very small, an earthing
transformer with an ohmic loading resistor is normally provided to increase the
residual wattmetric current in the event of an earth fault. This arrangement also makes
the protection independent of network conditions. Instructions for the dimensioning of
the earth current transformer and the loading resistor are contained in the pamphlet
“Planning Machine Protection Systems”, Order No. E50400-U0089-U412-A1-7600.
Since the magnitude of earth fault current in this case is determined mainly by the
loading resistor, a small angle is set for 5004 DIR. ANGLE, e.g. 15°. If the network
capacitances in an isolated network are also to be considered, then a larger angle
(approx. 45°) can be set which corresponds to the superimposition of the capacitance
network current onto the loading current.
The directional angle 5004 DIR. ANGLE indicates the phase displacement between
the neutral displacement voltage and the perpendicular to the directional characteristic
(Figure 2-85), i.e. it is equal to the inclination of the directional characteristic to the
reactive axis.
If, in an isolated network, the capacitances to earth of the network are mainly decisive
for the earth fault protection, it is also possible to work without earthing transformer. In
this case, the angle is set to approximately 90° (corresponding to sin ϕ switching).
Example busbar connection:
6.3 kV 500 V
Earthing transformer ----------------- ⁄ --------------- (limb transformation)
3 3
27 kVA
Loading resistor 10 Ω
10 A continuous
50 A for 20 s
182 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Voltage divider 500 V / 100 V
Toroidal c.t. 60 A/1 A
Protected zone 90 %
With full neutral displacement voltage, the load resistor supplies:
500 V
--------------- = 50 A
10 Ω
Referred to the 6.3 kV side, this results in:
500 ⁄ 3
I EE prim = 50 A ⋅ ----------------------------------- ⋅ 3 = 6.87 A
6300 V ⁄ ( 3 )
The secondary current of the toroidal transformer supplies to the input of the device:
I EE prim 6.87 A
I EE sec = ------------------------- = ----------------- = 115 mA
60 A ⁄ 1 A 60
For a protected zone of 90 %, the protection should already operate at 1/10 of the full
displacement voltage, whereby only 1/10 of the earth fault current is generated
115 mA
Setting 3I0> = -------------------- = 11.5 mA
10
In this example 3I0> is set to 11 mA. For the displacement voltage setting, 1/10 of the
full displacement voltage is used (because of the 90% protected zone). Considering a
voltage divider of 500 V/100 V, this results in:
Setting value U0> = 10 V
The time delay must lie below the 50 A capability time of the loading resistor, i.e. below
20 s. The overload capability of the earthing transformer must also be considered if it
lies below that of the loading resistor.
2.26.2.1 Settings of the 90% Stator Earth Fault Protection

5001 S/E/F PROT. OFF OFF Stator Earth Fault Protection
ON
mands
5002 U0> 2.0..125.0 V 10.0 V U0> Pickup
5003 3I0> 2..1000 mA 5 mA 3I0> Pickup
5004 DIR. ANGLE 0..360 ° 15 ° Angle for Direction Determina-

tion
5005 T S/E/F 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec T S/E/F Time Delay
7UM62 Manual 183

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.26.2.2 Information for the 90% Stator Earth Fault Protection

05173 >S/E/F BLOCK >BLOCK stator earth fault protection
05176 >S/E/F Iee off >Switch off earth current detec.(S/E/F)
05181 S/E/F OFF Stator earth fault prot. is switch OFF
05182 S/E/F BLOCKED Stator earth fault protection is BLOCK.
05183 S/E/F ACTIVE Stator earth fault protection is ACTIVE
05189 Uearth L1 Earth fault in phase L1
05186 U0> picked up Stator earth fault: U0 picked up
05188 3I0> picked up Stator earth fault: I0 picked up
05187 U0> TRIP Stator earth fault: U0 stage TRIP
05193 S/E/F TRIP Stator earth fault protection TRIP
05194 SEF Dir Forward Stator earth fault: direction forward
184 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R)
2.27 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R)
General The highly sensitive earth fault protection has the task to detect earth fault in systems
with isolated or high-impedance earthed star-point. The pick-up criterion is the
magnitude of the (residual) earth current. The magnitude of the residual current allows
earth fault detection, for example, on electrical machines which are directly connected
to the busbar of an isolated power system, when in case of a network earth fault the
machine supplies only a negligible earth fault current across the measurement
location, which must be situated between the machine terminals and the network,
whereas in case of a machine earth fault the higher earth fault current produced by the
total network is available. The measured current may be derived from toroidal CTs or
CTs in Holmgreen connection.
In the 7UM62, the sensitive earth fault detection feature can be allocated to either
input IEE1 or IEE2. This choice is made during configuration (see Section 2.2).
This protection is not suited for detection of high earth currents which may arise in
case of earthed system starpoints (higher than approx. 1 A at the relay terminals for
highly sensitive earth current protection). If this protection feature nevertheless shall
be used as short-circuit to earth protection, an additional, external current transformer
is required as intermediate transformer.
Note: The sensitive earth current protection as well as for the directional or non–
directional stator earth fault protection of busbar-connected machines may use the
same current measuring input (IEE2). That means that both protection functions use
identical input currents if address 0150 S/E/F PROT. is set to directional or
non-dir. U0&I0.
Application as Alternatively, this protection can be used as rotor earth fault protection when a system
Rotor Earth Fault frequency bias voltage is applied to the rotor circuit (refer to Figure 2-88). In this case,
Protection the measured current is determined by the magnitude of the bias voltage UV and the
capacitance of the coupling capacitors of the rotor circuit.
A measured value supervision is provided for the application as rotor earth fault
protection: The measurement circuit is assumed to be closed as long as a small earth
current IEE< is flowing which is determined by the rotor-earth capacitance. If not, an
alarm is issued after a short delay time of 2 s.
Measuring Initially, the residual current is numerically filtered so that only the fundamental wave
Procedure of the current is used for the measurement. This makes the measurement insensitive
to transient conditions at the inception of a short-circuit and to harmonics content in
the current.
The protection consists of two stages. A pickup is detected as soon as the first
parameterized threshold value IEE> is exceeded. The trip command is transmitted
subsequent to the T IEE> delay time. A pickup is detected as soon as the second
parameterized threshold value IEE>> is exceeded. The trip command is transmitted
subsequent to the T IEE>> delay time.
Both stages can be blocked via a binary input.
7UM62 Manual 185

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Figure 2-89 shows the logic diagram of sensitive earth fault detection.
UE UE
3PP13
7UM62
IEE 7XR61
UV
Figure 2-88 Application Example as Rotor Short Circuit to Earth Protection

(7XR61 – series device for the rotor short circuit to earth protection;
3PP13 – from UPU > 150 V, resistors in the 7XR61 must be shorted!)
FNo. 01224 FNo. 01226

IEE> picked up IEE> TRIP
5102 IEE> 5103 T IEE>
&
Iee Tripping
matrix
FNo. 01221 FNo. 01223

IEE>> picked up IEE>> TRIP
5104 IEE>>
5105 T IEE>>
&
TMin
FNo. 01203 TRIP CMD
>BLOCK IEE>
FNo. 01202
>BLOCK IEE>>
FNo. 01231 FNo. 01233

>BLOCK Sens. E IEE BLOCKED
5106 IEE<
FNo. 05396
2s
& Fail. REF
Figure 2-89 Logic Diagram of the Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
186 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R)
General The sensitive earth fault detection is only effective and accessible if it has been set
during the configuration of the protective functions at address 0151 O/C PROT.
Iee> = with Iee1 or with Iee2. If one of the options with current evaluation was
selected during the configuration of the 90–%–stator earth fault protection (0150 S/
E/F PROT., see Section 2.2) the sensitive current measuring input of the 7UM62 is
assigned to this feature. The user must be aware that the sensitive earth fault
detection possibly uses the same measuring input (IEE2) and thus the same
measuring quantity. If the sensitive earth fault detection is not required, this parameter
is set to Disabled. Address 5101 O/C PROT. Iee> is used to switch the function
ON or OFF, or to block only the trip command (Block Relay).
Use as Rotor Earth The highly sensitive earth current protection can be used to detects earth fault either
Fault Protection in the stator or in the rotor winding of the machine. A precondition is that the magnitude
of the measured current is a sufficient criterion. When the protected winding is isolated
or high-resistance earthed, sufficient magnitude of the earth current must be
produced. When, for example, used as rotor earth fault protection, a system frequency
bias voltage (UV ≈ 42 V must be applied to the rotor circuit by means of the 7XR61
series device in Figure 2-88). In this case, the measured current is determined by the
magnitude of the bias voltage and the capacitance of the coupling capacitors of the
rotor circuit, which can be measured in order to ensure a closed measuring circuit
(address 5106 IEE<). Approximately 2 mA is a typical pickup value. The monitoring
stage is ineffective is this value is set to 0. This can become necessary if the earth
capacitances are too small.
The earth current pick-up value 5102 IEE> is chosen such that an earth resistance
RE between 3 kΩ and 5 kΩ is covered:
U V 42 V
Warning stage setting value e.g.: IEE> ≈ ------- ≈ ------------ ≈ 10 mA
R E 4 kΩ
On the other hand, the setting value should correspond to at least twice the
interference current caused by the earth capacitances of the rotor circuit.
The 5104 IEE>> trip stage should be dimensioned for a fault resistance of about
1.5 kΩ.
UV 42 V
Trip stage setting value e.g.: IEE>> ≈ ----------------------------- ≈ ------------------------------------------ ≈ 23 mA
R E + Z coup 1.5 kΩ + 0.4 kΩ
with Zcoup- Impedance amount of the series device with nominal frequency
The 5103 T IEE> and 5105 T IEE>> tripping time delays do not include the
operating times.
Use as Stator Earth Please also refer to section 2.26. For use as stator earth fault protection, a sufficient
Fault Protection current must be produced by an earthing transformer, if necessary. Instructions for the
dimensioning of the earth current transformer and the loading resistor are contained
in the pamphlet “Planning Machine Protection Systems”, Order No. E50400-U0089-
U412-A1-7600.
7UM62 Manual 187

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Use as Earth Short- For low-voltage machines with neutral conductor incorporated in cables or machines
Circuit Protection with low-impedance earthed starpoint, the time-overcurrent protection of the phase
branches already is a short-circuit to earth protection, as the short-circuit to earth
current also flows through the faulty phase. If the sensitive earth current detection
nevertheless shall be used as short-circuit to earth protection, an external
intermediate transformer must be used to ensure that the short-circuit current does not
exceed the thermal limit values (15 A continuous, 100 A for < 10 s, 300 A for < 1 s) of
this measuring input.
2.27.2.1 Settings of the Sensitive Earth Fault Protection

5101 O/C PROT. Iee> OFF OFF Sensitive Earth Current Protec-
ON tion
mands
5102 IEE> 2..1000 mA 10 mA Iee> Pickup
5103 T IEE> 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 5.00 sec T Iee> Time delay
5104 IEE>> 2..1000 mA 23 mA Iee>> Pickup
5105 T IEE>> 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec T Iee>> Time Delay
5106 IEE< 1.5..50.0 mA; 0 0.0 mA Iee< Pickup (Interrupted Circuit)
2.27.2.2 Information for the Sensitive Earth Current Detection

01231 >BLOCK Sens. E >BLOCK sensitiv earth current prot.
01203 >BLOCK IEE> >BLOCK IEE>
01202 >BLOCK IEE>> >BLOCK IEE>>
01232 IEE OFF Earth current prot. is swiched OFF

01233 IEE BLOCKED Earth current prot. is BLOCKED
01234 IEE ACTIVE Earth current prot. is ACTIVE
01224 IEE> picked up IEE> picked up
01221 IEE>> picked up IEE>> picked up
01226 IEE> TRIP IEE> TRIP
01223 IEE>> TRIP IEE>> TRIP
05396 Fail. REF Iee< Failure R/E/F protection Iee<
188 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
100–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.)

(ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.)
General As described in section 2.26, the measuring procedure based on the fundamental
wave of the displacement voltage serves to protect maximally 90 % to 95 % of the
stator winding. A non-line-frequent voltage must be used to implement a 100 %
protection range. With the 7UM62 device, the 3rd harmonic is used for this purpose.
The 3rd harmonic is created in each machine in a more or less significant way. It is
provoked by the shape of the poles. If an earth fault occurs in the generator stator
winding, the division ratio of the parasitic capacitances changes, as one of the
capacitances was short-circuited by the earth fault. During this procedure, the 3rd
harmonic measured in the starpoint decreases, whereas the 3rd harmonic measured
at the generator terminals increases (see figure 2-90). The 3rd harmonic forms a zero
phase-sequence system and can thus also be determined by means of the voltage
transformer switched in star/delta or by calculating the zero phase-sequence system
from the phase-earth-voltages.
L1
L2
L3
3. Harmonics
Earth fault close to starpoint
Normal operation
Terminals
Starpoint
Figure 2-90 Profile of the 3rd Harmonic along the Stator Winding
Moreover, the level of the 3rd harmonic depends on the operating point of the
generator, i.e. a function of the P active power and the Q reactive power. For this
reason, the working area of the stator earth fault protection is restricted in order to
enhance security.
In case of a busbar connection, all machines contribute to the 3rd harmonic, which
impedes the separation of the individual machines.
Measuring The level of the 3rd harmonic in the measuring quantity is the pickup criterion. The 3rd
Principle harmonic is determined from the displacement voltage measured during two cycles by
means of digital filtering.
Different measuring procedures are applied, depending on whether the displacement
voltage is detected or not (project configuration parameter 0223 UE CONNECTION):
7UM62 Manual 189

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
1. Ue connected to neutral transformer: Connection of the UE input to the

voltage transformer in the machine starpoint
2. Ue connected to broken delta winding: Connection of the UE input to
the broken delta winding
3. Not connected: Calculation of the displacement voltage by means of the three
phase-earth-voltages, if the UE input is not connected
4. Ue connected to any VT: measuring of any other voltage; the function 100–
%–stator earth fault protection is blocked.
5. Ue connected to Rotor: measuring of any other voltage; the function 100–
%–stator earth fault protection is blocked.
6. Ue connected to loading Resistor: The UE-input is used by the 100–
%–stator earth fault protection with 20–Hz–injection. The function 100–%–stator
earth fault protection with 3rd harmonics is blocked.
Ue Connected to As an earth fault in the starpoint causes a reduction of the measured 3rd harmonic
Neutral compared with the faulty case, the protective function is implemented as undervoltage
Transformer stage (5202 U0 3.HARM<). This arrangement is the preferred application.
Ue Connected to If no neutral transformer exists, the protective function is based on the zero
Broken Delta component of the 3rd harmonic of the terminal voltages. This voltage increases in
Winding case of a fault. In this case, the protective function is an overvoltage stage (5203 U0
3.HARM>).
Not Connected; Like for the connection to the broken delta winding, an increase of the 3rd harmonic in
Calculation of U0 case of a fault also results for the calculated voltage. The 5203 U0 3.HARM>
parameter is also relevant for this application.
Ue Connected to With these connection types the function 100–%–stator earth fault protection is
any VT blocked.
Ue Connected to
Rotor
Figure 2-91 illustrates the logic diagram of the 100– %–stator earth fault protection.
190 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
FNo. 05567
5202 U0 3.HARM<
U(3.H.) SEF 3H pick.up
neutral transformer
5204 T SEF 3. HARM. Tripping
matrix
&
5203 U0 3.HARM> FNo. 05568
SEF 3H TRIP
not connected
or
broken delta winding
5205 P min >

TMin
TRIP CMD
5206 U1 min > &
0223 UE CONNECTION
Neutral transformer
broken delta winding
not connected
”1”
Load Resistor
connected to Rotor
connected to any VT
FNo. 05553 FNo. 05562

>SEF 3H BLOCK SEF 3H BLOCK
Figure 2-91 Logic Diagram of the 100–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection
General The 100 % stator earth fault protective function is only effective and available if 0152
SEF 3rd HARM.has been set during the configuration of the protective functions to
Enabled. Set Disabled if the function is not required. Address 5201 SEF 3rd
HARM. is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only the trip command
(Block Relay).
Connection Type Depending on the system conditions, the user specified at address 0223 UE
CONNECTION during the project configuration if the displacement voltage Uen is
tapped via a neutral transformer (Ue connected to neutral transformer) or
via the broken delta winding of an earthing transformer (Ue connected to broken
delta winding) and fed to the protective relay. If it is possible to make the
displacement voltage available to the protective relay as a measured quantity,
calculated quantities are used and the parameter must be set to not connected.
The option UE connected to any VT is selected if the 7UM62 voltage input shall
be used for measuring any other voltage instead of using it for earth fault protection.
In this case the function 100–%–stator earth fault protection is blocked. The option Ue
connected to Rotor is selected if the bias voltage for rotor earth fault connection
shall be fed in at this input. In this case the function 100–%–stator earth fault protection
is blocked.
The option Ue connected to loading resistor is for the 100–%–stator earth
fault protection with 20–Hz–injection. At this setting the 100–%–stator earth fault pro-
tection with 3rd harmonics is blocked.
7UM62 Manual 191

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Pickup Value for Depending on the selection of the connection type, only one of the two setting
3rd Harmonics parameters 5202 or 5203 is accessible. The setting values can only be determined
within the framework of a primary test. The following principle is generally valid:
− The 5202 U0 3.HARM< undervoltage stage is relevant for a connection to a
transformer in the starpoint. The pickup value should be chosen as low as possible.
− The 5203 U0 3.HARM> overvoltage stage is relevant for a connection via the
broken delta winding of an earthing transformer and for a not connected, but
internally calculated displacement voltage.
Working Area Due to the strong dependency of the measurable 3rd harmonic from the correspond-
ing working point of the generator, the working area of the 100–%–stator earth fault
protection is only tripped above the active-power threshold set via 5205 P min >
and on exceeding a minimum positive phase-sequence voltage 5206 U1 min >.
Recommended setting: Pmin > 40 % P/SN
U1 min > 80 % UN
Delay Time The tripping in case of an earth fault is delayed by the time set at address 5204
T SEF 3. HARM.. The set time is an additional time delay not including the operating
time of the protective function.
2.28.2.1 Settings of the 100–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics

5201 SEF 3rd HARM. OFF OFF Stator Earth Fault Protection
ON 3rdHarm.
mands
5202 U0 3.HARM< 0.2..40.0 V 1.0 V U0 3rd Harmonic< Pickup
5203 U0 3.HARM> 0.2..40.0 V 2.0 V U0 3rd Harmonic> Pickup
5204 T SEF 3. HARM. 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T SEF 3rd Harmonic Time Delay
5205 P min > 10..100 %; 0 40 % Release Threshold Pmin>
5206 U1 min > 50.0..125.0 V; 0 80.0 V Release Threshold U1min>
192 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
2.28.2.2 Information for the 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics

05553 >SEF 3H BLOCK >BLOCK SEF with 3.Harmonic
05561 SEF 3H OFF SEF with 3.Harm. is switched OFF
05562 SEF 3H BLOCK SEF with 3.Harm. is BLOCKED
05563 SEF 3H ACTIVE SEF with 3.Harm. is ACTIVE
05567 SEF 3H pick.up SEF with 3.Harm.: picked up
05568 SEF 3H TRIP SEF with 3.Harm.: TRIP
7UM62 Manual 193

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.29 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection

(ANSI 64G - 100%)
General The 100-% stator earth fault protection detects earth faults in the stator windings of
generators which are connected with the network via a unit transformer. This protec-
tion function, which works with an injected 20 Hz voltage, is independent of the sys-
tem-frequency displacement voltage appearing in earth faults, and detects earth faults
in all windings including the machine starpoint. The measuring principle used is not
influenced at all by the generator operating mode and allows to perform measure-
ments even with the generator standing still. The two measuring principles used –
measurement of the displacement voltage (see Section 2.26) and evaluation of the
measured quantities at an injected 20 Hz voltage – allow to implement reliable protec-
tion concepts that complement one another.
If an earth fault in the generator starpoint or close to the starpoint is not detected, the
generator is running with an “earthing”. A subsequent fault (e.g. a second earth fault)
causes a single-pole short-circuit that may have an extremely high fault current be-
cause the generator zero impedance is very small.
A 100 % stator earth fault protection is therefore a basic function for large generators.
Basic Principle Figure 2-92 shows the basic protection principle. An external low-frequency alternat-
ing voltage source (20 Hz) injects into the generator starpoint a voltage of max. 1 %
of the rated generator voltage. If an earth fault occurs in the generator starpoint, the
20 Hz voltage drives a current through the fault resistance. From the driving voltage
and the fault current, the protective relay determines the fault resistance. The protec-
tion principle described here also detects earth faults at the generator terminals, in-
cluding connected components such as voltage transformers.
max. 20 Hz
RF
200 V
Figure 2-92 Basic Principle of Voltage Injection into the Generator Starpoint
Circuit Design To implement the above concept, some additional equipment is required. Figure 2-93
shows that a 20 Hz generator generates a square-wave voltage with an amplitude of
approx. 25 V. This square-wave voltage is fed via a band pass into the loading resistor
of the earthing or neutral transformer. The band pass serves for rounding the square-
wave voltage and for storing energy. The 20 Hz resistance of the band pass is approx.
8 Ω. The band pass has also a protection function. If the load resistor carries the full
displacement voltage in case of a terminal-to-earth fault, the higher series resistance
of the band pass protects the 20 Hz generator from high feedback currents.
194 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G - 100%)
The driving 20 Hz voltage is picked up directly at the loading resistor via a voltage di-
vider. In addition, the 20 Hz current flow is measured via a miniature CT. Both quanti-
ties (USEF and ISEF) are fed to the protection device.
The voltage to be injected into the generator starpoint depends on the driving 20 Hz
voltage (voltage divider: load resistor and band pass), and on the transformation ratio
of the neutral or earthing transformer.
To prevent the secondary load resistance from becoming too small (it should be > 0.5
Ω, where possible), a high secondary rated voltage should be chosen for the earthing
or neutral transformer. 500 V has proven to be a good value.
20 Hz generator
Band pass ~
~
G
20 Hz
Supply voltage
(DC or AC)
~
Earthing 500 V
transformer 200 V
U Nom 500 V
USEF
3 3 a R 7UM62
L l Prot. Relais
ISEF
b K k
Min. CT
GS (400 A / 5 A)
3~
a b
Neutral transformer
R Loading resistor
USEF Displacement voltage at protective relay
ISEF Measuring current at protective relay
Figure 2-93 Circuit Design of the 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection with Earthing Trans-
former or Neutral Transformer (see also Figure A-43 in the Appendix).
The same measuring principle can also be used with a primary loading resistor. The
20 Hz voltage is connected in this case via a voltage transformer, and the starpoint
current is directly measured. The connection scheme, and hints on circuit design, can
be found in the Appendix A.5 (Figure A-43).
Measuring From the two measured quantities USEF and ISEF in Figure 2-93, the 20 Hz current and
Procedure voltage vectors are calculated, and from the resulting complex impedance the ohmic
fault resistance is determined. This method eliminates disturbances caused by the
stator earth capacitance, and ensures a high sensitivity. The measuring accuracy is
further increased by using mean current and voltage values obtained over several cy-
cles for calculating the resistance.
The model takes into account a transfer resistance RPS that may be present at the
neutral, earthing or voltage transformer. Other error factors are taken into account in
the angle error.
7UM62 Manual 195

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
In addition to the determination of the earth resistance, the protection function features
an earth current stage which processes the current r.m.s. value and thus takes into
account all frequencies. It is used as a backup stage and covers approx. 80 to 90 %
of the protection zone.
A monitoring circuit checks the coupled external 20 Hz voltage and the 20 Hz current
and detects by evaluating them a failure of the 20 Hz generator or of the 20 Hz con-
nection. In case of a failure, the resistance determination is blocked. The earth current
stage remains active.
Logic Figure 2-94 shows the logic diagram. It comprises:

− Monitoring of the 20 Hz connection
− Resistance calculation and threshold value decision
− Independent current measurement stage
The protection function has an alarm stage and a trip stage. Both stages can be de-
layed with a timer. The earth current detection acts only on the trip stage. The evalu-
ation of the earth resistance measurement is blocked between 10 Hz and 40 Hz, be-
cause in this frequency range a zero voltage can also be generated by generators
starting up or slowing down. Such a zero voltage would then superimpose the con-
nected 20 Hz voltage, causing measurement errors and overfunctioning.
The resistance measurement function is active with frequencies below 10 Hz (i.e. at
standstill) and above 40 Hz. The earth current measurement is active over the entire
range.
5476
>U20 failure
5307 U20 MIN
5486
& 0,5 s OR &
5308 I20 MIN Failure SEF
5302 R< SEF ALARM

5304 T SEF ALARM
& 5487
& SEF100 Alarm
USEF
U20
Num. U20 I20
ISEF filter 5488
R 5303 R<< SEF TRIP SEF100 PICKUP
I20
5305 T SEF TRIP
& 5489
&
OR SEF100 TRIP
f > 10 Hz
5306 SEF I>> and
OR
f ≤ 40 Hz Tripping
matrix
&
Tmin TRIP
CMD
5173 5482
>S/E/F BLOCK SEF100 BLOCKED
Figure 2-94 Logic Diagram of the 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection
196 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
General The 100-% stator earth fault protection is only effective and accessible if it has been
set to Enabled at address 0153 100% SEF-PROT. during the configuration of the
protection functions. In addition, the function requires the following settings to be
made in Power System Data 1:
− Address 0275: FACTOR R SEF; Sets the resistance transformation ratio (see side
title “Fault Resistances”)
− Address 223: UE CONNECTION should be set to Load. resistor for this application.
The 20 Hz voltage is in this case picked up at the UE input, and the displacement
voltage for the 90-% stator earth fault protection (SEF) is calculated from the phase-
to-earth voltages. If the measured voltage (input UE is to be used for the 90-% SEF
as well, the address should be set to neutr. transf. or broken delta.
Address 5301 100% SEF-PROT. is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block
Fault Resistances The final setting values are determined in the primary test as described in Section 3.3.
Please note that the protection calculates the earth resistance from the secondary val-
ues USEF and ISEF which are present at the device terminals. The association between
this calculated value and the actual (primary) stator earth resistance is determined by
the transformation ratio of the earthing and the neutral transformer. For the overall
transformation, the following formula applies:
1 ü MinCT
R Esec = ------------------- ⋅ -------------------- ⋅ R Eprim
2
ü Transf ü Divider
Meaning:
REsec Earth resistance, converted for the device side
REprim Primary earth resistance of the stator winding (= fault resistance)
üTransf Transformation ratio of the earthing or neutral transformer
Earthing transformer (leg transformation divided by 3):
U Nprim U Nprim
------------------ ------------------
1 3 1 3
ü Transf = ü EarthTransf = --- ⋅ ------------------- = --- ⋅ -------------------
3 U Nsec 3 500V
---------------- --------------
3 3
Neutral transformer:
U Nprim
------------------
3
ü Transf = ü NeutralTransf = -------------------
U Nsec
üMinCT Transformation ratio of the miniature CT

üDivider Transformation ratio of the voltage divider
7UM62 Manual 197

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The conversion factor of the earth resistance is set as FACTOR R SEF at address
0275 in Power System Data 1. The general formula for calculation (REprim / REsec) is:
2 ü Divider
FACTOR R SEF = ü Transf ⋅ --------------------
ü MinCT
This formula is true only for nearly ideal earthing or neutral transformers. If necessary,
the measuring result from the primary tests must be set as FACTOR R SEF. For this
the fed fault resistance (trip stage) is put into relation with the secondary fault resis-
tance.
The primary fault resistance should be set to 1 to 2 kΩ for the trip stage and to approx.
3 to 8 kΩ for the alarm stage. The default times have proven to be good values.
Example:
10kV
-------------- ⁄ 500V
Earthing transformer üTransf --------------
3 3
Loading resistor RL 10 Ω
(10 A continuously, 50 A for 20 s)
Miniature CT üMinCT 200 A / 5 A
The transformation ratio of the miniature CT 400 A:5 A has been reduced to 200 A:5 A
by the primary conductor passing twice through the transformer window.
This yields for FACTOR R SEF a value of:
2
æ 10
------------------------ ⋅ ----------------ö
000 V 3
è 3 500 V ø 500 ⁄ 200
FACTOR R SEF = ----------------------------------------------------- ⋅ ------------------------ = 8.33
9 200 ⁄ 5
If for the trip stage R<< a generator-side fault resistance of 1000 Ω is chosen, a resis-
tance of R<< SEF TRIP = 1000 Ω/8.33 = 120 Ω is set at address 5303. For the warn-
ing stage, a primary resistance of 3 kΩ yields a setting value of R< SEF ALARM = 360
Ω.
Earth Current Stage The earth current stage has a backup protection function. It is set to a protected zone
of approx. 80 %. Referenced to the maximum secondary fault current, the pickup
threshold is at approx. 20 %, and the setting value is calculated as follows:
U Nsec 1 500 V 5 A
SEF100 I>> = 0.2 ⋅ ---------------- ⋅ ------------------- = 0.2 ⋅ ---------------- ⋅ ---------------- = 0.25 A
RL ü MinCT 10 Ω 200 A
The delay time T SEF TRIP (address 5305), which is also relevant for the earth cur-
rent stage, must be less than the 50 A capability time of the loading resistor (in this
example 50 A for 20 s). The overload capability of the earthing or neutral transformer
must also be considered if it lies below that of the loading resistor.
Monitoring At the addresses 5307, 5308 the monitoring thresholds are set with U20 MIN and
I20 MIN. If the 20 Hz voltage drops below the pickup value without the 20 Hz current
rising, there must be a problem of the 20 Hz connection. The default settings will be
adequate for most applications. Where the loading resistor is less than 1 Ω, the volt-
age threshold U20 MIN must be reduced to 0.5 V. The current threshold I20 MIN
can be left at 10 mA.
198 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Correction Angle, The parameter PHI I SEF (default setting 0°) of address 5309 is used to compen-
Contact Resistance sate the angle error of the CTs and angle distortions caused by a less than ideal earth-
ing or neutral transformer. The correct setting for this parameter can only be deter-
mined with a primary test. The adjustment should be made for the tripping value.
The same is true for the transfer resistance of the earthing or neutral transformer. This
advanced parameter can be set with the DIGSI communication software (not possible
in local operation). As this resistance is normally negligible, a default setting SEF Rps
= 0 Ω has been chosen for address 5310A. However, the transfer resistance of the
voltage transformer is no longer negligible if the 20 Hz voltage is fed to a primary-side
loading resistor via a voltage transformer.
In large power units with generator circuit breaker, applications can be found where
there is some additional loading equipment on the low-voltage side of the unit trans-
former to reduce the influence by the zero voltage when the generator circuit breaker
is open. The 20 Hz source is connected via the neutral transformer in the generator
starpoint. With the generator circuit breaker closed, the protection measures the load-
ing resistance on the unit transformer side, which can be mistaken for an earth resis-
tance. The advanced parameter address 5311A allows to set this additional loading
resistance. The default setting for Rl-PARALLEL is ∞. No additional loading resis-
tance is assumed.
2.29.2.1 Settings of the 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection

5301 100% SEF-PROT. OFF OFF 100% Stator-Earth-Fault Protec-
ON tion
mands
5302 R< SEF ALARM 20..700 Ohm 100 Ohm Pickup Value of Alarm Stage
Rsef<
5303 R<< SEF TRIP 20..700 Ohm 20 Ohm Pickup Value of Tripping Stage
Rsef<<
5304 T SEF ALARM 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec Time Delay of Alarm Stage
Rsef<
5305 T SEF TRIP 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Time Delay of Tripping Stage
Rsef<<
5306 SEF I>> 0.02..1.50 A 0.40 A Pickup Value of I SEF>> Stage
5307 U20 MIN 0.3..15.0 V 1.0 V Supervision Threshold of 20Hz

Voltage
5308 I20 MIN 5..40 mA 10 mA Supervision Threshold of 20Hz

Current
5309 PHI I SEF -60..60 ° 0° Correction Angle for I SEF 100%
5310A SEF Rps 0.0..700.0 Ohm 0.0 Ohm Resistance Rps
5311A Rl-PARALLEL 20..700 Ohm; ∞ ∞ Ohm Parallel Load Resistance
7UM62 Manual 199

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.29.2.2 Information for the 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection

05473 >SEF100 BLOCK >BLOCK Stator earth fault protection
05476 >U20 failure >Failure 20Hz bias voltage (S/E/F)
05481 SEF100 OFF S/E/F 100% protection is switched OFF
05482 SEF100 BLOCKED Stator earth flt. prot. 100% is BLOCKED
05483 SEF100 ACTIVE Stator earth flt. prot. 100% is ACTIVE
05486 Failure SEF Failure stator earth flt. prot. 100%
05487 SEF100 Alarm Stator earth flt. prot.100% Alarm stage
05488 SEF100 PICKUP Stator earth flt. prot.100%: picked up
05489 SEF100 TRIP Stator earth flt. prot.100%: TRIP
200 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R)
2.30 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R)
General Rotor earth fault protection is used to detect earth faults in the excitation circuit of
synchronous machines. One earth fault in the rotor winding does not cause immediate
damage; however, if a second earth fault occurs, then this represents a winding short-
circuit of the excitation circuit. Magnetic unbalances can occur resulting in extreme
mechanical forces which can lead to the destruction of the machine.
Measuring Proce- The rotor earth fault protection in the 7UM62 uses an external auxiliary voltage of ap-
dure proximately 36 to 45 V AC, which can be taken from the voltage transformers via a
coupling unit 7XR6100-0*A00. This voltage is symmetrically coupled to the excitation
circuit via the capacitors of the coupling unit and simultaneously connected to the
measurement input of the 7UM62. The capacitors CK of the 7XR6100 coupling unit are
protected by series resistors Rseries and - in case high harmonics content is expected
in the excitation circuit (e.g. excitation by thyristor circuits) - by an additional filter
choke (for a connection example with terminal assignment see Figure A-31 in Appen-
dix A.4).
The auxiliary AC voltage drives a small charging current through the coupling unit,
brush resistance and capacitance to earth of the excitation circuit. This current IRE
amounts to only a few mA during normal operation and is measured by the device
(Figure 2-95).
CE RE
Rseries Rseries 3PP13
CK CK
Rseries Rseries
Rotor earth 7UM62
fault protec-
tion
IRE IEE1 7XR61
URE UE
Figure 2-95 Determination of the Rotor Earth Resistance RE

(7XR61 – series device for the rotor short circuit to earth protection;
3PP13 – from UPU > 150 V, resistors in the 7XR61 must be shorted!)
7UM62 Manual 201

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The rotor earth fault calculation calculates the complex earth impedance from the aux-
iliary AC voltage URE and the current IRE. The earth resistance RE of the excitation
circuit is then calculated from the earth impedance. The device also considers the cou-
pling capacitance of the coupling unit CK, the series (e.g. brush) resistance Rseries and
the capacitance to the earth excitation circuit CE. This method ensures that even rel-
atively high-ohmic earth faults (up to 30 kΩ under ideal conditions) can be detected.
In order to eliminate the influence of harmonics - such as occur in static excitation
equipment (thyristors or rotating rectifiers) - the measured quantities are filtered prior
to their evaluation.
The earth resistance supervision has two stages. Usually an alarm is initiated if the
earth resistance falls below an initial high-resistance stage (e.g. 5 kΩ to 10 kΩ). If the
value falls below the second low-resistance stage (e.g. 2 kΩ to 5 kΩ), tripping will be
initiated after a short time delay. The dropout threshold is defined for both stages as
125 % of the set value.
Note: The rotor earth fault protection uses for the detection of the voltage URE the UE
voltage input of the device. Therefore, the displacement voltage U0 for the 90–% stator
earth fault protection (see Section 2.26) is in that case calculated from the phase-to-
earth voltages.
Measuring Circuit Since a current flows even during healthy operation, namely the capacitive charging
Supervision current of CE, the protection can recognize and alarm an interruption in the measure-
ment circuit, provided the capacitance to earth is at least 0.15 µF.
Stabilization of the If the measuring current IRE exceed an internal predetermined value (100 mA), a low-
Resistance Mea- ohmic earth fault (RE ≈ 0) is detected regardless of the calculated resistance. If this
surement current drops below the internal predetermined value of 0.3 mA, RE → ∞ is detected
regardless of the calculated resistance.
Figure 2-96 shows the logic diagram of the rotor earth fault protection.
6008 I RE<
FNr. 05400
&
10.00s
Failure R/E/F
Tripping
6002 RE< WARN 6004 T-WARN-RE< matrix
FNr. 05397
R/E/F warning
IRE
URE & FNr. 05398
RE R/E/F picked up
6003 RE<< TRIP 6005 T-TRIP-RE<<
TMin
20V/25V (fixed) FNr. 05399 TRIP CMD
FNr.05394 R/E/F TRIP
R/E/F U< block
OR
FNr. 05383 FNr. 05392
>BLOCK R/E/F R/E/F BLOCKED
Figure 2-96 Logic Diagram of the Rotor Earth Fault Protection
202 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
General The rotor earth fault protection is only effective and accessible if it has been set during
the configuration of the protective functions at address 0160 ROTOR E/F = Enabled.
Set Disabled if the function is not required. Address 6001 ROTOR E/F is used to
switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only the trip command (Block relay for
trip commands).
Also, configuration parameter 0223 UE CONNECTION must be set to
UE connected to Rotor. If it is not, a voltage URE = 0 is displayed and evaluated,
so that the protection remains blocked.
Pick-Up Values Since the protection calculates the ohmic rotor-earth resistance from the values
caused by the applied bias voltage, the thresholds for the warning stage
(6002 RE< WARN) and for the trip stage (6003 RE<< TRIP) can be set directly as
resistance values. The default settings are sufficient for the majority of cases. These
values can be changed depending on the insulation resistance and the coolant. Care
must be taken to allow a sufficient margin between the setting value and the actual
insulation resistance.
Delays The time delay for the warning stage 6004 T-WARN-RE< is usually set to
approximately 10 s, and the delay for the trip stage 6005 T-TRIP-RE<< to
approximately 0.5 s. The set times are additional time delays not including the
operating times (measuring time, drop-out time) of the protective function.
Data for the The setting of the coupling reactance 6006 X COUPLING and the series resistance
Coupling to the 6007 R SERIES enable the protection to calculate the earth resistance RE from the
Rotor Circuit complex equivalent diagram of the coupling capacitance of the coupling unit, the
series (e.g. measuring brush) resistance, the capacitance to earth of the excitation
circuit, and the earth resistance of the excitation circuit; please refer to Figure 2-95.
The equivalent circuit according to Figure 2-97 applies.
IRE XCOUPLING RV = Rseries + Rpre + Rz
∼ URE CE
RE
where
URE Bias voltage of the rotor circuit
IRE Earth current
XCOUPLING Total series reactance of the coupling circuit, consisting of coupling
capacitance and inductance (if applicable)
Rv Total resistance of the coupling circuit, consisting of brush resistance,
protection resistance (if applicable) and damping resistance (if applicable)
CE Rotor earth capacitance
RE Rotor earth resistance
Figure 2-97 Equivalent Measuring Circuit for Rotor Earth Fault Protection
7UM62 Manual 203

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The series resistors Rpre for the protection of the coupling capacitors can be
considered with the total series resistance (address 6007) since the brush resistance
and the series resistance are connected in series in the measurement circuit. The
resultant resistance applies for R SERIES, i.e. the parallel connection in each case of
the series resistors Rpre and for the resistance of the two brushes. Similarly, the
coupling reactance is calculated from the parallel connection of the two coupling
capacitors CK.
In some cases, the inductor integrated in the 7XR6100 is included in the coupling
circuit to reduce very high harmonics content of the excitation voltage. This forms,
together with the coupling capacitance, a band pass for the system frequency. In
these cases, it must be considered that the reactance must not become less than
–100 Ω (lower threshold of setting 6006 X COUPLING).
Angle Error Coupling reactance and series resistance can be measured by the protection itself
Correction during commissioning (see Section 3.3.7). It may be advantageous to compensate for
the angle error of the input CTs of the relay in order to increase accuracy. This can be
done at address 6009 PHI I RE. Thus, if the warning stage in particular does not
pick up during testing at the expected insulation resistance level, you should check
and correct the correction angle and the coupling reactance (see also Section 3.3.7).
The values calculated and displayed by the relay may become negative due to CT
angle errors, wrong settings of the coupling impedance or malfunctions of the
excitation equipment. In that case, a check is performed whether the current IRE > is
more than 7 mA, in which case a tripping decision is made. If the current is < 7 mA,
the measurement is marked as invalid, and the rotor earth resistance RRotor ∞ is
displayed. This additional consistency check ensures that even if the setting of the
correction angle or the coupling impedance is wrong, tripping in case of low-resistance
earth faults is ensured although the warning stage may not pick up correctly.
Measuring Circuit If a sufficiently high rotor capacitance (CE ≥ 0.15 µF) is available, an interruption in the
Monitoring measurement circuit can also be recognized. A measurement circuit interruption is
assumed when the voltage drops below the threshold set at address 6008 I RE<,
and the voltage UV is at the same time above 25 V. The alarm is reset when the current
is 0.5 mA or 20 % above the setting value, or when the voltage falls below 20 V. If
I RE< is set to 0.0 mA, there is no current monitoring and no alarm.
2.30.2.1 Settings of the Rotor Earth Fault Protection

6001 ROTOR E/F OFF OFF Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R,
ON fn)
mands
6002 RE< WARN 3.0..30.0 kOhm 10.0 kOhm Pickup Value of Warning Stage
Re<
6003 RE<< TRIP 1.0..5.0 kOhm 2.0 kOhm Pickup Value of Tripping Stage
Re<<
6004 T-WARN-RE< 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec Time Delay of Warning Stage
Re<
6005 T-TRIP-RE<< 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Time Delay of Tripping Stage
Re<<
204 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

6006 X COUPLING -100..800 Ohm 398 Ohm Coupling Reactance
6007 R SERIES 0..999 Ohm 50 Ohm Series Resistance (e.g. Meas.

Brushes)
6008 I RE< 1.0..50.0 mA; 0 2.0 mA Pickup Value of Failure Detec-

tion Ire<
6009 PHI I RE -15.0..15.0 ° 0.0 ° Correction Angle for Ire
2.30.2.2 Information for the Rotor Earth Fault Protection

05383 >BLOCK R/E/F >BLOCK rotor earth fault prot. (R,fn)
05391 R/E/F OFF Rotor earth fault prot. (R,fn) swit. OFF
05392 R/E/F BLOCKED Rotor earth fault prot. (R,fn) BLOCKED
05393 R/E/F AKTIVE Rotor earth fault prot. (R,fn) is ACTIVE
05394 R/E/F U< block Rot. earth flt. prot. (R,fn) block by U<
05397 R/E/F warning Rot. earth flt.prot. (R,fn) Re< warning
05400 Failure R/E/F Failure rotor earth fault prot. (R,fn)
05398 R/E/F picked up Rot. earth flt.prot. (R,fn) Re<< pick.up
05399 R/E/F TRIP Rotor earth fault prot. (R,fn) Re<< TRIP
7UM62 Manual 205

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.31 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave

Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R - 1 to 3 Hz)
General The rotor earth fault protection has the task to detect high- or low-resistance earth
faults in the excitation circuit of synchronous generators. Although an earth fault in the
excitation winding does not cause immediate damage, a second earth fault will lead
to a turn-to-turn fault in the excitation winding. The resulting magnetic unbalances can
develop extreme mechanical forces, which may destroy the machine.
The protection function described here differs from the function described in Section
2.30 in that it is far more sensitive; it is used for large generators.
Basic Principle As Figure 2-98 shows, the rotor earth fault protection works with a direct voltage of ap-
prox. 50 V, the polarity of which is reversed between 1 and 4 times per second, de-
pending on the setting. This voltage Ug injected into the rotor circuit is generated in the
7XT71 controller unit. The voltage passes through a resistor unit 7XR6004 (or
7XR6003) and is symmetrically coupled to the excitation circuit via high-resistance re-
sistors, and at the same time connected to the earthing brush (potential to earth) via
a low-resistance measuring shunt RM (see also Appendix, Figure A-36). The voltage
picked up at the measuring shunt and the control voltage are fed into the protection
device via measuring transducers. The control voltage is proportional to the injected
50 V voltage Ug in terms of amplitude and frequency. The earth current flowing in the
rotor is modeled by the measurement voltage.
Every time the polarity of the direct voltage Ug is reversed, a charging current Ig is driv-
en across the resistor unit into the rotor-earth capacitors of the excitation circuit. This
current causes a proportional voltage drop UMeas. Once the rotor earth capacitors are
charged, the charging current drops to zero. In the presence of a rotor earth fault, a
continuous earth current flows whose intensity is determined by the fault resistance.
The use of a low-frequency square-wave voltage as displacement voltage eliminates
the influence of the rotor-earth capacitors and ensures at the same time a sufficient
margin against interference signals from the interference frequencies of the excitation
system.
206 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R - 1 to 3 Hz)
7XR6003
or
7XR6004 7XT71 7UM62x
fg : 0.5 Hz to 4.0 Hz
RS lg (t) Galvanic
isolation
40 kΩ
Ug (t) UControl/Ug
UControl (MU1)
+/-50 V = 1/6
RS
UMeas/lg
CE/2 40 kΩ UMeas (MU2)
CE/2 = 375 Ω
Fault resistance
lg (t)
CE: Rotor-earth capacitance Ug: Square-wave voltage from 7XT71

RS : Series resistor Ig: Current flow from 7XT71 via rotor to earth
fg: Square-wave frequency of the 7XT71
Figure 2-98 Connection Scheme of Voltage Injection into the Rotor Winding
Measuring From the control voltage UControl, the function determines the timing for the polarity re-
Procedure versals and triggers the measurement. At the same time it calculates the voltage am-
plitude and converts it to the voltage Ug. The actual fault resistance is determined from
the voltage UMeas, which is proportional to the current Ig. Every time the polarity of the
control voltage is reversed, the DC component of the measurement voltage is deter-
mined by means of a mean value filter. The frequency of the series device must be set
low enough to ensure that during the mean-value generation the rotor-earth capacitors
are charged, so that only the steady-state portion is evaluated. This allows to detect
high-resistance faults (max. approx. 80 kΩ) without being influenced by the earth ca-
pacitance.
However, the measurement is falsified by two sources of interference. One of them is
a DC voltage component in the measurement circuit which depends on the intensity
of the excitation voltage and on the location of the earth fault in the excitation winding,
and the other are considerable high-frequency voltage peaks that may superimpose
the DC excitation voltage. These peaks are damped by a numerical filter.
To eliminate the interference from the superimposed DC voltage component, the po-
larity of the voltage Ug is reversed (square-wave voltage). The measurement voltage
calculation described above is performed for both polarities. On formation of the dif-
ference between two subsequent measurement results for Ig, namely Ig1 and Ig2 (see
Figure 2-99), the DC component originating from the excitation circuit (Ioffset) is elimi-
nated, whereas the DC components originating from the injected voltage Ug accumu-
late.
With the measured quantity thus obtained, and the calculated amount of the displace-
ment voltage Ug, the earth resistance can be calculated, taking into account the series
resistors Rs (see Figure 2-99).
7UM62 Manual 207

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
ug (t)
Ug
50 V
2 ⋅ Ug
Displacement voltage Ug
t
50 V
u Meas (t) ig (t)
5 mA RE ∞
Ig1 = Ig2 = 0
5 mA t
u Meas (t) ig (t)

RE = 5 k Ω
2 ⋅ Ug Rs
2 ⋅ Ig = + RE , with R M << Rs
2 ⋅ Ig 2
Ig2
Ig2 - Ig1 = 2 ⋅ Ig
Ig1 Ioffset
Ioffset = Interference
t
Figure 2-99 Curves of the Displacement Voltage Ug, the Shunt Voltage UMeas and the Measurement Current Ig
Monitoring On each polarity reversal, the charging current of the rotor earth capacitor is deter-
Functions mined. A drop of this current allows to detect defects in the measurement circuit such
as wire breaks, poor brush contact etc. This is only possible, however, if the rotor-earth
capacitance is high enough (> 0.15 µF) and the interference from the excitation sys-
tem is low.
As an alternative, the protection function offers an external test option using a test re-
sistor (included in the 7XR6004 and 7XR6003). The test mode is activated via a binary
input, and the fault resistor is connected to a slip ring with an external relay. The pro-
tection function must be informed of the pertinent test resistance. The protection func-
tion issues appropriate indications showing the test results. It is also able to detect
one-sided interruptions (such as wire breaks or loose terminals in a coupling (see Fig-
ure 2-98)).
The evaluation logic is shown in Figure 2-100.
208 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Test mode
100 kΩ
20 kΩ
(Series resistor = RS /2)
6107 TEST RESISTOR
+
0.7 X
X
1.3 X
X
5411
& 2 Cir. open
RE>
&
5410
RE< & 1 Cir. open
&
&
RE>
5408
RE< & Test REF PASSED
5409
OR Test REF Fail.
&
&
RE RE>
Figure 2-100 Logic Diagram of the Rotor Earth Fault Protection in Test Mode
In addition, the control voltage is monitored. If the control voltage is found to be miss-
ing or too low, a failure of the control unit is assumed (see also logic diagram in Figure
2-100).
Logic Figure 2-100 shows the logic diagram.

It comprises the following elements:
− Monitoring of the control unit 7XT71
− Supervision of the measurement circuit
− Two-stage protection function
− Effects of the rotor earth fault protection test
If the earth resistance drops below the high-resistance stage RE<, a warning message
will normally be issued. If it drops below the second, low-resistance stage RE<<, a trip
signal is issued after a short time.
7UM62 Manual 209

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
10 V
4-20 mA
"1" 20 mA
295 TRANSDUCER 1
10 V &
4-20 mA
"1" 20 mA
296 TRANSDUCER 2
Edge
detector
5401
T Edge OR Fail REF 1-3Hz
& 5s
6106 Qc <
òdt T Interference 5395
Qc & 10 s REF 1-3Hz open
6102 RE< WARN
6104 T-WARN-RE<
5403
REF 1-3Hz Warn
UMeas(~Ig)
UControl(~Ug) &
RE & 6103 RE<< TRIP
5407
Tripping
6105 T-TRIP-RE<< REF 1-3Hz Trip
matrix
5406 Tmin TRIP

REF 1-3Hz Fault CMD
& Test mode

&
5381 5388
>REF 1-3Hz BLK REF 1-3Hz BLK
5386
>Test REF 1-3Hz
Figure 2-101 Logic Diagram of the Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection
210 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
General The sensitive rotor earth fault protection is only effective and accessible if it has been
set to Enabled at address 0161 REF 1-3Hz during the configuration of the protection
functions.
It must also be ensured that the measuring transducer inputs TD1 and TD2 are not
used for any other function.
Address 6101 REF 1-3Hz is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only
the trip command (Block relay).
Pickup Values Since the protection calculates the ohmic rotor-earth resistance from the values sup-
plied by the injected voltage, the series resistance and the flowing earth current, the
thresholds for the warning stage 6102 RE< WARN) and for the trip stage (6103 RE<<
TRIP) can be set directly as resistance values. The default settings (RE< WARN = 40
kΩ and RE<< TRIP = 5 kΩ) are sufficient for the majority of cases. These values can
be changed depending on the insulation resistance and the coolant. Care must be tak-
en to allow a sufficient margin between the setting value and the actual insulation re-
sistance.
As interference from the excitation system cannot be excluded, the setting for the
warning stage is not finally determined until the primary tests.
Time Delays The time delay for the warning stage (6102 T-WARN-RE<) is usually set to approxi-
mately 10 s, and the delay for the trip stage (6103 T-TRIP-RE<<) to approximately
1 s. The set times are additional time delays not including the operating times (mea-
suring time, drop-out time) of the protection function.
Monitoring The setting value of the measuring circuit monitoring (6106 Qc <) is defined during
Functions the primary tests. For this purpose, the operational measured value (Qc) is read out,
and half of the value is set. If the charge measured is too low, the monitoring cannot
be effective. The parameter Qc < should in that case be set to 0 mAs. No fault indi-
cation will be issued.
No settings are required if you want to perform the external test using the test resistor
included in the 7XR6004 (3.3 kΩ). If a different resistor is to be used, its resistance
must be set in the advanced parameter TEST RESISTOR (can only be changed with
the DIGSI communication software) at address 6107A.
7UM62 Manual 211

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.31.2.1 Settings of the Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection

6101 REF 1-3Hz OFF OFF Rotor Earth Fault Protection (1-
ON 3Hz)
mands
6102 RE< WARN 5.0..80.0 kOhm 40.0 kOhm Pickup Value of Warning Stage
Re<
6103 RE<< TRIP 1.0..10.0 kOhm 5.0 kOhm Pickup Value of Tripping Stage
Re<<
6104 T-WARN-RE< 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec Time Delay of Warning Stage
Re<
6105 T-TRIP-RE<< 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Time Delay of Tripping Stage
Re<<
6106 Qc < 0.00..1.00 mAs 0.02 mAs Pickup Value of open Rotor Cir-
cuit (Qc)
6107A TEST RESISTOR 1.0..10.0 kOhm 3.3 kOhm Testing Resistor
2.31.2.2 Information for the Sensitive Earth Fault Protection

05381 >REF 1-3Hz BLK >BLOCK rotor earth fault prot. (1-3Hz)
05386 >Test REF 1-3Hz >Test rotor earth fault prot. (1-3Hz)
05387 REF 1-3Hz OFF REF protection (1-3Hz) is switched OFF
05388 REF 1-3Hz BLK REF protection (1-3Hz) is BLOCKED
05389 REF 1-3Hz ACT REF protection (1-3Hz) is ACTIVE
05395 REF 1-3Hz open REF protection (1-3Hz) open circuit

05401 Fail REF 1-3Hz Failure REF protection (1-3Hz)
05403 REF 1-3Hz Warn REF prot. (1-3Hz): warning stage (Re<)
05406 REF 1-3Hz Fault REF prot. (1-3Hz) Re<< picked up
05407 REF 1-3Hz Trip REF prot. (1-3Hz) Re<< TRIP
05408 Test REF PASSED REF prot. (1-3Hz) test passed
05409 Test REF Fail. REF prot. (1-3Hz) test NOT passed
05410 1 Cir. open REF (1-3Hz) 1 Measuring circuit open
05411 2 Cir. open REF (1-3Hz) 2 Measuring circuits open
212 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48)
2.32 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48)
General When the 7UM62 relay is used to protect a motor, the starting time monitoring feature
supplements the overload protection described in Section 2.9 by protecting the motor
against the potential damage that might result from frequent starting or extended
starting durations. In particular, rotor-critical high-voltage motors can quickly be
heated above their thermal limits when multiple starting attempts occur in a short
period of time. If the durations of these starting attempts are lengthened by excessive
voltage surges during motor starting, by excessive load moments, or by locked rotor
conditions a tripping signal will be initiated by the device.
The motor starting time monitoring is initiated by the motor starting recognition setting
entered at address 6505 I MOTOR START. This current releases the calculation of
the tripping characteristic.
One characteristic is definite time while the other one is inverse time.
Inverse Time- The inverse time-overcurrent characteristic is designed to operate only when the rotor
Overcurrent is not blocked. The inverse time characteristic allows motor starting time monitoring to
Tripping adjust for those situations where high starting voltages result in decreased starting
Characteristic currents. The tripping time is calculated based on the following formula:
I StartCurrent 2
t TRIP = æ --------------------------------ö ⋅ tStartmax where I > IMotor Start
è I ø
where tTRIP – Actual tripping time for flowing current I
tStartmax – Tripping time for nominal start-up current IA (set at address 6503,
STARTING TIME)
I – Current actually flowing (measured value)
IStartCurr. – Nominal starting current of the motor (set at address 6502,
START. CURRENT)
IMotorStart – Pickup value for recognition of motor starting (set at address
6505, I MOTOR START)
tTRIP
[s]
tStartmax
IMotorStart IStartCurr.
I
Figure 2-102 Inverse Time Characteristic Tripping Curve for Motor Starting Current
7UM62 Manual 213

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Therefore, if the starting current I actually measured is smaller (or larger) than the
nominal starting current IA entered at address START. CURRENT), the actual tripping
time ttrip is lengthened (or shortened) accordingly (see also Figure 2-102).
Definite-Time During motor starting, the definite time characteristic is designed to initiate a trip if the
Overcurrent motor starting time exceeds the maximum allowable blocked rotor time tE. The device
Tripping can detect a locked rotor condition via a binary input (”>Rotor locked”) from an
Characteristic external rpm-counter. If the current in any of the phases exceeds the motor starting
(Locked Rotor recognition setting entered at address I MOTOR START, and if a locked rotor condition
Time) is detected via a binary input, a motor starting condition is assumed, and time delayed
tripping via the definite time characteristic will be initiated (based on the maximum
allowable locked rotor time). It should be noted that this happens every time the motor
is started and is a normal operating condition that is neither entered in the operational
annunciations buffer, nor output to the control center, nor causes the creation of a fault
record.
The locked rotor delay time (LOCK ROTOR TIME) is ANDed with the binary
input”>Rotor locked”. If the binary input is still high after the locked rotor time has
elapsed, tripping is performed immediately, regardless of whether the binary input was
activated before or during the delay, or after the delay had elapsed.
Logic The motor starting time supervision may be switched on or off by parameters. In
addition, motor starting protection may be blocked via a binary input, at which time
pickup messages and time delays will be reset. Figure 2-103 illustrates the logic for
motor starting protection. A pickup does not create a fault record. Fault recording is
not started until a trip command has been issued.
Fault condition
FNo. 06821
6505 I MOTOR START
FNo. 06823 START-SUP TRIP
IL1 OR START-SUP PU
6502 START. CURRENT
6503 STARTING TIME
Tripping
OR OR matrix
6504 LOCK ROTOR TIME R

FNo. 06822
T 0 OR & S Q Rotor locked
L1 TMin
TRIP CMD
FNo. 06805
>Rotor locked
FNo. 06801 FNo. 06812
>BLK START-SUP START-SUP BLK
Figure 2-103 Logic Diagram of the Motor Starting Time Supervision
214 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48)
General The motor starting time supervision is only effective and accessible if address 0165
STARTUP MOTOR has been set to Enabled during the configuration of the protective
functions. Set Disabled if the function is not required. Address 6501 STARTUP
MOTOR is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only the trip command
(Block Relay).
Pickup Values The device is informed of the startup current values under normal conditions at
address 6502 START. CURRENT, and of the startup time at address 6503 STARTING
TIME. This ensures timely tripping if the value of I2 t calculated by the relay is
exceeded.
If the starting time exceeds the permissible locked rotor time, the definite-time tripping
characteristic can be started by an external r.p.m. counter via a binary input (“>Rotor
locked”). A locked rotor leads to a loss of ventilation and therefore to a reduced
thermal load capacity of the machine. Therefore, the starting time supervision must
issue a trip command before the thermal characteristic for normal operation is
reached.
A current above the threshold I MOTOR START (address 6505) is interpreted as a
motor startup. Consequently, this value must be chosen such that it is reliably attained
by the actual starting current under any load or voltage conditions during motor
startup, but not during a permissible short-time overload.
Example: Motor with the following data:
Nominal voltage UN = 6600 V
Nominal current IMot.nom = 126 A
Startup current IStartCurr. = 624 A
Permissible continuous Imax = 135 A
stator current:
Starting time at IStartCurr. TStartmax = 8.5 s
CT ratio IN CT prim/IN CT sec 200 A/1 A
The setting for address START. CURRENT is calculated as follows:

Start-up current 624 A
IStartCurr, sec = ---------------------------------------------------- ⋅ IN CT sec = --------------- ⋅ I N CT sec = 3.12 A
Nominal CT current 200 A
For reduced voltage, the start-up current is also reduced almost linearly. At 80 %
nominal voltage, the start-up current in this example is reduced 0.8 ⋅ ISTARTUP =
2.5 ⋅ IN CT sec.
The threshold for detection of a motor startup must lie above the maximum load
current and below the minimum start-up current. If no other influencing factors are
present (peak loads), the value (I MOTOR START set at address 6505) may be a
median value:
135 A
Based on the long-term current rating: --------------- = 0.68 ⋅ I N CT sec
200 A
2.5 I N + 0.68 I N
I MotorStart = ----------------------------------------- ≈ 1.6 ⋅ IN CT sec = 1.6 A
2
The tripping time of the starting time monitoring is calculated as follows:
7UM62 Manual 215

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
I StartCurr. 2
T Trip = æ ----------------------ö ⋅ T Startmax
è I ø
Under nominal conditions, the tripping time is the maximum starting time TStartmax. For
ratios deviating from nominal conditions, the motor tripping time changes. At 80 % of
nominal voltage (which corresponds to 80% of nominal starting current), the tripping
time can be:
2
T Trip = æ ----------------------------ö ⋅ 8.5 s = 13.3 s
624 A
è 0.8 ⋅ 624 Aø
After the delay time LOCK ROTOR TIME has elapsed, the locked rotor binary input
becomes effective and initiates a tripping signal. If the locked rotor time is set just long
enough that during normal startup the binary input ”>Rotor locked” (FNo. 06805)
is reliably reset during the delay time LOCK ROTOR TIME, faster tripping will be
available during motor starting under locked rotor conditions.
2.32.2.1 Settings of the Motor Starting Time Supervision

6501 STARTUP MOTOR OFF OFF Motor Starting Time Supervision
ON
mands
6502 START. CURRENT 0.10..16.00 A 3.12 A Starting Current of Motor
6503 STARTING TIME 1.0..180.0 sec 8.5 sec Starting Time of Motor
6504 LOCK ROTOR 0.5..120.0 sec; ∞ 6.0 sec Permissible Locked Rotor Time
TIME
6505 I MOTOR START 0.60..10.00 A 1.60 A Current Pickup Value of Motor

Starting
2.32.2.2 Information for the Motor Starting Time Supervision

06801 >BLK START-SUP >BLOCK Motor Starting Supervision
06805 >Rotor locked >Rotor is locked
06811 START-SUP OFF Starting time supervision switched OFF
06812 START-SUP BLK Starting time supervision is BLOCKED
06813 START-SUP ACT Starting time supervision is ACTIVE
06822 Rotor locked Rotor is LOCKED after Locked Rotor Time
06823 START-SUP PU Starting time supervision picked up
06821 START-SUP TRIP Starting time supervision TRIP
216 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor)
2.33 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor)
General The rotor temperature of a motor generally remains well below its maximum allowable
temperature during normal operation and even during severe loading conditions.
However, during motor starting, the rotor can heat up quickly. If multiple starting
attempts are made in a short duration of time, the rotor could suffer thermal damage.
Therefore, the 7UM62 motor start blocking feature is available. A motor restart inhibit
signal is initiated when the relay projects rotor temperature exceeds the maximum
allowable temperature, and blocking continues until the calculated rotor temperature
decreases below the reset level. To block starting, the restart inhibit signal must be
masked to an output relay whose contact is inserted in the motor starting circuit.
Determining the Because the rotor current cannot be measured directly, the stator current must be
Rotor used to generate a thermal profile of the rotor. The r.m.s. values of the currents are
Overtemperature generated for this. The excessive rotor temperature ΘR is calculated using the highest
of the three phase currents. The thermal limit values for the rotor winding are based
on manufacturer’s data regarding the nominal starting current, maximum permissible
starting time, and the number of starts permitted from cold (ncold) and warm (nwarm)
conditions. From this data, the device performs the necessary calculations to establish
the thermal rotor profile and issues a blocking signal until the thermal rotor profile
decreases below the restarting limit.
ΘL Cool down at τ·kτ at running
Maximum permissible rotor temperature

Temperature curve:
Rotor cage bar Cool down at
upper side limit τ·kτ at stop
Rotor cage bar Threshold of restart
lower side limit inhibit (ΘReInhib)
Thermal
profile
1. 2. 3.
t
Startup Startup Startup
Rotor Rotor Rotor
Motor started Motor started temper. Motor started temper.
temper.
equilibr. equilibr. equilibr.
Current time time time
CB I >
t
Figure 2-104Temperature Curve at the Rotor and the Thermal Profile during Repeated Start-
Up Attempts
7UM62 Manual 217

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Although the heat distribution at the rotor cage bars can range widely during motor
starting, the different maximum temperatures in the rotor do not necessarily affect the
motor restart inhibit (see Figure 2-104). It is much more important to establish a
thermal profile, after a complete motor start, that is appropriate for the protection of the
motor’s thermal condition. Figure 2-104 shows, as an example, the heating processes
during repeated motor starts (three starts from cold operating condition), as well as the
thermal reproduction by the protective relay.
Restarting Limit If the rotor temperature has exceeded the restarting limit, the motor cannot be
restarted. When the rotor temperature goes below the restarting limit, that is, when
exactly one start becomes possible without exceeding the excessive rotor
temperature limit, the blocking signal is terminated. Therefore the restarting
temperatureΘRe.Inhib, related to the maximum permissible rotor overtemperature is
expressed as:
n cold – 1 ncold 2 3 4
Θ ReInhib [ % ] = --------------------- ⋅ 100 %
n cold ΘRe.Inhib 50 % 66.7 % 75 %
[%]
Restarting Times The motor manufacturer allows a maximum number of starting attempts under cold
(ncold) and warm (nwarm) conditions. Afterwards the motor cannot be restarted but
must be allowed some time — the restarting time — for the rotor to cool down. This
temperature behaviour is provided for in the protection as follows: After each motor
shutdown, a temperature equilibrium time (address 6604 T EQUAL) is started which
takes into account the different temperatures of different motor parts at the moment of
shutdown. During the rotor temperature equilibrium time, the thermal profile is not
updated but kept constant to model the equilibrium taking place in the rotor. After that,
the thermal profile cools down with a rotor time constant multiplied by extension
factor). During the equilibrium time the motor cannot be restarted. As soon as
temperature sinks below the restarting threshold, the next restart attempt can be
made.
The entire time that must elapse before motor starting can resume is equal to the
equilibrium time and the amount of time, calculated via the thermal model, that it takes
for the rotor temperature to decrease to the reset temperature level:
Θ pre ⋅ n cold
T ReInhib time = T Equilibrium + k τ ⋅ τ LR ⋅ ln -----------------------------
n cold – 1
where TEquilibrium – Rotor temperature equilibrium time address 6604

kτ – Extension factor for the time constant =
Kt at RUNNING address 6609 or Kt at STOP address 6608
τR – Rotor time constant, internally calculated:
τR = tStart ⋅ (ncold – nwarm) ⋅ Ιstart2 where tStart = Starting time in s
ΙStart = Starting current in pu
Θpre – Thermal profile at the moment of motor shutdown (depends on the
operating state)
The operational measured value TReInhib time (to be found in the overload measured
values) shows the time remaining until the next restart is permissible.
218 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Extending the In order to properly account for the reduced heat exchange when a self-ventilated
Cooling Time motor is stopped, the cooling time constants can be increased relative to the time
Constant constants for a running machine by the factor Kt at STOP (address 6608). A stopped
motor is defined by current below an adjustable current flow monitoring threshold
BkrClosed I MIN, assuming that the motor idle current is greater than this
threshold. The pickup threshold BkrClosed I MIN affects also the thermal overload
protection function (see Section 2.9).
While the motor is running, the heating of the thermal profile is modeled with the time
constantτL calculated from the motor ratings, and the cooldown calculated with the
time constant τL ⋅ Kt at RUNNING (address 6609). In this way, the protection caters
to the requirements in case of a slow cooldown (slow temperature equilibrium).
Minimum Inhibit Regardless of thermal profiles, some motor manufacturers require a minimum inhibit
Time time after the maximum number of permissible starting attempts has been exceeded.
The duration of the inhibit signal depends on which of the times, T MIN. INHIBIT
or TReInhib time, is longer.
Behaviour in Case Depending on the setting of parameter 0274A ATEX100, the value of the thermal
of a Power Supply profile is either reset on a failure of the power supply voltage, or cyclically buffered in
Failure a”non-volatile” memory until the power supply voltage returns. In the second case, the
thermal replica uses the last buffered value for calculation and matches it to the
operating conditions.
Emergency If, under emergency conditions, motor starting in excess of the maximum allowable
Starting rotor temperature must take place, the motor start blocking signal can be terminated
via a binary input (”>Emer. Start QR”), thus allowing a new starting attempt. The
thermal rotor profile continues to function, however, and the maximum allowable rotor
temperature will be exceeded. No motor shutdown will be initiated by the motor restart
inhibit, but the calculated excessive temperature of the rotor can be observed for risk
assessment.
Blocking If the motor start blocking function is blocked or switched off, the thermal profile of the
excessive rotor temperature and the equilibrium time T EQUAL as well as the
minimum inhibit time T MIN. INHIBIT are reset, and any existing motor start inhibit
signal is terminated.
Logic The thermal profile can also be reset via a binary input. This may be useful for testing
and commissioning, and after a power supply voltage failure.
Figure 2-105 shows the logic diagram for the restart inhibit function.
7UM62 Manual 219

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
I
IL2 L3
IL1
Imax 6609 Kt at RUNNING
kτat Running x τ
6602 IStart/IMOTnom
6608 Kt at STOP
6603 T START MAX
kτat Stop x τ 6606 MAX.WARM STARTS
6607 #COLD-#WARM
0281 BkrClosed I MIN 6604 T EQUAL

S Q ΘL(t) Calculator
T 0
I> R ΘL = 0
&
ΘL(t) > ΘRe.Inhib
OR
FNo. 04830
Re. Inhib.ALARM
FNo. 04828 6610 T MIN. INHIBIT

>RM th.rep. QR
S Q
T 0
R
&
OR
FNo. 04827
Re. Inhib. TRIP
OR &
FNo. 04823 & Tripping
>Emer. Start QR matrix
TMin
TRIP CMD
FNo. 04829
OR WES RS.th.Abb.
FNo. 04822 FNo. 04825
>BLK Re. Inhib. Re. Inhibit BLK
FNo. 04826
OR OR Re. Inhibit ACT
6601 RESTART INHIBIT
FNo. 04824
OFF
Re. Inhibit OFF
”1” ON
Block relay
Figure 2-105 Logic Diagram of the Restart Inhibit
General The motor start blocking function is only effective and accessible if address 0166
RESTART INHIBIT was set to Enabled during configuration of the protective
functions. Set Disabled if the function is not required. Address 6601
220 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
RESTART INHIBIT is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only the trip
Necessary The user communicates to the protective relay the characteristic motor values
Characteristic supplied by the manufacturer, which are necessary for calculation of the rotor
Values temperature. These values include the starting current IStart, the nominal motor current
IMot.nom, the maximum permissible startup time T START MAX (address 6603), the
number of permissible restart attempts under cold (ncold) and (nwarm) conditions.
The starting current is entered at address 6602, expressed as a multiple of the nom-
inal motor current (IStart/IMOTnom). For a correct interpretation of this parameter,
it is important that in Power System Data 1 the apparent power (address 252 SN GEN/
MOTOR) and the rated voltage (address 251 UN GEN/MOTOR) of the motor are cor-
rectly set. The number of warm starts allowed is entered at address 6606 (MAX.WARM
STARTS), and the difference between the number of allowable cold and warm starts
(#COLD-#WARM) is entered at address 6607.
For motors without separate ventilation, the reduced cooling at motor stop can be
accounted for by entering at address 6608 the reduced ventilation, expressed by the
factor Kt at STOP. As soon as the current no longer exceeds the current flow
monitoring setting entered at address 0281 BkrClosed I MIN, a motor standstill is
assumed and the time constant is increased by the set factor.
If no difference between the time constants is to be used (e.g. externally-ventilated
motors), then the factor should be set to Kt at STOP = 1.
The cooling with the motor running is influenced by the extension Kt at RUNNING. This
factor considers that motor running under load and a stopped motor do not cool down
at the same speed. It becomes effective as soon as the current exceeds the value set
at address 0281 BkrClosed I MIN. With Kt at RUNNING = 1 the heating and the
cooling time constant are the same at operating conditions (I > BkrClosed I MIN).
Setting Example: Motor with the following data:

Nominal voltage UN = 6600 V
Nominal current IMot.nom = 126 A
Starting current IStart = 624 A
Starting time at ISTART TSTART max = 8.5 s
Permissible number of startups with ncold = 3
cold motor
Permissible number of startups with nwarm = 2
warm motor
CT transformation ratio 200 A/1 A
The ratio between the starting current and the motor nominal current is:
624 A
I Start ⁄ I Mot.nom = --------------- = 4.95 ≈ 4.9
126 A
Settings IStart/IMOTnom = 4.9

T START MAX = 8.5 s
MAX.WARM STARTS =2
#COLD-#WARM =1
7UM62 Manual 221

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
For the rotor temperature equilibrium time, a setting of. T EQUAL = 1 min has proven
to be a good value. The value for the minimum inhibit time T MIN. INHIBIT depends
of the requirements made by the motor manufacturer, or by the system conditions. It
must in any case be higher than T EQUAL. In this example, a value has been chosen
that reflects the thermal profile (T MIN. INHIBIT = 6.0 min).
The motor manufacturer's, or system requirements determine also the extension
factor for the time constant during cooldown, especially with the motor stopped. Where
no other specifications are made, the following settings are recommended:
Kt at STOP = 5 and Kt at RUNNING = 2.
For a proper functioning, it is also important that the CT values for side 2 (addresses
0211 and 0212), the power system data (addresses 0251, 0252) and the threshold
current for distinction between stopped and running motor (address 0281
BkrClosed I MIN, recommended setting ≈ 0.1 ⋅ I/IN Motor) have been set correctly.
An overview of the parameters and their default settings is given in the tables at the
end of this section and in the Appendix.
Temperature For better understanding of the above considerations, two of the many possible
Behaviour during operating states will be discussed in the following paragraph. The examples use the
Changing settings indicated above. 3 cold and 2 warm startup attempts have resulted in a restart
Operating States limit of 66.7 %.
Figure 2-106 illustrates the temperature behaviour during 2 warm startup attempts.
The motor is always operated at nominal current. After the first shutdown, T EQUAL
takes effect.
30 s later the motor is restarted and immediately shut down again. After another
pause, the 2nd restart attempt is made. The motor is shut down once again. During
this 2nd startup attempt, the restarting limit is exceeded, so that after shutdown the
restart inhibit takes effect. After the temperature equilibrium time (1 min), the thermal
profile cools down with the time constant τL ⋅ Kt at STOP ≈ 5 ⋅ 204 s = 1020 s. The
restart inhibit is effective for about 7 min.
1st startup 2nd startup

p.u.
1.0
0.8
0.6 Inhibit time
0.4
Temperature in p.u.
Restarting limit
0.2
Motor current in I/IN
0
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 t/s
Figure 2-106 Temperature Behaviour during Two Successive Warm Starts
222 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
In Figure 2-107, the motor is also restarted twice in warm condition, but the pause
between the restart attempts is longer than in the first example. After the second
restart attempt, the motor is operated at 90 % nominal current. After the shutdown
following the first starting attempt, the thermal profile is “frozen”. After the temperature
equilibrium time (1 min) the rotor cools down with the time constant
τL ⋅ Kt at STOP ≈ 5 ⋅ 204 s = 1020 s. During the second restart, the starting current
causes a temperature rise, whereas the subsequently flowing on-load current of
0.9 ⋅ I/IN Motor reduces the temperature. This time, the time constant
τL ⋅ Kt at RUNNING = 2 ⋅ 204 s = 408 s is effective.
The fact that the restarting limit is exceeded for a short time does not mean a thermal
overload. It rather signals that a thermal overload of the rotor would arise if the motor
were shut down immediately and restarted.
p.u. 1st startup 2nd startup
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
Temperature in p.u.
0.2 Restarting limit

Motor current in I/IN
0
200 400 600 800 1000 t/s
Figure 2-107 Two Warm Restart Followed by Continuous Running
2.33.2.1 Settings of the Restart Inhibit for Motors

6601 RESTART INHIBIT OFF OFF Restart Inhibit for Motors
ON
mands
6602 IStart/IMOTnom 1.5..10.0 4.9 I Start / I Motor nominal
6603 T START MAX 3.0..320.0 sec 8.5 sec Maximum Permissible Starting
Time
6604 T EQUAL 0.0..320.0 min 1.0 min Temperature Equalization Time
6606 MAX.WARM 1..4 2 Permissible Number of Warm

STARTS Starts
6607 #COLD-#WARM 1..2 1 Number of Cold Starts - Warm

Starts
7UM62 Manual 223

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

6608 Kτ at STOP 1.0..100.0 5.0 Extension of Time Constant at
Stop
6609 Kτ at RUNNING 1.0..100.0 2.0 Extension of Time Constant at

Running
6610 T MIN. INHIBIT 0.2..120.0 min 6.0 min Minimum Restart Inhibit Time
2.33.2.2 Information for the Motor Restart Inhibit

04822 >BLK Re. Inhib. >BLOCK Restart inhibit motor
04828 >RM th.rep. ΘR >Reset thermal memory rotor
04823 >Emer. Start ΘR >Emergency start rotor
04824 Re. Inhibit OFF Restart inhibit motor is switched OFF
04825 Re. Inhibit BLK Restart inhibit motor is BLOCKED

04826 Re. Inhibit ACT Restart inhibit motor is ACTIVE
04829 RM th.rep. ΘR Reset thermal memory rotor
04827 Re. Inhib. TRIP Restart inhibit motor TRIP
04830 Re. Inhib.ALARM Alarm restart inhibit motor
224 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF)
2.34 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF)
General The breaker failure protection can be assigned to the current inputs of side 1 or side
2 during the configuration of the protective functions (see Section 2.2). The breaker
failure protection function monitors the reaction of a circuit breaker to a trip signal. In
machine protections, it is typically referred to the mains breaker. To determine if the
circuit breaker has properly opened in response to a trip signal, one of the following
methods is used to ascertain the status of the circuit breaker:
• Checking whether the current in all three phases drops below a set threshold
following a trip command,
• Evaluating the position of a circuit breaker auxiliary contact for protective functions,
with which the current criterion is perhaps not expressive, e.g. frequency protection,
voltage protection, rotor earth fault protection.
If the circuit breaker has not opened after a programmable time delay (breaker failure),
a higher-level circuit breaker can initiate the disconnection (refer to Figure 2-108 as an
example).
Breaker Failure Protection
B/F–Ttrip 0
B/F I> &
Protective TRIP
Elements B/F”
Figure 2-108 Functional Principle of the Breaker Failure Protection Function
Initiation The breaker failure protection function can be initiated by two different sources:
• Internal protective function of the 7UM62, e.g. trip commands of protective
functions or via CFC (internal logic functions),
• External trip signals via binary input.
Criteria The two pickup criteria (current criterion, circuit breaker auxiliary contact) are OR
logics. In case of a tripping without short circuit current, e.g. by the voltage protection
in case of light load, the current is no safe criterion of the circuit breaker response. For
this reason, the pickup is also possible by means of the auxiliary contact criterion.
7UM62 Manual 225

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The current criterion is fulfilled if at least one of the three phase currents exceeds a
parameterized threshold value (CIRC. BR. I>). The dropout is performed if all three
phase currents fall below 95 % of the pickup threshold value.
If the binary input of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact is inactive, only the current
criterion is effective and the breaker failure protection cannot become active with a
tripping signal if the current is below the CIRC. BR. I> threshold.
Two-Channel To protect against nuisance tripping due to excessive contact bounce, a stabilization
Feature of the binary inputs for external trip signals takes place. This external signal must be
present during the entire period of the delay time. Otherwise, the timer is reset and no
tripping signal is issued. A redundant binary input “>ext.start2 B/F” is linked to further
enhance the security against unwanted operation. This means that no initiation is
possible unless both binary inputs are activated. The two-channel feature is also
effective for an”internal” initiation.
Logic If the breaker failure protection has picked up, a corresponding message is
transmitted and a parameterized time delay starts. If the pickup criteria are still fulfilled
on expiration of this time, a redundant source evaluation before fault clearing is
initiated via a further AND link by means of a superior circuit breaker.
A pickup drops off and no trip command is produced by the breaker failure protection if
− an internal start condition (Output relay BO12 or via CFC) or “>ext.start1 B/F”
or “>ext.start2 B/F” causing the pickup drop off.
− a tripping signal of the protective functions still exists, whereas the current criterion
and the auxiliary contact criterion drop out.
Figure 2-109 illustrates the logic diagram of the breaker failure protection. The overall
breaker failure protection can be switched on or off via parameters and also blocked
dynamically via binary inputs.
226 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Device-internal protective functions

I>TRIP
HW model
of relays
U>>TRIP Masking BO 12 binary output (Relay R12), potential-free
f<TRIP
FNo. 01442 (via CFC)

>int. start B/F
FNo. 01441
>ext.start2 B/F
7002 TRIP INTERN
”0”
OFF
CFC
OR FNo. 01471
Bin.Outp.12 FNo. 01443 BrkFailure TRIP
FNo. 01455
int. start B/F
B/F picked up
FNo. 01423 Tripping
>ext.start1 B/F OR 7004 TRIP-Timer matrix
& &
FNo. 01422
>Break. Contact
OR
7003 CIRC. BR. I>
FNo. 01444 TMin
TRIP CMD
B/F I>
FNo. 01403 FNo. 01452

>BLOCK BkrFail BkrFail BLOCK
Figure 2-109 Logic Diagram for the Breaker Failure Protection
General The breaker failure protection function is only effective and available if it has been
assigned at address 0170 BREAKER FAILURE to Side 1 or Side 2 during
configuration of the protective functions. Set Disabled if the function is not required.
Address 7001 BREAKER FAILURE is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to
The current measurement for the circuit breaker failure protection can be performed
either at side 1 (inputs IL, S1) or at side 2 (inputs IL, S2). It is recommended to use the
terminal-side set of CTs, i.e. side 1.
Criteria The parameter 7002 TRIP INTERN serves to select the OFF criterion of the internal
pickup. It can be implemented by reading the switching statuses of the corresponding
output relays BO12 (7002 TRIP INTERN = BO12) or by a logic link created in CFC
(= CFC) (annunciation 1442 ”>int. start B/F”). The internal source can be
completely deactivated (7002 TRIP INTERN = OFF). In this case the breaker failure
protection can only be initiated by external sources via binary input.
Note: Be aware that only the potential-free binary output BO12 (Relay R12) can be
used for the breaker failure protection. This means that trippings for the network
breaker must be configured to this binary output.
7UM62 Manual 227

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The pickup threshold 7003 CIRC. BR. I> setting of the current criterion refers to
all three phases. The user must select a value ensuring that the function still picks up
even for the lowest operating current to be expected. For this reason, the value should
be set at least 10% below the minimum operating current.
However, the pick-up value should not be selected lower than necessary, as a too
sensitive setting risks prolongations of the drop-out time due to balancing procedures
in the current transformer secondary circuit during the switchoff of too high currents.
Time Delay The breaker failure time delay setting is entered at 7004 TRIP-Timer. This setting
should be based on the circuit breaker interrupting time plus the dropout time of the
current flow monitoring element plus a safety margin. Figure 2-110 illustrates the
timing of a typical breaker failure scenario.
Fault occurs
Normal fault clearing time

Dropout
Trip. CIRC. Safety
time Breaker disconnecting time BR. I> time
Breaker failure
pickup
Breaker
Delay time TRIP-Timer disconnecting time
Breaker failure monitoring (adjacent)
Total fault clearing time for breaker failure condition
Figure 2-110 Timing for a Typical Breaker Failure Scenario
2.34.2.1 Settings for Breaker Failure Protection

7001 BREAKER OFF OFF Breaker Failure Protection
FAILURE ON
mands
7002 TRIP INTERN OFF OFF Start with Internal TRIP Com-
Start Breaker Failure with mand
Bin.Outp.12
Start Breaker Failure with
CFC
7003 CIRC. BR. I> 0.04..2.00 A 0.20 A Supervision Current Pickup
7004 TRIP-Timer 0.06..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.25 sec TRIP-Timer
228 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
2.34.2.2 Information for the Breaker Failure Protection

01403 >BLOCK BkrFail >BLOCK breaker failure
01422 >Break. Contact >Breaker contacts
01423 >ext.start1 B/F >ext. start 1 breaker failure prot.
01441 >ext.start2 B/F >ext. start 2 breaker failure prot.
01442 >int. start B/F >int. start breaker failure prot.
01451 BkrFail OFF Breaker failure is switched OFF
01452 BkrFail BLOCK Breaker failure is BLOCKED
01453 BkrFail ACTIVE Breaker failure is ACTIVE
01443 int. start B/F Breaker fail. started intern
01444 B/F I> Breaker failure I>
01455 B/F picked up Breaker failure protection: picked up
01471 BrkFailure TRIP Breaker failure TRIP
7UM62 Manual 229

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.35 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27)
General The inadvertent energizing protection serves to limit damages by accidental

connection of the standing or already started, but not yet synchronized generator by a
fast actuation of the mains breaker. A connection to a standing machine corresponds
to the connection to an inductivity. Due to the nominal voltage impressed by the power
system, the generator starts with a high slip as asynchronous machine. In this context,
impermissibly high currents are induced inside the rotor which may finally destroy it.
Criteria The inadvertent energizing protection only intervenes if measured quantities do not
yet exist in the valid frequency working area (operational condition 0 in case of the
standing machine) or if an undervoltage below the nominal frequency is present
(machine already started, but not yet synchronized). The inadvertent energizing
protection is blocked by a voltage criterion on exceeding a minimum voltage, in order
to avoid that it picks up during normal operation. This blocking is delayed to avoid that
the protection is blocked immediately by the time of an unwanted connection. Another
pickup delay is necessary to avoid an unwanted operation in case of high-current
faults with a heavy voltage dip. A dropout time delay allows for a measuring limited in
time.
As the inadvertent energizing protection must intervene very quickly, the
instantaneous current values are monitored over a large frequency range already in
operational condition 0. If valid measured quantities exist (operational condition 1), the
positive phase-sequence voltage, the frequency for blocking the inadvertent
energizing protection as well as the instantaneous current values are evaluated as
tripping criterion.
Figure 2-111 illustrates the logic diagram of the inadvertent energizing protection. This
function can be blocked via a binary input. For example, the existence of an excitation
voltage can be used as addition criterion. As the voltage is a necessary criterion for
tripping the inadvertent energizing protection, the voltage transformers must be
monitored by the Fuse–Failure–Monitor (FFM). If it detects a voltage transformer fault,
the voltage criterion of the inadvertent energizing protection is deactivated.
230 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27)
7104 PICK UP T U1<

no meas. quant.
7105 DROP OUT T U1<
(operational condition 0)
FNo. 05546
OR I.En. release
7103 RELEASE U1<
U1
&
FNo. 05547
I.En. picked up
Fuse Failure Tripping
matrix
&
7102 I STAGE FNo. 05548
I.En. TRIP
IL1
7102 I STAGE
IL2 OR TMin
TRIP CMD
7102 I STAGE
IL3
FNo. 05533 FNo. 05542

>BLOCK I.En. I.En. BLOCKED
Figure 2-111 Logic Diagram of the Inadvertent Energizing Protection (Dead Machine
Protection)
General The inadvertent energizing protection is only effective and accessible it is was set at
address 0171 INADVERT. EN. = Enabled during the configuration of the protection
functions. Set Disabled if the function is not required. Address 7101 INADVERT.
EN. is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only the trip command (Block
Relay).
Criteria Parameter 7102 I STAGE serves to specify the current pickup threshold of the
inadvertent energization protection function. As a rule, this threshold value is set more
sensitively than the threshold value of the time-overcurrent protection. In this case, the
inadvertent energizing protection may only be effective if the device is either in
operational condition 0 or if no nominal conditions have been reached yet. The
parameter 7103 RELEASE U1< serves to define these nominal conditions. The
typical setting is about 50 % to 70 % of the nominal voltage. A 0 V setting deactivates
the voltage tripping. However, this should only be used if 7102 I STAGE shall be
used as 3rd time-overcurrent protection stage, at a very high setting.
The parameter 7104 PICK UP T U1< parameter represents the time delay for the
release of the tripping condition in case of an undervoltage. The user should select a
higher value for this time delay than the for the tripping time delay of the time-
overcurrent protection.
The delay time to block the tripping conditions when the voltage is above the
undervoltage threshold is set at 7105 DROP OUT T U1<. The inadvertent energizing
protection is blocked only after this time in order to enable a tripping subsequent to
connection.
7UM62 Manual 231

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Figure 2-112 illustrates the course of events during an unwanted connection in case
of a machine standstill and, contrary to this, during a voltage collapse in case of a short
circuit close to generator terminals.
Start T U1
Pickup
U1<
Release of
INADV. EN.
T U1< T U1<
Dropout Pickup
IL>
Trip
Machine Machine
”stopped” ”running”
Trip
Inadvertent Short circ. short-circuit
energization close to gen. protection
a) Trip after inadvertent energization b) Unit connection
Figure 2-112 Course of Events of the Inadvertent Energizing Protection
2.35.2.1 Settings of the Inadvertent Energizing Protection
must be multiplied by 5.

7101 INADVERT. EN. OFF OFF Inadvertent Energisation
ON
mands
7102 I STAGE 0.1..20.0 A; ∞ 0.3 A I Stage Pickup
7103 RELEASE U1< 10.0..125.0 V; 0 50.0 V Release Threshold U1<
7104 PICK UP T U1< 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 5.00 sec Pickup Time Delay T U1<
7105 DROP OUT T U1< 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Drop Out Time Delay T U1<
2.35.2.2 Information for the Inadvertent Energizing Function

05533 >BLOCK I.En. >BLOCK inadvertent energ. prot.
05541 I.En. OFF Inadvert. Energ. prot. is swiched OFF
05542 I.En. BLOCKED Inadvert. Energ. prot. is BLOCKED
232 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27)

05543 I.En. ACTIVE Inadvert. Energ. prot. is ACTIVE
05546 I.En. release Release of the current stage
05547 I.En. picked up Inadvert. Energ. prot.: picked up
05548 I.En. TRIP Inadvert. Energ. prot.: TRIP
7UM62 Manual 233

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.36 DC Voltage/DC Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC)
General To detect DC voltages, DC currents and small AC quantities, the 7UM62 is equipped
with a measuring transducer input (TD1) that can be used either for voltages (± 10 V)
or currents (± 20 mA). Higher DC voltages are connected via an external voltage
divider. The DC voltage/DC current protection can be used, for example, for the
monitoring of the excitation voltage of synchronous machines (see Figure 2-113), or
for the detection of earth faults in the DC section of the start-up converter of a gas
turbine set (see Figure 2-114).
A measuring transducer performs the analog/digital conversion of the measured

quantity. The measuring transducer provides for galvanic isolation, a digital filter
integrates the measurement voltage over two cycles and suppresses high ripple
content or non-periodic peaks. A mean value of 32 samples is generated. Since the
absolute values are sampled, the result is always positive. Thus, the polarity of the
voltage is of no concern. When no suitable measured AC quantities are present
("operating condition 0 "), the DC voltage protection is still operative. The mean value
is then calculated over 4 x 32 measured value samples.
If, in special cases, an AC voltage should be measured via this analog input, the RMS
value should be set on the protection. The factor 1.11 between r.m.s. and mean value
is recognized within the protection function.
Optionally, this function can also be used for the monitoring of small currents, provided
that the TD input has been configured as current input and the settings of the
associated jumpers on the C–I/O–6 have been changed. If the jumper settings do not
match the configuration parameters, an error message is output.
The protection can be set to operate for overvoltage or undervoltage. Pickup can be
blocked via a binary input, and the output signal can be time delayed.
Typical applications are shown in the Figures 2-113 and 2-114.
Excitation Voltage Figure 2-113 illustrates the excitation voltage monitoring. The excitation voltage is
Monitoring stepped down to a processable level by a voltage divider, and fed to the measuring
transducer.
7UM62
Excita-
Rotor
tion G
system
10:1
TD1
Measuring Input
transducer filter
20:1
∼
U= 0 – 8,5 V
∼
3PP1326–0BZ–V718 160
Figure 2-113 DC Voltage Protection Used for Excitation Voltage Monitoring
234 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
DC Voltage/DC Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC)
Earth Fault If an earth fault occurs in the startup converter circuit, a current flows through all
Detection in the earthed parts of the system because of the DC voltage. As earthing and neutral
Startup Converter transformers have a lower ohmic resistance than voltage transformers, the thermal
load is the highest on them.
As shown in Figure 2-114, the DC current is converted into a voltage in a shunt, and
fed via a shunt converter to the measuring transducer of the device.
Shunt converters can be measuring transducers such as the 7KG6131. For short
distances between the shunt converter and the protective device, a voltage input may
be used. For longer distances, use the version with current input (-20 to 20 mA or 4 to
20 mA).
Earthing transformer
7UM62
Startup converter
L1 L2 L3
∼ =
= ∼ TD1
Measuring Input
transducer filter
–20...20 mA
10 A/
150 mV
Shunt Shunt converter

10 V/–20..20 mA
Fuse
Figure 2-114 DC Voltage Protection Used to Detect an Earth Fault in the Startup Converter
Figure 2-115 shows the logic diagram of the overvoltage protection.
7UM62 Manual 235

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
7204 U DC ><
FNo. 05306
7205 I DC ><
DC Prot.pick.up
7202 MEAS.METHOD 7203 DC >/< FNo. 05307
DC Prot. TRIP
7206 T DC
mean value absolute mean Tripping
Mean formation value
U= or. I= & matrix
U∼ I∼ R.M.S. r.m.s.
Rectifica- mean value factor
tion formation 1.11
2 mA
TMin
TRIP CMD
& FNo. 05308
& Failure DC Prot
0172 DC PROTECTION
10V
”1” 4-20 mA
20 mA
FNo. 05293 FNo. 05302

>BLOCK DC Prot. DC Prot.BLOCKED
Figure 2-115 Logic Diagram of the DC Voltage Protection
General The DC voltage protection is only effective and accessible if it was set at address 0172
DC PROTECTION = Enabled during the configuration of the protection functions. Set
Disabled if the function is not required. For the associated measuring transducer 1,
either 10 V, 4–20 mA oder 20 mA has been selected during configuration at address
0295 TRANSDUCER 1 (see Section 2.3).
Jumpers X94, X95 and X67 on the C–I/O–6 module are used to set in the hardware
whether the measuring transducer input will be a voltage or a current input (see
Section 3.1.3). Their setting must correspond to the setting at address 0295. If it does
not, the device is blocked and issues an annunciation to that effect. When the relay is
delivered from the factory, the jumpers and configuration parameters are set to
voltage measurement.
Address 7201 DC PROTECTION is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block
only the trip command (Block Relay).
Measuring Normally an integrated average value filter is switched on. A high ripple content or
Procedure non-periodic peaks in the measurement voltage are averaged in this manner. The
polarity of the measured voltages is of no concern since the absolute value is taken.
Alternatively, a sinusoidal AC voltage can be measured (address 7202
MEAS.METHOD = RMS). The protection then multiplies the rectified average value with
1.11. The frequency of the AC voltage must match the frequency of other AC
quantities, because the latter determine the sampling rate. The maximum AC
amplitude must not exceed 10 V, so that for r.m.s. value measurement a maximum
setting of 7.0 Vrms is reasonable. The resulting higher secondary voltage can be
reduced by means of a voltage divider.
236 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
DC Voltage/DC Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC)
The DC voltage/DC current protection can be set to operate for overvoltage or

undervoltage (address 7203 DC >/<).
Pickup Thresholds Depending on the whether current or voltage input has been set at address 0295
TRANSDUCER 1, one of the following parameters is available, whereas the other is
masked out:
− Voltage measurement threshold: 7204 U DC ><
− Current measurement threshold: 7205 I DC ><
When setting the pickup values (address 7204), the ratio of a voltage divider – if fitted
– has to be considered.
Application When used for excitation voltage monitoring, the DC current protection is configured
Examples to operate for undervoltage; the pickup threshold is set to approx. 60 % to 70 % of the
no-load excitation voltage. Users should be aware that normally a voltage divider is
connected between the protection and the excitation voltage (see Figure 2-113).
Another typical application is the earth fault protection for the startup converter of a
gas turbine set. In the case of an earth fault in the DC circuit, half of the DC voltage is
present between the transformer starpoint and the earth if the transformer starpoint is
not earthed. This voltage can be considered as the voltage feeding the earth current.
As the transformer starpoints are earthed, the current flowing is determined by the
feeding voltage and the ohmic resistance of all transformers that are galvanically
connected to the converter set and earthed. This DC current is normally between
about 3 and 4 A.
For a startup converter having a startup transformer with UN, AT ≈ 1.4 kV and a 6-pulse
bridge circuit, there will be a DC voltage of UDC ≈ 1.35 ⋅ UN, AT = 1.89 kV. In case of
an earth fault in the intermediate circuit, the „displacement voltage“will be half of the
DC voltage (UDC, fault = 0.5 ⋅ UDC = 945 V).
If we assume that the earthing transformer has an ohmic winding resistance of R ≈
150 Ω, a DC current of I0 = 945 V/150 Ω = 6,3 A will flow through its starpoint.
Note: The ohmic winding resistances of earthing and neutral transformers can differ
widely depending on the type. For a concrete application, they should be obtained
from the manufacturer, or determined by measurements.
If not tripped, the earth fault current would cause a temperature overload that would
destroy the wye-connected voltage transformers and the earthing transformer. To
ensure that the protection will pick up reliably, it is set to a value of less than half the
fault current, in this example to 2 A. With the shunt and shunt converter used in the
example, this current causes a secondary current of 4 mA (see Figure 2-114) (fault
current ≈ 6 A, selected pickup value = 2 A, setting value = 4 mA).
Delays The tripping delay can be set at address 7206 T DC. The set time is an additional
time delay not including the operating time of the protective function.
For the startup earth fault current protection, T DC is determined by the permissible
temperature load of the earthing and/or neutral transformer. A value of 2 s or less is
quite common.
Note: It should be noted that in operating condition 0, the operating times for pickup
and dropout are 4 times longer due to the more complex filter procedure needed to
eliminate disturbances.
7UM62 Manual 237

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.36.2.1 Settings of the DC Voltage Protection

7201 DC PROTECTION OFF OFF DC Voltage/Current Protection
ON
mands
7202 MEAS.METHOD Mean Value Mean Value Measurement Method (MEAN/

Root Mean Square RMS Values)
7203 DC >/< DC Voltage/Current Stage DC Voltage/Cur- Method of Operation (DC >/<)

DC > rent Stage DC >
DC Voltage/Current Stage
DC <
7204 U DC >< 0.1..8.5 V 2.0 V DC Voltage Pickup
7205 I DC >< 0.2..17.0 mA 4.0 mA DC Current Pickup
7206 T DC 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec Time Delay for Trip of DC Pro-
tection
2.36.2.2 Information from the DC Voltage Protection

05293 >BLOCK DC Prot. >BLOCK DC protection
05301 DC Prot. OFF DC protection is switched OFF
05302 DC Prot.BLOCKED DC protection is BLOCKED
05303 DC Prot. ACTIVE DC protection is ACTIVE
05307 DC Prot. TRIP DC protection TRIP
05306 DC Prot.pick.up DC protection picked up
05308 Failure DC Prot Failure DC protection
238 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Analog Outputs
2.37 Analog Outputs
Depending on the variant ordered, the 7UM62 machine protection can have up to four
analog outputs (plug-in modules on ports B and D). The values to be transmitted via
these interfaces have been specified during the configuration of the scope of
protection functions (see Section 2.2). A maximum of four of the following analog
outputs are available.
• Measured positive sequence current I1 in percent of the rated operational current;
• Measured negative sequence current I2 in percent of the rated operational current;
• Measured positive sequence voltage U1 in percent of the rated voltage;
• Measured value |P| (absolute value of active power) in percent of the rated
operational apparent power √3·UN ·IN,
• Measured value |Q| (absolute value of reactive power) in percent of the rated
operating apparent power √3·UN ·IN,
• Measured value frequency f in percent of the nominal frequency,
• Measured value |cosϕ| (absolute value of power factor) in percent, referred to 1.00,
• Measured value rotor temperature ΘR/ΘR max in percent of the maximum
permissible rotor temperature,
• Measured value stator temperature ΘS/ΘS TRIP in percent of the tripping
temperature.
Operating nominal quantities are the nominal values set at addresses 0251 UN GEN/
MOTOR and 0252 SN GEN/MOTOR (see also Section 2.3).
For measured values that can be negative (power, power factor), absolute values are
formed and output.
Analog values are output as load-independent currents. The analog outputs have a
nominal range between 0 mA and 20 mA, their operating range can be up to 22.5 mA.
The conversion factor and the scope of validity are set.
General You have specified during the configuration of the analog outputs (Section 2.2,
addresses 0173 through 0176) which of the analog inputs available will be used for
what measured values. Set Disabled if a function is not needed. The other
parameters associated to that analog output are masked out in that case.
Measured Values If you have selected measured values for the analog outputs (Section 2.2, addresses
0173 through 0176), you specify for the available outputs the conversion factor and
the range of validity; these are
7UM62 Manual 239

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
For analog output B1 at location”B” (port B1):

At address 7301 20 mA (B1) = the percent value to be displayed at 20 mA,
At address 7302 MIN VALUE (B1) the smallest valid value.
For analog output B2 at location”B” (port B2):
At address 7303 20 mA (B2) = the percent value to be displayed at 20 mA,
At address 7304 MIN VALUE (B2) the smallest valid value.
For analog output D1 at location”D” (port D1):

At address 7305 20 mA (D1) = the percent value to be displayed at 20 mA,
At address 7306 MIN VALUE (D1) the smallest valid value.
For analog output D2 at location”D” (port D2):
At address 7307 20 mA (D2) = the percent value to be displayed at 20 mA,
At address 7308 MIN VALUE (D2) the smallest valid value.
The maximum possible value is 22.0 mA; in case of an overflow (value outside the
maximum permissible range) 22.5 mA is output.
Example:
You want to output the positive sequence currents at analog output B1, location”B”.
10 mA are the value at nominal operational current, consequently 20 mA mean
200 %. Values below 1 mA are invalid.
Settings
Address 7301 20 mA (B1) = 200.0 %,
Address 7302 MIN VALUE (B1) = 1.0 mA.
2.37.3 Settings of the Analog Outputs

7301 20 mA (B1) = 10.0..1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (B1) correspond to
7302 MIN VALUE (B1) 0.0..5.0 mA 1.0 mA Output value (B1) valid from
7303 20 mA (B2) = 10.0..1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (B2) correspond to
7304 MIN VALUE (B2) 0.0..5.0 mA 1.0 mA Output value (B2) valid from
7305 20 mA (D1) = 10.0..1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (D1) correspond to
7306 MIN VALUE (D1) 0.0..5.0 mA 1.0 mA Output value (D1) valid from
7307 20 mA (D2) = 10.0..1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (D2) correspond to
7308 MIN VALUE (D2) 0.0..5.0 mA 1.0 mA Output value (D2) valid from
240 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Measured Value Monitoring Functions
2.38 Measured Value Monitoring Functions
The device is equipped with extensive monitoring capabilities - both for hardware and
software. In addition, the measured values are also constantly monitored for
plausibility, therefore, the current transformer and voltage transformer circuits are
largely integrated into the monitoring.
2.38.1.1 Hardware Monitoring
The device is monitored from the measurement inputs to the output relays. Monitoring
circuits and processor check the hardware for malfunctions and disallowed conditions
(see Table 2-13 in Section 2.38.1.5).
Auxiliary and The processor voltage of 5 V DC is monitored, and if the voltage decreases below the
Reference Voltages minimum value, the device is removed from operation. When the cross-polarized
voltage returns, the processor system is restarted.
Removal of or switching off the supply voltage removes the device from operation and
a message is immediately generated by a dead contact. Brief voltage interruptions of
less than 50 ms do not disturb the readiness of the device (for nominal auxiliary
voltage ≥110 V DC).
The processor monitors the offset and reference voltage of the AD (analog-digital)
converter. The protection is suspended if the voltages deviate outside an allowable
range, and lengthy deviations are reported (”Error A/D-conv.”).
Buffer Battery The buffer battery, which ensures the operation of the internal clock and the storage
of counters and messages if the auxiliary voltage fails, is periodically checked for
charge status. If it is less than an allowed minimum voltage, then the ”Fail Battery”
message is issued.
If the power supply voltage is cut off for 1 or 2 days, the internal buffer battery is auto-
matically switched off, i.e. the internal clock will stop, whereas the buffered annuncia-
tions and fault event data will be preserved.
Memory The working memory (RAM) is tested when the system is started up. If a malfunction
Components occurs then, the starting sequence is interrupted and an LED blinks. During operation,
the memory is checked using its checksum.
For the program memory, the cross sum is formed periodically and compared to the
stored program cross sum.
For the settings memory, the cross sum is formed periodically and compared to the
cross sum that is freshly generated each time the setting process takes place.
If a malfunction occurs, the processor system is restarted.
Sampling Sampling and the synchronization between the internal buffer components are
constantly monitored. If any deviations cannot be removed by renewed
synchronization, then the processor system is restarted.
7UM62 Manual 241

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Measured Value In the current path, there are three input transformers each on side 1 and side 2; the
Acquisition - digitized sum of the outputs of these on one side must be almost zero for generators
Currents with isolated starpoint and earth-fault-free operation. A current circuit fault is detected
if
IF = |IL1 + IL2 + IL3 | > ΣI THRESHOLD · IN + ΣI FACTOR · Imax
ΣI THRESHOLD and ΣI FACTOR are settings that are available individually for side 1
and side 2. The component SUM.Fact.I · Imax takes into account permissible current
proportional transformation errors in the input converters, which can be especially
large when high fault current levels are present (Figure 2-116). The dropout ratio is
about 95%.
This error is reported separately for side 1 and side 2 by ”Fail ΣI”.
The current sum monitoring is only effective for the side for which the starpoint has
been configured as Isolated in the power system data (addresses 0242 / 0244).
IF
IN
Slope:
ΣI FACTOR
ΣI THRESHOLD
Imax
IN
Figure 2-116 Current Sum Monitoring
Measured Value In the voltage path, there are four input transformers: If three of them are used for
Acquisition - phase-earth voltages, and one input for the displacement voltage (e–n voltage from
Voltages the broken delta winding or neutral transformer) of the same system, a fault in the
phase-earth voltage sum is detected if
|UL1 + UL2 + UL3 + kU · UE | > SUM.thres. U + SUM.Fact. U x Umax
SUM.thres. U and SUM.Fact. U are parameter settings, and Umax is the highest
of the phase-earth voltages. The factor kU considers the transformation ratio
differences between the displacement voltage input and the phase voltage inputs
(parameter kU = Uph / Udelta address 0225A). The SUM.Fact. U x Umax
component considers permissible voltage-proportional transformation errors, which
can be especially large in the presence of high voltages (Figure 2-117).
This malfunction is reported as ”Fail S U Ph-E”.
242 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Note:
Voltage sum (phase-earth) monitoring is only operative if an externally formed
displacement voltage s connected to the residual voltage input of the relay and if this
was communicated to the device via the parameter 0223 UE CONNECTION.
Voltage sum (phase-earth) monitoring can operate properly only if the matching factor
Uph / Udelta at address 0225A has been correctly configured (see Section 2.3.2).
UF
UN
Slope:
SUM.Fact.U
SUM.thres.U
Umax
UN
Figure 2-117 Voltage Sum Monitoring
2.38.1.2 Software Monitoring
Software For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a time monitor is provided in the
Monitoring hardware (hardware watchdog) that runs upon failure of the processor or an internal
program, and causes a complete restart of the processor system.
An additional software watchdog ensures that malfunctions during the processing of
programs are discovered. This also initiates a restart of the processor system.
To the extent such a malfunction is not cleared by the restart, an additional restart
attempt is begun. After three unsuccessful restarts within a 30 second window of time,
the device automatically removes itself from service and the red ”Error” LED lights up.
The readiness relay opens and indicates ”device malfunction” with its normal contact.
2.38.1.3 Monitoring of External Current Transformer Circuits
Interruptions or short circuits in the secondary circuits of the current transformers or

voltage transformers, as well as faults in the connections (important for start-up!), are
detected and reported by the device. The measured quantities are periodically
checked in the background for this purpose, as long as no system fault is present.
7UM62 Manual 243

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Current Symmetry The currents fed in at the current inputs of side 1 and side 2 are monitored for
symmetry. During normal system operation (i.e. the absence of a short-circuit fault),
symmetry among the input currents is expected. This symmetry is checked by the
device, using a quantity monitor. The smallest phase current is compared to the
largest phase current, and asymmetry is recognized if:
|Imin | / |Imax | < BAL. FACTOR I provided that Imax / IN > BALANCE I LIMIT / IN
where Imax is the largest of the three phase currents and Imin is the smallest. The
symmetry factor BAL. FACTOR I is the measure for the asymmetry of the phase
currents; the limit value BALANCE I LIMIT is the lower limit of the operating range
of this monitoring (see Figure 2-118). Both settings are adjustable individually for side
1 and side 2. The dropout ratio is about 95 %.
This malfunction is reported as ”Fail. Isym” individually for side 1 and side 2.
Imin
IN
Slope:
BAL. FACTOR I
Imax
BALANCE I LIMIT
IN
Figure 2-118 Current Symmetry Monitoring
Voltage Symmetry During normal system operation (i.e. the absence of a short-circuit fault), symmetry
among the input voltages is expected. From the phase-to-ground voltages, the
protection generates the rectified average values and checks the symmetry of their
absolute values. The smallest phase voltage is related to the highest. Asymmetry is
recognized if:
|Umin | / |Umax | < BAL. FACTOR U provided that |Umax| > BALANCE U-LIMIT
where Umax is the highest of the three voltages and Umin the smallest. The symmetry
factor BAL. FACTOR U is the measure for the asymmetry of the conductor voltages;
the limit BALANCE U-LIMIT is the lower limit of the operating range of this monitoring
(see Figure 2-119). Both settings are adjustable. The dropout ratio is about 95%.
This malfunction is reported as ”Fail U balance”.
In the case of unsymmetrical conditions a zero sequence voltage is possible. If the
90–%–stator earth fault protection is switched on and has picked up, it blocks the
voltage symmetry supervision. The voltage symmetry supervision is active as long as
no protection function has picked up.
244 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Umin
V
Slope:
BAL. FACTOR U
BALANCE I LIMIT
Umax
V
Figure 2-119 Voltage Symmetry Monitoring
Current and To detect swapped phase connections in the voltage and current input circuits, the
Voltage Phase phase sequence of the phase-to-phase measured voltages and the phase currents
Sequence are checked by the monitoring.
Direction measurement with cross-polarized voltages, path selection for impedance
protection, and unbalance load detection all assume a clockwise phase sequence.
The current rotation is checked and reported individually for side 1 and side 2.
The phase sequence of the phase-to-ground voltages is verified by ensuring the
following
UL1 leads UL2 leads UL3
Likewise, the phase sequence of the phase currents is verified by ensuring the
following:
IL1 leads IL2 leads IL3
Verification of the voltage rotation occurs when each measured voltage is at least
|UL1|, |UL2|, |UL3| > 40 V/√3
Verification of the current rotation occurs when each measured current is at least
|IL1|, |IL2|, |IL3| > 0.5 IN.
For counter-clockwise phase sequence, the annunciations ”Fail Ph. Seq. U”,
(FNo. 176) or ”FailPh.Seq I S1”, (FNo. 00265) are output for side 1, or
”FailPh.Seq I S2”, (FNo. 00266) for side 2, as well as an OR link for these
annunciations ”Fail Ph. Seq.”, (FN. 00171).
For applications where the phase rotation of the measured quantities is counter-
clockwise phase in normal operation, this must be set in the device with the parameter
0271 PHASE SEQ. or an appropriately masked binary input. If the phase sequence
is changed in the relay, phases ‘L2’ and ‘L3’ internal to the relay are reversed, and the
positive and negative sequence currents are thereby exchanged (see also Section
2.43). The phase- related messages, malfunction values, and measured values are
not affected by this.
2.38.1.4 Fuse Failure Monitoring
In case of a measuring voltage failure caused by a short circuit or a phase failure in

the voltage transformer secondary system, a zero voltage can be simulated to
individual measuring loops. The measuring results of the undervoltage protection, the
impedance protection and other voltage-dependent protective functions may be
falsified in this way, which may cause an unwanted operation.
7UM62 Manual 245

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
If fuses are used instead of a secondary miniature circuit breaker with connected
auxiliary contacts, then the fuse failure monitoring can detect problems in the voltage
transformer secondary circuit. Of course, supervision of the miniature circuit breaker
and the fuse failure monitor can be used at the same time.
This function uses the current of side 2.
Measuring The measuring voltage failure detection is based on the fact a significant negative-
Principle for 1–Pole phase sequence system is formed with regard to the voltage during a 1- or 2-pole
and 2–Pole Fuse voltage failure, without influencing the current. This enables a clear distinction from
Failures asymmetries impressed by the power system. If the negative-phase sequence system
is related to the current positive-phase sequence system, the following rules apply for
the fault-free case:
U I
------2- = 0 and ---2- = 0
U1 I1
If a fault of the voltage transformers occurs, the following rules apply for a
single-pole failure:
U I U I
0.33
------2- = ----------- = 0.5 and ---2- = 0 æ ------2- > ---2-ö
U1 0.66 I1 è U 1 I 1ø
If a fault of the voltage transformers occurs, the following rules apply for a
two-pole failure:
U2 0.33 I U I
------- = ----------- = 1 and ---2- = 0 æ ------2- > ---2-ö
U1 0.33 I1 è U 1 I 1ø
In case of an outage of one or two phases, the current also shows a negative-phase
sequence system of 0.5 or 1. Consequently, the voltage monitoring does not respond
as no the voltage transformer fault can be present.
In order to avoid - in case of a too small positive-sequence system - an unwanted
operation by inaccuracies of the measuring voltages failure detection, the function is
blocked below a minimum threshold of the positive-sequence systems of (U1 < 10 V)
and current (I1 < 0.1 IN).
3–Pole Fuse Failure A 3-pole voltage transformer failure cannot be detected via the positive- and negative
phase sequence system, but requires a monitoring of the current and voltage time
course. A voltage dip to approximately zero (or if the voltage is zero) although the
current remains unchanged by the same time, this is probably due to a 3-pole voltage
transformer failure. The deviation of the actual current value from the nominal current
value is evaluated for this purpose. The measuring voltage failure monitoring is
blocked if the deviation amount is greater than a threshold value. Moreover, this
function is blocked if a pickup of an (overcurrent) protective function is already
present.
Additional Criteria In addition to this, the function can either be blocked via a binary input or deactivated
by an undervoltage protection at a separate voltage transformer set. If an
undervoltage is also detected at a separate transformer set, this is most probably not
due to a transformer error and the monitoring switching can be blocked. The separate
undervoltage protection must be set non-delayed and should also evaluate the
positive-phase sequence system of the voltages (e.g. 7RW600).
246 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Figure 2-120 illustrates the logic diagram of the measuring voltage failure detection
feature.
Voltage at UE Input Depending on how UE is connected, it may be necessary to block the voltage mea-
surement of this input. A blocking can be generated with the CFC tool and linked by
the annunciation “Fuse Failure“.
1- and 2-pole
fuse failure
U2/U1 > 0,4
&
I2/I1 < 0.2 FNo.06575

OR VT Fuse Failure
3-pole
fuse failure
UL1 < 10 V see Figure 2-71 in
& & Section 2.19.1
UL2 < 10 V
&
UL3 < 10 V
Undervolt. U <
FNo. 05011
>FFM U< extern see Figure 2-77 in
OR Section 2.23.1
Inv. Underv.Up <
|I1 - IN| > 0.5 IN

see Figure 2-59 in
Gen. trip Section 2.17.1.2
Imp. I>+U<
see Figure 2-61 in

Blocked if generator
running without load Section 2.17.1.3
Imp. Z <
I1 < 0.1
see Figures 2-18
& OR and 2-19 in
Section 2.8.1
U1 < 0.1 O/C f(U)
FNo. 05010
>FFM BLOCK
see Figure 2-10 in
Section 2.6.1
O/C I > + U <
Figure 2-120 Logic Diagram of the Measuring Voltages – Fuse Failure Monitor)
2.38.1.5 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions
Depending on the type of malfunction discovered, an annunciation is sent, a restart of

the processor system is initiated, or the device is taken out of service. After three
unsuccessful restart attempts, the device is taken out of service as well. The live status
contact operates to indicate the device is malfunctioning. Also, the red LED ”ERROR”
lights up on the front cover, if the internal auxiliary voltage is present, and the green
”RUN” LED goes out. If the internal power supply fails, then all LEDs are dark. Table
2-13 shows a summary of the monitoring functions and the malfunction responses of
the relay.
7UM62 Manual 247

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Table 2-13 Overview of Error Reactions by the Protection Relay
Monitoring Possible Cause Reaction Annunciation Output

Supply voltage failure External (power supply) Relay goes out of service all LEDs go dark DOK2) drops
internal (converter) out
Internal supply- Internal (converter) or Relay goes out of service ”ERROR” LED DOK2) drops
voltages Reference voltage ”Error A/D-conv.” out
(FNo. 000181)
Battery Internal (battery) Annunciation ”Fail Battery”

(FNo. 000177)
Hardware Monitoring Internal (processor failure) Relay goes out of ”ERROR” LED DOK2) drops
service1) out
Software Monitoring Internal (program execution) Relay attempts restart 1) ”ERROR” LED DOK2) drops
out
ROM Internal (hardware) Relay aborts restart LED flashes DOK2) drops
Relay goes out of service out
RAM Internal (hardware) During startup LED flashes
DOK2) drops
During operation: ”ERROR” LED
out
Relay attempts restart 1)
Parameter memory Intern (hardware) Relay attempts restart 1) ”ERROR” LED DOK2) drops
out
Sampling frequency Internal (hardware) Relay goes out of service ”ERROR” LED DOK2) drops
out
1 A/5 A changeover Jumper for 1 A/5 A for side 1 Relay goes out of service ”ERROR” LED DOK2) drops
Side 1 misconnected Annunciation ”Err1A/ out
5AwrongS1”
(FNo. 000210
1 A/5 A changeover Jumper for 1 A/5 A for side 2 Relay goes out of service ”ERROR” LED DOK2) drops
Side 2 misconnected Annunciation ”Err1A/ out
5AwrongS2”
(FNo. 000211)
Voltage/current Jumper setting for meas- Relay goes out of service ”ERROR” LED DOK2) drops
changeover at TD1 uring transducer 1 does not Annunciation ”Err. TD1 jumper” out
match parameter 0295 (FNo. 0212)
Voltage/current Jumper setting for meas- Relay goes out of service ”ERROR” LED DOK2) drops
Filter on/off Jumper setting for meas- Relay goes out of service ”ERROR” LED DOK2) drops
Current sum Internal (measured value Annunciation ”Fail. S I Side1” as masked

Side 1 acquisition) (FNo. 000230),
Current sum Internal (measured value Annunciation ”Fail. S I Side2” as masked

Side 2 acquisition) (FNo. 000231)
Current symmetry External (power system or Annunciation ”Fail. Isym 1” as masked

Side 1 current transformer) (FNo. 000571)
1) After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device will go out of service
2)
DOK = ”Device Okay” = Ready for service relay drops off, protection and control function are blocked, HMI might be
still accessible
248 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table 2-13 Overview of Error Reactions by the Protection Relay
Monitoring Possible Cause Reaction Annunciation Output

Current symmetry External (power system or Annunciation ”Fail. Isym 2” as masked
Side 2 current transformer) (FNo. 000572)
Voltage sum Internal (measured value Annunciation ”Fail S U Ph-E” as masked

acquisition) (FNo. 0165)
Voltage symmetry External (power system or Annunciation ”Fail U balance” as masked

voltage transformer) (FNo. 0167)
Voltage phase External (power system or Annunciation ”Fail Ph. Seq. U” as masked
sequence connection) (FNo. 00176)
Current phase External (power system or Annunciation ”FailPh.Seq I S1” as masked

Side 1
Current phase External (power system or Annunciation ”FailPh.Seq I S2” as masked
Side 2
Fuse failure monitoring External (voltage Annunciation ”VT Fuse Failure” as masked
transformers) (FNo. 06575)
Trip circuit monitoring External (trip circuit or Annunciation ”FAIL: Trip cir.” as masked
control voltage) (FNo. 6865)
1)
After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device will go out of service
2)
DOK = ”Device Okay” = Ready for service relay drops off, protection and control function are blocked, HMI might be
still accessible
Measured Value The measured value monitoring can be set at address 8101 MEASURE. SUPERV to
Monitoring ON or OFF. In addition, the sensitivity of measured value monitor can be modified.
Default values are set at the factory, which are sufficient in most cases. If especially
high operating asymmetry in the currents and/or voltages is to be expected for the
application, or if it becomes apparent during operation that certain monitoring
Functions activate sporadically, then the setting should be less sensitive.
Address 8102 BALANCE U-LIMIT determines the voltage threshold (phase–phase)
above which the voltage symmetry monitoring is effective (see also Figure 2-119).
Address 8103 BAL. FACTOR U is the associated symmetry factor, i.e. the slope of
the symmetry characteristic (Figure 2-119).
Address 8104 BAL. I LIMIT S1 determines for side 1, and address 8106 BAL. I
LIMIT S2 for side 2, the current threshold above which the current symmetry
monitoring is active (see also Figure 2-118).
Address 8105 BAL. FACT. I S1 is the associated symmetry factor for side 1,
address 8107 BAL. FACT. I S2 is the associated symmetry factor for side 2, i.e.
the slope of the symmetry characteristic (Figure 2-118).
Address 8110 SI THRESHOLD S1 determines for side 1 the current threshold above
which the summation current monitoring picks up (see Figure 2-116) (absolute
component, only referred to IN). Consequently, address 8112 SI THRESHOLD S2 is
valid for side 2. The relative component (referred to the maximum phase current) for
the pickup of the summation current monitoring (Figure 2-116) is set for side 1 at
address 8111 SI FACTOR S1, and for side 2 at 8113 SI FACTOR S2.
7UM62 Manual 249

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Address 8108 SUM.thres. U determines the voltage threshold above which the
summation voltage monitoring picks (see Figure 2-117) (absolute component,
referred only to UN). The relative component for pickup of the summation voltage
monitoring (Figure 2-117) is set at address 8109 SUM.Fact. U.
Note:
In the power system data 1, the voltage earth path and its matching factor Uph /
Udelta have been specified. The measured value monitoring will only function
properly if the settings there are correct.
Measuring Voltage The measuring voltage failure monitoring is only effective and accessible if it has been
Failure Detection set during configuration of the protection functions at address 0180 FUSE FAIL
MON. = Enabled. Set Disabled if the function is not required. Address 8001 FUSE
FAIL MON. is used to switch the function ON or OFF.
The thresholds U2/U1 ≥ 40 % and I2/I1 ≤ 20 % for detecting 1-pole and 2-pole voltage
failures are fixed. The thresholds for detecting a 3-pole voltage failure (undervoltage
threshold = 10 V, below which the failure detection feature responds unless the
current changes significantly, and the differential current monitoring = 0.5 IN) are
likewise fixed and need not be set.
2.38.2.1 Settings

8001 FUSE FAIL MON. OFF OFF Fuse Failure Monitor
ON

8101 MEASURE. OFF OFF Measurement Supervision
SUPERV ON
8102 BALANCE U-LIMIT 10..100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for Balance

Monitoring
8103 BAL. FACTOR U 0.58..0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage

Monitor
8104 BAL. I LIMIT S1 0.10..1.00 A 0.50 A Current Balance Monitor Side 1
8105 BAL. FACT. I S1 0.10..0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current Moni-
tor S1
8106 BAL. I LIMIT S2 0.10..1.00 A 0.50 A Current Balance Monitor Side 2
8107 BAL. FACT. I S2 0.10..0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current Moni-
tor S2
8108 SUM.thres. U 10..200 V 10 V Summation Thres. for Volt.

Monitoring
250 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

8109 SUM.Fact. U 0.60..0.95; 0 0.75 Factor for Volt. Sum. Monitoring
8110 ΣI THRESHOLD S1 0.05..2.00 A 0.10 A Summated Cur. Mon. Threshold

on Side 1
8111 ΣI FACTOR S1 0.00..0.95 0.10 Summated Current Mon. Factor

on Side 1
8112 ΣI THRESHOLD S2 0.05..2.00 A 0.10 A Summated Cur. Mon. Threshold

on Side 2
8113 ΣI FACTOR S2 0.00..0.95 0.10 Summated Current Mon. Factor

on Side 2
2.38.2.2 Information of the Monitoring Functions

00161 Fail I Superv. Failure: General Current Supervision
00230 Fail. Σ I Side1 Failure: Current Summation on Side 1
00231 Fail. Σ I Side2 Failure: Current Summation on Side 2
00571 Fail. Isym 1 Fail.: Current symm. supervision side 1
00572 Fail. Isym 2 Fail.: Current symm. supervision side 2
00164 Fail U Superv. Failure: General Voltage Supervision
00165 Fail Σ U Ph-E Failure: Voltage Summation Phase-Earth
00167 Fail U balance Failure: Voltage Balance
00171 Fail Ph. Seq. Failure: Phase Sequence
00265 FailPh.Seq I S1 Failure: Phase Sequence I side 1
00266 FailPh.Seq I S2 Failure: Phase Sequence I side 2
00176 Fail Ph. Seq. U Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
00197 MeasSup OFF Measurement Supervision is switched OFF

00110 Event Lost Event lost
00113 Flag Lost Flag Lost
05010 >FFM BLOCK >BLOCK fuse failure monitor
05011 >FFM U< extern >FFM extern undervoltage
06575 VT Fuse Failure Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure
00140 Error Sum Alarm Error with a summary alarm
00181 Error A/D-conv. Error: A/D converter
00210 Err1A/5AwrongS1 Err:1A/5Ajumper different from settingS1
00211 Err1A/5AwrongS2 Err:1A/5Ajumper different from settingS2
7UM62 Manual 251

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

00194 Error neutralCT Error: Neutral CT different from MLFB
00212 Err. TD1 jumper Err: TD1 jumper different from setting
00191 Error Offset Error: Offset
00264 Fail: RTD-Box 1 Failure: RTD-Box 1
00267 Fail: RTD-Box 2 Failure: RTD-Box 2
00160 Alarm Sum Event Alarm Summary Event
00193 Alarm NO calibr Alarm: NO calibration data available
00147 Error PwrSupply Error Power Supply
00177 Fail Battery Failure: Battery empty
00068 Clock SyncError Clock Synchronization Error
2.38.2.3 Sum Events of the Monitoring Functions
For certain conditions, the monitoring functions output sum events. Table 2-14 shows
the sum events and their content.
Table 2-14 Sum Events
Sum events Content

FNo Designation FNo Designation FNo Meaning
0161 Measured value monitoring I 0230 Error ΣI S1
0231 Error ΣI S2
0571 Error Isymm S1
0572 Error Isymm S2
0164 Measured value monitoring U 0165 Error ΣUphe
0160 Error sum event
0167 Error Usymm
(minor malfunction or
configuration error; 0171 Phase sequence error 0265 Fail Ph. Seq. I S1
does not affect the 0266 Fail Ph. Seq. I S2
protective functions) 0176 Fail Ph. Seq. U
0147 Fail. power supply
6575 Fuse Failure
0193 Fail. calendar
0177 Fail. battery
Failure clock
252 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table 2-14 Sum Events
Sum events Content

FNo Designation FNo Designation FNo Meaning
0210 Err1A/ 5AwrongS1
0211 Err1A/ 5AwrongS2
0194 Error neutralCT
0212 Err. TD1 Jumper
0213 Err. TD2 Jumper
0181 Failure measured val. 0214 Err. TD3 Jumper
0140 Alarm sum event (Live status contace drops out/ 0190 Error BG0 = C–CPU–2
(some/all protective Error LED lights up/all 0185 Error BG3 = C–I/O–2
functions are blocked) protective functions blocked) 0187 Error BG5 = C–I/O–6
0188 Error BG6 = C–I/O–1
0191 Error: Offset
0264 Error Thermobox 1
0267 Error Thermobox 2
7UM62 Manual 253

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.39 Trip Circuit Supervision
The Multifunctional Protection 7UM62 is equipped with an integrated trip circuit

monitor. Depending on the number of available binary inputs, monitoring with one or
two binary inputs can be selected. If the configuration of the binary inputs needed for
this does not match the selected monitoring type, then a message to this effect
(”TripC ProgFail”) is sent. When using two binary inputs, malfunctions in the trip
circuit can be detected under all circuit breaker conditions. When only one binary input
is used, malfunctions in the circuit breaker itself cannot be detected.
Monitoring with When using two binary inputs, these are connected according to Figure 2-121, parallel
Two Binary Inputs to the associated trip contact on one side, and parallel to the circuit breaker auxiliary
(not Connected to contacts on the other.
Common Potential)
A condition for the use of trip circuit monitoring is that the control voltage for the circuit
breaker is greater than the sum of the minimum voltage drops of both binary (USt >
2·UBImin). Since at least 19 V are needed for each binary input, the monitor can only
be used with a system control voltage of over 38 V.
USt
L+ 7UM62
FNo. 06852
UBI1 >TripC trip rel
RTC 7UM62
FNo. 06853
>TripC brk rel.
Legend:
RTC — Relay trip contact
UBI2 CB — Circuit breaker
TC — Circuit breaker trip coil
CB TC AuxCont2 AuxCont1 — Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (NO contact)
Aux AuxCont2 — Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (NC contact)
Cont1 UCtrl — Control voltage (trip voltage)
UBI1 — Input voltage for 1st binary input
UBI2 — Input voltage for 2nd binary input
Note: In the figure the circuit breaker is shown closed.
L–
Figure 2-121 Principle of Trip Circuit Monitor with Two Binary Inputs (not Connected to
Common Potential)
Monitoring with binary inputs not only detects interruptions in the trip circuit and loss
of control voltage, it also monitors the response of the circuit breaker using the position
of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts.
Depending on the conditions of the trip contact and the circuit breaker, the binary
inputs are activated (logical condition ”H” in Table 2-15), or not activated (logical
condition ”L”).
Even for healthy trip circuits the condition that both binary inputs are not actuated (”L”)
is possible during a short transition period (trip contact is closed, but the circuit breaker
has not yet opened.) A continuous state of this condition is only possible when the trip
circuit has been interrupted, a short-circuit exists in the trip circuit, a loss of battery
voltage occurs, or malfunctions occur with the circuit breaker mechanism.
254 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Trip Circuit Supervision
Table 2-15 Condition Table for Binary Inputs, depending on RTC and CB Position
No. Trip Contact Circuit AuxCont 1 AuxCont 2 BI 1 BI 2

Breaker
1 Open CLOSED Closed Open H L
2 Open OPEN Open Closed H H
3 Closed CLOSED Closed Open L L
4 Closed OPEN Open Closed L H
The conditions of the two binary inputs are checked periodically. A check takes place
about every 600 ms. If three consecutive conditional checks detect an abnormality
(after 1.8 s), an annunciation is reported (see Figure 2-122). This is used to avoid the
annunciation for brief transition periods. When the fault in the trip circuit has been
cleared, the annunciation is automatically reset.
FNo. 06852 “L”

>TripC trip rel “H” FNo. 06865
&
FNo. 06853 “L” > n FAIL: Trip cir.
>TripC brk rel.
n . ..... Number of condition checks (= 3)
(measurement repeated every 600 ms)
Figure 2-122 Logic Diagram for Trip Circuit Monitoring with Two Binary Inputs
Monitoring with If two binary inputs connected to common potential are used, they are connected
Two Binary Inputs according to 2-121, i.e. to L+ or once in parallel to the corresponding protection
(Connected to command relay contact and to the CB auxiliary contact 1.
Common Potential)
USt 7UM62
L+
FNo. 06852
UBI1 >TripC trip rel
7UM62
FNo. 06853
RTC >TripC brk rel.
Legend:
UBI2 CB — Circuit breaker
TC — Circuit breaker trip coil
CB TC Aux AuxCont 2 AuxCont1 — Circuit breaker aux. contact (NO contact)
Cont 1 AuxCont2 — Circuit breaker aux. contact (NC contact)
UCtrl — Control voltage (trip voltage)
UBI1 — Input voltage for 1st binary input
UBI2 — Input voltage for 2nd binary input
L–
Figure 2-123 Principle of Trip Circuit Monitor with two Binary Inputs (Connected to Common
Potential)
7UM62 Manual 255

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Depending on the conditions of the trip contact and the circuit breaker, the binary
inputs are activated (logical condition ”H” in Table 2-16), or not activated (logical
condition ”L”).
.
Table 2-16 Condition Table for Binary Inputs, Depending on RTC and CB Position
No. Trip Contact Circuit AuxCont 1 AuxCont 2 BI 1 BI 2 Dyn. Status Stat. Status
Breaker
1 Open CLOSED Closed Open H L Normal operation with closed CB
2 Open or OPEN Open Closed L H Normal operation with open CB or

closed RTC has tripped with success
3 Closed CLOSED Closed Open L L Transition/fault Fault
4 Open CLOSED Closed Closed H H Theoretical status: Aux. contact

or OPEN defective,
BI defective, wrong connection
With this solution, it is impossible to distinguish between status 2 (”normal operation

with open CB LS” and ”KR triggered with success”. However, these two statuses are
normal statues and thus not critical. Status 4 is only theoretical and indicates a
hardware error. Even for healthy trip circuits the condition that both binary inputs are
not actuated (”L”) is possible during a short transition period (trip contact is closed, but
the circuit breaker has not yet opened.) A continuous state of this condition is only
possible when the trip circuit has been interrupted, a short-circuit exists in the trip
circuit, a loss of battery voltage occurs, or malfunctions occur with the circuit breaker
mechanism.
The conditions of the two binary inputs are checked periodically. A check takes place
about every 600 ms. If three consecutive conditional checks detect an abnormality
(after 1.8 s), an annunciation is reported (see Figure 2-122). The repeated
measurements help to determine the delay of the alarm message and to avoid that an
alarm is output during short-time transition phases. When the fault in the trip circuit has
been cleared, the annunciation is automatically reset.
Monitoring with The binary input is connected according to Figure 2-124 in parallel with the associated
One Binary Input trip contact. The circuit breaker auxiliary contact AuxCont2 is connected in series with
a high-ohm resistor R.
The control voltage for the circuit breaker should be about two times the value of the
minimum voltage drop at the binary (USt > 2·UBImin). Since the minimum voltage to
activate a binary input is 19 V, a DC voltage supply of 38 V or higher is required.
256 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
USt
L+ 7UM62
FNo. 06852
UBI >TripC trip rel
7UM62
RTC
Legend:
CB — Circuit breaker
R TC — Circuit breaker trip coil
AuxCont1 — Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (NO contact)
AuxCont2 — Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (NC contact)
R — Equivalent resistor
CB TC Aux AuxCont 2
UCtrl — Control voltage (trip voltage)
Cont 1 UBI — Control voltage for binary input
L–
Figure 2-124 Principle of Trip Circuit Monitoring with One Binary Input
During normal operation, the binary input is activated (logical condition “H”) when the
trip contact is open and the trip circuit is intact, because the monitoring circuit is closed
by either the circuit breaker auxiliary contact (if the circuit breaker is closed) or through
the equivalent resistor R. Only as long as the trip contact is closed, the binary input is
short circuited and thereby de-activated (logical condition ”L”).
If the binary input is continuously de-activated during operation, this leads to the
conclusion, there is an interruption in the trip circuit or loss of control voltage.
The trip circuit monitor does not operate during system faults. A momentary closed
tripping contact does not lead to a failure message. If, however, tripping contacts from
other devices operate in parallel with the trip circuit, then the failure annunciation must
be delayed (see also Figure 2-125). The conditions of the binary input are, therefore,
checked 500 times before an annunciation is sent. A condition check takes place
about every 600 ms, so trip circuit monitoring is only activated during an actual
malfunction of the trip circuit (after 300 s). When the fault in the trip circuit has been
cleared, the annunciation is automatically reset.
Note:
If the lock-out function is used, the trip circuit monitoring with only one binary input
must not be used as the relay remains permanently picked up after a trip command
(more than 300 s).
FNo. 06852
FNo. 06865
>TripC trip rel
& > n FAIL: Trip cir.
Fault cond.
n.. .... Number of condition checks (= 500)
(measurement repeated every 600 ms)
Figure 2-125 Logic Diagram for Trip Circuit Monitoring with One Binary Input
Figure 2-126 shows the logic diagram for the message that can be generated by the
trip circuit monitor, depending on the control settings and binary inputs.
7UM62 Manual 257

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
0182 Trip Cir. Sup.

Disabled
with 2 Bin. Inp.
”1”
OR
with 1 Bin. Inp.
&
FNo. 06864
FNo. 06852 & TripC ProgFail
Configured
>TripC trip rel
FNo. 06853 &
Configured
>TripC brk rel.
FNo. 06861
TripC OFF
8201 TRIP Cir. SUP.
FNo. 06865
OFF S Q & Function FAIL: Trip cir.
”1”
ON R
FNo. 06863
TripC ACTIVE
FNo. 06851 FNo. 06862

>BLOCK TripC TripC BLOCKED
Figure 2-126 Message Logic for the Trip Circuit Monitor
The function is only effective and accessible if it has been enabled during the
configuration of the protective functions at address 0182 Trip Cir. Sup. (Section
2.2) by setting one of the alternatives with 2 Binary Inputs or with 1 Binary
Input and provided that the required number of binary inputs is allocated to it and
that the function has been set at address 8201 TRIP Cir. SUP. = ON. If the
configuration of the binary inputs needed for this does not match the selected
monitoring type, then a message to this effect (”TripC ProgFail”) is sent. If the trip
circuit monitor is not to be used at all, address 0182 should be set to Disabled.
Further settings are not needed. The message of a trip circuit interruption is delayed
by a fixed amount of time. For two binary inputs, the delay is about 2 seconds, and for
one binary input, the delay is about 300 ms. This ensures that the trip circuit monitor
waits until the longest possible duration of a trip signal has elapsed, and generates an
alarm only if there is a real malfunction in the trip circuit.
Monitoring with Note: When using only one binary input (BI) for the trip circuit monitor, some
One Binary Input malfunctions, such as interruption of the trip circuit or loss of battery voltage, can
indeed be detected, but malfunctions with closed trip contacts cannot. Therefore, the
measurement must take place over a period of time that bridges the longest possible
duration of a closed trip contact. This is ensured by the fixed number of measurement
repetitions and the time between the condition checks.
When using only one binary input, a resistor R is inserted into the circuit on the system
side, instead of the missing second binary input. Through appropriate sizing of the
resistor and depending on the system relationship, a lower control voltage can often
be sufficient. The resistor R is inserted into the circuit of the circuit breaker auxiliary
258 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
contact (AuxCont2), to facilitate the detection of a malfunction when the circuit breaker
auxiliary contact (AuxCont1) open and the trip contact has dropped out (see Figure 2-
124). This resistor must be sized such that the circuit breaker trip coil is no longer
energized when the circuit breaker is open (which means AuxCont1 is open and
AuxCont2 is closed). The binary input should still be picked up when the trip contact
is simultaneously opened.
This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax, and a lower limit Rmin,
from which the optimal value of the arithmetic mean should be selected:
R max + R min
R = ---------------------------------
2
In order that the minimum voltage for controlling the binary input is ensured, Rmax is
derived as:
U St – U BI min
R max = æ ---------------------------------ö – R TC
è I BI (High) ø
So the circuit breaker trip coil does not remain energized in the above case, Rmin is
derived as:
U Ctrl – U TC (LOW)
R min = R TC ⋅ æ ---------------------------------------------ö
è U TC (LOW) ø
IBI (HIGH) Constant current with BI on (= 1.8 mA)

UBI min Minimum Control Voltage for BI (= 19 V for delivery setting for
nominal voltage of 24/48/60 V;
= 88 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 110/125/220/250 V)
UCtrl Control voltage for trip circuit
RTC DC Resistance of circuit breaker trip coil
UTC (LOW) Maximum voltage on the circuit breaker trip coil that does not lead to
tripping
If the result of the calculation is Rmax < Rmin the calculation must be repeated, with the
next lowest pickup threshold UBI min; for this threshold one or more jumpers must be
set in the device (see Section 3.1.3).
For the power consumption of the resistance:
U Ctrl 2
P R = I ⋅ R = æ ---------------------ö ⋅ R
2
è R + R TCø
Example:
IBI (HIGH) 1.8 mA (from SIPROTEC® 7UM62)
UBI min 19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 24/48/60 V (from the
7UM62)
88 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 110/125/220/250 V)
(from the 7UM62)
UCtrl 110 V (from system / trip circuit)
RTC 500 Ω (from system / trip circuit)
UTC (LOW) 2 V (from system / trip circuit)
7UM62 Manual 259

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
R max = æ ----------------------------------ö – 500 Ω = 50.1 kΩ

110 V – 19 V
è 1.8 mA ø
R min = 500 Ω ⋅ æ ------------------------------ö = 27 kΩ

110 V – 2 V
è 2V ø
R max + R min
R = -------------------------------- = 38.6 kΩ
2
The closest standard value of 39 kΩ is selected; the power is:

2
P R = æ ----------------------------------------ö ⋅ 39 kΩ
110 V
è 39 kΩ + 0.5 kΩø
P R ≥ 0.3 W
2.39.2.1 Settings for the Trip Circuit Supervision

8201 TRIP Cir. SUP. OFF OFF TRIP Circuit Supervision
ON
2.39.2.2 Information

06851 >BLOCK TripC >BLOCK Trip circuit supervision
06853 >TripC brk rel. >Trip circuit supervision: breaker relay
06852 >TripC trip rel >Trip circuit supervision: trip relay
06861 TripC OFF Trip circuit supervision OFF
06862 TripC BLOCKED Trip circuit supervision is BLOCKED
06863 TripC ACTIVE Trip circuit supervision is ACTIVE
06864 TripC ProgFail Trip Circuit blk. Bin. input is not set
06865 FAIL: Trip cir. Failure Trip Circuit
260 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Threshold Supervision
2.40 Threshold Supervision
General This function monitors the thresholds of selected measured values, checking whether
the values exceed or drop below these thresholds. The processing speed of this func-
tion is so high that it can be used for protection applications. The necessary logical can
be implemented by means of CFC.
The principal field of application of threshold supervision are high-speed supervision
and automatic functions as well as application-specific protection functions (e.g. pow-
er plant decoupling) which are not included in the scope of protection functions.
There are 6 threshold supervision blocks, 3 each for responding to values in excess
of and below the threshold. They output as result a logical indication that can be further
processed by the CFC.
A total of 9 processable measured values are available, all of which can be evaluated
as percentages. Each threshold block can be allocated one of these 9 measured val-
ues. As in all other protection functions, the measured values are referred to second-
ary quantities.
Table 2-17 below show the useable measured values. The threshold values are que-
ried once per cycle.
Table 2-17 Measured Values
Measured Value Scaling Comments

P P/SN,sec ⋅ 100 % The positive sequence system quantities for U
(Active power) (normalized with and I are formed once per cycle from the sampled
addr. 252) values. From the result, P is calculated. The
measuring result is subject to the angle correction
(address 204 CT ANGLE W0) in the current path.
Q Q/SN,sec ⋅ 100 % The positive sequence system quantities for U
(Reactive power) (normalized with and I are formed once per cycle from the sampled
addr. 252) values. From the result, Q is calculated. The
measuring result is subject to the angle correction
(address 204 CT ANGLE W0) in the current path.
∆P ∆P/SN,sec ⋅ 100 % The active power difference is calculated from the
(Change of active (normalized with active power over a measuring window of 3
power) addr 252) cycles.
U1 U1/UN,sec ⋅ 100 % The positive sequence voltage is determined
(Positive (normalized with from the phase-to-earth voltages on the basis of
sequence voltage) addr. 251) the definition equation for symmetrical
components. The calculation is perfomed once
per cycle.
U2 U2/UN,sec ⋅ 100 % The negative sequence voltage is determined
(Negative (normalized with from the phase-to-earth voltages on the basis of
sequence voltage) addr. 251) the definition equation for symmetrical
components. The calculation is perfomed once
per cycle.
7UM62 Manual 261

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Table 2-17 Measured Values
Measured Value Scaling Comments

I0 I0/IN,S2,sec ⋅ 100 % The zero sequence current is determined from
(Zero sequence (normalized with the phase currents on the basis of the definition
current system addr. 212) equation for symmetrical components. The
side 2) calculation is perfomed once per cycle.
I1 I1/IN,S2,sec ⋅ 100 % The positive sequence current is determined from
(Positive the phase currents on the basis of the definition
sequence current equation for symmetrical components. The
system side 2) calculation is perfomed once per cycle.
I2 I2/IN,S2,sec ⋅ 100 % The negative sequence current is determined
(Negative from the phase currents on the basis of the
sequence current definition equation for symmetrical components.
system side 2) The calculation is perfomed once per cycle.
ϕ ϕ/180° ⋅ 100 % The power angle is calculated from the positive
(Power angle) sequence voltage and the positive sequence
current. The following definition applies:
ϕ = ϕU - ϕI (A positive angle will appear if the
current lags behind the voltage)
The following figure shows an overview of the logic.
262 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Disabled
Pa
Pr
Delta Pa
U1 8502 THRESHOLD MV1>
U2 7960
Meas. Value1>
I0
I1
I2
PHI
8501 MEAS. VALUE 1>
Disabled
Pa
Pr
Delta Pa
U1 8512 THRESHOLD MV6<
U2 7965
Meas. Value6<
I0
I1
I2
PHI
8511 MEAS. VALUE 6<
Figure 2-127 Logic Diagram of the Threshold Supervision
The figure shows that the measured values can be freely allocated to the threshold
supervision blocks. The dropout ratio for the MVx> stage is 0.95 or 1 %. Accordingly,
it is 1.05 or 1 % for the MVx< stage.
General The threshold supervision function is only effective and accessible if address 185
THRESHOLD has been set to Enabled during the configuration of the protection func-
tions.
Pickup Values The pickup values are set as percentages. Please note the scaling factors listed in Ta-
ble 2-17.
7UM62 Manual 263

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The measured values for power P, Q and ∆P, as well as the phase angle, can be either
positive or negative. Where the monitoring is for a negative threshold value, the num-
ber line definition applies (–10 is smaller than –5).
Example:
The measured quantity P (active power) is allocated to MV1> and set to –5 %.
If the actual measured value is higher than –5 % (e.g. –4 % or even +100 %), the in-
dication “Meas. Value1>” is output as a logical “1”, which means a pickup in terms
of protection engineering. A dropout signal (indication “Meas. Value1>” logical “0”)
is output if the measured value drops to less than –5 % ⋅ 1.05 = –5.25 %.
With the measured quantity P allocated to MV2<, the monitoring checks whether the
value drops below the threshold.
A pickup signal is output in that case if the measured value becomes less than –5 %
(e.g. –8 %). The dropout value is at –5 % ⋅ 0.95 = –4.75 %.
Note:
The measured values U1, U2, I0, I1 and I2 are always greater than 0. Care should be
taken here to use only positive threshold values which allow the indication to drop out.
When defining the power angle ϕ, it should be kept in mind that this angle is only de-
fined for ± 100 % (equivalent to ± 180°) or less. The threshold value should be chosen
accordingly, taking into account the dropout ratio.
Further Processing The indications of the 6 measured value monitoring blocks (see list of information) are
of Indications available in the configuration matrix for further logical processing by the CFC (see
System Manual, Chapter 5).
2.40.2.1 Settings of the Threshold Supervision

8501 MEAS. VALUE 1> Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Threshold
Active Power P MV1>
Reactive Power Q
Change of Active Power
Delta P
U1
Negative Sequence Voltage
U2
Zero Sequence Current I0
Positive Sequence Current
I1
I2
Power Angle PHI
8502 THRESHOLD MV1> -200..200 % 100 % Pickup Value of Measured Value

MV1>
264 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

8503 MEAS. VALUE 2< Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Threshold
Active Power P MV2<
Reactive Power Q
Delta P
U1
U2
I1
I2
Power Angle PHI
8504 THRESHOLD MV2< -200..200 % 100 % Pickup Value of Measured Value
MV2<
Active Power P MV3>
Reactive Power Q
Delta P
U1
U2
I1
I2
Power Angle PHI
MV3>
Active Power P MV4<
Reactive Power Q
Delta P
U1
U2
I1
I2
Power Angle PHI
MV4<
7UM62 Manual 265

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

Active Power P MV5>
Reactive Power Q
Delta P
U1
U2
I1
I2
Power Angle PHI
MV5>
Active Power P MV6<
Reactive Power Q
Delta P
U1
U2
I1
I2
Power Angle PHI
MV6<
2.40.2.2 Information for the Threshold Supervision

07960 Meas. Value1> Measured Value MV1> picked up
07961 Meas. Value2< Measured Value MV2< picked up
266 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
External Trip Coupling
2.41 External Trip Coupling
Up to four desired signal from external protection or supervision units can be

incorporated into the processing of 7UM62. The signals are coupled as ”External
signal” via binary inputs. Like the internal protection and supervision signals, they can
be annunciated, time delayed, transmitted to the trip matrix, and blocked. By means
of these signals it is possible to include external protection commands, e.g. from
Buchholz protection or shaft current supervision, into the processing of annunciations
and trip commands of 7UM61. Furthermore, an interaction of protection functions of
different numerical machine protection relays of the series 7UM6 can be performed.
The status of the assigned inputs is checked in cyclic intervals. Alteration of the input
status is considered only after two subsequent status checks with equal result. An
additional time delay 8602 T DELAY is available for each of the external trip
command channels.
The logic diagram of one external trip command channel is illustrated in Figure 2-128.
In total, the relay incorporates four such channels, i.e. four times this logic. The
illustrated function numbers are valid for the first external trip command channel.
FNo. 04536 etc.

Ext 1 picked up
FNo. 04537 etc. Tripping

matrix
Ext 1 Gen.TRP
8602 T DELAY
FNo. 04526
>Ext trip 1
&
TMin
TRIP CMD
FNo. 04523 FNo. 04532 etc.
>BLOCK Ext 1 Ext 1 BLOCKED
Figure 2-128 Logic Diagram of One External Trip Command Channel
General External trip commands via binary inputs are only effective and accessible if during the
configuration of the protective functions the addresses 0186 EXT. TRIP 1 through
0189 EXT. TRIP 4 have been set to Enabled. Set Disabled if the functions are
not required. Addresses 8601 EXTERN TRIP 1 through 8901 EXTERN TRIP 4 are
used to switch the functions individually ON or OFF, or to block only the trip command
(Block Relay).
Like the internal protection and supervision signals, they can be annunciated as
”External trip”, time delayed and transmitted to the trip matrix. The delay times are set
at addresses 8602 T DELAY through 8902 T DELAY. Like for the protective
functions, the dropout of the direct input trippings is extended by TMin TRIP CMD
parameterized minimum duration.
7UM62 Manual 267

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.41.2.1 Settings

8601 EXTERN TRIP 1 OFF OFF External Trip Function 1
ON
mands
8602 T DELAY 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Ext. Trip 1 Time Delay

ON
mands

ON
mands

ON
mands
2.41.2.2 Information for the Function Control

04523 >BLOCK Ext 1 >Block external trip 1
04526 >Ext trip 1 >Trigger external trip 1
04531 Ext 1 OFF External trip 1 is switched OFF
04532 Ext 1 BLOCKED External trip 1 is BLOCKED
04533 Ext 1 ACTIVE External trip 1 is ACTIVE
04536 Ext 1 picked up External trip 1: General picked up
04537 Ext 1 Gen.TRP External trip 1: General TRIP
04543 >BLOCK Ext 2 >BLOCK external trip 2
268 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
External Trip Coupling

7UM62 Manual 269

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.42 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes
Up to 2 thermoboxes with a total of 12 measuring points can be used for temperature

detection and evaluated by the protection device. They are particularly useful for mon-
itoring the thermal condition of motors, generators and transformers. In rotating ma-
chines, they also check the bearing temperatures for violation of limit values. The tem-
peratures are measured at various points of the protected object by temperature sen-
sors (RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector), and fed to the device via one or two
thermoboxes 7XV566.
Interaction with the The ambient or coolant temperature can be fed via the thermobox to the overload pro-
Overload tection function of the 7UM62. For this purpose, the required temperature sensor must
Protection be connected to sensor input 1 of the 1st thermobox (corresponds to RTD 1).
Thermobox 7XV56 The thermobox 7XV566 is an external device mounted on a standard mounting rail. It
has 6 temperature inputs and an RS485 interface to communicate with the protection
device. The thermobox takes the coolant temperature of each measuring point from
the resistance value of the temperature detectors connected with a two- or three-wire
line (Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120) and converts it to a digital value. The digital values are
output at a serial interface.
Communication The protection device can communicate with up to 2 thermoboxes via its service port
with the Protection (port C or D).
Device
Up to 12 temperature measuring points are in this way available. For long distances
between the thermobox and the protection device, communication via fiber-optic cable
is recommended. Section A.4.1 of the Appendix shows possible communication archi-
tectures.
Temperature The non-linearized temperature values are converted into a temperature; the user can
Evaluation choose between °C and °F. The conversion factor depends on the temperature detec-
tor used.
For each measuring point, two pickup thresholds can be defined, the signals of which
are then available for any kind of further processing. The user can allocate the pickup
signals in the configuration matrix as required.
To each temperature detector is assigned an alarm which is issued in case of a short-
circuit or an interruption of the sensor circuit.
Figure 2-129 shows the logic diagram of the temperature evaluation.
A connection diagram and a dimensional drawing can be found in the operating in-
structions supplied with the thermobox.
270 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes
9011A RTD 1 TYPE 9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1
Non-linear- Temperature
RTD 1 St.1 p.up
ized values calculation FNo. 14112
9015 RTD 1 STAGE 2
RTD 1 St.2 p.up

FNo. 14113
Monitoring Fail: RTD 1

FNo. 14111
≥1 Fail: RTD
FNo. 14101
Fail: RTD-Box 1
FNo. 00264
Figure 2-129 Logic Diagram of the Temperature Evaluation
General The temperature detection function is only effective and accessible if it has been as-
signed to an interface during the configuration of the protection functions (Section
2.2.1). Address 0190 RTD-BOX INPUT is used to allocate the thermobox(es) to the
interface (e.g. interface C) through which it will be operated. The number of detector
inputs and the communication mode are selected with address 0191 RTD CONNEC-
TION. The temperature unit (°C or °F) has been set in Power System Data 1 at ad-
dress 0276 TEMP. UNIT.
Settings on the The settings to be made on the protection device are the same for each input; they are
Protection Device described here as an example for measuring input 1.
For RTD1 (temperature detector for measuring 1), the type of temperature detector is
set at address 9011A RTD 1 TYPE. Setting options are Pt 100 W, Ni 120 W and
Ni 100 W. Where no measuring point is provided for RTD1, RTD 1 TYPE = Not
connected is set. This setting is only possible with DIGSI® 4 under „Advanced Pa-
rameters“.
7UM62 Manual 271

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
The location RTD1 is communicated to the device at address 9012A RTD 1 LOCA-
TION. Setting options are Oil, Ambient, Winding, Bearing and Other. This set-
ting is only possible with DIGSI® 4 under “Advanced Parameters”.
You can also set an alarm temperature and a tripping temperature. Depending on the
temperature unit selected in the power system data (Section 2.3 at address 0276
TEMP. UNIT), you can select the alarm temperature at address 9013 RTD 1 STAGE
1 in degree Celsius (°C) or at address 9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1 in degree Fahrenheit
(°F). The tripping temperature is set at address 9015 RTD 1 STAGE 2 in degree
Celsius (°C) or at address 9016 RTD 1 STAGE 2 in degree Fahrenheit (°F).
In the same way, you can make the settings for all connected temperature detectors
(see the settings table in 2.42.2.1).
Settings on the Where temperature detectors with a 2-wire line are used, the line resistance must be
Thermobox measured and set (with the temperature detector shorted). To do so, select mode 6 in
the thermobox and enter the resistance value for the desired detector (range 0 to
50.6 Ω). For temperature detectors with a 3-wire line, no extra settings are required.
The information is exchanged with a baud rate of 9600 bits/s. The parity is even. The
bus number is set to 0 in the factory. Changes can be made in mode 7 on the ther-
mobox. The following convention applies:
Table 2-18 Setting the Bus Address on the Thermobox
Operation Number of Thermoboxes Address

Simplex 1 0
Half-duplex 1 1
1st thermobox: 1
Half-duplex 2
2nd thermobox: 2
More information can be found in the operating instructions supplied with the ther-
mobox.
Further Processing The thermobox is seen in DIGSI® 4 as part of the 7UM62 protection device, i.e. indi-
of Measured Values cations and measured values appear in the configuration matrix just like those of in-
and Indications ternal functions, and can be masked and processed in the same way. This means that
indications and measured values can also be transmitted to the integrated user-defin-
abled logic (CFC) and linked in any desired way.
If you want an indication to appear in the operational indication buffer, mark the matrix
cell at the appropriate column/line intersection with a cross.
272 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
2.42.2.1 Settings of the Temperature Detection Function

9011A RTD 1 TYPE not connected Pt 100 Ohm RTD 1: Type
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9012A RTD 1 LOCATION Oil Winding RTD 1: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1 -50..250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1

Pickup
9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1 -58..482 °F; ∞ 212 °F RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup
9021A RTD 2 TYPE not connected not connected RTD 2: Type

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9022A RTD 2 LOCATION Oil Other RTD 2: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup
7UM62 Manual 273

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
274 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
7UM62 Manual 275

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup
9101A RTD10 TYPE not connected not connected RTD10: Type

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9102A RTD10 LOCATION Oil Other RTD10: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
9103 RTD10 STAGE 1 -50..250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD10: Temperature Stage 1

Pickup
9104 RTD10 STAGE 1 -58..482 °F; ∞ 212 °F RTD10: Temperature Stage 1

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup
276 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup

Pickup
2.42.2.2 Information for the Temperature Detection Function

14101 Fail: RTD Fail: RTD (broken wire/shorted)
14111 Fail: RTD 1 Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/shorted)
14112 RTD 1 St.1 p.up RTD 1 Temperature stage 1 picked up
7UM62 Manual 277

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions

14201 Fail: RTD10 Fail: RTD10 (broken wire/shorted)
14202 RTD10 St.1 p.up RTD10 Temperature stage 1 picked up
278 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Inversion of Phase Sequence (Phase Sequence Reversal)
2.43 Inversion of Phase Sequence (Phase Sequence Reversal)
General A phase rotation feature via binary input and parameter is implemented in the 7UM62,
thus ensuring that all protective and monitoring functions operate correctly when the
phase rotation is reversed.
If an anti-clockwise rotating phase sequence permanently exists, the appropriate
setting should be entered in the power system data (see Section 2.3).
If the phase rotation reverses during operation (e.g. in a pumping power station, the
transition from the generator operation to the pumping operation is realized by
changing the phase rotation), then a reversal signal at the input masked for this
purpose is sufficient to inform the protective relay of the phase-sequence reversal.
Logic The phase rotation is permanently set in a parameter of the power system data at
address 0271 PHASE SEQ.. The binary input ”>Reverse Rot.” sets the phase
rotation for the opposite of the setting (see figure 2-130).
FNo. 05145
>Reverse Rot. >
OR 200 ms
FNo. 05002 > & FNo. 05148
Operat. Cond. & Rotation L1L3L2
OR
0271 PHASE SEQ.
FNo. 05147
L1 L2 L3
& OR Rotation L1L2L3
”1”
L1 L3 L2
&
&
Figure 2-130 Message Logic of the Phase-Sequence Reversal
For safety reasons, the device accepts the phase rotation reversal only by a time when
no usable measured quantities exist. The binary input is only inquired if operational
condition 1 is not present. If a reverse command is present for a period of at least
200 ms, the measured quantities of phases L2 and L3 exchanged.
If operational condition 1 is reached before the minimum control time of 200 ms has
expired, the phase rotation reversal does not become effective.
As no phase rotation reversal is possible in operational condition 1, the control signal
could be cancelled in operational condition 1 without a phase rotation. For safety
reasons, the control signal should be permanently present in order to avoid
malfunctions also in case of a device reset (e.g. due to configuration change).
7UM62 Manual 279

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Influence on The swapping of phases directly impacts the calculation of positive and negative
Protective sequence quantities, as well as phase-to-phase voltages via the subtraction of one
Functions phase-to-ground voltage from another. Therefore, this function is vital so that phase
detection messages, fault values, and operating measurement values are not falsified.
As stated before, this function influences the unbalance load protection function,
directional overcurrent protection function, and some of the monitoring functions
(see Subsection 2.38.1.3), that issue messages if the required and calculated phase
rotations do not match.
2.43.2 Setting Hint
The normal phase sequence has been set at the address 0271 (see Section 2.3).
If, on the system side, phase rotation reversal is performed temporarily, then this is
communicated to the protective device via the binary input ”>Reverse Rot.”
(FNo. 05145).
280 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Protection Function Logic
2.44 Protection Function Logic
The function logic is the heart of the device. It coordinates the sequence of both the
protective and auxiliary functions, processes functional decisions, and processes data
received from the system. In particular, the function logic is responsible for the
following:
• Processing Measurement and Detection Logic
• Processing Tripping Logic
2.44.1.1 Processing Tripping Logic
General Device The pickup signals for all protective functions in the device are connected via an OR
Pickup function, and lead to the general device pickup. General device pickup is initiated by
the first function to pickup, and general device drop out occurs when the last function
drops out. A corresponding message ”Dev. Pickup” indicating that general device
pickup has occurred is reported.
General device pickup is a precondition for a series of internal and external functions
that occur subsequently. The following are among the internal functions controlled by
general device pickup:
• Start of Trip Log: From general device pickup to general device drop out, all fault
messages are entered in the trip log.
• Initialization of Oscillographic Records: The storage and maintenance of
oscillographic values can also be made dependent on the general device pickup.
• Generation of Spontaneous Messages: Certain fault messages are displayed in the
device display as so-called spontaneous messages (see below ”Spontaneous
Messages”). These display messages can also be made dependent on the general
device trip.
Spontaneous Spontaneous messages are fault messages that appear in the display automatically
Messages when general device pickup has occurred. For the 7UM62, these messages include:
• “Relay PICKUP”: protective function that last picked up
• ”Relay TRIP”: protection function that last initiated a trip signal
• “PU Time”: running time from general device pickup to general device
dropout, with time indicated in ms;
• “TRIP Time”: running time from general device pickup to initiation of the first
trip signal by the device, with time indicated in ms;
Please note that the overload protection does not have a pickup comparable to the
other protective functions. The general relay pickup time PU Time is first started with
the trip signal, and an abnormal occurrence is opened. The dropout of the thermal
image of the overload protection ends the fault message and, thereby, the running
time from general relay pickup to general device dropout PU Time.
7UM62 Manual 281

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.44.2 Processing Tripping Logic
2.44.2.1 Functional Description
General trip The tripping signals for all protective functions are connected by ”OR” and generate a
message ”General TRIP” indicating that the device has initiated a trip signal.
This annunciation, like individual trip indications, can be allocated to an LED or an
output relay. It can also be used as a sum event.
Terminating the • If a protective function is set to Block Relay, it is blocked for the activation of the
Tripping Signal output relay. The other protective functions are not affected by this.
• A trip command once transmitted is stored (see Figure 2-131). At the same time,
the minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is started. This trip signal
duration timer ensures the trip signal is transmitted to the circuit breaker for a
sufficient amount of time, even if the function which issued the trip signal drops out
quickly. The trip signal is only terminated after all protection Functions drop out AND
the minimum trip signal duration expires.
• Finally, it is possible to latch the trip signal until it is manually reset (lockout
function). This allows to lock the circuit breaker against reclosing until the cause of
the malfunction has been clarified and the lockout has been manually reset. The
reset takes place either by pressing the LED reset key or by activating an
appropriately masked binary input (”>Reset LED”). A precondition, of course, is
that the circuit breaker trip coil – as usual – remains energized at the circuit breaker
as long as the trip signal is present, and that the trip coil current is interrupted by the
auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker.
Block.Relais, e.g. I>

& S Q
Tripping, e.g. I> R Relay
triggering
0280 TMin TRIP CMD
&
Lockout function
(Output relay stored) S Q
Lockout reset
R
(using LED–Reset)
Figure 2-131 Terminating the Trip Signal, Example of a Protective Function
2.44.2.2 Settings for the Tripping Logic
Trip and Close The setting of the minimum trip signal duration at address 0280 TMin TRIP CMD
Command Duration was already discussed in Subsection 2.3. This time is valid for all protective functions
282 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
that can initiate trip signals, as well as for trip signals that are initiated using the device
function controller.
Addr. Parameter Setting Default Settings Comment

0280 TMin TRIP CMD. 0.01 .. 32.00 s 0.15 s Minimum duration of the trip
command
2.44.3 Fault Display on the LEDs/LCD
2.44.3.1 Principle of Function
The storage of messages masked to local LEDs, and the maintenance of spontaneous
messages, can be made dependent on whether the device has issued a trip signal. In
this situation, these messages are not issued, if one or more protective functions have
only picked up on a fault, but a trip signal has not been issued yet by the 7UM62
because the fault was cleared by another device (for instance outside of the own
protection range). These messages are then limited to faults in the own protection
range. Figure 2-132 illustrates the creation of the reset command for stored
messages. By the moment of the device dropout, the stationary conditions (fault
indication with excitation/with trip signal; tripping/no tripping) decide whether the new
fault remains stored or is reset.
7110 FltDisp.LED/LCD
Targets on every pickup

”1”
Targets on TRIP only
&
Relay TRIP Reset LED and LCD messages
Trip Signal drop out
Figure 2-132 Creation of the reset command for the memory of the LED and LCD messages
2.44.3.2 Settings
Pickup of a new protective function generally turns off any previously set light displays,
so that only the latest fault is displayed at any time. It can be selected whether the
stored LED displays and the spontaneous messages on the display appear upon
renewed pickup, or only after a renewed trip signal is issued. In order to enter the
desired type of display, select in the SETTINGS menu the sub-menu Device. Address
7110 FltDisp.LED/LCD offers the two alternatives Display Targets on
every Pickup and Display Target on TRIP only.
Addr. Parameter Setting Default Settings Comment

7110 FltDisp.LED/LCD Display Targets on every Display Targets on Fault display on the LEDs/LCD
Pickup every Pickup
Display Targets on TRIP only
7UM62 Manual 283

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.44.4 Statistical Counters
2.44.4.1 Functional Description
Number of Trips The number of trips initiated by the 7UM62 is counted, as long as the position of the
circuit breaker is monitored via breaker auxiliary contacts and binary inputs. To use
this function, the internal pulse counter ”Trip Count” is masked in the matrix to a
binary input that is controlled by the circuit breaker OPEN position. The pulse count
value ”Trip Count” can be found in the submenu ”Statistic” if ”Measured and
Metered Values Only” has been selected in the matrix.
Switch-Off Values Additionally, the following switch-off values are indicated in the fault messages for
(at Trip) each trip signal:
− the primary currents in all three phases in kA, individually for side 1 and side 2
− if tripping has been initiated by the differential protection, the differential and
restraint currents of all three phases are indicated.
− the three phase-earth-voltages in kV
− primary active power P in kW, MW or GW (precisely averaged power)
− primary reactive power Q in kVA, MVA or GVA (precisely averaged power)
− frequency in Hz
Operating Hours The operating hours under load (= the current value in at least one phase is larger than
the limit value BkrClosed I MIN) set at address 0281) are also stored.
Accumulated The shutdown currents for each phase, which are indicated at every trip command
Shutdown Currents individually for side 1 and side 2, are accumulated and stored.
The counter and memory levels are secured against loss of auxiliary voltage.
2.44.4.2 Setting/Resetting
The above listed statistical counters are set and reset in the menu
ANNUNCIATIONS → STATISTIC by overwriting the displayed counter values.
284 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
2.44.4.3 Information for the Statistical Counter

00003 >Time Synch >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock
00005 >Reset LED >Reset LED
00060 Reset LED Reset LED
00015 >Test mode >Test mode
Test mode Test mode
00016 >DataStop >Stop data transmission
DataStop Stop data transmission
UnlockDT Unlock data transmission via BI
>Light on >Back Light on
00051 Device OK Device is Operational and Protecting
00052 ProtActive At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active
00055 Reset Device Reset Device 1)

00056 Initial Start Initial Start of Device 2)
00067 Resume Resume 3)
00069 DayLightSavTime Daylight Saving Time
SynchClock Clock Synchronization
00070 Settings Calc. Setting calculation is running
00071 Settings Check Settings Check
00072 Level-2 change Level-2 change
00125 Chatter ON Chatter ON
HWTestMod Hardware Test Mode
1) Device is reset on each Power ON

2
) Initial start of device after initialization using DIGSI® 4
3
) Restart after loading a parameter set or after reset
7UM62 Manual 285

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.45 Auxiliary Functions
The auxiliary functions of the 7UM62 relay include:

• processing of messages,
• processing of operational measured values,
• storage of fault record data.
• Commissioning aids.
2.45.1 Processing of Messages
After the occurrence of a system fault, data regarding the response of the protective
relay and the measured quantities should be saved for future analysis. For this reason
message processing is done in three ways:
LEDs and Important events and conditions are displayed, using LEDs on the front panel of the
Binary Outputs relay. The relay also contains output relays for remote signaling. All LEDs and binary
(Output Relays) outputs indicating specific messages can be freely configured. The relay is usually
delivered with a default setting. The SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual describes in detail
how to proceed for the configuration. The default settings on delivery are listed in the
Appendix of this manual, Section .
The output relays and the LEDs can be operated in a latched or unlatched mode
(individually settable for each one).
The latched conditions are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage. Please
observe the following:
− If necessary, clear stored indications by pressing the ”LED-Reset” key.
− Remotely using a binary input,
− Using one of the serial interfaces,
− Automatically at the beginning of a new pickup.
Condition messages should not be stored. Also, they cannot be reset until the criterion
to be reported is cleared. This applies to messages from monitoring functions, or
similar.
A green LED displays operational readiness of the relay, and cannot be reset. It goes
out if the self-check feature of the microprocessor recognizes an abnormal
occurrence, or if the auxiliary voltage is lost.
When auxiliary voltage is present, but the relay has an internal malfunction, then the
red LED (ERROR) lights up and the processor blocks the relay.
Fault Information Events and conditions can be read out on the display on the front cover of the relay.
Display or Personal Using the front operator interface or the rear service interface, for instance, a personal
Computer computer can be connected, to which the information can be sent.
In the idle condition, as long as no system fault is present, the display field can display
selected operating information (overview of operating measurement values). In the
case of a system fault, information about the system fault appears instead
(spontaneous display messages, see also Section 2.44.1.1). After the fault related
286 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Auxiliary Functions
annunciations have been acknowledged, the initial display is shown again.

Acknowledgement can be performed by pressing the LED button on the front panel.
The relay is also equipped with several event buffers, for operational messages, circuit
breaker statistics, etc., which are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage by a
buffer battery. These messages can be retrieved, at any time, using the operating
keypad in the display field, or transferred to a personal computer, using the serial
operator interface. Readout of messages during operation is described in detail in the
SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual.
Types of Annunciations can be of one of the following types:

Annunciations
• Operational annunciations; these are generated while the device is operating:
Information regarding the status of device functions, measured data, power system
data, control command logs etc.
• Alarms; these are annunciations of the last 8 network faults processed by the
device.
• Switching statistics annunciations; these are counters for trip commands initiated
by the device, in some cases reclosure commands, values of shutdown currents
and accumulated short-circuit currents.
A complete list of all message and output functions that can be generated by the
device, with the associated information number (FNo), can be found in the Appendix.
The lists also indicate where each message can be sent. The lists are based on a
SIPROTEC® 4 device with the maximum complement of functions. If functions are not
present in the specific version of the device, or if they are set as “Disabled” in device
configuration, then the associated messages cannot appear.
2.45.1.1 Operational Annunciations
Operating messages contain information that the device generates during operation
and about the operation. Up to 200 operating messages are stored in chronological
order in the device. New messages are added at the end of the list. If the memory has
been exceeded, then the oldest message is overwritten for each new message.
2.45.1.2 Fault Annunciations
After a short-circuit fault on the system, for example, important information about the
progression of the fault can be retrieved, such as the pickup of a protective element or
the initiation of a trip signal. The time the initial occurrence of the short-circuit fault
occurred is accurately provided via the system clock. Time progression of the short-
circuit fault is reported based on the moment of pickup, so that the duration, until the
trip signal is issued and interrupted, is available. The time resolution used for reporting
is 1 ms.
Spontaneous After a fault, the device displays automatically and without any operator action on its
Annunciations on LCD display the most important fault data from the general device pickup in the se-
the Device Front quence shown in Figure 2-133.
7UM62 Manual 287

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
U0> picked up Protective Function that picked up first;

S/E/F TRIP Protective Function that dropped out last;
PU Time 440ms Running time from general pickup to dropout;
TRIP Time 301ms Running time from general pickup to the first trip command
Figure 2-133 Display of Spontaneous Messages on the Device Front
Retrieved The messages for the last eight network faults can be retrieved. Where a generator
Messages fault causes several protective functions to pick up, the fault is considered to include
all that occurred between pickup of the first protective function and dropout of the last
protective function.
In total 600 messages can be recorded. Oldest data are erased for newest data when
the buffer is full.
2.45.1.3 General Interrogation
The present condition of a SIPROTEC® device can be retrieved by a general

interrogation using DIGSI® 4. All messages included in a general interrogation are
displayed with their present value.
2.45.1.4 Spontaneous Annunciations
The spontaneous annunciations displayed using DIGSI® 4 reflect the present status
of incoming information. New annunciations are displayed immediately, no triggered
or cyclic refreshment is required.
2.45.1.5 Statistical Counters
The messages in switching statistics are counters for the accumulation of interrupted
currents by each of the breaker poles, the number of trips issued by the device to the
breaker, and the operating hours of the breaker and protected equipment. The
interrupted currents are in primary terms.
Switching statistics can be viewed on the LCD of the device, or on a PC running
DIGSI® 4 and connected to the operating or service interface.
A password is not required to read switching statistics; however, a password is
required to change or delete the statistics.
Information to a Stored information can also be transferred to a central control system (SCADA), using
Control Center the system interface. The transfer can take place using various transfer protocols.
288 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Auxiliary Functions
2.45.2 Measurements
Display of A series of measured values and the values derived from them are constantly
Measured Values available for call up on site, or for data transfer (See Table 2-19, as well as the
following list).
The operational measured values listed in Table 2-19 can be read out as secondary,
primary or percent values. A precondition for correctly displaying the primary and
percentage values is complete and correct entry of the nominal values for the current
transformers, and protected equipment, in accordance with Subsections 2.3 and 2.5.
Table 2-19 lists the formulae for the conversion of secondary into primary or
percentage values.
Depending on the version ordered, the type of device connection and the configured
protective functions, only a part of the operational measured values listed in Table 2-
19 may be available. The displacement voltage 3U0 is calculated from the phase-earth
voltages: 3U0 = |UL1 + UL2 + UL3|. All three voltage inputs must be phase-ground
connected for this.
Table 2-19 Conversion Formulae between Secondary Values and Primary/Percentage Values
Measured Val. Secondary Primary %

IL1 S2, IL2 S2, Isec S2
IL3 S2, I
prim. S2
IN–PRI I–CT S2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ 100
I1 S2, I2 S --------------------------------------------- ⋅ I sec S2 SN GEN/MOTOR ⁄ ( 3 ⋅ UN GEN/MOTOR )
IN–SEC I–CT S2
3I0 S2
IL1 S1, IL2 S1, Isec S1 Diff. protect. for generators/motors:
IL3 S1, IN–PRI I–CT S1- I
-------------------------------------------- ⋅I prim. S1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ 100
IN–SEC I–CT S1 sec S1 SN GEN/MOTOR ⁄ ( 3 ⋅ UN GEN/MOTOR )
Diff. protect. for 3-phase transformer:

I
prim. S1
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ⋅ 100
SN TRANSF ⁄ ( 3 ⋅ UN WIND.S1 )
IEE 1 IEE1 sec

I
EE1 prim .
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ 100
FACTOR IEE1 ⋅ I EE1 sec SN GEN/MOTOR ⁄ ( 3 ⋅ UN GEN/MOTOR )
IEE S2 IEE2 sec

I
EE2 prim.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ 100
FACTOR IEE2 ⋅ I EE2 sec SN GEN/MOTOR ⁄ ( 3 ⋅ UN GEN/MOTOR )
UL1E, UL2E, UL-E sec.

UL3E, UN–VT PRIMARY U prim.
U0 ----------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ U
L-E sec - ⋅ 100
--------------------------------------------------------------
UN–VT SECONDARY UN GEN/MOTOR ⁄ ( 3 )
U1, U2
UL1-L2, UL2-L3, ULL sec.
UL3-L1 UN–VT PRIMARY U prim.
= ----------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ U LL sec - ⋅ 100
----------------------------------------------
UN–VT SECONDARY UN GEN/MOTOR
7UM62 Manual 289

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Table 2-19 Conversion Formulae between Secondary Values and Primary/Percentage Values
Measured Val. Secondary Primary %

UE UE sec. UE measured:
U E prim.
FACTOR UE ⋅ UE sec - ⋅ 100
---------------------------------------------------------------------
UN–GEN PRIMARY ⁄ ( 3 )
UE calculated:
:
UN – VT PRIMARY
-------------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ U E sec
UN – VT SECONDARY
P, Q, S Psec
Qsec Powerprim. ⋅ 100
Ssec P prim = UN–VT PRIM. IN– PRI I–CT S2
-------------------------------------- ⋅ ----------------------------------------------- ⋅ P
sec ----------------------------------------------
-
UN–VT SEC, IN– SEC I–CT S2 SN GEN/MOTOR
Angle PHI ϕ in °el ϕ in °el ϕ in °el

Power factoR cos ϕ cos ϕ cos ϕ · 100 in %
Frequency (f) f in Hz f in Hz
f in Hz
----------------- ⋅ 100 in %
f nom
U/f
U
----
f UN–VT PRIMARY
-------- ⋅ --------------------------------------
-
U N UN–GEN/MOTOR
-------- U
fN ----
f UN–VT PRIMARY
-------- ⋅ --------------------------------------
- ⋅ 100 in %
U N UN–GEN/MOTOR
--------
fN
R, X Rsec S2 no display of percentage mea-

Xsec S2 UN–CT PRIMARY sured values
----------------------------------------------
-
UN–VT SECONDARY
----------------------------------------------
- ⋅ R sec S2
IN–PRI I–CT S2
-----------------------------------
-
IN–SEC I–CT S2
UE3.H UE3.H,sec
in V U E3.H.prim
FACTOR UE ⋅ U E3.H,sec - ⋅ 100
--------------------------------------------------------------
UN GEN/MOTOR ⁄ ( 3 )
UDC/IDC UDC no primary values
(measuring in V- U DC ⁄ V
transducer 1) - ⋅ 100
------------------ in %
10 V
IDC
in mA- I DC ⁄ mA
- ⋅ 100
-------------------- in %
20 mA
Uerr Uerr no primary value
(measuring Uerr ⁄ V
transducer 3) ------------------- ⋅ 100 in %
10 V
290 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Auxiliary Functions
where
Parameter Address Parameter Address

Unom PRIMARY 0221 FACTOR IEE1 0205
Unom SECONDARY 0222 FACTOR IEE2 0213
IN-PRI I-SIDE1 0202 FACTOR UE 0224
IN-SEC I-SIDE1 0203 UN GEN/MOTOR 0251
IN-PRI I-SIDE2 0211 SN GEN/MOTOR 0252
IN-SEC I-SIDE2 0212 Uph / Udelta 0225A
UN-PRI SIDE 1 0241 SN TRANSFORMER 0249
In addition, the protection functions calculate and provide the following measured
values:
Measured Values of The following secondary values are available: System-frequency displacement
Rotor Earth Fault voltage URE (= UE), earth fault current IRE (= IEE1) and rotor earth resistance Rearth,
Protection (Rn, fn) total resistance Rtot, total reactance Xtot and phase angle ϕZtot of the total resistance
of the rotor earth fault protection.
Measured Values of Frequency and amplitude of the 1–3 Hz generator (7XT71) fgen, Ugen, current in the
the Rotor Earth rotor circuit Igen, charge at polarity reversal QC and rotor earth resistance Rearth.
Fault Protection
(1–3 Hz)
Measured Values of Voltage and current in the stator earth circuit USEF and ISEF, the specific stator earth
the Stator Earth resistances Rsef and Rsefp (primary) and the phase angle ϕ SES between the current
Fault Protection and the voltage at 20 Hz.
(20 Hz)
Values of the − Differential and restraint currents (stabilized currents) IDiff L1, IDiff L2, IDiff L3, IStab L1,
Differential IStab L2, IStab L3, I–0Diff, I–0Stab, 3I0–1, 3I0–2 in percent of the nominal values of the
Protection protected object. The phase angle of the three currents on both sides of the
protected object is φIL1S1, φIL2S1, φIL3S1, φIL1S2, φIL2S2, φIL3S2.
Thermal Measured − ΘS/ΘSTrip Overload protection measured values of the stator winding
Values depending on the phase, in % of the tripping overtemperature,
− ΘS/ΘSTripL1 Normalized overload protection measured values of the stator
winding for phase L1
− ΘR/ΘRmax Normalized rotor temperature in % of the tripping temperature
− TRe.Inhib. time Time until the next permissible restart
− I2 thermal, Rotor overtemperature due to the negative phase-sequence
component of the current, % of the tripping overtemperature,
7UM62 Manual 291

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
− U/f th. Overtemperature caused by an overexcitation, in % of the tripping

overtemperature,
− Coolant temperature (or ambient temperature)
In addition, the following may be available:
Min/Max Values1) − Minimum and maximum values for the positive-sequence components I1 and U1,
the active power P, reactive power Q, in primary values, of the frequency and of the
3rd harmonic content in the displacement voltage, in secondary values U3.H.
Included are the date and time they were last updated. The minimum/maximum
values can be reset via binary inputs or, in the delivery status of the device, also via
the F4 function key.
Energy, Metered − Wp, Wq, metered values of the active and reactive energy in kilowatt, megawatt or
Values1) gigawatt hours primary or in kVARh, MVARh or GVARh primary, separately
according to the input (+) and output (–), or capacitive and inductive.
The calculation of the operational measured values is also executed in case of an
existing fault. The values are updated in intervals of ≥ 0.3 s and ≤1 s.
Transfer of Measured values can be transferred via the interfaces to a central control and storage
Measured Values unit.
Setpoint SIPROTEC® 7UM62 allows to set warning levels for important measured and counter
Monitoring values. When a programmed limit value is exceeded (or fallen below), a message is
generated that is output as an operational annunciation and can — like all operational
annunciations — be masked to both output relays and LEDs and transmitted through
the interfaces. In contrast to the actual protective functions, such as time-overcurrent
protection or overload protection, this monitoring program executes in the background
and may not respond promptly in case of a fault if the measured values change rapidly
and protective functions pick up. Moreover, since a message is not generated until the
set limit value has been exceeded several times, these monitoring functions cannot
respond immediately before a device trip.
In the7UM62, only the limit value of the undercurrent protection IL< is configured
when the device is delivered from the factory. More limit values can be configured if
their measured and metered values have been set accordingly in CFC) see
SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual).
2.45.3 Oscillographic Fault Recording (Waveform Capture)
Terminology Please be aware of the fact that we use different terms for the above-mentioned
function: (Oscillographic) Fault Recording, Oscillographic Recording, Wave Form
Capture. However, all terms have the same meaning. The corresponding fault buffer
in DIGSI® 4 is called Trip Log.
General The Multifunctional Protection 7UM62 is equipped with a fault memory sampling either
the instantaneous values or the r.m.s. values of various measured quantities to store
them in a circulating buffer. The instantaneous values of measured values
1.) only in the 7UM62**–*****–3***
292 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Auxiliary Functions
iL1 S1; iL2 S1; iL3 S1; iEE1; iL1 S2; iL2 S2; iL3 S2; iEE2 and uL1, uL2, uL3, uE and
u= or i= of the three measuring transducers
are sampled at intervals of 1.25 ms (for 50 Hz) or 1.04 ms (for 60 Hz), and stored in a
circulating buffer (16 samples per cycle). For a fault, the data are stored for an
adjustable period of time, but not more than 5 seconds.
The r.m.s. values of the measured quantities
I1, I2, IEE2, IEE1; U1, UE, P, Q, ϕ, f–fN, R and X can be stored in a circulating buffer,
in a grid of 1 measured value per cycle. R and X are the positive sequence
impedances. For a fault, the data are stored for an adjustable period of time, but not
more than 80 seconds.
Up to 8 fault records can be recorded in this buffer. The memory is automatically
updated with every new fault, so no acknowledgment for previously recorded faults is
required. Waveform capture can also be started with protection pickup, via binary
input, via operator interface, or SCADA.
The data can be retrieved via the serial interfaces by means of a personal computer
and evaluated with the protection data processing program DIGSI® 4 and the graphic
analysis software SIGRA® 4. The latter graphically represents the data recorded
during the system fault and calculates additional information such as the impedance
or RMS values from the measured values. A selection may be made as to whether the
currents and voltages are represented as primary or secondary values. Binary signal
traces (marks) of particular events e.g. ”fault detection”, ”tripping” are also
represented.
If the device has a serial system interface, the fault recording data can be passed on
to a central device via this interface. The evaluation of the data is done by applicable
programs in the central device. Currents and voltages are referred to their maximum
values, scaled to their rated values and prepared for graphic representation. Binary
signal traces (marks) of particular events e.g. ”fault detection”, ”tripping” are also
represented.
In the event of transfer to a central device, the request for data transfer can be
executed automatically and can be selected to take place after each fault detection by
the protection, or only after a trip.
2.45.4 Date and Time Stamping
Integrated date and time stamping allows for the exact evaluation of sequence of
events (e.g. operations or error messages, or limit violations). The clock may be
influenced by:
• the internal RTC clock (Real Time Clock),
• external synchronization sources (DCF, IRIG B, SyncBox, IEC 60870–5–103,
PROFIBUS),
• external minute impulses via a binary input.
Note:
The device is delivered from the factory with the internal RTC clock selected as the
time source, independent of whether the device is equipped with a system interface
or not. If external synchronization is desired, it must be configured accordingly.
7UM62 Manual 293

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Here you may select the time standard for internal time stamping by selecting from the
following modes:
Operating Mode Explanations

Internal Internal synchronization using RTC (pre-set)
IEC 60870–5–103 External synchronization using the system interface and the
IEC 60870–5–103 protocol
PROFIBUS DP External synchronization using PROFIBUS interface
IRIG B Time signal External synchronization using IRIG B
DCF77 Time signal External synchronization using DCF 77
SIMEAS Time signal External synchronization using SIMEAS Sync. Box

Sync. Box
Pulse via binary External synchronization with pulse via binary input
input
Fieldbus External synchronization using Modbus interface
The time display may be set using either the European format (DD.MM.YYYY) or the
US format (MM/DD/YYYY).
If the power supply voltage is cut off for 1 or 2 days, the internal buffer battery is
automatically switched off.
2.45.5 Commissioning Aids
2.45.5.1 Influencing Information on the System Interface During Test Operation
If the device is connected to a central control or storage system, you can influence the
information that will be transferred to the control center.
The IEC 60870–5–103 protocol allows to identify all messages and measured values
transferred to the central control system with an added message “test operation”- bit
while the device is being tested on-site (test mode). This identification prevents the
messages from being incorrectly interpreted as resulting from an actual power system
disturbance or event. As another option, all messages and measured values normally
transferred via the system interface can be blocked during the testing (block data
transmission).
Data transmission block can be accomplished by controlling binary inputs, by using
the operating panel on the device, or with a PC and DIGSI® 4 via the operator
interface. The CFC link for changeover to binary input is predefined in the device (see
Figure A-48 in the Appendix A.9.7).
The SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual describes in detail how to activate and deactivate
test mode and blocked data transmission.
2.45.5.2 Testing the System Interface
If the device has a SCADA interface that is used for communication with a control
centre, you can test in the DIGSI® 4 Dialog Mode whether annunciations are correctly
transmitted.
294 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Auxiliary Functions
A dialog box displays the texts of all annunciations that have been masked to the
system interface in the matrix. In another column of the dialog box you can specify a
value for the annunciations that you want to test (e.g. coming/ going) to generate an
annunciation as soon as you have entered password no. 6 (for hardware test menus).
The annunciation is output and can now be read both in the operational annunciations
of the SIPROTEC® device and in the station control center.
This test can be performed in annunciation direction as well as in command direction.
The procedure is described in detail in Section 3.3.2.
2.45.5.3 Testing the States of the Binary Inputs/Outputs
With DIGSI® 4 you can test selectively individual binary inputs, output relays and
LEDs of the SIPROTEC®4 device. This allows you, for instance, to check during
commissioning whether your station connections are correct.
A dialog box displays all binary inputs and outputs existing in the device, and the LEDs
with their current state. It also shows which commands or annunciations are masked
to which hardware component. In anther column of the dialog box you can switch each
item to the opposite state after entering password no. 6 (for hardware test menus). In
this way you can, for instance, cause each output relay to pick up, and thus test the
wiring between the 7UM62 and the station, without having to create the indications
masked to it.
This procedure is described in detail in Section 3.3.3.
2.45.5.4 Creating a Test Oscillographic Recording
At the end of commissioning, an investigation of the stability of the protection during

closing operations. For this, closing test should be carried out. Oscillographic event
recordings obtain the maximum information about the behaviour of the protection.
The 7UM62 also has the capability of capturing waveforms when commands are given
to the device via the service program DIGSI® 4, the serial interface, or a binary input.
For the latter, the binary input must be masked with event 4 ”>Trig.Wave.Cap.”.
The oscillographic recording is then triggered when the input is energized. An auxiliary
contact of the circuit breaker or primary switch may be used to control the binary input
for triggering.
An oscillographic recording that is externally triggered (that is, without a protective
element pickup or device trip) is processed by the device as a normal oscillographic
recording, and has a number for establishing a sequence. However, these recordings
are not displayed in the Trip Log as they are not a fault event.
The procedure for this is described in detail in Section 3.4.11.
Thresholds The settings are entered under MEASUREMENT in the sub-menu SET POINTS (MV)
by overwriting the existing values.
Waveform Capture Waveform capture of faults is executed only when address 0104 FAULT VALUE has
been set to Instantaneous values or RMS values. Other settings pertaining to
waveform capture are found under the OSC. FAULT REC. submenu of the
7UM62 Manual 295

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
SETTINGS menu. Waveform capture makes a distinction between the trigger for an
oscillographic record and the criterion to save the record (address 0401
WAVEFORMTRIGGER). Normally the trigger is the pickup of a protective element, i.e.
when a protective element picks up the time is 0. The criterion for saving can be the
pickup as well (Save w. Pickup), or the device trip (Save w. TRIP). Another
option is to set (Start with TRIP). A trip command issued by the device is both the
trigger and the criterion to save the record with this setting.
A waveform capture includes in machine protection always the complete course of a
fault. An oscillographic fault record includes data recorded prior to the time of trigger,
and data after the dropout of the recording criterion. Therefore address 0402
WAVEFORM DATA is preset to Fault event.
The user determines the length of pre-trigger time and post-dropout time to be
included in the fault record with the settings in address 0404 PRE. TRIG. TIME and
address 0405 POST REC. TIME. The maximum length of time of a record MAX.
LENGTH is entered at address 0403. The setting depends on the criterion for storage,
the delay time of the protective functions and the desired number of stored fault
events. The largest value here is 5 s for fault recording of instantaneous values, 80 s
for recording of r.m.s. values (see address 0104). A total of 8 records can be saved.
Note: These times apply for 50 Hz. They will be different with another frequency. If
RMS values are stored, the times stated for parameters 0403 to 0406 will be 16
times longer.
An oscillographic record can be triggered and saved by a change in status of a binary
input or via the operator interface connected to a PC. The trigger is dynamic. The
length of a record for these special triggers is set at address 0406 BinIn
CAPT.TIME (upper bound is MAX. LENGTH, address 0403). Pre-trigger and post-
dropout times are not included. If the binary input time is set to ∞, then the length of
the record equals the time that the binary input is activated (static), or the MAX.
LENGTH (address 0403), whichever is shorter.
2.45.6.1 Settings for Oscillographic Fault Recording

401 WAVEFORMTRIG- Save with Pickup Save with Pickup Waveform Capture
GER Save with TRIP
Start with TRIP
402 WAVEFORM DATA Fault event Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
Power System fault
403 MAX. LENGTH 0.30..5.00 sec 1.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform Cap-
ture Record
404 PRE. TRIG. TIME 0.05..4.00 sec 0.20 sec Captured Waveform Prior to
Trigger
405 POST REC. TIME 0.05..0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after Event
406 BinIn CAPT.TIME 0.10..5.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary Input
2.45.6.2 Information for the Oscillographic Fault Recording

00004 >Trig.Wave.Cap. >Trigger Waveform Capture
296 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Auxiliary Functions

00203 Wave. deleted Waveform data deleted
FltRecSta Fault Recording Start
2.45.6.3 Information for Minimum and Maximum Values

00396 >I1 MiMaReset >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00399 >U1 MiMa Reset >U1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00400 >P MiMa Reset >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00402 >Q MiMa Reset >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00407 >Frq MiMa Reset >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00394 >UE3h MiMa Res. >UE 3rd Harm. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
00857 I1 Min= Positive Sequence Minimum

00858 I1 Max= Positive Sequence Maximum
00874 U1 Min = U1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum
00875 U1 Max = U1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum
00876 PMin= Active Power Minimum
00877 PMax= Active Power Maximum
00878 QMin= Reactive Power Minimum
00879 QMax= Reactive Power Maximum
00882 fMin= Frequency Minimum
00883 fMax= Frequency Maximum
00639 UE3h min= UE 3rd Harmonic Voltage Minimum
00640 UE3h max= UE 3rd Harmonic Voltage Maximum
7UM62 Manual 297

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.46 Breaker Control
General In addition to the protective functions described thus far, a control command process
is integrated in the SIPROTEC® 7UM62 to coordinate the operation of circuit breakers
and other equipment in the power system. Control commands can originate from four
command sources:
− Local operation using the keypad on the local user interface of the device
− Operation using DIGSI® 4
− Remote operation using a substation automation and control system (e.g.
SICAM)
− Automatic functions (e.g., using a binary input)
Single and double busbar systems are supported. The number of switchgear devices
to be controlled is, basically, limited by the number of binary inputs and outputs
present. Therefore, 7UM622 should be the preferred version. High security against
inadvertent device operations can be ensured if interlocking checks are enabled. A
standard set of optional interlocking checks is provided for each command issued to
circuit breakers/switchgear.
Logical Links Using The 7UM62 can also execute user-defined logic functions. These logic functions can
CFC be edited with the CFC (=Continuous Function Chart) tool. Interlocking and command
processing, as well as monitoring functions or processing of measured values, can be
programmed by simple drawing; no programming knowledge is required. The desired
functions can be put together from predefined function blocks which are grouped in a
library. Detailed information on CFC is contained in the SIPROTEC® 4 System
Manual, Order No. E50417–H1176–C151, and in particular in the CFC Manual, Order
No. E50417–H1176–C098. A logic circuit is created with a PC using the DIGSI® 4
software; the serial or service port is used for this.
When the device is delivered from the factory, it contains two standard CFC charts
(see Appendix A.9.7). One chart is used to allow switching of an annunciation/
measured value blocking by binary input (blocking of annunciations in test mode) (see
2.45.5.1). The other chart (see Figure A-49) provides for undercurrent monitoring of
three phase currents.
Operation Using Control commands can be initiated using the keypad on the local user interface of the
the Keypad on the relay (see also SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual, Control of Switchgear). Using the
Local User navigation keys , , , , the control menu can be accessed and the circuit
Interface breaker/switchgear to be operated can be selected. After entering a password, a new
window is displayed in which multiple control actions (close, open, cancel) are
available and can be selected using the and keys. Next a security check takes
place. After the security check is completed, the ENTER key must be pressed again to
carry out the command. If the ENTER key is not pressed within one minute, the
selection is cancelled. Cancellation via the ESC key is possible at any time before the
control command is issued. ESC
If the attempted command fails, because an interlocking condition is not met, then an
error message appears in the display. The message indicates why the control
command was not accepted (see also SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual). This message
must be acknowledged with ENTER before any further control commands can be
issued.
298 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Breaker Control
Operation using Control commands for switchgear can also be entered in DIGSI® 4 with a PC that is
DIGSI® 4 connected to the operator interface. The procedure to do so is described in the
SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual (Control of Switchgear).
Operation using the Control commands for switchgear can also be entered through the serial SCADA
SCADA Interface interface communicating with the substation control and protection system. A
prerequisite for this is that the required peripherals physically exist in the device and
the substation. Also, a few settings for the serial interface in the device are required
(see SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual).
2.46.1 Types of Commands
Two types of commands can be processed within the device:
Control Commands These are all commands that are directly output to the switchgear to change their
process state:
− Commands for the operation of circuit breakers (unsynchronized),
disconnectors, earthing switches
− Step commands (e.g. raising and lowering transformer LTCs)
− Set-point commands with configurable time settings (Petersen coils)
Internal / Pseudo These commands do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve to initiate internal
Commands functions, simulate changes of state, or to acknowledge changes of state.
− Manual overwriting commands to manually update information on process-
dependent objects such as annunciations and switching states, e.g. if the
communication with the process is interrupted. Manually overwritten objects are
marked as such in the information status and can be displayed accordingly.
− Additionally, Tagging commands are issued to establish internal settings, such
as switching authority (remote vs. local), parameter set changeover, data
transmission block to the SCADA interface, and measured value set-points.
− Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal
buffers.
− Information status command to set/reset the additional „Information status“ item
of a process object, such as:
− Controlling activation of binary input status
− Binary Output Blocking
2.46.2 Steps in the Command Sequence
Safety mechanisms in the command sequence ensure that a command can only be
released after a thorough check of preset criteria has been successfully concluded.
Additionally, user-defined interlocking conditions can be programmed separately for
each command. The actual execution of the command is also monitored afterwards.
The entire sequence of a command is described briefly in the following:
7UM62 Manual 299

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Check Sequence • Command Entry (e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device)
− Check password → Access rights
− Check Switching Mode (interlocking activated/deactivated→ Selection of
Deactivated Interlocking Recognition
• User configurable Interlocking checks
− Switching Authority
− Device Position (scheduled vs. actual comparison)
− Zone Controlled/Field Interlocking/ (logic using CFC)
− System Interlocking (centrally, using SCADA system or substation controller)
− Double Operation (interlocking against parallel switching operation)
− Protection Blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions)
• Fixed Command Checks
− Internal process time (software watch dog which checks the time for processing
the control action between initiation of the control and final close of the relay
contact.
− Setting Modification in Process (if setting modification is in process, commands
are denied or delayed)
− Equipment Present at Output (If a circuit breaker or other operable equipment is
not configured to a binary output, then the command is denied)
− Output Block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker,
and is active at the moment the command is processed, then the command is
denied)
− Component Hardware Malfunction
− Command in Progress (only one command can be processed at a time for one
circuit breaker or switch)
− 1-of-n-check (for schemes with multiple assignments, such as common ground,
whether a command has already been initiated for the affected output relay is
checked).
Monitoring the − Interruption of a Command because of a Cancel Command

Command
− Running Time Monitor (feedback message monitoring time)
Execution
2.46.3 Interlocking
Interlocking checks in a SICAM®/SIPROTEC® system are divided into:

• System Interlocking (checked by a central control system such as SCADA or
substation controller)
• Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking (checked in the device)
Zone Controlled/Bay Interlocking
System interlocking relies on the system data base in the substation or central control
system.
300 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Breaker Control
The extent of the interlocking checks is determined by the configuration of the relay.
Circuit breakers (or other equipment) that require system interlocking in a central
control system (Substation Controller) must be configured in their specific commands
object properties box for the specific control device.
For all commands, operation with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking
(test mode) can be selected:
− for local commands, by reprogramming the settings (using the local user interface)
with password check,
− for automatic commands, via command processing by CFC.
2.46.3.1 Interlocked / Non-Interlocked Switching
The command checks that can be selected for the SIPROTEC® relays are also
referred to as ”standard interlocking”. These checks can be activated (interlocked) or
deactivated (non interlocked) using DIGSI® 4.
Deactivated interlock switching means the configured interlocking conditions are not
checked in the relay.
Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked
within the command processing. If a condition is not fulfilled, the command is rejected,
marked with a minus sign (e.g. ”CO–”), and a message to that effect is output. Table
2-20 shows the types of possible commands to switchgear, and the associated
annunciations.
Table 2-20 Types of Commands and Messages

Command Type Command Cause Message
Control Issued Switching CO CO+/–
Manual Tagging (positive / negative) Manual overwriting MT MT+/–
Input Blocking Controlling ST ST+/– *)
activation of binary
input status
Output Blocking Binary output ST ST+/– *)
blocking
Control Abortion Abort CA CA+/–
*)appear in this form only on the device as operational indications, in DIGSI® 4 as spontaneous
messages.
A + sign in the annunciation means a confirmation of the command. The command

output has a positive result, as expected. A – means a negative, i.e. an unexpected
result; the command was rejected. Possible command feedbacks and their causes are
dealt with in the SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual. Figure 2-134 shows an example of
operational annunciations (command and feedback) for successful switching of a
circuit breaker.
Interlocking checks can be configured individually for all switching devices and
markings. Other internal control actions, such as manual overwriting or abort, are
always executed regardless of any interlocking.
7UM62 Manual 301

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
EVENT LOG
---------------------
19.06.01 11:52:05,625
Q0 CO+ close
19.06.01 11:52:06,134
Q0 FB+ close
Figure 2-134 Example of an Operational Annunciation for Switching Circuit Breaker Q0
Standard The following is a list of Standard Interlocking Conditions that can be selected for each
Interlocking controllable device. All of these are enabled as a default.
Defaults
• Device Position (scheduled vs. actual comparison) the switching command is
rejected, and an error message is displayed, if the circuit breaker is already in the
scheduled (desired) position. (If this check is enabled, then it works whether
interlocking, e.g. zone controlled, is activated or deactivated.)
• Substation Controller (System Interlocking) The system interlocking is checked by
transmitting a local command to the central controller with the switching authority
set to = Local. Switchgear that is subject to system interlocking cannot be switched
by DIGSI® 4.
• Bay Interlocking: All devices controlled by this relay can be interlocked by the CFC
logic.
• Blocked by protection: A CLOSE-command is rejected as soon as one of the
protective elements in the relay picks up. The OPEN-command, in contrast, can
always be executed. Please be aware, activation of thermal overload protection
elements can create and maintain a fault condition status, and can therefore block
CLOSE commands Double Operation Block: If you cancel the blocking, please be
aware that in this case the motor restart inhibit feature will not automatically reject
a restart command given to the motor. Therefore, a restart inhibit must be provided
by other means, e.g. by a bay interlocking using.
• Double Operation: Parallel switching operations are interlocked against one
another; while one command is processed, a second cannot be carried out.
• Switching Authority LOCAL: When this interlocking check is enabled in the Object
Properties dialog box, the status of Switching authority is checked prior to issuing a
control command. If this particular setting is selected, a control command from the
user interface of the device is only allowed if switching authority is set to LOCAL.
• Switching Authority DIGSI: Switching commands can be issued locally or remotely
via DIGSI. As part of the safety features, the device will check the DIGSI
configuration file in regard to the virtual device number to ensure that the correct
configuration file is used. DIGSI must have the same virtual device number. It is
important that one file can not be reused with multiple relays. But it is possible to
copy the file and use the new file with another relay.
• Switching Authority REMOTE: When this interlocking check is enabled in the Object
Properties dialog box, the status of Switching authority is checked prior to issuing a
control command. If this particular setting is selected a control command from a
remote DIGSI connection or via the system interface is only allowed if switching
authority is set to REMOTE.
An overview for processing the interlocking conditions in the relay is shown by Figure
2-135.
302 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Breaker Control
Device with source Switching Authority Switching Mode

of command =
ON/OFF
LOCAL
& Local
REMOTE1),
DIGSI Local &
AUTO
&
Rem. &
Switching Authority
(LOCAL/REMOTE)
& DIGSI
Switch Authority DIGSI

DIGSI: OR
& Rem.
Switch mode LOCAL: Non-interlocked

(interlocked/non-interl.)
OR SCHED. = ACT. y/n
&
Switching mode
REMOTE
(interlocked/non-interl.)
Interlocked switching
&
OR SCHED. = ACT y/n
Command
System interlock. y/n
OR output
Bay interlock. y/n ro relay
Protection blockingy/n
Feedback ON/OFF
Double oper. block.y/n
Blocked by protection: Sw. Auth. LOCAL y/n
52 Close Sw. Auth. REMOTEy/n
52 Open
Event
Condition
1)
Source REMOTE also includes SAS.
(LOCAL Command using substation controller
REMOTE Command using remote source such as SCADA through controller to device).
Figure 2-135 Standard Interlocking Arrangements
Figure 2-136 shows the settings for the interlocking conditions when using DIGSI® 4.
7UM62 Manual 303

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
Figure 2-136 DIGSI® 4 Dialog Box for Setting the Interlocking Conditions
The display shows the configured interlocking reasons. The are marked by letters ex-
plained in the following Table 2-21:
Table 2-21 Interlocking Commands

Interlocking Commands Abbreviation Message
Switching Authority L L
System Interlock S S
Zone Controlled Z Z
Target State = Present State P P
(check switch position)
Block by Protection B B
Figure 2-137 shows all interlocking conditions (which usually appear in the display of
the device) for three switchgear items with the relevant abbreviations explained in
Table 2-21. All parametrized interlocking conditions are indicated (see Figure 2-137).
.
Interlocking 01/03
--------------------
Q0 Close/Open S – Z P B
Figure 2-137 Example of Configured Interlocking Conditions
304 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Breaker Control
Control Logic using For Zone Controlled (field interlocking), control logic can be developed, using the
CFC CFC. Via specific release conditions the information “released” or “zone controlled” is
available.
Switching Switching authority configures the relay to perform Local/Remote Supervisory

Authority functions. The command source having switching authority can be set in the
interlocking condition “Switching authority”. The following switching authority ranges
are defined in the following priority sequence:
− LOCAL (commands are issued from the relay keyboard)
− DIGSI® 4
− REMOTE (commands are issued from SCADA)
The switching authority condition LOCAL allows commands from the user inter-
face of the relay, but not remote or DIGSI commands. In the 7UM62, the options
“Local” and “Remote” are available in the display after entering a password.
The switching authority condition DIGSI allows commands to be initiated using

DIGSI® 4. Commands are allowed for both a remote and a local DIGSI® 4
connection. When a (local or remote) DIGSI PC logs on to the device, it enters
its Virtual Device Number (VD). The device only accepts commands having that
VD (with switching authority = OFF or REMOTE). When the DIGSI PC logs off,
the VD is cancelled.
Commands are checked for their source and the device settings, and compared
to the information set in the objects “Switching authority” and “Switching authority
DIGSI”.
Configuration Programming:
1) Switching authority: y/n (create appropriate object)
2) Switching authority DIGSI® 4: y/n (create appropriate object)
3) Specific object (e.g., switching device): Switching authority LOCAL (check for
commands initiated locally via keypad): y/n
4) Specific object (e.g., switching device): Switching authority REMOTE (check for
SAS, REMOTE, or DIGSI commands): y/n
7UM62 Manual 305

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
In detail, the following interlocking logic is derived when using default configuration
settings:
Current Switching Switching Command Issued Command Issued Command Issued from
Authority Status Authority Locally from SAS or SCADA DIGSI
DIGSI
LOCAL Not checked Allowed Interlocked *2) Interlocked
- switching authority ”DIGSI not
LOCAL checked”
LOCAL Checked Allowed Interlocked *2) Interlocked *2)
- switching authority - switching authority
LOCAL LOCAL
REMOTE Not checked Interlocked *1) Allowed Interlocked
- switching authority ”DIGSI not
REMOTE checked”
REMOTE Checked Interlocked *1) Interlocked *2) Allowed
- switching authority - switching authority
DIGSI DIGSI
*1) By-passes Interlock if Configuration for ”switching authority LOCAL (check for Local status): n”
*2) By-passes Interlock if Configuration for ”switch authority REMOTE
(check for CLOSE, REMOTE, or DIGSI status): “n”
SC = Source of command
SC=AUTO:
Commands that are initiated internally (command processing in the CFC) are not
subject to switching authority and are therefore always allowed.
Switching Mode The switching mode determines whether selected interlocking conditions will be
activated or deactivated at the time of the switching operation.
The following switching modes are defined:

− Local commands (SC=LOCAL)
− interlocked, or
− non-interlocked switching.
The selection between local and remote is made in the 7UM62 using the local user
interface. A password is required to make this selection.
− Remote or DIGSI® 4 (SC=LOCAL, REMOTE or DIGSI)

−interlocked, or
− non-interlocked switching. Here, deactivation of interlocking is accomplished via
a separate command. The position of the key switch is irrelevant.
− Auto: For commands from CFC (SC = AUTO), the notes in the CFC handbook
should be referred to (e.g. component: BOOL to command).
Zone Controlled/ Zone Controlled (field interlocking) includes the verification that predetermined
Field Interlocking switchgear position conditions are satisfied to prevent switching errors as well as
verification of the state of other mechanical interlocking such as High Voltage
compartment doors etc.
306 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Breaker Control
Interlocking conditions can be programmed separately, for each switching device, for
device control CLOSE and/or OPEN. Processing of the status of the release condition
for an operation switching device can be based on information acquired:
− directly, using a single point or double point indication (binary inputs), key-switch,
or internal indication (marking), or
− with logic using CFC.
When a switching command is initiated, the actual status of all relevant switching
devices is scanned cyclically.
Substation Substation Controller (System interlocking) involves switchgear conditions of other

Controller (System bays evaluated by a central control system.
Interlocking)
Double Operation Parallel switching operations are interlocked. When a control command is received, all
objects that are subject to double operation inhibit are checked for control commands
in progress. While the command is being executed, the inhibit is in turn active for all
other commands.
Blocked by With this function, switching operations are blocked by the pickup of protective
Protection elements. Blocking is configurable separately for both closing and tripping commands.
When configured, “Block CLOSE commands” blocks CLOSE commands, whereas
„Block TRIP commands” blocks TRIP signals.
Operations in progress will also be aborted by the pickup of a protective element.
Device Position For switching commands, a check takes place whether the selected switching device
(Scheduled = is already in the scheduled/desired position (Open/Closed; scheduled/actual
Actual) comparison). This means, if a circuit breaker is already in the CLOSED position and
an attempt is made to issue a closing command, the command will be refused, with
the operating message ”scheduled condition equals actual condition”. If the circuit
breaker/switchgear device is in the intermediate position, then this check is not
performed.
Bypassing Inter- Interlocks can be bypassed to perform switching operations. This is either done inter-
locks nally by adding a bypass code to the command, or globally by so-called switching
modes.
G SC=LOCAL
− The 7UM62 offers the options “interlocked“ or “non-interlocked“ (bypassed) in the
display after entry of a password.
G REMOTE and DIGSI® 4
− Interlocks for commands issued by SICAM® or DIGSI® 4 are bypassed by a global
switching mode REMOTE. A separate bypass command has to be issued for this.
Each bypass is valid for only one switching operation, and only for commands orig-
inating from the same source.
− Control: command to object “Switching mode REMOTE”, CLOSE
− Control: switching command to “switching device”
G Derived commands from CFC (automatic command, SC=AUTO):
− Behaviour configured in the CFC block (“BOOL to command”).
7UM62 Manual 307

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Functions
2.46.4 Recording and Acknowledgement of Commands
During the processing of the commands, independent of the further message routing
and processing, command and process feedback information are sent to the message
processing centre. These messages contain message cause indication. The messag-
es are entered in the event list.
Acknowledgement All messages which relate to commands that were issued from the device front “Com-
of Commands to mand Issued = Local” are transformed into a corresponding response and shown in
the Device Front the display of the device. A list of possible responses and their meanings is given in
the SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual.
Acknowledgement The messages which relate to commands with the origin “Command Issued = Local/
of commands to Remote/DIGSI” must be send independent of the routing (configuration on the serial
Local/Remote/Digsi digital interface) to the initiating point.
The acknowledgement of commands is therefore not executed by a response indica-
tion as it is done with the local command but by ordinary command and feedback in-
formation recording.
Monitoring of The processing of commands monitors the command execution and timing of feed-
Feedback back information for all commands. At the same time the command is sent, the moni-
Information toring time is started (monitoring of the command execution). This time controls
whether the device achieves the required final result within the monitoring time. The
monitoring time is stopped as soon as the feedback information arrives. If no feedback
information arrives, a response “Timeout command monitoring time” appears
and the process is terminated.
Commands and information feedback are also recorded in the event list. Normally the
execution of a command is terminated as soon as the feedback information (FB+) of
the relevant switchgear arrives or, in case of commands without process feedback in-
formation, the command output resets.
The “plus” appearing in a feedback information confirms that the command was suc-
cessful, the command was as expected, in other words positive. The “minus” is a neg-
ative confirmation and means that the command was not fulfilled as expected.
Command Output The command types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear or for raising
and Switching and lowering of transformer taps are described in the chapter on configuration in the
Relays SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual.
308 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Installation and Commissioning 3
This section is primarily for personnel who are experienced in installing, testing, and
commissioning protective and control systems, and are familiar with applicable safety
rules, safety regulations, and the operation of a power system.
Installation of the 7UM62 is described in this section. Connections for the device are
discussed. Hardware modifications that might be needed in certain cases are
explained. Connection verifications required before the device is put in service are
also given. Commissioning tests are provided. For primary testing, the protected
object (generator, motor, transformer) must be started up and in put into service.
3.1 Installation and Connections 310

3.2 Checking Connections and System (Plant) Integration 336
3.3 Commissioning 346
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator 360
3.5 Final Preparation of the Device 391
7UM62 Manual 309

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3 Installation and Commissioning
3.1 Installation and Connections
Warning!
Trouble free and safe use of this SIPROTEC® 4 device depends on proper transport,
storage, installation, and application of the device according to the warnings in this
instruction manual.
Of particular importance are the general installation and safety regulations for work in
a high-voltage environment (for example, ANSI, IEC, EN, DIN, or other national and
international regulations.) These regulations must be observed. Failure to observe
these precautions can result in death, personal injury, or severe damage of property.
Requirements Verification of the 7UM62 according to the SIPROTEC® 4–System Manual and the
connected external equipment must have been carried out.
3.1.1 Installation
Panel Flush The device housing can be 1/2 or 1/1 full size depending on the version. For the 1/2 size
Mounting housing, there are four covers and four holes, as shown in Figure 3-1. There are six
covers and six holes for the full size housing, as indicated in Figure 3-2.
G Remove the four covers on the corners of the front cover, for the 1/1 size housing
also the 2 covers in the top and bottom center. Four or six elongated holes in the
mounting angle strips become accessible.
G Insert the device into the panel cutout and fasten with four or six screws. Refer to
Figure 4-14 or 4-15 in Section 4.28 for dimensions.
G Replace the four or six covers.
G Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the
panel. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area
of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any
other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-sectional
area of the ground wire must be at least AWG 13.
G Connect the plug terminals and/or the threaded terminals on the rear side of the
device according to the elementary diagram for the panel.
When using spade lugs or directly connecting wires to threaded terminals, the
screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before
the lugs or wires are inserted.
A ring lug must be centered in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits
in the hole of the lug.
SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs,
bending radii (optical cables), etc.
310 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Elongated
Holes SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7UM621
MAIN MENU 01/04
Annunciations 1
Measured values 2
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
AnnunciationsF1 7 8 9
Measured values
F2 4 5 6
Alarm
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
Figure 3-1 Panel Mounting of a 7UM621 with 1/2 Size Housing
Elongated
Holes SIEMENS
RUN ERROR
SIPROTEC
7UM622
MAIN MENU 01/04
Annunciations 1
Measured values 2
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
Masured values
F2 4 5 6
Alarm
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
Figure 3-2 Panel Mounting of a 7UM622 with Full Size Housing
7UM62 Manual 311

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Rack Mounting For the 1/2 size housing shown in Figure 3-3, four covers and four fastening holes are
provided. On a device in full size housing there are six covers and six fastening holes,
as shown in Figure 3-4.
Two mounting brackets are necessary to install the 7UM62 in a rack. The order
number for the brackets is given in the Appendix, Sub-section A.1.
G Loosely screw the two mounting brackets in the rack or cubicle with four screws.
G Remove the four covers on the corners of the front cover of the device, on the 1/1
size housing also the 2 covers in the top and bottom center. Four or six elongated
holes in the mounting angle strips become accessible.
G Fasten the device to the mounting brackets with four or six screws.
G Replace the four or six covers.
G Tighten the mounting brackets to the rack using eight screws.
G Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the
panel. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area
of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any
other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-sectional
area of the ground wire must be at least AWG 13.
Mounting Bracket
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7UM621
TRIP
PICKUP
MAIN MENU 01/04
PICKUP L1
PICKUP L2
Annunciation 1
PICKUP L3 Measurement 2
PICKUP GND
Device faulty
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
Event Log F1 7 8 9
Operation. F2
Pr 4 5 6
Trip Log
F3 1 2 3
Reset
Min/Max F4 0 +/-
Mounting Bracket
Figure 3-3 Installing a 7UM621 (1/2 Size Housing) in a Rack or Cubicle
312 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7UM622
MAIN MENU 01/04
Annunciations 1
Measured values 2
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
Masured values
F2 4 5 6
Alarm
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
Figure 3-4 Installing a 7UM621 (1/1 Size Housing) in a Rack or Cubicle
G Connect the plug terminals and/or the threaded terminals on the rear side of the
device according to the elementary diagram for the rack.
When using spade lugs or directly connecting wires to threaded terminals, the
screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before
the lugs or wires are inserted.
A ring lug must be centered in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits
in the hole of the lug.
SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs,
bending radius (fiber cables), etc.
Panel Surface G Secure the device to the panel with four screws. Refer to Figure 4-16 and 4-17 in
Mounting Section 4.35 for dimensions.
G Connect the ground of the device to the protective ground of the panel. The cross-
sectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-
sectional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore,
the cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be at least AWG 13.
G Solid, low impedance operational grounding (cross-sectional area ≥ AWG 13) must
be connected to the grounding surface on the side. Use at least one M4 screw for
the device ground.
G Connect the threaded terminals on the top and bottom of the device according to
the elementary diagram for the panel. SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual has pertinent
information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radius (fiber cable), etc.
7UM62 Manual 313

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.1.2 Connections
Overview diagrams are shown in Appendix A.2. CT and VT connections for a 7UM62
are shown in the Appendix, Section A.4. Make sure that the settings of the Power
System Data 1 (Section 2.3) match the connections.
Currents/Voltages Overview diagrams are shown in the Appendix. Figures and A-27 show examples of
current transformer circuit connections with busbar connection (address 0272
SCHEME = Busbar), Figures A-28 and A-29 with unit connection (address 0272 =
Unit transf.). In all examples the CT starpoints point towards the machine;
therefore, address 0201 STRPNT->OBJ S1 and 0210 STRPNT->OBJ S2 must be
set to Yes.
In Figures to A-28, the UE input of the device is connected to the open delta winding
of a voltage transformer set. Consequently, address 0223 must be set to UE
CONNECTION = delta winding.
Figure is the standard connection where one busbar is fed by several generators. As
the earth fault current can be increased by an earthing transformer connected to the
busbar (approx. 10 A max.), a protection range of up to 90 % can be achieved. To
achieve the necessary sensitivity, the earth fault current is measured using a toroidal
current transformer. During startup of the machine, the displacement voltage can be
used as a criterion for detecting an earth fault until synchronization is completed.
Factor 0213 FACTOR IEE2 considers the transformation ratio between the primary
and the secondary side of the summation current transformer when the sensitive
current input of side 2 in Figure is used. Likewise, factor 0205 FACTOR IEE1 applies
when the input of side 1 is used.
Example:
Summation current transformer 60 A/1 A
Matching factor for sensitive earth fault current detection: FACTOR IEE2 = 60
(if the input on side 2 is used)
If the sensitive current input of side 1 is used for rotor earth fault current detection (as
suggested in ), FACTOR IEE1 = 1 is chosen.
In Figure A-27 the generator starpoint has a low-resistance earthing. To avoid
circulating currents (3rd harmonics) in multi-generator connections, the resistor
should be connected to only one generator. For selective earth fault detection, the
sensitive earth fault current input IEE2 is looped into the common return line of the two
sets of CTs (current differential measurement). The current transformers are earthed
in one place only. FACTOR IEE2 is set to = 1. It is recommended to use for this type
of circuit current transformers that are balanced to one another (turns correction).
In Figure A-28 the earth fault is detected by means of the displacement voltage. A
loading resistor is provided on the broken delta winding to avoid spurious tripping in
case of earth faults occurring in the power system. The UE input of the device is
connected via a voltage divider to the broken delta winding of an earthing transformer
(address 0223 UE CONNECTION = delta winding). Factor 0225A Uph / Udelta
is determined by the transformation ratio of the secondary-side voltages:
U N prim. U N sec. U N sec.

-------------------- ⁄ ------------------ ⁄ ------------------
3 3 3
314 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
The resulting factor between the secondary windings is 3/√3 = 1.73. For situations
where the displacement voltage is measured by the device and other types of voltage
transformer connections are utilized, the setting of address 0225A should be modified
accordingly.
Factor 0224 FACTOR UE considers all of the transformation ratios between the
primary voltage and the voltage fed to the device terminals, i.e. it includes the voltage
divider that is connected upstream. For a primary nominal transformer voltage of
6.3 kV, a secondary voltage of 500 V in case of full displacement and a voltage divider
ratio of 1:5, this factor would be:
6.3 kV ⁄ ( 3 ) 5
FACTOR UE = æè --------------------------------- ⋅ ---öø = 36.4
500 V 1
For additional hints, please refer to section 2.3 under “Transformation Ratio UE“.
In Figure A-29 a loading resistor connected to the generator c.t. reduces the
interference voltage from network-side earth faults. The maximum earth fault current
is limited to approx. 10 A. The resistor can be a primary or secondary resistor with
neutral earthing transformer. The neutral earthing transformer should have a low
transformation ratio to avoid a small secondary resistance. The resulting higher
secondary voltage can be reduced by means of a voltage divider. Address 0223 UE
CONNECTION is set to Neutral transformer.
Figure A-30 shows the connection of the DC voltage protection for systems with
startup converter. The amplifier 7KG6 amplifies the signal measured at the shunt to a
maximum of 10 V or 20 mA, depending on the connected equipment. Input TD1 can
be adapted to the type of signal (voltage or current) by means of wire jumpers (see
also 3.1.3.3 “Switching Elements on Printed Circuit Boards”).
Figure A-31 shows in an exemplary way how the rotor earth fault protection is
connected to a generator with static excitation. The earthing must be connected to the
earthing brush. The coupling device 7XR61 must be complemented by the external
resistors 3PP1336 if the circulating current is apt to exceed 0.2 A due to the 6th
harmonic component in the excitation voltage. This can be the cause with excitation
voltages UExc of 150 V and higher. The IEE 1 input evaluates the earth fault current
flowing between the rotor and the ground as a result of injecting a voltage into the rotor
circuit by means of the additional source device 7XR61. The matching factor FACTOR
IEE1 is set to = 1.0.
Figure A-34 shows how a connection is made with only two plant-side voltage
transformers in open delta connection (V connection).
Figure A-33 shows a typical connection of the protection relay to a large asynchronous
motor. The voltages for voltage and zero voltage monitoring are usually picked up at
the busbar. Where several motors are connected to the busbar, the directional earth
fault protection allows to detect single-pole earth faults and thus to open breakers
selectively. A toroidal transformer is used for detection of the earth fault current.
Factor 0213 FACTOR IEE2 considers the transformation ratio between the primary
and the secondary side of the summation current transformer IEE 2.
Binary Inputs and The masking options for the binary inputs and outputs, i.e. the procedure for matching
Outputs the 7UM62 to the individual plant, are described in the SIPROTEC® 4 System Manual.
The tables of section A.9 in the Appendix show the allocation of all binary inputs and
outputs and of the LEDs to physical outputs when the device is delivered from the
factory. Please check also the conformity of the front panel labeling strips with the
actually configured signaling functions.
7UM62 Manual 315

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Changing Setting If binary inputs are used to switch setting groups, please observe the following:
Groups with Binary
• If the configuration is performed from the operator panel or using DIGSI® 4, the
Inputs
address 0302 CHANGE must be set to the option Binary Input.
• One binary input must be dedicated for the purpose of changing setting groups
when two groups are to be switched. This input is named “>Set Group Bit 0”.
• The logical binary input must be allocated to a physical input module in order to
allow control. An input is treated as not energized when it is not assigned to any
physical input.
• If the binary input is configured as a make circuit, i.e. as active when voltage is
applied (H active), the setting groups are assigned as follows:
– not energized: Setting group A
– energized: Setting group B
• The status of the signal controlling the binary input to activate a particular setting
group must remain constant as long as that particular group is to remain active.
Trip Circuit A circuit with two binary inputs (see Figure 2-121) is recommended for trip circuit
Monitoring monitoring. The binary inputs must have no common potential, and their operating
point must be sensible less than half the rating of the DC control voltage.
When using only one binary input, a resistor R is inserted into the circuit on the system
side, instead of the missing second binary input (see Figure 2-124). Please note that
the response times are as long as approx. 300 s. Section 2.39.2 shows how the
resistance is calculated.
3.1.3 Hardware Modifications
3.1.3.1 General
Hardware adjustments might be necessary or desired. For example, a change of the

pickup threshold for some of the binary inputs might be advantageous in certain
applications. Terminating resistors might be required for the communication bus. In
either case, hardware modifications are needed. The modifications are done with
jumpers on the printed circuit boards inside the 7UM62. The hints given in Sections
3.1.3.2 to 3.1.3.5 should be observed in any case whenever hardware modifications
are made.
Power Supply There are different ranges for the input voltage of the various power supplies. Refer to
Voltage the data for the 7UM62 ordering numbers in Section A.1 of the Appendix. The power
supplies with the ratings [60/110/125 VDC] and [110/125/220/250 VDC 115 VAC] are
interchangeable. Four jumper settings determine the rating. The settings necessary to
convert one range to the other are provided below in Sub-section 3.1.3.3, under the
side title “Processor Printed Circuit Board C–CPU–2”. When the device is delivered,
these jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker. Typically, these settings
are not changed.
Live Status Contact The contacts of the live status (alarm) relay connected to terminals F3 and F4 of the
device can be either normally closed or normally open. The choice is made with the
setting of jumper X40. The appropriate setting of the jumper for the contact type
desired, and the location of the jumper on the printed circuit board, are described
below in “Processor Printed Circuit Board C–CPU–2“.
316 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Nominal Currents The rating of the current input transformers of the device can be changed to 1 A or 5 A
with jumper settings that determine the secondary loading of the transformers. When
the device is delivered, these jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker. The
physical arrangements of these jumpers that correspond to the different current
ratings are described below, Subsection 3.1.3.3 “C-I/O–2 Input/Output Board” for side
1 and „C-I/O–6 Input/Output Board“ for side 2.
All the relevant jumpers of one side must be in the same position, i.e. there must be
one of the jumpers X61 through X64 for each of the input transformers and additionally
the common jumper X60.
If nominal current ratings are changed, then the new ratings must be altered under
Addresses 203 IN-SEC I-SIDE1 or 0212 IN-SEC I-SIDE2 in the Power
System Data1 (see Sub-section 2.3).
Note:
The jumper settings must correspond to the secondary device currents configured at
addresses 0203 and 0212. If they do not, the device is blocked and outputs an alarm.
Control Voltages When the device is delivered from the factory, the binary inputs are set to operate with
for Binary Inputs a DC control voltage that corresponds to the rated DC voltage of the power supply. In
general, to optimize the operation of the inputs, the pickup voltage of the inputs should
be set to most closely match the actual control voltage being used. In some cases
such as the one described in the note below, lowering the pickup voltage might be
necessary. Each binary input has a pickup voltage that can be independently
adjusted; therefore, each input can be set according to the function performed.
A jumper position is changed to adjust the pickup voltage of a binary input. The
physical arrangement of the binary input jumpers in relation to the pickup voltages is
explained below, Sub-section 3.1.3.3.
Note:
If the 7UM62 performs trip circuit monitoring, two binary inputs, or one binary input and
a resistor, are connected in series. The pickup voltage of these inputs must be less
than half of the nominal DC voltage of the trip circuit.
Changeover Input/output modules can have relays that are equipped with changeover contacts.
Contacts The device terminals can be connected to either the NC or the NO contact; the choice
is made by jumpers. The relays and cards for which this applies are stated in Section
3.1.3.3 under the side titles "C–I/O–2 Input/Output Board" and "C–I/O–6 Input/Output
Board".
Measuring The measuring transducers TD 1 (e.g. for DC voltage/DC current protection) and TD
Transducers 2 (e.g. for input of the temperature for the overload protection) allow to select whether
voltages or currents will be processed as input quantities. To change the default
setting (measured quantities will be voltages), a few jumpers must be moved. An
overview of the jumper settings is given in the Tables 3-14 and 3-15 in Section 3.1.3.3
under the side title “C–I/O–6 Input/Output Board“.
7UM62 Manual 317

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Caution!
If the jumpers are set to “current” input, connection of a voltage may destroy the board!
For measuring transducer TD 3 (detects e.g. the excitation voltage for the
underexcitation protection) an analog low-pass can be activated or deactivated; the
choice is made by jumpers. For more information see Table 3-16 in Section 3.1.3.3
under the side title “C–I/O–6 Input/Output Board“.
Note:
The jumper settings must correspond to the mode set at addresses 0295, 0296 (volt-
age or current input) and 0297 (with/without filter). If they do not, the device is blocked
and outputs an alarm.
Exchanging The serial interfaces can only be exchanged in the versions for panel flush mounting
Interfaces and cubicle mounting. Which interfaces can be exchanged, and how this is done, is
described in Section 3.1.3.4 under the side title “Exchanging Interface Modules“.
Terminating For reliable data transmission, an RS 485 bus or the electrical Profibus DP should be
Resistors for terminated with resistors at the last device on the bus. The printed circuit boards
RS485 and Profibus (p.c.b.) of the C–CPU–2 processor module and of the RS485 or Profibus interface
DP (Electrical) module are equipped for this purpose with terminating resistors that are switched in
by means of jumpers. Only one of the three possibilities may be used. The physical
location of the jumpers on the p.c.b. is described in Section 3.1.3.3 under the side title
“Processor Printed Circuit Board C–CPU–2“ for the C–CPU–2 processor module, and
in Section 3.1.3.4 under the side title “Serial Interfaces with Bus Capability“ for the
interface modules. Both jumpers must always have the same setting.
As delivered from the factory, the resistors are switched out.
Spare Parts Spare parts can be the battery that provides for storage of the data in the battery-
buffered RAM in case of a power failure, and the miniature fuse of the internal power
supply. Their physical location is shown in Figure 3-7. The ratings of the fuse are
printed on the board next to the fuse itself. When exchanging the fuse, please observe
the hints given in the SIPROTEC®4 System Manual in the chapter “Maintenance”.
3.1.3.2 Disassembling the Device
Important!
It is assumed for the following steps that the device is not operative.
To perform work on the printed circuit boards, such as checking or moving switching
elements or exchanging modules, the buffer battery or the miniature fuse, proceed as
follows:
318 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Caution!
Jumper-setting changes that affect nominal values of the device render the ordering
number and the corresponding nominal values on the nameplate sticker invalid. If
such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the
device. Self adhesive stickers are available that can be used as replacement
nameplates.
o The following equipment is needed:

− Grounded mat for protecting components subject to damage from electrostatic
discharges (ESD).
− Screwdriver with a 6 mm wide tip,
− #1 Philips screwdriver,
− 4.5 mm socket or nut driver.
o Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connector on the back panel at
location “A” and “C”. This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mounting.
o If the device has more communication interfaces at locations “B” and/or “D” on the
rear, the screws located diagonally to the interfaces must be removed. This activity
does not apply if the device is for surface mounting.
o Remove the four corner caps on the front cover and loosen the screws that become
accessible.
o Carefully pull off the front cover. The front cover is connected to the CPU board with
a short ribbon-cable.
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, plugs,
and jumpers must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred. Otherwise,
first touch a grounded metal part. Do not insert or remove the port plugs under live
conditions!
o At one end, disconnect the ribbon-cable between the front cover and the CPU board
(). To disconnect the cable, push up the top latch of the plug connector and push
down the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully pull off the front cover.
o Disconnect the ribbon-cables between the C-CPU-2 board () and the I/O boards (
to , depending on the variant ordered).
o Remove the boards and set them on the grounded mat to protect them from ESD
damage. A greater effort is required to withdraw the CPU board, especially in versions
of the device for surface-mounting, because of the communication connectors.
o Check the jumpers according to Figures 3-7 to 3-11, and Tables 3-1 to 3-8. Change
or remove the jumpers as necessary.
The locations of the printed circuit boards are shown in Figures 3-5 (for 1/2 Size
Housing) and 3-6 (for Full Size Housing).
7UM62 Manual 319

C53000-G1176-C149-3
1 C-CPU-2 Processor p.c.b.

3 C-I/O-2 Input/Output p.c.b.
Slot 5 Slot 19 Slot 33
1 4 3
BI1 to BI6 and Binary Inputs (BI)
BI5 BI7
Figure 3-5 7UM621: Front View (1/2 Size Housing) after Removing the Front Cover
(Simplified and Reduced)
1 C-CPU-2 Processor p.c.b.

1 42 1 42
Slot 5 Slot 19 Slot 33 Slot 19 Slot 33

1 4 2 3
BI1 to BI6 and BI8 to Binary Inputs (BI)

BI5 BI7 BI15
Figure 3-6 7UM622: Front View (Full Size Housing) after Removing the Front Cover (Simplified and Reduced)
320 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.1.3.3 Switching Elements on Printed Circuit Boards
Processor Printed The layout of the p.c.b for the C–CPU–2 processor module is shown in Figure 3-7.
Circuit Board Check the provided nominal voltage of the integrated power supply according to Table
C–CPU–2 3-1, the non-energized position of the live status contact (jumper X40 according to
Table 3-2), the selected pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI1 through BI5 according
to Table 3-3 and of the integrated RS232/RS485 interface according to Tables 3-4
through 3-6. The location and ratings of the miniature fuse (F1) and of the buffer
battery (G1) are shown in Figure 3-7.
3
2
1
X51
Fuse
F1
24/48V DC T4H250V
60-250V DC/115 V AC T2H250V
X40
1
3
X53
2
1
2
3
1
2
X55
4
2
4
2
X22
X21
3
1
3
1
X52
3 4
2
1
4
2
4
2
4
2
X25
X23
3
1
3
1
3
1
X24
X104
X106
1
2
3
X107
X111
X110
321 321
X108
321
1
2
3
3 2 1 X103
X105
X90
123
X109
Cable binder
Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah,
Type CR 1/2 AA
+ –
Battery
G1
Figure 3-7 C-CPU–2 Board Showing the Jumpers for the Power Supply, Binary Inputs BI1
To BI5 and the Battery and Miniature Fuse (Simplified)
7UM62 Manual 321

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table 3-1 Jumper Settings for the Nominal Voltage of the Integrated Power Supply on
the C–CPU–2 Board
Jumper Nominal Voltage

60/110/125 VDC 110/125/220/250 VDC 24/48 VDC
115 VAC
X51 1–2 2–3
Jumpers X51,
X52 1–2 and 3-4 2–3
X52, X53 and X55
X53 1–2 2–3
are not used
X55 not used 1–2
Can be interchanged Not changeable
Table 3-2 Jumper Settings for the Non-Energized Position of the Live Status Contact on
the C–CPU–2 Board
Jumper Non-Energized Position Non-Energized Position Factory Setting

Open Closed
X40 1–2 2–3 2–3
Table 3-3 Jumper Settings for the Pickup Voltages of the Binary Inputs BI1 through BI5
on the C–CPU–2 Board
Binary Input Jumper 17 VDC Pickup1) 73 VDC Pickup2)
BI1 X21 1–2 2–3
BI2 X22 1–2 2–3
BI3 X23 1–2 2–3
BI4 X24 1–2 2–3
BI5 X25 1–2 2–3
1) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC.
2
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and 115 VAC.
The R485 interface can be converted into an RS232 interface by modifying the setting
of the appropriate jumpers.
Jumpers X105 through X110 must be set on the same position.
Table 3-4 Jumper Settings of the Integrated RS232/RS485 Interface on the C–CPU–2
Board
Jumper RS232 RS485

X103 and X104 1–2 1–2
X105 to X110 1–2 2–3
On delivery the jumpers are always set according to the configuration ordered.
322 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
With jumper X111, CTS is activated which is necessary for the communication with
the modem.
Table 3-5 Jumper setting of CTS (Clear-To-Send) on the processor printed circuit
board C-CPU-2
Jumper /CTS of interface RS232 /CTS controlled by /RTS

X111 1–2 2–3 *)
*) default setting in releases from 7SA6...../CC to date
Jumper setting 2–3: the connection to the modem is usually done with star coupler
or optical fibre converter. Therefore the modem control signal according to RS232
standard DIN 66020 is not available. Modem signals are not required since communi-
cation to SIPROTEC® devices is always carried out in the half duplex mode. Use con-
netion cable with ordering number 7XV5100–4.
Jumper setting 1–2: this setting makes the modem signal available, i. e. for a direct
RS232-connection between the SIPROTEC® device and the modem this setting can
be selected optionally. We recommend to use a standard RS232 modem connection
cable (converter 9-pole on 25-pole).
Note: For a direct connection to DIGSI® 4 with interface RS232 jumper X111 must be
plugged in position 2–3.
If there are no external matching resistors in the system, the last devices on a
RS485-bus must be configured via jumpers X103 and X104.
Table 3-6 Jumper Settings Relating to the Terminating Resistors of the RS485 Interface
on the C–CPU–2 Board
Jumper Terminating Resistor Terminating Resistor Factory Set

Connected Disconnected
X103 2–3 1–2 1–2
X104 2–3 1–2 1–2
Note: Both jumpers must always be set for the same position.
Jumper X90 has currently no function. The factory setting is 1–2.

Terminating resistors can also be implemented outside the device (e.g. in the plug
connectors). In that case the terminating resistors provided on the interface card or on
the C–CPU–2 card must be switched out.
7UM62 Manual 323

C53000-G1176-C149-3
+5 V
390 Ω
A/A´
220 Ω
B/B´
390 Ω
Figure 3-8 Terminating Resistors (External)
324 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
C–I/O–1 Input/ The layout of the p.c.b for the C–I/O–1 board is shown in Figure 3-9.
Output Board
X40
1
2
3
X22
X21
LMH
X24
X23
LMH
X26
X25
LMH
X28
X27
LMH
X30
X29
X73 (AD2)
LMH
X72 (AD1)
X71 (AD0)
X32
X31
H L
LMH
X34
X33
LMH
X36
X35
LMH
Figure 3-9 Jumpers on the C–I/O–1 Board for the Binary Inputs BI8 to BI15 (Simplified)
7UM62 Manual 325

C53000-G1176-C149-3
In the version 7UM622, the contact type can be changed for one specific relay (BO13)
from normally open to normally closed (see overview diagrams in section A.2 of the
Appendix).
Table 3-7 Jumper Settings for the Contact of Relay R13 (Binary Output BO 13)
Jumper Non-Energized Position Open Non-Energized Position Closed Factory Setting

(NO Contact) (NC Contact)
X40 1–2 2–3 1–2
Table 3-8 Factory Jumper Settings for the Pickup Voltages of the Binary Inputs
BI 8 through BI 15 on the C–I/O–1 board of the 7UM622
BI 8 X21/X22 L M
BI 9 X23/X24 L M
BI 10 X25/X26 L M
BI 11 X27/X28 L M
BI 12 X29/X30 L M
BI 13 X31/X32 L M
BI 14 X33/X34 L M
BI 15 X35/X36 L M
1
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC.
2) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and 115 VAC.
Bus Address Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the I/O-1 board are used to set the bus address and
must not be changed. Table 3-9 shows the factory setting of the jumpers. The physical
location of the modules is shown in Figures 3-5 and 3-6.
Table 3-9 Factory Jumper Setting on the C–I/O–1 Board of the 7UM622
Jumper Factory Setting

X71 L
X72 H
X73 H
326 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Output Board
3
2
1
X41
X71 X72 X73
(AD0)
1
2
3
(AD1)
1
2
3
(AD2)
L
H
X60
5A 3
2
1A 1
X61
5A 3
2
1A 1
T6 T5
X62
1A 1
2
5A 3
T7 T8
X63
X64
1A 1
2
5A 3
5A 3
2
1A 1
Figure 3-10 C–I/O–2 board Showing the Jumpers Settings to be Checked
For one specific relay (BO 6) the contact type can be changed from normally open to
normally closed (see overview diagrams in section A.2 of the Appendix):
Table 3-10 Jumper Settings for Choosing the Contact Type of Binary Output BO 6 on the
C–I/O–2 Board
Jumper NO Contact NC Contact Factory Setting

X41 1–2 2–3 1–2
7UM62 Manual 327

C53000-G1176-C149-3
The rated current settings of the input current transformers are checked on the
C–I/O–2 board. All jumpers must be in the same position, i.e. there must be one
jumper each (X61 to X64) for each of the input transformers, and the common jumper
X60. However: In the version with sensitive earth fault current input (input transformer
T8) there is no jumper X64.
Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the C–I/O-2 board are used to set the bus address
and must not be changed. Table 3-11 shows the factory setting of the jumpers.
Table 3-11 Factory Jumper Setting on the C–I/O–2 Board

X71 (AD0) 1–2 (H)
X72 (AD1) 1–2 (H)
X73 (AD2) 2–3 (L)
328 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Output Board
X21
LMH
3
2
1
X22
X41 2
L MH
1
X42
X95
3
2
1
X60
3
2
1
5A
1A
U 21
X94
I 3
X69
1 2 3
1 2 3
X93
3
2
1
UI
X68
X67
3
2
1 U
I
U 21
X92
I 3
X91
3
2
1
X61
3
2
1
5A
T10 T9 1A
X73 X72 X71
(AD2)
1
2
3
(AD1)
1
2
3
(AD0)
X62
3 5A
2
1 1A
L
H
T11 T8
X63
X64
3 5A
2
1 1A
3
2
1
5A
1A
Figure 3-11 C–I/O–6 board Showing the Jumpers Settings to be Checked
Table 3-12 Factory Jumper Settings for the Pickup Voltages of the Binary Inputs
BI 6 and BI 7 on the C–I/O–6 board
BI 6 X21 L M
BI 7 X22 L M
1
) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC.
2) Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 220 VDC and 115 VAC.
7UM62 Manual 329

C53000-G1176-C149-3
For two specific relays (BO 11 and BO 12) the contact type can be changed from
normally open to normally closed (see overview diagrams in section A.2 of the
Appendix):
Table 3-13 Jumper Settings for Choosing the Contact Type of Binary Outputs BO 11 and
BO 12 on the C–I/O–6 Board
Binary Output Jumper NO Contact NC Contact Factory Setting

BO 11 X41 1–2 2–3 1–2
BO 12 X42 1–2 2–3 1–2
The rated current settings of the input current transformers are checked on the
C–I/O–6 board. All jumpers must be in the same position, i.e. there must be one
jumper each (X61 through X64) for each of the input transformers, and the common
jumper X60. However: In the version with sensitive earth fault current input (input
transformer T8) there is no jumper X64.
Table 3-14 Jumper Settings for the Input Characteristic (U/I) of Measuring Transducer 1
Jumper Voltage Input ±10 V Current Input (4–20/20 mA) Factory Setting
X94 1–2 2–3 1–2
X95 1–2 2–3 1–2
X67 1–2 2–3 1–2
Table 3-15 Jumper Settings for the Input Characteristic (U/I) of Measuring Transducer 2
Jumper Voltage Input ±10 V Current Input (4–20/20 mA) Factory Setting
X92 1–2 2–3 1–2
X93 1–2 2–3 1–2
X68 1–2 2–3 1–2
Caution!
If the jumpers are set to “current” input, connection of a voltage may destroy the board!
Table 3-16 Jumper Settings for Activating/Deactivating the 10 Hz Low-Pass Filter of

Measuring Transducer 3 *
Jumper Low-Pass Filter Inactive Low-Pass Filter Active Factory Setting

X91 1–2 2–3 2–3
X69 1–2 2–3 2–3
* Measuring transducer 3 has only a voltage input (± 10 V)
330 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Note:
The jumper settings must correspond to the mode set at addresses 0295, 0296 (volt-
age or current input) and 0297 (with/without filter). If they do not, the device is blocked
and outputs an alarm. After any changes to the jumper settings, you should therefore
immediately change the corresponding parameter settings using DIGSI® 4.
Jumpers X71, X72 and X73 on the I/O-6 board are used to set the bus address and
must not be changed. Table 3-17 shows the factory setting of the jumpers.
Table 3-17 Factory Jumper Setting on the I/O-6 Board

X71 (AD0) 1–2 (H)
X72 (AD1) 2–3 (L)
X73 (AD2) 1–2 (H)
Note:
Measuring transducers that are not used should be shorted at the input terminals.
7UM62 Manual 331

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.1.3.4 Interface Modules
Exchanging The interface modules are located on the C–CPU–2 board ( in Figure 3-5 and 3-6).
Interface Modules Figure 3-12 shows the p.c.b. with the location of the modules.
Mounting position
(rear of housing)
Analog output D
System interface
or analog output B
Figure 3-12 C–CPU–2 board with Interface Modules
Please observe the following:

• The interface modules can only be exchanged in devices for panel flush mounting
and cubicle mounting.
Devices for panel surface mounting with two-tier terminals can only be converted in
the factory.
• You can fit only those interface modules that are also part of the standard
configurations of the device as specified in the Ordering Data in the Appendix A.1.
332 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table 3-18 Exchange Interface Modules
Interface Location Exchange Module

RS232
RS485
FO 820 nm
Profibus DP RS485
System Interface Profibus DP twin ring
B
Modbus RS485
Modbus 820 nm
DNP3.0, RS485
DNP3.0, 820 nm
Analog Interface 2 x 0 to 20 mA
RS232
Service InterfaceT C
RS485
Analog Interface D 2 x 0 to 20 mA
The order numbers of the exchange modules can be found in the Appendix in Section
A.1.1 Accessories.
Serial Interfaces If the device variant used has interfaces with bus capability, the bus should be
with Bus Capability terminated with resistors at the last device on the bus. In the case of the 7UM62, these
are variants with RS485 or Profibus interfaces.
The terminating resistors are located on the RS485 or Profibus interface module,
which is on the C–CPU–2 board ( in Figure 3-5 and 3-6), or directly on the p.c.b. of
the CPU–2 board (see Section 3.1.3.3 under the side title “Processor Printed Circuit
Board C–CPU–2“, Table 3-6).
Figure 3-12 shows a view of the C–CPU–2 board with the location of the modules.
The module for the RS485 interface is shown in Figure 3-13, the module for the
Profibus interface in Figure 3-14.
On delivery the jumpers are set so that the terminating resistors are switched out. Both
jumpers of a module must be set on the same position.
7UM62 Manual 333

C53000-G1176-C149-3
1 2 3
X3
8X
1 X6
2 X7
3 X4
Terminating Resistors X12 X5
Jumper 1 2 3 1 2 3
Connected Disconnected 1
X11
2
3
X3 2–3 1–2*) X10
1 2 3 1
X4 2–3 1–2*) 2
3
X13
*) Factory Set C53207-
A324-B180
Figure 3-13 Location of the Jumpers for Configuring the Terminating Resistors of the
Interface
C53207-A322- 2 3 4
B100
B101
Terminating Resistors
Jumper 3 2 1
Connected Disconnected X4
X3 1–2 2–3*)
3 2 1
X3
X4 1–2 2–3 *)
*)
Factory Set
Figure 3-14 Location of the Jumpers for Configuring the Profibus–Interface Terminating Resistors
connectors). In that case the terminating resistors provided on the RS485/Profibus
interface module or directly on the C-CPU-2 board card must be switched out (refer
Figure 3-8). In that case the terminating resistors provided on the RS485/Profibus
interface module or directly on the C-CPU-2 board card must be switched out.
RS232 can be changed to RS485 and vice versa by setting the jumpers on the
interface cards. Figure 3-13 shows the physical location of the jumpers. Table 3-19
shows which jumper settings are associated to RS232 and RS485 respectively. When
the device is delivered from the factory, the jumper setting corresponds to the
configuration ordered and need not be changed.
Table 3-19 Configuration of Jumpers for RS 232 or RS 485 on the Interface Card
Jumper X5 X6 X7 X8 X10 X11 X12 X13

RS 232 1–2 1–2 1–2 1–2 1–2 2–3 1–2 1–2
RS 485 2–3 2–3 2–3 2–3 2–3 2–3 1–2 1–2
Jumpers X5 through X10 must be set on the same position!
334 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Analog Output The AN20 analog output board (see Figure 3-15) has 2 floating channels with a current
range of 0 to 20 mA (unipolar, max. 350 Ω).
The location on the C–CPU–2 board is “B” or/and “D” depending on the variant
ordered (see Figure 3-12).
Figure 3-15 AN20 Analog Output Board
3.1.3.5 To Reassemble the Device:
o Carefully insert the boards into the case. The installation locations of the boards are
shown in Figures 3-5 and 3-6. For the model of the device designed for surface-
mounting, use the metal lever to insert the C–CPU–2 board. The installation is easier
with the lever.
o By first attaching to the I/O board(s), connect the ribbon cable between the I/O
board(s) and the C–CPU–2 board. Be especially careful not to bend any of the
connector pins! Do not use any force! Be sure that the plug connectors latch.
o Connect the ribbon cable between the C–CPU–2 board and the front cover. Be
especially careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use any force! Be sure
that the plug connectors latch.
o Close the locking clips of the plug connectors.
o Carefully replace the front cover being mindful of the ribbon-cable. Fasten the cover
to the case with the screws.
o Insert and tighten the screw-posts for the D-subminiature connector at location “A” on
the rear of the device. This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mounting.
o Insert and tighten the screws for the communication interfaces at locations “B” and “C”
on the back panel of the device. This activity does not apply if the device is for surface
mounting.
o Replace the four corner covers.
7UM62 Manual 335

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.2 Checking Connections and System (Plant) Integration
3.2.1 Checking the Data Connections of Serial Interfaces
The following tables shows the pin-assignments for the various serial interfaces and
for the time synchronization interface of the device.
Operator Interface When the recommended communication cable is used, correct connection between
at Front the SIPROTEC® device and the PC is automatically ensured. See the Appendix, Sub-
section A.1 for an ordering description of the cable.
System Interface When a serial interface of the device is connected to a a central control system
(SCADA), the data connection must be checked. A visual check of the transmit
channel and the receive channel is important. In the RS232 and the FO interface,
each connection is dedicated to one transmission direction. The data output of one
device must be connected to the data input of the other device, and vice versa.
The data cable connections must conform to DIN 66020 and ISO 2110 (see also Table
3-20):
− TxD data transmit
− RxD data receive
− RTS request to send
− CTS request to send
− GND signal/chassis ground
The cable screen is to be grounded at both ends. In environments with extremely high
electromagnetic interference, the EMC immunity can be improved by running the GND
conductor as a separate, individually screened wire pair.
The location of the connections is shown in Figure 3-16.
RS232 RS485
5 1 1
9 6 6
RS232-FO
6 9 9
1 5 5
P-Slave
AME
Operator interface Time synchronization

front side interface
Serial system interface rear side
rear side (panel flush mounting)
Figure 3-16 9 pin D-subminiature Connector
336 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table 3-20 Installation of the D-Subminiature Ports
Pin No. PC Interface at RS 232 RS 485 Profibus DP Slave, RS 485 DNP3.0, Modbus, RS485
Front
1 Screen (with screen ends electrically connected)
2 RxD RxD – – –
3 TxD TxD A/A’ (RxD/TxD–N) A/A’ (RxD/TxD–N) A
4 – – – CNTR–A (TTL) RTS (TTL)
5 GND GND C/C’ (GND) C/C’ (GND) GND1
6 – – – + 5 V voltage supply VCC1
(max. load < 100 mA)
7 – RTS –*) –*) –
8 – CTS A/A’ (RxD/TxD–N) A/A’ (RxD/TxD–N) B
9 – – – – –
*) Pin 7 also can carry the RS 232 RTS signal to an RS 485 interface. Pin 7 must therefore
not be connected!
RS 485 The RS 485 interface is capable of half-duplex mode with the signals A/A’ and B/B’
Termination with a common relative potential C/C’ (GND). Verify that only the last device on the
bus has the terminating resistors connected, and that the other devices on the bus do
not. The jumpers for the terminating resistors are on the interface card mounted on the
C–CPU–2 board. Refer to Figure 3-13 (RS485) and to Figure 3-14 (Profibus).
connectors). In that case the terminating resistors provided on the interface card must
be switched out.
If the bus is extended, make sure again that only the last device on the bus has the
terminating resistors switched-in, and that all other devices on the bus do not.
Analog Output The two analog values are output as currents on a 9-pin DSUB female connector. The
outputs are isolated.
Table 3-21 Pin Assignment of the DSUB Female Connector for the Analog Output
Pin No. Designation
1 Channel 1 positive
2 –
3 –
4 –
5 Channel 2 positive
6 Channel 1 negative
7 –
8 –
9 Channel 2 negative
7UM62 Manual 337

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Time Either 5 VDC, 12 VDC or 24 VDC time synchronization signals can be processed if the
Synchronization connections are made as indicated in Table 3-22.
Interface
Table 3-22 Pin Assignments for the D-Subminiature Port of the Time Synchronization
Interface
Pin No. Designation Signal Meaning
1 P24_TSIG Input 24 V
2 P5_TSIG Input 5 V
3 M_TSIG Return Line
4 –*) –*)
5 Screen Screen Potential
6 – –
7 P12_TSIG Input 12 V
8 P_TSYNC*) Input 24 V*)
9 Screen Screen Potential
*) assigned but not used

For the pin assignment of the time synchronization interface in panel surface-mounted
devices, please refer to the Appendix (Figures A-22 to A-25).
Optical Fibers Signals transmitted via optical fibers are unaffected by interference. The fibers
guarantee electrical isolation between the connections. Transmit and receive
connections are shown with the symbols for transmit and for receive.
The normal setting for the optical fiber interface is ”Light off.” If this setting is to be
changed, use the operating program DIGSI® 4, as described in the SIPROTEC® 4–
System Manual.
WARNING!
Laser rays! Do not look directly into the optical fiber cables!
3.2.2 Checking the Device Connections
General The device connections must be checked to ensure the correct integration of the
device e.g. in the cubicle. The check includes, among others, the wiring and the
functionality as specified in the set of drawings, the visual inspection of the protection
system and a simplified functional test of the protective device.
Auxiliary Voltage Before applying power supply voltage or measuring quantities for the first time, be
Supply sure the device has been in the operating area for at least two hours. This time period
allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium, and prevents dampness and
condensation from occurring.
338 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Note:
If a redundant supply is used, there must be a permanent, i.e. uninterruptible
connection between the minus polarity connectors of system 1 and system 2 of the
d.c. voltage supply (no switching device, no fuse), because otherwise there is a risk
of voltage doubling in case of a double earth fault.
o Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. Check the polarity
and magnitude of the voltage at the device terminals or at the connector modules.
Visual Inspection Check the cubicle and the devices for damage, condition of the connections etc., and
device earthing.
Secondary Testing This test does not undertake to check the individual protection functions for the
accuracy of their pick-up values and characteristic curves. Unlike analog electronic or
electromechanical protective devices, no protection function test is required within the
framework of the device test, since this is ensured by the factory tests. Protection
functions are only used to check the device connections.
A plausibility check of the analog-digital converter with the operational measured
values is sufficient since the subsequent processing of the measured values is
numerical and thus internal failures of protection functions can be ruled out.
Where secondary tests are to be performed, a three-phase test equipment providing
test currents and voltages is recommended (e.g. Omicron CMC 56 for manual and
automatic testing). The phase angle between currents and voltages should be
continuously controllable.
The accuracy which can be achieved during testing depends on the accuracy of the
testing equipment. The accuracy values specified in the Technical data can only be
reproduced under the reference conditions set down in IEC 60255 resp. VDE 0435/
part 303 and with the use of precision measuring instruments.
Tests can be performed using the currently set values or the default values.
If unsymmetrical currents and voltages occur during the tests it is likely that the
asymmetry monitoring will frequently operate. This is of no concern because the
condition of steady-state measured values is monitored and, under normal operating
conditions, these are symmetrical; under short circuit conditions these monitoring
systems are not effective.
Note: During dynamic testing, at least one a.c. measured quantity should be present
at one of the analog inputs, with a sufficient amplitude.
The measured quantities of the earth paths (IEE, UE) cannot be used for the integrated
sampling frequency adaptation. During tests concerning IEE or UE, at least one a.c.
measured quantity must be applied to one of the phase inputs.
7UM62 Manual 339

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Secondary Test of A test set with 6 current outputs is recommended for secondary testing. This section
the Differential gives you hints how to proceed if less current sources are available. The test current
Protection can be injected individually for each winding, thus simulating each time a transformer
fault with single-ended infeed.
The preset parameter for I-DIFF> as pick-up value (address 2021) applies for three
or two-phase testing. The pickup value for single-phase testing depends on the
method the zero sequence current is treated within the relay:
If the zero sequence current is eliminated, then the pickup value is increased to 1.5
times the set value because of the elimination of the zero sequence current; this
corresponds to conventional circuitry when the current is fed in via matching
transformers.
If the zero sequence current is not eliminated (isolated starpoint), the pickup value
corresponds to the setting value I-DIFF> even during single-phase testing.
Checking the pickup value is performed by slowly increasing the test current for each
winding with the test set. Tripping occurs when the pickup value, converted according
to the matching factor, is reached. When the test current falls below approximately 0.7
times the pickup value, the relay drops off.
In the method described above, the pickup values for single-ended infeed are tested.
It is also possible to check the entire characteristic. Since trip current and restraint
current cannot be fed in separately (they can, however, be read out separately in the
test measurements), a separate test current has to be applied to each of the two
windings.
When testing with the operational parameters, it should be noted that the setting value
IDIFF > refers to the rated current of the transformer, i.e. current which results from:
S N Transf [ MVA ] ⋅ 1000

IN Transf = ------------------------------------------------------------ [A]
3 ⋅ U N Winding [ kV ]
for three-phase transformers
with SN Transf – MVA rating of transformer

UN Winding – Rated voltage of the respective winding; if a winding is regulated,
then the parameterized voltage according to Section 2.11.2.2 applies
Furthermore, the pickup values can change with single -and two-phase testing
depending on the vector group of the protected transformer; this corresponds to
conventional circuitry, when currents are applied via matching current transformers.
Table 3-23 shows these changes as a factor kVG depending on the vector group and
the type of fault, for three-phase transformers.
In order to obtain the pickup value, the setting value I-DIFF> (parameter address
2021) must be multiplied by the factor
I N Transf
- ⋅ k VG
----------------------------------
I N CT (primary)
340 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Table 3-23 Correction Factor kVG Depending on Vector Group and Fault Type
Type of Fault Reference Winding Even VG Numeral Odd VG Numeral

(High Voltage Side) (0, 2, 4,6, 8, 10) (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11)
Three-phase 1 1 1
Two-Phase 1 1 √3/2 = 0.866
Single-Phase 3/2 = 1.5 3/2 = 1.5 √3 = 1.73
with I0 elimination
Single-Phase 1 1 √3 = 1.73
without I0 elimination
The pickup values are checked for each winding by slowly increasing the test current
with the secondary test set. Tripping is initiated when the converted pickup value is
reached.
Example (Application as “mere transformer protection”):

Three-phase transformer SN = 57 MVA, vector group Yd5
Primary (higher) voltage 110 kV
Current transformers 300 A/1 A
Secondary (lower) voltage25 kV
Current transformers 1500 A/1 A
The following applies for the primary winding:
S N Transf [ MVA ] ⋅ 1000 57 [ MVA ] ⋅ 1000

I N Transf = ------------------------------------------------------------ [A] = -------------------------------------------- [A] = 299.2 A
3 ⋅ U N Winding [ kV ] ( 3 ⋅ 110 ) [ kV ]
In this case the rated current of the winding is practically equal to the current
transformer rated current. Thus, the pickup value (referred to the rated relay current)
complies with the set IDIFF> of the relay when three or two-phase testing is performed
(kVG = 1 for reference winding). With single-phase testing and zero sequence current
elimination, a pickup value 1.5 times higher must be expected.
The following applies for the secondary winding:
S N Transf [ MVA ] ⋅ 1000 57 [ MVA ] ⋅ 1000

I N Transf = ------------------------------------------------------------ [A] = -------------------------------------------- [A] = 1316 A
3 ⋅ U N Winding [ kV ] ( 3 ⋅ 25 ) [ kV ]
7UM62 Manual 341

C53000-G1176-C149-3
When testing this winding, the pickup value (referred to the rated relay current) will
amount to:
I N Transf I N Transf 1316 A

-------------------
- = --------------------------------- ⋅k ⋅ IDIFF> = ------------------- ⋅ k VG ⋅ IDIFF>
I N Relay I N CT (primary) SG 1500 A
= ( 0.877 ⋅ k VG ⋅ IDIFF > )
Because of the odd vector group numeral, the following pickup values apply:
IPickup
Three-phase kVG = 1 - = 0.877 ⋅ IDIFF >
------------------
I N Relay
IPickup
Two-phase kVG = √3/2 - = 0.760 ⋅ IDIFF >
------------------
I N Relay
IPickup
Single-phase kVG = √3 - = 1.52 ⋅ IDIFF >
------------------
I N Relay
Wiring It is particularly important to check the correct wiring and allocation of all device
interfaces. The test function described in section 3.3.3 for checking the binary inputs
and outputs is a useful instrument for this. For analog inputs a plausibility check can
be performed as described above under the side title “Secondary Testing”.
Functional Test The only functional test required for protective relays is a plausibility check of the
operational measured values by means of some secondary test equipment; this is to
ensure that no damage has occurred during transit (see also side title “Secondary
Testing”).
Undervoltage Note: In devices where the undervoltage protection function is configured and
Protection activated, please note the following: special measures have been taken to ensure that
the device does not pick up immediately after applying the auxiliary power supply, as
a result of the measuring voltage that is not yet present at the moment of power-up.
However, the device does pick up as soon as operating state 1 (measuring quantities
exist) has been attained.
LED Indications After tests which cause LED indications to appear, these should be reset, at least once
by each of the possible methods: the reset bottom on the front plate and via the remote
reset relay. Please note that LEDs are automatically reset when a new fault occurs,
and that you can choose whether a new annunciation is made on pickup or on output
of a trip command (parameter 7110 FltDisp.LED/LCD).
Test Switches Check the functions of all test switches that are installed for the purposes of secondary
testing and isolation of the device. Of particular importance are test switches in current
transformer circuits. Be sure these switches short-circuit the current transformers
when they are in the test mode.
342 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.2.3 Checking the Integration in the Plant
3.2.3.1 General Hints
Warning!
The following procedures are carried out with dangerous voltages present. Therefore,
only qualified people who are familiar with and adhere to the safety procedures and
precautionary measures shall perform the procedures.
This test is performed to ensure that the protective device is correctly integrated into
the plant to be protected.
One important step in the test is the check of the protection configuration (masking and
setting values) for conformity with the plant requirements.
An integration test across all interfaces allows to check on one hand the cubicle wiring
and the functionality in accordance with the set of drawings, and on the other hand the
correct wiring between the sensor or transformer and the protective device.
This test does not undertake to check the individual protection functions for the
accuracy of their pick-up values and characteristic curves.
Auxiliary Voltage Check the voltage magnitude and polarity at the input terminals.
Supply
Note:
If a redundant supply is used, there must be a permanent, i.e. uninterruptible
connection between the minus polarity connectors of system 1 and system 2 of the
d.c. voltage supply (no switching device, no fuse), because otherwise there is a risk
of voltage doubling in case of a double earth fault.
Caution!
Operating the device on a battery charger without a connected battery can lead to
unusually high voltages and consequently, the destruction of the device. For limit
values see Sub-section 4.1.2 under Technical Data.
Visual Inspection − Check the cubicle and the devices for damage;
− Check the earthing of the cubicle and of the protective device;
− Check the external cabling for condition and completeness.
7UM62 Manual 343

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Inventory of the In order to check the protection configuration (masking and setting values) for
Technical Plant conformity with the plant requirements, it is necessary to make an inventory of the
Data technical data for the individual components of the primary plant. These components
include, among others, the generator or motor, the unit transformer (step-up
transformer) and the voltage and current transformers.
Where deviations from the planning data are found, the settings of the protection must
be modified accordingly.
Analog Inputs The check of the current and voltage transformer circuits includes:
• Inventory of the technical data
• Visual inspection of the transformers, e.g. for damage, mounting position and
connections
• Check of the transformer earthing, especially the earthing of the broken delta
winding in only one phase
• Check of the cabling for conformity with the circuit diagram
Other checks that may be necessary for a specific job include:

• Measuring the cable insulation
• Measuring the transformation ratio (VT, CT) and the polarity
• Measuring the burden
• Checking the functions of test switches, if used for secondary testing.
• Measuring transducers/ Measuring transducer connection
Binary Inputs and See also section 3.3.3.

Outputs
G Setting the binary inputs:
− Check the jumper settings for the pick-up thresholds and modify, if necessary (see
section 3.1.3, Figures 3-7, 3-9 and 3-11, as well as Tables 3-3, 3-8 and 3-12)
− Check the pick-up threshold – if possible – with a variable d.c. voltage source
G Check the tripping circuits from the command relays and the tripping lines down to
the various components (circuit breakers, excitation circuit, stop valves, switchover
devices etc.)
G Check the signal processing from the signal relays and the signal lines down to the
station control and protection system; to do so, energize the signal contacts of the
protective device and check the texts in the station control and protection system
G Check the control circuits from the output relays and the control lines down to the
circuit breakers and disconnectors etc.
G Check the binary input signals from the signal lines down to the protective device
by activating the external contacts
Auxiliary Contact of Since it is very important for the undervoltage protection, the impedance protection
VT Protective and the voltage-dependent definite time and inverse time overcurrent protection that
Switches these functions are blocked automatically if the circuit breaker for the voltage
transformers has tripped, the blocking should be checked along with the voltage
circuits. Open for this the VT protective switches.
344 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
When the voltage on the binary input connected to this auxiliary contact is removed,
the message “>FAIL:Feeder VT ON” should appear in the Event Log. When the
voltage is restored, the message “>FAIL:Feeder VT OFF” should occur. If one of
these messages does not appear, then the connections and the configuration settings
should be checked. If the ON and OFF messages are exchanged, then the breaker
auxiliary contact type should be checked and corrected if necessary.
7UM62 Manual 345

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.3 Commissioning
Warning!
When operating an electrical device, certain parts of the device inevitably have
dangerous voltages. Severe personal injury or property damage can result if the
device is not handled properly.
Only qualified people shall work on and around this device after becoming thoroughly
familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with
the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures.
The main points to observe are:
• The device is to be grounded to the substation ground before any other connections
are made.
• Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the connections to current
transformers, voltage transformers, and test circuits.
• Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply
voltage has been removed, i.e. capacitors can still be charged.
• After removing voltage from the power supply, wait a minimum of 10 seconds
before re-energizing the power supply. This wait allows the initial conditions to be
firmly established before the device is re-energized.
• The limit values given in Technical Data (Chapter 10) must not be exceeded, neither
during testing nor during commissioning.
When testing the device with directly connected test equipment, make sure that no
other measurement quantities are connected and that the trip and close circuits to the
circuit breakers and other primary switches are disconnected from the device.
DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits must be short-circuited before the
current leads to the device are disconnected!
If test switches are installed that automatically short-circuit the current transformer
circuits, opening these test switches (placing them in the "Test" position) is sufficient
provided the short-circuit function has been previously tested.
During the commissioning procedure, switching operations will be carried out. It is

assumed for the tests described here that this is possible without danger. Therefore,
these tests are not intended for operational checks.
Warning!
The following procedures are carried out with dangerous voltages present. Therefore,
only qualified people who are familiar with and adhere to the safety procedures and
precautionary measures shall perform the procedures.
346 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.3 Commissioning
3.3.1 Test Mode and Blocking Data Transmission
If the SIPROTEC®4 device is connected to a central or master computer system via

the system interface, then the information that is transmitted can be influenced (see
Table “Protocol-dependent functions” in the Appendix A.13).
If Test mode is set ON, then a message sent by the device to the master system has
an additional test bit. This bit allows the message to be recognized as resulting from
testing and not an actual fault or power system event.
If DataStop is set ON, transmission to the master station is blocked.
The procedures for setting Test mode and DataStop are described in SIPROTEC®
4 System Manual. Note that when DIGSI® 4 is being used, the program must be in the
Online operating mode for the test features to be used.
3.3.2 Testing the System Interface
Preliminary Notes If the device provides a system interface, and if this interface is used to communicate
with a central or master computer system, the DIGSI® 4 software can be used to test
whether the messages are being transmitted correctly. This test option should
however definitely not be used while the device is in service on a live system.
DANGER!
The initiation or extraction of messages via the system interface using the test
function constitutes an actual exchange of information between the device and
the control system. Connected plant such as e.g. circuit breakers or isolators
may be switched as a result of this!
Note: After termination of the test mode, the device will reboot. Thereby, all
annunciation buffers are erased. If required, the events in these buffers should be
extracted with DIGSI® 4 prior to the test.
The interface test can be done using DIGSI® 4 in the online operating mode:
G Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the
device appear.
G Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
G In the view of the list, double click on the dialog box Test–Indications for
System Interface. The dialog box Generate Indications is opened (refer
to Figure 3-17).
Structure of the In the column Indication, the display text of all messages are shown, which were
Test Dialogue Box assigned to the system interface in the matrix during configuration. In the column
SETPOINT status the state of the message that has to be tested can be defined.
Depending on the message type, different prompts are provided for this purpose (e.g.
event coming/event going). By clicking in a field, it becomes possible to select
the desired state in a pull-down list.
7UM62 Manual 347

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Figure 3-17 Dialog Box: Generate indications
Changing the Following the first operation of one of the keys in the column Action a prompt for the
Operating State entry of password No. 6 (for hardware test menus) appears. After correct entry of the
password, individual messages can be initiated. To do this, click on the button Send
in the corresponding line. The corresponding message is initiated and can now be
retrieved as part of the operational alarms in the SIPROTEC® device, as well as from
the central or master station of the plant.
Further tests remain possible while the dialog box is open.
Test in the For all information that has to be transmitted to the control system, open the drop-
Transmission down list in the column SETPOINT status and test the alternatives listed there:
Direction
G Ensure that any switching operations that may result from these tests can be
executed without danger (see above under DANGER!).
G With the function to be tested, click on send, and check that the corresponding
information is received at the central or master station, and, if required, the
expected response results.
Exiting the To end the interface test, click on Close. The dialog box closes. The device becomes
Procedure unavailable for a brief start-up period immediately after this.
348 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.3 Commissioning
3.3.3 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs
Preliminary Notes The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC®4 device can be individually
and precisely controlled in DIGSI® 4. This feature can be used, for example, to verify
control wiring from the device to substation equipment (operational checks), during
commissioning. This test feature shall not be used while the device is in service on a
live system.
DANGER!
Changing the status of a binary input or output using the test feature of DIGSI® 4
results in an actual and immediate, corresponding change in the SIPROTEC®
device. Connected equipment such as circuit breakers will be operated by these
actions!
Note: After the Hardware Test is complete, the device enters a start-up phase. All
message buffers are erased. If necessary, the buffer contents can be read out and
saved using DIGSI® 4.
The interface test can be done using DIGSI® 4 in the online operating mode:
G Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the
device appear.
G Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the window.
G Double-click in the list view on Hardware Test. The dialog box of the same name
opens (see Figure 3-18).
Hardware Test: The dialog box is horizontally divided into three groups: BI for binary inputs, REL for
Dialog Box output relays, and LED for light-emitting diodes. Each of these groups is associated
with an appropriately marked switching area. By clicking in an area, components
within the associated group can be turned on or off.
In the Status column, the present conditions of the hardware components are
symbolically shown. The present physical conditions of the binary inputs and output
relays are shown as symbols for open and closed contacts. The present condition of
a light-emitting diode is shown as the symbol for an LED, turned on or off.
The possible intended condition of a hardware component is indicated with clear text
under the Schedule column, which is next to the Status column. The intended
condition offered for a component is always the opposite of the present state.
The right-most column indicates the operating equipment, commands, or messages
that are configured (masked) to the hardware components.
7UM62 Manual 349

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Figure 3-18 Dialog Box for Hardware Test — Example
Changing The displays of the intended conditions are shown as switching fields. To change the
Hardware condition of a hardware component, click on the associated switching field in the
Conditions Schedule column.
If the password was activated for Hardware Test, then Password No. 6 will be
requested before the first hardware modification is allowed. Only after entry of the
correct password a condition change will be executed. Further condition changes
remain possible while the dialog box is open.
Testing the Output You can make each output relay pick up individually, and in this way test the wiring
Relays between the output relays of the 7UM62 and the plant, without having to generate the
indications allocated to them. As soon as the first condition change is initiated for any
output relay, all output relays are separated from the device functionality and can now
only be operated by the Hardware Test function. This means, for example, that a
switching command that is caused by a protection function or by a control command
from the operator panel will not be executed.
G Make sure that there is no risk involved in carrying out the switching operations
triggered by the output relays (see above under DANGER!).
G Test each output relay using the associated Scheduled field in the dialog box.
G Close the test procedure (see side title below “Ending the procedure”) to avoid
unintentional switching operations in the course of further testing.
Testing the Binary To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 7UM62, you must
Inputs initiate in the plant the condition that activates the respective input and read out the
effect at the device.
To do so, open once again the dialog box Hardware Test to view the physical
position of the binary input. No password is required yet.
G Trigger in the plant each of the functions that activates the binary input.
350 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.3 Commissioning
G Check the reaction in the Status column of the dialog box. To do so, the dialog
box must be updated. This is described below under the side title “Updating the
display”.
If you want to check the effects of a binary input signal without actually performing
switching operations in the plant, you can do so by activating individual binary inputs
by means of the Hardware Test function. As soon as you have initiated the first
condition change of a binary input, and entered password no. 6, all binary inputs are
separated from the device side functionality and can only be operated by the
Hardware Test function. This means, for example, that external signals to binary
inputs would be ignored by the device if their status conditions change and the test
procedure had not been closed.
G Close the test procedure (see side title below “Ending the procedure”).
LED Test The LEDs can be tested in a similar way as other I/O components. As soon as the first
condition change is initiated for any output relay, all output relays are separated from
the device functionality and can now only be operated by the Hardware Test function.
This means, for example, that no LED will light up on receiving a signal from a
protection function, or in case of an LED reset from the device front panel.
Updating the When the dialog box Hardware Test is opened, the present conditions of the
Display hardware components at that moment are read in and displayed. An update occurs:
− for each component, if a command to change the condition is successfully
performed,
− for all hardware components if the Update field is clicked,
− for all hardware components with cyclical updating if the Automatic Update
(20sec) field is marked.
Ending the To end the interface test, click on Close. The device becomes unavailable for a brief
Procedure start-up period immediately after this. The dialog box closes. Then all hardware
components are returned to the operating conditions.
3.3.4 Testing the Breaker Failure Scheme
If the device has a breaker failure protection, and that function is used, its integration
in the plant must be checked under operating conditions.
It is particularly important for tests within the plant that the trip command in case of a
breaker failure should be correctly retransmitted to the adjacent circuit breakers.
Adjacent circuit breakers are those breakers that must trip in case of a breaker failure
to cut off the short-circuit current. This means that they are those circuit breakers that
feed the faulted line.
It is not possible to define a generally applicable, detailed test specification since the
definition of adjacent circuit breakers depends to a large extent of the plant layout.
7UM62 Manual 351

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.3.5 Checking the Analog Outputs
7UM62 can be equipped with up to 2x2 analog outputs. Where analog outputs are
provided, and used, their functioning should be tested.
Since various types of measured values or events can be output, the test to be
performed depends on the type of values for which it will be used. These values must
be generated (e.g. with some secondary test equipment).
Make sure that the values are correctly output at their destination.
3.3.6 Testing User-Defined Functions (CFC)
A 7UM62 has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user,
especially with the CFC logic. Any special function or logic added to the device must
be checked.
Naturally, general test procedures cannot be given. Rather, the configuration of these
user-defined functions and the necessary associated conditions must be known and
verified. Of particular importance are the possible interlocking conditions of the circuit
breakers and other primary switching devices. They must be considered and tested.
3.3.7 Checking the Rotor Earth Fault Protection at Stand-Still
3.3.7.1 Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, fn)
The rotor earth fault protection can be checked with the machine at stand-still. The
coupling unit, however, must be supplied with an external a.c. voltage 100 V to 125 V,
or 230 V (50 Hz or 60 Hz). Please refer also to connection diagram Figure 2-95 in
Section 2.30.1).
Switch rotor earth fault protection (address 6001 ROTOR E/F) to Block. Relay.
In the case of machines with rotating rectifier excitation (Figure 3-19 left), an earth fault
is installed between the two measurement slip rings with the measurement brushes in
place. In case of machines with excitation via slip rings (Figure 3-19 right) the earth
fault is installed between one slip ring and earth. The unit now measures as earth
impedance only the reactance of the coupling unit and the brush resistance (in series
with a protective resistor for the coupling capacitors and/or a damping resistor). These
values can be read out under the Operational Measured Values:
R total = x.xx kΩ
X total = x.xx kΩ
ϕZtotal = z.z °
Rinput corresponds to the series resistance (brushes plus protective resistor) and
Xinput corresponds to the capacitive reactance (a negative value indicates an
inductive reactance). If both values are indicated as 0, then the connections of Urotor
or Irotor have wrong polarity. Change the polarity of one of the connections and repeat
the measurement. It must then be checked that the setting values
R SERIES = xxx Ω (address 6007)
352 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.3 Commissioning
X COUPLING = yyy Ω (address 6006)

correspond with the above values. Remove earth fault bridge.
An earth fault is now fitted as described above via a resistor of the warning resistance,
(RE< WARN, address 6002, 10 kΩ when delivered from factory.
The earth resistance calculated by the unit can be read out under the Operational
Measured Values as Rotor. If substantial deviation occurs between the actual rotor
earth resistance and the indicated resistance, the accuracy can be improved by
correction of the c.t. angle error PHI I RE (address 6009). This c.t. angle error
correction is only effective for the rotor earth fault protection function.
An earth fault is now fitted as described above via a resistor of approximately 90% of
the trip resistance (RE<< TRIP, address 6003, 2 kΩ when delivered). The rotor earth
fault protection initiates a pick-up signal and after 6005 T-TRIP-RE<< (0.5 s when
delivered from factory) a trip annunciation (LED 1 and binary output 2) in both cases
this is a group indication “Device Trip”).
In the case of machines with excitation via slip rings, the above test is repeated for the
other slip ring.
Remove earth fault resistor.
Excitation
equipment
Excitation
machine
Coupling Coupling
unit unit
Excitation via rotating rectifiers Excitation equipment fed via slip

with measurement brushes rings
Figure 3-19 Types of Excitation
Lift measurement brushes or interrupt measurement circuit. Alarm “Failure R/E/F”

is indicated after a time delay of approx. 5 s (not allocated on delivery). Close
measurement circuit.
If the alarm “Failure R/E/F” is also present with the measurement circuit closed,
then the rotor-earth capacitance is less than 0.15 µF. In this case, a measurement
circuit supervision is not possible; the alarm “Failure R/E/F” then should not be
marshalled to any binary output. Set parameter 5106 IEE< = 0.
7UM62 Manual 353

C53000-G1176-C149-3
After the completion of the test, check that all provisional measures for testing have
been reversed:
− Earthing bridge or resistor has been removed,
− Measurement circuit has been closed,
− Controller unit connected to its operational supply a.c. voltage (refer also
connection diagram in Figure 2-95 in Section 2.25.1).
Tests with the running machine are described later under section 3.4.9.
3.3.7.2 Rotor Earth Fault Protection (1 to 3 Hz)
The rotor earth fault protection can be checked with the machine at stand-still. For this
purpose, the series device 7XT71 must be supplied with an external AC voltage of
100 V to 125 V AC (see also to connection diagram Figure A-36 in the Appendix).
Switch the rotor earth fault protection (address 6101 REF 1-3Hz) to Block relay.
In fault-free condition, the following operational measured values are read out from the
protection device and evaluated (see Table 3-24).The operational measured values
can be found in the earth fault measured values (in DIGSI see tab “earth fault mea-
sured values”).
Table 3-24 Operational Measured Values of the Rotor Earth Fault Protection
Measured Value Comments

fgen = xx.x Hz Shows the frequency of the injected square-wave voltage. The fre-
quency can be set by a jumper in the 7XT71. The default setting is
approx. 1.5 Hz (tolerance approx. ± 10 %).
Ugen = xx.x V This measured value indicates the current amplitude of the injected
square-wave voltage. It amounts to approx. 50 V (tolerance of the
7XT71 can be up to ± 4 V).
Igen = X.xx mA This measured value is nearly zero in fault-free condition. If a fault
resistor is installed between rotor and earth, the current to be ex-
pected can be estimated as follows:
Ugen
Igen ≈ -------------------------------
R E + Rtotal
RE: Fault resistor
Rtotal: Coupling resistance (20 kΩ + 720 Ω = 20.720 kΩ)
Qc = x.xxx mAs This measured value indicates the charge which is a function of the
rotor earth capacitance. Half of the measured value must be set at
address 6106 as Qc <. If the capacitance is very small, it may be
necessary to deactivate the measuring circuit monitoring (setting val-
ue 0).
Rearth = xxx.x kΩ This measured value indicates the rotor earth resistance. In fault-
free condition, the upper limit value 999.9 kΩ is displayed. If it is not,
there must be some additional capacitance in the excitation system.
The square-wave voltage frequency in the 7XT71 must be reduced
by a jumper. No polarity reversal may occur in the measuring current
Igen for at least 3 cycles. To visualize what is going on, a test fault
record (instantaneous values record) should be started and track
TD2, which models Igen, should be checked (see Figure 3-20).
354 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.3 Commissioning
Figure 3-20 Test Fault Record
After this the fault resistors for the warning and the trip stage are installed, and the op-
erational measured value Rearth is read out. The two measured values are the basis
for the setting values of the warning stage (address 6102 RE< WARN) and the trip
stage (address 6104 RE<< TRIP).
Finally, the warning and the trip stage are checked. The test resistance for this is ap-
prox. 90 % of the set value. On generators or motors with excitation by sliprings, the
test is performed for both sliprings.
Remove the earth fault resistor and lift the measuring brushes or interrupt the measur-
ing circuit. After a delay of approx. 10 s, the indication „REF 1-3Hz open“ is issued
(not masked on delivery). Re-close the measuring circuit.
If you want to perform an automatic test by means of a test resistor, this mechanism
needs to be tested as well. To do so, connect the test resistor at the slipring to the
earth, and activate the test via binary input („>Test REF 1-3Hz“). Next, check the
indications for the following four test steps to be performed.
1. Measuring circuits closed Indication „Test REF PASSED“
2. Open circuit at Indication „1 Cir. open“
1st coupling resistor
3. Open circuit at Indication „2 Cir. open“
2nd coupling resistor
4. Re-establish connections Indication „Test REF PASSED“
Stop the automatic test and check again the operational measured value Rearth. It
must display 999.9 kΩ.
Finally, switch the AC voltage source of the 7XT71 off. After about 5 s, the protection
device issues the indication „Fail REF 1-3Hz“ (not masked on delivery).
7UM62 Manual 355

C53000-G1176-C149-3
To eliminate interference which might originate from the running machine, in particular
from the excitation system, it is recommended to perform an additional operational
check as described in Section 3.4.9.2.
3.3.8 Checking the 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection
The 100-% stator earth fault protection can be checked with the machine at stand-still,
because the measuring principle for the earth resistance calculation is independent of
whether the machine is at stand-still, rotating or excited. As a prerequisite for the
check, however, a supply for the 20 Hz generator 7XT33 must be provided; depending
on the project in hand, this may be a DC voltage supply or an external voltage source
(3 x 100 V, 50/60 Hz) (see also the connection diagram of Figure A-37 in the Appen-
dix).
Switch the 100-% stator earth fault protection to Block relay (address 5301 100%
SEF-PROT.).
For the following parameters, the default settings must be maintained for a first com-
missioning.
5309 PHI I SEF = 0°
5310A SEF Rps = 0.0 Ω
5311A Rl-PARALLEL =∞ Ω
The measured quantities USEF and ISEF fed to the device can now be read out in the
earth fault measured values (in DIGSI under Ins (earth fault measured values)):
U SEF= xx.x V
I SEF= xx.x mA
Please note that these measurements are pure r.m.s. values which only correspond
to the 20 Hz quantities if the generator is standing still. The voltage measured is influ-
enced by the loading resistor RL, the 20 Hz resistance of the band pass (RBP approx.
8 Ω), the voltage divider (üVlt.Divider, usually 5/2) and, in the final analysis, by the 20 Hz
supply voltage (U20Hz generator, approx. 25 V). The value can be estimated as follows:
RL U 20Hz-generator
U SEF = ------------------------ ⋅ ---------------------------------------
R BP + R L ü Vlt.Divider
The flowing current ISEF is determined by the stator earth capacitance and is very
small.
The device calculates from these values the earth resistance RSEF referred to the pro-
tection device side. The primary earth resistance RSEFp on the machine side is ob-
tained by multiplying the secondary value with the conversion factor set in the Power
System Data 1 (address 275 FACTOR R SEF). Both resistance values, including the
phase angle between the 20 Hz voltage and the 20 Hz current (ϕSES = ϕU - ϕI) can be
read out in the operational measured values:
R SEF= = xxxx Ω
RSEFp= xxx.xx kΩ
j SEF= xx.x°
In fault-free condition, the measured phase angle ϕ SES across the existing stator
earth capacitances should be approx. –90°. If it is not, the value to complement it to –
356 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.3 Commissioning
90° must be determined and set as PHI I SEF = –90° – ϕ SES. If the value displayed
is, for example, ϕ SES = –75°, PHI I SEF = –15° must be set at address 5309. This
will change the measured value to approx. –90°.
The value displayed for R SEF must be in fault-free condition the maximum possible
value of 9999 Ω. The maximum value for the primary earth resistance R SEFp de-
pends on the selected conversion factor (FACTOR R SEF address 275).
Switch off the voltage supply for the 20 Hz generator, or block the binary input. The
indication „Failure SEF“ will appear (not masked on delivery). This proves that a
failure of the 20 Hz generator is reliably detected. If this indication appears already
with the 20 Hz generator in operation, the monitoring threshold (address 5307 U20
MIN) should be reduced. This can be the case if the loading resistance is very small
(< 1 Ω).
Now a variable resistor is inserted as earth resistance e.g. between generator star-
point and earth.
DANGER!
Hazardous voltages can be present in the generator even at stand-still. If the ex-
ternal 20 Hz bias voltage of the stator winding is switched on, it amounts to ap-
prox. 1 % to 3 % of the primary rated voltage of the generator to be protected!
Set the primary earth resistance to 0 Ω (short-circuit) and read out the operational
measured value R SEF. This value must be nearly zero. If the transfer resistance of
the earthing or neutral transformer is not negligible, it can be compensated. To do so,
set the measured value R SES at address 5311A as SEF Rps.
Then the pickup value for the trip stage is specified. Set the primary earth resistance
to the tripping value (e.g. 2 kΩ) and read out the measured value R SEF. In case of
major deviations between fault resistance and measured value, the correction angle
PHI I SEF, address 5309, should be slightly modified for a better match. You can
also use for this the operational measured value PHI SEF. It may also be necessary
to slightly change SEF Rps.
Finally, the fault resistance is read out, and set as the tripping value at address 5304
R<< SEF TRIP.
Now the primary-side earth resistor for the alarm stage (e.g. 5 kΩ) is inserted, and the
fault resistance (R SEF) is read out. This value must be set at address 5302 as R<
SEF ALARM.
For the settings, only secondary values should be used. If you find during the conver-
sion from secondary to primary values that the theoretical conversion factor is not
quite correct, FACTOR R SEF should be modified to match the measuring results (for
conversion formulae refer to Section 2.29.2).
Finally, a series of measurements is performed, starting with 0 kΩ and proceeding in
steps of 1 kΩ. If changes are made to the correction angle (PHI I SEF address 5309)
or to the contact resistance (SEF Rps, address 5310A), the settings for the trip stage
(R<< SEF TRIP) and the alarm stage (R< SEF ALARM) must be matched as required.
Now the earth resistance is reduced to about 90 % of the resistance for the alarm
stage (address 5302 R< SEF ALARM). After the delay time T SEF ALARM set at ad-
dress 5303 (10 s on delivery), the stator earth fault protection issues an alarm
„SEF100 Alarm.“ (not masced on delivery).
Further reduce the earth resistance to 90 % of what the trip stage pickup value would
be for the protection device side (R<< SEF TRIP, address 5304). The protection is-
7UM62 Manual 357

C53000-G1176-C149-3
sues a pickup indication, and, after T SEF TRIP address 5305 (1 s on delivery), a
trip indication.
Remove the test resistor.
If the indication „20 Hz voltage missing” to be received from the 20 Hz generator
is marshalled to one of the binary inputs, and the delivery setting of this input has been
changed for this purpose, the binary input can be checked as well.
Switch off the supply voltages of the 20 Hz generator.
Feedback „>U20 failure“ (not masked on delivery).
Indication „Failure SEF“ (not masked on delivery).
Reconnect the supply voltages of the 20 Hz generator.
If you make use of the possibility to block the 100-% stator earth fault protection by
binary input, the functioning of the input should be checked.
Activate binary input „>SEF100 BLOCK“.
Feedback „SEF100 BLOCKED“.
Further tests are performed with the machine running (Section 3.4).
Note:
If within the framework of routine tests the band pass 7XT34 is to be checked as well,
short-circuit the earthing or neutral transformer on the secondary side with the ma-
chine standing still, and switch the 20 Hz generator on. Multiply the operational mea-
sured value I SES with the transformation ratio of the miniature CT (e.g. 400 A/ 5 A).
The current flow must be higher than 3 A. If the current is noticeably less, the reso-
nance frequency of the band pass has changed. It can be better matched by adding
or removing capacitors (see also operating instructions for the 7 XT33, Order No.
C53000–B1174–C129).
Finally, remove the shorting link and check the galvanic isolation with the operational
measured value U SEF.
3.3.9 Checking the DC Voltage/DC Current Circuit
Preparation Set the DC voltage/DC current protection (address 7201 DC PROTECTION) to

Block. Relay.
You can now modify the plant voltage to match the conditions of the intended
application, and verify the response of the 7UM62. A voltage above or below the
threshold voltage (address 7204) (the appropriate choice is made under the address
7203) causes the protection to initiate first an alarm “DC Prot.pick.up” (not
marshalled on delivery), and after a time T DC = (address 7206) the alarm “DC Prot.
TRIP” (not marshalled on delivery).
The DC voltage protection is then switched operative (address 7201 DC
PROTECTION = ON) or – if it will not be used – switched off (DC PROTECTION =
OFF).
358 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.3 Commissioning
3.3.10 Trip/Close Tests for Primary Equipment
Control by Local At the end of commissioning, actual 7UM62 tripping and closing should be verified for
Command all the relevant circuit breakers and primary switching devices, unless this has been
done already in connection with the Hardware Test described in Section 3.3.3. The
feedback of the status of the primary equipment, through the equipment’s auxiliary
contacts to the binary inputs of the 7UM62, should be checked during the testing. Be
sure the 7UM62 always indicates the true position of the equipment in the device
messages.
The procedure for the control is described in SIPROTEC® 4–System Manual. Make
sure that the switching authority is set according to the source of commands that is
used. The switching mode can be chosen as interlocked or non-interlocked. Note that
non-interlocked switching presents safety risks.
Control from a If the device has a connection to a remote control center, trip/close tests should be
Remote Control performed from that control center as well. Here again, make sure that the switching
Center authority is set according to the source of commands that is used.
7UM62 Manual 359

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator
3.4.1 General Hints
Warning!
When operating an electrical device, certain parts of the device inevitably have
dangerous voltages. Severe personal injury or property damage can result if the
device is not handled properly.
Only qualified people shall work on and around this device after becoming thoroughly
familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with
the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures.
It is necessary to perform switching operations during commissioning. The tests

described below assume that no risk is involved in such operations. They are therefore
not suitable for checks during operation.
Warning!
Primary tests must only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the
commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules
and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).
Safety Instructions All relevant safety rules and regulations (e.g. VDE 105, VBG4 or comparable national
regulations) must be complied with.
Before undertaking any work, observe the following “5 safety rules”:
1. Isolate from supply
2. Secure against accidental reclosing
3. Verify the safe isolation from supply
4. Perform earthing and short-circuiting
5. Cover or fence in live parts in the vicinity
The main points to observe are:
• The device is to be grounded to the substation ground before any other connections
are made.
• Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the connections to current
transformers, voltage transformers, and test circuits.
• Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply
voltage has been removed, i.e. capacitors can still be charged.
• After removing voltage from the power supply, wait a minimum of 10 seconds
before re-energizing the power supply. This wait allows the initial conditions to be
firmly established before the device is re-energized.
• The limit values given in Technical Data (Section 4.1) must not be exceeded,
neither during testing nor during commissioning.
360 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits must be short-circuited before the
current leads to the device are disconnected!
If test switches are installed that automatically short-circuit the current transformer
circuits, opening these test switches (placing them in the "Test" position) is sufficient
provided the short-circuit function has been previously tested.
All secondary test equipment must be removed. Connect measurement values. All
installation preparations according to sections 3.1 and 3.2 must have been completed.
Primary tests are performed with the generator.
Order of the Test Primary testing is usually performed in the following order:
Procedure − Short–circuit tests,
− Voltage tests,
− Earth fault tests,
− Synchronization,
− Tests with the generator connected to the network
The following hints are arranged in this order. All protection functions should be initially
switched OFF (condition as delivered from factory) so that they do not influence one
another. During primary testing the functions are progressively switched to being
operative. If a particular protection function is not required at all, it should be “de–
configured” (refer to Section 2.2). It is then treated as DISABLED.
Switching on of a particular function can be performed in two different ways. The
setting addresses concerned are shown in the respective sections.
− Block relay: The protection function is operative and outputs annunciations
and measured values. However, the trip command is blocked and it is not
transmitted to the trip matrix.
− Protection function ON: The protection function is operative and outputs
annunciations and measured values. The trip command activates the trip relays
which have been marshalled to the protection function. If the protection
command is not marshalled to any trip relay, tripping does not occur.
Preparation − Install an EMERGENCY OFF button for direct trip of the excitation
− Block all protection functions (= Block relay)
− Set the definite or inverse overcurrent protection function roughly to the nominal
generator current, and set the trip to only on the excitation
− Set the overvoltage protection function roughly to 30 % of the nominal generator
voltage for the short-circuit test, and to roughly 110 % of the nominal voltage for the
voltage tests, as well as to trip on excitation
7UM62 Manual 361

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Adaptation of Note:
Sampling
The device contains a sampling frequency adaptation; this ensures that the protection
Frequency
functions are always processed with algorithms matched to the actual frequency. This
explains the wide frequency range and the small frequency influence (refer to Section
4.34). However, it requires that measurement values be present before a dynamic test
can take place, so that the sampling frequency adaptation can operate. If a
measurement value is switched from 0 to the device without a different measurement
value having been present beforehand, an additional time delay of approximately
120 ms is incurred since the device must firstly calculate the frequency from the
measurement value. In addition, no output signal is possible if no measurement value
is connected. A trip signal, once issued, of course, is maintained for at least the
duration of the parameterized reset time (TMin TRIP CMD) (refer also to Section 2.3)
Factory Setting Note:

When the protection device is delivered from the factory, all protective functions have
been switched off. This has the advantage that each function can be separately tested
without being influenced by other functions. The required functions must be activated
for testing and commissioning.
Operating Range of For commissioning tests with the generator, care should be taken that the operating
the Protection range of the protection functions as specified in section 4.34 is not exceeded and that
Functions the measuring quantities applied are high enough. Where tests are performed with
reduced pick-up values, the pick-up value may appear to deviate from the setting
value (e.g. in the unbalance stage or the earth fault protection) if the measuring
quantities are too small to block the protection function, i.e. if operating state 1 (=
protection function active) is not yet attained.
However, this effect will not interfere with commissioning since no checks of the pick-
up values are performed that involve the generator.
Commissioning The 7UM62 features a web-based commissioning tool to assist during commissioning,
Tool Using a WEB and to perform routine tests. With this tool all indications and measured values can be
Browser easily read out. For tests, vector diagrams and selected characteristics can be visual-
ized.
If you want to use the commissioning tool, please refer to the help files provided on
the subject. Instructions on how to install the long-distance data transmission network
and work with the browser can be found on an Internet website (www.siemens.sipro-
tec.de) in the download area of the “7SD52” protective relay (title: “Commissioning
Tool Help”).
The IP address required for the browser depends on the port used for connecting the
PC:
• Connection to the front operator interface:
IP address 141.141.255.160
• Connection to the rear service interface (port C):
IP address 141.143.255.160
To give you a first idea of the possibilities you have, the figures below show a selection
of displays.
Figure 3-21 shows the vectors of flowing currents. As the current direction towards the
protected object is defined as positive, the angle of the phase currents is rotated by
180°. The magnitudes are the same, and the phase rotation is the same as well. This
362 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
means that the current connection on side 1 and side 2 is OK. A similar display is avail-
able for the voltage and current vectors of side 2.
Figure 3-21 Currents Flowing through the Protected Object
For a test of the differential protection, the differential and restraint currents are en-
tered in the characteristic. The characteristic shown is a function of the settings for the
differential protection. In Figure 3-22, a load current has been simulated. A small dif-
ferential current in phase L3 is visible.
Figure 3-22 Differential and Restraint Currents - Example of Plausible Measurements
7UM62 Manual 363

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.4.2 Checking the Current Circuits
General The checks of the current circuits are performed with the generator to ensure the
correct cabling, polarity, phase sequence, CT ratio etc., not in order to verify individual
protection functions in the device.
Preparation Switch unbalanced load protection (address 1701) and overload protection (address
1601) to Block relay.
With the primary plant voltage-free and earthed, install a three-pole short-circuit bridge
which is capable of carrying rated current (e.g. earthing isolator) to the generator line-
side terminals.
DANGER!
Primary measurements must only be carried out with the generator at stand–
still on disconnected and grounded equipment of the power system.
After the preparatory measures described in section 3.4.1, all current transformer
circuits (protection, measuring, metering) can be checked with the remanent
excitation.
Note on Testing The checks of the current transformer circuits are carried out with max. 20 % of the
rated transformer current. Tests with generator currents of more than 20 % are not
normally required for the digital protective device. Operation of the generator at rated
current during commissioning may only be necessary when the short-circuit
characteristic is measured for the first time.
Absolute Current The currents are stated among the operational measured values. They are read out
Values from the device front panel or from the PC via the operator interface and compared
with the actual measured values. If significant deviations are found, the CT
connections are not correct.
Phase Rotation The phase rotation must conform with the configured phase sequence (address 0271
PHASE SEQ. under Power System Data 1); if it does not, an indication “Fail Ph.
Seq.“ will be output. In such a case, the allocation of phases to the measuring
quantities must be checked and corrected, if necessary. The unbalanced load
(negative sequence) can be read out under the operational measured values. It must
be practically zero. If this is not the case, check for crossed current transformer leads:
If the unbalanced load amounts to about 1/3 of the phase currents then current is
flowing in only one or in only two of the phases.
If the unbalanced load amounts to about 2/3 of the phase currents, then one current
transformer has wrong polarity.
If the unbalanced load is about the same as the phase currents, then two phases have
been crossed.
After correcting the wrong connection, the test must be repeated.
Remove short–circuit bridges.
364 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Calibrating the Set impedance protection (address 3301) to IMPEDANCE PROT. = Block relay:
Impedance
With the primary plant voltage-free and earthed, install a three-pole short-circuit bridge
Protection
which is capable of carrying rated current (e.g. earthing isolator) to the primary side of
the unit transformer.
DANGER!
Primary measurements must only be carried out with the machine at stand–still
on disconnected and earthed equipment of the power system.
Start-up machine and slowly excite to 20 % of rated machine current.
Note on Testing A test with about 20 % of the rated generator current is sufficient for checking the
transformer connections and the operational measured values. If the relative short-
circuit voltage of the transformer is small, the voltage values measured are very low,
so that it may be necessary to increase the generator current somewhat. A test with
the full rated generator current is only required for the quantitative calibration of the
impedance protection (e.g. for calibrating the transformer uK).
The relay calculates from the currents and voltages the impedance between the point
of installation (voltage transformers) and the short-circuit bridge, i.e. normally the
short-circuit impedance of the unit transformer. Read out the reactance and resistance
values in the measured values. Note that the secondary values depend on the rated
relay current, 1 A or 5 A. In the case of the transformer impedance, the following
results:
Primary transformer impedance:
2
UN
Z T prim = u sc ⋅ ----------
S N
with usc - percent impedance voltage of transformer

UN - rated voltage of transformer
SN - rated apparent power of transformer
In secondary values:
2
N CT U N N CT
Z T sec = Z T prim ⋅ ----------- = u sc ⋅ ---------- ⋅ -----------
N VT S N N VT
with NCT - current transformer ratio
NVT - voltage transformer ratio
If substantial deviations or wrong sign occur, then the voltage transformer connections
are incorrect.
After shutdown and de-excitation of the generator, and removal of the short-circuit
bride, the short-circuit tests are completed. No further tests are required for
unbalanced load protection, overcurrent time protection, thermal overload
protection, impedance protection and out-of-step protection.
Switch the overcurrent time protection and the impedance protection operative
(address 1201: O/C I> = ON resp. address 1401 O/C Ip = ON, address 3301:
IMPEDANCE PROT. = ON). They serves from now on as short-circuit protection. If
used, the I>> stage (address 1301 O/C I>> = ON), the thermal overload protection
(address 1601: Ther. OVER LOAD = ON), the unbalanced load protection (address
1701: UNBALANCE LOAD = ON) and the out-of-step protection (address 3501: OUT-
OF-STEP = ON) can be switched to be operative. Otherwise, they are set to OFF.
7UM62 Manual 365

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.4.3 Checking the Differential Protection
Preparation Before commencing any primary tests, make sure that the configured object is actually
the one you want to protect, and that the correct amplitude matching for the current
ratings of the protected object and the main primary c.t.s, and the correct vector group
matching are set.
Set the differential protection (address 2001) to Block. relay, or interrupt the trip
command lines.
The test arrangement varies dependent of the application.
On network power transformers and asynchronous machines a low-voltage test
equipment is preferably used. A low-voltage current source is used to energize the
protected object, which is completely disconnected from the network (Figure 3-23).
A short-circuit bridge, which is capable of carrying the test current, is installed outside
the protected zone and allows the symmetrical test current to flow.
On power station unit transformers and synchronous machines, the checks are
performed during the current tests, with the generator itself supplying the test current
(Figure 3-24). The current is produced by a three-pole short-circuit bridge which is
installed outside the protected zone and is capable of carrying rated current for a short
time. The generator is started but not yet excited. Check by means of remanent
currents that no current transformer is open or short-circuited. In order to achieve this,
read out the operational measured values and check the operational currents one by
one. Even when the currents and the measurement accuracy are still very small, the
described errors can already be detected.
The test current for commissioning tests must be at least 2 % of the rated relay
current.
400 V 7UM62 400 V 7UM62

3~ 3~
400 V 400 V
Test source Test source
Figure 3-23 Current Test with Low-Voltage Current Source
7UM62 7UM62
7UM62
Figure 3-24 Current Test in a Power Station
366 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Symmetrical The operational measured values supplied by the 7UM62 allow a fast commissioning
Current Test without external instruments. The indices of the measured currents are defined as
follows:
The symbol for current I is followed by the phase identifier Lx and by the index of the
side of the protected object (e.g. the transformer winding). Example:
IL1S1 Current in phase L1 on side 1.
Absolute Value Compare the currents displayed at Measurement → Secondary Values →

Measurement Operational values, secondary with those that are actually flowing.
IL1S1 =
IL2S1 =
IL3S1 =
IL1S2 =
IL2S2 =
IL3S2 =
If deviations occur that cannot be explained by measuring tolerances, either the
connection or the test arrangement is wrong:
• Disconnect the protected object (shut down generator), and earth it,
• Check and correct the connections and the test arrangement,
• Repeat the test and re-check the measured values.
Angle If the current magnitudes are consistent, the next step is to check the phase angle
Measurement relations between the currents (ϕIL1S1, ϕIL2S1, ϕIL3S1, ϕIL1S2, ϕIL2S2, ϕIL3S2).
The angle differences are referred to winding L1 of side 1.
Check the angles that are output by the device for side 1 at Measurement →
Secondary Values → Angles. All angles are referred to IL1S1. Consequently, a
clockwise phase rotation should produce roughly the following results:
ϕL1S1 = 0°
ϕL2S1 = 240°
ϕL3S1 = 120°
If the angles are not correct, wrong polarity or phase interchange at side 1 is the
cause.
• Disconnect the protected object (shut down generator), and earth it,
• Check and correct the connections and the test arrangement,
• Repeat the test by renewed measurement request and re-check the measured
values.
Check the angles that are output by the device for side 2 at Measurement →
Secondary Values → Angles. All angles are referred to IL1S1. If the angles are
not correct, wrong polarity or phase interchange at side 2 is the cause; proceed as for
side 1.
The polarities of the through-flowing currents are here defined in such a manner, that
for currents of equal phase flowing through the protected object, the angle difference
at the two measuring points is 180° between currents of the same phase, provided that
the connections are correct. Exception: Transverse differential protection, where both
currents must be in phase.
The theoretical angles depend on the protected object and – in the case of
transformers – on the vector group. They are listed in Table 3-25 for clockwise phase
rotation.
7UM62 Manual 367

C53000-G1176-C149-3
The polarity of the current connections and the parameterized polarity are taken into
consideration when the angles are displayed. Thus, if all three angles differ by 180°
from the theoretical value, the polarity of one complete transformer set is wrong. This
can be corrected by checking and changing the corresponding plant parameters:
Address 0201 STRPNT->OBJ S1 for the primary winding,
Address 0210 STRPNT->OBJ S2 for the secondary winding,
Table 3-25 Displayed Phase Angle Dependent on the Protected Object (Three-Phase)
Protect. Object→ Transformer with Vector Group Numeral 1)

Generator/Motor
↓ Phase Angle 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
ϕL1S2 180° 180° 150° 120° 90° 60° 30° 0° 330° 300° 270° 240° 210°
ϕL2S2 60° 60° 30° 0° 330° 300° 270° 240° 210° 180° 150° 120° 90°
ϕL3S2 300° 300° 270° 240° 210° 180° 150° 120° 90° 60° 30° 0° 330°
1) Values are valid for measurement if the higher voltage side is defined as side 1; when measuring from the lower voltage side, 360°
minus the stated angle is valid
Differential and Before the tests with symmetrical currents are terminated, the differential and restraint
Restraint Currents currents are checked. Even though the tests which have been carried out so far should
have revealed most of the possible connection errors, matching errors or wrong vector
group allocations cannot be ruled out.
Switch to the operational measured values to read out the calculated values. When
assessing the currents, note that the differential and restraint values are referred to
the rated current of the protected object. This fact should be kept in mind when
comparing them to the test currents.
If considerable differential currents occur, recheck the following parameters:
For transformer protection (as per Section 2.12.2.2): addresses 0241, 0249 and
0202 (matching of winding 1), 0243, 0249 and 0211 (matching and vector group
of winding 2);
For generator or motor protection (as per Section 2.12.2.2): addresses 0251 and
0252 (matching of machine ratings);
The symmetrical current tests are now completed. Disconnect the protected object
(shut down generator) and earth it, remove the test equipment.
Switch the differential protection to being operative (address 2001: DIFF. PROT. =
ON); it works now as a short-circuit protection for all subsequent tests.
3.4.4 Checking the Earth Current Differential Protection
Preparation The primary test checks the correct integration of the 7UM62 into the system, espe-
cially the CT connection. Before commencing any primary tests, make sure that the
configured object is actually the one you want to protect. To do so, verify the settings
used in the configuration of the protection function, in Power System Data 1 and in the
protection function itself.
Set the earth current differential protection (address 2101 REF PROT.) to Block re-
lay, or interrupt the trip command lines.
368 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Primary tests of power units are performed with the generator itself. On transformers,
a low-voltage test source is used.
Before the test, the CT connections have to be visually checked for correctness.
Note:
When performing the short-circuit test (3-phase short-circuit) for the earth current dif-
ferential protection, check that the three current transformers (side 1 or side 2 – which-
ever side is used for the earth current differential protection) are identical in design. To
do so, read out the percentages of the operational measured values 3I0-1 and 3I0-2
(in DIGSI in the differential protection measured values). If the CTs are correctly
matched, the values must be zero. Values that are not zero must be taken into account
for the protection settings.
Primary Test with This test is performed in addition to the current test. The protection must be set to max-
Generator imum sensitivity. The zero voltage release must be blocked (address 2103 REF
U0>RELEASE = 0).
For the test, one phase is earthed and the generator is excited (see Figure 3-25). The
test current must not exceed the permissible negative-sequence current. If this current
amounts e.g. to I2perm. = 10 % IN,G, the test current must be less than 30 % IN,G. On
the other hand, the current is determined by the low-resistance starpoint earthing.
10 % of the rated generator current are sufficient for testing.
either connection possible 7UM62
Figure 3-25 Testing the Earth Current Differential Protection on the Generator
For the external fault, read out the percentages of the operational measured values
(on the device: Measured values→ I -Diff,I-Stab):
3I0–1 Calculated zero sequence current of side 1

3I0–2 Calculated zero sequence current of side 2 or measured earth current
IEE2 (depending on configuration)
I0–Diff Calculated differential current
I0–Stab Calculated restraint (stabilizing) current
Both zero sequence currents 3I0-1 and 3I0-2 must be equal, and correspond to the
current fed in. The differential current I0-Diff is nearly zero. The restraint (stabilizing)
current I0-Stab is twice the flowing current. If the differential and the restraint current
are equal, the polarity of one CT must be wrong. This can also be seen from the phase
angle EDS |∆Φ| shown on the device in the phase angles, or in DIGSI. 0° means an
internal fault, and 180° an external fault. Minor deviations are caused by CT errors.
7UM62 Manual 369

C53000-G1176-C149-3
If there are deviations, a connection error can be normally assumed. If necessary,

modify the wiring, or, in Power System Data 1, the allocation of the CT starpoint for
the phase CTs or the earth CT IEE2. For the phase CTs, keep in mind that they are
also used by other protection functions, such as the differential current protection, and
check for possible interaction. If the differential current protection has already been
checked, and the CTs of side 1 and 2 are used for the earth current differential protec-
tion as well, the above errors can be excluded. If the IEE2 input is used, a wrong po-
larity of the connections is not uncommon. Check the connection and/or the starpoint
allocation in Power System Data 1 (address 214 GRD TERM. IEE2). The default set-
ting assumes that terminal Q7 is looking towards the protected object.
If there are deviations in the measured values, the measured quantities are probably
not properly matched. Check the parameter settings of the protected object and of the
CTs in Power System Data 1. To do so, proceed as follows:
− Shut down and earth generator
− Check and correct connections, if necessary, or modify settings in Power System
Data 1
− Repeat measurement
If the earth current differential protection is used on a transformer, a comparative test
is performed (see Figure 3-26). Measured value 3I0-1 is allocated to side 1 and 3I0-2
to the earth current IEE2. The test method is similar to the one described above. For
the test current, it is essential to ensure that on the generator side the continuously
permissible unbalanced load current is not exceeded. With a wye-delta connection,
the single-phase fault is modeled on the generator side as a phase to phase fault.
7UM62
Figure 3-26 Testing the Earth Current Differential Protection on the Transformer
Test with Measurements are always performed from the side with the earthed starpoint. In
Secondary Test transformers, there must be a delta winding (d-winding or compensating winding). The
Equipment winding not involved in the test remains open, because the delta winding automatically
provides for a low resistance of the zero sequence current path. The test arrangement
varies dependent of the application. Figures 3-27 to 3-30 show examples of test ar-
rangements, with Figure 3-27 being the preferred type for generator protection.
DANGER!
Primary measurements must only be carried out on disconnected and earthed
equipment of the power system. Danger to life exists even on disconnected
equipment because of capacitive coupling from other energized equipment of
the power system!
370 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
∼ Test
source
7UM62
Figure 3-27 Measurement of the Zero Sequence Currents in a Wye-Delta Transformer
∼ Test
source
7UM62
Figure 3-28 Measurement of the Zero Sequence Currents in a Delta-Delta Transformer

with Compensating Winding
∼ Test
source
7UM62
Figure 3-29 Measurement of the Zero Sequence Currents in a Zigzag Winding
7UM62 Manual 371

C53000-G1176-C149-3
∼ Test
source
7UM62
Figure 3-30 Measurement of the Zero Sequence Currents in a Delta Winding with
Artificial Starpoint
A zero sequence current of at least 2 % the rated generator current is required per
phase, i.e. the test current is at least 6 %. In the protection function, the sensitive pick-
up threshold must be set, and the zero voltage release disabled.
− Switch on test current
− Perform absolute value measurement with test current switched on
Read out the measured quantities on the device under: Measured values →
I-Diff,I-Stab:
3I0–1 Calculated zero sequence current of side 1 or side 2 (depending on
configuration)
3I0–2 Measured earth current IEE2
I0–Diff Calculated differential current
I0–Stab Calculated restraint (stabilizing) current
Both zero sequence currents 3I0-1 and 3I0-2 must be equal, and correspond to the
current fed in. The differential current I0-Diff is nearly zero. The restraint (stabilizing)
current I0-Stab is twice the flowing current. If the differential and the restraint current
are equal, the polarity of one CT must be wrong. Minor deviations are caused by CT
errors.
When checking the phase CTs of the allocated side, the measured values (device:
Measurement → Operational values, secondary) per phase will be 1/3 each
of the applied zero sequence current. The phase angle is the same in all 3 phases due
to the zero sequence current.
If there are deviations, a connection error can be normally assumed (see side title “Pri-
mary Test with Generator”)
− Disconnect test source and protected object
− Check and correct connections and test arrangement
− Repeat measurement
Checking the Zero If the zero voltage release is used, it must be checked during the test of the stator earth
Voltage Release fault protection (see Section 3.4.6). In the presence of an earth fault, the indication
372 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
F.No. 05841 „REF U0> releas.“ must appear. When performing the test, keep in
mind that the zero voltage is calculated from the three phase voltages and converted
on the secondary side to the phase-to-phase voltage (equivalent to √3 U0). The value
thus obtained is the same as for a broken delta winding.
Blocking by If the above measurement have been successfully performed, and the measured
Overcurrent phase currents were plausible, it can be assumed that the current measurement works
correctly. You only need to check the correct setting in the protection function (address
2102 = REF I> BLOCK). The pickup values are checked by injecting a current by
means of some secondary test equipment (CTs need not be disconnected).
• After completion of the tests, disconnect the test source and the protected object
(shut down generator)
• If parameters have been changed for the tests, restore the settings required for op-
eration.
• After completion of the earth fault protection tests, switch the earth current differen-
tial protection to be operative.
3.4.5 Checking the Voltage Circuits
General The voltage circuits of the machine are checked to ensure the correct cabling, polarity,
phase sequence, transformer ratio etc. of the voltage transformers - not to check
individual protection functions of the device.
Earthing of the When checking the voltage transformers, particular attention should be paid to the
Voltage open delta windings because these windings may only be earthed in one phase.
Transformers
Preparation Set the overvoltage protection function to about 110 % of the rated generator voltage
and give the trip on excitation.
Switch frequency protection (address 4201) and overflux protection (address 4301)
to Block relay.
Check in the unexcited condition of the machine with the help of remanent voltages,
that all short-circuit bridges are removed.
Note on Testing The checks of all voltage transformer circuits (protection, measuring, metering etc.)
are carried out with about 30 % of the rated transformer voltage. Tests with generator
voltages of more than 30 % are only required when the idle characteristic is measured
for the first time.
The measuring circuit supervision of the rotor earth fault protection (see below) can be
checked when testing the voltage circuits, or after the synchronization.
Amplitudes Read out voltages in all three phases in the operational measured values. They can
be compared with the actual voltages. The voltage of the positive sequence system
U1 must be approximately the same as the indicated phase voltages. If this is not, the
voltage transformer connections are incorrect (crossovers).
Phase Rotation The phase rotation must conform with the configured phase sequence (address 0271
PHASE SEQ. under Power System Data 1); if it does not, an indication “Fail Ph.
7UM62 Manual 373

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Seq.“ will be output. The allocation of measuring quantities to phases must be

checked and corrected, if necessary. If signification deviations are found, check, and
if necessary correct, the voltage transformer circuits and repeat the test.
It is also possible to use for this check the operational measured value of positive-
sequence component U1 of the voltages: U1 ≠ UL-E indicates a wiring error.
Measuring Circuit If the sensitive earth fault protection is used for rotor earth fault protection, the
Supervision of the measuring circuit supervision of that protection function can be checked with the
Rotor Earth Fault generator under voltage:
Protection
− Start up the generator and excite it to rated voltage. Apply measurement brushes
if necessary. Inject a test voltage between the rotor circuit and the earth by
interposing the additional source device 7XR61. The earth current IEE that is
flowing now can be read out on the device among the operational measured
values. The value obtained is the capacitive spill current flowing in fault-free
operation.
− IEE< (address 5106) should be set to about 50 % of this capacitive spill current.
It should also be checked that the set value IEE> (address 5102) is at least twice
this measured spill current. Correct the set value if necessary.
Frequency The frequency protection function is verified by a plausibility check of the instantane-
Protection ous machine speed and the associated operational measured value that is indicated.
Overexcitation The frequency protection function is verified by a plausibility check of the

instantaneous machine speed and the associated operational measured value that is
indicated.
U Instantaneous machine voltage
U fN UN Rated primary voltage of the
Instant. overexcitation = ---- ⋅ -------- protected object
f UN
f Instantaneous frequency, in
accordance with the machine
frequency in Hz
fN Rated frequency
The voltage tests are completed after the generator has been shut-down. The required
voltage and frequency protection functions are switched to be operative (address
4001: UNDERVOLTAGE = ON or OFF), (address 4101: OVERVOLTAGE = ON or OFF),
(address 4201: O/U FREQUENCY = ON or OFF) and (address 4301: OVEREXC.
PROT. = ON or OFF). Partial functions can be switched to be inoperative by appropriate
limit value settings (e.g. f* set to rated frequency).
3.4.6 Checking the Stator Earth Fault Protection
The procedure for checking the stator earth fault protection depends mainly on
whether the generator is connected to the network in unit connection or in busbar
connection. In both cases correct functioning and protected zone must be checked.
In order to check interference suppression of the loading resistor, and in order to verify
the protected zone of the earth fault protection, primary tests are suggested, once with
an earth fault at the machine terminals (e.g. with 20 % of the rated transformer
voltage) and once with a network earth fault.
374 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.4.6.1 Unit Connection
General In the event of an external (high-voltage side) short-circuit, an interference voltage is

transmitted via the coupling capacitance CC (Figure 3-31) which induces a neutral
displacement voltage on the generator side. To ensure that this voltage is not
interpreted by the protection as an earth fault within the generator, it is reduced by a
suitable loading resistor to a value which corresponds to approximately one half the
pick-up voltage U0> (address 5002). On the other hand, the earth fault current
resulting from the loading resistor in the event of an earth fault at the generator
terminals should not exceed 10 A, if possible.
CC
CG CL CTr
RB – Loading resistor RB
RT – Voltage divider
RT
UE – Neutral displacement voltage at 7UM62
CG – Generator-earth capacitance UE
7UM62
CL – Line–earth capacitance
CTr – Winding–earth capacitance of block transformer
CC – Coupling capacitance of block transformer
Figure 3-31 Unit Connection with Earthing Transformer
Calculation of Coupling capacitance CC and loading resistor RB represent a voltage divider

Protected Zone (equivalent circuit diagram Figure 3-32), whereby RB' is the resistance RB referred to
the machine terminal circuit.
UC
ωCC UNU/√3
UNU UR’
UR’ RB’ ~
√3 U
C
UNU Rated voltage on upper–voltage side of block transformer

UC Voltage at coupling capacitance CK
CC Total coupling capacitance between upper–voltage and lower–voltage windings
UR’ Voltage across loading resistor
RB’ Loading resistor of earthing transformer, referred to machine circuit.
Figure 3-32 Equivalent Diagram and Vector Diagram
7UM62 Manual 375

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Since the reactance of the coupling capacitance is much larger than the referred
resistance of the loading resistor RB', UC can be assumed to be UC ≈ UNU/√3
(compare also vector diagram Figure 3-32), whereby UNU/√3 is the neutral
displacement voltage with a full displacement of the network (upper-voltage) neutral.
The following applies:
, ,
RB UR
- = ---------------------------
-----------------------
1 ⁄ ( ωC C ) U NU ⁄ ( 3 )
, ,
U R = R B ⋅ ωC C ⋅ U NU ⁄ ( 3 )
Inserting the voltage transformation ratio TR of the earthing transformer:

2
R B = æ --------ö ⋅ R B
, TR , TR
U R = -------- ⋅ U R and
3 è 3 ø
we obtain:
TR
U R = -------- ⋅ R B ⋅ ωC C ⋅ U NU ⁄ ( 3 )
3
Together with the voltage divider 500 V/100 V this corresponds to a displacement
voltage of:
1 TR
U E = --- ⋅ -------- ⋅ R B ⋅ ωC C ⋅ U NU ⁄ ( 3 )
5 3
The pick-up value for the neutral displacement voltage U0> should amount to at least
twice the value of this interference voltage.
Example:
Network: UNU = 110 kV
fN = 50 Hz
CC = 0.01 µF
Voltage transformer 10 kV/0.1 kV
Earthing transformer TR = 36
Loading resistor RB = 10 Ω
1 36 –1 –6 110 3
U E = --- ⋅ ------ ⋅ 10 Ω ⋅ 314 s ⋅ 0.01 ⋅ 10 F ⋅ ---------- ⋅ 10 V = 4.8 V
5 3 3
10 V has been chosen as the setting value for U0> in address 5002 which
corresponds to a protective zone of 90% (Figure 3-33).
Note: When using a neutral earthing transformer, TR must be inserted as the voltage
transformation ratio instead of TR/3. The result is the same since the neutral earthing
transformer has only one winding.
376 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
UE
U ERD>
Pick–up value
1,0
Earth fault on machine side
Value extrapolated to
100 % UNmach
0,5
Earth fault on
upper voltage side
10 % 40 % 100 % U
corresponds to 90 % protected zone UN mach
Figure 3-33 Neutral displacement voltage during earth faults
Checking for Switch stator earth fault protection S/E/F PROT. (address 5001) to Block relay.
Generator Earth If the sensitive earth fault protection is used for stator earth fault protection, it must be
Fault set to Block relay as well under address 5101.
With the primary plant voltage-free and earthed, install a single-pole earth fault in the
proximity of the generator terminals.
DANGER!
Start up generator and slowly excite (however, not above UN/√3) until the stator earth
fault protection picks-up.
Read out UE from the operational measured values and check for plausibility. If the
connections are correct, this value corresponds with the machine terminal voltage in
percent, referred to rated machine voltage (if applicable, deviating rated primary
voltage of earthing transformer or neutral earthing transformer must be taken into
account). This value also corresponds with the setting value U0> under address 5002
If the plant comprises more voltage transformers with broken delta windings, the
voltage UE must be measured on them as well.
For protection zone Z the following applies:
U sec N – U0>
Z = ---------------------------------- ⋅ 100 %
U sec N
Example:
Machine voltage at pick-up 0.1 x Usec N
Measured value UE = 10 V
Protected zone Z = 90 %
Read out the indication “Uearth Lx” in the fault annunciations. The “Lx” indicates the
faulted phase provided voltages are connected to the voltage protection inputs of
7UM62.
Shut down generator. Remove earth fault bridge.
7UM62 Manual 377

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Check Using With the primary plant voltage-free and earthed, install a single-pole earth fault bridge
Network Earth Fault on the primary side of the unit transformer.
DANGER!
Caution!
The starpoints of the unit transformer must not be connected to earth during this test!
Start up machine and slowly excite to 30 % of rated machine voltage.

Read out UE in the OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES. This value is extrapolated to
rated machine voltage (Figure 3-33). The fault value thus calculated should
correspond, at the most, to half the pick-up value U0> (address 5002), in order to
achieve the desired safety margin.
Shut down generator. Remove earth fault bridge.
If the starpoint of the high-voltage side of the unit transformer is to be earthed during
normal operation, re-establish starpoint earthing.
Switch stator earth fault protection to be operative: address 5001 S/E/F PROT. =
ON. If the sensitive earth fault detection is used for stator earth fault protection, switch
it to be operative as well: address 5101 O/C PROT. Iee> = ON.
3.4.6.2 Busbar Connection
Firstly, the correct functioning of the loading equipment must be checked: sequencing,
time limit, etc., as well as the plant data, the earthing transformer and the value of the
load resistor (tapping).
Switch stator earth fault protection (address 5001) to Block relay. If the sensitive
earth fault detection is used for stator earth fault protection, switch it to Block relay
as well under address 5101.
With the primary plant earthed and voltage-free, install earth fault bridge between
generator terminals and toroidal current transformer (Fig. 3-34).
DANGER!
378 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
G
Σ
UN
-------
-
3
100 RL
---------- V
3
100
---------- V
3
IEE2 UE
7UM62
Figure 3-34 Earth Fault with Busbar Connection
The generator circuit breaker must be closed for this test and the generator
galvanically connected with the load equipment. If the plant conditions do not allow
this, the hints given overleaf under the side title “Directional check without Loading
Resistor” must be observed.
Start up generator and slowly excite until the stator earth fault protection picks up:
alarm “U0> picked up” (not allocated when delivered from factory). At the same time
the alarm “3I0> picked up” should appear, if marshalled.
Read out UE and IEE under OPERATIONAL MEASURED VALUES. If the connections
are correct, this value corresponds with the machine terminal voltage in percent,
referred to rated machine voltage (if applicable, deviating rated primary voltage of
earthing transformer or neutral earthing transformer must be taken into account). This
value also corresponds to the setting value U0> in address 5002.
The measured value IEE2 should be approximately equal to or slightly higher than the
setting value 3I0> under address 5003.This is to ensure that the protection zone that
is determined by the setting value U0> is not reduced by a too slow pick-up.
For protection zone Z the following applies:
U sec N – U0>
Z = ---------------------------------- ⋅ 100 %
U sec N
Example:
Machine voltage at pick-up 0.1 x Usec N
Measured value UE = 10 V
Protected zone Z = 90 %
7UM62 Manual 379

C53000-G1176-C149-3
With Directional The earth fault directional determination requires a check of the current and voltage
Determination connections for correctness and correct polarity. The machine continues to be excited
to a voltage that corresponds to a displacement voltage above the pick-up value. If the
polarity is correct, the trip indication “S/E/F TRIP“ is output (LED 6 when delivered
from factory).
A cross check is then performed. After the generator has been de-excited and shut
down, the earth fault bridge is installed on the other side of the current transformers
(as viewed from the machine).
DANGER!
After restarting and exciting the generator above the pick-up value of the displacement
voltage, “U0> picked up” picks up (LED 2 for global indication of a device pick-up
when delivered from factory), however “3I0 picked up” does not pick up and
tripping does not occur. The measured value IEE should be negligible and on no
account should it be larger then half the setting value 3I0>.
Shut down and de-excite generator. Remove earth fault bridge.
Directional Check If loading equipment is not available and if an earth fault test with the network is not
with Toroidal CTs possible, then the following test can be performed with secondary measures, however
without Loading with the symmetrical primary load current:
Resistor
With current supplied from a toroidal residual current transformer, a voltage
transformer (e.g. L1) is by-passed which simulates the formation of a neutral
displacement voltage (Figure 3-35). From the same phase, a test current is fed via a
current-limiting impedance Z through the toroidal transformer. The connection and
direction of the current conductor through the toroidal transformer is to be closely
checked. If the current is too small for the relay to pick-up, then its effect can be
increased by feeding the conductor several times through the toroidal transformer.
For Z either a resistor (30 to 500 Ω) or a capacitor (10 to 100 µF) in series with an
inrush-current-limiting resistor (approximately 50 to 100 Ω) is used. With correct
connections, the described circuit results in the alarms: “U0 > picked up”, “3I0>
picked up” and finally “S/E/F Trip” (LED 6).
380 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
G
l k
L2
L3
L1
n e
Q7 Q8 R14 R13
IEE2 UE
7UM62
Figure 3-35 Directional Check with Toroidal Residual Current Transformers
Directional Check If the current is supplied from a set of c.t.'s in Holmgreen connection (Figure 3-36), the
with C.T.'s in displacement voltage is obtained in the same manner as in the above circuit. Only the
Holmgreen current of that current transformer which is in the same phase as the by-passed
Connection voltage transformer in the delta connection is fed into the current path. In case of
active power in generator direction, the same conditions apply for the relay - in
principle - as with an earth fault in generator direction in a compensated network and
vice versa.
G
L2
L3
L1
n e
RT
Q7 Q8 R14 R13
IEE2 UE
7UM62
Figure 3-36 Directional Check with Current Transformers in Holmgreen Connection
7UM62 Manual 381

C53000-G1176-C149-3
If, in an isolated network, the voltage connections for the reactive current
measurement should be maintained for testing, then it should be noted that with a
power flow with inductive component in forwards direction results in a backwards
direction for the earth fault relay (contrary to an earth fault in this direction).
Shut down generator after completion of the directional tests. Correct connections
must be re-established and re-checked.
Spill Current For calibration to the spill current, a three-pole short-circuit bridge that is able to
withstand rated current is installed at the circuit breaker. Start up generator and slowly
excite until the rated machine current is reached.
Read out the operational measured value IEE2. This measured values determines the
setting value of address 5003 3I0>. Parameter 3I0> should be about twice that
measured value to ensure a sufficient security distance between the earth fault current
used for directional determination and the spill current. Next, check whether the
protection zone determined by the setting value U0> must be reduced.
Switch the stator earth fault protection to be operative: address 5001 S/E/F PROT.
= ON.
3.4.7 Testing the 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection
The 100-% stator earth fault connection is tested together with the 90-% stator earth
fault protection (see Section 3.4.6.1, Unit Connection).
Set the 100-% stator earth fault connection (address 5301 100% SEF-PROT.) to
Block relay (if you have not done so already). Also, the accessories of the protec-
tion device must be operational.
The tests to be performed are described in more detail below.
Check without Start up the generator and excite it to maximum generator voltage. The protection
Earth Fault does not pick up.
The operational measured values need to be checked as well (see also Section 3.3.8).
Read out the r.m.s. current I SEF. The fault value thus obtained should not exceed half
the pickup value SEF I>> (address 5306) to allow for the desired safety margin.
Shut down the generator.
Check Performed Connect the 20 Hz generator 7XT33 to the DC voltage or to an external three-phase
with an Earth Fault voltage source.
in the Machine
With the primary equipment disconnected and earthed, insert a single-pole earth fault
Zone
bridge in the generator terminal circuit.
DANGER!
Primary measurements may only be carried out with the generator at stand–still
on disconnected and grounded equipment of the power system.
Start up the generator and excite it slowly (but to less than UN/√3) until the 90-% earth
fault protection (Pickup threshold U0>) has picked up (see also Section 3.4.6.1, side
title “Checking for Generator Earth Fault”).
382 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
With the earth fault bridge in place, the resistance stages of the 100-% protection
(warning and trip stage) must pick up immediately on switching in the supply voltage
of the 20 Hz generator.
To check the pickup behaviour of the current stage SEF100 I>>, read out the mea-
sured value I SEF from the operational measured values at approx. 10 % to 20 % of
the displacement voltage. The value thus obtained should be about the same as the
pickup value SEF I>> selected at address 5306. This ensures that the current stage
of the 100-% stator earth fault protection covers a protection zone of about 80 % to
90 % of the winding in addition to the 100 % resistance calculation.
Check Using With the primary plant voltage-free and earthed, install a single-pole earth fault bridge
Network Earth Fault on the primary side of the unit transformer.
DANGER!
Primary measurements may only be carried out with the generator at stand–still
on disconnected and grounded equipment of the power system.
Caution!
The starpoints of the unit transformer must not be connected to earth during this test!
Start up the generator and slowly excite to 30 % of rated machine voltage (max. 60 %).
The 100-% and the 90-% stator earth fault protection do not pick up.
The checks to be performed for the 90-% stator earth fault protection are described in
Section 3.4.6.1, side title “Checking for Generator Earth Fault”.
For the 100-% stator earth fault protection, read out the operational measured value
I SEF. This value is extrapolated to approx. 1.3 times the rated machine voltage. The
current thus extrapolated should not exceed half the pick-up value SEF I>> (address
5306) in order to achieve the desired safety margin of the current stage of the 100-%
stator earth fault protection.
Shut down and de-excite the generator. Remove earth fault bridge.
If the starpoint of the high-voltage side of the unit transformer is to be earthed
during normal operation, re-establish starpoint earthing.
If the 20 Hz generator is to be fed by the voltage transformers of the machine termi-
nals, the appropriate connections, or a different type of supply connection (e.g. DC
voltage supply from a battery) must now be permanently made.
If no more special tests are to be made, switch the 100-% stator earth fault protection
to be operative: address 5301 100% SEF-PROT. = ON.
7UM62 Manual 383

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.4.8 Checking the Sensitive Earth Fault Protection when Used

for Rotor Earth Fault Protection
If the sensitive earth fault protection is used for rotor earth fault protection, it must first
be set to Block relay under address 5101.
Caution!
Make sure that the checked rotor circuit is completed isolated from the earth, to
avoid that the earthing resistor that is interposed for test purposes causes a
double earth fault!
An earth fault is simulated via a resistor which is roughly equivalent to the desired trip
resistance. In generators with rotating rectifier excitation, the resistor is placed
between the measurement slip rings; in generators with excitation via slip rings
between one slip ring and earth.
Start up generator and excite to rated voltage. If applicable place measurement
brushes into operation. It is irrelevant in this context whether the sensitive earth fault
protection picks up or not. The earth fault current IEE that is flowing now can be read
out on the device among the operational measured values.
Check that this measured earth fault current is roughly equal to the pick-up value IEE>
for sensitive earth fault detection that has been set in address 5102. However, it must
not be set to less that the double value of the spill current that has been determined
in section 3.4.5 for healthy insulation.
For generators with excitation via slip rings, the test is repeated for the other slip ring.
Shut down generator. Remove earth fault resistor.
The sensitive earth fault detection used for rotor earth fault protection is then set to be
operative: O/C PROT. Iee> = ON in address 5101.
3.4.9 Checking the Rotor Earth Fault Protection During Operation
3.4.9.1 Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, fn)
In Section 3.3.7, the rotor earth fault protection was checked with the machine at
stand-still. In order to exclude possible interference on the measurement circuit by the
running generator, an additional test during operation is recommended.
Caution!
double earth fault!
An earth fault is simulated via a resistor of approximately 90% of the trip resistance
(RE<< TRIP, address 6003). In machines with rotating rectifier excitation (Figure 3-
19 left), the resistor is placed between the measurement slip rings; in machines with
excitation via slip rings (Figure 3-19 right) between one slip ring and earth.
384 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Start up generator and excite to rated voltage. If applicable place measurement

brushes into operation.
The rotor earth fault protection initiates pick-up and, after T-TRIP-RE<< (10 s when
delivered from factory), trip annunciation (LED 2 and LED 1 as group indications for
device pickup and device trip).
The earth resistance calculated by the device can be read out in the earth fault
annunciations as Re.
Switch the rotor earth fault protection ROTOR E/F = ON under address 6001.
3.4.9.2 Rotor Earth Fault Protection (1 to 3 Hz)
In Section 3.3.7.2, the rotor earth fault protection was checked with the machine at
stand-still. In order to exclude possible interference on the measurement circuit by the
running generator, and specifically by the excitation system, an additional test during
operation is recommended.
Caution!
double earth fault!
An earth fault is simulated via a resistor of approximately 90% of the trip resistance
(address 6104 RE<< TRIP). In machines with rotating rectifier excitation (Figure 3-
19 left), the resistor is placed between the measurement slip rings; in machines with
excitation via slip rings (Figure 3-19 right) between one slip ring and earth.
Start up the generator and excite to the rated voltage. If applicable place measure-
ment brushes into operation.
Check the operational measured value Rearth and the pickup indication (“REF 1-3Hz
Fault”) and, after T-TRIP-RE<< (10 s on delivery) has expired, check the trip indi-
cation (“REF 1-3Hz Trip”) as well.
Set the resistance to approx. 90 % of the warning stage (address 6102 RE< WARN),
read out the operational measured value Rearth, and check the warning message
(“REF 1-3Hz Warn”). If there is heavy interference from the excitation system, it may
be necessary to reduce the resistance set for the warning threshold.
Remove the earthing resistor and check the operational measured values as well as
the measuring circuit supervision “REF 1-3Hz open” in fault-free condition. If spon-
taneous indications are issued by the measuring circuit monitoring, reduce the pickup
value (address 6106 Qc) or de-activate the monitoring.
Switch the rotor earth fault protection REF 1-3Hz = ON under address 6101.
7UM62 Manual 385

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.4.10 Tests with the Generator Connected to the Network
3.4.10.1 Checking the Correct Connection Polarity
The following test instructions apply to a synchronous generator.

Run up generator and synchronize with network. Slowly increase driving power input
(up to approximately 5%).
The active power is read out under the operational measured values (percent values)
as a positive active power P in percent of the rated apparent power SN.
If a negative active power value should be read out, then the actual polarity
relationship between current transformers and voltage transformers does not accord
with the polarity parameterized under address 0210 (STRPNT->OBJ S2: Yes/No) or
a wrong setting has been selected for address 1108 (ACTIVE POWER: Generator/
Motor). Re-parameterize address 0210. If the power reading is still incorrect, the fault
must be in the instrument transformer connections (e.g. cyclic exchange of phases):
− Fix faults of the transformer lines (current and/or voltage transformers); observe for
this the safety rules!
− Repeat test.
3.4.10.2 Measurement of Motoring Power (Reverse Power) and Angle Error Correction
For a generator, leave the reverse power protection and the forward active power
supervision switched to OFF for the moment. This function and the following
measurements are not required for motors.
The motoring power is – as an active power – almost constant and independent of the
reactive power, i.e. independent of the excitation current. However, the protection
relay may calculate different active power values dependent of the excitation because
of possible angle errors of the current and voltage transformers. The motoring power
curve then would not be a straight line in parallel to the real axis of the power diagram
of the machine. Therefore, the angle deviations should be measured at three
measuring points of the power diagram and the correction parameter W0 should be
established. The angle errors caused by the device’s internal input transformers have
already been compensated in the factory. This check is recommended if the reverse
power protection is set to “sensitive”.
Reduce driving power to zero by closing the regulating valves. The generator now
takes motoring energy from the network.
Caution!
For a turbine set, the intake of reverse power is only permissible for a short time, since
operation of the turbine without a certain throughput of steam (cooling effect) can lead
to overheating of the turbine blades!
1. Adjust excitation until the reactive power amount to approximately Q = 0. To check

this, read out the active power with sign (negative) in the operational measured
values and note it down as P0 (see table below). Read out the reactive power with
sign in the operational measured values and note it down as Q0 (see table below).
2. If possible slowly increase excitation to 0.3 times rated apparent power of generator
(overexcited).
386 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
− Read out the motoring power with polarity (negative sign) in the operational
measured values and note it down as P1 (see table below).
− Read out the reactive power with polarity (positive sign) in the operational
measured values and note it down as Q1 (see table below).
3. If possible reduce excitation to approximately 0.3 times rated apparent power of
generator (underexcited).
Caution!
Underexcitation may cause the generator fall out of step!
− Read out the motoring power with polarity (negative sign) in the operational
measured values under and note it down as P2 (see table below).
− Read out the reactive power with polarity (negative sign) in the operational
measured values and note it down as Q2 (see table below).
4. Adjust generator to no-load excitation and shut down or select the desired
operational state.
underexcited P/PN overexcited

Q2 Q1
Q/QN Item Active power Reactive power
P1 1 P0 Q0
P0
P2 2 P1 Q1
3 P2 Q2
Figure 3-37 Determination of the Correction Angle W0
The read-out measured values P1, and P2 are now used to carry out angle error
correction. Calculate according to the following formula:
P –P
ϕcorr = atan --------------------
1 2
-
Q1 – Q2
The power values must be inserted with their correct polarity as read out!
Otherwise faulty result!
This angle ϕcorr is entered with reversed sign as the new correction angle under
address 0204 CT ANGLE W0:
New setting CT ANGLE W0 = – ϕcorr
A quarter of the sum of the measured values P1 + P2 is set as pick-up value of the
reverse power protection P> REVERSE under address 3102.
3.4.10.3 Calibrating the Reverse Power Protection
If the generator is connected with the network, reverse power can be caused by
− closing of the regulating valves,
− closing of the trip valve
Because of possible leakages in the valves, the reverse power test should – if possible
– be performed for both cases.
7UM62 Manual 387

C53000-G1176-C149-3
In order to confirm the correct settings, repeat reverse power test again. For this, the
reverse power protection (address 3101) is set to BLOCK relay in order to check its
effectiveness (using the annunciations).
Start up generator and synchronize with network. Close regulating valves.
From the operational measured value for the active power, the motoring power
measured with the device can be derived. 50 % of that value should be taken as the
setting for the reverse power protection.
Increase driving power.
Stop Valve The last test with the stop valve can be performed with a live trip. It is assumed that
the binary input “>SV tripped” is marshalled correctly and is controlled by the stop
valve status (by a pressure switch or a limit switch at the stop valve).
Close stop valve.
From the operational measured value for the active power, the motoring power
measured with the device can be derived.
If that value should be found to be less than the reverse power with the stop valves
closed, 50 % of that value should be taken as the setting for the reverse power
protection.
Shut down the generator by activating the reverse power protection on:
Switch ON the reverse power protection (address 3101) and - if used - the forward
power supervision (address 3201).
3.4.10.4 Checking the Underexcitation Protection
Underexcitation The angle error correction value CT ANGLE W0, which has been determined in section
3.4.10.2 and configured under address 0204 for use with the angle error correction,
applies also to the underexcitation protection.
In section 3.4.10.2, the measured values of the reactive power have been read out,
and thus a plausibility check of that measured value with directional check has been
carried out. No further checks are required.
If you choose nevertheless to perform an additional load level measurement and by
this a directional check, proceed as follows:
Caution!
Underexcitation may cause the generator to fall out of step, in particular with increased
active power!
Check with Load Set the underexcitation protection to Block relay (address 3001).
The proper functioning is checked by approaching freely selected load levels under
overexcited and then underexcited conditions. The plausibility check is carried out by
reading out the relevant operational measured values and comparing them to the
measured values obtained from the station control and protection system.
Switch the underexcitation protection ON (address 3001).
388 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Note: If operation with capacitive load is not possible, then load points can also be checked
in the inductive (overexcited) range. In this case, the polarity of the current transformer
connections must be re-parameterized (address 0223). Thus, the characteristics of
the underexcitation protection are mirrored around the origin. It must be noted that the
reverse power protection must be switched OFF (address 3101) as its characteristic
is also mirrored from the motor into the generator range.
Stability Limit Since the protective device shows each load level through the operational measured
values, it is not necessary to approach the underexcitation limit line.
3.4.10.5 Checking the Directional Function of the Overcurrent Time Protection
When the polarity of the connections is checked as described in subsection 3.4.10.1,

the direction of the protection function I>> (section 2.7) is unambiguously determined
by the definition of the reference arrow (generator reference-arrow system). When the
generator produces an active power (operational measured value P is positive), and
address 1108 ACTIVE POWER is set to Generator, the power system is located in
forward direction and the generator in reverse direction.
In order to exclude accidental misconnections, it is recommended to carry out a check
with a low load current. Proceed as follows:
− Set the directional high current stage 1301 O/C I>> to Block relay and the
pick-up value I>> (address 1302) to the most sensitive value
(= 0.05 A with a rated current of 1 A and 0.25 A with a rated current of 5 A).
− Increase the load current (ohmic, or ohmic inductive) until it exceeds the pick-up
value, and, as soon as the pick-up annunciations (FNo. 1801 through 1803) have
appeared, read out the annunciations 01806 “I>> forward” and 01807 “I>>
backward”.
− Compare the indicated direction with the setpoint (setting value and address 1304
Phase Direction).
In the standard application with terminal-side current transformers (Figure 2-11),
address 1304 Phase Direction must be set to REVERSE, and the indication
“I>> forward” (FNo. 01806) must appear.
− Re-set the pick-up value in address 1302 back to the original value and the
protection function in address 1301 to ON.
3.4.11 Triggering Oscillographic Recordings
At the end of commissioning, an investigation of switching operations of the circuit

breaker(s) or primary switching device(s), under load conditions, should be done to
assure the stability of the protection during the dynamic processes. Oscillographic
recordings (also called fault records) obtain the maximum information about the
behaviour of the 7UM62.
Requirements To obtain oscillographic records, Address 0104 FAULT VALUE under the DEVICE
CONFIG. menu must be set to Instantaneous values or RMS values.
Along with the capability of recording waveform data during system faults, the 7UM62
also has the capability of capturing the same data when commands are given to the
device via the service program DIGSI® 4, the serial interfaces, or a binary input. For
the latter, the binary input must be assigned to the function “>Trig.Wave.Cap.”
7UM62 Manual 389

C53000-G1176-C149-3
(FNo 00000004). Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs when the
input is energized. For example, an auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker or primary
switch may be used to control the binary input for triggering.
An oscillographic recording that is externally triggered (that is, without a protective
element pick-up or device trip) is processed by the device as a normal fault recording
with the exception that data are not given in the fault messages. The externally
triggered record has a number for establishing a sequence.
Triggering with To trigger oscillographic recording with DIGSI® 4, click on Test in the left part of the
DIGSI® 4 window. Double click the entry Test Wave Form in the list in the right part of the
window to trigger the recording. See Figure 3-38.
A report is given in the bottom left region of the screen. In addition, message segments
concerning the progress of the procedure are displayed.
The DIGRA® program or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and
analyse the oscillographic data.
Figure 3-38 Triggering oscillographic recording with DIGSI® 4
390 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3.5 Final Preparation of the Device
3.5 Final Preparation of the Device
Verify all terminal screws are tight and secure. Do not overtighten. Ensure that all pin
connectors are properly inserted. Verify the wires to the terminals are tightly
connected. Make sure the communication cables are firmly connected; however, do
not overtighten the screws.
Caution!
Do not use force! The stud torque must not be exceeded, since the threads and
terminal screws may be damaged!
Verify that all service settings are correct. This is a crucial step because some setting
changes might have been made during commissioning. The protective settings under
device configuration, input/output masking are especially important (Section 2.2) as
well as the power system data, and activated Groups A and B. All desired elements
and functions must be set ON. See Chapter 2. Keep a copy of all of the in-service
settings on a PC.
Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set the clock or synchronize the
clock if the element is not automatically synchronized. For assistance, refer to the
SIPROTEC®4–System Manual.
The Annunciation memory buffers should be cleared, particularly the Event Log and
Trip Log. Future information will then only apply for actual system events and faults.
To clear the buffers, press MAIN MENU → Annunciation → Set/Reset. Refer to
the SIPROTEC®4 System Manual if further assistance is needed. The numbers in the
switching statistics should be reset to the values that were existing prior to the testing,
or to values in accordance with the user's practices. Set the statistics by pressing
MAIN MENU → Annunciation → Statistic. Refer to the SIPROTEC®4 System
Manual if more information is needed.
Press the ESC key, several times if necessary, to return to the default display.
Clear the LEDs on the front panel by pressing the LED key. Any binary outputs that
were picked up prior to clearing the LEDs are reset when the clearing action is
performed. Future illuminations of the LEDs will then apply only for actual events or
faults. Pressing the LED key also serves as a test for the LEDs because they should all
light when the button is pushed. Any LEDs that are lit after the clearing attempt are
displaying actual conditions.
The green “RUN” LED must be on. The red “ERROR” LED must not be lit.
Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the
operating position.
The device is now ready for operation.
7UM62 Manual 391

C53000-G1176-C149-3
392 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Technical Data 4
This chapter provides the technical data of the SIPROTEC® 4 7UM62 device and the
individual functions of the device, including the limiting values that under no
circumstances may be exceeded. The electrical and functional data for devices
equipped with all options are followed by the mechanical data with dimensional
drawings.
4.1 General Device Data 395

4.2 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50, 67) 406
4.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51, 67) 407
4.4 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) 412
4.5 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) 414
4.6 Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) 416
4.7 Differential Protection for Generators and Motors (ANSI 87G/87M) 417
4.8 Differential Protection for Transformers (ANSI 87T) 419
4.9 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN/TN) 422
4.10 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) 423
4.11 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R) 424
4.12 Forward Power Supervision (ANSI 32F) 425
4.13 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) 426
4.14 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) 427
4.15 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) 428
4.16 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) 430
4.17 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) 431
4.18 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) 432
4.19 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection (ANSI 81R) 434
4.20 Jump of Voltage Vector 435
4.21 90–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) 436
4.22 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) 437
4.23 100–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN
3rd Harm.) 438
7UM62 Manual 393

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
4.24 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI
64G, –100 %) 439
4.25 Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, fn, ANSI 64R) 440
4.26 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz (ANSI 64R) 441
4.27 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) 442
4.28 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) 443
4.29 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) 444
4.30 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50/27) 445
4.31 DC Voltage/DC Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC) 446
4.32 Thermoboxes for Temperature Detection 447
4.33 Additional Functions 448
4.34 Operating Ranges of the Protection Functions 455
4.35 Dimensions 457
394 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4.1 General Device Data
4.1.1 Analog Inputs
Nominal Frequency fN 50 Hz or 60 Hz (adjustable)
Current Inputs Nominal Current IN 1 A or 5 A

Ground Current, SensitiveIEE ≤ 1.6 A
Burden per Phase and Ground Path
– At IN = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
– At IN = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA
– Sensitive Ground Fault Detection 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
AC Current Overload Capability
– Thermal (rms) 100 · IN < 1 s
30 · IN < 10 s
4 · IN continuous
– Dynamic (Current pulse) 250 · IN for 0.5 cycle
AC Current Overload Capability for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection
– Thermal (rms) 300 A < 1 s
100 A < 10 s
15 A continuous
– Dynamic (impulse) 750 A for 0.5 cycle
Voltage Inputs Secondary Nominal Voltage 100 V to 125 VAC

Measuring Range 0 V to 170 VAC
Burden at 100 V Approx. 0.3 VA
AC Voltage Input Overload Capacity
– Thermal (rms) 230 V continuous
Measuring Measuring range between –10 V and +10 V or

Transducers –20 mA and +20 mA
Input resistance for DC voltage Approx. 1 MΩ
Input resistance for DC Current Approx. 10 Ω
Voltage Input Overload Capacity 60 V– continuous
Current Input Overload Capacity 100 mA– continuous
Analog Output(s) Nominal Range 0 to 20 mA–

(for Operational Operating Range 0 to 22.5 mA–
Measured Values)
– Connection for Flush Mounted Case Rear panel, mounting loc. "B" or/and "D"
9-pin DSUB port
for Panel-Surface
Mounted Case At the terminal on the case bottom
or/and at the housing top
– Max. Burden 350 Ω
7UM62 Manual 395

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
4.1.2 Power Supply
Direct Voltage Voltage Supply Via Integrated Converter

Nominal Power Supply Direct Voltage VPS nom 24/48 VDC 60/110/125 VDC
Permissible Voltage Ranges 19 to 58 VDC 48 to 150 VDC
Nominal Power Supply Direct Voltage VPSnom 110/125/220/250 VDC

Permissible Voltage Ranges 88 to 300 VDC
Permissible AC Ripple Voltage,

peak to peak ≤15 % of the power supply voltage
Power Consumption
7UM621 quiescent Approx. 5.3 W
7UM622 Approx. 5.5 W
7UM621 energized Approx. 12 W

7UM622 Approx. 15 W
Bridging Time for Failure/Short Circuit ≥ 50 ms at V ≥ 48 VDC (UH,N = 24/48 V)

≥ 50 ms at V ≥110 VDC (UH,N = 60..125 V)
≥ 20 ms at V ≥ 24 VDC (UH,N = 24/48 V)
≥ 20 ms at V ≥ 60 VDC (UH,N = 60..125 V)
Alternating Voltage Voltage Supply via Integrated Converter

Nominal Power Supply Alternating Voltage 115 VAC
VPS AC (50/60 Hz)
Permissible Voltage Ranges 92 to 132 VAC
Power Consumption
7UM621 quiescent Approx. 5.5 VA
7UM622 Approx. 5.5 VA
7UM621 energized Approx. 13 VA

7UM622 Approx. 15 VA
Bridging Time for Failure/Short Circuit ≥ 200 ms
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs
Binary Inputs Number

7UM621∗– 7 (configurable)
7UM622∗– 15 (configurable)
Nominal Voltage Range 24 VDC to 250 VDC, bipolar

Current Consumption, Energized Approx. 1.8 mA, independent of the
control voltage
Switching Thresholds Adjustable voltage range with jumpers
396 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Binary inputs: 2 ranges

– For Nominal Voltages 24/48/60/ UPU ≥ 19 VDC
110/125 VDC UDO ≤ 14 VDC
– For Nominal Voltages 110/125/ UPU ≥ 88 VDC
220/250 VDC UDO ≤ 66 VDC
Maximum Permissible Voltage 300 VDC

Impulse Filter on Input 220 nF Coupling Capacitor at 220 V with
recovery time > 60 ms
Output Relays1) Output Relays for Commands/Annunciations

Number 7UM621∗– 12 (1 NO contact each, 3 optionally as
NC contacts)
7UM622∗– 20 (1 NO contact each, 4 optionally as
NC contacts)
1 Alarm relay (NC contact or NO contact,
switch selectable)
Switching Capability MAKE 1000W/VA

BREAK 30 W/VA
40 W resistive
25 W at L/R ≤ 50 ms
Switching Voltage 250 V
Permissible Current per Contact 5 A continuous
and Total Current on Common path 30 A for 0.5 s
1
) UL–listed with the following nominal value:
120 VAC Pilot duty, B300
240 VAC Pilot duty, B300
240 VAC 5 A General Purpose
24 VDC 5 A General Purpose
48 VDC 0.8 A General Purpose
240 VDC 0.1 A General Purpose
120 VAC 1/6 hp (4.4 FLA)
240 VAC 1/2 hp (4.9 FLA)
LEDs Number
RUN (green) 1
ERROR (red) 1
User-programmable LEDs (red) 14
4.1.4 Communications Interfaces
PC Front Interface – Connection Front panel, non-isolated, RS 232,

9-pin DSUB port for connecting a personal
computer
– Operation with DIGSI® 4
7UM62 Manual 397

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
– Transmission Speed Min. 4800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud

Factory Setting: 38400 Baud; Parity: 8E1
– Maximum Distance of Transmission 15 meters / 49 feet
Rear Service–/ – Connection Isolated interface for data transfer

Modem– Interface
– Operation With DIGSI® 4
– Transmission Speed Min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd
Factory Setting: 38400 Bd
RS232/RS485 Depends on order code
– Connection for Flush Mounted case Rear panel, mounting location “C“
9-pin DSUB port
for Panel-Surface At the terminal on the case bottom

Mounted Case
– Test Voltage 500 VAC
RS232
RS485
– Maximum Distance of Transmission 1 km / 3280 feet / 0.62 mile
SCADA Interface IEC 60870–5–103

RS232/RS485 Floating interface for data transfer
Depends on order code to a master terminal
RS232
– Connection for Flush Mounted Case Rear panel, mounting location “B“
9-pin DSUB port
For Panel Surface- At the terminal on the case bottom

Mounted Case
RS485
– Connection for Flush Mounted Case rear panel, installation location “B“
9-pin DSUB Port RS 485
For Panel Surface- at the terminal on the case bottom

Mounted Case Profibus cable

Fibre Optical Link
– Connector Type ST–Connector
With Flush-Mounted Case Rear panel, mounting location “B“
398 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
For Panel Surface-

Mounted Case On the case bottom
– Optical Wavelength λ = 820 nm
– Laser Class 1 Under EN 60825–1/ –2 using glass fiber 50/125 µm or
using glass fiber 62.5/125 µm
– Optical Link Signal Attenuation Max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125 µm
– Channel Distance Max. 1.5 km (0.95 miles)
– Character Idle State selectable: factory setting “Light off”
Profibus RS485 (DP)
– Connection for Flush Mounted Case rear panel, installation location “B“

Mounted Case
– Test Voltage 500 V AC
Transmission Speed up to 12 M Baud
– Maximum Distance of Transmission 1 km / 3280 feet / 0.62 mile at≤ 93.75 kBd
500 m /1640 feet / 0.31 mile at≤ 187.5 kBd
200 m / 660 feet at ≤ 1.5 MBd
100 m/ 330 feet at ≤ 12 MBd
DNP3.0 RS485
– Connection for Flush-Mounted Case rear panel, mounting location “B“
For Panel Surface-
Mounted Case on the case bottom
– Transmission Speed up to 19200 Baud
MODBUS RS485
– Connection for Flush-Mounted Case rear panel, mounting location “B“
For Panel Surface-
Mounted Case on the case bottom
– Transmission Speed up to 19200 Baud
Profibus Fibre Optical Link (DP)
– Connection ST–Connector,
for FMS single ring or twin ring, depending
on order; for DP only double ring
For Flush-Mounted Case rear panel, mounting location “B“
For Panel Surface-
– Transmission Speed Up to 1.5 M Baud
Recommended: > 500 k Baud
7UM62 Manual 399

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data

– Laser Class 1 Under EN 60825–1/ –2 Using glass fiber 50/125 µm or
Using glass fiber 62.5/125 µm
DNP3.0 Fibre Optical Link
For Flush-Mounted Case rear panel, mounting location “B“
For Panel Surface-
– Transmission Speed Up to 19200 Baud
MODBUS Fibre Optical Link

For Flush-Mounted Case Rear panel, mounting location “B“
For Panel Surface-
– Transmission Speed Up to 19200 Baud
Analog Output Module (Electrical) 2 ports with 0 mA to 20 mA

– Connection for Flush Mounted Case Rear panel, mounting location “B“ and “D”
For Panel Surface-
Clock – Time Synchronization DCF77/IRIG B–Signal

– Connection For Flush-mounted Case Rear panel, mounting location “A“
9-pin DSUB port

Mounted Case
– Signal Rated Voltage Selectable 5 V, 12 V or 24 V
400 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
– Signal Levels and Burdens:

Rated Signal Voltage
5V 12 V 24 V
VIHigh 6.0 V 15.8 V 31 V
VILow 1.0 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.4 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.9 V at IILow = 0.25 mA
IIHigh 4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 4.5 mA to 8.7 mA
RI 890 Ω at VI = 4 V 1930 Ω at UI = 8.7 V 3780 Ω at UI = 17 V
640 Ω at VI = 6 V 1700 Ω at UI = 15.8 V 3560 Ω at UI = 31 V
4.1.5 Electrical Tests
Specifications Standards: IEC 60255 (Product Standards)

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0,.C37.90.0.1 and
C37.90.0.2
UL 508
DIN 57 435 Part 303
See also standards for individual functions
Insulation Tests Standards: IEC 60255–5, IEC 60870–2–1

– High Voltage Test (Routine Test) 2.5 kV (rms) AC
Current Inputs, Voltage Inputs,
Output Relays
– High Voltage Test (Routine Test) 3.5 kVDC
Power Supply and Binary Inputs
– High Voltage Test (Routine Test) 3.0 kVDC
Measuring Transducers
– High Voltage Test (Routine Test) 500 V (rms) AC
Only Isolated Communications
and Time Synchronization Interfaces
and Analog Outputs (Ports A – D)
– Impulse Voltage Test (Type Test) 5 kV (peak): 1.2/50 µs: 0.5 Ws: 3 positive
All Circuits Except Communications and 3 negative impulses in intervals of 5 s
and Time Synchronization Interfaces,
Analog Outputs, Class III
EMC Tests for Standards: IEC 60255–6 and –22 (Product standards),
Immunity (Type EN 50082–2 (Generic standard)
Tests) DIN 57 435 Part 303 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
and C37.90.2
– High Frequency Test 2.5 kV (Peak): 1 MHz: τ = 15 µs;
IEC 60255–22–1, Class III 400 Surges per s: Test Duration 2 s
and VDE 0435 Part 303, Class III Ri = 200 Ω
– Electrostatic Discharge 8 kV contact discharge: 15 kV airdischarge,
IEC 60255–22–2 Class IV both polarities: 150 pF: Ri = 330 Ω
and IEC 61000–4–2, Class IV
7UM62 Manual 401

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
– Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m: 27 MHz to 500 MHz

Non-Modulated
IEC 60255–22–3 (Report) Class III
– Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m: 80 MHz to 1000 MHz: 80 % AM:
Amplitude Modulated 1 kHz
IEC 61000–4–3, Class III
– Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m: 900 MHz: repetition frequency
Pulse Modulated 200 Hz: duty cycle of 50 %
IEC 61000–4–3/ENV 50204, Class III
– Fast Transient Disturbance Variables/ 4 kV: 5/50 ns: 5 kHz: Burst length = 15 ms;
Burst IEC 60255–22–4 and repetition rate 300 ms: both polarities:
IEC 61000-4-4, Class IV Ri = 50 Ω: Test Duration 1 min
– High Energy Surge Voltages 1.2/50 µs
(SURGE), IEC 61000–4–5
Installation Class 3
Power Supply common mode: 2 kV: 12 Ω: 9 µF
diff. mode: 1 kV: 2 Ω: 18 µF
Measuring Inputs, Binary Inputs common mode: 2 kV: 42 Ω: 0.5 µF
and Relay Outputs diff. mode: 1 kV: 42 Ω: 0.5 µF
– Line Conducted HF, Amplitude Modul. 10 V: 150 kHz to 80 MHz: 80 % AM: 1 kHz
IEC 61000–4–6, Class III
– Power System Frequency Magnetic 30 A/m continuous: 300 A/m for 3 s: 50 Hz
Field IEC 61000–4–8, Class IV 0.5 mT: 50 Hz
IEC 60255–6
– Oscillatory Surge Withstand Capability 2.5 to 3 kV (Peak Value): 1 MHz to 1.5 MHz
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 damped wave: 50 surges per s:
duration 2 s: Ri = 150 Ω to 200 Ω
– Fast Transient Surge Withstand Cap. 4 kV to 5 kV: 10/150 ns: 50 Pulse per s;
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities: Duration 2 s: Ri = 80 Ω
– Radiated Electromagnetic Interference 35 V/m: 25 MHz to 1000 MHz
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse modulated
– Damped Oscillations 2.5 kV (Peak Value), polarity alternating
Similar to IEC 60694–4–12, 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and 50 MHz,
IEC 61000–4–12 Ri = 200 Ω
EMC Tests For Standard: EN 50081 (Generic Standard)

Noise Emission
– Radio Noise Voltage to Lines, 150 kHz to 30 MHz
(Type Test)
Only Power Supply Voltage Limit Class B
IEC–CISPR 22
– Radio Noise Field Strength 30 MHz to 1000 MHz
IEC–CISPR 11 Limit Class A
402 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests
Vibration and Standards: IEC 60255–21 and IEC 60068

Shock Stress
– Vibration Sinusoidal
During Operation
IEC 60255–21–1, Class 2 10 Hz to 60 Hz: ±0.075 mm amplitude;
IEC 60068–2–6 60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration
frequency sweep rate 1 Octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes.
– Shock Half-sine shaped
IEC 60255–21–2, Class 1 acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
IEC 60068–2–27 3 shocks in each direction of
3 orthogonal axes
– Seismic Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255–21–3, Class 1 1 Hz to 8 Hz ± 3.5 mm amplitude
IEC 60068–3–3 (horizontal axis)
1 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 1.5 mm amplitude
(vertical axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
(horizontal axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration
(vertical axis)
Frequency Sweep Rate1 Octave/min
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
Vibration and Standards: IEC 60255–21 and IEC 60068–2

Shock Stress – Vibration Sinusoidal
During Transport IEC 60255–21–1, Class 2 5 Hz to 8 Hz: ±7.5 mm Amplitude;
IEC 60068–2–6 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
Frequency sweep rate1 Octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes.
– Shock Half-sine shaped
IEC 60255–21–2, Class1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
3 orthogonal axes.
– Continuous Shock Half-sine shaped
IEC 60255–21–2, Class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
3 orthogonal axes.
4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests
Ambient – Type tested

Temperatures (acc. IEC 60068–2–1 and –2,
Test Bd for 16 h) –13 °F to +185 °F or –25 °C to +85 °C
– Temporarily allowed operating temperature
(tested for 96 h) – 4 °F to +158 °F or –20 °C to +70 °C
7UM62 Manual 403

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
– Recommended permanent operating

temperature (acc. IEC 60255–6) +23 °F to +131 °F or –5 °C to +55 °C
Visability of display may be impaired above +131 °F
– Limiting temperature during
permanent storage –13 °F to +131 °F or –25 °C to +55 °C
– Limiting temperature during
transport –13 °F to +158 °F or –25 °C to +70 °C
STORE AND TRANSPORT THE DEVICE WITH FACTORY PACKAGING.
Humidity Permissible Humidity Mean value per year ≤75% relative

humidity, on 56 days of the year up to 93%
relative humidity.
CONDENSATION MUST BE AVOIDED
Siemens recommends that all devices be installed such that they are not exposed to
direct sunlight, nor subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause
condensation to occur.
4.1.8 Service Conditions
The protective device is designed for use in an industrial environment and an electrical
utility environment. Proper installation procedures should be followed to ensure
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). In addition, the following are recommended:
• All contactors and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel
as the numerical protective device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable
surge suppression components.
• For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables
should be shielded with a conductive shield grounded at both ends. The shield must
be capable of carrying the fault currents that could occur. For substations with lower
operating voltages, no special measures are normally required.
• Do not withdraw or insert individual modules while the protective device is
energized. When handling the modules or the device outside of the case, standards
for components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) must be observed. The
modules and device are not endangered when inserted into the case.
4.1.9 Certifications
UL listing Models with threaded terminals 7UM62∗∗–∗B∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗

7UM62∗∗–∗E∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗
UL recognition Models with plug–in terminals 7UM62∗∗–∗D∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗
404 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4.1.10 Construction
Case 7XP20
UL–certification conditions: “For use on a Flat Surface of a Type 1
Enclosure”
Dimensions see dimensional drawings, Section 4.35
Weight (Mass)
– In Case for Flush Mounting, 1/2 of 19” 16.5 pounds (7.5 kg)
– In Case for Flush Mounting, 1/1 of 19” 22 pounds (9.5 kg)
– In Case for Surface Mounting, 1/2 of 19” 26.5 pounds (12 kg)
– In Case for Surface Mounting, 1/1 of 19” 33 pounds (15 kg)
International Protection Under IEC 60529
– In the Surface Mounted Case IP 51
– in the Flush Mounted Case and in Model
with the Detached Operator Interface
Front IP 51
Back IP 50
– For Human Safety IP 2x Terminals covered with protection
cap
7UM62 Manual 405

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
4.2 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50, 67)
Pickup and Delay Pickup Current 50–1 0.25 A to 100.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Time Ranges/
Pickup Current 50–2 0.25 A to 100.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Resolutions
Delay Times T 50–1, 50–2, 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
or ∞ (does not expire)
Undervoltage Seal–In U< 10.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
Holding Time of Undervoltage Seal–In 0.10 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Inclination of Directional Characteristic –90° el. to +90° el. (Increments 1° el.)
The set times are pure delay times.
Inherent Operating Pickup Times

Times
50–1, 50–2
– Current = 2 x Pickup Value Approx. 35 ms
– Current = 10 x Pickup Value Approx. 25 ms
Dropout Times
50–1, 50–2 Approx. 50 ms
Dropout Dropout/Pickup (Ratio) 50–1 Approx. 0.95 for I/IN ≥ 0.3

Dropout/Pickup (Ratio) 50–2 0.90 to 0.99 (Increments 0.01)
Dropout/Pickup (Ratio) U< Approx. 1.05
Pickup Value – Dropout Value (∆ϕ) 2° electrical
Tolerances Pickup Current 50–1, 50–2 1 % of setting value or 50 mA1)

Undervoltage Seal–In U< 1 % of setting value or 0.5 V
Delay Times T 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Angle Tolerance ϕ 1° electrical
Influencing Power Supply Direct Voltage in Range

Variables for 0.8 ≤ UPS/ UPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
Pickup
Temperature in Range
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
Harmonic Currents
– Up to 10 % 3rd Harmonics <1%
– Up to 10 % 5th Harmonics <1%
1) For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.
406 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51, 67)
Pickup and Time Pickup Current 51 0.50 A to 20.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Multiplier Ranges/
Time Multipliers for 51 Tp 0.05 s to 3.20 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Resolutions
IEC Characteristics or ∞ (delay does not expire)
Time Multiplier for 51 D 0.50 to 15.00 (Increments 0.01)
ANSI Characteristics or ∞ (delay does not expire)
Undervoltage Release U< 10.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
Trip Time As per IEC 60255-3, Section 3.5.2 or BS 142 (See also Figure 4-1)
Characteristics As 0.14
Per IEC NORMAL INVERSE (Type A) t = ---------------------------------- ⋅ T p [s]
0.02
( I ⁄ Ip ) –1
13.5
VERY INVERSE (Type B) t = --------------------------- ⋅ T p [s]
1
( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1
80
EXTREMELY INV. (Type C) t = --------------------------- ⋅ T p [s]
2
( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1
For All Characteristics

t Trip time in seconds
Tp Setting value of the time multiplier
I Fault current
Ip Setting value of the pickup current
The trip times for I/Ip ≥ 20 are identical to those for I/Ip = 20.
Pickup Threshold Approx. 1.10 · Ip
Dropout Threshold Approx. 1.05 · Ip for Ip/IN ≥ 0.3
Tolerances Pickup Currents Ip 1 % of setting value, or 50 mA1)

Voltage Threshold U< 1 % of setting value, or 0.5 V
Trip Time for 2 ≤ I/Ip ≤ 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 1 %
current tolerance, respectively 40 ms

Pickup
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
Harmonic Currents
1
) For IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.
7UM62 Manual 407

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
100 100
t [s] t [s]
30 30
20 20
10 Tp 10
3.2
5 5
1.6 Tp
3 3
2 3.2
0.8 2
1 1 1.6
0.4
0.5 0.5 0.8

0.2
0.3 0.3 0.4
0.2 0.1
0.2
0.2
0.1 0.05
0.1
0.1
0.05
0.05 0.05
1 2 3 5 7 10 20 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
0, 14 13, 5
Normal inverse: t = -------------------------------------- ⋅ T [s] Very inverse: t = ---------------------------- ⋅ T p [s]
0, 02 p 1
(Type A) (I ⁄ Ip ) –1 (Type B) (I ⁄ I ) – 1
p
100
t [s]
20
10
3
2 t Trip time in seconds
Tp Setting value of the time factor
1 Tp
I Fault current
3.2 Ip Setting value of the pickup current
0.5
0.3 1.6
0.2
0.8
0.1
0.4
0.05 0.1 0.2
0.05
1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip
80
Extremely
Extremely Inverse:
inverse: t =80---------------------------
t = ---------------------------- ⋅ 2T -[s]⋅ T [s]
p p
( I ⁄ I ) – 1p ) – 1
( ⁄
(Type
(Type C) C) 2 I I
p
Figure 4-1 Trip Characteristics of the Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, as per IEC 60755–3 (Phases and Ground)
408 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Trip Time As per ANSI/IEEE (see also Figures 4-2 and 4-3)
Characteristics As
Per ANSI
æ 3.922 ö
VERY INVERSE t = ç --------------------------- + 0.0982÷ ⋅ D [s]
2
è ( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1 ø
æ 8.9341 ö
INVERSE t = ç --------------------------------------- + 0.17966÷ ⋅ D [s]
2.0938
è ( I ⁄ Ip ) –1 ø
æ 0.0103 ö
MODERATELY INV. t = ç ---------------------------------- + 0.0228÷ ⋅ D [s]
0.02
è ( I ⁄ Ip ) –1 ø
æ 5.64 ö
EXTREMELY INVERSE t = ç --------------------------- + 0.02434÷ ⋅ D [s]
2
è ( I ⁄ Ip ) – 1 ø
æ 0.4797 ö
DEFINITE INVERSE t = ç --------------------------------------- + 0.21359÷ ⋅ D [s]
è ( I ⁄ I p ) 1.5625 – 1 ø
For all Characteristics

t = Trip time in seconds
D = Setting value of the time multiplier
I = Fault Current
Ip = Setting value of the pickup current
The trip times for I/Ip ≥ 20 are identical to those for I/Ip = 20.
Pickup Threshold Approx. 1.10 · Ip
Dropout Threshold Approx. 1.05 · Ip for Ip/IN ≥ 0.3
corresponds to approx. [0.95 · pickup
threshold]
Tolerances Pickup Currents Ip 1 % of setting value, or 50 mA1)

Voltage Threshold U< 1 % of setting value, or 0.5 V
Trip Time for 2 ≤ I/Ip ≤ 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 1 %
current tolerance, respectively 40 ms

Pickup
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
7UM62 Manual 409

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
500 500
t [s] t [s]
200 200
100 100
50 50
30 30
20 20
10 10
5 5 D [s]
3 D [s] 3 15
2 2 10
15
1 10 1 5
0.5 5 0.5
2
0.3 0.3
0.2 2 0.2 1
0.1 1 0.1 0.5
0.05 0.5 0.05

1 2 3 5 10 20
1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip
I/Ip
æ ö æ ö
3, 922 8, 9341
VERY INVERSE t = ç ---------------------------- + 0, 0982÷ ⋅ D [s] INVERSE t = ç --------------------------------------------- + 0, 17966÷ ⋅ D [s]
ç 2 ÷ ç 2, 0938 ÷
è (I ⁄ Ip ) – 1 ø è ( I ⁄ Ip ) –1 ø
500
t [s]
200
100
50
30
20 t trip time in seconds
10 D setting value of the time factor
I fault current
5 D [s] Ip setting value of the pickup current
3 15
2 10
1
5
0.5
0.3 2
0.2 1
0.1
0.5
0.05
1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip
æ ö
0, 0103
MODERATELY INVERSE t = çç -------------------------------------- + 0, 0228÷÷ ⋅ D [s]
0, 02
è ( I ⁄ Ip ) –1 ø
Figure 4-2 Trip Time Characteristics of the Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, as per ANSI/IEEE
410 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
500 500
t [s] t [s]
200 200
100 100
50 50
30 30
20 20
10 10
5 D [s]
5
3 3 15
2 2 10
1 D [s] 1 5
0.5 15 0.5
2
10
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2 1
5
0.1 0.1 0.5

2
0.5 1 0.05
0.05
1 2 3 5 10 20 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
æ ö æ ö
5, 64 0, 4797
EXTREMELY INVERSE t = çç ---------------------------- + 0, 02434÷÷ ⋅ D [s] DEFINITE INVERSE t = ç --------------------------------------------- + 0, 21359÷ ⋅ D [s]
2 ç 1, 5625 ÷
è (I ⁄ Ip ) – 1 ø è ( I ⁄ Ip ) –1 ø

D Setting value of the time factor
I Fault current
Ip Setting value of the pickup current
Figure 4-3 Trip Time Characteristics of the Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, as per ANSI/IEEE
7UM62 Manual 411

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
Setting Ranges/ K-Factor per IEC 60255-8 0.10 to 4.00 (Increments 0.01)
Resolutions
Time Constant τ 30 s to 32000 s (Increments 1 s)
Extension K-Factor kt - Factor 1.0 to 10.0 relative to the time constant for
when Machine Stopped the machine running (Increments 0.1)
Thermal Alarm ΘAlarm/ΘTrip 70 % to 100 % of the trip temperature rise
(Θ ALARM) (Increments 1 %)
Current Overload IAlarm 0.50 A to 20.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Alarm (I ALARM)
Rated Temperature Rise 40 °C to 200 °C (Increments 1 °C)
at Rated Sec. Current 104 °F to 392 °F (Increments 1 °F)
Cooling Medium Temperature 40 °C to 300 °C (Increments 1 °C)
for Scaling 104 °F to 572 °F (Increments 1 °F)
Current Limiting IMax therm. 2.50 A to 40.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Emergency Time 10 s to 15000 s (Increments 1 s)
Trip Characteristic See also Figure 4-4

Curve I ö 2 æ I pre ö 2
æ ------------- – -------------
Trip Characteristic Curve è k ⋅ INø è k ⋅ I Nø
t = τ ⋅ ln ------------------------------------------------
-
for (I/ k · IN) ≤ IMax therm. I ö2
æ ------------- –1
è k ⋅ I Nø
Where: t Trip time
τ Temperature rise time constant
I Load current
Ipre Pre-load current
k Setting factor per VDE 0435
Part 3011 and IEC 60255–8
IN Nominal current of the device
IMax therm. Current threshold up to which
the above formula is valid
Dropout Relations Θ/Θtrip Drops out with ΘAlarm

Θ/ΘAlarm Approx. 0.99
I/IAlarm Approx. 0.95
Tolerances Referring to k · IN 2 % or 50 mA1); 2 % class per
IEC 60255–8
Thermal Trip and Alarm Times 3 % or 1 s for I/(k ·IN) > 1.25;
3 % class per IEC 60255–8
Influencing Power Supply DC Voltage (UDC) in Range

Variables Referring 0.8 ≤ UPS/ UPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
to [k · IN]
23 °F≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
1
412 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
100 100
t [min] t [min]
50 Parameter: 50
Setting Value
of Time
Constant
30 30
τ [min]
20 20
1000
Parameter:
10 10 Setting Value
500 of Time
Constant
5 5 τ [min]
200 1000
3 3
2 2
100 500
1 1
50
200
0.5 0.5
20 100
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
10 50
0.1 0.1
5
20
1 2 1 2 5 10
0.05 0.05
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12
I/k · IN I/k · IN
without pre-load and with IMax therm.= 8 ⋅ k ⋅ IN: with 90 % pre-load and with IMax therm.= 8 ⋅ k ⋅ IN:
I pre ö 2
I ö2
æ ------------- I -ö 2 æ -------------
æ -------------
- –ç -÷
èk ⋅ I ø èk ⋅ I ø è k ⋅ I Nø
N N
t = τ ⋅ ln -------------------------------- [min] t = τ ⋅ ln --------------------------------------------------- [min]
I -ö 2
æ ------------- I ö2
æ -------------
èk ⋅ I ø – 1 èk ⋅ I ø
- –1
N N
illi Anwender
Figure 4-4 Trip Time Characteristic Curves for the Thermal Overload Protection (49)
7UM62 Manual 413

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
Setting Ranges/ Permissible Unbalanced Load I2>/IN 3.0 % to 30.0 % (Increments 0.1 %)
Resolutions (Warn. Stage too)
Tripping Stage (Definite Time)I2>>/IN 10 % to 100 % (Increments 1 %)
Delay Times T(I2>), T(I2>>) 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Asymmetry Factor K 2.0 s to 100.0 s (Increments 0.1 s)
Time for Cool Down TCool down 0 s to 50000 s (Increments 1 s)
Trip Characteristic refer also to Figure 4-5
Trip Characteristic of the Thermal Replica

K
t = ----------------------
2
( I2 ⁄ IN )
Where: t – Tripping time

K – Asymmetry factor
I2 – Negative sequence current
IN – Nominal current of the device
I2 perm. – Continuously permissible negative
sequence current

Times
Warning Stage I2>, Tripping Stage I2>> Approx. 50 ms
Dropout Times
Warning Stage I2>, Tripping Stage I2>> Approx. 50 ms
Dropout Warning Stage I2>, Tripping Stage I2>> Approx. 0.95

Thermal Replica drop-off at I2 < I2 perm.
Tolerances Pickup Values I2>, I2>> 3 % of setting value or 0.3 % unbal. load
Thermal Replica for 2 ≤ I2/I2 perm.≤ 20 5 % of reference (calculated) value + 1 %
current tolerance, or 600 ms

Pickup
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
Harmonic Currents
– Up to 10 % 3rd Harmonics 1%
– Up to 10 % 5th Harmonics 1%
414 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Schieflast
Negative Sequence
100 t = f (I2/In)
10000
40
30 s
20 2000
1000
10
400
200 Parameter:
6 Setting value
100
t
4 FACTOR K
3 40 40 s
30 s
2 20 20 s
15 s
10 10 s
1 5s
4
1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2s
1
0.05 0.07 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7 1
I2/In
K
t = ----------------------
2
( I2 ⁄ IN )
Figure 4-5 Trip Characteristics of the Thermal Negative Sequence Protection Stage
7UM62 Manual 415

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
4.6 Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51)
Setting Ranges/ Pickup Current I> 0.10 to 20.00 A (Increments 0.01 A) 1)

Resolution
Delay Times T 0.00 to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Inherent Operating Pickup Times I> 120 ms or higher (dep. on signal frequency)
Times
Dropout Times I> 120 ms or higher (dep. on signal frequency)
Dropout Current Threshold I> 80 % or 0.05 I/In
Tolerances Current Threshold I> <10 %

f ≥ 3 Hz, I/IN < 5
Delay Times T 1 % or 10 ms

Variables for 0.8 ≤ UH/UHN ≤ 1.15 ≤1%
Pickup
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C ≤ 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in Range
2 Hz ≤ f ≤ 10 Hz ≤ 10 %
Harmonics
– Up to 10 % 3rd Harmonics ≤ 100 % (Considered in calculation)
– Up to 10 % 5th Harmonics ≤ 100 % (Considered in calculation)
1) With IN = 5 A multiply all thresholds and increments with 5.
416 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4.7 Differential Protection for Generators and Motors (ANSI 87G/87M)
4.7 Differential Protection for Generators and Motors (ANSI 87G/87M)
Setting Ranges/ Differential Current IDIFF>/IN Gen 0.05 to 2.00 (Increments 0.01)
Resolutions
High-Current Stage IDIFF>>/IN Gen 0.5 to 12.0 (Increments 0.1)
or ∞ (no trip)
Pickup see also Figure 4-6

Characteristic Slope 1 0.10 to 0.50 (Increments 0.01)
Base Point 1 I/IN Gen 0.00 to 2.00 (Increments 0.01)
Slope 2 0.25 to 0.95 (Increments 0.01)
Base Point 2 I/IN Gen 0.00 to 10.,00 (Increments 0.01)
Start Detection I/IN Gen 0.00 to 2.,00 (Increments 0.01)
Factor for Increase of Characteristic
at Start 1.0 to 2.0 (Increments 0.1)
Max. Permissible Starting Time 0.0 to 180.0 s (Increments 0.1 s)
Add-On Stabilization I/IN Gen 2.00 to 15.00 (Increments 0.01)
Duration of Add-On Stabilization (2 to 250) ⋅ dur. of period (system frequ.)
Tripping time delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
for IDIFF> and IDIFF>> or ∞ (ineffective)
Pickup Times without parallel operation of other protection functions
50 Hz 60 Hz
− with ≥ 1.5 ⋅ setting IDIFF>/IN Gen, approx. 35 ms 35 ms
− with ≥ 1.5 ⋅ setting IDIFF>>/IN Gen, approx. 25 ms 22 ms
− with ≥ 5 ⋅ setting IDIFF>>/IN Gen, approx. 18 ms 17 ms
Dropout/Pickup Ratio Approx. 0.7
Tolerances With Preset Transformer Parameters
– Pickup Characteristic ± 3 % of setpoint value (for I < 5 ⋅ IN)

– Additional Delay Time ± 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Variables for 0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
Pickup
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1 % (see also Figure 4-7)
7UM62 Manual 417

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
I diff
IN
9
2031 8 d
I DIFF>>
7
6
Tripping Blocking
5
c SLOPE 2
4
3 SLOPE 1
2
b
1 Add-On Stabilization
2021 a
I DIFF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
BASE POINT 2
BASE POINT 1
I stab
-----------
-
IN
Figure 4-6 Pickup Characteristic for Generator or Motor Differential Protection
IXf
IDIFF>>/IN (settable)
1 Setting value e.g. 0.1
0.6
0.4 Tripping
Legend:
IDIFF Differential current = | I1 + I2 |
0.3 IfN Current at system frequency
IXf Current at any frequency
0.2 within specified range
0.1
0.05 Blocking
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 f/Hz
Figure 4-7 Influence of Frequency in Generator or Motor Differential Protection
418 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4.8 Differential Protection for Transformers (ANSI 87T)
Setting Ranges/ Differential Current IDIFF>/IN transf 0.05 to 2.00 (Increments 0.01)
Resolutions
High-Current Stage IDIFF>>/IN Transf 0.5 to 12.0 (Increments 0.1)
or ∞ ( stage ineffective)
Pickup see also Figure 4-8

Characteristic Slope 1 0.10 to 0.50 (Increments 0.01)
Base Point 1 I/IN Transf 0.00 to 2.00 (Increments 0.01)
Slope 2 0.25 to 0.95 (Increments 0.01)
Base Point 2 I/IN Transf 0.00 to 10.00 (Increments 0.01)
Start Detection I/IN Transf 0.00 to 2.00 (Increments 0.01)
Factor for Increase of Characteristic
at Start 1.0 to 2.0 (Increments 0.1)
Max. Permissible Starting Time 0.0 to 180.0 s (Increments 0.1 s)
Add-On Stabilization I/IN Transf 2.00 to 15.00 (Increments 0.01)
Inrush Stabilization I2fN/IfN 10 % to 80 % (Increments 1 %)
Harmonics) see also Figure 4-9
Stabilization (nth harm.) InfN/IfN 10 % to 80 % (Increments 1 %)

(n = 3rd or 5th Harmonics) see also Figure 4-10
Release of Blocking I/IN Transf 0.5 to 12.0 (Increments 0.1)
by Higher-Order Harmonics
Tripping Delay Time 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increm. 0.01 s)
for IDIFF> and IDIFF>> or ∞ (ineffective)
Duration of Add-On Stabilization (2 to 250) ⋅ dur. of period (system frequ.)
or ∞ (ineffective)
Time for Cross-Blocking (0 to 1000) ⋅ dur. of period (system frequ.)
for 2nd, 3rd or 5th Harmonics or ∞ (continuous)
Pickup Times without parallel operation of other protection functions
50 Hz 60 Hz
− with ≥ 1.5 ⋅ Setting IDIFF>/IN Transf, approx. 35 ms 35 ms
− with ≥ 1.5 ⋅ Setting IDIFF>>/IN Transf, approx. 25 ms 22 ms

− with ≥ 5 ⋅ Setting IDIFF>>/IN Transf, approx. 18 ms 17 ms
Tolerances With Preset Transformer Parameters
– Pickup Characteristic ± 3 % of setpoint value (for I < 5 ⋅ IN)

– Inrush Restraint ± 3 % of setting value (for I2fN/IfN ≥ 15 %)
– Additional Delay Times ± 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
7UM62 Manual 419

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data

Pickup
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1 % (see also Figure 4-11)
I diff
IN
9
2031 8 d
I DIFF>>
7
6
Tripping Blocking
5
c SLOPE 2
4
3 SLOPE 1
2
b
1 Add-On Stabilization
2021 a
I DIFF>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
BASE POINT 2 I stab
BASE POINT 1
-----------
-
IN
Figure 4-8 Pickup Characteristic of the Transformer Differential Protection
IfN
IN
Can be set to e.g.
IDIFF>>/IN = 10
10.0
Trip-
ping
5,0 Blocking
2.0
Can be set to
e.g. 2ndharmonics = 15 %
1.0
0.5 Can be set to e.g.

IDIFF>/IN = 0.2
0.2
0.1
I2f
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 IfN
Figure 4-9 Restraining Influence of 2nd Harmonics in Transformer Differential Protection
420 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
IfN
IN
Can be set to e.g.

IDIFF max n/IN = 4
4.0
Tripping
2.0 Blocking
Can be set to
e.g. 5th harmonic = 40 %
1.0
Can be set to e.g.

0.5 IDIFF>/IN = 0.2
0.2
0.1
I5f
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 IfN
Figure 4-10 Restraining Influence of Higher-Order Harmonics
IXf
IDIFF>>/IN (settable)
Setting value e.g. 5.0
12
10
5
3
2
Tripping
1.0 Blocking
(Blocking by
0.5 2nd harmonics)
0.3 Setting value e.g. 0.15
IDIFF>/IN (settable)
0.2
0.15
Blocking
0.05
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 f/Hz
Legend:
IDIFF Differential current = | I1 + I2 |
IfN Current at system frequency
IXf Current at any frequency
within specified range
Figure 4-11 Influence of Frequency in Transformer Differential Protection
7UM62 Manual 421

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
4.9 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN/TN)
Setting Ranges/ Differential Current I-REF> I/InO 0.05 to 2.00 (Increments 0.01)
Resolution
Characteristic: Basepoint I/InO 0.05 to 2.00
Characteristic: Slope 0.00 to 0.95 (Increments 0.01)
Delay Times T 0.00 to 60.00 (Increments 0.01 s)
Phase Current Blocking I> I/InO 1.0 to 2.5 (Increments 0.1)
Zero Voltage Release U0> 1.0 to 100.0 (Increments 0.1 V)
oder disabled
Inherent Operating Pickup Times Approx. 25 to 55 ms

Times
Dropout Times Approx. 60 ms
Dropout Pickup Characteristic Approx. 0.90

Tolerances Pickup Characteristic 5 % of setpoint value or 0.02 I/InO

Phase Current Blocking I> 1 % of setting value or 0.01 I/InO
Zero Voltage Release U0> 1 % of setting value or 0.5 V

Pickup
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C ≤ 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 ≤1%
Harmonics
– Up to 10 % 3rd Harmonics ≤1%
– Up to 10 % 5th Harmonics ≤1%
422 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Setting Ranges/ Conductance Sections 1/xd CHAR. 0.25 to 3.00 (Increments 0.01)
Resolutions
Angle of Inclination α1, α2, α3 50° to 120° (Increments 1°)
Delay Time T 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Undervoltage Lock-Out 10.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
Excitation Voltage Uexc. < 0.50 V to 8.00 V (Increments 0.01 V)
(via external upstream voltage divider)

Times
– Stator Criterion 1/xd CHAR., α Approx. 60 ms
– Rotor Criterion Uexc. Approx. 60 ms
– Undervoltage Lock-Out U1< Approx. 50 ms
Dropout – Stator Criterion 1/xd CHAR., α Approx. 0.95

– Rotor Criterion Uexc. Approx. 1.05 or + 0.5 V
– Undervoltage Lock-Out U1< Approx. 1.1
Tolerances – Stator Criterion 1/xd CHAR. 3 % of setting value

– Stator Criterion α 1° electrical
– Rotor Criterion Uexc. 1° or 0.1 V
– Undervoltage Lock-Out U1< 1 % of setting value or 0.5 V
– Delay Times T 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Pickup
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
Harmonic Currents
– Up to 10 % 3rd Harmonics 1%
– Up to 10 % 5th Harmonics 1%
7UM62 Manual 423

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
4.11 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R)
Setting Ranges/ Reverse Power Pr>/SN –0.50 % to –30.0 %(Increments 0.01 %)

Resolutions
Delay Times T 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)

Times
– Reverse Power Pr> Approx. 360 ms at 50 Hz
Approx. 300 ms at 60 Hz
Drop-Off Times
– Reverse Power Pr> Approx. 360 ms at 50 Hz
Approx. 300 ms at 60 Hz
Dropout – Reverse Power Pr> Approx. 0.6
Tolerances – Reverse Power Pr> 0.25 % SN ± 3 % of set value

at Q < 0.5 SN
(SN: rated apparent power,
Q: reactive power)

Pickup
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
Harmonic Currents
424 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4.12 Forward Power Supervision (ANSI 32F)
4.12 Forward Power Supervision (ANSI 32F)
Setting Ranges/ Forward Power Pf</SN 0.5 % to 120.0 % (Increments 0.1 %)

Resolutions
Forward Power Pf>/SN 1.0 % to 120.0 % (Increments 0.1 %)

Times
– Forward Power Pf<, Pf> Approx. 360 ms at 50 Hz with high–accu-
Approx. 300 ms at 60 Hz racy measure-
ment
Approx. 60 ms at 50 Hz with high–speed
Approx. 50 ms at 60 Hz measure-
ment
Dropout Times
– Forward Power Pf<, Pf> Approx. 360 ms at 50 Hz with high–accu-
Approx. 300 ms at 60 Hz racy measure-
ment
Approx. 60 ms at 50 Hz with high–speed
Approx. 50 ms at 60 Hz measure-
ment
Dropout – Forward Power Pf< Approx. 1.10 or 0.5 % of SN

Pf> Approx. 0.90 or –0.5 % of SN
Tolerances – Forward Power Pf<, Pf> 0.25 % SN ± 3 % of set value

with high–accuracy measurement
0.5 % SN ± 3 % of set value
with high–speed measurement
(SN: rated apparent power)

Pickup
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
Harmonic Currents
7UM62 Manual 425

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
4.13 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21)
Overcurrent Fault Pickup Current IMP I> 0.50 A to 100.00 A1) (Increm. 0.05 A)1)
Detection Drop-Off ratio Approx. 0.95
Measuring Tolerances acc.to 1 % of set value or 50 mA1)
VDE 0435 part 303
Undervoltage Seal-In U< 10.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
Drop-Off ratio Approx. 1.05
Impedance Characteristic Polygonal, 3 independent stages

Measurement Impedance Z1 (Based on IN = 5 A2) 0.01 Ω to 26.00 Ω2) (Increments 0.01 Ω)
Impedance Z1B (Based on IN = 5 A2) 0.01 Ω to 13.00 Ω2) (Increments 0.01 Ω)
Impedance Z2 (Based on IN = 5 A2) 0.01 Ω to 13.00 Ω2) (Increments 0.01 Ω)
Measuring Tolerances as per ê∆Z/Z ê ≤ 5 % for 30° ≤ ϕK ≤ 90° or 10 mΩ

VDE0435 part 303
with Sinusoidal Quantities
2
) Secondary values for IN = 5 A; for IN = 1 A multiply all values by 5; the increment is
always 0.01 Ω.
Power Swing Difference Power Swing Polygon/ 0.10 Ω to 30.00 Ω (Increments 0.01 Ω)
Blocking Trip Polygon (Based onIN = 1 A2)
Rate of Change dz/dt 1.0 Ω/s to 600.0 Ω/s (Increments 0.1 Ω/s)
(Based onIN = 1 A2)
Power Swing Blocking Action Time 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
2)Secondary values for IN = 1 A, for IN = 5 A devided all values by 5; the increment is
always the same.
Times Delay Times T 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)

Shortest Tripping Time 35 ms
Typical Tripping Time Approx. 40 ms
Dropout Time Approx. 50 ms
Holding Time of Undervoltage Seal-In 0.10 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Time Expiry Tolerances 1 % of set value or 10 ms

Pickup
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
Harmonic Currents
426 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Pickup Positive Sequence Component I1>/IN 20.0 % to 400.0 % (Increm. 0.1 %)

Negative Sequence ComponentI2</IN 5.0 % to 100.0 % (Increm. 0.1 %)
Dropout/Pickup Ratios
– I1> Approx. 0.95
– I2< Approx. 1.05
Measuring Tolerances acc. to 3 % of setting value

VDE 0435 Part 303
Power Swing Impedance Za (based on IN = 5 A1) 0.04 Ω to 26.00 Ω1) (Increm. 0.01 Ω)
Polygon Impedance Zb (based on IN = 5 A1) 0.02 Ω to 26.00 Ω1) (Increm. 0.01 Ω)
Impedance Zc (based on IN = 5 A1) 0.02 Ω to 26.00 Ω1) (Increm. 0.01 Ω)
Impedance Zd–Zc (based on IN = 5 A1) 0.00 Ω to 26.00 Ω1) (Increm. 0.01 Ω)
Angle of Inclination of the Polygon 60.0° to 90.0° (Increments 0.1°)
Number of Permissible Power Swings
Characteristic 1 1 to 4
Characteristic 2 1 to 8
Measuring Tolerances acc. to VDE 0435 ê∆Z/Z ê ≤ 5 % for 30° ≤ ϕK ≤ 90° or 10 mΩ
with Sinusoidal Quantities
1
) Secondary values for IN = 5 A; for IN = 1 A multiply all values by 5; the increment is
always 0.01 Ω.
Times Holding Time of Pickup TH 0.20 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)

Holding Time of Out-of-Step
Annunciation 0.02 s to 0.15 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Delay Time Tolerances 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Pickup
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
Harmonic Currents
7UM62 Manual 427

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
Setting Ranges / Measurement Quantities: PositiveSequence Voltages

Resolution
Pickup Voltage U<, U<<, Up< 10.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
(27)
Dropout Ratio U<, U<< 1.01 to 1.20 (Increments 0.01)
(27-1 and 27-2 only)
Delay Time T U<, T U<< 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
(27-Delay) or ∞ (does not expire)
Time Multiplier TMUL 0.10 s to 5.00 s (Increm. 0.01 s)
for Inverse Characteristic
Add-On Delay Time TUp< 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increm. 0.01 s)
for Inverse Characteristic or ∞ (does not expire)
The set time are pure delay times.
Inherent Operating Pickup Times Approx. 50 ms

Times
Dropout/Pickup Based on the pickup value of the 1.01 or 0.5 V absolute

Ratio inverse characteristic
Tripping see also Figure 4-12

Characteristic for
Inverse Function 1
t = ---------------- ⋅ T MUL + T Up<
U
1 – -------
Up
Meaning: t Tripping time

U Current voltage
Up Pickup voltage being ∞ at that
moment (= parameter 4402)
TMUL Time multiplier (parameter 4403)
T Up< Add-on delay time (4404)
Tolerances – Pickup Voltages 1 % of set value, or 0.5 V

– Delay Times T, TUp< 1 % of set value, or 10 ms
– Voltage-Time Characteristic 1 % based on U, or 30 ms
Influencing Power Supply DC voltage (VDC) in Range

Variables 0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
Harmonics
- Up to 10 % 3rd Harmonics <1%
- Up to 10 % 5th Harmonics <1%
428 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Voltage
Tripping Time
Figure 4-12 Tripping Times of the Inverse Undervoltage Protection for Setting Value Up< = 75 V,
Without Additional Trip Delay (TUp< = 0)
7UM62 Manual 429

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
4.16 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59)
Setting Ranges / Measurement Quantities: Maximum of the phase–to–phase voltages,

Resolution calculated from the phase–to–earth voltag-
es
Pickup Voltage U>, U>> 30.0 V to 170.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
59-1, 59-2
Dropout Ratio U>, U>> 0.90 to 0.99 (Increments 0.01)
for 59-1, 59-2
Delay Time T U>, T U>> 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
59-Delay or ∞ (does not expire)
The set time are pure delay times.
Inherent Operating Pickup Times Approx. 50 ms

Times
Tolerances – Pickup Voltages 1 % of set value, or 0.5 V

– Delay Times T 1 % of set value, or 10 ms
Influencing Power supply DC voltage (VDC) in Range

Variables 0.8 ≤ UPS/ UPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
Harmonics
- Up to 10 % 3rd Harmonics <1%
- Up to 10 % 5th Harmonics <1%
430 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Setting Ranges/ Number of Frequency Elements 4: each can be 81/O or 81/U

Resolutions
Pickup Frequency f> or f< 40.00 Hz to 65.00 Hz (Increments 0.01 Hz)
(81–1 to 81–4)
Delay Time T f1 (81–1) 0.00 s to 600.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
T f2 to T f4 0.00 s to 100.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
(81–2 to 81–4)
Undervoltage Blocking 10.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
(U1 Positive Sequence Voltage)
Inherent Operating Pickup Times f>, f< Approx. 100 ms

Times 81/O or 81/U
Dropout Times T (f<, f<) Approx. 100 ms
81/O or 81/U
Dropout Frequency ∆f = | Pickup Value – Dropout Value | Approx. 20 mHz
Dropout Voltage Dropout Ratio for

Undervoltage Blocking Approx. 1.05
Tolerances – Pickup Frequencies f>, f< 10 mHz (at U = UN; f = fN)

81/O or 81U
– Undervoltage Blocking 1 % of set value or 0.5 V
– Delay Times T (f<, f<) 1 % of set value or 10 ms
81/O or 81/U

Variables 0.8 ≤ UPS/ UPS nominal ≤ 1.15 0.1 %
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Harmonics
7UM62 Manual 431

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
Setting Ranges/
U / UN
Resolutions Overexcitation (Ratio >) 1.00 to 1.20 (Increments 0.01)
f / fN
(Warning Stage)
U / UN
Overexcitation (Ratio >) 1.00 to 1.40 (Increments 0.01)
f / fN
(Stepped Characteristic)
Time Delay T 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)

(Warning Stage
and Stepped Charact. or ∞ (does not expire)
Pair of Values for
Characteristic of U/f 1.05 / 1.10 / 1.15 / 1.20 / 1.25 /
1.30 / 1.35 / 1.40
Thermal Replica T 0 s to 20000 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Time for Cool Down TCOOL DOWN 0 s to 20000 s (Increments 1 s)
Inherent Operating Warning Stage and Stepped Characteristic

Times – Pickup Times at 1.1 Times Approx. 60 ms
setting value
– Dropout Times Approx. 60 ms
Dropout Dropout/Pickup Approx. 0.95
Tripping time Thermal Replica acc. to Presettings Refer to Figure 4-13

characteristic
Tolerances Pickup on U/f 3 % of setting value )

Thermal Replica 5 %, related to U/f ± 600 ms

Pickup
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
Harmonic Currents
432 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
10000
t [s]
3000
2000
1000
500
300
200
100
50
30
20
10
5
3
2
1 T U/f>>
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
U/f> U⁄f U/f>>

(Pickup/warning stage) -----------------
UN ⁄ fN
Figure 4-13 Tripping Time Characteristic of Thermal Replica and of Stepped Stage of the
Overexcitation Protection (Pre–settings)
7UM62 Manual 433

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
4.19 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection (ANSI 81R)
Setting Ranges/ Stages, can be +df/dt> or–df/dt 4

Resolution
Pickup Values df/dt 0.1 to 10 Hz/s (Increments 0.1 Hz/s)
Delay Times T 0.00 to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Undervoltage Lock-Out U1> 10.0 to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
Window Length 1 to 25 cycles
Inherent Operating Pickup Times df/dt Approx. 150 ms to 500 ms

Times (dep. on window length)
Dropout Times df/dt Approx. 150 ms to 500 ms
(dep. on window length)
Dropout Dropout Difference ∆f/dt 0.02 to 0.99 Hz/s (settable)

Tolerances Frequency Rise

Measuring Window < 5 Approx. 5 % or 0.15 Hz/s at U > 0.5 UN
Measuring Window ≥ 5 Approx. 3 % or 0.1 Hz/s at U > 0.5 UN
Undervoltage Lock-Out 1 % of setting value or 0.5 V
Delay Times 1 % or 10 ms

Pickup
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C ≤ 0.5 %/10 K
Harmonics
434 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Setting Ranges/ Stage ∆ϕ 2° to 30° (Increments 1°)

Resolution
Delay Time T 0.00 to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Reset Time TReset 0.10 to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Undervoltage Lock-Out U1> 10.0 to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
Inherent Operating Pickup Times ∆ϕ Approx. 75 ms

Times
Dropout Times ∆ϕ Approx. 75 ms
Dropout – –
Tolerances Angle Jump 0.5° at U > 0.5 UN

Undervoltage Lock-Out 1 % of setting value or 0.5 V
Delay Times T 1 % or 10 ms

Variables 0.8 ≤ UH/UHN ≤ 1.15 ≤1%
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C ≤ 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 ≤1%
Harmonics
7UM62 Manual 435

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
4.21 90–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G)
Setting Ranges/ Displacement Voltage U0> 2.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)

Resolutions
Residual Current IE> 2 mA to 1000 mA (Increments 1 mA)
Inclination of Directional Characteristic 0° to 360° (Increments 1°)


Inherent Operating – Pickup Times UE Approx. 50 ms
Times IE Approx. 50 ms
Direction Approx. 70 ms
– Dropout Times UE Approx. 50 ms
IE Approx. 50 ms
Direction Approx. 70 ms
Dropout Displacement Voltage UE Approx. 0.70

Residual Current IE> Approx. 0.70
Hysteresis of directional characteristic Approx. 10° tow. line
Tolerances Displacement Voltage UE 1 % of setting value or 0.5 V

Residual Current IE> 1 % of setting value or 0.5 mA

Pickup
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
Harmonic Currents
436 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Setting Ranges/ Overcurrent pick-up IEE> 2 mA to 1000 mA (Increments 1 mA)

Resolutions
Delay Time TIEE> 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Overcurrent Pick-Up IEE>> 2 mA to 1000 mA (Increments 1 mA)
Delay Time TIEE>> 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Measured Value Supervision
when Used as Rotor Earth
Fault Protection IEE< 1.5 mA to 50.0 mA (Increments 0.1 mA)
or 0.0 mA (ineffective)
Inherent Operating – Pickup Times Approx. 60 ms

Times – Dropout Times Approx. 50 ms
– Measured Value Supervision Approx. 2 s
Dropout Overcurrent Pick-Up IEE>, IEE>> Approx. 0.95 or 1 mA

Measured Value Superv. IEE< Approx. 1.10 or 1 mA
Tolerances Overcurrent Pick-Up 1 % of setting value or 0.5 mA


Pickup
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
Harmonic Currents
Note: For the purpose of high sensitivity, the linear range of the measuring input for
the sensitive ground fault acquisition is from 2 mA to 1600 mA.
7UM62 Manual 437

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data

(ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.)
Setting Ranges/ Pick–Up Value for 3rd Harmonic

Resolutions in Undervoltage Stage U0 (3rd HARM)< 0.2 V to 40.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
Pick–Up Value for 3rd Harmonic

in Overvoltage Stage U0 (3rd HARM)> 0.2 V to 40.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
Delay Time TSEF (3rd HARM) 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)

oder ∞ (does not expire)
Release Threshold P/Pmin > 10 % to 100 % (Increments 1 %)
or 0 (ineffective)
U/U1 min> 50.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
or 0 (ineffective)

Dropout Undervoltage Stage U0 (3rd HARM)< Approx. 1.10 or 0.1 V

Overvoltage Stage U0 (3rd HARM)> Approx. 0.90 or 0.1 V
Release Thresholds P/Pmin > Approx. 0.90
U/U1 min> Approx. 0.95
Tolerances – Displacement Voltage 3 % of setting value or 0.1 V

– Delay Time TSEF (3rd HARM) 1 % of setting value or 10 ms

Pickup
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
438 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4.24 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G, –100 %)
4.24 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection

(ANSI 64G, –100 %)
Setting Ranges/ Alarm Stage RSEF< 20 to 700 Ω (Increments 1 Ω)

Resolution
Tripping Stage RSEF<< 20 to 700 Ω (Increments 1 Ω)
Earth Currrent StageISEF> 0.02 to 1.50 A (Increments 0.01 A)
Delay Time 0.00 to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s
or ∞ (does not expire))
Supervision Threshold of 20 HZ Voltage
U20 0.3 to 15.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
I20 5 to 40 mA (Increments 1 mA)
Correction Angle –60° to +60° (Increments 1°)
Inherent Operating Pickup Time RSEF<, RSEF<< ≤ 1.3 s

Times
Pickup Time ISEF> ≤ 250 ms
Dropout Time RSEF<, RSEF<< ≤ 0.8 s
Dropout Time ISEF> ≤ 120 s
Dropout Dropout/Pickup Ratio Approx. 1.2 to 1.7
Tolerances Resistance Approx. 5 % or 2 Ω

Current 3 % or 3 mA
Delay Time 1 % or 10 ms

Pickup
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C ≤ 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 ≤1%
Harmonics
7UM62 Manual 439

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
4.25 Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, fn, ANSI 64R)
Setting Ranges/ Alarm Stage RE ALARM 3.0 kΩ to 30.0 kΩ (Increments 0.1 kΩ)
Resolutions
Tripping Stage RE TRIP 1.0 kΩ to 5.0 kΩ (Increments 0.1 kΩ)
Delay Times TRE ALARM 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)

TRE TRIP 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Reactance in the XCOUPLING –100 Ω to 800 Ω (Increments 1 Ω)
Coupling Circuit (Capacitive)
Resistance in the RSERIES 0 Ω to 999 Ω (Increments 1 Ω)
Coupling Circuit
Pickup Value of I RE< 1.0 mA to 50.0 mA (Increments 0.1 mA)

Warning Stage or 0.0 (stage is inactive)
Correction Angle for W0 I RE –15.0° to +15.0° (Increments 0.1°)
Rotor Earth Fault Current
Permissible Rotor For the tolerances stated, and for detecting an interruption of the measuring circuit
Earth Capacity CE 0.15 µF ≤ CE ≤ 3.0 µF
Permissible Operating Range of the 20 V∼ to 100 V~
Injected Voltage
(Warning U RE< at U ≤ 20 V∼)
Times Pickup Times

– Warning Stage, Tripping Stage ≤ 80 ms
Dropoff Times
– Warning Stage, Tripping Stage ≤ 80 ms
Dropoff/Pickup – RE WARN, RE TRIP Approx. 1.25

Ratios – Alarm I RE< Approx. 1.20 or 0.5 mA dropout difference
– Alarm U RE< Approx. 5 V dropout difference
Tolerances – Warning Stage, Tripping Stage 5 % for RE ≤ 5 kΩ and 0.15 ≤ CE/µF≤ 3

10 % for RE ≤ 10 kΩ and 0.15 ≤ CE/µF≤ 3
10 % for 10 ≤ RE/kΩ ≤ 30 and CE ≤ 1 µF
– Delay Times T 1 % or 10 ms

Variables 0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
for Pickup Values
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 3 % for CE ≤ 0,15 µF
10 % for 0,15 ≤ CE/µF≤ 1
440 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4.26 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz (ANSI 64R)
4.26 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz (ANSI 64R)
Setting Ranges/ Warning Stage RE WARN 5 kΩ to 80 kΩ (Increments 1 kΩ)

Resolution
Tripping Stage RE TRIP 1 kΩ to 10 kΩ (Increments 1 kΩ)
Delay Time 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)

Pickup Value of QC< 0.01 to 1.00 mAs (Increments
Open Rotor Circuit 0.01 mAs)
Inherent Operating Pickup Time Approx. 1 to 1.5 s (depends on 7XT71)

Times
Dropout Time Approx. 1 to 1.5 s
Dropout Resistance RE Approx. 1.25

Charge QC< 1.2 or 0.01 mAs
Tolerances Resistance Approx. 5 % or 0.5 kΩ at 0.15 µF≤CE< 1 µF

Approx. 10 % or 0.5 kΩ at 1 µF≤CE< 3µF
Charge 5 % or 0.005 mAs
Delay Time 1 % or 10 ms
Permissible Rotor-Earth Capacitance 0.15 to 3 µF

Pickup
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C ≤ 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 ≤1%
Harmonics
7UM62 Manual 441

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
4.27 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48)
Setting Ranges/ Motor Starting Current ISTARTUP 0.50 A to 80.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Increments
Pickup Threshold IMOTOR START 3.00 A to 5.00 A1) (Increments 0.05 A)1)
Permissible Starting Time TSTARTUP 1.0 s to 180.0 s (Increments 0.1 s)
Permissible Locked
Rotor Time TLOCKED_ROTOR0.5 s to 120.0 s (Increments 0.1 s)
or ∞ (step is ineffective)
Trip Time Charac- Trip Time Characteristics I STARTUP 2

teristic t = æ ------------------------ö ⋅ T STARTUP
for Irms > IMOTOR START è I rms ø
Meaning: ISTARTUP Motor starting current setting
Irms Actual current flowing
IMOTOR START Pickup threshold setting,
used to detect motor startup
Dropout Ratio Irms/IMOTOR START approx. 0.95
Tolerance Pickup Threshold 1 % of set value, or 50 mA1)

Time Delay 5 % or 30 ms
Influencing Vari- Power Supply Direct Voltage in Range

ables for Pickup 0.8 ≤ UPS/ UPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
Temperatur in range
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
Harmonic currents
– Up to 10 % 3. Harmonic <1%
1) for IN = 1 A, divide all limits and increments by 5.
442 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Setting Ranges/ Starting CurrentBased IStart/IMOTnom 1.5 to 10.0 (Increments 0.1)

Increments on Nominal Motor Current
Max. Permissible TMOT START 3.0 s to 120.0 s (Increments 0.1 s)
Starting Time
Temperature TEQUAL 0.0 min to 60.0 min (Increments 0.1 min)
Equalization Time
Max. Permissible nWARM 1 to 4 (Increments 1)
Number of Warm Starts
Difference between nCOLD - nWARM 1 to 2 (Increments 1)
Cold and Warm Starts
Extension of Time kτSTOP 1.0 to 100.0 (Increments 0.1)
Constant at Stop
Extension of Time kτRUNNING 1.0 to 100.0 (Increments 0.1)
Constant at Motor Running
Minimum Restart Inhibit Time 0.2 to 120.0 min (Increm. 0.1 min)
Restart Threshold n COLD – 1

Θ Re.Inh = Θ L max perm ⋅ ---------------------------
n COLD
RestartTimes
T Wait time = T Equal + T Re.In.
Θ Hist Θ Hist ⋅ n COLD

T Re.Inh = τ ⋅ ln(------------------ ) = τ ⋅ ln(----------------------------------
-)
Θ Re.Inh n COLD – 1
Meaning: ΘRe.Inh. Temperature threshold below which a

restart is possible
ΘL max perm. Maximum permissible rotor
overtemperature (= 100 % in operational
measured value ΘR/ΘR Trip)
nCOLD Number of permissible starts in cold
condition
TWait time Time after which a restart of the motor is
possible
TEqual Equalization time during which the thermal
replica is "frozen"
TRe.Inh. Time for the thermal replica to drop below
the restart threshold again, depends on:
ΘHist History leading to the rotor temperature
τ Rotor time constant (internally calculated)
7UM62 Manual 443

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
4.29 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF)
Pickup and Delay Pickup of 50 Element BF.I> 0.20 A to 10.00 A 1)(Increments 0.05 A)1)
Time Ranges/
Delay Time TRIP-Timer 0.06 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Resolutions
or ∞ (no trip)
Initiating Time Pickup Times (protection initiates)

- For Internal Start Approx. 50 ms
- Using Controls Approx. 50 ms
- For External Start Approx. 50 ms
Reset Time Approx. 50 ms
Tolerances Pickup Current BF.I> 1 % of set value, or 50 mA1)

Delay Time TRIP-Timer 1 % or 10 ms
Influencing Power Supply DC voltage (UDC) in Range

23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 <1%
Harmonic currents
1
444 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4.30 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50/27)
4.30 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50/27)
Setting Ranges/ Overcurrent Pick-Up ISTAGE 0.5 A to 100.0 A1) (Increments 0.5 A)1)
Resolutions or ∞ (does not expire)
Release U1< 10.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V)
Delay Time PICK UP T U1< 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
Drop Out Delay Time DROP OUT T U1< 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)

Dropout I>>> Approx. 0.80 or 250 mA1)

Release Threshold U1< Approx. 1.05
Tolerances Overcurrent pick-up I>>> 5 % of setting value or 100 mA1)

Release U1< 1 % of setting value or 0.5 V

23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
Harmonic currents
7UM62 Manual 445

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
4.31 DC Voltage/DC Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC)
Setting Ranges/ Voltage Increase U=> 0.1 V to 8.5 V (Increments 0.1 V)

Resolutions Voltage Decrease U=< 0.1 V to 8.5 V (Increments 0.1 V)
Current Increase I=> 0.2 mA to 17.0 mA (Increments 0.1 mA)
Current Decrease I=< 0.2 A to 17.0 mA (Increments 0.1 mA)
For Measurement of Sinusoidal Voltages 0.1 Vrms to 7.0 Veff (Increments 0.1 Vrms)
For Measurement of Sinusoidal Currents 0.2 mA to 14.0 mA (Increments 0.1 mA)
Delay Time TGSS 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increment 0.01 s)

Times Pickup Times

– Increase U>, I>
in Operating State 1 ≤ 60 ms at f = fN
in Operating State 0 ≤ 200 ms
– Decrease U<, I<
in Operating State 1 ≤ 60 ms at f = fN
in Operating State 0 ≤ 200 ms
Dropout Times Same as pickup times
Dropout/Pickup – Voltage Increase U=> Approx. 0.95 or –0.05 V

Ratios – Voltage Decrease U=< Approx. 1.05 or +0.05 V
– Current Increase I=> Approx. 0.95 or –0.1 mA

– Current Decrease I=< Approx. 1.05 or +0.1 mA
Tolerances – Voltage Thresholds 1 % of setting value, or 0.1 V

– Current Thresholds 1 % of setting value, or 0.1 mA
– Delay Times T 1 % of setting values, or 10 ms
Influencing Power Supply DC Voltage (VDC) in Range

Variables for Pickup 0.8 ≤ VPS/ VPS nominal ≤ 1.15 1%
23 °F ≤ ϑamb ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F
–5 °C ≤ ϑamb ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K
Frequency in Range
0.95 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.05 1%
446 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4.32 Thermoboxes for Temperature Detection
4.32 Thermoboxes for Temperature Detection
Temperature Number of Thermoboxes Possible 1 or 2

Detectors
Number of Temperature Detectors
per Thermobox max. 6
Type of Measurement Pt 100 Ω oder Ni 100 Ω oder Ni 120 Ω
Location Setting “Oil” or “Ambient” or “Winding” or
“Bearing” or “Other”
Alarm Threshold For Each Measuring Point:

Values
Stage 1 –50 °C to 250 °C (Increments 1 °C)
–58 °F to 482 °F (Increments 1 °F)
or ∞ (No event)
Stage 2 –50 °C to 250 °C (Increments 1 °C)
–58 °F to 482 °F (Increments 1 °F)
or ∞ (No event)
7UM62 Manual 447

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
4.33 Additional Functions
Operational Operating Measured Values IL1, S1, IL2, S1, IL3,S1, IL1, S2, IL2, S2, IL3,S2
Measured Values for Currents in A or kA primary; in A secondary,
or in % of INom
- Range 10 % to 200 % INom
- Tolerance 0.2 % of measured value or 10 mA ± 1 Digit
3I0
in A or kA primary; in A and in % of INom
secondary
Operating Measured Values for IEE1, IEE2
Sensitive Ground Fault Protection
- Range 0 mA to 1600 mA
- Tolerance 0.2 % of measured value or 10 mA ± 1 Digit
Positive sequence current I1
in A or kA primary; in A secondary,
or in % of INom
Negative sequence current I2
in A or kA primary; in A secondary,
or in % of INom
Differential Protection Currents IDiffL1, IDiffL2, IDiffL3, IStabL1, IStabL2, IStabL3
in I/INO
- Range 10 % to 200 % IN
- Tolerance 3 % of measured value, or ±10 mA ±1 Digit
Operating Measured Values UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N
for Voltages (Phase-Ground) in kV primary; in V secondary
or in % of UNom
- Range 10 % to 120 % UNom
- Tolerance 0.2 % of measured value or ± 0.2 V ± 1 Digit
Operating Measured Values UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1
for Voltages (Phase-Phase) in kV primary, in V secondary
or in % of UNom
- Range 10 % to 120 % UNom
- Tolerance 0.2 % of measured value or ± 0.2 V ± 1 Digit
UE and 3U0
in kV primary, in V secondary
or in % of UNom
Positive sequence voltage U1 and
Negative sequence voltage U2
in kV primary; in V secondary or
in % of UNom
Operating Measured Values R, X
for Resistances and Reactances in Ω primary and secondary
- Tolerance 1%
Operating Measured Values S, Apparent Power in kVA (MVA or GVA)
for Power primary, and in % SNom
- Range 0 % to 120 % SNom
- Tolerance 1 % ± 0.25 % SN
with SNom = √3 · UNom · INom
448 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
P, Real power (with sign) in kW (MW or

GW) primary, and in % SNom
Q, Reactive power (with sign) in kVAr
(MVAr or GVAr) primary and in % SNom
Operating Measured Values cos ϕ (p.f.)
for Power Factor
- Range –1 to +1
- Tolerance 1 % ± 1 Digit
Operating Measured Values ϕ
for Power Angle
- Range –90° to +90°
- Tolerance 0.1°
Counter Values for Energy Wp, Wq (real and reactive energy)
in kWh (MWh or GWh) and in kVARh
(MVARh or GVARh)
- Range 81/2 digits (28 bit) for VDEW protocol
91/2 digits (31 bit) in the unit 7UM62
- Tolerance 1 % ± 1 Digit
Operating Measured Values f in Hz
for Frequency
- Range 40 Hz < f < 65 Hz
- Tolerance 10 mHz at U > 0.5 ⋅ UN
Thermal Measurement
Overload Protection Θ/ΘTrip, Θ/ΘTrip L1, Θ/ΘTrip L2, Θ/ΘTrip L3
Thermal Measurement
Stator Overload Protection ΘS/ΘL1Trip, ΘS/ΘL2Trip, ΘS/ΘL3Trip
Unbalanced Load Protection Θi2/ΘTrip
Overexcitation Protection U/f ΘU/f/ΘTrip
of Rotor (Restart Inhibit) ΘRot/ΘTrip
Coolant temperature Depends on connected temperature sensor
- Range 0 % to 400 %
- Tolerance 5 % class accuracy per IEC 60255-8
Operational Measured Values for
Rotor Earth Fault Protection (1–3 Hz)
- Range 0.5 Hz to 4.0 Hz
- Tolerance 0.1 Hz
Amplitude of Rotor Voltage Injection Ugen in V
- Range 0.0 V to 60.0 V
- Tolerance 0.5 V
Rotor Circuit Current Igen in mA
- Range 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA
- Tolerance 0.05 mA
7UM62 Manual 449

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
Charge at Polarity Reversal QC in mAs

- Range 0.00 mAs to 1.00 mAs
- Tolerance 0.01 mAs
Rotor Earth Resistance Rearth in kΩ
- Range 0.0 kΩ to 9999.9 kΩ
- Tolerance < 5 % or 0.5 kΩ
Rearth < 100 kΩ for Ce< 1µF
< 10 % or 0.5 kΩ
Rearth < 100 kΩ for Ce< 4µF
Operational Measured Values for
100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection (20 Hz)
Stator Circuit Voltage Injection USEF in V
- Range 0.0 V to 200.0 V
- Tolerance 0.2 % of measured value,
or ± 0.2 V ± 1 Digit
Earth Current of Stator Circuit ISEF in A
- Range 0.0 mA to 1600.0 mA
- Tolerance 0.2 % of measured value,
or ± 10 mA ± 1 Digit
20 Hz Phase Angle ϕSEF in °
- Range – 180.0° to + 180.0°
- Tolerance 1.0 %
Stator Earth Resistance (sec.) RSEF in Ω
- Range 0 Ω to 9999 Ω
- Tolerance 5 % or 2 Ω
Stator Earth Resistance (prim.) RSEFP in Ω
- Range 0.00 to 9999.99 Ω
- Tolerance 5 % or (5 Ω ⋅ conversion factor)
Min/Max Report Report of Measured Values With date and time

Reset – Automatic Time of day adjustable (in minutes).
Time frame and starting time
adjustable (in days, 1 to 365 days, and ∞).
Reset – Manual Using binary input
Using keypad
Using communication
Min/Max Values for Current I1 (positive sequence)
Min/Max Values for Voltage U1 (positive sequence)
Min/Max Values for 3rd Harmonics UE3H
in Displacement Voltage
Min/Max Values for Power/ Other P, Q
Min/Max Values for Frequency f
Power Meter Four-Quadrant Meter WP+; WP–; WQ+; WQ–

- Tolerance 1%
Analog Outputs Number max. 4 (depending on variant)

(optional)
Measured Values that Can be Output I1, I2, U1, |P|, |Q|, |cos ϕ|, f; ΘS/ΘS TRIP,
ΘRot/ΘRot TRIP in %
450 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Range 0 mA to 22.5 mA
Minimum Threshold (Limit of Validity:) 0.0 mA to 5.0 mA (Increments 0.1 mA)
Maximum Threshold 22.0 mA (fixed)
Configurable Reference Value 20 mA 10.0 % to 1000.0 %(Increments 0.1 %)
Measured Values Current Asymmetry Imax/Imin > I - balance factor, for

Supervision I > I - balance limit. Factor and limit are
adjustable.
Voltage Asymmetry Umax/Umin > U - balance factor, for
U > U - balance limit. Factor and limit are
adjustable.
Current Sum | iL1+ iL2+ iL3 | > I - sum threshold value,
adjustable.
Voltage Sum |UL1 + UL2 + UL3 + kU · UE | > SUM.thres. U,
with kU = Uph/Udelta
Current Phase Sequence Clockwise (L1, L2, L3)/
counter-clockwise (L1, L3, L2)
Voltage Phase Sequence Clockwise (L1, L2, L3)/
counter-clockwise (L1, L3, L2)
Limit Value Monitor Can be configured with CFC
IL < Limit value LV (ANSI 37-1)
Trip Log Recording of indication of the last 8 power system faults
Time Stamping Resolution for Event Log 1 ms

(Operational Messages)
Resolution for Trip Log (Fault Records) 1 ms
Time Deviation (Internal Clock) Maximum 0.01 %
Buffer Battery Lithium Battery, 3 V / 1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA
Self-discharging time > 5 years
Message “Fail Battery” if
battery charge is low
7UM62 Manual 451

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
Waveform Capture Optionally instantaneous values or r.m.s.

(Fault Recorder) values
– Instantaneous Values
− Recording Time Total of 5 s
Pre-event and post-event recording
and memory time adjustable
− Sampling Rate for 50 Hz 1 sample/1.25 ms (16 sam/cyc)
Sampling Rate for 60 Hz 1 sample/1.04 ms (16 sam/cyc)
− Channels uL, uL2, uL3, uE, iL1, S1, iL2,S1, iL3,S1, iEE,
iL1, S2, iL2,S2, iL3,S2, iEE2, uDC or iDC of the
three measuring transducers (TD)
– R.m.s. Values
− Recording Time Total of 80 s
Pre-event and post-event recording
and memory time adjustable
− Sampling Rate for 50 Hz 1 sample/20 ms (1 sam/cyc)
Sampling Rate for 60 Hz 1 sample/16.67 ms (1 sam/cyc)
− Channels U1, UE, I1, I2, IEE1, IEE2, P, Q, ϕ, R, X, f–fN
Statistics (Circuit Saved Number of Trips Up to 9 digits

Breaker)
Accumulated Interrupted Current Up to 4 digits (kA) per pole
Operating Hours Operating Hours Range Up to 6 digits

Counter Criterion to Count Current exceeds an adjustable current
threshold (BkrClosed I MIN)
Trip Circuit Monitor With one or two binary inputs.

(ANSI 74TC)
Commissioning Phase Rotation Check

Start-up Aids Operating Measured Values
Circuit Breaker / Switching Device Test
Creation of a Fault Record
Clock Time Synchronization IRIG-B/DCF77-signal

Binary signal
Communication
User-Defined Selection Guide for Function Modules and Task Levels

Functions (CFC)
Task Level
Function Module Description MW_ PLC1_ PLC_ SFS_
BEARB BEARB BEARB BEARB
ABSVALUE Magnitude calculation X – – –
ADD Addition X X X X
AND AND–Gate – X X X
BOOL_TO_CO Boolean to control – X X –

(conversion)
BOOL_TO_DI Boolean to Double Point – X X X

(conversion)
452 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Task Level
Function Module Description MW_ PLC1_ PLC_ SFS_
BEARB BEARB BEARB BEARB
BOOL_TO_IC Boolean to Internal Single – X X X
Point (conversion)
BUILD_DI Create Double Point – X X X

Annunciation
CMD_CHAIN Command chain – X X –
CMD_INF Command information – – – X
CONNECT Connection – X X X
D_FF D–Flipflop – X X X
D_FF_MEMO Status memory for restart – X X X

DI_TO_BOOL Double Point to Boolean – X X X
(conversion)
DIV Division X – – –
DM_DECODE Double Point decoding X X X X
DYN_OR Dynamic OR-Gate X X X X
LIVE_ZERO Live–Zero monitoring, X – – –

non-linear curve
LONG_TIMER Timer (max. 1193 h) X X X X
LOOP Signal loop – X – –
LOWER_SETPOINT Lower limit X – – –
MUL Multiplication X – – –
NAND NAND–Gate – X X X
NEG Negator – X X X
NOR NOR–Gate – X X X
OR OR–Gate – X X X
RS_FF RS–Flipflop – X X X
SQUARE_ROOT Radizierer X – – –
SR_FF SR–Flipflop – X X X
SUB Subtraction X – – –
TIMER Timer – X X –
UPPER_SETPOINT Upper limit X – – –
X_OR XOR–Gate – X X X
ZERO_POINT Zero suppression X – – –
Maximum number of TICKS in the task levels
7UM62 Manual 453

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
Run-Time Level Limits in TICKS

MW_BEARB (Measured value processing) 10000
PLC1_BEARB (Slow PLC processing) 1900
PLC_BEARB (Fast PLC processing) 200

SFS_BEARB (Interlocking) 10000
In the following table, the amount of TICKS required by the individual elements of a
CFC chart is shown. A generic module refers to a module for which the number of in-
puts can be changed. Typical examples are the logic modules AND, NAND, OR, NOR.
Processing times in TICKS required by the individual elements
Individual Element Amount of TICKS

Module, basic requirement 5
each input more than 3 inputs for generic modules 1
Connection to an input 6
Connection to an output signal 7
Additional for each configuration sheet 1
Setting Group Number of Available Setting Groups 2 (parameter group A and B)

Switchover of the
Switchover Performed Using the keypad
Function
DIGSI® 4 using the front operator interface
Parameters
with protocol via system interface
using binary input
454 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4.34 Operating Ranges of the Protection Functions
4.34 Operating Ranges of the Protection Functions

Table 4-1 Operating Ranges of the Protection Functions
Operat. cond. 0 Operational condition 1 Operat. cond. 0

Protection function f ≤ 10 Hz 11 Hz< f/Hz ≤ 40 40 Hz ≤ f/Hz ≤ 69 f ≥ 70 Hz
Definite-time overcurrent prot. (50, 51, 67) active active active active
Inverse-time overcurrent protection (51V) inactive active active inactive
Thermal overload protection (49) inactive1) active active inactive1)
Unbalanced load protection (46) inactive1) active active inactive1)
Startup overcurrent protection (51) active inactive inactive active
Differential protection (87G/87T) active active active active
Earth current differential protection (87GN/TN) inactive active active inactive
Underexcitation protection (40) inactive active active inactive
Reverse power protection (32R) inactive active active inactive
Forward power supervision (32F) inactive active active inactive
Impedance protection (21) inactive active active inactive
Out–of–step protection (78) inactive active active inactive
Undervoltage protection (27) inactive2) active active inactive2)
Overvoltage protection (59) active active active active
Overfrequency protection (81/O) inactive active active inactive3)
Underfrequency protection (81/U) inactive active active inactive
Overexcitation protection U/f> (24) inactive1) active active inactive1)
Inverse undervoltage protection (27) inactive2) active active inactive2)
Rate-of-frequency-change protection (81R) inactive active4) active inactive
Jump of voltage vector inactive active5) active5) inactive
90–% Stator earth fault prot. (59N, 64G, 67G) active active active active
Sensitive earth fault protection (51GN, 64F) inactive active active inactive
100–% S/E/F with 3rd harm. (27TN, 59TN) inactive active active inactive
100–% stator earth fault protection(20 Hz) active active active active
(64G)
Rotor earth fault protection (64R) active active active active
Rotor earth fault protection (64R) active active active active
Motor starting time supervision (48) inactive active active inactive
Restart inibit for motors (66, 49Rotor) inactive active active inactive
Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) inactive active active inactive
Inadvertent energization (50/27) active active active active
DC voltage protection (59NDC, 51NDC) active active active active
Threshold Monitoring inactive active active inactive
External trip coupling active active active active
Temperature detection by thermoboxes active active active active
7UM62 Manual 455

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
1) Thermical replica registers cooling-down

2) Pick -up – when already present – is maintained
3) Pick -up – when already present – is maintained, if the measured voltage is not too small
4) 25 Hz < f/Hz ≤ 40 Hz
5) Function is only active at rated frequency ± 3 Hz
Operational The frequency follow-up circuit can operate only , when at least one a.c. measured
Condition 1 quantity is present at one of the the analog inputs (uL1, uL2, uL3, iL1, iL2, iL3, currents
on side 2), with an amplitude of at least 5 % of rated value (operational condition 1).
Operational If no suitable a.c. measured values are present, or if the frequency is below 11 Hz or
Condition 0 above 70 Hz, the relay cannot operate (operational condition 0).
456 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4.35 Dimensions
4.35 Dimensions
Housing for Panel

Flush Mounting or
Cubicle Installation
(Size 1/2)
29.5 172 34 29.5 172 29 30

225
Mounting plate Mounting plate 220
F
R K
266
244
266
244
D C
2 2
Q J
B A
34
Side view (with screwed terminals) Side view (with clamp terminals) Rear view
221 +2
5 or M4
255.8 ± 0.3
245 + 1
Dimensions in mm
6
5.4
13.2 180 ± 0.5

7.3 206.5 ± 0.3
Panel cut-out
Figure 4-14 Dimensions 7UM621 for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation (size 1/2)
7UM62 Manual 457

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
Housing for Panel

Flush Mounting or
Cubicle Installation
(Size 1/1)
29.5 172 34 29.5 172 29 30

Mounting plate Monting plate
266
244
266
244
2 2
34
Side view (with screwed terminals) Side view (with clamp terminals)
450
445 446 +2
6 5 or M4
F
R P K
255,8 ± 0,3
245 + 1
5 or M4 6 6 5 or M4
D C
Q N J
B A 5 or M4 6
5,4
7,3
13,2
Rear view
216,1 ± 0,3 13,2
425,5 ± 0,3 13,2
Panel cut-out
(view from the device front)
Dimensions in mm
Figure 4-15 Dimensions 7UM622 for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation (size 1/1)
458 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4.35 Dimensions
Panel Mounting
(Housing size 1/2)
240
219 10,5 260
51 75
29,5
76 100
225
266
280
320
344
1 25
9 26 50
71
Front view Side view
Dimensions in mm
Figure 4-16 Dimensions 7UM621 for Panel Mounting (size 1/2)
Panel Mounting
(Housing size 1/1)
465
444 10,5 260
101 150
29,5
151 200
450
280
320
344
266
1 50
9 51 100
71
Front view Side view
Dimensions in mm
Figure 4-17 Dimensions 7UM622 for Panel Mounting (size 1/1)
7UM62 Manual 459

C53000-G1176-C149-3
4 Technical Data
460 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Appendix A
This appendix is primarily a reference for the experienced user. This Chapter provides
ordering information for the models of 7UM62. General diagrams indicating the termi-
nal connections of the 7UM62 models are included. Connection examples show the
proper connections of the device to primary equipment in typical power system con-
figurations. Tables with all settings and all information available in a 7UM62 equipped
with all options are provided.
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories 462

A.2 General Diagrams (IEC) 482
A.3 General Diagrams (ANSI) 486
A.4 Connection Examples 488
A.5 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with Primary Load Resistor 499
A.6 Definition of the Active Power Measurement 502
A.7 Current Transformer Requirements 504
A.8 Overview of the Masking Features of the User Defined Information 506
A.9 Default Settings 511
A.10 Interoperability List 517
A.11 Functions Overview 519
A.12 Settings 523
A.13 List of Information 549
A.14 List of Measured Values 578
A.15 Protocol-Dependent Functions 584
7UM62 Manual 461

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Multifunctional Machine Protection 7UM62

_ _ 0
Housing, Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs

Housing 1/2 19”, 7 BI, 12 BO, 1 Live Status Contact 1
Housing 1/1 19”, 15 BI, 20 BO, 1 Live Status Contact 2
Nominal Current
IN = 1 A, Iee (sensitive) 1
IN = 5 A, Iee (sensitive) 5
Auxiliary Voltage (Power Supply, Pick-up Threshold of Binary Inputs)

DC 24 to 48 V, pick-up binary inputs 17 V 1) 2
DC 60 to 125 V, pick-up binary inputs 17 V 1) 4
DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 V, pick-up binary inputs 73 V 1) 5
Construction
Surface mounting housing for panel, 2 tier terminals top/bottom B
Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connector) D
Flush mounting housing for panel/cubicle, screw-type terminals (ring lugs) E
Region-Specific Default/Language Settings and Function Versions

Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, German language (may be changed) A
Region world, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, English language (may be changed) B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, US-English language (may be changed) C
SCADA Interface or Analog Output (Port B)

no SCADA interface 0
IEC protocol, electrical RS232 1
IEC protocol, electrical RS485 2
IEC protocol, optical 820 nm, ST-plug 3
Analog outputs 2 x 0 to 20 mA 7
For more interface options see “Additional Information L” 9
Additional Information L (Port B) + L 0

Profibus DP Slave, RS485 A
Profibus DP Slave, optical, double ring B
Modbus RS485 D
Modbus , optical E
DNP3.0, RS485 G
DNP3.0, optical, 820 nm, ST-plug H
Service Interface (DIGSI 4/Modem) (Port C)

DIGSI 4, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4, electrical RS485 2
with analog output port (Port D) see “Additional information M” 9
Additional information M + M
(Port C)
DIGSI 4, Modem RS232 1
DIGSI 4, Modem/Thermobox, RS485 2
(Port D)
Thermobox, optical 820 nm, ST-connector A
Thermobox, electrical RS485 F
Analog outputs 2 x 0 to 20 mA K
continued next page 463

1) the BI tresholds per binary input can be adjusted in 2 stages by means of jumpers.
462 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
_ _ 0
Multifunctional Machine Protection 7UM62
Measuring Functionalities
without extended measuring functionality 0
Min/Max values, energy counter 3
Protective Elements
Basic Generator Elements, included in all versions A
Overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal in (I> +U<) ANSI 51
Overcurrent protection, directional (I>>, dir.) ANSI 50/51/67
Inverse time O/C protection (t=f(I) +U<) ANSI 51V
Thermal overload protection (I2t) ANSI 49
Negative sequence protection (I2>, t=f(I2)) ANSI 46
Differential protection (∆I) ANSI 87G/87M/87T
Loss-of-field protection (1/xd) ANSI 40
Reverse power protection (–P) ANSI 32R
Forward power supervision (P>, P<) ANSI 32F
Undervoltage protection (U<, t=f(U)) ANSI 27
Overvoltage protection (U>) ANSI 59
Frequency protection (f<, f>) ANSI 81
Overexitation (Volt/Hertz) protection (U/f) ANSI 24
Stator earth fault protection, non–directional, directional ((U0>, 3I0>, ∠U0, 3I0) ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G
Sensitive earth fault protection (also as rotor earth fault protection) (IEE>) ANSI 50/51GN, 64R
Rotor earth fault protection (fn, R measurement) (RE<) ANSI 64R (fN)
Motor starting time supervision (Ian2t) ANSI 48
Breaker failure protection (Imin>) ANSI 50BF
Phase sequence supervision (L1; L2; L3) ANSI 47
4 external trip commands (external trip) ---
Trip circuit monitoring (TC mon.) ANSI 74TC
Fuse failure monitor ((U2/U1; I1/I2) ANSI 60FL
Threshold supervision
Standard Generator Protection, consisting of: B

Basic Generator elements, + comprising:
Impedance protection (Z<) ANSI 21
100 % stator earth fault protection with 3rd harmonic (U0 (3. Harm.)) ANSI 59TN, 27TN3.H
Inadvertent energization protection (I>, U<) ANSI 50/27
Full Generator Protection, consisting of: C

Standard Generator protection, + comprising:
Out-of-step protection (∆Z/∆t) ANSI 78 )
DC voltage/DC current protection (Udc>) ANSI 59N (DC)/51N (DC)
Startup overcurrent protection (I>) ANSI 51
Earth current differential protection ANSI 87GN/TN
Asynchronous Motor Protection,consisting of: F

Basic Generator Elements without underexcitation and overexitation
protection but with motor restart inhibit (I2t) ANSI 66, 49 Rotor
Transformer Protection,consisting of: H

Basic Generator Protection, without underexcitation protection, unbalanced load protection and motor starting time supervision
Functionality/Additional Functions
without A
Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection ANSI 64R (1 to 3 Hz) B

(Square-wave voltage injection 1–3 Hz, Re<80 kΩ)
and 100 % stator earth fault protection ANSI 64G (100 %)
(Principle of 20 Hz voltage injection)
Earth Current Differential Protection ANSI 87GN/TN C
Network Decoupling (df/dt and vector jump) ANSI 81R E
All additional functions G
Ordering example: 7UM6211–4EA99–0BA0 + L0B + M1K

here: Pos. 11 = 9 stands for L0B, i.e. version with Profibus DP system port on the rear optical, double ring
here: Pos. 12 = 9 stands for M1K, i.e. version with rear service port DIGSI 4, modem RS232 and
analog outputs 2 x (0 to 20 mA)
7UM62 Manual 463

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A.1.1 Accessories
Interface Modules Exchange Modules for Interfaces
Name Order No.

RS232 C53207-A351-D641-1
RS485 C53207-A351-D642-1
FO 820 nm C53207-A351-D643-1
Profibus DP RS485 C53207-A351-D611-1
Profibus DP double ring C53207-A351-D613-1
Modbus RS485 C53207-A351-D621-1
Modbus 820 nm C53207-A351-D623-1
DNP3.0 RS485 C53207-A351-D631-1
DNP3.0 820 nm C53207-A351-D633-1
Analog output AN20 C53207-A351-D661-1
Terminal Block
Covering Caps
Covering cap for terminal block type Order No.
18 terminal voltage, 12 terminal current block C73334-A1-C31-1
12 terminal voltage, 8 terminal current block C73334-A1-C32-1
Short Circuit Links
Short circuit links for purpose/terminal type Order No.

Voltage connections, 18 terminal, or 12 terminal C73334-A1-C34-1
Current connections,12 terminal, or 8 terminal C73334-A1-C33-1
Pin Connectors
Connector Type Order No.

2 pin C73334-A1-C35-1
3 pin C73334-A1-C36-1
Mounting Rail for

19"-Racks
Name Order No.
Angle Strip (Mounting Rail) C73165-A63-C200-3
Battery
Lithium-Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA Order No

VARTA 6127 101 501
464 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Coupling Unit The sensitive earth fault protection can be used as rotor earth fault protection. The
system frequency bias voltage for the rotor circuit is generated and coupled to the rotor
circuit via a coupling unit.
Coupling unit for rotor earth fault protection (R, fn) Order No.
Coupling unit for panel flush mounting 7XR6100-0CA00
Series Resistor
Series resistor for rotor earth fault protection (R, fn) Order No.
Series resistor (2 x 105 Ω) 3PP1336-0DZ-013002
Voltage Divider
Voltage divider Order No.

Voltage divider 5:1; 5:2 3PP1336-1CZ-013001
Voltage divider 10:1; 20:1 3PP1326-0BZ-012009
Controller Unit
Controller unit Order No.

In housing for panel surface mounting 7XT7100-0BA00
– with terminals at both sides
In housing for panel flush mounting 7XT7100-0EA00
– with terminals at the rear side
Resistor Unit
Resistor unit Order No.

In housing for panel surface mounting 7XR6004-0BA00
In housing for panel flush mounting 7XR6004-0CA00
20-Hz-Generator
20-Hz-Generator Order No.

20-Hz-Band-Pass
Filter
20-Hz-Band-Pass Filter Order No.
7UM62 Manual 465

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
Interface Cable An interface cable is necessary for communication between the SIPROTEC device
and a PC. Requirements for the computer are Windows 95 or Windows NT4 and the
operating software DIGSI® 4.
Interface cable between PC or SIPROTEC device Order No.

Cable with 9-pin male/female connections 7XV5100-4
Operating Software Software for setting and operating SIPROTEC® 4 devices

DIGSI® 4
Operating Software DIGSI® 4 Order No.
DIGSI® 4, basic version with license for 10 computers 7XS5400-0AA00

DIGSI® 4, complete version with all option packages 7XS5402-0AA0
Graphical Analysis Software for graphical visualization, analysis, and evaluation of fault data. Option
Program SIGRA package of the complete version of DIGSI® 4
Graphical analysis program SIGRA® Order No.

Full version with license for 10 computers 7XS5410-0AA0
Graphic Tools Graphical Software to aid in the setting of characteristic curves and provide zone dia-
grams for overcurrent and distance protective devices. Option package of the com-
plete version of DIGSI® 4.
Graphic Tools 4 Order No.

DIGSI REMOTE 4 Software for remotely operating protective devices via a modem (and possibly a star
connector) using DIGSI® 4. (Option package of the complete version of DIGSI® 4.
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Order No.

SIMATIC CFC 4 Graphical software for setting interlocking (latching) control conditions and creating
additional function is SIPROTEC 4 devices. Option package for the complete version
of DIGSI® 4.
SIMATIC CFC 4 Order No.

Full version with license for 10 machines 7XS5450-0AA0
466 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.1.1.1 Schematic Diagram of the Accessories
4A1
4B1
≈ 4 µF 3A1
3B1
2B1
≈ 33 Ω/50 W
2A1
1B2
≈ 0.75 H
1A4 1B4
230 V
1A3
1B3 ≈ 60 V
≈ 36 V–49 V
100 to 125 V 1A1 0V 0V 1B1
Figure A-1 Schematic Diagram of Coupling Unit 7XR6100-0∗A00
105 Ω 105 Ω
1 2 3 4
Figure A-2 Schematic Diagram of Series Resistor 3PP1336-0DZ-013002
11.6 Ω 500 Ω 500 Ω 250 Ω
1 2 3 4 5 6
500 V 100 V 0V
Figure A-3 Schematic Diagram of Voltage Divider 5:1; 5:2; 3PP1336-1CZ-013001
7UM62 Manual 467

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
500 Ω 500 Ω 9000 Ω
1 2 3 4
Figure A-4 Schematic Diagram of Voltage Divider 10:1; 20:1; 3PP1326-0BZ-012009
Surface mounting housing
Flush mounting housing
27 27
UOutput 7XR60
25
Auxiliary voltage 25
7 230 VAC
L 7
9 9
230 VAC ~X
15 15
= UMeas
17
N 100...115 VAC 17 7UM
11 120, 125 VAC 19 19
11 UControl
21
21
Factory Set: 100 - 125 VAC
Figure A-5 General Diagram of Controller Unit 7XT7100-0∗A00
3,33 kΩ 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B
10
20 kΩ 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18 20 kΩ
2 1
4 20 kΩ 3
6 5
A
8 7
10 9
20 kΩ 11
12
Figure A-6 General Diagram of Resistor Unit 7XR6004-0∗A00
468 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Surface mounting case / Flush mounting case
1A1 4A1
(Ban pass)
U L1 ( L1, UH+ )
s)
to 77XT34
XT43
d pas
1A2
(Band
U L2 (N, U H- )
to
1A3 20 Hz 4A3
U L3
L+ 2A1 3A2
3A1 L+
EXTERNAL BLOCK BI
2A3 3A3
DEVICE OPERATIVE
1A4
Figure A-7 General Diagram of 20-Hz-Generator 7XT3300-0∗A00
7UM62 Manual 469

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
Surface mounting case / Flush mounting case
1B3
10 mF
1B4 0R68, 4 x 50 W
600 mH
INPUT BANDPASS 47 mF
1B1
OUTPUT BANDPASS
47 mF
330R, 50 W
1A1
1A2
330R, 50 W
VOLTAGE DIVIDER
330R, 50 W
1A3
1A4
330R, 50 W 330R, 50 W
Figure A-8 General Diagram of 20-Hz-Band-Pass Filter 7XT3400-0∗A00
470 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
1.1.1.2 Dimensional Drawing of the Accessories
29.5 172 30 150

145
Mounting plate
266
244
B A
4 1)
3
2
1 2)
Rear view
Side view Connector modules
146 + 2
1) Current connectors:
Screwed terminal for max. 4 mm2;
Twin spring crimp connector in parallel for
max. 2.5 mm;
5 or M4 max. torque value 1.2 Nm.
± 0.3
2) Further connectors:
245 + 1
255.8
Screwed terminal for max. 1.5 mm2;

Twin spring crimp connector in parallel for
max. 1.5 mm;
max. torque value 0.8 Nm.
6
5.4
13.2 105 ± 0.5

7.3 131.5 ± 0.3
Panel cut-out Dimensions in mm
Figure A-9 Dimensions of Coupling Unit 7XR6100-0CA0 for Panel Flush Mounting
7UM62 Manual 471

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
150
Mounting plate 145
209.5 30
312.8
B A
266
244
4 1
)
3
2
1 2)
Connector modules
Side view Rear view
5 or M4
300 ± 0.3
6.4
15 120 ± 0.3
Dimensions on the
mounting plate
Dimensions in mm
Figure A-10 Dimensions of Coupling Unit 7XR6100-0BA0 for Panel Surface Mounting
472 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Drip–proof roof
Drip-proof roof
Space required for

Space required
removing for
the cover
removing the cover
Cover
Cover
Table A-1 3PP1 Degree of Protection IP 20 (with Drip–Proof Roof IP 23); Dimensions in mm
Type a b c d e f g h i k l m z
3PP1 32 267 187 3 x 16 7 160 230 10 110 50 30 10 196 33
3PP1 33 267 187 3 x 16 7 160 230 10 146 50 30 10 196 33
Figure A-11 Dimensions 3PP13:

3PP132 for voltage divider 3PP1326-0BZ-012009 (20 : 10 : 1)
3PP133 for voltage divider 3PP1336-1CZ-013001 (5 : 2 : 1)
for series resistor 3PP1336-0DZ-013002
7UM62 Manual 473

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
recommended
space to the next
unit 180 77 260
9 29.5
31
31 30
300
280
266
8
7
1
2
100 55
A
Current connections (terminals 1 to 6):
View A not used in 7XT71
Voltage connections (terminals 7 to 31):
isolated ring cable lug: for bolts 4 mm diameter
max. major diameter 9 mm
type: e.g. PIDG of Messrs.
Connections Tyco Electronics AMP
for copper wires with cross*section
for earthing 1.0 mm2 to 2.6 mm2
AWG 17 to 13
solid bare copper wire directly: cross*section 0.5 mm2 to 2.6 mm2
20
AWG 20 to 13
flexible wire requires end sleeves
max. torque value 1.8 Nm or 16 in-lbs
Dimensions in mm
Figure A-12 Dimensions of Controller Unit 7XT7100-0BA00 for Panel Surface Mounting
474 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
29.5 172 37 75
70
Mounting
plate
30 31
29
27
2266
2244
66
44
11
8 9
7
Connec -
tions for
earthing
Connections terminals
71 +2
Current connections (terminals 1 to 6):

not used in 7XT71
Voltage connections (terminals 7 to 31):
isolated ring cable lug: for bolts 4 mm diameter
max. major diameter 9 mm
type: e.g. PIDG of Messrs.
Tyco Electronics AMP 5 or
for copper wires with cross*section
1.0 mm2 to 2.6 mm2 M4
AWG 17 to 13
Snap-in terminal: for copper wires with cross*section
0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
0,3
AWG 20 to 13
245 +1
max. torque value 1.8 Nm or 16 in-lbs +

255.8
66
55.4
.4
Dimensions in
mm
7.3 56.5 +0.3

-
Panel cut-
out
Figure A-13 Dimensions of Controller Unit 7XT7100-0EA00 for Panel Flash Mounting
7UM62 Manual 475

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
29.5 172 34
Mounting plate
266
244
Side view (with screwed terminals)
225
220
221 + 2
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
10
7
B
5 or M4
9
12
255.8 ± 0.3
11
14
245 + 1
13
16
15
18
17
2
1
4
3
6
8
5
A
7
10
12
9 6
11
5.4
13.2 180 ± 0.5

Rear view
7.3 206.5 ± 0.3
Panel cut-out Dimensions in mm
Figure A-14 Dimensions of Resistor Unit 7XR6004-0CA00 for Panel Flash Mounting
476 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Mounting plate 209.5 34
312.8
266
244
Side view (with screwed terminals)
225
220
4.5
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
300 ± 0.3
10
9
B
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
2
1
4
3
6
8
5
A
7
10
9
12
11
6.4
12.5 100 ± 0.3

Rear view
200 ± 0.3
Dimensions in mm Fixing points of the

mounting plate
Figure A-15 Dimensions of Resistor Unit 7XR6004-0BA00 for Panel Surface Mounting
7UM62 Manual 477

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
29.5 172 30 225

220
Mounting plate
B A
Connector modules
221 +2
Connectors:
Screwed terminal for max. 1.5 mm2.
Twin spring crimp connector in paral
lel for max. 1.5 mm2.
5 or M4
Panel cut-out
Dimensions in mm
180 +0.5
13.2 -
7.3 206.5 +0.3
-
Figure A-16 Dimensions of 20-Hz-Generator 7XT3300-0CA00 for Panel Flash Mounting
478 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
225
209,5 30 220
312
266
244
B A
Connector modules
Connectors:
Screwed terminal for max. 1.5 mm2.
.3 Twin spring crimp connector in paral
lel for max. 1.5 mm2.
ø4.5 oder M5
300 +- 0.3
Dimensions in mm
6.4
12.5 100 +- 0,3

200 +- 0.3
.3
Figure A-17 Dimensions of 20-Hz-Generator 7XT3300-0BA00 for Panel Surface Mounting
7UM62 Manual 479

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
225 29.5 172 30
220 Mounting plate
Set square *)
244
266
B A
221 +2
32 Dimensions in mm
31.8 +- 0.3
Ø5.5(4x) (180 +- 0.5 ) *) For panel flush mounting, 2 set

squares C73165- A63-C201-1 are
necessary since the mounting rails
of the device are not sufficient for
the high weight of the device.
M4(4x)
(255.8)
Fix the set squares to the panel, us -

310.6 +1
ing 8 standard screws size M6, ac -

(245)
234.9 -+ 0.3
cording to the drawing.

Mount the device to the set squares
using standard sqrews size M4.
If the device is mounted in switch-
gear cabinets, the set squares can -
be omitted provided the cabinet po -
( 206.5 +- 0.3 ) sesses adequate solid mounting
rails. If not, use 2 set squares
C73165-A63-C200-3 (size 28
31.8 +- 0.3 SEP = 19 inches).
6 -+ 0.3
239.5 +- 0.3
Hole diameter 7 mm (8 ×)
for screws size M6
Figure A-18 Dimensions of 20-Hz-Band-Pass Filter 7XT3400-0CA00 for Panel Flash Mounting
480 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
225 172 30
220
Side view
31.8 +- 0.3
29,5
244
234.9 -+ 0.3
B A
31.8 +- 0.3
.3
239.5 +- 0,3 Set square *)
32
Distance piece *)
Dimensions in mm
*) 2 set squares C73165- A63-C201-1 and 4

distance pieces C73165-A63-C203-1 are
necessary for panel surface mounting.
Fix the set squares to the mounting rails of the
device, using 8 standard screws size M4.
Fit threaded holes, sleeves, or bolts size M6
into the panel, according to the above draw -
ing.
Fasten the device with the fixed set sqares to
the panel and ensure correct distance by
means of the distance pieces.
When using fixed bolts: Fit the distance pieces
onto the bolts and fasten the device by means
of female screws.
Top view
Figure A-19 Dimensions of 20-Hz-Band-Pass Filter 7XT3400-0BA00 for Panel Surface Mounting
7UM62 Manual 481

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A.2 General Diagrams (IEC)
A.2.1 Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation
7UM621∗–∗D/E
Q1 BO1 R1
IL1S2
Q2 BO2 R2
Q3 BO3 R3
IL2S2
Q4 BO4 R4
Q5 BO5 R6
IL3S2
Q6 R5
Q7
IEE2 1 2
R8
Q8 BO6
3 2
R7
J1
IL1S1 R9
J2 BO7
R10
J3
IL2S1 R11
J4 BO8
R12
J5
IL3S1 K1
J6 BO9
K2
J7
IEE1 K3
J8 BO10
K4
R15 UL1 1 2
BO11 K6
R17 UL2 3 2
R18 UL3 K5
R16 1 2
BO12 K8
R13 UE 3 2
R14 K7
F5 BI1 Life status 1 2

F4
F6 BI2 contact 3 2
F7 BI3 F3
F8 BI4 +
Power- F1
F9 BI5 (~)
F10 supply - F2
K9 BI6
refer to Table 3-20 to 3-22 in Subsec-
For the pin assignment of Interfaces,
K10
K11 Analog output
BI7 D
or Thermobox
K12
(+) K13 TD1 Service Port

or Thermobox C
(–) K14
(+) K15 TD2
(–) K16 System interface
or analog output B
(+) K17 TD3
(–) K18
Time Synchronization A
tion 3.2.1
Front oper. interface
Earthing at Side
Wall of Housing
Interference suppression
capacitors at the
relay contacts,
Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Figure A-20 General Diagram 7UM621∗−∗D/E (Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation)
482 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
7UM622∗–∗D/E
Q1 BO1 R1
IL1S2
Q2 BO2 R2
Q3 BO3 R3
IL2S2
Q4 BO4 R4
Q5 BO5 R6
IL3S2
Q6 R5
Q7
IEE2 BO6
1 2
R8
Q8
3 2
R7
J1
IL1S1 R9
J2 BO7
J3 R10
IL2S1 R11
J4 BO8
J5 R12
IL3S1 K1
J6 BO9
J7 K2
IEE1 K3
J8 BO10
K4
R15 UL1 1 2
BO11 K6
R17 UL2 3 2
R18 UL3 K5
R16 1 2
R13 BO12 K8
UE 3 2
R14 K7
1 2
BO13 P4
F5 BI1 3 2
F6 BI2 P3
F7 BI3 BO14 P6
F8 BI4 BO15 P7
F9 BI5 BO16 P8
F10 P5
K9 BI6 P9
BO17
K10 P10
K11 BI7 P11
BO18
K12 P12
P17 BI8 P13
P18 BO19
P14
N1 BI9 P15
N2 BO20
P16
N3 BI10
N4 BI11
N6 BI12 Life status 1 2
F4
N5 contact 3 2
N7 F3
BI13
N8 +
Power (~)
F1
N9 BI14 supply - F2
N10
N11 BI15
Analog output
3-20 to 3-22 in subsection
N12 D
For the pin assignment of
or Thermobox
the interfaces see tables
(+) K13 TD1

(–) K14 Service port
or Thermobox C
(+) K15 TD2
(–) K16
(+) K17 TD3 System interface
or analog output B
(–) K18
3.2.1
Time synchronization A

Earthing at rear capacitors at the
wall of housing relay contacts
Ceramic, 4.7 nF250 V
Figure A-21 General Diagram 7UM622∗−∗D/E (Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation)
7UM62 Manual 483

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A.2.2 Housing for Panel Surface Mounting
7UM621∗–∗B
25 BO1 74
IL1S2
50 BO2 99
24 BO3 73
IL2S2
49 BO4 98
23 BO5 72
IL3S2
48 97
22
IEE2 1 2
71
47 BO6
3 2
96
14
IL1S1 95
39 BO7
70
13
IL2S1 94
38 BO8
69
12
IL3S1 92
37 BO9
67
11
IEE1 91
36 BO10
66
20 UL1 1 2
BO11 65
19 UL2 3 2
44 UL3 90
45 1 2
BO12 64
21 UE 3 2
46 89
58 BI1 Life status 1 2

52
57 BI2 contact 3 2
56 BI3 51
55 BI4 +
Power 15
54 BI5 (~)
83 supply - 16
88 BI6 Earthing
63 terminal (26)
87 BI7
62 2 IN SYNC
27 IN 12 V
(+) 86 TD1 3 COM SYNC
(–) 61 Time synchronization 28 COMMON
(+) 85 TD2 4 IN 5 V
(–) 60 29 IN 24 V
(+) 84 TD3 1 Screen
(–) 59
Analog output
For the pin assignment
tables 3-20 and 3-21 in
D
of the interfaces see
or Thermobox
subsection 3.2.1
Service port
or Thermobox C
System interface *)
or analog output B
Front oper. interface *) optical only IEC
Earthing at side
wall of housing
capacitors at the
relay contacts,
Figure A-22 General Diagram 7UM621∗–∗B (Panel Surface Mounting)
484 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
7UM622∗–∗B
50 BO1 149
IL1S2
100 BO2 199
49 BO3 148
IL2S2
99 BO4 198
48 BO5 147
IL3S2
98 197
47
IEE2 BO6
1 2
146
97
3 2
196
25
IL1S1 195
75 BO7
24 145
IL2S1 194
74 BO8
23 144
IL3S1 176
73 BO9
22 126
IEE1 175
72 BO10
125
45 UL1 1 2
BO11 124
44 UL2 3 2
94 UL3 174
95 1 2
46 BO12 123
UE 3 2
96 173
1 2
BO13 140
108 BI1 3 2
107 BI2 190
106 BI3 BO14 139
105 BI4 BO15 188
104 BI5 BO16 138
158 189
172 BI6 187
BO17
122 137
171 BI7 186
BO18
121 136
90 BI8 185
40 BO19
135
89 BI9 184
39 BO20
134
86 BI10 Life status 1 2
36 BI11 102
contact 3 2
35 BI12 101
85 + 37
Power (~)
84 BI13 supply - 38
34 Earthing
83 BI14 terminal (51)
33
82 BI15 2 IN SYNC
32 52 IN 12 V
3 COM SYNC
(+) 170 TD1 Time synchronization 53 COMMON
(–) 120
4 IN 5 V
(+) 169 TD2 54 IN 24 V
(–) 119
1 Screen
(+) 168 TD3
(–) 118 Analog output
tables 3-20 and 3-21
of the interfaces see
D
For the assignment
in subsection 3.2.1
or Thermobox
Service interface
or Thermobox C
System interface *) *) optical

or analog output B only IEC

capacitors at the
Earthing at side
relay contacts,
wall of housing
Figure A-23 General Diagram 7UM622∗–∗B (Panel Surface Mounting)
7UM62 Manual 485

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A.3 General Diagrams (ANSI)
7UM621∗–
Surface-mounting housing
Flush-mounting housing
25 Q1 IA,S2
50 Q2 7UM621
R 1 R1 74
24 Q3 IB,S2
R 2 R2 99
49 Q4
R 3 R3 73
23 Q5 IC,S2
R 4 R4 98
48 Q6
R 5 R6 72
22 Q7 IG,sens. (EE2)
R5 97
47 Q8
R 6 R7 96
20 R 15 VA R8 71
19 R 17 VB R 7 R9 95
44 R 18 VC R 10 70
45 R 16 R 8 R 11 94
21 R 13 VN(E) R 12 69
46 R 14
K1 92
R9
14 J1 IA,S1 K2 67
39 J2 R 10 K3 91
13 J3 IB,S1 K4 66
38 J4 R 11 K5 90
12 J5 IC,S1 K6 65
37 J6 R 12 K7 89
11 J7 IG,sens.(EE1)
K8 64
36 J8 Live status
+ contact
86 K 13 TD1 (NC or NO F3 51
61 K 14 (Start-up) F4 52
with Jumper)
+
85 K 15 TD 2
60 K 16 (TEMP) Power = + F1 15
(~) -
+ supply =
F2 16
84 K 17 TD 3
59 K 18 (DC-EXC)
58 F5 BI 1
57 F6 BI 2
56 F7 BI 3 Port
Serial Thermal/ D
55 F8 BI 4 or 2 x 20 mA
54 F9 BI 5 Service C
83 F 10 interface
88 K9 BI 6 IEC 60870-5-103 B
63 K 10 PROFIBUS DP (optical
only IEC)
MODBUS RTU
87 K 11 BI 7 2
A 27
62 K 12 IRIG B/DCF77
3
(see manual)
28
Front port Earth connection at 4
housing back plate
29
1
Figure A-24 General diagram 7UM621∗−
486 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.3 General Diagrams (ANSI)
7UM622∗–
Surface-mounting housing
Flush-mounting housing
50 Q1 IA,S2
100 Q2 7UM622 R 1 R1 149
49 Q3 IB,S2
R 2 R2 199
99 Q4
R 3 R3 148
48 Q5 IC,S2
R 4 R4 198
98 Q6
R 5 R6 147
47 Q7 IG,sens. (EE2)
R5 197
97 Q8
R 6 R7 196
45 R 15 VA R8 146
44 R 17 VB R 7 R9 195
94 R 18 VC R 10 145
95 R 16 R 8 R 11 194
46 R 13 VN(E) R 12 144
96 R 14
R 9 K1 176
25 J1 IA,S1 K2 126
75 J2 R10 K3 175
24 J3 IB,S1 K4 125
74 J4 R11 K5 174
23 J5 IC,S1 K6 124
73 J6 R12 K7 173
22 J7 IG,sens.(EE1)
K8 123
72 J8
R 13 P3 190
170 K 13 TD 1 P4 140
120 K 14 (Start-up)
R 14 P6 139
169 K 15 TD 2 P7 188
(Temp) R 15
119 K 16 P8 138
R 16
168 K 17 TD 3 P5 189
118 K 18 (EXC.) R 17 P9 187
P10 137
108 F5 BI 1 R 18 P 11 186
P12 136
107 F6 BI 2
R 19 P13 185
BI 3 P 14 135
106 F7
R 20 P 15 184
105 F8 BI 4 P 16 134
104 F9 BI 5 Live status

158 F 10 contact
(NC or NO F3 101
172 K9 BI 6 with jumper) F4 102
122 K 10
171 K 11 BI 7 Power = + F1 37
(~) -
121 K 12 supply =
F2 38
90 P 17 BI 8
40 P 18
89 N1 BI 9
39 N2
86 N3 BI 10
Port
36 N4 BI 11 D
Serial Thermal/
or 2 x 20 mA
35 N6 BI 12
85 N5 Service C
84 N7 BI 13 interface
34 N8
IEC 60870-5-103 B
83 N9 BI 14 PROFIBUS DP (optical
33 N10 MODBUS RTU only IEC)
82 N11 BI 15 2
A
32 N12 IRIG B/DCF77 52
(see manual)
3
53
Front port Earth connection at 4
housing back plate 54
1
Figure A-25 General diagram 7UM622∗−
7UM62 Manual 487

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A.4 Connection Examples
A (L1)
B (L2)
C (L3)
ANSI
52
RL
7UM62
J1 IA(L1)S1
J2
J3 IB(L2)S1
J4
J5 IC(L3)S1
J6
R15 VA(L1)
R17
VB(L2)
R18
R16
VC(L3)
e R13 VE
n R14
k Q8
IEE2
l Q7
K17 +
Excitation voltage TD3
injection K18
J7
Rotor earth current IEE1
injection J8
Q1 IA(L1)S2
Q2
Q3 IB(L2)S2
Q4
Q5 IC(L3)S2
Q6
Measuring transducer: K13 +

TD1
K14
-Temperature
injection
K15 +
- or DC voltage TD2
injection K16
Figure A-26 Bus–Bar Connection

Current and voltage connections to three transformers, core balance neutral current transformers and
broken delta voltage transformers (e–n).
488 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A (L1)
B (L2)
C (L3)
ANSI
52 7UM62
J1 IA(L1)S1
J2
J3 IB(L2)S1
J4
J5 IC(L3)S1
J6
R15 VA(L1)
R17
VB(L2)
R18
R16 VC(L3)
e R13
VE
n R14
K17 +
Excitation voltage TD3
injection K18
Q7
IEE2
Q8
do not earth
here
Q1 IA(L1)S2
Q2
Q3 IB(L2)S2
Q4
Q5 IC(L3)S2
Q6
TD1
- Temperature K14
injection
RE low resistance
- or DC voltage K15 +
TD2
if necessary injection
(for protection of resistor K16
J7
IEE1
J8
Figure A-27 Busbar System with Low-Ohmic, Switchable Starpoint Resistors

Connection on each side to three current transformers and three voltage transformers (phase-to-ground volt-
ages) –earth fault detection as differential current measuring by two CT sets; detection of displacement volt-
age at broken delta winding (e–n).
7UM62 Manual 489

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A (L1)
B (L2)
C (L3)
ANSI
52
Yd5
Earthing transformer
with measuring winding 7UM62
R15 VA(L1)
R17
VB(L2)
R18
R16 VC(L3)
e
RL
R13 VE
n R14
J7 IEE1
For 100 % stator
J8
earth fault protection
J1 IA(L1)S1
J2
J3 IB(L2)S1
J4
J5 IC(L3)S1
J6
Divider
3PP1326
K17 +
TD3
Excitation VExc.
K18
Rotor earth-current Q7 IEE2

injection Q8
Q1 IA(L1)S2
Q2
Q3 IB(L2)S2
Q4
Q5 IC(L3)S2
Q6

TD1
- Temperature K14
injection
- or DC voltage K15 +
TD2
injection
K16
Figure A-28 Block Connection with Isolated Starpoint

Connection on each side to three current transformers and three voltage transformers (phase-to-earth volt-
ages). Differential protection function only used for the generator;
Detection of displacement voltage at a broken delta winding (e–n).
490 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A (L1)
B (L2)
C (L3)
ANSI
52 7UM62
J1 IA(L1)S1
J2
J3 IB(L2)S1
J4
J5 IC(L3)S1
J6
Yd11
R15 VA(L1)
R17 VB(L2)
R18 VC(L3)
R16
Divider
3PP1326
K17 +
TD3
Excitation VExc.
K18
Rotor earth current Q7 IEE2

injection Q8
Q1 IA(L1)S2
Q2
Q3 IB(L2)S2
Q4
Q5 IC(L3)S2
Q6
RL
R13 VE
RE
R14
max. 10A For 100 % stator J7 IEE1

Neutral earth-fault protection J8
transformer
TD1
- 1-3Hz-Rotor earth K14
fault protection
- or Temperature K15 +
injection TD2
- or DC voltage K16
injection
Figure A-29 Block Connected Generator with Neutral Earthing Transformer

Block Connection with Isolated Starpoint
Connection on each side to three current transformers and three voltage transformers (phase-to-earth volt-
ages). Differential protection function connected via generator and unit transformer;
Loading resistor connected either directly to starpoint circuit or via matching transformers.
7UM62 Manual 491

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
7UM62
K15 +
TD2
K16
K17 +
TD3
Exc. UExc.
K18
+ 12
+ 31 K13 +
TD1
7KG6 K14
- 32
- 11 (Amplifier)
max. 10 cm connections shall be twisted and screened
Shunt: 10 A/ 150 mV
Figure A-30 Startup Earth Fault Protection

Connection of DC Voltage Input TD1 with Series-Connected Amplifier 7KG6 for Systems with
Startup Converter
Connection to the
phase-to-phase VT
voltage 7UM62
100 V - 125 V AC
1A3
105Ω 1A1
+ 4A1 2B1 J8
IEE1
J7
3PP1336 7XR61
Exc. 1B3 R13 VE
4B1 1B1 R14
-
105Ω
Figure A-31 Rotor Earth Fault Protection

– with additional source 7XR61 for injecting a nominal-frequency test voltage between the rotor circuit and
the earth, with series-connected resistor 3PP1336
492 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Connection to the
phase-to-phase VT
voltage 7UM6
100 V - 125 V AC
1A3
105Ω 1A1
+ 4A1 2B1 J7
IEE1
J8
3PP1336 7XR61
Exc. 1B3
4B1 1B1
-
105Ω
Figure A-32 Rotor Earth Fault Protection

– with series device 7XR61for injection of a rated-frequency voltage into the rotor circuit if the sensitive earth
current input is used.
7UM62 Manual 493

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A (L1)
B (L2)
C (L3)
ANSI
52
7UM62
n
R13 VE
R14
R15 VA(L1)
R17 VB(L2)
R18 VC(L3)
R16
J1 IA(L1)S1
J2
J3 IB(L2)S1
J4
J5 IC(L3)S1
J6
k Q8 IEE2
l Q7
K13 +
TD1
Measuring transducer
RTD module for injection of any K14
analog signal
K15 +
e.g. speed, TD2
7XV5662 vibration, pressure K16
(6 meas.
junctions) K17 +
TD3
To serial K18
interface
J7 IEE1
J8
Q1 IA(L1)S2
Q2
Q3 IB(L2)S2
Q4
Q5 IC(L3)S2
Q6
FromRTD module Port

PortCCoder
or DD
Figure A-33 Asynchronous Motor

Connection to three voltage transformers (phase-to-earth voltages, usually picked up at the busbar);
Displacement voltage detection at broken delta winding, three current transformers on each side;
Earth fault direction detection by toroidal CTs
494 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
L1 L2 L3
7UM61
7UM62
R15 VU
A(L1)
L1
R17
VU
B(L2)
L2
R18
R16 VU
C(L3)
L3
Figure A-34 Voltage Transformer Connections for Two Voltage Transformers in Open Delta Connection (V Connection)
A B C
L1 L2 L3
7UM62
7UM6
R15 V
UA(L1)
A(L1),
R17 V
UB(L2)
B(L2)
R18
R16
V
UC(L3)
C)L3)
Figure A-35 Voltage Transformer Connection with L2 Earthed on the Secondary Side
Connection to the
phase-to-phase VT
voltage
7UM62
120 V
100 V
110 V
7
7XT71 9
11
40 kΩ
+ 27 19 K13 +
TD1
Control input K14
21
Exc. 7XR6004
15 K15 +
TD2
- Measuring input
40 kΩ 17 K16
25
Figure A-36 Rotor Earth Fault Connection 1 to 3 Hz

– with 1-3 Hz generator 7XT71 and resistor device 7XR6004.
7UM62 Manual 495

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
7UM62
At gas turbines: K15 +

TD2
Injection of cold gas
temperature K16
K17 +
TD3
Excitation VExc. K18
Auxiliary-
20-Hz- voltage
20-Hz- Generator
Bandpass DC AC
1A1 +VH VA(L1)
1A2 UB(L2)
7XT34 7XT33 -VH
1A3
1B1 1B4 4A1 UC(L3)
2A1
1A1 External
BE 2A3
400A Wiring block
Neutral
5A RL shielded 3A2
transformer
P1 3A3 Device
P2 1A4 1A3 4A3
3A1 operative
S1 S2 R13 VE
max 200 V R14
J8 IEE1
J7
+ 12
+ 31 K13 +
TD1
7KG6 K14
- 32
- 11 (Amplifier)
Wiring twisted and shielded
max. 10 cm
Shunt: 10 A/ 150 mV
Figure A-37 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection

– with 20 Hz generator 7XT33 and band pass 7XT34
496 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A (L1)
B (L2)
C (L3)
Q7 Q8 Q6 Q5 Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1 J6 J5 J4 J3 J2 J1
7UM62
IEE2 IC(L3)S2 IB(L2)S2 IA(L1)S2 IC(L3)S1 IB(L2)S1 IA(L1)S1
Figure A-38 Earth current differential protection (generator)
A (L1)
B (L2)
C (L3)
Q6 Q5 Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1 Q8 Q7 J6 J5 J4 J3 J2 J1
7UM62
IC(L3)S2 IB(L2)S2 IA(L1)S2 IEE2 IC(L3)S1 IB(L2)S1 IA(L1)S1
Figure A-39 Earth current differential protection (transformer)
7UM62 Manual 497

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A.4.1 Connection Examples for RTD-Box
A’ 7XV566
7XV5650 A A
Port D T1 FO/RS485 RTD-Box
7UM62 B Bus number: 00
Converter B A’ and B’ jumpers for
the terminating resis-
B’ tors
A’ 7XV566
A A RTD-Box
7UM62 Port C or D Bus number: 00
B A’ and B’ jumpers for
B the terminating resis-
B’ tors
Figure A-40 Simplex operation with one RTD-Box

above: optical design (1 FO); below: design with RS485
A’ 7XV566
R1 7XV5650 A A RTD-Box
7UM62 Port D T1 FO/RS485 B Bus number: 01
Converter B A’ and B’ jumpers for
B’ the terminating resis-
tors
A’ 7XV566
A A RTD-Box
7UM62 Port C or D Bus number: 01
A’ and B’ jumpers for
B B the terminating resis-
B’ tors
Figure A-41 Half-duplex operation with one RTD-Box

above: optical design (2 FOs); below: design with RS485
R1 7XV5650 7XV566
A A
RTD-Box
7UM62 Port C1) T1 FO/RS485 B
Converter B Bus number: 01
A’ 7XV566
A RTD-Box
Bus number: 02
B A’ and B’ jumpers for
tors
7XV566
A A RTD-Box
7UM62 Port C2) Bus number: 01
B B
A’ 7XV566
A RTD-Box
Bus number: 02
1
) for 7SJ64 port D B A’ and B’ jumpers for
2
) for 7SJ64 optionally port C or D tors
Figure A-42 Half-duplex operation with two RTD-Boxes

above: optical design (2 FOs); below: design with RS485
498 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.5 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with Primary Load Resistor
Some power systems with generators in unit connection have a load resistor installed
directly in the generator starpoint to reduce interference. Figure A-43 shows the con-
nection of the 20 Hz generator and the band pass in this application, and the integra-
tion of the protection device. The 20 Hz voltage is injected into the generator starpoint
via a powerful voltage transformer and drops off at the primary load resistor. In the
presence of an earth fault, an earth current flows through the CT in the starpoint. The
protection function detects and processes this current in addition to the 20 Hz voltage
(see also Section 2.29).
Supply
20 Hz voltage
generator DC AC 7UM62
20 Hz 1A1 +U UL1
band pass 7XT33 1A2 -U
H
H UL2
7XT34 1A3 UL3
1B1 1B4 4A1 2A1
External
1A1 BI 2A3 blocking
UN
RL 500 V 3A2
√3 3A3 Device
1A4 1A3 4A3
3A1 OK
Voltage R13 UE
transformer
R14
J8 IEE1
Transformation ratio 1:1
J7
Figure A-43 Connection: 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection to a Primary Load Resistor
Voltage An unearthed voltage transformer with a low primary-secondary impedance must

Transformer be used for the 20 Hz frequency.
Specification
Primary voltage: UN,Generator / √3 (non-saturated up to UN,Generator)
Secondary voltage: 500 V
Power for 20 s 3 kVA
(50 Hz or 60 Hz)
Primary-secondary impedance Zps < RL
at 20 Hz (but at least < 1000 Ω)
Can be obtained e.g. from: Ritz Messwandlerbau
Salomon-Heine Weg 72
D-20251 Hamburg
(Phone +49 (0) 40511123 333)
Current As the transformation ratio is 1:1, a current transformer with a maximum number of
Transformer ampere windings must be chosen. The CT is installed directly in the starpoint on the
Specification earth side, downstream of the load resistor.
Type: 5P10 or 5P15 (or 1FS10)
Rated secondary current: 1A
Transformation ratio: 1 (1A/1A)
7UM62 Manual 499

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A.5.1 Protection Settings
The settings recommended are the same as in Section 2.29. In addition, the correction
angle (address 5309 PHI I SEF) and the ohmic contact resistance of the voltage
transformer must be determined during the primary tests, and set at address 5310A
SEF Rps.
The conversion factor for the resistance (secondary – primary and vice versa) is:
ü VT ⋅ ü Divider
FACTOR R SEF = ---------------------------------
ü CT
Example:
Primary load resistor: RL = 1250 Ω
Voltage transformer: üVT = 10.5 kV/√3/500 V
Ohmic divider: üDivider = 1650 Ω/660 Ω (5:2)
Current transformer: üCT = 1A/1A
10.5 kV 5
---------------------------- ⋅ ---
3 ⋅ 500 V 2
FACTOR R SEF = ------------------------------------ = 30.3
1A
---------
1A
Trip stage: primary 2 kΩ, secondary 66 Ω
Alarm stage: primary 5 kΩ, secondary 165 Ω
urrent stage: U N.Generator 10.5 kV
---------------------------------
- --------------------
3 3
SEF100I>> = 0, 1 ⋅ ---------------------------------- = 0, 1 ⋅ ----------------------------------------- ≈ 500 mA
R L ⋅ ü CT 1250 Ω ⋅ 1A/1A
A.5.2 Commissioning
The procedure is the same as described in Section 3.3. Measurements are carried out
with the generator at standstill, and randomly selected tests are then repeated with the
generator running. The following paragraph describes the method of adjustment. A
decade resistor (0 to 10 kΩ) is required for the tests.
Generator at 1. After checking the connections, a supply voltage is applied to the 20 Hz generator
Standstill and the protection device. The following parameters must be set as follows (deliv-
ery settings): address 5309 PHI I SEF = 0 ° and address 5310A SEF Rps =
0 Ω. In fault-free condition (RE infinite), read out the angle j SEF= from the oper-
ational measured values, and set the appropriate correction angle (see below).
Due to the capacitive earth current, the angle measured must be negative. If it is
not, the connection at the current input must be rotated.
The correction angle is: Phi corr = –90 Grad –(Phi measured)
Example:
Phi measured = –47 Grad, Phi corr = –90 ° + 47 ° = –43 °
The correction angle is set at address 5309 PHI I SEF.
2. Create a short-circuit (RE = 0 Ω) in the generator starpoint, and read out the mea-
sured fault resistance (address 00764 R SEF=) from the operational measured
values. This resistance is set at address 5310A SEF Rps.
500 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
3. Insert now on the primary side a resistance which corresponds to the tripping val-
ue (e.g. 2 kΩ). Check the measured fault resistance (R SEF=). If this resistance
differs very much from the value expected, modify SEF Rps accordingly and, if
necessary, make a fine adjustment with the correction angle (PHI I SEF).
Read out now the fault resistance, and set this value as the tripping threshold at
address 5303 R<< SEF TRIP.
Next, insert a fault resistance for the alarm stage (e.g. 5 kΩ) on the primary side,
and read out the fault resistance (R SEF=) from the operational measured values.
This value is set at address 5302 as R< SEF ALARM.
4. Finally, a series of measurements is performed, starting with 0 kΩ and proceeding
in steps of 1 kΩ. If changes are made to the correction angle (PHI I SEF) or to
the contact resistance (SEF Rps), the settings for the trip stage (R<< SEF TRIP)
and the alarm stage (R< SEF ALARM) must be matched as required.
Running Generator With the generator running the trip stage and the alarm stage must be checked. Again,
insert a fault resistance on the primary side, and check the fault resistance in the op-
erational measured values. If the resistance differs from the values at standstill, the
correction angle and/or the transfer resistance can be somewhat modified. To do so,
adapt the settings at address 5302 R< SEF ALARM and 5303 R<< SEF TRIP. These
values are also active with the generator at stand-still.
7UM62 Manual 501

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A.6 Definition of the Active Power Measurement
The 7UM62 used the generator reference-arrow system. The power output is posi-
tive.
G U
Figure A-44 Definition of Positive Direction of Reference Arrows
Table A-2 shows the operating ranges for synchronous and asynchronous machines.
Parameter 1108 ACTIVE POWER is set to Generator. “Normal condition” shows the
active power under normal operating conditions: + means that a positive power is dis-
played on the protective device, – that the power is negative.
Table A-2 Operating Ranges for Synchronous and Asynchronous Machines
Synchronous Generator Synchronous Motor
+P +P
Stability U U
limit
I underexcited ϕ overexcited
ϕ +Q
+Q Stability
underexcited overexcited limit I
Reactive power Q is controlled by the ex- Reactive power Q is controlled by the ex-
citation, citation,
Normal condition: +P and +Q Normal condition: –P and +Q
Asynchronous Generator Asynchronous Motor
+P
+P U
PBREAK P U ϕ
I +Q
ϕ
+Q I
P
PBREAK
Reactive power is drawn from the sys- The motor draws both active and reac-
tem to maintain the excitation; tive power from the system;
Normal condition: +P and –Q Normal condition: –P and –Q
502 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.6 Definition of the Active Power Measurement
Table A-2 shows that the operating ranges in generator and motor operation are mir-
rored around the reactive power axis. The measured power values also result from the
above definition.
If, for instance, the forward power monitoring or the reverse power protection is to be
used in a synchronous motor, parameter 1108 ACTIVE POWER must be set to
Motor. As a result, the actual active power (according to the above definition) is mul-
tiplied with –1. This means that the power diagram is mirrored around the reactive
power axis and that the interpretation of the active power changes. This effect must
be considered when evaluating the metered energy values.
If, for instance, positive power values are to be obtained in an asynchronous motor,
the current direction (parameter 0201 STARPNT SIDE 1) must be reversed. Param-
eter 1108 ACTIVE POWER remains set to Generator. This means that because of
the generator reference-arrow system the earthing of the CTs that must be entered in
the device is the opposite of the actual earthing. This leads to results that are compa-
rable to those of a load reference-arrow system.
7UM62 Manual 503

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A.7 Current Transformer Requirements
The differential protection is of decisive importance for the requirements that the cur-
rent transformers must meet. The highspeed trip stage (IDiff >>) uses instantaneous
values and can therefore reliably trip high-current internal short-circuits.
The other decisive factor for the requirements that the current transformers must meet
are external short-circuits with their possible DC component. In case of a short-circuit
flowing through the power transformers, a minimum of 5 ms should elapse before cur-
rent transformer saturation occurs. Recommendations for dimensioning are given in
Tables A-3 and A-4 on the basis of the IEC 60044-1 and 60044-6 standards. Table A-
5 shows the necessary equations for converting the requirements into the knee-point
voltages.
The primary nominal CT current is defined according to the rules of good engineering
practice. It must be chosen higher than or equal to the nominal current of the protected
object.
Table A-3 Overcurrent Factors
Required Actual Accuracy Resulting Rated Accuracy

Limiting Factor Limiting Factor
IpSSC R BC + R Ct
K ALF' = K td ⋅ --------------- K ALF = --------------------------- ⋅ K ALF'
I pN R BN + R Ct
with Ktd Rated transient dimensioning factor

IpSSC Primary short-circuit current
IpN Rated primary ct current
RBC Connected burden resistance
RBN Rated burden resistance
RCt Secondary winding resistance
Table A-4 Transformer Requirements
Transformer Generator
Transient >4 > (4 to 5)
dimensioning factor Ktd τN ≤ 100 ms τN > 100 ms
504 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.7 Current Transformer Requirements
Table A-4 Transformer Requirements
Transformer Generator
Symmetrical short circuit cur-
rent IpSC 1 1
≈ ---------- ⋅ I pN, Tr ≈ -------- ⋅ I pN, G
u SC xd ″
Example uSC = 0.1 xd’’ = 0.12

n’ > 40 n’ > (34 to 42)
Note: Power ≥ 10 or15 VA Note the internal burden!
Always use identical trans-
formers Example of network Example:
transformer: IN, G approx. 1000 to 2000 A
10P10 10 or15 VA 5P15 15 VA
(IsN = 1 A or 5 A) (IsN =1 A or 5 A)
IN, G > 5000 A
5P20 30 VA
(IsN =1 A or 5 A)
with uSC Short circuit voltage

xd’’ Subtransient reactance
IsN Rated secondary ct current
τN Network time constant
Table A-5 Knee-Point Voltages
IEC British Standard ANSI
( R Ct + R BN ) ⋅ I sN K ALF
U = K ALF ⋅ ( R Ct + R BN ) ⋅ IsN U = --------------------------------------------- ⋅ K ALF U = 20 ⋅ I sN ⋅ ( R Ct + R BN ) ⋅ -------------
1.3 20
IsN = 5 A (typical value)
with U Knee-point voltage

KALF Rated accuracy limiting factor
IsN Rated secondary ct current
RBN Rated burden resistance
RCt Secondary winding resistance
7UM62 Manual 505

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A.8 Overview of the Masking Features of the User Defined Information
A.8.1 Source: BI, F, C; Destination: BO, LED, C
Type of Information Source Destination CFC Task level
Binary Outputs
Function Keys
Measurement
Binary Inputs
Interlocking
(slow)
PLC1
(fast)
CFC
CFC
LED
PLC
• Annunciation:
Single Point
– SP Single Point Indication ON/OFF X – X X X X – X X –
– SP Single Point Indication Open/Close X – X X X X – X X –
Double Point
– DP Double Point Indication (Breaker indication “00” = not X – X – – X X1) X X X2)
valid/transmitted as “3”)
– DP_I Double Point Indication (Breaker indication “00” = X – X – – X X1) X X X2)
intermediate/transmitted as “0”)
Output Slow
– OUT Output Indication ON/OFF – – X X X X X1) X X X2)
– OUT Output Indication Open/Close – – X X X X X1) X X X2)
Output Fast
– OUT Protection ON/OFF – – X X X X – X X X2)
– OUT Protection Open/Close – – X X X X – X X X2)
Tagging
– IntSP Internal Single Point Indication ON/OFF – X X X X X X1) X X X2)
– IntSP Internal Single Point Indication Open/Close – X X X X X X1) X X X2)
– IntDP Internal Double Point Indication (Breaker indication – – X – – X X1) X X X2)
“00” = not valid/transmitted as “3”)
– IntDP_I Internal Double Point Indication (Breaker indication – – X – – X X1) X X X2)
“00” = intermediate/transmitted as “0”)
Tap Changer
– TxTap Transformer Tap Changer X – – – – – – – – –
• Control Commands without feedback:

Single Controls
– C_S ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_S Open/Close – – X X – X – X X X
1) Only for measurement setpoints (is processed cyclically every 600 ms); do not use for binary inputs.
2
) Only for commands (is triggered by commands only).
506 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Binary Outputs
Function Keys
Measurement
Binary Inputs
Interlocking
(slow)
PLC1
(fast)
CFC
CFC
LED
PLC
Single Controls negated
– C_SN ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_SN Open/Close – – X X – X – X X X
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close
– C_D2 ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D2 Open/Close – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D2 Transformer Tap Changer – – X X – X – X X X
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close 1 Common
– C_D3 ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D4 ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D12 ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
Double Controls negated
– C_D2N ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D2N Open/Close – – X X – X – X X X
– C_D2N Transformer Tap Changer – – X X – X – X X X
1
) Only for measurement setpoints (is processed cyclically every 600 ms); do not use for binary inputs.
2) Only for commands (is triggered by commands only).
7UM62 Manual 507

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
Binary Outputs
Function Keys
Measurement
Binary Inputs
Interlocking
(slow)
PLC1
(fast)
CFC
CFC
LED
PLC
• Control Commands with feedback:
Single Controls
– CF_S Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control – – X X – X – X X X
– SP Feedback X – X X X X – X X X
– CF_S Single Point Indication Open/Close Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_S Double Point Indication (Breaker indication “00” Control – – X X – X – X X X
– DP = not valid/transmitted as “3”) Feedback X – X – – X – X X X
– CF_S Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control – – X X – X – X X X
– DP_I “00” = intermediate/transmitted as “0”) Feedback X – X – – X – X X X
– CF_D2 Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2 Single Point Indication Open/Close Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2 Double Point Indication (Breaker indication “00” Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2 Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2 Transformer Tap Changer Control – – X X – X – X X X
– TxTap Feedback – – – – – – – – – –
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close 1 Common
– TxTap Feedback – – – – – – – – – –
508 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Binary Outputs
Function Keys
Measurement
Binary Inputs
Interlocking
(slow)
PLC1
(fast)
CFC
CFC
LED
PLC
– TxTap Feedback – – – – – – – – – –
– TxTap Feedback – – – – – – – – – –
Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close negated
– CF_D2N Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2N Single Point Indication Open/Close Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2N Double Point Indication (Breaker indication “00” Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2N Double Point Indication (Breaker indication Control – – X X – X – X X X
– CF_D2N Transformer Tap Changer Control – – X X – X – X X X
– TxTap Feedback – – – – – – – – – –
• Measured Values:
– MV Measured Value – – – – – X X – – –
– MVU Measured Value, User Defined – – X – – – X – – –
– LV Limit Value – – – – – X X – – –
– LVU Limit Value, User Defined – – – – – X X – – –
• Metered Values:
– MVMV Metered Value of Measured Values – – – – – – – – – –
– PMV Pulse Metered Values X – – – – – – – – –
7UM62 Manual 509

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A.8.2 Destination: Indication Buffer, System Interface
Configuring an In- Two indication buffers are available for selection: Operation (Event Log) Buffer (E) and
dication Buffer as a Trip Log (T). The indications from protective functions are firmly assigned to these in-
Destination dication buffers. For the others, Table A-6 provides an overview of which indication
type may be configured to which buffer.
Table A-6 Overview of Indication Buffers

Information type ↓ \Message buffer → E T
Single Point Indications (SP) X X
Double Point Indications (DP) X
Output Indications (OUT) X X
Internal Single Point Indications (IntSP) X X
Internal Double Point Indications (DP) X
Transformer Tap Change Indications (TxTap) X
Configuring the Depending on the SCADA interfaces connected to the relay, the types of information
SCADA Interface displayed in Table A-7 may be configured. By placing an X in the matrix cell, the infor-
as a Destination mation is transferred to connected systems via the SCADA interface.
.
Table A-7 Overview of SCADA Interfaces

SCADA Interface → IEC Profi- Modbus DNP3.0
Information Type ↓ bus DP
Single Point Indication (SP) X X X X
Double Point Indication (DP) X X
Output Indication (OUT) X X X X
Internal Single Point Indicator (IntSP) X X X X
Internal Double Point Indicator (IntDP) X
Transformer Tap Change Indicator (TxTap)

Command with/without Feedback (C_**) X X
Protective Measurement Value X X X
Protective Measurement Value with Time

(MVT)
Protective Measurement Value, User
Defined (MVU)
Pulsed Metered Value (PMV) X X X
Metered Value from Measurement Value X X X X

(MVMV)
510 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.9 Default Settings
A.9.1 Binary Inputs
Binary input Abbreviation FNo Type of Description

information
Binary input 1 >SV tripped 5086 SP O/O >Stop valve tripped
Binary input 2 >Uexc fail. 5328 SP >Exc. voltage failure recognized
Binary input 3 >BLOCK f1 5206 SP O/O

>BLOCK U< 6506 SP O/O1) Generator circuit breaker open1)
>S/E/F Iee off1) 51761) SP
Binary input 4 >FAIL:Feeder VT 0361 SP O/O

>Useal-in BLK 1950 SP O/O Voltage transformer protective switch tripped
>BLOCK U/V 6503 SP
Binary input 5 >Ext trip 1 4526 SP O/O External trip signal 1
Binary input 6 >Ext trip 1 4546 SP O/O External trip signal 2
Binary input 7 >Trig.Wave.Cap. 0004 SP >Trigger Waveform Capture
Binary input 8....152) List Empty ---- ---- No functions configured (reserve)
1) for busbar connection

2
) 7UM622 only
A.9.2 Binary Outputs (output relays)
Binary output Abbreviation FNo Type Description

Output relay 1 Error PwrSupply 0147 OUT O/O General indication: Internal monitoring
Fail Battery 0177 OUT O/O
Output relay 2 Relay TRIP 0511 OUT O/O Relay trip
Output relay 3 I> TRIP 1815 OUT O/O Trip by short-circuit protection
Diff TRIP 5671 OUT O/O
Imp.Z1< TRIP 3977 OUT O/O
Imp.Z1B< TRIP 3978 OUT O/O
Imp.Z2< TRIP 3979 OUT O/O
Imp.T3> TRIP 3980 OUT O/O
I>> TRIP 1809 OUT O/O
O/C Ip TRIP 1900 OUT O/O
Output relay 4 IEE>> TRIP 1223 OUT O/O Trip by eartfault protection
U0> TRIP 5187 OUT O/O
S/E/F TRIP 5193 OUT O/O
Output relay 5 U< TRIP 6539 OUT O/O Trip by voltage protection
U> TRIP 6570 OUT O/O
U>> TRIP 6573 OUT O/O
Output relay 6 f1 TRIP 5236 OUT O/O Trip by frequency protection
f2 TRIP 5237 OUT O/O
Output relay 7 EXC<3 TRIP 5343 OUT O/O Trip by underexcitation protection
Exc<U<TRIP 5346 OUT O/O
7UM62 Manual 511

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
Binary output Abbreviation FNo Type Description

Output relay 8 I> TRIP 1815 OUT O/O Marshalled via the tripping matrix:
EXC<3 TRIP 5343 OUT O/O Generator circuit breaker
EXC<U<TRIP 5346 OUT O/O
Pr TRIP 5097 OUT O/O
Pr+SV TRIP 5098 OUT O/O
I2 Θ TRIP 5161 OUT O/O
EXC<3 TRIP 5343 OUT O/O De–excitation Generator
Exc<U<TRIP 5346 OUT O/O
f2 TRIP 5237 OUT O/O Stop valve
Output relay 11 List empty ---- ---- No functions configured (reserve)
Output relay 12 List empty ---- ---- reserved for Breaker failure protection
(refer to Section 2.28)
Output relays 13...201) List empty ---- ---- No functions configured (reserve)
1) 7UM622 only
512 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
C53000-G1176-C149-3
7UM62 Manual
FigureA-45
Relay 10
Relay 9
Relay 8
Relay 10
Relay 9
Relay 8
Relay 10
Relay 9
Relay 8
Tripping matrix —
FNo 5568 SEF 3H TRIP FNro 5098 Pr+SV TRIP FNo 1223 IEE>> TRIP
FNo 5671 Diff TRIP FNo 5128 Pf< TRIP FNo 1226 IEE> TRIP
FNo 5691 Diff> Trip FNo 5129 Pf> TRIP FNo 1471 BrkFailure TRIP
FNo 5692 Diff>> Trip FNo 5160 I2>> TRIP FNo 1521 ThOverload TRIP
FNo 6527 Up< TRIP FNo 5161 I2 Θ TRIP FNo 1809 I>> TRIP
FNo 1815
pre–settings
FNo 6539 U< TRIP FNo 5187 U0> TRIP I> TRIP
FNo 6540 U<< TRIP FNo 5193 S/E/F TRIP FNo 1900 O/C Ip TRIP
FNo 6570 U> TRIP FNo 5236 f1 TRIP FNo 3977 Imp.Z1< TRIP
FNo 6573 U>> TRIP FNo 5237 f2 TRIP FNo 3978 Imp.Z1B< TRIP
FNo 6821 START-SUP TRIP FNo 5238 f3 TRIP FNo 3979 Imp.Z2< TRIP
FNo 5239 f4 TRIP FNo 3980 Imp.T3> TRIP

FNo 5307 DC Prot. TRIP FNo 4537 Ext 1 Gen.TRP
FNo 5343 Exc<3 TRIP FNo 4557 Ext 2 Gen.TRP
FNo 5344 Exc<1 TRIP FNo 4577 Ext 3 Gen.TRP
FNo 5345 Exc<2 TRP FNo 4597 Ext 4 Gen.TRP

FNo 5346 Exc<U< TRP FNo 4827 Re. Inhib.TRP
FNo 5371 U/f>>TRP FNro 5071 O/STRP char.1
FNo 5372 U/f th.TRIP FNo 5072 O/STRP char.2
FNo 5399 R/E/F TRIP FNo 5097 Pr TRIP
FNo 5548 I.En. TRIP
Generator circuit breaker

Stop valve
De–excitation
Stop valve
De–excitation

Stop valve
De–excitation

513
A Appendix
A.9.3 LED Indicators
LED Abbreviation FNo Type of Description

information
LED 1 Relay TRIP 0511 OUT O/O Protective relay has tripped
LED 2 Relay PICKUP 0501 OUT O/O Protective relay has picked up
LED 3 I> Fault L1 1811 OUT O/O Fault L1
LED 6 IEE> TRIP 1226 OUT O/O
U0> TRIP 5187 OUT O/O Earth fault
LED 7 Error PwrSupply 0147 OUT O/O Hardware failure
Fail Battery 0177 OUT O/O
LED 8 Diff TRIP 5671 OUT O/O Trip by differential protection
LED 9 Pr TRIP 5097 OUT O/O Trip by reverse power protection
LED 10 Exc<3 TRIP 5343 OUT O/O Trip by underexcitation protection
Exc<1 TRIP 5344 OUT O/O
Exc<2 TRIP 5345 OUT O/O
Exc<U< TRIP 5346 OUT O/O
LED 11 I2>> TRIP 5160 OUT O/O Trip by unbalanced protection
LED 12 f1 TRIP 5236 OUT O/O Trip by overfrequency protection
LED 13 f4 TRIP 5239 OUT O/O Trip by underfrequency protection
LED 14 U> TRIP 6570 OUT O/O Trip by overvoltage protection
A.9.4 Function Keys
Function Key Pre–settings
F1 Operating messages
F2 Operating measured values, primary
F3 Messages from the last eight network faults
F4 Jumping to the reset menu of the min/max values
514 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.9.5 Establishing a Default Display
I1: 0.50kA cosϕ: Pri Side 1 Side 2

U : 10.93kV f:50.00Hz L1 122A 1222A
P : 4.64MW L1 124A 1243A
Q : 2.86MVAR L3 123A 1231A
1 0.50kA 12 6.31kV DIFF STAB

2 0.50kA 23 6.30kV L1 0.00A 0.00A
3 0.50kA 31 6.29kV L1 0.00A 0.00A
E 0.0A E 2V L3 0.00A 0.00A
Figure A-46 Basic Displays of 7UM62
A.9.6 Spontaneous Display Messages
The spontaneous display messages appear automatically in the display, after a gen-
eral pick-up of the device. The most important data about a fault can be viewed on the
device front in the sequence shown in Figure A-47.
U0> picked up Protective Function that picked up first;

S/E/F TRIP Protective Function that dropped out last;
PU Time 440ms Running time from general pickup to dropout;
TRIP Time 301ms Running time from general pickup to the first trip command
Figure A-47 Display of spontaneous messages in the display – example
7UM62 Manual 515

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A.9.7 Pre–Defined CFC Charts
Some CFC Charts are already supplied with the SIPROTEC® device:
Device and System The single-point indication “>DataStop“ that can be injected by binary inputs is con-
Logic verted by means of a NEGATOR block into an indication “UnlockDT“ that can be proc-
essed internally (internal single point indication, IntSP), and assigned to an output.
This would not be possible directly, i.e. without the additional block.
IN: Device,
General >DataStop SP OUT:Device, UnlockDT IntSP
Figure A-48 Logical Link between Input and Output
Set points Using modules on the running sequence “measured value processing”, a low current
monitor for the three phase currents is implemented. The output message is set high
as soon as one of the three phase currents falls below the set threshold:
IN: Set points IL< LV

IN: Measurement IL1S2 = MV
OUT: Set points SP. IL< OUT


FigureA-49 Undercurrent Monitoring
516 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.10 Interoperability List
A.10 Interoperability List
1. Physical layer
1.1 Electrical interface
X EIA RS-485 X Number of loads for one equipment: 32
1.2 Optical interface
X Glass fibre F-SMA type connector
X Plastic fibre X BFOC/2,5 type connector
1.3 Transmission speed
X 9600 bit/s X 19200 bit/s
2. Link layer
There are no choices for the link layer
3. Application layer
3.1 Transmission mode for application data Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in 4.10 of
IEC 60870-5-4
3.2 Common address of ASDU
X One common address of ADSU More than one common address of ASDU
(identical with station address)
3.3 Selection of standard information numbers in monitor direction
3.3.1 System functions in monitor direction
X 0 End of general interrogation X 0 Time synchronization
X 2 Reset FCB X 3 Reset CU
X 4 Start/restart X 5 Power on
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4 see separate table in the device manual (Information List in the following section)
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7 Measurands in monitor direction

144 Measurand I 145 Measurands I, V
146 Measurand I, V, P, Q 147 Measurands IN, VEN
148 Measurands IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3, P, Q, f
3.3.8 Generic functions in monitor direction

240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values of all entries of one group
243 Read directory of a single entry 244 Read value of a single entry
245 End of general interrogation generic 249 Write entry with confirmation
data
X 250 Write entry with execution 251 Write entry aborted
3.4 Selection of standard information numbers in control direction
3.4.1 System functions in control direction
X 0 Initiation of general interrogation X 0 Time synchronization
3.4.2 General commands in control direction
16 Auto-recloser on / off 17 Teleprotection on / off
18 Protection on / off X 19 LED reset
X 23 Activate characteristic 1 X 24 Activate characteristic 2
25 Activate characteristic 3 26 Activate characteristic 4
7UM62 Manual 517

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
3.4.3 Generic functions in control direction

240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values of all entries of one group
243 Read directory of a single entry 244 Read value of a single entry
245 General interrogation of generic data 248 Write entry
249 Write entry with confirmation 250 Write entry with execution
251 Write entry abort
3.5 Basic application functions
X Test mode X Blocking of monitor direction
X Disturbance data Generic services
X Private data
3.6 Miscellaneous
Measurand max. value = rated value x

1.2 2.4
Current L1
Current L2
Current L3
Voltage L1-E
Voltage L2-E
Voltage L3-E
Voltage L1-L2
Active power P
Reactive power Q
Frequency f
518 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.11 Functions Overview

103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option
Enabled
104 FAULT VALUE Disabled Instantaneous Fault values

Instantaneous values values
RMS values
105 DIFF. PROT. Disabled Enabled Differential Protection

Enabled
106 PROT. OBJECT Generator/Motor Generator/Motor Protection Object

3 phase Transformer
112 O/C PROT. I> Disabled Side 2 Overcurrent Protection I>

Side 1
Side 2
113 O/C PROT. I>> Disabled Non-Directional on Overcurrent Protection I>>

Non-Directional on side 1 side 2
Non-Directional on side 2
114 O/C PROT. Ip Disabled Disabled Inverse O/C Time Protection

side 1
side 1
side 2
side 2
116 Therm.Overload Disabled Enabled Thermal Overload Protection

Enabled
117 UNBALANCE LOAD Disabled Enabled Unbalance Load (Negative

Enabled Sequence)
118 O/C STARTUP Disabled Enabled Startup O/C protection

Enabled
120 DIFF. PROT. Disabled Generator/Motor Differential Protection

Generator/Motor
3 phase Transformer
121 REF PROT. Disabled Disabled Restricted earth fault protection

Generator/Motor with IEE2
Generator/Motor with 3I0 of
Side 2
130 UNDEREXCIT. Disabled Enabled Underexcitation Protection

Enabled
131 REVERSE POWER Disabled Enabled Reverse Power Protection
Enabled
132 FORWARD Disabled Enabled Forward Power Supervision

POWER Enabled
7UM62 Manual 519

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

133 IMPEDANCE Disabled Enabled Impedance Protection
PROT. Enabled
135 OUT-OF-STEP Disabled Enabled Out-of-Step Protection

Enabled
140 UNDERVOLTAGE Disabled Enabled Undervoltage Protection

Enabled
141 OVERVOLTAGE Disabled Enabled Overvoltage Protection

Enabled
142 FREQUENCY Prot. Disabled Enabled Over / Underfrequency Protec-

Enabled tion
143 OVEREXC. PROT. Disabled Enabled Overexcitation Protection (U/f)

Enabled
144 INV.UNDERVOLT. Disabled Enabled Inverse Undervoltage Protec-

Enabled tion Up<
145 df/dt Protect. Disabled with 2 df/dt stages Rate-of-frequency-change pro-

with 2 df/dt stages tection
with 4 df/dt stages
146 VECTOR JUMP Disabled Enabled Jump of Voltage Vector

Enabled
150 S/E/F PROT. Disabled non-directional Stator Earth Fault Protection

non-directional only U0 with U0 & I0
non-directional with U0 & I0
directional
151 O/C PROT. Iee> Disabled with Iee2 Sensitive Earth Current Protec-
with Iee1 tion
with Iee2
152 SEF 3rd HARM. Disabled Enabled Stator Earth Fault Prot. 3rd Har-
Enabled monic
153 100% SEF-PROT. Disabled Enabled 100% Stator-Earth-Fault Protec-

Enabled tion
160 ROTOR E/F Disabled Enabled Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R,
Enabled fn)
161 REF 1-3Hz Disabled Enabled Rotor Earth Fault Protection (1-
Enabled 3Hz)
165 STARTUP MOTOR Disabled Enabled Motor Starting Time Supervision

Enabled
166 RESTART INHIBIT Disabled Enabled Restart Inhibit for Motors

Enabled
170 BREAKER Disabled Side 2 Breaker Failure Protection

FAILURE Side 1
Side 2
171 INADVERT. EN. Disabled Enabled Inadvertent Energisation

Enabled
172 DC PROTECTION Disabled Enabled DC Voltage/Current Protection

Enabled
520 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

I1 [%]
I2 [%]
U1 [%]
Frequency f [%]
|Power Factor| [%]
[%]
[%]

I1 [%]
I2 [%]
U1 [%]
Frequency f [%]
|Power Factor| [%]
[%]
[%]

I1 [%]
I2 [%]
U1 [%]
Frequency f [%]
|Power Factor| [%]
[%]
[%]
7UM62 Manual 521

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

I1 [%]
I2 [%]
U1 [%]
Frequency f [%]
|Power Factor| [%]
[%]
[%]
180 FUSE FAIL MON. Disabled Enabled Fuse Failure Monitor

Enabled
181 M.V. SUPERV Disabled Enabled Measured Values Supervision

Enabled
182 Trip Cir. Sup. Disabled Disabled Trip Circuit Supervision

with 2 Binary Inputs
with 1 Binary Input
185 THRESHOLD Disabled Enabled Threshold Supervision

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled
190 RTD-BOX INPUT Disabled Disabled External Temperature Input

Port C
Port D
Port E
191 RTD CONNECTION 6 RTD simplex operation 6 RTD simplex Ext. Temperature Input Connec-
6 RTD half duplex operation operation tion Type
12 RTD half duplex opera-
tion
522 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.12 Settings
A.12 Settings
NOTE: The following table lists all data which are available in the maximum complement of the device. De-
pendent on the ordered model, only those data may be present which are valid for the individual version.
Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments

201 STRPNT->OBJ S1 Power System YES YES CT-Strpnt. Side1 in Direct.
Data 1 NO of Object
202 IN-PRI I-SIDE1 Power System 1..100000 A 500 A CT Rated Primary Current
Data 1 Side 1
203 IN-SEC I-SIDE1 Power System 1A 1A CT Rated Secondary Cur-

Data 1 5A rent Side 1
204 CT ANGLE W0 Power System -5.00..5.00 ° 0.00 ° Correction Angle CT W0

Data 1
205 FACTOR IEE1 Power System 1.0..100000.0 60.0 CT Ratio Prim./Sec. IEE1
Data 1
210 STRPNT->OBJ S2 Power System YES YES CT-Strpnt. Side2 in Direct.

Data 1 NO of Object
211 IN-PRI I-SIDE2 Power System 1..100000 A 500 A CT Rated Primary Current
Data 1 Side 2
212 IN-SEC I-SIDE2 Power System 1A 1A CT Rated Secondary Cur-

Data 1 5A rent Side 2
213 FACTOR IEE2 Power System 1.0..100000.0 60.0 CT Ratio Prim./Sec. IEE2
Data 1
214 GRD TERM. IEE2 Power System Terminal Q7 Terminal Q7 Grounded Terminal CT
Data 1 Terminal Q8 IEE2
221 Unom PRIMARY Power System 0.10..400.00 kV 6.30 kV Rated Primary Voltage
Data 1
222 Unom SECON- Power System 100..125 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage
DARY Data 1 (Ph-Ph)
223 UE CONNECTION Power System UE connected to UE connected to UE Connection

Data 1 neutral transformer neutral transformer
UE connected to
broken delta win-
ding
not connected
UE connected to
any VT
UE connected to
Rotor
UE connected to
Loading Resistor
224 FACTOR UE Power System 1.0..2500.0 36.4 VT Ratio Prim./Sec. Ue

Data 1
225A Uph / Udelta Power System 1.00..3.00 1.73 Matching Ratio Ph.-VT to
Data 1 Broken-Delta-VT
241 UN-PRI SIDE 1 Power System 0.40..800.00 kV 20.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage Side
Data 1 1
7UM62 Manual 523

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

242 STARPNT SIDE 1 Power System Isolated Isolated Starpoint of Side 1 is
Data 1 Solid Earthed
243 UN-PRI SIDE 2 Power System 0.40..800.00 kV 6.30 kV Rated Primary Voltage side
Data 1 2
244 STARPNT SIDE 2 Power System Isolated Isolated Starpoint of side 2 is

Data 1 Solid Earthed
246 VECTOR GRP S2 Power System 0..11 0 Vector Group Numeral of

Data 1 Side 2
249 SN TRANSFOR- Power System 0.20..5000.00 MVA 5.30 MVA Rated Apparent Power of
MER Data 1 the Transformer
251 UN GEN/MOTOR Power System 0.40..800.00 kV 6.30 kV Rated Primary Voltage

Data 1 Generator/Motor
252 SN GEN/MOTOR Power System 0.20..5000.00 MVA 5.27 MVA Rated Apparent Power of
Data 1 the Generator
270 Rated Frequency Power System 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency

Data 1 60 Hz
271 PHASE SEQ. Power System L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 Phase Sequence

Data 1 L1 L3 L2
272 SCHEME Power System Direct connected to Direct connected to Scheme Configuration
Data 1 busbar busbar
Unit transformer
connected
274A ATEX100 Power System YES NO Storage of th. Replicas w/o

Data 1 NO Power Supply
275 FACTOR R SEF Power System 1.0..200.0 37.0 Ratio Prim./Sec. R SEF
Data 1
276 TEMP. UNIT Power System Degree Celsius Degree Celsius Unit of temparature measu-
Data 1 Degree Fahrenheit rement
280 TMin TRIP CMD Power System 0.01..32.00 sec 0.15 sec Minimum TRIP Command
Data 1 Duration
281 BkrClosed I MIN Power System 0.04..1.00 A 0.04 A Closed Breaker Min. Cur-
Data 1 rent Threshold
295 TRANSDUCER 1 Power System 10 V 10 V Transducer 1

Data 1 4-20mA
20mA
296 TRANSDUCER 2 Power System 10 V 10 V Transducer 2

Data 1 4-20mA
20mA
297 TRANSDUCER 3 Power System with filter with filter Transducer 3

Data 1 without filter
302 CHANGE Change Group Group A Group A Change to Another Setting

Group B Group
Binary Input
Protocol
401 WAVEFORMTRIG- Oscillographic Save with Pickup Save with Pickup Waveform Capture
GER Fault Records Save with TRIP
Start with TRIP
524 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.12 Settings

402 WAVEFORM Oscillographic Fault event Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
DATA Fault Records Power System fault
403 MAX. LENGTH Oscillographic 0.30..5.00 sec 1.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform
Fault Records Capture Record
404 PRE. TRIG. TIME Oscillographic 0.05..4.00 sec 0.20 sec Captured Waveform Prior
Fault Records to Trigger
405 POST REC. TIME Oscillographic 0.05..0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after
Fault Records Event
406 BinIn CAPT.TIME Oscillographic 0.10..5.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary
Fault Records Input
1108 ACTIVE POWER Power System Generator Generator Measurement of Active

Data 2 Motor Power for
1201 O/C I> O/C I> (with OFF OFF Overcurrent Time Protec-
undervoltage ON tion I>
seal-in) Block relay for trip
commands
1202 I> O/C I> (with 0.05..20.00 A 1.35 A I> Pickup
undervoltage
seal-in)
1203 T I> O/C I> (with 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec T I> Time Delay
undervoltage
seal-in)
1204 U< SEAL-IN O/C I> (with ON OFF State of Undervoltage Seal-
undervoltage OFF in
seal-in)
1205 U< O/C I> (with 10.0..125.0 V 80.0 V Undervoltage Seal-in Pik-
undervoltage kup
seal-in)
1206 T-SEAL-IN O/C I> (with 0.10..60.00 sec 4.00 sec Duration of Undervoltage
undervoltage Seal-in
seal-in)
1207A I> DOUT RATIO O/C I> (with 0.90..0.99 0.95 I> Drop Out Ratio
undervoltage
seal-in)
1301 O/C I>> O/C I>> (with OFF OFF Overcurrent Time Protec-
direction) ON tion I>>
Block relay for trip
commands
1302 I>> O/C I>> (with 0.05..20.00 A 4.30 A I>> Pickup
direction)
1303 T I>> O/C I>> (with 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec T I>> Time Delay
direction)
1304 Phase Direction O/C I>> (with Forward Reverse Phase Direction
direction) Reverse
1305 LINE ANGLE O/C I>> (with -90..90 ° 60 ° Line Angle

direction)
7UM62 Manual 525

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

1401 O/C Ip Inverse O/C OFF OFF Inverse O/C Time Protec-
Time Protection ON tion Ip
commands
1402 Ip Inverse O/C 0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A Ip Pickup
Time Protection
1403 T Ip Inverse O/C 0.05..3.20 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T Ip Time Dial

Time Protection
1404 TIME DIAL: TD Inverse O/C 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 TIME DIAL: TD

Time Protection
1405 IEC CURVE Inverse O/C Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Time Protection Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
1406 ANSI CURVE Inverse O/C Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve
Time Protection Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Definite Inverse
1407 VOLT. INFLU- Inverse O/C without without Voltage Influence

ENCE Time Protection Voltage controlled
Voltage restraint
1408 U< Inverse O/C 10.0..125.0 V 75.0 V U< Threshold for Release
Time Protection Ip
1601 Ther. OVER LOAD Thermal Over- OFF OFF Thermal Overload Protec-
load Protection ON tion
commands
Alarm Only
1602 K-FACTOR Thermal Over- 0.10..4.00 1.11 K-Factor
load Protection
1603 TIME CONSTANT Thermal Over- 30..32000 sec 600 sec Thermal Time Constant
load Protection
1604 Θ ALARM Thermal Over- 70..100 % 90 % Thermal Alarm Stage

load Protection
1605 TEMP. RISE I Thermal Over- 40..200 °C 100 °C Temperature Rise at Rated
load Protection Sec. Curr.
1606 TEMP. RISE I Thermal Over- 104..392 °F 212 °F Temperature Rise at Rated
load Protection Sec. Curr.
1607 TEMP. INPUT Thermal Over- Disabled Disabled Temperature Input

load Protection 4-20 mA
Fieldbus
Temp. of RTD 1
1608 TEMP. SCAL. Thermal Over- 40..300 °C 100 °C Temperature for Scaling
load Protection
1609 TEMP. SCAL. Thermal Over- 104..572 °F 212 °F Temperature for Scaling
load Protection
1610A I ALARM Thermal Over- 0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A Current Overload Alarm

load Protection Setpoint
526 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.12 Settings

1612A Kτ-FACTOR Thermal Over- 1.0..10.0 1.0 Kt-Factor when Motor
load Protection Stops
1615A I MAX THERM. Thermal Over- 0.50..8.00 A 3.30 A Maximum Current for Ther-
load Protection mal Replica
1616A T EMERGENCY Thermal Over- 10..15000 sec 100 sec Emergency Time
load Protection
1701 UNBALANCE Unbalance OFF OFF Unbalance Load Protection

LOAD Load (Negative ON
Sequence) Block relay for trip
commands
1702 I2> Unbalance 3.0..30.0 % 10.6 % Continously Permissible

Load (Negative Current I2
Sequence)
1703 T WARN Unbalance 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 20.00 sec Warning Stage Time Delay
Load (Negative
Sequence)
1704 FACTOR K Unbalance 2.0..100.0 sec; ∞ 18.7 sec Negativ Sequence Factor K
Load (Negative
Sequence)
1705 T COOL DOWN Unbalance 0..50000 sec 1650 sec Time for Cooling Down
Load (Negative
Sequence)
1706 I2>> Unbalance 10..100 % 60 % I2>> Pickup

Load (Negative
Sequence)
1707 T I2>> Unbalance 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec T I2>> Time Delay
Load (Negative
Sequence)
1801 O/C STARTUP Startup O/C OFF OFF Startup O/C protection
protection ON
commands
1802 STARTUP I> Startup O/C 0.10..20.00 A 1.30 A I> Pickup

protection
1803 STARTUP T I> Startup O/C 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T I> Time Delay
protection
2001 DIFF. PROT. Differential Pro- OFF OFF Differential Protection

tection ON
commands
2005 INC.CHAR.START Differential Pro- OFF OFF Increase of Trip Char.

tection ON During Start
2006 INRUSH 2.HARM. Differential Pro- OFF ON Inrush with 2. Harmonic

tection ON Restraint
2007 RESTR. n.HARM. Differential Pro- OFF OFF n-th Harmonic Restraint
tection 3. Harmonic
5. Harmonic
7UM62 Manual 527

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

2021 I-DIFF> Differential Pro- 0.05..2.00 I/InO 0.20 I/InO Pickup Value of Differential
tection Curr.
2026A T I-DIFF> Differential Pro- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T I-DIFF> Time Delay
tection
2031 I-DIFF>> Differential Pro- 0.5..12.0 I/InO; ∞ 7.5 I/InO Pickup Value of High Set
tection Trip
2036A T I-DIFF>> Differential Pro- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T I-DIFF>> Time Delay
tection
2041A SLOPE 1 Differential Pro- 0.10..0.50 0.25 Slope 1 of Tripping Charac-

tection teristic
2042A BASE POINT 1 Differential Pro- 0.00..2.00 I/InO 0.00 I/InO Base Point for Slope 1 of
tection Charac.
2043A SLOPE 2 Differential Pro- 0.25..0.95 0.50 Slope 2 of Tripping Charac-

tection teristic
2044A BASE POINT 2 Differential Pro- 0.00..10.00 I/InO 2.50 I/InO Base Point for Slope 2 of
tection Charac.
2051A I-REST. STARTUP Differential Pro- 0.00..2.00 I/InO 0.10 I/InO I-RESTRAINT for Start
tection Detection
2052A START-FACTOR Differential Pro- 1.0..2.0 1.0 Factor for Increasing of

tection Char. at Start
2053 T START MAX Differential Pro- 0.0..180.0 sec 5.0 sec Maximum Permissible Star-
tection ting Time
2056A I-ADD ON STAB. Differential Pro- 2.00..15.00 I/InO 4.00 I/InO Pickup for Add-on Stabiliza-
tection tion
2057A T ADD ON-STAB. Differential Pro- 2..250 Cycle; ∞ 15 Cycle Duration of Add-on Stabili-
tection zation
2061 2. HARMONIC Differential Pro- 10..80 % 15 % 2nd Harmonic Content in I-

tection DIFF
2062A CROSSB. 2. HARM Differential Pro- 2..1000 Cycle; 0; ∞ 3 Cycle Time for Cross-blocking
tection 2nd Harm.
2071 n. HARMONIC Differential Pro- 10..80 % 30 % n-th Harmonic Content in I-

tection DIFF
2072A CROSSB. n.HARM Differential Pro- 2..1000 Cycle; 0; ∞ 0 Cycle Time for Cross-blocking n-
tection th Harm.
2073A IDIFFmax n.HM Differential Pro- 0.5..12.0 I/InO 1.5 I/InO Limit IDIFFmax of n-th
tection Harm.Restraint
2101 REF PROT. Restricted Earth OFF OFF Restricted Earth Fault Pro-
Fault Protection ON tection
commands
2102 REF I> BLOCK Restricted Earth 1.0..2.5 I/InO 1.5 I/InO REF Pickup of Phase Cur-
Fault Protection rent Blocking
2103 REF U0>RELEASE Restricted Earth 1.0..100.0 V; 0 5.0 V REF Pickup of U0>
Fault Protection Release
528 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.12 Settings

2110 I-REF> Restricted Earth 0.05..2.00 I/InO 0.10 I/InO I-REF> Pickup
Fault Protection
2112 T I-REF> Restricted Earth 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T I-REF> Time Delay
Fault Protection
2113A SLOPE Restricted Earth 0.00..0.95 0.25 Slope of Charac. I-REF> =

Fault Protection f(I0-Rest)
2114A BASE POINT Restricted Earth 0.00..2.00 I/InO 0.00 I/InO Base Point for Slope of
Fault Protection Characteristic
3001 UNDEREXCIT. Underexcitation OFF OFF Underexcitation Protection

Protection ON
commands
3002 1/xd CHAR. 1 Underexcitation 0.25..3.00 0.41 Conductance Intersect

Protection Characteristic 1
3003 ANGLE 1 Underexcitation 50..120 ° 80 ° Inclination Angle of Charac-

Protection teristic 1
3004 T CHAR. 1 Underexcitation 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec Characteristic 1 Time Delay
Protection


3007 T CHAR. 2 Underexcitation 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec Characteristic 2 Time Delay
Protection


3010 T CHAR 3 Underexcitation 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec Characteristic 3 Time Delay
Protection
3011 T SHRT Uex< Underexcitation 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T-Short Time Delay (Char.
Protection & Uexc<)
3012 EXCIT. VOLT. Underexcitation ON OFF State of Excitation Volt.

Protection OFF Supervision
3013 Uexcit. < Underexcitation 0.50..8.00 V 2.00 V Excitation Voltage Superv.

Protection Pickup
3014A Umin Underexcitation 10.0..125.0 V 25.0 V Undervoltage blocking Pik-

Protection kup
3101 REVERSE Reverse Power OFF OFF Reverse Power Protection

POWER Protection ON
commands
3102 P> REVERSE Reverse Power -30.00..-0.50 % -1.93 % P> Reverse Pickup
Protection
3103 T-SV-OPEN Reverse Power 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec Time Delay Long (without
Protection Stop Valve)
7UM62 Manual 529

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

3104 T-SV-CLOSED Reverse Power 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Time Delay Short (with
Protection Stop Valve)
3105A T-HOLD Reverse Power 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec Pickup Holding Time
Protection
3201 FORWARD Forward Power OFF OFF Forward Power Supervision

POWER Supervision ON
commands
3202 Pf< Forward Power 0.5..120.0 % 9.7 % P-forw.< Supervision Pik-

Supervision kup
3203 Pf> Forward Power 1.0..120.0 % 96.6 % P-forw.> Supervision Pik-

Supervision kup
3204 T-Pf< Forward Power 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec T-P-forw.< Time Delay
Supervision
3205 T-Pf> Forward Power 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec T-P-forw.> Time Delay
Supervision
3206A MEAS. METHOD Forward Power Method accurate Method accurate Method of Operation
Supervision Method fast
3301 IMPEDANCE Impedance Pro- OFF OFF Impedance Protection

PROT. tection ON
commands
3302 IMP I> Impedance Pro- 0.10..20.00 A 1.35 A Fault Detection I> Pickup
tection
3303 U< SEAL-IN Impedance Pro- ON OFF State of Undervoltage Seal-

tection OFF in
3304 U< Impedance Pro- 10.0..125.0 V 80.0 V Undervoltage Seal-in Pik-

tection kup
3305 T-SEAL-IN Impedance Pro- 0.10..60.00 sec 4.00 sec Duration of Undervoltage
tection Seal-in
3306 ZONE Z1 Impedance Pro- 0.05..130.00 Ohm 2.91 Ohm Impedance Zone Z1
tection
3307 T-Z1 Impedance Pro- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec Impedance Zone Z1 Time
tection Delay
3308 ZONE Z1B Impedance Pro- 0.05..65.00 Ohm 4.99 Ohm Impedance Zone Z1B
tection
3309 T-Z1B Impedance Pro- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec Impedance Zone Z1B Time
tection Delay
3310 ZONE Z2 Impedance Pro- 0.05..65.00 Ohm 4.16 Ohm Impedanz Zone Z2
tection
3311 ZONE2 T2 Impedance Pro- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Impedance Zone Z2 Time
tection Delay
3312 T END Impedance Pro- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec T END: Final Time Delay
tection
3313 POWER SWING Impedance Pro- ON OFF Power Swing Blocking

tection OFF
530 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.12 Settings

3314 P/SPOL-TPOL Impedance Pro- 0.10..30.00 Ohm 8.00 Ohm Distance betw. Power
tection Swing - Trip-Pol.
3315 dZ/dt Impedance Pro- 1.0..600.0 Ohm/s 300.0 Ohm/s Rate of Change of dZ/dt
tection
3316A BLOCKING OF Impedance Pro- Zone Z1 Zone Z1 Power Swing Blocking

tection Zone Z1 and Z2 locks out
3317A T-ACTION P/S Impedance Pro- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec Power Swing Action Time
tection
3501 OUT-OF-STEP Out-of-Step OFF OFF Out-of-Step Protection

Protection ON
commands
3502 I1> RELEASE Out-of-Step 20.0..400.0 % 120.0 % Pickup Current for Measu-
Protection ring Release I1>
3503 I2< RELEASE Out-of-Step 5.0..100.0 % 20.0 % Pickup Current for Measu-
Protection ring Release I2<
3504 Za Out-of-Step 0.20..130.00 Ohm 4.50 Ohm Resistance Za of the Poly-

Protection gon (width)
3505 Zb Out-of-Step 0.10..130.00 Ohm 12.00 Ohm Reactance Zb of the Poly-

Protection gon (reverse)
3506 Zc Out-of-Step 0.10..130.00 Ohm 3.60 Ohm Reactance Zc of Polygon

Protection (forward char.1)
3507 Zd - Zc Out-of-Step 0.00..130.00 Ohm 6.40 Ohm Reactance Dif. Char.1 -

Protection Char.2 (forward)
3508 PHI POLYGON Out-of-Step 60.0..90.0 ° 90.0 ° Angle of Inclination of the

Protection Polygon
3509 REP. CHAR. 1 Out-of-Step 1..4 1 Number of Power Swing:

3510 REP. CHAR. 2 Out-of-Step 1..8 4 Number of Power Swing:

3511 T-HOLDING Out-of-Step 0.20..60.00 sec 20.00 sec Holding Time of Fault
Protection Detection
3512 T-SIGNAL Out-of-Step 0.02..0.15 sec 0.05 sec Min. Signal Time for Annun.
Protection Char. 1/2
4001 UNDERVOLTAGE Undervoltage OFF OFF Undervoltage Protection

Protection ON
commands
4002 U< Undervoltage 10.0..125.0 V 75.0 V U< Pickup

Protection
4003 T U< Undervoltage 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec T U< Time Delay
Protection
4004 U<< Undervoltage 10.0..125.0 V 65.0 V U<< Pickup

Protection
4005 T U<< Undervoltage 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T U<< Time Delay
Protection
7UM62 Manual 531

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

4006A U< DOUT RATIO Undervoltage 1.01..1.20 1.05 U< Drop Out Ratio
Protection
4101 OVERVOLTAGE Overvoltage OFF OFF Overvoltage Protection

Protection ON
commands
4102 U> Overvoltage 30.0..170.0 V 115.0 V U> Pickup

Protection
4103 T U> Overvoltage 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 3.00 sec T U> Time Delay
Protection
4104 U>> Overvoltage 30.0..170.0 V 130.0 V U>> Pickup

Protection
4105 T U>> Overvoltage 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T U>> Time Delay
Protection
4106A U> DOUT RATIO Overvoltage 0.90..0.99 0.95 U> Drop Out Ratio
Protection
4107A VALUES U> Overvoltage Voltage protection Voltage protection Measurement Values for
Protection with U-Phase-Phase with U-Phase-Phase U>
Voltage protection
with U-Phase-earth
4201 O/U FREQUENCY Frequency Pro- OFF OFF Over / Under Frequency
tection ON Protection
commands
4202 f1 PICKUP Frequency Pro- 40.00..65.00 Hz 48.00 Hz f1 Pickup
tection

tection
4204 T f1 Frequency Pro- 0.00..600.00 sec 1.00 sec T f1 Time Delay

tection

tection

tection

tection

tection

tection

tection

tection

tection
532 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.12 Settings

tection
4214 THRESHOLD f4 Frequency Pro- Freq. prot. stage Freq. prot. stage Handling of Threshold
tection automatic automatic Stage f4
Freq. prot. stage
overfreqency
Freq. prot. stage
underfreqency
4215 Umin Frequency Pro- 10.0..125.0 V; 0 65.0 V Minimum Required Voltage

tection for Operation
4301 OVEREXC. PROT. Overexcitation OFF OFF Overexcitation Protection

Protection (U/f) ON (U/f)
commands
4302 U/f > Overexcitation 1.00..1.20 1.10 U/f > Pickup

Protection (U/f)
4303 T U/f > Overexcitation 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec T U/f > Time Delay
Protection (U/f)
4304 U/f >> Overexcitation 1.00..1.40 1.40 U/f >> Pickup

Protection (U/f)
4305 T U/f >> Overexcitation 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec T U/f >> Time Delay
Protection (U/f)
4306 t(U/f=1.05) Overexcitation 0..20000 sec 20000 sec U/f = 1.05 Time Delay
Protection (U/f)
Protection (U/f)
Protection (U/f)
Protection (U/f)
Protection (U/f)
Protection (U/f)
Protection (U/f)
Protection (U/f)
4314 T COOL DOWN Overexcitation 0..20000 sec 3600 sec Time for Cooling Down
Protection (U/f)
4401 INV. UNDERVOLT. Inverse Under- OFF OFF Inverse Undervoltage Pro-
voltage Protec- ON tection Up<
tion Block relay for trip
commands
4402 Up< PICKUP Inverse Under- 10.0..125.0 V 75.0 V Up< Pickup

voltage Protec-
tion
7UM62 Manual 533

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

4403 T MUL Inverse Under- 0.10..5.00 sec; 0 1.00 sec Time Multiplier for Charac-
voltage Protec- teristic
tion
4404 T Up< Inverse Under- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T Up< Time Delay
voltage Protec-
tion
4501 df/dt Protect. Rate-of-fre- OFF OFF Rate-of-frequency-change

quency-change ON protection
protection Block relay for trip
commands
4502 df1/dt >/< Rate-of-fre- -df/dt< negative rate -df/dt< negative rate Mode of Threshold (df1/dt
quency-change of freq. change of freq. change >/<)
protection +df/dt> positive rate
of freq. change
4503 STAGE df1/dt Rate-of-fre- 0.1..10.0 Hz/s; ∞ 1.0 Hz/s Pickup Value of df1/dt
quency-change Stage
protection
4504 T df1/dt Rate-of-fre- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Time Delay of df1/dt Stage
quency-change
protection
4505 df1/dt & f1 Rate-of-fre- OFF OFF AND logic with pickup of
quency-change ON stage f1
protection
of freq. change
quency-change Stage
protection
quency-change
protection
protection
of freq. change
quency-change Stage
protection
quency-change
protection
protection
534 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.12 Settings

of freq. change
quency-change Stage
protection
quency-change
protection
protection
4518 U MIN Rate-of-fre- 10.0..125.0 V; 0 65.0 V Minimum Operating

quency-change Voltage Umin
protection
4519A df1/2 HYSTERES. Rate-of-fre- 0.02..0.99 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s Reset Hysteresis for df1/dt
quency-change & df2/dt
protection
4520A df1/2 M-WINDOW Rate-of-fre- 1..25 Cycle 5 Cycle Measuring Window for df1/
quency-change dt & df2/dt
protection
4521A df3/4 HYSTERES. Rate-of-fre- 0.02..0.99 Hz/s 0.40 Hz/s Reset Hysteresis for df3/dt
quency-change & df4/dt
protection
4522A df3/4 M-WINDOW Rate-of-fre- 1..25 Cycle 5 Cycle Measuring Window for df3/
quency-change dt & df4/dt
protection
4601 VECTOR JUMP Jump of Voltage OFF OFF Jump of Voltage Vector
Vector ON
commands
4602 DELTA PHI Jump of Voltage 2..30 ° 10 ° Jump of Phasor DELTA

Vector PHI
4603 T DELTA PHI Jump of Voltage 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T DELTA PHI Time Delay
Vector
4604 T RESET Jump of Voltage 0.10..60.00 sec; ∞ 5.00 sec Reset Time after Trip
Vector
4605A U MIN Jump of Voltage 10.0..125.0 V 80.0 V Minimal Operation Voltage

Vector U MIN
4606A U MAX Jump of Voltage 10.0..170.0 V 130.0 V Maximal Operation Voltage

Vector U MAX
4607A T BLOCK Jump of Voltage 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec Time Delay of Blocking
Vector
5001 S/E/F PROT. Stator Earth OFF OFF Stator Earth Fault Protec-
Fault Protection ON tion
commands
7UM62 Manual 535

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

5002 U0> Stator Earth 2.0..125.0 V 10.0 V U0> Pickup
Fault Protection
5003 3I0> Stator Earth 2..1000 mA 5 mA 3I0> Pickup

Fault Protection
5004 DIR. ANGLE Stator Earth 0..360 ° 15 ° Angle for Direction Determi-
Fault Protection nation
5005 T S/E/F Stator Earth 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec T S/E/F Time Delay
Fault Protection
5101 O/C PROT. Iee> Sensitive Earth OFF OFF Sensitive Earth Current
Current Protec- ON Protection
commands
5102 IEE> Sensitive Earth 2..1000 mA 10 mA Iee> Pickup

Current Protec-
tion
5103 T IEE> Sensitive Earth 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 5.00 sec T Iee> Time delay
Current Protec-
tion
5104 IEE>> Sensitive Earth 2..1000 mA 23 mA Iee>> Pickup

Current Protec-
tion
5105 T IEE>> Sensitive Earth 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec T Iee>> Time Delay
Current Protec-
tion
5106 IEE< Sensitive Earth 1.5..50.0 mA; 0 0.0 mA Iee< Pickup (Interrupted
Current Protec- Circuit)
tion
5201 SEF 3rd HARM. Stator Earth OFF OFF Stator Earth Fault Protec-
Fault Protec- ON tion 3rdHarm.
tion 3rdHarm. Block relay for trip
commands
5202 U0 3.HARM< Stator Earth 0.2..40.0 V 1.0 V U0 3rd Harmonic< Pickup
Fault Protec-
tion 3rdHarm.
5203 U0 3.HARM> Stator Earth 0.2..40.0 V 2.0 V U0 3rd Harmonic> Pickup

Fault Protec-
tion 3rdHarm.
5204 T SEF 3. HARM. Stator Earth 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T SEF 3rd Harmonic Time
Fault Protec- Delay
tion 3rdHarm.
5205 P min > Stator Earth 10..100 %; 0 40 % Release Threshold Pmin>

Fault Protec-
tion 3rdHarm.
5206 U1 min > Stator Earth 50.0..125.0 V; 0 80.0 V Release Threshold U1min>
Fault Protec-
tion 3rdHarm.
536 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.12 Settings

5301 100% SEF-PROT. 100% Stator- OFF OFF 100% Stator-Earth-Fault
Earth-Fault Pro- ON Protection
tection Block relay for trip
commands
5302 R< SEF ALARM 100% Stator- 20..700 Ohm 100 Ohm Pickup Value of Alarm
Earth-Fault Pro- Stage Rsef<
tection
5303 R<< SEF TRIP 100% Stator- 20..700 Ohm 20 Ohm Pickup Value of Tripping
Earth-Fault Pro- Stage Rsef<<
tection
5304 T SEF ALARM 100% Stator- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec Time Delay of Alarm Stage
Earth-Fault Pro- Rsef<
tection
5305 T SEF TRIP 100% Stator- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Time Delay of Tripping
Earth-Fault Pro- Stage Rsef<<
tection
5306 SEF I>> 100% Stator- 0.02..1.50 A 0.40 A Pickup Value of I SEF>>
Earth-Fault Pro- Stage
tection
5307 U20 MIN 100% Stator- 0.3..15.0 V 1.0 V Supervision Threshold of

Earth-Fault Pro- 20Hz Voltage
tection
5308 I20 MIN 100% Stator- 5..40 mA 10 mA Supervision Threshold of

Earth-Fault Pro- 20Hz Current
tection
5309 PHI I SEF 100% Stator- -60..60 ° 0° Correction Angle for I SEF
Earth-Fault Pro- 100%
tection
5310A SEF Rps 100% Stator- 0.0..700.0 Ohm 0.0 Ohm Resistance Rps
Earth-Fault Pro-
tection
5311A Rl-PARALLEL 100% Stator- 20..700 Ohm; ∞ ∞ Ohm Parallel Load Resistance
Earth-Fault Pro-
tection
6001 ROTOR E/F Rotor Earth OFF OFF Rotor Earth Fault Protec-
Fault Protection ON tion (R, fn)
commands
6002 RE< WARN Rotor Earth 3.0..30.0 kOhm 10.0 kOhm Pickup Value of Warning
Fault Protection Stage Re<
6003 RE<< TRIP Rotor Earth 1.0..5.0 kOhm 2.0 kOhm Pickup Value of Tripping
Fault Protection Stage Re<<
6004 T-WARN-RE< Rotor Earth 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec Time Delay of Warning
Fault Protection Stage Re<
6005 T-TRIP-RE<< Rotor Earth 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Time Delay of Tripping
Fault Protection Stage Re<<
6006 X COUPLING Rotor Earth -100..800 Ohm 398 Ohm Coupling Reactance
Fault Protection
7UM62 Manual 537

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

6007 R SERIES Rotor Earth 0..999 Ohm 50 Ohm Series Resistance (e.g.
Fault Protection Meas. Brushes)
6008 I RE< Rotor Earth 1.0..50.0 mA; 0 2.0 mA Pickup Value of Failure
Fault Protection Detection Ire<
6009 PHI I RE Rotor Earth -15.0..15.0 ° 0.0 ° Correction Angle for Ire
Fault Protection
6101 REF 1-3Hz Rotor Earth OFF OFF Rotor Earth Fault Protec-
Fault Protec- ON tion (1-3Hz)
tion (1-3Hz) Block relay for trip
commands
6102 RE< WARN Rotor Earth 5.0..80.0 kOhm 40.0 kOhm Pickup Value of Warning
Fault Protec- Stage Re<
tion (1-3Hz)
6103 RE<< TRIP Rotor Earth 1.0..10.0 kOhm 5.0 kOhm Pickup Value of Tripping
Fault Protec- Stage Re<<
tion (1-3Hz)
6104 T-WARN-RE< Rotor Earth 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec Time Delay of Warning
Fault Protec- Stage Re<
tion (1-3Hz)
6105 T-TRIP-RE<< Rotor Earth 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Time Delay of Tripping
Fault Protec- Stage Re<<
tion (1-3Hz)
6106 Qc < Rotor Earth 0.00..1.00 mAs 0.02 mAs Pickup Value of open Rotor
Fault Protec- Circuit (Qc)
tion (1-3Hz)
6107A TEST RESISTOR Rotor Earth 1.0..10.0 kOhm 3.3 kOhm Testing Resistor
Fault Protec-
tion (1-3Hz)
6501 STARTUP MOTOR Motor Starting OFF OFF Motor Starting Time Super-
Time Supervi- ON vision
sion Block relay for trip
commands
6502 START. CURRENT Motor Starting 0.10..16.00 A 3.12 A Starting Current of Motor
Time Supervi-
sion
6503 STARTING TIME Motor Starting 1.0..180.0 sec 8.5 sec Starting Time of Motor
Time Supervi-
sion
6504 LOCK ROTOR Motor Starting 0.5..120.0 sec; ∞ 6.0 sec Permissible Locked Rotor
TIME Time Supervi- Time
sion
6505 I MOTOR START Motor Starting 0.60..10.00 A 1.60 A Current Pickup Value of
Time Supervi- Motor Starting
sion
6601 RESTART INHIBIT Restart Inhibit OFF OFF Restart Inhibit for Motors
for Motors ON
commands
538 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.12 Settings

6602 IStart/IMOTnom Restart Inhibit 1.5..10.0 4.9 I Start / I Motor nominal
for Motors
6603 T START MAX Restart Inhibit 3.0..320.0 sec 8.5 sec Maximum Permissible Star-
for Motors ting Time
6604 T EQUAL Restart Inhibit 0.0..320.0 min 1.0 min Temperature Equalization
for Motors Time
6606 MAX.WARM Restart Inhibit 1..4 2 Permissible Number of

STARTS for Motors Warm Starts
6607 #COLD-#WARM Restart Inhibit 1..2 1 Number of Cold Starts -

for Motors Warm Starts
6608 Kτ at STOP Restart Inhibit 1.0..100.0 5.0 Extension of Time Constant

for Motors at Stop
6609 Kτ at RUNNING Restart Inhibit 1.0..100.0 2.0 Extension of Time Constant

for Motors at Running
6610 T MIN. INHIBIT Restart Inhibit 0.2..120.0 min 6.0 min Minimum Restart Inhibit
for Motors Time
7001 BREAKER Breaker Failure OFF OFF Breaker Failure Protection

FAILURE Protection ON
commands
7002 TRIP INTERN Breaker Failure OFF OFF Start with Internal TRIP
Protection Start Breaker Command
Failure with
Bin.Outp.12
Start Breaker
Failure with CFC
7003 CIRC. BR. I> Breaker Failure 0.04..2.00 A 0.20 A Supervision Current Pickup
Protection
7004 TRIP-Timer Breaker Failure 0.06..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.25 sec TRIP-Timer

Protection
7101 INADVERT. EN. Inadvertent OFF OFF Inadvertent Energisation

Energisation ON
commands
7102 I STAGE Inadvertent 0.1..20.0 A; ∞ 0.3 A I Stage Pickup

Energisation
7103 RELEASE U1< Inadvertent 10.0..125.0 V; 0 50.0 V Release Threshold U1<

Energisation
7104 PICK UP T U1< Inadvertent 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 5.00 sec Pickup Time Delay T U1<
Energisation
7105 DROP OUT T U1< Inadvertent 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Drop Out Time Delay T
Energisation U1<
7110 FltDisp.LED/LCD Device Display Targets on Display Targets on Fault Display on LED / LCD
every Pickup every Pickup
Display Targets on
TRIP only
7UM62 Manual 539

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

7201 DC PROTECTION DC Voltage/ OFF OFF DC Voltage/Current Protec-
Current Protec- ON tion
commands
7202 MEAS.METHOD DC Voltage/ Mean Value Mean Value Measurement Method
Current Protec- Root Mean Square (MEAN/RMS Values)
tion
7203 DC >/< DC Voltage/ DC Voltage/Current DC Voltage/Current Method of Operation (DC >/

Current Protec- Stage DC > Stage DC > <)
tion DC Voltage/Current
Stage DC <
7204 U DC >< DC Voltage/ 0.1..8.5 V 2.0 V DC Voltage Pickup

Current Protec-
tion
7205 I DC >< DC Voltage/ 0.2..17.0 mA 4.0 mA DC Current Pickup

Current Protec-
tion
7206 T DC DC Voltage/ 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec Time Delay for Trip of DC
Current Protec- Protection
tion
7301 20 mA (B1) = Analog Outputs 10.0..1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (B1) correspond to
7302 MIN VALUE (B1) Analog Outputs 0.0..5.0 mA 1.0 mA Output value (B1) valid
from
7303 20 mA (B2) = Analog Outputs 10.0..1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (B2) correspond to
7304 MIN VALUE (B2) Analog Outputs 0.0..5.0 mA 1.0 mA Output value (B2) valid
from
7305 20 mA (D1) = Analog Outputs 10.0..1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (D1) correspond to
7306 MIN VALUE (D1) Analog Outputs 0.0..5.0 mA 1.0 mA Output value (D1) valid
from
7307 20 mA (D2) = Analog Outputs 10.0..1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (D2) correspond to
7308 MIN VALUE (D2) Analog Outputs 0.0..5.0 mA 1.0 mA Output value (D2) valid
from
8001 FUSE FAIL MON. Supervision OFF OFF Fuse Failure Monitor
ON
8101 MEASURE. Measurement OFF OFF Measurement Supervision

SUPERV Supervision ON
8102 BALANCE U-LIMIT Measurement 10..100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for

Supervision Balance Monitoring
8103 BAL. FACTOR U Measurement 0.58..0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage
Supervision Monitor
8104 BAL. I LIMIT S1 Measurement 0.10..1.00 A 0.50 A Current Balance Monitor

Supervision Side 1
8105 BAL. FACT. I S1 Measurement 0.10..0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current
Supervision Monitor S1
8106 BAL. I LIMIT S2 Measurement 0.10..1.00 A 0.50 A Current Balance Monitor

Supervision Side 2
540 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.12 Settings

8107 BAL. FACT. I S2 Measurement 0.10..0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current
Supervision Monitor S2
8108 SUM.thres. U Measurement 10..200 V 10 V Summation Thres. for Volt.

Supervision Monitoring
8109 SUM.Fact. U Measurement 0.60..0.95; 0 0.75 Factor for Volt. Sum. Moni-
Supervision toring
8110 ΣI THRESHOLD S1 Measurement 0.05..2.00 A 0.10 A Summated Cur. Mon.

Supervision Threshold on Side 1
8111 ΣI FACTOR S1 Measurement 0.00..0.95 0.10 Summated Current Mon.

Supervision Factor on Side 1
8112 ΣI THRESHOLD S2 Measurement 0.05..2.00 A 0.10 A Summated Cur. Mon.

Supervision Threshold on Side 2
8113 ΣI FACTOR S2 Measurement 0.00..0.95 0.10 Summated Current Mon.

Supervision Factor on Side 2
8201 TRIP Cir. SUP. Trip Circuit OFF OFF TRIP Circuit Supervision
Supervision ON
8501 MEAS. VALUE 1> Threshold Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Thres-
supervision Active Power P hold MV1>
Reactive Power Q
Change of Active
Power Delta P
Positive Sequence
Voltage U1
Negative Sequence
Voltage U2
Zero Sequence Cur-
rent I0
Positive Sequence
Current I1
Negative Sequence
Current I2
Power Angle PHI
8502 THRESHOLD Threshold -200..200 % 100 % Pickup Value of Measured

MV1> supervision Value MV1>
8503 MEAS. VALUE 2< Threshold Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Thres-
supervision Active Power P hold MV2<
Reactive Power Q
Change of Active
Power Delta P
Positive Sequence
Voltage U1
Negative Sequence
Voltage U2
Zero Sequence Cur-
rent I0
Positive Sequence
Current I1
Negative Sequence
Current I2
Power Angle PHI

MV2< supervision Value MV2<
7UM62 Manual 541

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

Reactive Power Q
Change of Active
Power Delta P
Positive Sequence
Voltage U1
Negative Sequence
Voltage U2
Zero Sequence Cur-
rent I0
Positive Sequence
Current I1
Negative Sequence
Current I2
Power Angle PHI

Reactive Power Q
Change of Active
Power Delta P
Positive Sequence
Voltage U1
Negative Sequence
Voltage U2
Zero Sequence Cur-
rent I0
Positive Sequence
Current I1
Negative Sequence
Current I2
Power Angle PHI

Reactive Power Q
Change of Active
Power Delta P
Positive Sequence
Voltage U1
Negative Sequence
Voltage U2
Zero Sequence Cur-
rent I0
Positive Sequence
Current I1
Negative Sequence
Current I2
Power Angle PHI

542 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.12 Settings

Reactive Power Q
Change of Active
Power Delta P
Positive Sequence
Voltage U1
Negative Sequence
Voltage U2
Zero Sequence Cur-
rent I0
Positive Sequence
Current I1
Negative Sequence
Current I2
Power Angle PHI

8601 EXTERN TRIP 1 External Trip OFF OFF External Trip Function 1
Functions ON
commands
8602 T DELAY External Trip 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Ext. Trip 1 Time Delay
Functions
Functions ON
commands
Functions
Functions ON
commands
Functions
Functions ON
commands
Functions
9011A RTD 1 TYPE RTD-Box not connected Pt 100 Ohm RTD 1: Type
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9012A RTD 1 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil Winding RTD 1: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
7UM62 Manual 543

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50..250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD 1: Temperature Stage
1 Pickup
9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58..482 °F; ∞ 212 °F RTD 1: Temperature Stage
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
9021A RTD 2 TYPE RTD-Box not connected not connected RTD 2: Type
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9022A RTD 2 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil Other RTD 2: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
544 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.12 Settings

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
7UM62 Manual 545

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
2 Pickup
2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
1 Pickup
1 Pickup
546 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.12 Settings

2 Pickup
2 Pickup
9101A RTD10 TYPE RTD-Box not connected not connected RTD10: Type
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm
9102A RTD10 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil Other RTD10: Location

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
9103 RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50..250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD10: Temperature

Stage 1 Pickup
9104 RTD10 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58..482 °F; ∞ 212 °F RTD10: Temperature

Stage 1 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Stage 1 Pickup

Stage 1 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup
Pt 100 Ohm
Ni 120 Ohm
Ni 100 Ohm

Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
7UM62 Manual 547

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

Stage 1 Pickup

Stage 1 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup

Stage 2 Pickup
548 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A.13 List of Information
NOTE: The following table lists all data which are available in the maximum complement of the device. De-
pendent on the ordered model, only those data may be present which are valid for the individual version.
The symbol ’ > ’ indicates that the source of the indication is a binary input.
F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103

of
Infor-
matio
n
Ground Fault Log On/Off
Marked in Oscill. Record

Trip (Fault) Log On/Off
General Interrogation
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00003 >Synchronize Internal Real Time Device SP_Ev * * LED BI BO 135 48 1
Clock (>Time Synch)
00004 >Trigger Waveform Capture Oscillographic Fault SP * * M LED BI BO 135 49 1 GI

(>Trig.Wave.Cap.) Records
00005 >Reset LED (>Reset LED) Device SP * * LED BI BO 135 50 1 GI
00007 >Setting Group Select Bit 0 (>Set Change Group SP * * LED BI BO 135 51 1 GI
Group Bit0)
00015 >Test mode (>Test mode) Device SP * * LED BI BO 135 53 1 GI
00016 >Stop data transmission (>DataStop) Device SP * * LED BI BO 135 54 1 GI
00051 Device is Operational and Protecting Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 81 1 GI

(Device OK) OF
F
00052 At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active Device IntSP ON * LED BO 70 18 1 GI

(ProtActive) OF
F
00055 Reset Device (Reset Device) Device OUT ON * LED BO
00056 Initial Start of Device (Initial Start) Device OUT ON * LED BO 70 5 1
00060 Reset LED (Reset LED) Device OUT_ ON * LED BO 70 19 1

Ev
00067 Resume (Resume) Device OUT ON * LED BO
00068 Clock Synchronization Error (Clock Supervision OUT ON * LED BO

SyncError) OF
F
00069 Daylight Saving Time (DayLightSav- Device OUT ON * LED BO

Time) OF
F
00070 Setting calculation is running (Settings Device OUT ON * LED BO 70 22 1 GI

Calc.) OF
F
00071 Settings Check (Settings Check) Device OUT * * LED BO
00072 Level-2 change (Level-2 change) Device OUT ON * LED BO

OF
F
00110 Event lost (Event Lost) Supervision OUT_ ON * LED BO 135 130 1
Ev
7UM62 Manual 549

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00113 Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Supervision OUT ON * M LED BO 135 136 1 GI
00125 Chatter ON (Chatter ON) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 145 1 GI

OF
F
00140 Error with a summary alarm (Error Supervision OUT * * LED BO

Sum Alarm)
00147 Error Power Supply (Error PwrSupply) Supervision OUT ON * LED BO

OF
F
00160 Alarm Summary Event (Alarm Sum Supervision OUT * * LED BO 70 46 1 GI

Event)
00161 Failure: General Current Supervision Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 70 32 1 GI

(Fail I Superv.) Supervision OF
F
00164 Failure: General Voltage Supervision Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 70 33 1 GI

(Fail U Superv.) Supervision OF
F
00165 Failure: Voltage Summation Phase- Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 184 1 GI
Earth (Fail Σ U Ph-E) Supervision OF
F
00167 Failure: Voltage Balance (Fail U Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 186 1 GI
balance) Supervision OF
F
00171 Failure: Phase Sequence (Fail Ph. Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 70 35 1 GI

Seq.) Supervision OF
F
00176 Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 192 1 GI
(Fail Ph. Seq. U) Supervision OF
F
00177 Failure: Battery empty (Fail Battery) Supervision OUT ON * LED BO

OF
F
00181 Error: A/D converter (Error A/D-conv.) Supervision OUT ON * LED BO

OF
F
00191 Error: Offset (Error Offset) Supervision OUT ON * LED BO

OF
F
00193 Alarm: NO calibration data available Supervision OUT ON * LED BO

(Alarm NO calibr) OF
F
00194 Error: Neutral CT different from MLFB Supervision OUT ON * LED BO

(Error neutralCT) OF
F
00197 Measurement Supervision is switched Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 197 1 GI

OFF (MeasSup OFF) Supervision OF
F
00203 Waveform data deleted (Wave. dele- Oscillographic Fault OUT_ ON * LED BO 135 203 1
ted) Records Ev
550 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00210 Err:1A/5Ajumper different from Supervision OUT ON * LED BO
settingS1 (Err1A/5AwrongS1) OF
F
00211 Err:1A/5Ajumper different from Supervision OUT ON * LED BO

settingS2 (Err1A/5AwrongS2) OF
F
00212 Err: TD1 jumper different from setting Supervision OUT ON * LED BO
(Err. TD1 jumper) OF
F
F
F
00230 Failure: Current Summation on Side 1 Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 155 1 GI
(Fail. Σ I Side1) Supervision OF
F
00231 Failure: Current Summation on Side 2 Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 158 1 GI
(Fail. Σ I Side2) Supervision OF
F
00264 Failure: RTD-Box 1 (Fail: RTD-Box 1) Supervision OUT ON * LED BO 135 208 1 GI
OF
F
00265 Failure: Phase Sequence I side 1 Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 156 1 GI
(FailPh.Seq I S1) Supervision OF
F
00266 Failure: Phase Sequence I side 2 Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 157 1 GI
(FailPh.Seq I S2) Supervision OF
F
00267 Failure: RTD-Box 2 (Fail: RTD-Box 2) Supervision OUT ON * LED BO 135 209 1 GI
OF
F
00272 Set Point Operating Hours (SP. Op Set Points (Stati- OUT ON * LED BO 135 229 1 GI
Hours>) stic) OF
F
00284 Set Point I< alarm (SP. I<) Set Points (Measu- OUT * * LED BO 135 244 1 GI
red Values)
00361 >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped) Power System Data SP ON * LED BI BO 150 38 1 GI
(>FAIL:Feeder VT) 1 OF
F
00394 >UE 3rd Harm. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max Measure- SP ON * BI BO

(>UE3h MiMa Res.) ment Setup
00396 >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>I1 MiMa- Min/Max Measure- SP ON * BI BO

Reset) ment Setup
00399 >U1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>U1 Min/Max Measure- SP ON * BI BO

MiMa Reset) ment Setup
00400 >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>P MiMa Min/Max Measure- SP ON * BI BO

Reset) ment Setup
7UM62 Manual 551

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
00402 >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Q MiMa Min/Max Measure- SP ON * BI BO
Reset) ment Setup
00407 >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Frq Min/Max Measure- SP ON * BI BO

MiMa Reset) ment Setup
00409 >BLOCK Op Counter (>BLOCK Op Statistics SP ON * LED BI BO

Count) OF
F
00571 Fail.: Current symm. supervision side Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 150 196 1 GI
1 (Fail. Isym 1) Supervision OF
F
00572 Fail.: Current symm. supervision side Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 150 197 1 GI
2 (Fail. Isym 2) Supervision OF
F
00576 Primary fault current IL1 Side1 (IL1 Power System Data OUT * ON 150 193 4
S1:) 2 OFF
S1:) 2 OFF
S1:) 2 OFF
S2:) 2 OFF
S2:) 2 OFF
S2:) 2 OFF
01020 Counter of operating hours Statistics OUT

(Op.Hours=)
01202 >BLOCK IEE>> (>BLOCK IEE>>) Sensitive Earth SP ON * LED BI BO 151 102 1 GI
Current Protection OF
F
01203 >BLOCK IEE> (>BLOCK IEE>) Sensitive Earth SP ON * LED BI BO 151 103 1 GI
Current Protection OF
F
01221 IEE>> picked up (IEE>> picked up) Sensitive Earth OUT * ON LED BO 151 121 2 GI
Current Protection OFF
01223 IEE>> TRIP (IEE>> TRIP) Sensitive Earth OUT * ON LED BO 151 123 2 GI
Current Protection
01224 IEE> picked up (IEE> picked up) Sensitive Earth OUT * ON LED BO 151 124 2 GI
Current Protection OFF
01226 IEE> TRIP (IEE> TRIP) Sensitive Earth OUT * ON LED BO 151 126 2 GI
Current Protection
01231 >BLOCK sensitiv earth current prot. Sensitive Earth SP * * LED BI BO

(>BLOCK Sens. E) Current Protection
01232 Earth current prot. is swiched OFF Sensitive Earth OUT ON * LED BO 151 132 1 GI
(IEE OFF) Current Protection OF
F
552 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
01233 Earth current prot. is BLOCKED (IEE Sensitive Earth OUT ON ON LED BO 151 133 1 GI
BLOCKED) Current Protection OF OFF
F
01234 Earth current prot. is ACTIVE (IEE Sensitive Earth OUT ON * LED BO 151 134 1 GI
ACTIVE) Current Protection OF
F
01403 >BLOCK breaker failure (>BLOCK Breaker Failure SP * * LED BI BO

BkrFail) Protection
01422 >Breaker contacts (>Break. Contact) Breaker Failure SP ON * LED BI BO 166 120 1 GI
Protection OF
F
01423 >ext. start 1 breaker failure prot. Breaker Failure SP ON * LED BI BO 166 121 1 GI
(>ext.start1 B/F) Protection OF
F
01441 >ext. start 2 breaker failure prot. Breaker Failure SP ON * LED BI BO 166 122 1 GI
(>ext.start2 B/F) Protection OF
F
01442 >int. start breaker failure prot. (>int. Breaker Failure SP ON * LED BI BO 166 123 1 GI
start B/F) Protection OF
F
01443 Breaker fail. started intern (int. start B/ Breaker Failure OUT ON * LED BO 166 190 1 GI
F) Protection OF
F
01444 Breaker failure I> (B/F I>) Breaker Failure OUT ON * LED BO 166 191 1 GI
Protection OF
F
01451 Breaker failure is switched OFF Breaker Failure OUT ON * LED BO 166 151 1 GI
(BkrFail OFF) Protection OF
F
01452 Breaker failure is BLOCKED (BkrFail Breaker Failure OUT ON ON LED BO 166 152 1 GI
BLOCK) Protection OF OFF
F
01453 Breaker failure is ACTIVE (BkrFail Breaker Failure OUT ON * LED BO 166 153 1 GI
ACTIVE) Protection OF
F
01455 Breaker failure protection: picked up Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO 166 155 2 GI
(B/F picked up) Protection OFF
01471 Breaker failure TRIP (BrkFailure Breaker Failure OUT * ON M LED BO 166 171 2 GI
TRIP) Protection
01503 >BLOCK thermal overload protection Thermal Overload SP * * LED BI BO

(>BLK ThOverload) Protection
01506 >Reset memory for thermal replica O/ Thermal Overload SP ON * LED BI BO

L (>RM th.rep. O/L) Protection OF
F
01507 >Emergency start O/L (>Emer.Start O/ Thermal Overload SP ON * LED BI BO 167 7 1 GI

L) Protection OF
F
7UM62 Manual 553

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
01508 >Failure temperature input Thermal Overload SP ON * LED BI BO 167 8 1 GI
(>Fail.Temp.inp) Protection OF
F
01511 Thermal Overload Protection OFF Thermal Overload OUT ON * LED BO 167 11 1 GI
(Th.Overload OFF) Protection OF
F
01512 Thermal Overload Protection BLOK- Thermal Overload OUT ON ON LED BO 167 12 1 GI
KED (Th.Overload BLK) Protection OF OFF
F
01513 Overload Protection ACTIVE (Over- Thermal Overload OUT ON * LED BO 167 13 1 GI
load ACT) Protection OF
F
01514 Failure temperature input Thermal Overload OUT ON * LED BO 167 14 1 GI

(Fail.Temp.inp) Protection OF
F
01515 Overload Current Alarm (I alarm) (O/L Thermal Overload OUT ON * LED BO 167 15 1 GI
I Alarm) Protection OF
F
01516 Thermal Overload Alarm (O/L Θ Thermal Overload OUT ON * LED BO 167 16 1 GI
Alarm) Protection OF
F
01517 Thermal Overload picked up (O/L Th. Thermal Overload OUT ON * LED BO 167 17 1 GI
pick.up) Protection OF
F
01519 Reset memory for thermal replica O/L Thermal Overload OUT ON * LED BO 167 19 1 GI
(RM th.rep. O/L) Protection OF
F
01521 Thermal Overload TRIP (ThOverload Thermal Overload OUT * ON LED BO 167 21 2 GI
TRIP) Protection
01720 >BLOCK direction I>> stage (>BLOCK O/C I>> (with direc- SP ON * LED BI BO 60 18 1 GI
dir.) tion) OF
F
01721 >BLOCK I>> (>BLOCK I>>) O/C I>> (with direc- SP * * LED BI BO
tion)
01722 >BLOCK I> (>BLOCK I>) O/C I> (with under- SP * * LED BI BO
voltage seal-in)
01801 O/C fault detection stage I>> phase L1 O/C I>> (with direc- OUT * ON LED BO 60 46 2 GI
(I>> Fault L1) tion) OFF
01806 O/C I>> direction forward (I>> for- O/C I>> (with direc- OUT * ON LED BO 60 208 2 GI
ward) tion) OFF
01807 O/C I>> direction backward (I>> back- O/C I>> (with direc- OUT * ON LED BO 60 209 2 GI
ward) tion) OFF
01808 O/C prot. I>> picked up (I>> picked O/C I>> (with direc- OUT * ON LED BO 60 210 2 GI
up) tion) OFF
554 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
01809 O/C I>> TRIP (I>> TRIP) O/C I>> (with direc- OUT * ON M LED BO 60 211 2 GI
tion)
01811 O/C fault detection stage I> phase L1 O/C I> (with under- OUT * ON LED BO 60 50 2 GI
(I> Fault L1) voltage seal-in) OFF
01815 O/C I> TRIP (I> TRIP) O/C I> (with under- OUT * ON M LED BO 60 71 2 GI
voltage seal-in)
01883 >BLOCK inverse O/C time protection Inverse O/C Time SP * * LED BI BO
(>BLOCK O/C Ip) Protection
01891 O/C protection Ip is switched OFF (O/ Inverse O/C Time OUT ON * LED BO 60 180 1 GI
C Ip OFF) Protection OF
F
01892 O/C protection Ip is BLOCKED (O/C Ip Inverse O/C Time OUT ON ON LED BO 60 181 1 GI
BLOCKED) Protection OF OFF
F
01893 O/C protection Ip is ACTIVE (O/C Ip Inverse O/C Time OUT ON * LED BO 60 182 1 GI
F
01896 O/C fault detection Ip phase L1 (O/C Inverse O/C Time OUT * ON LED BO 60 184 2 GI
Ip Fault L1) Protection OFF
01899 O/C Ip picked up (O/C Ip pick.up) Inverse O/C Time OUT * ON LED BO 60 183 2 GI
Protection OFF
01900 O/C Ip TRIP (O/C Ip TRIP) Inverse O/C Time OUT * ON M LED BO 60 187 2 GI
Protection
01950 >O/C prot. : BLOCK undervoltage O/C I> (with under- SP ON * LED BI BO 60 200 1 GI
seal-in (>Useal-in BLK) voltage seal-in) OF
F
01955 O/C prot. stage I>> is switched OFF O/C I>> (with direc- OUT ON * LED BO 60 205 1 GI
(I>> OFF) tion) OF
F
01956 O/C prot. stage I>> is BLOCKED (I>> O/C I>> (with direc- OUT ON ON LED BO 60 206 1 GI
BLOCKED) tion) OF OFF
F
01957 O/C prot. stage I>> is ACTIVE (I>> O/C I>> (with direc- OUT ON * LED BO 60 207 1 GI
ACTIVE) tion) OF
F
01965 O/C prot. stage I> is switched OFF (I> O/C I> (with under- OUT ON * LED BO 60 215 1 GI
OFF) voltage seal-in) OF
F
7UM62 Manual 555

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
01966 O/C prot. stage I> is BLOCKED (I> O/C I> (with under- OUT ON ON LED BO 60 216 1 GI
BLOCKED) voltage seal-in) OF OFF
F
01967 O/C prot. stage I> is ACTIVE (I> O/C I> (with under- OUT ON * LED BO 60 217 1 GI
ACTIVE) voltage seal-in) OF
F
01970 O/C prot. undervoltage seal-in (U< O/C I> (with under- OUT * ON LED BO 60 220 2 GI
seal in) voltage seal-in) OFF
03953 >BLOCK impedance protection (>Imp. Impedance Protec- SP * * LED BI BO

BLOCK) tion
03956 >Zone 1B extension for impedance Impedance Protec- SP ON * LED BI BO 28 222 1 GI

prot. (>Extens. Z1B) tion OF
F
03958 >Imp. prot. : BLOCK undervoltage Impedance Protec- SP ON * LED BI BO 28 30 1 GI

seal-in (>Useal-in BLK) tion OF
F
03961 Impedance protection is switched OFF Impedance Protec- OUT ON * LED BO 28 226 1 GI
(Imp. OFF) tion OF
F
03962 Impedance protection is BLOCKED Impedance Protec- OUT ON ON LED BO 28 227 1 GI

(Imp. BLOCKED) tion OF OFF
F
03963 Impedance protection is ACTIVE (Imp. Impedance Protec- OUT ON * LED BO 28 228 1 GI
ACTIVE) tion OF
F
03966 Impedance protection picked up (Imp. Impedance Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 28 229 2 GI
picked up) tion OFF
03967 Imp.: Fault detection , phase L1 (Imp. Impedance Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 28 230 2 GI
Fault L1) tion OFF
Fault L2) tion OFF
Fault L3) tion OFF
03970 Imp.: O/C with undervoltage seal in Impedance Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 28 233 2 GI
(Imp. I> & U<) tion OFF
03976 Power swing detection (Power Swing) Impedance Protec- OUT * ON LED BO
tion OFF
03977 Imp.: Z1< TRIP (Imp.Z1< TRIP) Impedance Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 28 240 2 GI
tion
03978 Imp.: Z1B< TRIP (Imp.Z1B< TRIP) Impedance Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 28 241 2 GI
tion
03979 Imp.: Z2< TRIP (Imp. Z2< TRIP) Impedance Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 28 242 2 GI
tion
03980 Imp.: T3> TRIP (Imp.T3> TRIP) Impedance Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 28 243 2 GI
tion
04523 >Block external trip 1 (>BLOCK Ext 1) External Trip SP * * LED BI BO

Functions
556 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
04526 >Trigger external trip 1 (>Ext trip 1) External Trip SP ON * LED BI BO 51 126 1 GI
Functions OF
F
04531 External trip 1 is switched OFF (Ext 1 External Trip OUT ON * LED BO 51 131 1 GI
OFF) Functions OF
F
04532 External trip 1 is BLOCKED (Ext 1 External Trip OUT ON ON LED BO 51 132 1 GI
BLOCKED) Functions OF OFF
F
04533 External trip 1 is ACTIVE (Ext 1 External Trip OUT ON * LED BO 51 133 1 GI
ACTIVE) Functions OF
F
04536 External trip 1: General picked up (Ext External Trip OUT * ON LED BO 51 136 2 GI
1 picked up) Functions OFF
04537 External trip 1: General TRIP (Ext 1 External Trip OUT * ON LED BO 51 137 2 GI
Gen.TRP) Functions
04543 >BLOCK external trip 2 (>BLOCK Ext External Trip SP * * LED BI BO

2) Functions
Functions OF
F
OFF) Functions OF
F
F
F
Gen.TRP) Functions

3) Functions
Functions OF
F
OFF) Functions OF
F
F
F
7UM62 Manual 557

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
Gen.TRP) Functions

4) Functions
Functions OF
F
OFF) Functions OF
F
F
F
Gen.TRP) Functions
04822 >BLOCK Restart inhibit motor (>BLK Restart Inhibit for SP * * LED BI BO
Re. Inhib.) Motors
04823 >Emergency start rotor (>Emer. Start Restart Inhibit for SP ON * LED BI BO 168 51 1 GI
ΘR) Motors OF
F
04824 Restart inhibit motor is switched OFF Restart Inhibit for OUT ON * LED BO 168 52 1 GI
(Re. Inhibit OFF) Motors OF
F
04825 Restart inhibit motor is BLOCKED Restart Inhibit for OUT ON * LED BO 168 53 1 GI
(Re. Inhibit BLK) Motors OF
F
04826 Restart inhibit motor is ACTIVE (Re. Restart Inhibit for OUT ON * LED BO 168 54 1 GI
Inhibit ACT) Motors OF
F
04827 Restart inhibit motor TRIP (Re. Inhib. Restart Inhibit for OUT ON * LED BO 168 55 1 GI
TRIP) Motors
04828 >Reset thermal memory rotor (>RM Restart Inhibit for SP ON * LED BI BO
th.rep. ΘR) Motors OF
F
04829 Reset thermal memory rotor (RM Restart Inhibit for OUT ON * LED BO 168 50 1 GI
th.rep. ΘR) Motors OF
F
04830 Alarm restart inhibit motor (Re. Restart Inhibit for OUT ON * LED BO
Inhib.ALARM) Motors OF
F
558 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
05002 Suitable measured quantities present Power System Data OUT ON * LED BO 71 2 1 GI
(Operat. Cond.) 1 OF
F
05010 >BLOCK fuse failure monitor (>FFM Supervision SP ON ON LED BI BO 71 7 1 GI

BLOCK) OF OFF
F
05011 >FFM extern undervoltage (>FFM U< Supervision SP ON * LED BI BO 71 8 1 GI

extern) OF
F
05012 Voltage UL1E at trip (UL1E:) Power System Data OUT * ON 71 38 4

2 OFF

2 OFF

2 OFF
05015 Active power at trip (P:) Power System Data OUT * ON 71 41 4

2 OFF
05016 Reactive power at trip (Q:) Power System Data OUT * ON 71 42 4

2 OFF
05017 Frequency at trip (f:) Power System Data OUT * ON 71 43 4

2 OFF
05053 >BLOCK out-of-step protection Out-of-Step Protec- SP * * LED BI BO

(>BLOCK O/S) tion
05061 Out-of-step protection is switched Out-of-Step Protec- OUT ON * LED BI BO 70 56 1 GI

OFF (O/S OFF) tion OF
F
05062 Out-of-step protection is BLOCKED Out-of-Step Protec- OUT ON ON LED BO 70 57 1 GI

(O/S BLOCKED) tion OF OFF
F
05063 Out-of-step protection is ACTIVE (O/S Out-of-Step Protec- OUT ON * LED BO 70 58 1 GI

ACTIVE) tion OF
F
05067 Out-of-step pulse of characteristic 1 Out-of-Step Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 70 60 2 GI

(O/S char. 1) tion OFF
05068 Out-of-step pulse of characteristic 2 Out-of-Step Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 70 61 2 GI

(O/S char. 2) tion OFF
05069 Out-of-step characteristic 1 picked up Out-of-Step Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 70 62 2 GI

(O/S det. char.1) tion OFF
05070 Out-of-step characteristic 2 picked up Out-of-Step Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 70 63 2 GI

(O/S det. char.2) tion OFF
05071 Out-of-step TRIP characteristic 1 (O/S Out-of-Step Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 70 64 2 GI

TRIP char.1) tion
05072 Out-of-step TRIP characteristic 2 (O/S Out-of-Step Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 70 65 2 GI

TRIP char.2) tion
05083 >BLOCK reverse power protection Reverse Power SP * * LED BI BO

(>Pr BLOCK) Protection
7UM62 Manual 559

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
05086 >Stop valve tripped (>SV tripped) Reverse Power SP ON * LED BI BO 70 77 1 GI
Protection OF
F
05091 Reverse power prot. is switched OFF Reverse Power OUT ON * LED BO 70 81 1 GI
(Pr OFF) Protection OF
F
05092 Reverse power protection is BLOK- Reverse Power OUT ON ON LED BO 70 82 1 GI

KED (Pr BLOCKED) Protection OF OFF
F
05093 Reverse power protection is ACTIVE Reverse Power OUT ON * LED BO 70 83 1 GI

(Pr ACTIVE) Protection OF
F
05096 Reverse power: picked up (Pr picked Reverse Power OUT * ON LED BO 70 84 2 GI
up) Protection OFF
05097 Reverse power: TRIP (Pr TRIP) Reverse Power OUT * ON M LED BO 70 85 2 GI
Protection
05098 Reverse power: TRIP with stop valve Reverse Power OUT * ON M LED BO 70 86 2 GI
(Pr+SV TRIP) Protection
05113 >BLOCK forward power supervision Forward Power SP * * LED BI BO

(>Pf BLOCK) Supervision
05116 >BLOCK forw. power superv. Pf< Forward Power SP ON * LED BI BO 70 102 1 GI
stage (>Pf< BLOCK) Supervision OF
F
05117 >BLOCK forw. power superv. Pf> Forward Power SP ON * LED BI BO 70 103 1 GI
stage (>Pf> BLOCK) Supervision OF
F
05121 Forward power supervis. is switched Forward Power OUT ON * LED BO 70 106 1 GI
OFF (Pf OFF) Supervision OF
F
05122 Forward power supervision is BLOK- Forward Power OUT ON ON LED BO 70 107 1 GI
KED (Pf BLOCKED) Supervision OF OFF
F
05123 Forward power supervision is ACTIVE Forward Power OUT ON * LED BO 70 108 1 GI
(Pf ACTIVE) Supervision OF
F
05126 Forward power: Pf< stage picked up Forward Power OUT * ON LED BO 70 109 2 GI
(Pf< picked up) Supervision OFF
05127 Forward power: Pf> stage picked up Forward Power OUT * ON LED BO 70 110 2 GI
(Pf> picked up) Supervision OFF
05128 Forward power: Pf< stage TRIP (Pf< Forward Power OUT * ON M LED BO 70 111 2 GI
TRIP) Supervision
05129 Forward power: Pf> stage TRIP (Pf> Forward Power OUT * ON M LED BO 70 112 2 GI
TRIP) Supervision
05143 >BLOCK I2 (Unbalance Load) Unbalance Load SP * * LED BI BO

(>BLOCK I2) (Negative
Sequence)
560 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
05145 >Reverse Phase Rotation (>Reverse Power System Data SP ON * LED BI BO 71 34 1 GI
Rot.) 1 OF
F
05146 >Reset memory for thermal replica I2 Unbalance Load SP ON * LED BI BO

(>RM th.rep. I2) (Negative OF
Sequence) F
05147 Phase Rotation L1L2L3 (Rotation Power System Data OUT ON * LED BO 70 128 1 GI
L1L2L3) 1 OF
F
05148 Phase Rotation L1L3L2 (Rotation Power System Data OUT ON * LED BO 70 129 1 GI
L1L3L2) 1 OF
F
05151 I2 switched OFF (I2 OFF) Unbalance Load OUT ON * LED BO 70 131 1 GI
(Negative OF
Sequence) F
05152 I2 is BLOCKED (I2 BLOCKED) Unbalance Load OUT ON ON LED BO 70 132 1 GI

(Negative OF OFF
Sequence) F
05153 I2 is ACTIVE (I2 ACTIVE) Unbalance Load OUT ON * LED BO 70 133 1 GI

(Negative OF
Sequence) F
05156 Unbalanced load: Current warning Unbalance Load OUT ON * LED BO 70 134 1 GI
stage (I2> Warn) (Negative OF
Sequence) F
05158 Reset memory of thermal replica I2 Unbalance Load OUT ON * LED BO 70 137 1 GI
(RM th.rep. I2) (Negative OF
Sequence) F
05159 I2>> picked up (I2>> picked up) Unbalance Load OUT * ON LED BO 70 138 2 GI
(Negative OFF
Sequence)
05160 Unbalanced load: TRIP of current Unbalance Load OUT * ON M LED BO 70 139 2 GI
stage (I2>> TRIP) (Negative
Sequence)
05161 Unbalanced load: TRIP of thermal Unbalance Load OUT * ON LED BO 70 140 2 GI
stage (I2 Θ TRIP) (Negative
Sequence)
05165 I2> picked up (I2> picked up) Unbalance Load OUT * ON LED BO 70 150 2 GI
(Negative OFF
Sequence)
05173 >BLOCK stator earth fault protection Stator Earth Fault SP * * LED BI BO
(>S/E/F BLOCK) Protection
05176 >Switch off earth current detec.(S/E/F) Stator Earth Fault SP ON * LED BI BO 70 152 1 GI
(>S/E/F Iee off) Protection OF
F
05181 Stator earth fault prot. is switch OFF Stator Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 70 156 1 GI
(S/E/F OFF) Protection OF
F
05182 Stator earth fault protection is BLOCK. Stator Earth Fault OUT ON ON LED BO 70 157 1 GI
(S/E/F BLOCKED) Protection OF OFF
F
7UM62 Manual 561

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
05183 Stator earth fault protection is ACTIVE Stator Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 70 158 1 GI
(S/E/F ACTIVE) Protection OF
F
05186 Stator earth fault: U0 picked up (U0> Stator Earth Fault OUT * ON LED BO 70 159 2 GI
picked up) Protection OFF
05187 Stator earth fault: U0 stage TRIP (U0> Stator Earth Fault OUT * ON M LED BO 70 160 2 GI
TRIP) Protection
05188 Stator earth fault: I0 picked up (3I0> Stator Earth Fault OUT * ON LED BO 70 168 2 GI
picked up) Protection OFF
05189 Earth fault in phase L1 (Uearth L1) Stator Earth Fault OUT * ON LED BO 70 169 2 GI
Protection OFF
Protection OFF
Protection OFF
05193 Stator earth fault protection TRIP (S/E/ Stator Earth Fault OUT * ON M LED BO 70 173 2 GI
F TRIP) Protection
05194 Stator earth fault: direction forward Stator Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 70 174 1 GI
(SEF Dir Forward) Protection OF
F
05203 >BLOCK frequency protection Frequency Protec- SP * * LED BI BO

(>BLOCK Freq.) tion
05206 >BLOCK stage f1 (>BLOCK f1) Frequency Protec- SP ON * LED BI BO 70 177 1 GI

tion OF
F

tion OF
F

tion OF
F

tion OF
F
05211 Frequency protection is OFF (Freq. Frequency Protec- OUT ON * LED BO 70 181 1 GI
OFF) tion OF
F
05212 Frequency protection is BLOCKED Frequency Protec- OUT ON ON LED BO 70 182 1 GI

(Freq. BLOCKED) tion OF OFF
F
05213 Frequency protection is ACTIVE Frequency Protec- OUT ON * LED BO 70 183 1 GI

(Freq. ACTIVE) tion OF
F
05214 Frequency protection undervoltage Frequency Protec- OUT ON ON LED BO 70 184 1 GI

Blk (Freq UnderV Blk) tion OF OFF
F
05232 f1 picked up (f1 picked up) Frequency Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 70 230 2 GI
tion OFF
562 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
tion OFF
tion OFF
tion OFF
05236 f1 TRIP (f1 TRIP) Frequency Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 70 234 2 GI

tion

tion

tion

tion
05293 >BLOCK DC protection (>BLOCK DC DC Voltage/Cur- SP * * LED BI BO

Prot.) rent Protection
05301 DC protection is switched OFF (DC DC Voltage/Cur- OUT ON * LED BO 71 181 1 GI

Prot. OFF) rent Protection OF
F
05302 DC protection is BLOCKED (DC DC Voltage/Cur- OUT ON ON LED BO 71 182 1 GI

Prot.BLOCKED) rent Protection OF OFF
F
05303 DC protection is ACTIVE (DC Prot. DC Voltage/Cur- OUT ON * LED BO 71 183 1 GI

ACTIVE) rent Protection OF
F
05306 DC protection picked up (DC DC Voltage/Cur- OUT * ON LED BO 71 186 2 GI

Prot.pick.up) rent Protection OFF
05307 DC protection TRIP (DC Prot. TRIP) DC Voltage/Cur- OUT * ON LED BO 71 187 2 GI
rent Protection
05308 Failure DC protection (Failure DC DC Voltage/Cur- OUT ON * LED BO 71 184 1 GI

Prot) rent Protection OF
F
05323 >BLOCK underexcitation protection Underexcitation SP * * LED BI BO

(>Exc. BLOCK) Protection
05327 >BLOCK underexc. prot. char. 3 Underexcitation SP ON * LED BI BO 71 53 1 GI

(>Char. 3 BLK.) Protection OF
F
05328 >Exc. voltage failure recognized Underexcitation SP ON * LED BI BO 71 54 1 GI

(>Uexc fail.) Protection OF
F

F

F
7UM62 Manual 563

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
05331 Underexc. prot. is switched OFF Underexcitation OUT ON * LED BO 71 55 1 GI
(Excit. OFF) Protection OF
F
05332 Underexc. prot. is BLOCKED Underexcitation OUT ON ON LED BO 71 56 1 GI

(Excit.BLOCKED) Protection OF OFF
F
05333 Underexc. prot. is ACTIVE Underexcitation OUT ON * LED BO 71 57 1 GI

(Excit.ACTIVE) Protection OF
F
05334 Underexc. prot. blocked by U< (Exc. Underexcitation OUT ON ON LED BO 71 58 1 GI

U< blk) Protection OF OFF
F
05336 Exc. voltage failure recognized (Uexc Underexcitation OUT * ON LED BO 71 59 2 GI

failure) Protection OFF
05337 Underexc. prot. picked up (Exc< pik- Underexcitation OUT * ON LED BO 71 60 2 GI

ked up) Protection OFF
05343 Underexc. prot. char. 3 TRIP (Exc<3 Underexcitation OUT * ON M LED BO 71 63 2 GI

TRIP) Protection

TRIP) Protection

TRIP) Protection
05346 Underexc. prot. char.+Uexc< TRIP Underexcitation OUT * ON M LED BO 71 68 2 GI

(Exc<U<TRIP) Protection
05353 >BLOCK overexcitation protection Overexcitation Pro- SP * * LED BI BO

(>U/f BLOCK) tection (U/f)
05357 >Reset memory of thermal replica U/f Overexcitation Pro- SP ON * LED BI BO

(>RM th.rep. U/f) tection (U/f) OF
F
05361 Overexcitation prot. is swiched OFF Overexcitation Pro- OUT ON * LED BO 71 83 1 GI

(U/f> OFF) tection (U/f) OF
F
05362 Overexcitation prot. is BLOCKED (U/ Overexcitation Pro- OUT ON ON LED BO 71 84 1 GI

f> BLOCKED) tection (U/f) OF OFF
F
05363 Overexcitation prot. is ACTIVE (U/f> Overexcitation Pro- OUT ON * LED BO 71 85 1 GI

ACTIVE) tection (U/f) OF
F
05367 Overexc. prot.: U/f warning stage (U/f> Overexcitation Pro- OUT ON * LED BO 71 86 1 GI
warn) tection (U/f) OF
F
05369 Reset memory of thermal replica U/f Overexcitation Pro- OUT ON * LED BO 71 88 1 GI
(RM th.rep. U/f) tection (U/f) OF
F
05370 Overexc. prot.: U/f> picked up (U/f> Overexcitation Pro- OUT * ON LED BO 71 89 2 GI
picked up) tection (U/f) OFF
05371 Overexc. prot.: TRIP of U/f>> stage Overexcitation Pro- OUT * ON M LED BO 71 90 2 GI
(U/f>> TRIP) tection (U/f)
564 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
05372 Overexc. prot.: TRIP of th. stage (U/f> Overexcitation Pro- OUT * ON LED BO 71 91 2 GI
th.TRIP) tection (U/f)
05373 Overexc. prot.: U/f>> picked up (U/f>> Overexcitation Pro- OUT * ON LED BO 71 92 2 GI
pick.up) tection (U/f) OFF
05381 >BLOCK rotor earth fault prot. (1-3Hz) Rotor Earth Fault SP * * LED BI BO
(>REF 1-3Hz BLK) Protection (1-3Hz)
05383 >BLOCK rotor earth fault prot. (R,fn) Rotor Earth Fault SP * * LED BI BO
(>BLOCK R/E/F) Protection
05386 >Test rotor earth fault prot. (1-3Hz) Rotor Earth Fault SP ON * LED BI BO 71 116 1 GI
(>Test REF 1-3Hz) Protection (1-3Hz) OF
F
05387 REF protection (1-3Hz) is switched Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 71 117 1 GI
OFF (REF 1-3Hz OFF) Protection (1-3Hz) OF
F
05388 REF protection (1-3Hz) is BLOCKED Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON ON LED BO 71 118 1 GI
(REF 1-3Hz BLK) Protection (1-3Hz) OF OFF
F
05389 REF protection (1-3Hz) is ACTIVE Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 71 119 1 GI
(REF 1-3Hz ACT) Protection (1-3Hz) OF
F
05391 Rotor earth fault prot. (R,fn) swit. OFF Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 71 121 1 GI
(R/E/F OFF) Protection OF
F
05392 Rotor earth fault prot. (R,fn) BLOK- Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON ON LED BO 71 122 1 GI
KED (R/E/F BLOCKED) Protection OF OFF
F
05393 Rotor earth fault prot. (R,fn) is ACTIVE Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 71 123 1 GI
(R/E/F AKTIVE) Protection OF
F
05394 Rot. earth flt. prot. (R,fn) block by U< Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 71 124 1 GI
(R/E/F U< block) Protection OF
F
05395 REF protection (1-3Hz) open circuit Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 71 125 1 GI
(REF 1-3Hz open) Protection (1-3Hz) OF
F
05396 Failure R/E/F protection Iee< (Fail. Sensitive Earth OUT ON * LED BO 71 126 1 GI
REF Iee<) Current Protection OF
F
05397 Rot. earth flt.prot. (R,fn) Re< warning Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 71 127 1 GI
(R/E/F warning) Protection OF
F
05398 Rot. earth flt.prot. (R,fn) Re<< pick.up Rotor Earth Fault OUT * ON LED BO 71 128 2 GI
(R/E/F picked up) Protection OFF
05399 Rotor earth fault prot. (R,fn) Re<< Rotor Earth Fault OUT * ON M LED BO 71 129 2 GI
TRIP (R/E/F TRIP) Protection
05400 Failure rotor earth fault prot. (R,fn) Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 71 130 1 GI
(Failure R/E/F) Protection OF
F
7UM62 Manual 565

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
05401 Failure REF protection (1-3Hz) (Fail Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 71 131 1 GI
REF 1-3Hz) Protection (1-3Hz) OF
F
05403 REF prot. (1-3Hz): warning stage Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 71 133 1 GI
(Re<) (REF 1-3Hz Warn) Protection (1-3Hz) OF
F
05406 REF prot. (1-3Hz) Re<< picked up Rotor Earth Fault OUT * ON LED BO 71 136 2 GI
(REF 1-3Hz Fault) Protection (1-3Hz) OFF
05407 REF prot. (1-3Hz) Re<< TRIP (REF 1- Rotor Earth Fault OUT * ON LED BO 71 137 2 GI
3Hz Trip) Protection (1-3Hz)
05408 REF prot. (1-3Hz) test passed (Test Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 71 138 1 GI
REF PASSED) Protection (1-3Hz) OF
F
05409 REF prot. (1-3Hz) test NOT passed Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 71 139 1 GI
(Test REF Fail.) Protection (1-3Hz) OF
F
05410 REF (1-3Hz) 1 Measuring circuit open Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO
(1 Cir. open) Protection (1-3Hz) OF
F
05411 REF (1-3Hz) 2 Measuring circuits Rotor Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO
open (2 Cir. open) Protection (1-3Hz) OF
F
05473 >BLOCK Stator earth fault protection 100% Stator-Earth- SP * * LED BI BO

(>SEF100 BLOCK) Fault Protection
05476 >Failure 20Hz bias voltage (S/E/F) 100% Stator-Earth- SP ON * LED BI BO 71 227 1 GI
(>U20 failure) Fault Protection OF
F
05481 S/E/F 100% protection is switched 100% Stator-Earth- OUT ON * LED BO 71 228 1 GI
OFF (SEF100 OFF) Fault Protection OF
F
05482 Stator earth flt. prot. 100% is BLOK- 100% Stator-Earth- OUT ON ON LED BO 71 229 1 GI
KED (SEF100 BLOCKED) Fault Protection OF OFF
F
05483 Stator earth flt. prot. 100% is ACTIVE 100% Stator-Earth- OUT ON * LED BO 71 230 1 GI
(SEF100 ACTIVE) Fault Protection OF
F
05486 Failure stator earth flt. prot. 100% 100% Stator-Earth- OUT ON * LED BO 71 231 1 GI
(Failure SEF) Fault Protection OF
F
05487 Stator earth flt. prot.100% Alarm stage 100% Stator-Earth- OUT ON * LED BO 71 232 1 GI
(SEF100 Alarm) Fault Protection OF
F
05488 Stator earth flt. prot.100%: picked up 100% Stator-Earth- OUT * ON LED BO 71 233 2 GI
(SEF100 PICKUP) Fault Protection OFF
05489 Stator earth flt. prot.100%: TRIP 100% Stator-Earth- OUT * ON LED BO 71 234 2 GI
(SEF100 TRIP) Fault Protection
05503 >BLOCK Rate-of-frequency-change Rate-of-frequency- SP * * LED BI BO

prot. (>df/dt block) change protection
566 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
05504 >BLOCK df1/dt stage (>df1/dt block) Rate-of-frequency- SP ON * LED BI BO 72 1 1 GI
change protection OF
F

F

F

F
05511 df/dt is switched OFF (df/dt OFF) Rate-of-frequency- OUT ON * LED BO 72 5 1 GI

F
05512 df/dt is BLOCKED (df/dt BLOCKED) Rate-of-frequency- OUT ON ON LED BO 72 6 1 GI

change protection OF OFF
F
05513 df/dt is ACTIVE (df/dt ACTIVE) Rate-of-frequency- OUT ON * LED BO 72 7 1 GI

F
05514 df/dt is blocked by undervoltage (df/dt Rate-of-frequency- OUT ON ON LED BO 72 8 1 GI

U< block) change protection OF OFF
F
05516 Stage df1/dt picked up (df1/dt pickup) Rate-of-frequency- OUT * ON LED BO 72 9 2 GI

change protection OFF



05520 Stage df1/dt TRIP (df1/dt TRIP) Rate-of-frequency- OUT * ON LED BO 72 13 2 GI

change protection

change protection

change protection

change protection
05533 >BLOCK inadvertent energ. prot. Inadvertent Energi- SP * * LED BI BO

(>BLOCK I.En.) sation
05541 Inadvert. Energ. prot. is swiched OFF Inadvertent Energi- OUT ON * LED BO 72 31 1 GI
(I.En. OFF) sation OF
F
05542 Inadvert. Energ. prot. is BLOCKED Inadvertent Energi- OUT ON ON LED BO 72 32 1 GI

(I.En. BLOCKED) sation OF OFF
F
7UM62 Manual 567

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
05543 Inadvert. Energ. prot. is ACTIVE (I.En. Inadvertent Energi- OUT ON * LED BO 72 33 1 GI
ACTIVE) sation OF
F
05546 Release of the current stage (I.En. Inadvertent Energi- OUT ON * LED BO 72 34 1 GI
release) sation OF
F
05547 Inadvert. Energ. prot.: picked up (I.En. Inadvertent Energi- OUT * ON LED BO 72 35 2 GI
picked up) sation OFF
05548 Inadvert. Energ. prot.: TRIP (I.En. Inadvertent Energi- OUT * ON M LED BO 72 36 2 GI
TRIP) sation
05553 >BLOCK SEF with 3.Harmonic (>SEF Stator Earth Fault SP * * LED BI BO
3H BLOCK) Protection
3rdHarm.
05561 SEF with 3.Harm. is switched OFF Stator Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 72 51 1 GI
(SEF 3H OFF) Protection OF
3rdHarm. F
05562 SEF with 3.Harm. is BLOCKED (SEF Stator Earth Fault OUT ON ON LED BO 72 52 1 GI
3H BLOCK) Protection OF OFF
3rdHarm. F
05563 SEF with 3.Harm. is ACTIVE (SEF 3H Stator Earth Fault OUT ON * LED BO 72 53 1 GI
3rdHarm. F
05567 SEF with 3.Harm.: picked up (SEF 3H Stator Earth Fault OUT * ON LED BO 72 54 2 GI
pick.up) Protection OFF
3rdHarm.
05568 SEF with 3.Harm.: TRIP (SEF 3H Stator Earth Fault OUT * ON M LED BO 72 55 2 GI
TRIP) Protection
3rdHarm.
05571 >BLOCK startup O/C protection Startup O/C protec- SP * * LED BI BO

(>BLOCK O/C St) tion
05572 Startup O/C protection is switched Startup O/C protec- OUT ON * LED BO 72 62 1 GI
OFF (O/C Start OFF) tion OF
F
05573 Startup O/C protection is BLOCKED Startup O/C protec- OUT ON ON LED BO 72 63 1 GI
(O/C Start BLK) tion OF OFF
F
05574 Startup O/C protection is ACTIVE (O/ Startup O/C protec- OUT ON * LED BO 72 64 1 GI
C Start ACT) tion OF
F
05575 Startup O/C phase L1 picked up (O/C Startup O/C protec- OUT * ON LED BO 72 65 2 GI
Start L1 PU) tion OFF
05578 Startup O/C protection TRIP (O/C Startup O/C protec- OUT * ON LED BO 72 68 2 GI
Start TRIP) tion
568 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
05581 >BLOCK Vector Jump (>VEC JUMP Jump of Voltage SP * * LED BI BO
block) Vector
05582 Vector Jump is switched OFF (VEC Jump of Voltage OUT ON * LED BO 72 72 1 GI
JUMP OFF) Vector OF
F
05583 Vector Jump is BLOCKED (VEC JMP Jump of Voltage OUT ON ON LED BO 72 73 1 GI
BLOCKED) Vector OF OFF
F
05584 Vector Jump is ACTIVE (VEC JUMP Jump of Voltage OUT ON * LED BO 72 74 1 GI
ACTIVE) Vector OF
F
05585 Vector Jump not in measurement Jump of Voltage OUT ON * LED BO 72 75 1 GI

range (VEC JUMP Range) Vector OF
F
05586 Vector Jump picked up (VEC JUMP Jump of Voltage OUT * ON LED BO 72 76 2 GI
pickup) Vector OFF
05587 Vector Jump TRIP (VEC JUMP TRIP) Jump of Voltage OUT * ON LED BO 72 77 2 GI
Vector
05603 >BLOCK differential protection (>Diff Differential Protec- SP * * LED BI BO

BLOCK) tion
05615 Differential protection is switched OFF Differential Protec- OUT ON * LED BO 75 15 1 GI

(Diff OFF) tion OF
F
05616 Differential protection is BLOCKED Differential Protec- OUT ON ON LED BO 75 16 1 GI

(Diff BLOCKED) tion OF OFF
F
05617 Differential protection is ACTIVE (Diff Differential Protec- OUT ON * LED BO 75 17 1 GI

ACTIVE) tion OF
F
05620 Diff: adverse Adaption factor CT (Diff Differential Protec- OUT ON * LED BO
Adap.fact.) tion
05631 Differential protection picked up (Diff Differential Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 75 31 2 GI

picked up) tion OFF
05644 Diff: Blocked by 2.Harmon. L1 (Diff Differential Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 75 44 2 GI

2.Harm L1) tion OFF

2.Harm L2) tion OFF

2.Harm L3) tion OFF
05647 Diff: Blocked by n.Harmon. L1 (Diff Differential Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 75 47 2 GI

n.Harm L1) tion OFF

n.Harm L2) tion OFF

n.Harm L3) tion OFF
05651 Diff. prot.: Blocked by ext. fault L1 (Diff Differential Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 75 51 2 GI
Bl. exF.L1) tion OFF
7UM62 Manual 569

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
05652 Diff. prot.: Blocked by ext. fault L2 (Diff Differential Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 75 52 2 GI
05653 Diff. prot.: Blocked by ext. fault.L3 (Diff Differential Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 75 53 2 GI
05657 Diff: Crossblock by 2.Harmonic Differential Protec- OUT * ON LED BO

(DiffCrosBlk2HM) tion OFF
05658 Diff: Crossblock by n.Harmonic (Diff- Differential Protec- OUT * ON LED BO

CrosBlknHM) tion OFF
05666 Diff: Increase of char. phase L1 (Diff Differential Protec- OUT ON ON LED BO
in.char.L1) tion OF OFF
F
F
F
05670 Diff: Curr-Release for Trip (Diff I- Differential Protec- OUT * ON LED BO
Release) tion OFF
05671 Differential protection TRIP (Diff TRIP) Differential Protec- OUT * * LED BO 75 71 1 GI
tion
05672 Differential protection: TRIP L1 (Diff Differential Protec- OUT * * LED BO 75 72 1 GI

TRIP L1) tion

TRIP L2) tion

TRIP L3) tion
05681 Diff. prot.: IDIFF> L1 (without Tdelay) Differential Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 75 81 2 GI
(Diff> L1) tion OFF
(Diff> L2) tion OFF
(Diff> L3) tion OFF
05684 Diff. prot: IDIFF>> L1 (without Tdelay) Differential Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 75 84 2 GI
(Diff>> L1) tion OFF
05691 Differential prot.: TRIP by IDIFF> Differential Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 75 91 2 GI

(Diff> TRIP) tion
05692 Differential prot.: TRIP by IDIFF>> Differential Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 75 92 2 GI

(Diff>> TRIP) tion
05701 Diff. current in phase L1 at trip (Diff Differential Protec- OUT * ON 75 101 4
L1:) tion OFF
570 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
L2:) tion OFF
L3:) tion OFF
05704 Restr. current in phase L1 at trip (Res Differential Protec- OUT * ON 75 104 4
L1:) tion OFF
L2:) tion OFF
L3:) tion OFF
05713 Diff. prot: Adaptation factor CT side 1 Differential Protec- OUT ON

(Diff CT-S1:) tion OF
F
05714 Diff. prot: Adaptation factor CT side 2 Differential Protec- OUT ON

(Diff CT-S2:) tion OF
F
05803 >BLOCK restricted earth fault prot. Restricted Earth SP * * LED BI BO

(>BLOCK REF) Fault Protection
05811 Restricted earth fault is switched OFF Restricted Earth OUT ON * LED BO 76 11 1 GI
(REF OFF) Fault Protection OF
F
05812 Restricted earth fault is BLOCKED Restricted Earth OUT ON ON LED BO 76 12 1 GI

(REF BLOCKED) Fault Protection OF OFF
F
05813 Restricted earth fault is ACTIVE (REF Restricted Earth OUT ON * LED BO 76 13 1 GI
ACTIVE) Fault Protection OF
F
05817 REF protection picked up (REF picked Restricted Earth OUT * ON LED BO 76 17 2 GI
up) Fault Protection OFF
05821 REF protection TRIP (REF TRIP) Restricted Earth OUT * ON LED BO 76 21 2 GI
Fault Protection
05836 REF: adverse Adaption factor CT Restricted Earth OUT ON * LED BO

(REF Adap.fact.) Fault Protection
05840 REF is blocked by phase current (REF Restricted Earth OUT ON * LED BO 76 40 1 GI
I> blocked) Fault Protection OF
F
05841 REF Release by U0> (REF U0> Restricted Earth OUT ON * LED BO 76 41 1 GI
releas.) Fault Protection OF
F
05847 I0-Diff at REF-Trip (I0-Diff:) Restricted Earth OUT * ON 76 47 4

Fault Protection OFF
05848 I0-Restraint at REF-Trip (I0-Res:) Restricted Earth OUT * ON 76 48 4

Fault Protection OFF
06503 >BLOCK undervoltage protection Undervoltage Pro- SP * * LED BI BO

(>BLOCK U/V) tection
7UM62 Manual 571

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
06506 >BLOCK undervoltage protection U< Undervoltage Pro- SP ON * LED BI BO 74 6 1 GI
(>BLOCK U<) tection OF
F
06508 >BLOCK undervoltage protection U<< Undervoltage Pro- SP ON * LED BI BO 74 8 1 GI

(>BLOCK U<<) tection OF
F
06513 >BLOCK overvoltage protection Overvoltage Protec- SP * * LED BI BO

(>BLOCK O/V) tion
06516 >BLOCK overvoltage protection U> Overvoltage Protec- SP ON * LED BI BO 74 20 1 GI

(>BLOCK U>) tion OF
F
06517 >BLOCK overvoltage protection U>> Overvoltage Protec- SP ON * LED BI BO 74 21 1 GI

(>BLOCK U>>) tion OF
F
06520 >BLOCK inverse undervoltage protec- Inverse Undervol- SP * * LED BI BO

tion (>BLOCK Up<) tage Protection
06522 Inv. Undervoltage prot. is switched Inverse Undervol- OUT ON * LED BO 74 95 1 GI

OFF (Up< OFF) tage Protection OF
F
06523 Inv. Undervoltage protection is BLOK- Inverse Undervol- OUT ON ON LED BO 74 96 1 GI

KED (Up< BLOCK) tage Protection OF OFF
F
06524 Inv. Undervoltage protection is Inverse Undervol- OUT ON * LED BO 74 97 1 GI

ACTIVE (Up< ACTIVE) tage Protection OF
F
06525 Inverse Undervoltage Up< picked up Inverse Undervol- OUT * ON LED BO 74 98 2 GI

(Up< picked up) tage Protection OFF
06526 Inv. Undervoltage Up<-char. picked up Inverse Undervol- OUT * ON LED BO 74 99 2 GI

(Up< ch. pick.up) tage Protection OFF
06527 Inverse Undervoltage Up< TRIP (Up< Inverse Undervol- OUT * ON LED BO 74 100 2 GI
AUS) tage Protection
06530 Undervoltage protection switched OFF Undervoltage Pro- OUT ON * LED BO 74 30 1 GI

(Undervolt. OFF) tection OF
F
06531 Undervoltage protection is BLOCKED Undervoltage Pro- OUT ON ON LED BO 74 31 1 GI

(Undervolt. BLK) tection OF OFF
F
06532 Undervoltage protection is ACTIVE Undervoltage Pro- OUT ON * LED BO 74 32 1 GI

(Undervolt. ACT) tection OF
F
06533 Undervoltage U< picked up (U< pik- Undervoltage Pro- OUT * ON LED BO 74 33 2 GI
ked up) tection OFF
06537 Undervoltage U<< picked up (U<< pik- Undervoltage Pro- OUT * ON LED BO 74 37 2 GI
ked up) tection OFF
06539 Undervoltage U< TRIP (U< TRIP) Undervoltage Pro- OUT * ON M LED BO 74 39 2 GI
tection
06540 Undervoltage U<< TRIP (U<< TRIP) Undervoltage Pro- OUT * ON M LED BO 74 40 2 GI
tection
572 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
06565 Overvoltage protection switched OFF Overvoltage Protec- OUT ON * LED BO 74 65 1 GI
(Overvolt. OFF) tion OF
F
06566 Overvoltage protection is BLOCKED Overvoltage Protec- OUT ON ON LED BO 74 66 1 GI

(Overvolt. BLK) tion OF OFF
F
06567 Overvoltage protection is ACTIVE Overvoltage Protec- OUT ON * LED BO 74 67 1 GI

(Overvolt. ACT) tion OF
F
06568 Overvoltage U> picked up (U> picked Overvoltage Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 74 68 2 GI
up) tion OFF
06570 Overvoltage U> TRIP (U> TRIP) Overvoltage Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 74 70 2 GI
tion
06571 Overvoltage U>> picked up (U>> pik- Overvoltage Protec- OUT * ON LED BO 74 71 2 GI
ked up) tion OFF
06573 Overvoltage U>> TRIP (U>> TRIP) Overvoltage Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 74 73 2 GI
tion
06575 Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure (VT Supervision OUT ON * LED BO 74 74 1 GI

Fuse Failure) OF
F
06801 >BLOCK Motor Starting Supervision Motor Starting Time SP * * LED BI BO

(>BLK START-SUP) Supervision
06805 >Rotor is locked (>Rotor locked) Motor Starting Time SP ON * LED BI BO

Supervision OF
F
06811 Starting time supervision switched Motor Starting Time OUT ON * LED BO 169 51 1 GI
OFF (START-SUP OFF) Supervision OF
F
06812 Starting time supervision is BLOCKED Motor Starting Time OUT ON ON LED BO 169 52 1 GI
(START-SUP BLK) Supervision OF OFF
F
06813 Starting time supervision is ACTIVE Motor Starting Time OUT ON * LED BO 169 53 1 GI
(START-SUP ACT) Supervision OF
F
06821 Starting time supervision TRIP Motor Starting Time OUT * ON LED BO 169 54 2 GI
(START-SUP TRIP) Supervision
06822 Rotor is LOCKED after Locked Rotor Motor Starting Time OUT * ON LED BO 169 55 2 GI
Time (Rotor locked) Supervision
06823 Starting time supervision picked up Motor Starting Time OUT ON * LED BO 169 56 1 GI
(START-SUP PU) Supervision OF
F
06851 >BLOCK Trip circuit supervision Trip Circuit Supervi- SP * * LED BI BO

(>BLOCK TripC) sion
06852 >Trip circuit supervision: trip relay Trip Circuit Supervi- SP ON * LED BI BO 170 51 1 GI
(>TripC trip rel) sion OF
F
7UM62 Manual 573

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
06853 >Trip circuit supervision: breaker relay Trip Circuit Supervi- SP ON * LED BI BO 170 52 1 GI
(>TripC brk rel.) sion OF
F
06861 Trip circuit supervision OFF (TripC Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT ON * LED BO 170 53 1 GI
OFF) sion OF
F
06862 Trip circuit supervision is BLOCKED Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT ON ON LED BO 153 16 1 GI
(TripC BLOCKED) sion OF OFF
F
06863 Trip circuit supervision is ACTIVE Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT ON * LED BO 153 17 1 GI
(TripC ACTIVE) sion OF
F
06864 Trip Circuit blk. Bin. input is not set Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT ON * LED BO 170 54 1 GI
(TripC ProgFail) sion OF
F
06865 Failure Trip Circuit (FAIL: Trip cir.) Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT ON * LED BO 170 55 1 GI
sion OF
F
07960 Measured Value MV1> picked up Threshold supervi- OUT * * LED BO

(Meas. Value1>) sion
07961 Measured Value MV2< picked up Threshold supervi- OUT * * LED BO

(Meas. Value2<) sion




14101 Fail: RTD (broken wire/shorted) (Fail: RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

RTD) OF
F
14111 Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/shorted) RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

(Fail: RTD 1) OF
F
14112 RTD 1 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

(RTD 1 St.1 p.up) OF
F

F

(Fail: RTD 2) OF
F

F
574 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
F

(Fail: RTD 3) OF
F

F

F

(Fail: RTD 4) OF
F

F

F

(Fail: RTD 5) OF
F

F

F

(Fail: RTD 6) OF
F

F

F

(Fail: RTD 7) OF
F

F

F
7UM62 Manual 575

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
(Fail: RTD 8) OF
F

F

F

(Fail: RTD 9) OF
F

F

F
14201 Fail: RTD10 (broken wire/shorted) RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

(Fail: RTD10) OF
F
14202 RTD10 Temperature stage 1 picked RTD-Box OUT ON * LED BO

up (RTD10 St.1 p.up) OF
F

F

(Fail: RTD11) OF
F

F

F

(Fail: RTD12) OF
F

F

F
30607 Accumulation of interrupted curr. L1 Statistics OUT

S1 (ΣIL1 S1:)

S1 (ΣIL2 S1:)
576 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

of
Infor-
matio
n

Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
S1 (ΣIL3 S1:)

S2 (ΣIL1 S2:)

S2 (ΣIL2 S2:)

S2 (ΣIL3 S2:)
>Back Light on (>Light on) Device SP ON * LED BI BO

OF
F
Clock Synchronization (SynchClock) Device IntSP_ * * LED BO

Ev
Control Authority (Cntrl Auth) Control Authoriza- IntSP ON * LED 101 85 1 GI

tion OF
F
Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLOCAL) Control Authoriza- IntSP ON * LED 101 86 1 GI

tion OF
F
Controlmode REMOTE (ModeRE- Control Authoriza- IntSP ON * LED

MOTE) tion OF
F
Error Systeminterface (SysIntErr.) Protocol IntSP ON * LED BO

OF
F
Fault Recording Start (FltRecSta) Oscillographic Fault IntSP ON * LED BO

Records OF
F
Group A (Group A) Change Group IntSP ON * LED BO 70 23 1 GI

OF
F
Group B (Group B) Change Group IntSP ON * LED BO 70 24 1 GI

OF
F
Hardware Test Mode (HWTestMod) Device IntSP ON * LED BO

OF
F
Stop data transmission (DataStop) Device IntSP ON * LED BO 70 20 1 GI

OF
F
Test mode (Test mode) Device IntSP ON * LED BO 70 21 1 GI

OF
F
Unlock data transmission via BI Device IntSP

(UnlockDT)
7UM62 Manual 577

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A.14 List of Measured Values
F.No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
00605 I1 (positive sequence) (I1 =) Measure- 134 147 priv 9 5 CFC CD DD
ment
00606 I2 (negative sequence) (I2 =) Measure- 134 147 priv 9 6 CFC CD DD

ment
00621 U L1-E (UL1E=) Measure- 134 147 priv 9 7 CFC CD DD

ment

ment

ment
00624 U L12 (UL12=) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment

ment

ment
00627 Displacement voltage UE (UE =) Measure- 134 147 priv 9 10 CFC CD DD

ment
00629 U1 (positive sequence) (U1 =) Measure- 134 147 priv 9 11 CFC CD DD

ment
00630 U2 (negative sequence) (U2 =) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00639 UE 3rd Harmonic Voltage Minimum (UE3h min=) Min/Max CFC CD DD

Measure-
ment
Setup
00640 UE 3rd Harmonic Voltage Maximum (UE3h Min/Max CFC CD DD

max=) Measure-
ment
Setup
00641 P (active power) (P =) Measure- 134 147 priv 9 12 CFC CD DD

ment
00642 Q (reactive power) (Q =) Measure- 134 147 priv 9 13 CFC CD DD

ment
00644 Frequency (Freq=) Measure- 134 147 priv 9 15 CFC CD DD

ment
00645 S (apparent power) (S =) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00650 UE 3rd harmonic (UE3h =) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00660 Remaining Time for Switch ON (T Rem.=) Thermal CFC CD DD

Measure-
ment
00661 Threshold of Restart Inhibit (Θ REST. =) Thermal CFC CD DD

Measure-
ment
578 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
00662 DC Current (I DC =) Measure- CFC CD DD
ment
00693 REF(R,fn): Total Resistance (R total) (Rtot =) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00696 REF(R,fn): Total Reactance (X total) (Xtot =) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00697 REF(R,fn): Phase Angle of Z total (ϕ Ztot=) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00700 REF(R,fn): Fault Resistance (R earth) (Re =) Measure- 134 148 priv 9 5 CFC CD DD
ment
00721 Operat. meas. current L1 side 1 [%] is (IL1S1=) Measure- 134 148 priv 9 1 CFC CD DD
ment
ment
ment
ment
ment
ment
00755 REF(1-3Hz): Freq. of square-wave gen. (fgen =) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00757 REF(1-3Hz): Volt. of square-wave gen. (Ugen =) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00758 REF(1-3Hz): Curr. of rotor meas. circuit (Imeas. Measure- CFC CD DD

=) ment
00759 REF(1-3 Hz): Charge at polarity rev.(Qc) (Qc =) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00760 SEF100%: Prim. stator earth resistance Measure- CFC CD DD

(RSEFp=) ment
00761 REF(1-3Hz): Fault Resistance (R earth) (R Measure- 134 148 priv 9 6 CFC CD DD
earth=) ment
00762 SEF100%: Bias volt. for stator circuit (U SEF=) Measure- CFC CD DD
ment
00763 SEF100%: Earth curr. in stator circuit (I SEF=) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00764 SEF100%: Stator earth resistance (R SEF=) Measure- 134 148 priv 9 7 CFC CD DD
ment
00765 (U/Un) / (f/fn) (U/f =) Measure- 134 147 priv 9 16 CFC CD DD

ment
00766 Calculated temperature (U/f) (U/f th. =) Thermal CFC CD DD

Measure-
ment
00801 Temperat. rise for warning and trip (Θ /Θtrip =) Thermal CFC CD DD
Measure-
ment
7UM62 Manual 579

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
00802 Temperature rise for phase L1 (Θ /ΘtripL1=) Thermal CFC CD DD
Measure-
ment

Measure-
ment

Measure-
ment
00805 Temperature of Rotor (ΘR/ΘRmax =) Thermal CFC CD DD

Measure-
ment
00828 Senstive Earth Current 1 (IEE1=) Measure- 134 148 priv 9 4 CFC CD DD
ment
00829 Senstive Earth Current 2 (IEE2=) Measure- 134 147 priv 9 4 CFC CD DD
ment
00831 3I0 (zero sequence) (3I0 =) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00832 U0 (zero sequence) (U0 =) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00857 Positive Sequence Minimum (I1 Min=) Min/Max CFC CD DD

Measure-
ment
Setup
00858 Positive Sequence Maximum (I1 Max=) Min/Max CFC CD DD

Measure-
ment
Setup
00874 U1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum (U1 Min Min/Max CFC CD DD

=) Measure-
ment
Setup
00875 U1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum (U1 Min/Max CFC CD DD

Max =) Measure-
ment
Setup
00876 Active Power Minimum (PMin=) Min/Max CFC CD DD

Measure-
ment
Setup
00877 Active Power Maximum (PMax=) Min/Max CFC CD DD

Measure-
ment
Setup
00878 Reactive Power Minimum (QMin=) Min/Max CFC CD DD

Measure-
ment
Setup
00879 Reactive Power Maximum (QMax=) Min/Max CFC CD DD

Measure-
ment
Setup
00882 Frequency Minimum (fMin=) Min/Max CFC CD DD

Measure-
ment
Setup
580 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
00883 Frequency Maximum (fMax=) Min/Max CFC CD DD
Measure-
ment
Setup
00888 Pulsed Energy Wp (active) (Wp(puls)) Energy CD DD
00889 Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) (Wq(puls)) Energy CD DD
00894 DC voltage (U DC =) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00896 REF(R,fn): Injected Voltage (U RE) (U RE =) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00897 REF(R,fn): Curr. in the Circuit (I RE) (I RE =) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00901 Power Factor (PF =) Measure- 134 147 priv 9 14 CFC CD DD

ment
00902 Power angle (PHI=) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00903 Resistance (R=) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00904 Reactance (X=) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00909 Excitation voltage (Uexcit.=) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00910 Calculated rotor temp. (unbal. load) (Therm- Thermal CFC CD DD

Rep.=) Measure-
ment
00911 Cooling medium temperature (AMB.TEMP =) Thermal CFC CD DD

Measure-
ment
00924 Wp Forward (Wp+=) Energy CD DD
00925 Wq Forward (Wq+=) Energy CD DD
00928 Wp Reverse (Wp-=) Energy CD DD
00929 Wq Reverse (Wq-=) Energy CD DD
00995 SEF100%: Phase angle in stator circuit (ϕ SEF=) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment
00996 Transducer 1 (Td1=) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment

ment

ment
01068 Temperature of RTD 1 (Θ RTD 1 =) Thermal 134 146 priv 9 1 CFC CD DD

Measure-
ment

Measure-
ment

Measure-
ment
7UM62 Manual 581

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
Measure-
ment

Measure-
ment

Measure-
ment

Measure-
ment

Measure-
ment

Measure-
ment
01077 Temperature of RTD10 (Θ RTD10 =) Thermal 134 146 priv 9 10 CFC CD DD

Measure-
ment

Measure-
ment

Measure-
ment
07740 Phase angle in phase IL1 side 1 (ϕIL1S1=) Measure- CFC CD DD

ment

ment
07742 IDiffL1(I/Inominal object [%]) (IDiffL1=) Diff- and CFC CD DD

Rest.
Measure-
ment

Rest.
Measure-
ment

Rest.
Measure-
ment
07745 IRestL1(I/Inominal object [%]) (IRestL1=) Diff- and CFC CD DD

Rest.
Measure-
ment

Rest.
Measure-
ment

Rest.
Measure-
ment
582 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
ment

ment

ment

ment
30654 I0-Diff REF (I/Inominal object [%]) (I0-Diff=) Diff- and CFC DD
Rest.
Measure-
ment
30655 I0-Rest REF (I/Inominal object [%]) (I0-Rest=) Diff- and CFC DD
Rest.
Measure-
ment
30659 3I0-1 REF (I/Inominal object [%]) (3I0-1 =) Diff- and CFC DD
Rest.
Measure-
ment
30660 3I0-2 REF (I/Inominal object [%]) (3I0-2 =) Diff- and CFC DD
Rest.
Measure-
ment
IL< under current (IL<) Set Points CFC CD DD

(Measu-
red
Values)
Number of TRIPs (#of TRIPs=) Statistics CD DD
Operating hours greater than (OpHour>) CD DD
7UM62 Manual 583

C53000-G1176-C149-3
A Appendix
A.15 Protocol-Dependent Functions
Protocol → IEC 60870–5–103 Profibus DP DNP3.0 Modbus ASCII/RTU Additional inter-

face
Function ß (optional)
Operational measured Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

values
Metered values Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fault recording Yes No. Only via addi- No. Only via additional Yes
tional service inter- service interface
face
Remote relay setting No. Only via addi- No. Only via addi- No. Only via addi- No. Only via additional Yes
tional service inter- tional service inter- tional service inter- service interface
face face face
User-defined messages Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

and switching objects
Time synchronization Via protocol; Via DCF77/IRIG B; Via protocol; Via DCF77/IRIG B; –
DCF77/IRIG B; Interface; DCF77/IRIG B; Interface;
Interface; Binary input; Interface; Binary input;
Binary input protocol Binary input protocol
Messages with time stamp Yes No Yes No Yes
Commissioning aids
• Measured value indica- Yes No No No Yes
tion blocking
• Creating test messag- Yes No No No Yes
es
Physical mode Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous –
Transmission mode Cyclically/Event Cyclically Cyclically/Event Cyclically –
Baudrate 4800 to 38400 Up to 1.5 MBaud 4800 to 19200 2400 to 19200 4800 to 115200
Type RS232 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS232

RS485 Optical fibre Optical fibre Optical fibre RS485
Optical fibre • Double ring
584 7UM62 Manual

C53000-G1176-C149-3
Corrections
To From
Siemens AG Name:
Dept. PTD PA D DM
D–13623 Berlin Company/Dept.:
Germany
Address:
Dear reader,
printing errors can never be entirely eliminated:
therefore, should you come across any when read- Phone no.: Fax no.:
ing this manual, kindly enter them in this form to-
gether with any comments or suggestions for im-
provement that you may have.
Corrections/Suggestions
7UM62 Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-3
Copying of this document and giving it to others and the use
or communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden with-
out express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of
damages. All rights are reserved in the event of the grant of
Subject to technical alteration a patent or the registration of a utility model or design.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order-no.: C53000-G1176-C149-3

Available from: LZF Fürth-Bislohe
Printed in Germany/Imprimé en Allemagne
AG 0702 0.1 FO 600 En

7UM62 Iec

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7UM62 Iec

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Manual No. C53000-G1176-C149-3

Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, personnel concerned with

This product is UL–certified with the data as stated in Section 4.1:

IND. CONT. EQ. IND. CONT. EQ.

The following symbols are used in diagrams:

GND Fault device-internal (logical) input signal

GND Fault device-internal (logical) input signal

IL1 internal input signal of an analog quantity

Input signal of an analog quantity

& AND gate

7UM62 Manual iii

Input signals of dynamic quantity

Formation of one output signal from a number

Limit stage with parameter address and

T 0 Timer (pick up delayed) with parameter address

Dynamic triggered pulse timer (monoflop)

S Q Static memory (RS–flipflop) with setting input (S),

1.1 Overall Operation ................................................................................................................... 2

1.2 Applications ............................................................................................................................ 5

1.3 Features ................................................................................................................................. 7

2.1 Introduction, Reference Power System ................................................................................ 16

2.2 Functional Scope.................................................................................................................. 18

2.3 Power System Data 1........................................................................................................... 27

2.4 Setting Groups ..................................................................................................................... 35

2.5 Power System Data 2........................................................................................................... 36

2.6 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51)

2.7 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67)

2.7.2 Setting Hints ......................................................................................................................... 44

2.8 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) ................................................................ 48

2.9 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) ............................................................................... 55

2.10 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46)............................................. 65

2.11 Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) ............................................................................ 71

2.12 Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T)......................................................................... 75

2.13 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN, TN)........................................................ 98

2.14 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40)......................................................... 106

2.15 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R)............................................................................... 115

2.15.2.1 Settings of the Reverse Power Protection.......................................................................... 117

2.16 Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F).................................................................. 119

2.17 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21)........................................................................................ 122

2.18 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) ....................................................................................... 137

2.19 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) .................................................................................... 148

2.20 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) ...................................................................................... 151

2.21 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81)......................................................................................... 154

2.22 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) ............................................................... 159

2.23 Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) .............................................................. 164

7UM62 Manual vii

2.23.1 Functional Description ........................................................................................................ 164

2.24 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) ................................................... 167

2.25 Jump of Voltage Vector ...................................................................................................... 172

2.27 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R)........................................................... 185

2.28 100–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics

2.30 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) ................................................................... 201

2.31 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square

viii 7UM62 Manual

2.32 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) ....................................................................... 213

2.33 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor)..................................................................... 217

2.34 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) ............................................................................ 225

2.35 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27).............................................................................. 230

2.36 DC Voltage/DC Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC) ............................................... 234

2.37 Analog Outputs................................................................................................................... 239

2.38 Measured Value Monitoring Functions ............................................................................... 241